SERVICE MANUAL

CODE: 00ZMX2700/S1E

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

MX-2300/2700 G
MODEL MX-2300/2700 N
CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i ● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
* For how to unpacking and installation,
refer to the installation manual
(00ZMX2700/I1E).
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE
CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] ROM VERSION-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[C] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
[D] MANUAL PAPER FEED
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
[E] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION . . . .E-1
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . .F-1
[G] DUPLEX SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
[H] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
[i] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . . i-1
[J] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . J-1
[K] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . .K-1
[L] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
[M] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR,
REGISTRATION SENSOR
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
[N] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[O] PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[R] FAN AND FILTER SECTION . . . . . R-1
[S] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION . . . . .S-1

Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
 CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
1. Precautions for servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
2. Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2. Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
3. Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3. Production number identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
* For how to unpacking and installation,
refer to the installation manual (00ZMX2700/I1E).
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . . .5-1
[6] ADJUSTMENTS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
3. Details of adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
[7] SIMULATION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
2. List of simulation codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
2. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1
2. Details of maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
[10] ROM VERSION-UP
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
2. Version-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2. Actual wiring chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
3. Signal list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
[12] OTHERS
1. System settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
[B] OPERATION PANEL
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . B-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
[C] SCANNER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . C-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
[D] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . D-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
[E] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . E-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . F-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
[G] DUPLEX SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . G-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
[H] LSU SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . H-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
[i] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . . i-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-3
[J] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . J-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3
[K] DEVELOPING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . K-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-5
[L] TRANSFER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . L-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-9
[M] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION
SENSOR SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . M-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
[N] FUSING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . N-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-7
[O] PAPER EXIT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . O-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-5
[P] DRIVE SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
[Q] PWB SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[R] FAN AND FILTER SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-3
[S] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
NOTE
MX2700N
FOR SERVICING • Gas tube
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


• Lightning conductor
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation.
• A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation. grounding object by the authorities.
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
• Grounding wire for telephone line
5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
danger to life or a serious injury could result. forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, an injury or It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
a damage to properties could result. 6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
1. Precautions for servicing It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, may drop inside the machine.
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
except when performing the communication test, etc.
8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an do not perform servicing.
extreme care when servicing.
It may cause an electric shock.
It may cause a burn.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may 3. Note for installing site
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective Do not install the machine at the following sites.
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
perature and humidity.
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
driving sections. ing paper jam or copy dirt.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
described later.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or
an injury.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to
damage fingers when servicing. 2) Place of much vibrations
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, It may cause a breakdown.
toner may pop and burn you.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified
one only.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.

2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that 3) Poorly ventilated place
meets the specified voltage and current requirements. An electro-static type copier will produce ozone inside it.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
shock. as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
4) When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.

MX-2300/2700 N/G NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight.
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may
undergo qualitative change.
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.

6) Place of much dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.

7) Place near a wall

Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.

30 cm

30 cm 45 cm

8) Unstable or slant surface

If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.

MX-2300/2700 N/G NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
MX2700N

1. Product features
A. Features
(1) Features
1) The employment of newly developed toner reduces the toner
consumption remarkably, realizing high fidelity pictures of
human skin, half tone, and hair. In addition, the employment of
"Auto Color" function, Sharp's unique auto recognition func-
tion, reproduces documents of difficult reproduction.
2) The power consumption for FAX standby with the power OFF
is 1W or less, reducing energy expenses of nighttime and load
to the environment.
3) Extension of the lifetime of the OPC drums together with the
frequency of maintenance realizes resource saving.
4) The unique security system inhibits unauthorized use of the
machine, preventing against leak of information.
• The electronic data are encrypted and saved in the hard
disk. When copying or printing or when sending FAX or
scanning, data are automatically erased to protect against
leak of important information.
MX-2300/2700 N/G PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1
• The user authentication
5GTXKEG/CPWCN system by a login name, a pass-
word, and an e-mail address is employed to prevent against
unauthorized use of a third party and to limit the use quantity
and usable functions for each user group. In addition, the
user authentication by the optional IC card read/writer may
be used.
5) The open systems architecture (Sharp OSA) is supported
which provides application development environment accord-
ing to user's needs.
6) Compact area for installation even to a space for a mono-
chrome machine
The machine can be installed to a space for a monochrome
machine, the smallest space in the class of 620mm (W) x
670mm (D), helping backup of color documentations in an
office. The installation of the optional finisher (MX-FNX1)
which is stored in the center paper exit section of the machine
allows stapling and finishing such as punch holes automati-
cally, improving the work efficiency.
(2) Environmental features
• Energy saving design by pre-heat mode/auto power shut-off
mode.
• Conforms to the International EnergyStar program.
• Conforms to the standards of Law on Promoting Green Purchas-
ing.
• Conforms to the Europe RoHS regulations.
(The contents of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium,
PBB [polybrominated biphenyl], PBDE [polybrominated diphenyl
ether] are limited to the regulated level or less.)
 1 : Dec. 15 2005

2. Configuration
A. Lineup (Main unit and option)

30. Device Tray with

USB Hub (MX-RKX1) 1. Reversing single pass feeder
12. Staple cartridge (MX-RPX1)
(Approx. 5000 x 3) 9. Finisher
(MX-SCX1) (MX-FNX1)
PCL5c/PCL6 Network SPLC-c
driver scanner driver
(Sharpdesk 1 license)

2. Document cover
RSPF (MX-VRX1)
10. Punch module
● 2-hole (MX-PNX1A)

● 3-hole (MX-PNX1B)

● 4-hole (MX-PNX1C)

● 4-hole (broad space)

(MX-PNX1D) HDD
HDD 6. Exit tray unit
7. Paper pass unit (MX-TRX1)
(MX-RBX1)
Copier/Printer (PCL) Copier/Printer (SPLC-c)
/Scanner model model
13. Staple cartridge
(Approx. 5000 x 3) (MX-2300N) (MX-2300G)
(AR-SC2) (MX-2700N) (MX-2700G)

11. Punch module

● 2-hole (AR-PN1A)
8. Saddle stitch finisher 3. Stand/1x500 sheet 4. Stand/2x500 sheet 5. Large capacity tray
● 3-hole (AR-PN1B)
(MX-FNX2) paper drawer paper drawer (MX-LCX1)
● 4-hole (AR-PN1C)
(MX-DEX1) (MX-DEX2)
● 4-hole (broad space)

(AR-PN1D) 1
14. Barcode font kit 17. Printer 18. Network 19. PS3 29. Facsimile expansion kit
expansion kit scanner expansion (MX-FXX1)
(PCL) expansion kit kit

CD ROM
CD CD CD
(AR-PF1)
(MX-PBX1) (MX-NSX1)
FAX memory (8MB)
Data security kit (For MX-2300G/2700G) (MX-PKX1) (packed together)
(Including document control)
16. CC authentication 15. Commercial 20. Internet Fax 21. Sharpdesk 23. Sharpdesk
version version expansion kit 1 license kit 10 license kit
22. Sharpdesk 24. Sharpdesk
5 license kit 50 license kit
Security Security
ROM ROM
CD CD CD
(MX-USX1/ (MX-US10/
(MX-FWX1) USX5) US50)
For document For document
control PWB control PWB 26. Application 25. Sharpdesk 27. Application 28. External
integration 100 license kit communication account module
(MX-FRX1) (MX-FRX1U) module module

31. 256MB expansion memory board

(MX-SMX1)
CD CD CD CD

(For MX-2300G/2700G) (MX-AMX1) (MX-USA0) (MX-AMX2) (MX-AMX3)

MX-2300/2700 N/G PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

B. Machine configuration
MX-2300G MX-2300N MX-2700G MX-2700N
Copier memory (Local memory) (MB) 768
Printer memory (System memory) (MB) 384 640 384 640
Copier STD STD
GDI printer STD – STD –
PCL printer OP*3 STD OP*3 STD
PS printer OP*1
EFI printer –
Main body LCD MONOCHROME HVGA 8.1"
FAX OP*4
Scanner OP *3 – OP *3 STD
Filing STD
HDD STD
RSPF OP STD OP STD
OC OP – OP –
Automatic duplex STD
Security OP*2
Internet Fax OP*3

STD: Standard provision, OP: Option

OP*1: Product key target. When PS is used, PCL function must be available. OP*2: Product key target.
OP*3: Product key target. To use this function, the printer memory (system memory) must be expanded to 640MB.
STD*4: No support for some areas.

C. Combination of options list

MX-2300G MX-2300N
Section Name Model name Remarks
MX-2700G MX-2700N
Automatic document feeder 1. Reversing single pass feeder MX-RPX1 OPT STD
OC 2. Document cover MX-VRX1 OPT N/A
Paper feed system 3. Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer MX-DEX1 OPT OPT
4. Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer MX-DEX2 OPT OPT
5. Large capacity tray MX-LCX1 OPT OPT (A4)
Paper exit system 6. Exit tray unit MX-TRX1 OPT OPT
7. Paper pass unit MX-RBX1 OPT OPT
8. Saddle stitch finisher MX-FNX2 OPT OPT
9. Finisher MX-FNX1 OPT OPT (Inner finisher)
10. Punch module (For inner finisher) MX-PNX1 A/B/C/D OPT OPT
11. Punch module AR-PN1 A/B/C/D OPT OPT (Common in current models)
(For saddle stitch finisher)
12. Staple cartridge (For inner finisher) MX-SCX1 OPT OPT (Approx. 5000 x 3)
13. Staple cartridge AR-SC2 OPT OPT (Approx. 5000 x 3)
(For saddle stitch finisher)
Electrical system (ROM) 14. Barcode font kit AR-PF1 OPT OPT (Conventional model)
15. Data security kit MX-FRX1U OPT OPT (Commercial version)
16. Data security kit MX-FRX1 OPT OPT (Authentication version)
Electrical system (Software) 17. Printer expansion kit MX-PBX1 OPT*1 STD (PCL)
18. Network scanner expansion kit MX-NSX1 OPT*1 STD
19. PS3 expansion kit MX-PKX1 OPT*2 OPT
20. Internet Fax expansion kit MX-FWX1 OPT*1 OPT (Internet Fax)
21. Sharpdesk 1 license kit MX-USX1 OPT OPT
22. Sharpdesk 5 license kit MX-USX5 OPT*3 OPT*3
23. Sharpdesk 10 license kit MX-US10 OPT OPT
24. Sharpdesk 50 license kit MX-US50 OPT OPT
25. Sharpdesk 100 license kit MX-USA0 OPT OPT
26. Application integration module MX-AMX1 OPT*4 OPT*4
27. Application communication module MX-AMX2 OPT OPT
28. External account module MX-AMX3 OPT OPT
Electrical system (FAX) 29. Facsimile expansion kit MX-FXX1 OPT*5 OPT*5
Electrical system 30. Device Tray with USB Hub MX-RKX1 OPT OPT
(USB systems)
Electrical system and others 31. 256MB expansion memory board MX-SMX1 OPT N/A

STD: Standard provision. OPT: Installable option. Commercially available parts: Use the specified parts, recommended parts, or parts the oper-
ations of which have been confirmed. –: Cannot be connected.
*1: Memory expansion is required. (256MB). *2: Printer expansion (PCL) and memory expansion are required.
*3:Installation of the MX-NSX1 or the MX-AMX1 is required. *4: Installation of the MX-NSX1 and expansion of memory (256MB) are required.
*5: No support for some areas.

MX-2300/2700 N/G PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 3

[2] SPECIFICATIONS
MX2700N (4) Shifter
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


Type Shifter
1. Basic specifications Paper weight 55 – 209g/m2 (17 – 56 lbs)
Paper size Non offset A3, B4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Postcard, 8K,
A. Base engine mode 16K, 16KR,11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
(Normal 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
(1) Type output) 5.5 x 8.5R, Envelope, Extra
Offset A3, B4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Postcard, 8K,
Type Desk-top mode 16K, 16KR, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
Color support Full color 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x
8.5R (Not Envelope, Extra)
(2) Engine speed Productivity Non-offset MX-2300G/N B/W 23cpm
(A4, 8.5x11) (Normal Color 23cpm
a. Tray1 – 4 (Main unit), LCC output) MX-2700G/N B/W 27cpm
MX-2700G/N MX-2300G/N Color 27cpm
Paper size Offset MX-2300G/N B/W 23cpm
B/W Color B/W Color
mode Color 23cpm
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 14 14 12 12
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 16 16 14 14 MX-2700G/N B/W 27cpm
A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K 27 27 23 23 Color 27cpm
A4R, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 11R, 19 19 16 16 Offset range 30mm
7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 16KR Range of error Horizontal Vertical Between
Extra 13 13 11 11 (In using the direction direction Jobs
recommended Non-offset Not drop from - -
b. Manual (Main unit) paper, A4/8.5 the tray.
x 11) Offset Within 50mm Within Min.10mm
MX-2700G/N MX-2300G/N mode r10mm
Paper size
B/W Color B/W Color
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 14 11 12 11 (5) Engine resolution
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 16 12 14 12
Resolution Writing:
A4, 8.5 x 11, 16K 23 21 23 21
600 x 600dpi
B5 23 23 23 23
1200 x 600dpi (Monochome printing only.)
A4R, 16KR 19 14 16 14 * Rotation output not allowed at 1200dpi x 600dpi. PS
8.5 x 11R 19 15 16 15 expansion kit needed.
B5R, 7.25 x 10.5R 19 16 13 13 Smoothing None
A5R, 5.5 x 8.5R 19 19 19 19 function
12 x 18 13 11 11 11 Gradation Writing:
OHP(A4, 8.5 x 11) 11 10 11 10 Monochrome: 2 levels (1bit) / Equivalent of 256 steps
OHP(A4R, 8.5 x 11R) 9 7 9 7 Color: Each color 2 levels (1bit) / Each color 16 levels
Extra 13 11 11 11 (4bits) / Equivalent of 256 steps
Envelope 13 13 11 11
Heavy paper (B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x 11, 11 10 11 10
(6) Warmup
8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
Warmup time 80 sec or less
Heavy paper (Postcard HIGH)*1 11 10 11 10
* The value may be increased if process-control
Heavy paper (Postcard LOW)*1 7 7 7 7 processing is being executed. Same as current model
Heavy paper (Other sizes) 7 5 7 5 Pre-heat Yes
*1: Switched by the service simulation setting
(7) Jam recovery time
(3) Engine composition
With the door Approx. Condition: After the door is kept open for 60
Photoconductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: Black; I30mm, Color; open 60 sec seconds, standard setting, the polygon
I30mm x 3) motor halt
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser)
Developing system Dry-type dual-component magnetic brush
(8) Printable area
development
A3 293 x 413mm 12 x 18 * 279 x 432mm
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method
B4 253 x 357mm 11 x 17 275 x 425mm
Transfer system Intermediate transfer belt
A4 206 x 290mm 8.5 x 14 212 x 349mm
Cleaning system Counter blade
B5 178 x 250mm 8.5 x 13 212 x 323mm
Fusing system Heat roller
A5 144 x 203mm 8.5 x 11 212 x 272mm
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system
7.25 x 10.5 180 x 260mm 5.5 x 8.5 136 x 209mm
Postcard 96 x 141mm 8K 266 x 383mm
16K 191 x 263mm

* The printable area for 12 x 18 must be as large as the A3/11 x 17

page dimension by PCL / PS driver.
(9) Void area

Void area Top: 4 mm or less

Image loss Bottom: 3 mm or less
FR Total: 4 mm or less

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1

(10) Auto Color Selection (16) Dimensions occupied by Machine (with Multi
Manual/Exit tray extended)
Copy Print Scan
Read The decision -color N/A The decision -color MX-2300G/MX-2700G MX-2300N/MX-2700N
or monochrome- is or monochrome- is W1050 x D670mm (W41-22/64 x D26-3/8 inch)
decided when the decided when the
document is document is B. Paper feed unit/Transport/Paper exit secton
scanned. scanned.
The scanning The scanning (1) Machine paper feed tray
speed for color is speed for color is
always adopted. always adopted. Form Standard: Double feeder tray + multi manual
Output For the output of a black-white original, N/A Maximum: Fourfold feeder tray + multi manual +
the decision to switch from color mode large capacity feeder cassette
to black-white mode is made when the Feeding method Feeding from the upper section with front loading
drum running distance shortens. Heater (Engine part) Service parts
First copy (print):
If a fixed number of black-white pages (2) Paper feed tray 1/tray 2
are contained in a series, switch from
color mode to black-white mode, starting Feeding method Feeding from the upper section with front loading
with the first page of the batch. If the Heater (Engine part) Service parts
original starts with a black-white page, Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
the output will start in the black-white 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
mode. 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
From the second copy (print) on:
Changing of paper Guide adjustment by users and size setting
The condition is completely understood.
size through key input
If there are a fixed number of black-
Paper type setting Yes
white pages in a series, switch to the
black-white mode, starting with the first Default paper size (Tray 1)
page in the series. setting Abroad-AB : A4
Abroad-inches : 8.5 x 11
Count Black-white count for the pages recognized as black-white.
Color count for the pages recognized as colored. (Tray 2)
For N-UP, a page will be counted as a color page if there is at Abroad-AB : A3
least one colored page inserted upon N-UP. Abroad-inches : 11 x 17
Feedable paper Plain paper: 60-105g/m2 (16-28 lbs)
(11) Power source type/weight
Paper capacity Standard paper: 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
100V type 200V type Paper Type Plain paper, pre-printed paper (not including
Voltage / Current 100 – 127V 12A 220 – 240V 8A backing paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-
Frequency 50/60Hz punched paper, colored paper
Power source Fixed type (direct) Inlet type * Users can set up all of these paper types.
code Paper size detection A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 13
Power switch 2 switches (Primary switch: in the front cover; (Size setting through 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R,
Seconday switch: the operation panel) key input) 7.25 x 10.5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Detection of Level detection (4 levels: 100%, 67%, 33%, and
(12) Power consumption Remaining Paper none)

100V type 200V type (3) Manual feed tray (Bypass tray)
Maximum rated power 1.44kW 1.84kW
consumption Paper Size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x
*1: Heater is OFF when power source ON. 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Envelope (Monarch / Com-10 / DL / C5 / Rectangle 3 /
(13) Noise Western 2 / Western 4)
Extra Size (Tab paper is limited to A4; tab width
In action B/W : 63dB or less 12mm-20mm / 8.5 x 11; tab width 6.1-17mm)
Color : 63dB or less Changing of Guide adjustment by users
Standby B/W : 55dB or less paper size
Paper type setting Yes
(14) Dimensions Feedable paper Thin paper: 55 – 59g/m2 (15 – 16 lbs)
type/weight Plain paper: 60 – 105g/m2 (16 – 28 lbs)
MX-2300G/MX-2700G MX-2300N/MX-2700N Heavy Paper: 106 – 209g/m2 (28+ – 56 lbs)
Outer dimensions 620 x 670 x 795mm 620 x 670 x 950mm Envelope: 75 – 90g/m2 (20 – 24 lbs)
(W x D x H) (24 13/32 x 26 3/8 x (24 13/32 x 26 3/8 x OHP
(with Multi 31 inch) 37 26/64 inch) Label paper
Manual) Tab paper
Footprint (W x D) 590 x 670mm 590 x 670mm Gloss Paper
(23 15/64 x 26 3/8 inch) (23 15/64 x 26 3/8 inch) Paper capacity Standard paper: 100 sheets
Envelope: 20 sheets
(15) Weight OHP: 20 sheets
Heavy paper: 40 sheets
MX-2300G/MX-2700G MX-2300N/MX-2700N Tab paper: 20 sheets
Main unit Approx. 102kg (225lbs) Approx. 112kg (247lbs) Gloss paper: 20 sheets
Main unit + Approx. 106kg (234lbs) Approx. 116kg (256lbs) Other special paper: 1 sheet
Developer + Paper Type Plain paper, pre-printed paper (Excluding back print
Toner cartridge paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched
paper, colored paper, heavy paper, thin paper, label
paper, OHP, tab paper, envelope.
* Users can set up all of these paper types.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 2

 Paper size Auto Detect A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x (7) Reversing single pass feeder (MX-2300N/2700N)
detection Auto-AB 13, Postcard, 8.5 x 11, 11 x 17
Auto Detect 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, Form RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)
Auto-Inch 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 7.25 x 10.5R, Scan speed Monochrome Color
A3, B4, A4, B5 (A4/8.5 x 11) (A4/8.5 x 11)
For China A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x Copy 1-sided: 27 sheets/minute 1-sided: 27 sheets/
17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8K, 16K (600 x 300dpi, 1bit) minute (600 x
Detection of yes or no only 2-sided: 15 pages/minute 600dpi, 4bit)
remaining paper (600 x 300dpi, 1bit) 2-sided: 12 pages/
minute (600 x
(4) Double-sided 600dpi, 4bit)
Fax 1-sided: 48 sheets/minute N/A
Method Non-Stack (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 2-sided: 15 pages/minute
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
8.5 x 5.5R Scanner 1-sided: 48 sheets/minute 1-sided: 35 sheets/
Paper type Plain paper, pre-printed paper (not including (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) minute (200 x
backing paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre- 2-sided: 15 pages/minute 200dpi, 8bit) (when
punched paper, colored paper (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) in full color)
Paper weight Plain paper: 60-105g/m2 (16-28 lbs) 2-sided: 15 pages/
(for duplex operation) minute (200 x
200dpi, 8bit)
Logo paper support For paper such as letterhead paper with front-
back attributes, the engine control must be cared Internet 1-sided: 48 sheets/minute N/A
for printing side. Fax (200 x 200 dpi, 1bit)
2-sided: 15 pages/minute
(5) Paper exit tray (Center tray) (200 x 200 dpi, 1bit)
Document setup Upward standard (1toN feeding standard)
Exit location/ Face down in the main unit direction
method Document standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for
Exit capacity 500 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended location random feeding)
paper)) Document transport Sheet-through method
Exit paper size/ All feedable paper except 12x18. method
type Document sizes Inch type-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
Exit paper No 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 5.5, A4, A3
detection Inch type-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
Exit tray full Yes 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 5.5, A4, A3
detection AB type-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
Shifting function Yes 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17
Rotation sort No AB type-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
8.5 x 11, 216 x 330, 11 x 17
(6) Paper exit tray unit (Right tray) AB type-3 A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K,
* Option (MX-TRX1) 16KR, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 330, 11 x 17
Long paper 800mm (Monochrome 2 levels
Form Exit tray unit only)
Transport standard Center standard Mixed feeding (same type / same width) possible
Random feeding (feeding of different types /
Ejecting location/ External ejection from the right face of the main unit
different widths)
method / face-down ejection
Only the following combinations of 2 size types
Tray capacity 100 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended
are allowed: A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5;
paper))
B5 and A5; and 11-inch and 8.5-inch.
Ejected paper size/ Any feedable paper except envelope and tab paper. 2-sided scanning is disabled during random
type feeding.
Full tray detection Yes * When mix feeding, random feeding, or manual
Shifter No set of document size, scan speed is 16 pages/
Dimensions W289 x D405 x H52mm minute (A4, 8.5 x 11)
(W11-3/8 x D15-61/64 x H2-3/64 inch) Document 1-side Thin paper 35 – 49g/m2 (9 – 13 lbs)
With tray extended: W419 x D405 x H52mm weights * Thin paper mode is (18 pages/
(W16-1/2 x D15-61/64 x H2-3/64 inch) minute (A4, 8.5 x 11) set up for
Weight Approx. 0.93kg (2lbs) the thin paper.
Installation/ Installation by service personnel. Plain paper 50 – 128g/m2 (13 – 34 lbs)
maintenance 2-side 50 – 105 g/m2 (13 – 28 lbs)
Optional detection Setting by simulation (Sim. 26-1) Document carrying Maximum: 100 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs), or
Packaged items Exit tray, full actuator, installation advisory (in 6 capacity Maximum: 13 mm, 1/2 inch or less
languages)
Types of document The following documents are NOT allowed:
that may not be OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper,
transported carbon paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken /
torn document, document with cuts and pastes,
documents printed by an ink ribbon, and
perforated document except 2-punched / 3-
punched (Perforated document by punch unit is
allowed.)
Paper detection Yes

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 3

 Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection (2) Original cover
unit through system setting)
Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, Scan Range 297 x 432mm
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A4, A3 Original Cover Left back as standard
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, Standard
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A4, A3 Location
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 Detection Yes
x 11, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17 Detection Size Auto Detect (One type of detection unit to be switched
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 for software destination)
x 11, 216 x 330, Inch <INCH-1>
11 x 17 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
AB-3 A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, <INCH-2>
16KR, 8.5 x 11, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
216 x 330, 11 x 17 AB <AB-1>
Paper feeding Right hand feeding A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R
direction <AB-2>
Document inversion Yes A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 x 330
Simultaneous double- Not allowed <AB-3>
sided scanning 8K, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 16K, 16KR
Maintenance parts Paper feed roller, pick-up roller, separation roller Heater Service parts
Power source Provided from the main unit (Scanner part)
Power consumption 35.8W
Dimensions W590 x D510 x H155 (mm)
D. Fuser section
W23-15/64 x D20-5/64 x H6-7/64 (inch) (1) Type
Weight Approx. 10kg (22.0lbs)
System Heat roller attachment system
C. Scanner section
(1) Resolution/Gradation (or Levels)

Scan Copy mode

resolution (dpi) Monochrome Color
Original 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi
Cover 600 x 300dpi (Default)
(Default)
RSPF 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi
600 x 300dpi (Default)
(Default)
Transmission Image (Scanner)
resolution (dpi) process 100 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 300 x 300dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(Internet Fax)
200 x 100dpi (Half tone not allowed) /
200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(FAX)
Standard (203.2 x 97.8dpi) (Half tone not
allowed) / Fine (203.2 x 195.6 dpi) /
Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi) /
Ultra fine (406.4 x 391 dpi)
PC-FAX/ 200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi
PC-Internet / 400 x 400dpi
Fax
Network 75dpi / 100dpi / 150dpi / 200dpi / 300dpi /
TWAIN 400dpi / 600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
Exposure lamp Xenon
Scan Levels 10bits
Output levels FAX mode: 1bit
Internet Fax mode: 1bit
Scanner mode:
Black & White: 1bit
Gray Scale: 8bit
Full Color: Each color RGB 8bit

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 4

2. Functional specifications
A. Specifications of copy functions
(1) Copy speed (Continuous copy speed)

a. Tray 1 – 4, LCC

Model name MX-2700G/N MX-2300G/N

Color / B/W Color B/W Color B/W
Print / Copy Print Copy Print Copy Print Copy Print Copy
Paper size Magnification Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%) Normal (100%) Normal (100%) Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%)
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 14 14 14 14 12 12 12 12
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 16 16 16 16 14 14 14 14
A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K 27 27 27 27 23 23 23 23
A4R, B5R,A5R, 8.5 x 11R, 19 19 19 19 16 16 16 16
7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 16KR
Extra 13 13 13 13 11 11 11 11

b. Manual feed

Model name MX-2700G/N MX-2300G/N

Color / B/W Color B/W Color B/W
Print / Copy Print Copy Print Copy Print Copy Print Copy
Paper size Magnification Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%) Normal (100%) Normal (100%) Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%)
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 11 11 14 14 11 11 12 12
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 12 12 16 16 12 12 14 14
A4, 8.5 x 11, 16K 21 21 23 23 21 21 23 23
B5 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
A4R, 16KR 14 14 19 19 14 14 16 16
8.5 x 11R 15 15 19 19 15 15 16 16
B5R, 7.25 x 10.5R 16 16 19 19 13 13 13 13
A5R, 5.5 x 8.5R 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
A3W, 12 x 18 11 11 13 13 11 11 11 11
OHP(A4, 8.5 x 11) 10 10 11 11 10 10 11 11
OHP(A4R, 8.5 x 11R) 7 7 9 9 7 7 9 9
Extra 11 11 13 13 11 11 11 11
Envelope 13 13 13 13 11 11 11 11
Heavy paper (B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x 10 10 11 11 10 10 11 11
11, 8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
Heavy paper (Postcard HIGH) 10 10 11 11 10 10 11 11
*1
Heavy paper (Postcard LOW) *1 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Heavy paper (Other sizes) 5 5 7 7 5 5 7 7

*1: Switched by the service simulation setting

(2) First copy time b. BLI standard

Platen/RSPF B/W Color MX-2700G/N MX-2300G/N

Platen 6.3 sec 8.9 sec Model name / Mode B/W Color B/W Color
RSPF 11.6 sec 16.9 sec (1bit) (4bit) (1bit) (4bit)
Copy S to S 24cpm 23cpm 20cpm 20cpm
[Measuring Conditions] method (89%) (85%) (89%) (85%)
* Polygon in rotation S to D 21cpm 20cpm 19cpm 18cpm
(78%) (74%) (83%) (78%)
* Feeding A4/8.5 x 11 (landscape) paper from the main unit tray 1
D to D 21cpm 19cpm 19cpm 17cpm
* No Auto Color Selection and No Auto Color for color (78%) (70%) (83%) (74%)
(3) Job speed * S to S: 10 pages of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 5 copies
a. Document changing speed (in copy mode) * S to D: 10 pages of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 5 copies
* D to D: 10 pages (20 sides) of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 5 cop-
MX-2700G/N MX-2300G/N ies
B/W Color B/W Color
S to S 27cpm 27cpm 23cpm 23cpm
(100%) (100%) (100%) (100%)

* The copy speed in combination of the main unit and the auto
document feed user is defined.
* S to S: A4/8.5 x 11 document, 11 pages and 1 copy (not including
the first copy)
Monochrome: 600 x 300dpi and color: 600 x 600dpi (default)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 5

c. Bertl standard (10) Color Adjustment

MX-2700G/N MX-2300G/N RGB adjustment Yes

Model name / Mode B/W Color B/W Color Color balance Yes
(1bit) (4bit) (1bit) (4bit) Saturation Yes
Copy S to S 23cpm 21cpm 19cpm 18cpm adjustment
method (84%) (78%) (84%) (78%) Brightness Yes
S to D 14cpm 12cpm 13cpm 11cpm adjustment
(52%) (44%) (57%) (48%) Contrast No
D to D 20cpm 19cpm 18cpm 17cpm adjustment
(74%) (70%) (78%) (74%) Sharpness Yes
adjustment
* S to S: 5 pages of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 5 copies Background Yes
* S to D: 10 pages of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 1 copy removal
* D to D: 5 pages (10 sides) of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 5 copies Auto color Allowed by system setting
calibration
(4) Continuous copy Registration Allowed by system setting (automatic-manual)
adjustment
Multi max. number 999 sheets
(11) Copy functions
(5) Resolution
Function Automatic paper Yes (Mixed/random size feeding
Scan resolution 600 x 600dpi selection supported)
Writing resolution 600 x 600dpi Automatic Yes
magnification selection
(6) Copy document Paper type select Yes
Type setting allowed
Document Max. A3 (11 x 17)
Auto tray switching Yes
Document type Sheet/Book original
Rotated copy Yes
Large rotated copy exceeding A4
(7) Copy magnification ratio
supported
Electronic sort Yes
Copy Normal: 1:1r0.8%
magnification ratio Rotated sort No
AB series: 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%,
Unavailable
115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
Job reservation Yes
Inch series: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%,
Program call/ Yes (The program name can be
129% , 200%, 400%
registration. registered.)
Zoom 25 – 400% (25 – 200% for RSPF)
Preheat function Yes
Preset 4
Conditions set up by system setting
magnification ratio
Auto power shutoff Yes
XY zoom Yes
Conditions set up by system setting
(8) Density, copy image quality processing User authentication 200
Process control Yes
Exposure mode Automatic (Color: Auto Color, Black-white: Character Tandem copy Yes
AE) Mixed document Yes (Random + MIX)
Text,Text/Printed Photo, Print photo, Text/Photo, feeder
Photo, Map, Pale-color document. Document paper size Yes (Determinate/indeterminate
Copy document Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo input size)
mode mode. Indeterminate paper Yes
Color emphasis Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo, size input
Text/Photo, Photo, Map mode. 2-sided copy direction Yes
Manual steps 9 steps switch
Toner save mode Monochrome: Yes Special Margin shift Yes
Color: Yes function Edge/center erase Yes
Off on printed photo, photo or pale-color document Dual page copy Yes
Cover/insertion Yes
(9) Color copy mode Tab paper insertion Yes (Insertion only. Tab copy not
allowed. Staple/Punch not allowed.)
Auto Color Copy mode automatically discerning color/
OHP insertion Yes
Selection copy monochrome.
Tab copy Yes
Full color mode Enforced full color mode
Centering Yes
2-color mode Red-black mode (Change red point in document into
2in1/4in1 Yes
other color)
Mode to select black and another color from R/G/B/ Pamphlet Yes
C/M/Y Card shot Yes
Single color mode Mode to select one color from R/G/B/C/M/Y Book copy Yes
Monochrome copy Enforced monochrome copy mode Large capacity Yes
mode document mode
Black-white Inversion Yes (Only black-white copy allowed/
color copy not allowed upon setup
Not ready)
Multi-Page Yes
Enlargement
Mirror image Yes
Photo repeat Yes

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 6

 Special Date print Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y) c. Image processing
function Character Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y)
Mode Scanner Internet Fax
Stamp Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y)
Original scanning Full color, grayscale, B/W B/W
Page printing Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y)
color
Shading No
Auto color selection [When Color start key ---
Proof copy Yes
pressed.]
Document Control Yes (with Data Security Kit • Auto (When judged as
equipped) Color : Full color, When
judged as B/W : B/W (2
B. Image send function value)/Gray scale)
(1) Mode [When B/W start key]
• B/W (2 value)
Scanner Scan to e-mail • Gray scale
Scan to Desktop Halftone Equivalent of 256 steps
Scan to FTP reproduction
Scan to Folder(SMB) Density adjustment Auto + 5 steps Auto + 5 steps
Scan to USB memory (The image quaity of
Scan to e-mail with Meta "Auto" is the same as that
Scan to Desktop with Meta of "Manual = 3" when
Scan to FTP with Meta selecting full color/
Scan to SMB with Meta grayscale.)
Internet Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP Black-white enabled ---
Fax Full mode supported (including Simple mode) • Auto
IP-FAX No • Manual

(2) System environment Color button enabled

When selecting "Auto":
Copier memory Printer memory Data saving • Text/printed photo
(Local memory) (System Memory) destination • Text/photo
Scanner 768MB 640MB (Expansion HDD (Standard) • Text
(Standard) required for G model)
When selecting "Manual":
Internet 768MB 640MB (Expansion HDD (Standard)
• Text/printed photo
Fax (Standard) required for G model)
• Text/Photo
(3) Image send function (Push send from the main • Text
• Photo
unit) • Printed photo
• Map
a. Support system
Selection of image --- Half tone (Black-white
quality only) ON/OFF
Mode Scanner Internet Fax
Corresponding SMTP POP server
Resolution 100 x 100 dpi 200 x 100dpi
server FTP(TCP/IP) SMTP server
(depends on file (Half tone not allowed)
/protocol SMB ESMTP server
format/transmission 200 x 200 dpi 200 x 200dpi
method) 300 x 300 dpi 200 x 400dpi
b. Support image
400 x 400 dpi 400 x 400dpi
Mode Scanner Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi 600 x 600dpi
File format Monochrome: TIFF, PDF, Monochrome TIFF-FX
Encrypted PDF (TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
Moire reduction Yes (Color/grayscale) ---
Color: Gray scale, color
mode
TIFF, JPEG, PDF,
Encrypted PDF Notes' security Yes (color only) ---
feature
Compression [Monochrome] MH, MMR
method • Non-compression
d. Specification of Addresses
• G3 (1-dimensional)
= MH (Modified
Mode Scanner Internet Fax
Huffman)
Address Specification by one-touch/group/direct address
• G4
specification entry.
= MMR (Modified MR)
Entry from soft keyboard. (Scanner/Internet Fax)
[Color/Gray scale]
Entry from 10-key. (Fax)
• JPEG (High, middle,
Selection from LDAP server
low)
Setting of default Yes ---
Specified pages per Yes ---
address *1
size (number of
page(s) Number of One- Total (number of key): Maximum 999
specification touch address key
allowed) registration
Number of Group (1 Number of Group (1 key) address registration :
key) address maximum 500
registtation Number of Group key registration : 5000 (Total
address number included in /999 key)
Program 48
Direct entry of Soft keyboard
addresses
Chain dial ---
Resend Call up nearest 8 addresses. *4

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 7

 Mode Scanner Internet Fax g. Reception function
Shortcut for address Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of
selection (quick addresses. Scanner Internet Fax
key) Automatic reception --- Yes
CC/BCC sending Yes --- Manual reception --- Yes
Subjet Selective/direct entry from the list Memory reception --- Yes
File name Selective/direct entry from the list Fixed size reduced --- Yes
Sender name Selective/direct entry --- reception
from the list/selection (1 default address fixed Specified size scaled --- No
from LDAP server as sender name) reception
Transmission Selective/direct entry from the list. Rotated reception --- Yes
message (message (Number of characters: Maximum of 1800 half-size Setting of received data --- No
body) characters (888 full size characters)) print condition
Preset mail footer *2 Yes 2-sided reception --- Condition setting
Disable direct entry Yes through system setting
transmission *3 2-in-1 reception --- No
Disable PC- Fax Yes Automatic reduction --- Yes
sending setting upon receiving
Disable Internet Fax Yes A3
sending Automatic reduction --- Yes
setting upon receiving
*1: The scanner mode allows setting the default address. To letter
transmit data, users only have to set the original and press the Address/Domain- --- Yes (50 domains)
start key. specified reception
*2: Function to set up a text message that will be added allowed
automatically to the message body upon mail transmission. Address/Domain- --- Yes (50 domains)
specified reception not
Editing upon transmission is not allowed.
allowed. (To be rejected)
*3: When disabled, the address registration is not allowed either. Received data bypass --- Yes
*4: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB memory, Broadcast. output
Reception confirmation --- Setting by 0-8 hours/
e. Specification of Multiple Addresses cycle setting each minute
POP3 communications --- Setting by 30-300/every
Mode Scanner Internet Fax timeout setting 30 seconds
Broadcast Yes (500 destinations) Yes (500 destinations) Index printing --- No
(e-mail/FTP/Desktop Body text print select --- Yes
allowed) setting
Transfer function upon --- Yes (1 receiver (of
* Broadcast transmission by scanner, Internet Fax and Fax is
disabling of output. transfer) registration)
allowed. (Monochrome only)
Internet Fax/Fax to e- --- Yes
mail (Transfer of Internet
f. Transmission function
Fax/Fax reception data
to e-mail, inbound
Scanner Internet Fax
routing)
Memory transmission 94 destinations in all
Exit tray setting --- Yes
Rotated transmission --- Yes
Insertion of job --- No
Scaled transmission Yes
separator sheet
Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a
Staple function of --- Yes
fixed size to another. Reduction may be done
received data
on the receiver side with Fax/Internet Fax
sending. Auto wake up print *1 --- Yes
Recall mode Error --- Yes Received data print hold --- Yes
*2
Busy --- ---
Color toner print when --- No
--- Number/time to be
black toner runs out.
set up through
system setup Fax response lamp --- Yes
Long original Yes
*1: The auto wake up print for Internet Fax is a pseudo night-time
transmission Maximum of 800mm (single side only/black-
mode with main power source (primary) switch ON and main
white 2 values only)
unit power (secondary) switch OFF. Following the interval of
Change of the number Yes ---
of pages for each file the reception confirmation cycle, it allows reception of the data
Job partition through No --- from a POP server (if there are any) and launch the main unit
recognition of white for output. (It cannot attain the pseudo night-time mode if the
paper. main power source (primary) switch is off. In this case, this
Restriction on Yes --- function is not supported.)
transmission size *2: This function saves all received data in memory and starts out
Large capacity original Yes put after password entry. (Confidential reception is excluded.)
mode Setting only on the reciver side.
Scanning of thin paper Yes
Mixed originals feeder Yes (Random + MIX)
Default date sender --- Yes (ON only)
transmission

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 8

h. Report/list function Mode Scanner Internet Fax
Sender registration 200 (user registration ---
Scanner Internet Fax from Web) *3
Image sending activity Yes Number of sender --- 1 (20 characters)
report Time-specified output registration
Output with memory full
Quick key (short cut Yes (001 – 999)
* Maximum of 200 times including both
registration) *4
transmission and reception
Retrieving/scanning of Yes (By address book conversion utility)
Transaction report Yes
registered data to other
Address/phone number Yes model
table
Import/export of address Yes (By storage backup)
Group table Yes book
Program table Yes
Communication original --- Always print/Upon *1: Since scan/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address book,
contents print error/no print the number of addresses allowed for registration is the sum
List of addresses --- Yes total of all modes.
allowed or not allowed *2: The network scanner expansion kit (MX-NSX1) required
for reception
(G model).
i. Other Functions *3: The book for address selection is used when a scan sender is
selected.
Scanner Internet Fax *4: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
Time specification Yes registered number of each address within the book for address
Sender print --- Yes selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.
Page number print --- Yes
Date print --- Yes (Date can be l. Sound settings
expressed
alternatively) Mode Item Scanner Internet Fax
Page partition Yes Reception sound Sound volume setting --- Yes *1
transmission Communication Sound volume setting --- Yes *2
Page connection No error sound
Edge erase Yes Sound setting for Sound volume setting Yes *1
Center erase Yes end of original
2 in 1 No Yes reading (image
(Allowed for Fax / send)
Internet Fax
broadcast) *1: Large/middle/small. Setup by system setting.
Background removal Yes --- *2: Large/middle/small/no sound. Setup by system setting.
(Only color and gray
scale) m. Others
Card shot Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to the paper
width. The maximum enlargement is not Mode Scanner Internet FAX
allowed to exceed 400%) PC-Internet Fax --- Yes
Confirm transmission --- Yes Trial mode Yes No
Timeout time Setting
for 1 minute – 240 C. PC-Fax functions
hours/each minute
Forward data Yes
(1) PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax operating environment
transmission/reception Data transmission by PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax
(Document Admin) is allowed, too. OS Windows 98 (IE4.0 or more)
Windows Me (IE4.0 or more)
* This function means that e-mail address setteing on F code relay Windows NT4.0 Workstation (Service Pack5,
broadcast allowed. IE4.0 or more)
Windows 2000 (IE4.0 or more)
j. Record size Windows XP Home Edition (IE4.0 or more)
Windows XP Professional (IE4.0 or more)
Mode Scanner Internet Fax Windows Server 2003 (IE4.0 or more)
Maximum record width --- 293mm / 11-17/32 PC IBM PC/AT compatible machine
Record size --- A3 – A5/11 x 17 – 5.5 x 8.5 CPU Pentium II 300MHz or more
Monitor 640x480 Pixels or more of screen resolution
k. Registration-related settings 256 or more of colors
Memory 64MB or more
Mode Scanner Internet Fax HDD Free space of 50MB or more
One-touch/group *1 999 destinations Interface USB2.0
E-mail Use of LDAP allowed 10/100BASE-TX
FTP Up to 500 registered addresses for each group Communications LPR/lp
Desktop dial. protocol Port9100(RAW)
SMB Registered name in 18 full-size character (36 IPP
Internet Fax half-size characters) USB2.0
Default address setup Yes ---
Desktop registration Yes ---
Registration by using
Web or NST (network
scanner tool) *2
Program Registration of addresses (groups), settings
(density, image quality) and special functions in
one set is allowed. (48 of them)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 9

(2) PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax functions Selection of illuminant Yes (Red/Green/Blue/White)
color
PC-Fax Send Yes (with Fax equipped) Selection of threshold Auto/ manual (1 – 254)
Maximim of 64 digits for Fax number (including value
sub-address and passcode) Addition of void area Allowed (4 sides; 2.5mm for each)
PC-Internet Fax Send Yes (Necessary options: 256MB expansion Save of setup contents Yes
memory (G model), Internet Fax expansion kit)
Save of preview image Yes
Maximum of 64 digits for Internet Fax address
Display unit of Pixel/mm/inch
Resolution 200 x 100dpi/200 x 200dpi
scanning range
/200 x 400dpi/400 x 400dpi
Notes's security Yes
Transmission original A3/B4/A4/A5/B5/11 x 17/8.5 x 14/8.5 x 11/5.5 x
function
sizes 8.5/8.5 x 13/8K/16K
Image acquision Non-compression
Compression method MH/MMR
method from the main
Braodcast transmission Yes (Fax, Internet Fax mixture possible. unit
Maximum of 500)
F code transmission Yes Sub- Yes Maximum of E. Printer function
address 20 digits
Passcode Yes Maximum of (1) Platform
20 digits
Phone book Yes • IBM PC/AT compatible machine
registration/ • Macintosh
transmission function
Use of MFP phone book No
(2) Support OS
Attach a cover sheet Yes (Not allowed for bradcast transmission)
Custom PS Windows 98/Me
Create cover sheets Yes
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
function
Windows 2000
Sender print Yes (Editable by PC-Fax driver for only Japan.
Windows XP
Always printed for abroad.)
Windows Server 2003
Preview function Yes
Custom Windows 98/Me
Transmission Yes PCL5c/6 Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
confirmation (Notice to
Windows 2000
PC by NJR)
Windows XP
Document filing function Filing Yes Windows Server 2003
Quick File Yes PPD Windows 98/Me
PC-Fax Transmission Yes (Re-transmission not allowed) Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
log Windows 2000
User authentication Yes Windows XP
Timer No Windows Server 2003
R-KEY (SEEG/SEF Yes MacOS 9.0-9.2.2, x 10.1.5, x 10.2.8, x 10.3.3 – 10.3.9,
only) x 10.4
SPLC-c Windows 98/Me
D. Remote PC Functions (Network TWAIN) Windows 2000
Pull scan (TWAIN) specification Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Interfaces NIC Yes WHQL Windows 2000
USB No Windows XP
OS's Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/2003 Server
WHQL validated OS's Windows 2000/XP
(3) Command system
Hardware environment System: Must satisfy the operational conditions
Command system MX-2300G/2700G MX-2300N/2700N
for each OS.
HDD: 10MB or more: 100MB or more SPLC-c Standard No
recommended. PCL5c compatible Option (Printer Standard
Monitor: 800 x 600 dots or more; 256 or more of PCL6 compatible expansion kit: MX-
colors must be available. PBX1)
Other: Network port BMLinkS No
2-sided scan Yes PS3 compatible Option (PS3 expansion kit: MX-PKX1)
Color modes Mono 2 gradation/Mono Diffusion/Grayscale/Full EFI controller No
Color
Resolutions 75dpi/100dpi/150dpi/200dpi/300dpi/400dpi/
(4) Installed fonts
600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
For PCL5c/ Roman outline fonts = 80 types Standard (MX-
Scanning ranges A3/A4/A4-R/A5/A5-R/B4/B5/B5-R/11 x 17/
PCL6 Line printer font (Bitmap) = 1 type 2300N/2700N)
8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11-R/7.25 x 10.5/7.25 x 10.5-R/
compatible Option (MX-
8.5 x 13/5.5 x 8.5/5.5 x 8.5-R/8.5 x 14/Postcard/
2300G/2700G)
8K/16K/16K-R/Auto/Auto(Mixed size)/Custom
* "Auto" includes the same width (Mix). "Auto Bar code fonts = 28 types (Can be Option
(Mixed size)" means random. provided by the flash ROM kit as well)
Preview function Yes For PS3 Roman outline fonts = 136 types Option
Zoom preview function Yes
Rotated scan Yes (90-degree/ 180-degree/ 270-degree)
Brightness/contrast Auto/ manual (-100 – +100)
adjustment
Gamma adjustment Yes
Color matching None/For Printer/For CRT/For LCD/ICM
Edge emphasis None/Normal/Sharp/Blur
Black-white inversion Yes

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 10

(5) Print channel FTP Equipped with the function to print data received via
built-in FTP server
Support print • USB2.0 (high speed) NetBEUI Microsoft NetBEUI compatible print channel
channel • PSERVER/RPRINT for netware environment Port9100 9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported
• LPR
• IPP (6) Command Compatibility
• PAP: EtherTalk (AppleTalk)
• FTP PCL5c PCL5c must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
• NetBEUI compatibility 4600.
• Raw Port (Port9100) PCL XL PCL XL must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
• HTTP (Web Submit Print) compatibility 4600.
• POP3 (E-Mail To Print)
PostScript Must be compatible with Adobe PS3.
USB USB 1.1: Windows 98/Me/2000/Server 2003/XP only compatibility
USB 2.0 (High speed): Windows 2000/XP only
PSERVER/ Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to be used (7) Environmental settings
RPRINT for in netware environment
NetWare Setting item Overview
environment Initial setting Basic settings for printer use such as number of
LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print channel copies or printing direction.
IPP Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0 PCL seting Setting of PCL symbols and fonts
PAP: Print channel to be used for Machintosh environment PS setting Whether or not printing is allowed upon PS error is to
EtherTalk be set up.
(AppleTalk)

(8) Print functions

PCL6/5c
SPLC-c
Function Content (G model: PS (Option)
(G model)
option)
Multiple Pamphlet Binds multiple pamphlet outputs into a single booklet. Yes Yes No
Bar code font JetCAPS BarDIMM emulation Yes No No
Network tandem print Two units connected via network can be used simultaneously for a printout. Yes Yes (Windows No
only)
Encryption PDF/PDF/ PDF/TIFF/JPEG file can be printed without printer driver. Yes (No for Yes No
TIFF/JPEG direct print 1) Printing of e-mail attachment file encrypted
2) Printing from FTP server PDF/PDF)
3) Printing from setup file on Web page
4) USB memory
E-Mail To Print Direct printing of an attached file upon receipt of the e-mail. Yes Yes No
Pull print from front panel Browsing of FTP server from front panel and pull-printing of a specified file (direct Yes Yes No
printing).
Print by file setup on Web Setting and direct printing of a file on network through Web page. Yes Yes No
page [Web Submit Print]
Continuous print function The function executes multiple print jobs continuously as if they are one single job Yes Yes No
even if the unit receives an end of job command, in order to support print from the
application assuming printout on continuous pages.
ROPM The function enables the printout of a multiple number of copies in one RIP Yes Yes Yes
processing.
Multi-access RIP processing must be allowed during printing. Printing must also be allowed Yes Yes Yes
during scanning.
Paper direction setting for Pages with front-back attribute such letterhead or punch paper are to be printed Yes Yes Yes
2-sided printing of correctly in front-back page order for 2-sided printing.
letterhead paper and pre-
punched paper.
Enable selected paper For setting of bypass tray, even if the setup values on the main unit side do not Yes Yes Yes
type in bypass tray match with those on the driver side, the printing will be executed in the setting of
the driver regardless of the setup values on the main unit side.
Setting environmental Print setting of each client is memorized under meta frame environment (auto print Yes Yes Yes
control under terminal create environment). (Setup for each log-in can be skipped.)
server control
Driver delivery function PAU4.0 allows the administrator to deliver a driver to clients. Yes Yes Yes
Form overlay The function downloads a form to the main unit beforehand, sends the contained Yes No No
data only, and inserts the data into the form in the main unit for printout. (5c only)
Planet Press Object Lune Corporation's Planet Press (Software to execute the mapping of forms Yes Yes No
(DL beforehand) and variable data in the printer interior)
Improvement of This expands the function to prevent the deletion and overwriting of the editing Yes Yes No
downloading method of functional enhancement font/form on Web page. A unified UI for the lineup is (5c only)
font form necessary.
Currently, registration is done by Web page and deleted by PJL. This function is
supported by HDD.
Management of password The purpose is to prevent the access even if the hidden Web page address Yes Yes Yes
by hidden Web page becomes known.
Expansion font list In self-print of a font list, ESC command information is needed for BITMAP font. Yes No No
(5c only)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 11

 PCL6/5c
SPLC-c
Function Content (G model: PS (Option)
(G model)
option)
Bonjour for Macintosh This technology detects and connects peripheral equipment on the network No Yes No
environment automatically.
The dynamic network connection (computer, peripheral equipment and software) is
possible without user setting.
Document control When printing, the unique pattern for prevention against unauthorized copy Yes (OPT) Yes (OPT) Yes (OPT)
is embedded in printing.
Object judgement (screen In the printer color mode output, object of image data (area of photograph/graphic PCL6: Yes Yes No
change/color change) text) is judged. Print screen (resolution) and profile (color) are changed PCL5: No
automatically.
CMYK Simulation Choice of CMYK simulation is as follows. No Yes No
1) Default
2) Custom
Default is defined depending on the destination of service simulation.
1. Japan = Japan Color
2. North America / China / Other abroad inch type = SWOP
3. Europe / Other abroad AB type = Euroscale
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. Notation of driver is Custom.
Example: Use SWOP profile in Japan.
ICC Profile <Source Profile> Yes Yes No
Choice of source profile is as follows.
• sRGB
• AppleRGB
• Custom
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. (The attached ICC profile on devices is
available.)
<Output Profile>
There is no user selection for output profile. Sharp provides Custom profile. Upload
of profile supports by service. The tool is set on the Web (service setting). The
concrete method of profile making is to be considered separately.
Pantone color For Pantone color support, the profile upload can be made by Web setting. No Yes No

(9) Windows driver function b. Paper feed system

PCL5-c/6: N mode standard, G model option (Installation of the
Function PCL5-c/6 PS SPLC-c PPD
printer expansion kit (MX-PBX1) and expansion of memory
Paper Size A2 (Fit To N/A A2 (Fit To N/A
(256MB) are required.)
Page) Page)
PS: Option (Installation of the printer expansion kit (MX-PBX1) and (PCL6 only)
the PS3 expansion kit (MX-PKX1) and expansion of memory 12 x 18, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 14,
(256MB) are required.) 7.25 x 10.5, 8.5 x 13, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K, 16K, DL, C5,
SPLC-c: G model only COM10, Monarch, Custom Paper
Paper Selection Paper Source Auto
a. Frequently used functions Paper Type Selection/
Paper
Function PCL5-c/6 PS SPLC-c PPD Source /
Copies (Copy 1-999 Paper Type
processing by Different Paper Cover Page N/A
MFP/Printer Last Page N/A
firmware) Other Page N/A
Orientation Portrait/Landscape Transparency Blank/Printed
Duplex 2-Sided (Book) Inserts
2-Sided (Tablet) Tab Printing Image Shift N/A
Pamphlet 2-Up Pamphlet N/A Tab Paper N/A
(Pamphlet Tiled Pamphlet Printing
processing by Multiple 2-Up N/A (PCL6 only)
MFP/Printer Pamphlet Set Tray Status Set Paper Size N/A
firmware) Multiple Tiled N/A Set Paper Type
Pamphlet Paper Type Display Name N/A
Binding Edge Top/Left/Right N/A Name (USER
N-Up Printing 1-Up, 2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up, (Windows NT: N/A) TYPE 1-7)
8-Up, 9-Up, 16-Up (Windows 9x: Input Tray Two Trays/Three Trays/Four Trays N/A
1-Up/2-Up/4-up) Options
Black N-Up Yes/No N/A
c. Paper exit method
Border
N-Up Order [2-Up]
Function PCL5-c/6 PS SPLC-c PPD
Left to Right
Output Tray Center Tray/Right Tray/Offset Tray/Saddle
Right to Left
Stitch Tray
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]
Right, and Down Staple None/1-Staple/2-Staples
Down, and Right Punch Yes/No
Left, and Down No Offset Yes/No
Down, and Left Large Capacity Tray None/MX-LCX1
Output Tray Options None/Finisher/Saddle Stitch Finisher
Punch Module None/2 Holes/3 Holes/4 Holes/4 Holes (Wide)
Right Tray Yes/No

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 12

d. Exposure

Function PCL5-c/6 PS SPLC-c PPD

Resolution 600 x 600dpi 1200 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi
300 x 300dpi (monochrome only) 300 x 300dpi
600 x 600dpi
Color Mode Auto/Color(CMYK)/Monochrome (K only)
ICM Method (Cannot be specified N/A OFF N/A OFF
with the monochrome mode) System (Windows ICM). Effective only when Color Options is Custom.
Windows NT: N/A
Printer N/A Printer
N/A Driver N/A
Rendering Intent (Cannot be When ICM Method is anything other than Custom: Default Perceptual matching
specified with the monochrome When ICM Method is Custom: Relative colorimetric
mode) Perceptual matching Saturation matching
Relative colorimetric Absolute colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
ICC Profile Selection (Cannot be Source Profile (Monitor Profile) When Windows ICM is off: Source Profile (Monitor
specified with the monochrome When Windows ICM is off: None Profile)
mode) None sRGB sRGB
sRGB Apple RBG Apple RGB
Apple RGB Custom
Custom
When Windows ICM is on:
Monitor Profile installed in PC
Print Priority (Cannot be specified 1 bit or 2 bit 1bit only 1 bit or 2 bit
with the monochrome mode) 2 bit or 4 bit N/A 2 bit or 4 bit
Contrast 0-100 N/A
* Some OS may not allow one-
number-to-next specification for
setup values.
Brightness 0-100 N/A
* Some OS may not allow one-
number-to-next specification for
setup values.
Saturation (Cannot be specified 0-100 N/A
with the monochrome mode)
* Some OS may not allow one-
number-to-next specification for
setup values.
Color Balance (RGB) 0-100 N/A
(Cannot be specified with the
monochrome mode)
* Some OS may not allow one-
number-to-next specification for
setup values.
Text To Black (Can be specified only Yes/No N/A
with the monochrome mode)
Vector To Black (Can be specified Yes/No N/A
only with the monochrome mode)
Toner Save (1bit only) Yes/No N/A Yes/No
Screen Setting (Cannot be specified Default
with the monochrome mode) Photo
Text & Graphic
Pure Black Print (Cannot be N/A Yes/No N/A Yes/No
specified with the monochrome
mode)
Black Overprint (Cannot be N/A Yes/No N/A Yes/No
specified with the monochrome
mode)
CMYK Simulation (Cannot be N/A Yes/No N/A Off/
specified with the monochrome In case of Yes: Default/Custom
mode) Default /Custom
Bitmap Compression None None N/A N/A
(PCL6 only)
Image Type Standard/Graphics/Photo/Custom
CAD N/A CAD
Neutral Grays (Cannot be specified Black Only N/A Black Only
with the monochrome mode) 4-Color 4-Color

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 13

e. Font Function PCL5-c/6 PS SPLC-c PPD
Auto Job Yes/No N/A
Function PCL5-c/6 PS SPLC-c PPD Control Review
Font Source Resident Font N/A Tandem Print Yes/No N/A
Download Font
Set Tandem IP Address (Slave Machine) N/A
Font Substitution N/A Print
Download Font Type TrueType (Type 42) N/A Yes Auto Yes N/A
Bitmap (Type 3) N/A Configuration
N/A Adobe N/A
(Type1) (10) Macintosh driver functions
As Graphics N/A
a. Frequently used functions
f. Other functions
Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4
Function PCL5-c/6 PS SPLC-c PPD Copies 1-999
Watermark Transparent Text Orientation Portrait/Landscape
Overwrite Text Duplex 2-Sided (Long)
Outline Text 2-Sided (Short)
Yes Image Stamp N/A Pamphlet (Pamphlet Tiled Pamphlet
(PCL6 processing by MFP/ Multiple Tiled Pamphlet
only) Printer firmware) (Only more than 10.2)
Overlay Create Overlay N/A Binding Edge Top/Left/Right N/A Top/Left/Right
Load Overlay N-Up Printing 1-Up/2-Up/4-Up/6-Up/9-Up/16-Up
Delete N-Up Border Yes/No
Query Page Overlay
N-Up Order [2-Up]
Rotate 180 Yes/No Yes/No Left to Right
degrees Right to Left
Collate Yes/No [4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]
Carbon Copy Top Copy N/A Right, and Down
Carbon Copy Down, and Right
Fit To Page A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, N/A Left, and Down
8.5 x 14, 7.25 x 10.5/8.5 x 13/5.5 x 8.5, Down, and Left
8K, 16K, DL, C5, COM10, Monarch
Poster 2 x 2/3 x 3/ 2 x 2/3 x 3/4 x 4 N/A b. Paper feed method
4x4
(PCL6 Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4
only) Paper Size Setting 12 x 18, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11,
Poster Dash Yes/No Yes/No N/A 8.5 x 14, 7.25 x 10.5, 8.5 x 13, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K,
Border (PCL6 16K, DL, C5, COM10, Monarch, Custom Paper
only) Paper Selection Auto Select
Poster Overlap Yes/No Yes/No N/A Paper Source
(PCL6 Paper Type
only) Different Paper Cover Page
Margin Shift None/10mm (0.4 inch)/20mm (0.8 inch)/30mm (1.2 Transparency Inserts Blank/Printed
(Margin Shift inch) Tab Printing N/A
processing by Set Tray Status N/A
MFP/Printer Paper Type Name Yes
firmware (USER TYPE 1-7)
Zoom 25% – 400% Input Tray Options Two Trays/ N/A Two Trays/
N/A X-Y Zoom N/A Three Trays/ Three Trays/
Mirror Image N/A No Mirror N/A None Four Trays Four Trays
Image Vertical
Vertical Horizontal c. Paper exit method
Horizontal
Graphics Mode Vector / N/A Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4
Raster Output Tray Center Tray/Right Tray/Offset Tray/Saddle
PS Pass N/A Yes/No N/A Stitch Tray
Through Staple None/1-Staple/2-Staples
PS Error N/A Yes/No N/A Yes/No Punch Yes/No
Printing No Offset Yes/No
Job N/A None/ N/A Large Capacity Tray None/MX- N/A None/MX-
Compression Fastest/Fast/ LCX1 LCX1
Medium/Best Output Tray Options None/ N/A None /
Compression Finisher/ Finisher/
Retention Hold Only N/A Saddle Stitch Saddle Stitch
Hold After Printd Finisher Finisher
Sample Print Punch Module None / N/A None /
Password 2 Holes / 2 Holes /
Document Quick File N/A 3 Holes / 3 Holes /
Filing Main Folder 4 Holes / 4 Holes /
Custom Folder 4 Holes 4 Holes
User Login Name N/A (Wide) (Wide)
Authentication Password Right Tray Yes/No N/A Yes/No
Job ID User Name N/A
Job Name
Notify Job End Yes/No N/A

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 14

d. Exposure e. Font

Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4 Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4
Resolution 600 x 600dpi Font Source (Resident N/A
Color Mode Auto/Color (CMYK) /Monochrome (K only) Font/Download Font)
ICM Method ColorSync OFF N/A OFF Font Substitution N/A
(Cannot be specified System N/A System Download Font Type Yes N/A
with the monochrome (10.3 only)
mode) Printer f. Other functions
* Specification
depending on OS Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4
Rendering Intent Perceptual matching Watermark Transparent Text/Overwrite Text/Outline Text
* Specification Relative colorimetric Overlay N/A
depending on OS Saturation matching Rotate 180 degrees Yes/No N/A Yes/No
Absolute colorimetric Collate Yes/No
ICC Profile Selection Source N/A Source Carbon Copy N/A
(Cannot be specified Profile Profile Fit To Page N/A
with the monochrome (Monitor (Monitor
Poster N/A
mode) Profile) Profile)
Black Poster Border N/A
* Specification sRGB sRGB
depending on OS Apple RGB Apple RGB Poster Overlap N/A
Custom Custom Margin Shift None/10mm/20mm/30mm (1.2inch)
(10.3 only) (Margin Shift
Print Priority 1 bit or 2 bit processing by MFP/
(Cannot be specified Printer firmware
2 bit or 4 bit
with the monochrome Zoom 25% – 400%
mode) Mirror None N/A
Contrast N/A Vertical
* Some OS may not Horizontal
allow one-number-to- Graphics Mode N/A
next specification for PS Pass through N/A
setup values PS Error Printing Yes/No
Brightnesst N/A 0-100 Job Compression N/A
* Some OS may not Retention Hold Only, N/A Hold Only,
allow one-number-to- Hold After Hold After
next specification for Print, Sample Print, Sample
setup values Print, Pass Print, Pass
Saturationt N/A 0-100 Code Code
(Cannot be specified Document Filing N/A Quick File
with the monochrome Main Folder
mode) Custom
* Some OS may not Folder
allow one-number-to- User Authentication Login Name N/A Login Name
next specification for Password Password
setup values
Job ID N/A User Name
Color Balance (RGB) N/A Job Name
(Cannot be specified
Notify Job End N/A
with the monochrome
Auto Job Control N/A
mode)
Review
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-to- Tandem Print N/A Yes/No
next specification for Set Tandem Print N/A IP Address
setup values (Slave
Text To Black N/A Machine)
Vector To Black N/A Auto Configuration Yes N/A Yes
(10.3 only)
Toner Save (1bit only) Yes/No
Screen Setting Default
(Cannot be specified Photo
F. Document filing function
with the monochrome Test & Graphic (1) Basic function
mode)
Pure Black Print Yes/No Capacity for document Main folder 10GB
(Cannot be specified filing Custom folder
with the monochrome Quick file folder 10GB
mode) Pages or files for Main folder 1,400 pages or 1,000
Black Overprint Yes/No allowed for filing Custom folder files (SHARP standard
(Cannot be specified document)
with the monochrome Quick file folder 1,400 pages or 1,000
mode) files (SHARP standard
CMYK Simulation Off document)
(Cannot be specified Default Maximum number of Maximum of 500 folders
with the monochrome Custom user folder
mode)
Number of users Depends on the number of user registrations.
Bitmap Compression N/A allowed for registration (Maximum of 200 users)
Image Type Standard/Graphic/Photo/CAD/Custom
Neutral Grays Black Only
(Cannot be specified 4-Color
with the monochrome
mode)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 15

(2) Data saving for each function 3. Ambient conditions
Quick File Folder Main/Custom Folder A. Operating environmental conditions (Main
Job
Shared Confidential Shared Confidential unit)
storage storage storage storage
Temperature: 10qC – 35qC, Humidity: 20 – 85%RH
Copy Yes No Yes Yes
Printer Yes Yes Yes
Air pressure: 590 – 1013hPa (height: 0 – 2000m)
Direct print (FTP) Yes No No
Direct print (e-mail) Yes Yes No Humidity (RH)
Direct print (Web) Yes No No 85%
Scan to e-mail/FTP Yes Yes No
Scan to SMB --- --- --- 60%
Scan to USB --- --- ---
memory
Fax reception No No No
Fax transmission Yes Yes No 20%
Internet Fax No No No
reception
Internet Fax Yes Yes No
transmission
PC-Fax/PC-Internet Yes Yes Yes
Fax transmisson B. Ambient conditions for transporting (Main
Remote PC Scan --- --- --- unit)
Scan to HDD No Yes Yes
–20qC to 45qC (No condensation)
G. Safety and environmental protection
standards Humidity (RH)
90%
(1) Safety standards
60%
100V type 200V type
Safety standard Electrical safety law: EN60950
J60950(compliant) IEC60825 (Laser)
UL60950, 21CFR GB4943 (China)
(Laser) 20%
CSA C22.2 No.60950
CNS14336 (Taiwan)
EMC VCCI Class A EN55022 Class A
FCC Class B CISPR22 Class A
High harmonic guideline EN61000-3-2
ICES Class B (Canada) EN61000-3-3 C. Standard environmental conditions (Supply)
CNS 13438 (Taiwan) GB9254, GB17625.1, • An available life time under an environmental condition.
GB/T17618 (China)
1) Photoconductor drum
Line standard (for Validation of Technology TS 103 021, EG 201
Fax expansion) Standard Conformance 120, EG 201 121 36 months from the production month
(Electrical (Europe) 2) Photoconductor drum unit
Communications Project AS/ACIF S0002
24 months from the production month
Law) (Australia)
FCC part 68 GB/T 3382.1-2003, GB/T 3) Toner (K)/Color toner (C/M/Y)
ICCS-03 3382.2-2003, YD/T 514- 24 months from the production month
PSTN01 (Taiwan) 1998, YD/T 589-1996,
YD/T 703-1993, YD/T D. Operating environmental conditions (Supply)
965-1998, YD/T 993-
1998 (China)
Humidity (RH)
(2) Environmental Readiness 85%
• International Energy Star Program MFP (EPA) 60%
• The Eco Mark Program
• Environmental Choice Program (ECP)
• New Blue Angel
• Nordic Swan 20%
• European ROHS regulations
• Chinese ROHS
• WEEE (Following to SHARP super green product declaration.)

E. Ambient conditions for transporting

–20qC to 45qC (No condensation)

F. Ambient storage conditions (Supply) (packed

conditions)
–10qC to 40qC (No condensation)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 16

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

[3]
MX2700N
CONSUMABLE PARTS 5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Supply system table

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
No. Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 18K *1 MX-27NTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Black toner : Net 440g) at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27NTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Cyan toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27NTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Magenta toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27NTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Yellow toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
1 5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 100K MX-27NVBA
(Black developer : Net 265g)
6 Developer Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 60K MX-27NVSA
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow developer : Net 265g)
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 100K (Black) MX-27NRSA
60K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included) x1 100K (Black) MX-27NUSA
Color identification seal (Bk/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 60K (Color)

*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.

B. European Subsidiary/Australia/New Zealand

No. Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 18K *1 MX-27GTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Black toner : Net 440g) at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27GTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Cyan toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27GTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Magenta toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27GTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Yellow toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
1 5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 100K MX-27GVBA
(Black developer : Net 265g)
6 Developer Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 60K MX-27GVSA
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow developer : Net 265g)
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 100K (Black) MX-27GRSA
60K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included) x1 100K (Black) MX-27GUSA
Color identification seal (Bk/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 60K (Color)

*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.

C. Asia-Subsidiary/Hong Kong
No. Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 18K *1 MX-27ATBA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Black toner : Net 440g) at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27ATCA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Cyan toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27ATMA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Magenta toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27ATYA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Yellow toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
1 5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 100K MX-27AVBA
(Black developer : Net 265g)
6 Developer Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 60K MX-27AVSA
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow developer : Net 265g)
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 100K (Black) MX-27ARSA
60K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included) x1 100K (Black) MX-27AUSA
Color identification seal (Bk/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 60K (Color)

*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.

MX-2300/2700 N/G CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

D. Middle East/Africa/Israel/Philippines/Taiwan
No. Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 18K *1 MX-27FTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Black toner : Net 440g) at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27FTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Cyan toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27FTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Magenta toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27FTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Yellow toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
1 5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 100K MX-27FVBA
(Black developer : Net 265g)
6 Developer Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 60K MX-27FVSA
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow developer : Net 265g)
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 100K (Black) MX-27FRSA
60K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included) x1 100K (Black) MX-27FUSA
Color identification seal (Bk/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 60K (Color)

*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.

E. China
No. Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 18K *1 MX-27CTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Black toner : Net 440g) at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27CTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Cyan toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27CTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Magenta toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27CTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Yellow toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
1 5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 100K MX-27CVBA
(Black developer : Net 265g)
6 Developer Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 60K MX-27CVSA
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow developer : Net 265g)
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 100K (Black) MX-27CRSA
60K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included) x1 100K (Black) MX-27CUSA
Color identification seal (Bk/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 60K (Color)

*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.

MX-2300/2700 N/G CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 2

2. Maintenance parts list
A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America/Asia/Middle East/Agencies
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 200K MX-270HK
Fuser gear x1
Upper separation pawl x4
Upper thermistor sub x1
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Lower heat roller x1
Lower thermistor x1
Lower heat roller bearing x2
2 Primary transfer kit Intermediate transfer belt x1 100K MX-270Y1
Primary transfer blade x1
Primary transfer conductive collar x4
Transfer cleaning roller x1
PS paper dust removal cleaner x1
3 Secondary transfer kit Secondary transfer belt x1 300K MX-270Y2
Secondary transfer roller x1
Secondary drive idle gear x1
Upper thermistor x1
Primary transfer roller x4
Belt drive gear x1
4 Filter kit Ozone filter PA x1 100K MX-270FL
5 Waste toner box kit Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3) x1 50K MX-270HB Each color 5% coverage, color
ratios 25%
6 DV seal kit DV seal x3 Black: 100K, MX-270DS
DV side seal F/R x3 Color: 60K
Toner filter x3
7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times AR-SC2 For saddle finisher
8 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times MX-SCX1 For inner finisher
9 Primary transfer belt unit For service rotation x1 MX-270U1
10 Secondary transfer belt unit For service rotation x1 MX-270U2
11 Fusing unit For service rotation (Heater lamp 120V) x1 MX-270FU1
For service rotation (Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-270FU

B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand/Taiwan
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 200K MX-270UH
Fuser gear x1
Upper separation pawl x4
Upper thermistor sub x1
Upper heat roller bearing x2
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x1 200K MX-270LH
Lower thermistor x1
Lower heat roller bearing x2
3 Primary transfer kit Intermediate transfer belt x1 100K MX-270B1
Primary transfer blade x1
Primary transfer conductive collar x4
Transfer cleaning roller x1
PS paper dust removal cleaner x1
4 Primary transfer roller kit Primary transfer roller x4 300K MX-270X1
Belt drive gear x1
5 Secondary transfer belt kit Secondary transfer belt x1 300K MX-270B2
6 Secondary transfer roller kit Secondary transfer roller x1 300K MX-270X2
Secondary drive idle gear x1
Upper thermistor x1
7 Filter kit Ozone filter PA x1 100K MX-270FL
8 Waste toner box kit Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x3) x1 50K MX-270HB Each color 5% coverage, color
ratios 25%
9 DV seal kit DV seal x3 Black: 100K, MX-270DS
DV side seal F/R x3 Color: 60K
Toner filter x3
10 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times AR-SC2 For saddle finisher
11 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times MX-SCX1 For inner finisher
12 Primary transfer belt unit For service rotation x1 MX-270U1
13 Secondary transfer belt unit For service rotation x1 MX-270U2
14 Fusing unit For service rotation (Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-270FU
For service rotation (Heater lamp 100V) x1 MX-270FU2

MX-2300/2700 N/G CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 3

3. Production number identification C. Toner cartridge
A. Drum cartridge The label indicating the management number is attached to the
side of the toner cartridge.

Part name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as Destination
follows. Toner color Incompatibility
The number is printed on the flange on the front side. The laser Production
print shows the production year and month. place
Production
year/month/day
1: Number
For this model, this digit is 2. Version
2: Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. H for this model. Serial No. in production day
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year. Example: 134th of production on August 24, 2005
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
7: Number
Indicates the production month.
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the day of packing.
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory. "C" for China.

B. Developer

BK

C. M .Y

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol-
lows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.

1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.

MX-2300/2700 N/G CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 4

[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Identification of each section and functions

A. External view

1
2 3 4 5 6 7

When the auto document

feeder is not installed: When the options (the finisher, the
paper pass unit, and the saddle stitch
finisher) are not installed.

When the option (the finisher) is

installed (When the option (the
saddle stitch finisher) is not installed.).

9 10 11 12 13 14
No. Name Function/ Operation Note
1 Document cover Holds a document.
2 Auto document feeder *1, *2 This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided
originals can be automatically scanned.
3 Front cover Open this cover when turning ON/OFF the main power switch or replacing
the toner cartridge.
4 Interface unit *1 Feeds the output paper to the saddle finisher.
5 Operation panel Used to set the functions and enter the copy quantity.
6 Paper exit tray unit (Right tray) *1 Receives discharged paper if installed and set.
7 Paper exit tray (Center tray) Copied or printed paper is discharged to this tray.
8 Finisher *1 Staples paper, and makes punch holes if the punch unit is installed.
9 Saddle stitch finisher *1 Staples and outputs paper. It is also provided with the center-stapling
function. Makes punch holes if the punch unit is installed.
10 Tray 1 Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
11 Tray 2 Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
12 Tray 3 (When the stand/1 x 500 sheet Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
paper drawer or the stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed) *1
13 Tray 4 (When the stand/2 x 500 sheet Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
paper drawer is installed) *1
14 Tray 5 (When the large capacity paper Stores paper. Max. 3500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
feed tray is installed) *1

*1: Peripheral unit (option): The peripheral units are options. Some model is provided with this unit as a standard unit.
*2: The MX-2300N/2700N are equipped standard with peripheral unit.

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 1

B. Internal structure

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 13
No. Name Function/ Operation Note
1 Toner cartridge Contains toner. If toner is exhausted, remove the cartridge of
exhausted color and replace it with a new one.
2 Fusing section Fuses images transferred on paper by heat. Note: The fusing section is heated to a
high temperature. Be careful not to burn
when paper jam.
3 Transfer belt In full color copy, the transfer belt overlaps 4-color toner images on the Do not touch or scratch. It may cause
transfer belt. In black copy, black toner images are shifted to the degraded images.
transfer belt.
4 Right side cover This cover is opened to operate the fusing section pressure
adjustment lever or to remove a paper jam.
5 Paper reverse section cover Used to reverse paper in duplex print or to remove a paper jam.
6 Manual feed tray In manual paper feed, paper is inserted from this tray. When paper
greater than A4R or 8-1/2” x 11” R, be sure to pull out the auxiliary tray.
7 Main power switch Turns on the power of the machine. When FAX or internet is used, The main power lamp may remain ON
keep it ON. for about 1 minute after turning OFF the
main power switch. (When the main
power is turned OFF in the nighttime
FAX mode and OFF mode or when the
power outlet is disconnected. (This is
because the amount of electric charges
is great when only the resident power is
supplied.))
8 Waste toner box Receives waste toner when copying or printing. The waste toner box is collected by the
servicemen.
9 Waste toner box release button Press this button to release lock of the waste toner box when replacing
the waste toner box or cleaning the wiring unit.
10 Handle Used to lift the machine for transit.
11 2-stage paper feed desk right side Open this cover to remove a paper jam in the tray 3 or 4.
cover (When the 2-stage paper feed
desk is installed)
12 Paper feed tray right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper jam in the tray 1 or 2.
13 Right side cover open lever Lift this lever and open the right side cover to remove a paper jam.

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 2

C. Auto document feeder and document cover
• Auto document feeder
1 2
8
• Document cover
No. Name
1 Document feed roller
2 Document feed section cover
3 Document guide
4 Document set table
5 Document exit section
6 Document scan section
7 Document size detection plate
8 Document reverse tray
9 Document stocker
10 Document table (Glass surface)
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 3
3 4 5 6 7
10
10
Function/ Operation Note
Transports a document automatically.
This cover is opened when removing a paper jam or cleaning the
document feed roller.
Guides to scan a document properly. Set to the set document size.
A document is set on this table. In the case of a single-surface
document, set it face up.
The scanned document is discharged to this section.
The document set on the document set table is scanned in this
section.
Detects the size of a document set on the document table (glass
surface).
When scanning a document, it is temporarily discharged to this
section to be reversed for scanning the back surface.
Stores documents.
Used for thick documents or book documents which cannot be
entered to the auto document feeder.
D. Connectors

1
2
3
Service-only connector

No. Name Function/ Operation Note

1 USB connector (Type A) Used to connect a USB hub or USB memory.
2 USB connector (Type B) Used to connect a computer to use this machine as a printer.
3 LAN connector Used to connect a LAN cable to use this machine in a network.

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 4

E. Operation panel

1 2 3 4 5

PRINT
DOCUMENT READY
FILING DATA

LINE
IMAGE SEND DATA

COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS

LOGOUT

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
No. Name Function/ Operation Note
1 Touch panel A message or a key is displayed on the LCD screen. Touch the
displayed key with your finger to perform various operations. When the
displayed key is touched, a sound is generated and the selected item is
highlighted to confirm.
2 Mode select key/Lamp Used to switch the display mode of the touch panel. The lamp of the
selected key is lighted.
• [Document Filing] key
Press this key to switch to the document filing mode in order to store
a document to the hard disk in the form of a image or to print or send
the image stored in the hard disk.
• [FAX/Image send] key ([Image send] key for the models without the
FAX function)
Press this key to switch to the FAX mode/network scanner in order to
use the FAX function or the scanner function.
• Communicating lamp
This lamp is lighted during sending or receiving in the FAX mode, and
lighted during sending in the scanner mode.
• Data lamp
This lamp flashes when FAX data cannot be outputted due to paper
empty, etc. If there is data which has not been sent, the lamp is
lighted.
• [COPY] key
Press this key to switch to the copy mode in order to use the copy
function. When this key is pressed continuously, the total copy
quantity and the toner remaining quantity can be checked.
3 Printer lamp (Ready lamp/Data lamp) • Ready lamp
When this lamp is lighted, print data can be received.
• Data lamp
This lamp flashes during reception of print data, and lights up during
printing.
4 Numeric key (10-key) Used to enter the copy quantity or the FAX number, etc.
5 [C] key Used to clear the set value of copy quantity, etc. to “0.”
6 [Job status] key Press this key to display the job status. On the job status screen, the
details of the job can be checked and the job can be terminated.
7 [System setting] key When this key is pressed, the system setting menu screen is displayed
to allow the paper feed tray setting, destination registration, and other
setting for easy operations of this machine.
8 [Logout/Tone] key ([Logout] key for the Used to logout after user authentication. Used to deliver the tone signal
models without the FAX function) in the dial line when the FAX function is used.
9 [Program] key Used to use the job program when the copy function is used, and to dial
when the FAX function is used.
10 [CA] key Press this key to reset the operation, cancel setting, and start from the
initial state.
11 [STOP] key Used to stop copying and scanning a document.
12 [BLACK START] key Used to scan a document in black.
13 [COLOR START] key Used to make a color copy in the copy mode and to scan a document in
colors. When the FAX or the internet FAX is used, this key cannot be
used.
14 [Power save] key/Lamp Used to set the machine to the auto power shut off mode of power
saving. [Power save] key flashes in the auto power shut off mode.
15 [Power] key Turns ON/OFF the power of the machine.
Used in the FAX nighttime mode when the FAX is installed.
16 Main power lamp This lamp lights up when the main power switch of the machine is ON.

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 5

F. Print and send status (Job status)

1 2 3 Complete job
status screen

JOB QUEUE SETS / PROGRESS STATUS SPOOL SPOOL

COPY 020 / 001 COPYING  JOB QUEUE JOB QUEUE

COMPLETE COMPLETE
COPY 020 / 000 PAPER EMPTY
DETAIL DETAIL
BBB BBB 020 / 000 WAITING PRIORITY

0312345678 002 / 000 WAITING STOP/DELETE CALL

PRINT JOB SCANNER FAX JOB INTERNET-FAX INTERNET-FAX

4 5 6 7 8 9
No. Name Function/ Operation Note
1 Paper empty display Supply paper. If the status display indicates “Paper empty,” the specified size paper is
empty. In this case, if paper is not supplied, the output is reserved and the job data in
standby state which can be outputted are outputted in priority. (When, however, paper is
exhausted during outputting, the priority output of another job data is not made.)
To select another paper size for outputting because the specified size paper cannot be
supplied immediately, touch the key of the job in the job list and touch “8. [DETAIL] key,”
and the paper size specification can be changed.
2 Job list • The list of jobs reserved, during execution, or completed is displayed. When [PRINT] key
is touched with the mode select key, the display of the job status screen select key is
changed over to display the list of “SPOOL”. The list indicates the jog outline and the
status.
• When a print job during spooling or an encrypted PDF is directly printed, the job is
displayed on the “SPOOL” screen. If there is a list of encrypted PDF files, touch the job
key and enter the password, and the selected job is shifted to the list of [Reserve/
Executing], and the job enters the standby state.
3 Job status screen select key The job list display is switched to one of “SPOOL” job, “JOB QUEUE” job, or “COMPLETE”
job.
“SPOOL”: When an encrypted PDF is printed directly, the print job list is displayed. Can be
displayed when the print job is displayed.
“JOB QUEUE”: The job list which is reserved or executing is displayed.
“COMPLETE”: The job list which completed is displayed.
4 Mode select key Used to select the print mode, the scanner mode, the Fax mode, or the internet FAX mode.
• [PRINT JOB] key displays the list of copy, printer, Fax receive, internet Fax receive, and
the self print.
• [SCANNER] key displays the send list of the scanner function.
• [FAX JOB] key displays the send list of the Fax and the PC-Fax functions.
• [INTERNET FAX] key displays the send list of the internet Fax and the PC-Internet Fax
function.
5 [p] [n] keys Selects the page of the displayed job list.
6 [STOP/DELETE] key Used to stop or delete the job which is executing or to delete a selected or reserved job.
However, the FAX receive print jog and the internet Fax receive print job cannot be stopped
or deleted.
7 [PRIORITY] key When a job is selected in the reserved jobs displayed in the job list of “JOB QUEUE” screen
and the key is touched, the job reservation priority is changed to the top priority.
For a print job, select a priority job and touch this key, and the previous copying or printing
is interrupted and the selected job copy or print is started. After completion of the selected
job, the interrupted job is resumed from the interrupted point.
8 [DETAIL] key Used to display the details of the selected job. When the automatic temporal save of the
document filing function or filing is executed, or when sequential broadcasting send is
executed with the FAX/image send function, the key display is made in the complete job
status screen. When this key is touched, the details of the completed jobs are displayed
and reprint or resend of the job can be executed by touching [CALL] key.
9 [CALL] key When the displayed key is touched on the complete job status screen and [CALL] key is
touched, the operation (reprint or resend) of the touched job is executed. Same as when
[DETAIL] key is touched and [CALL] key is touched.

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 6

G. Sensors

MHPS OCSW TFD2 POD2 HOPS

TFD3
POD3

APPD1
DSW_ADU
POD1

REGS_F/R
1TUD_K PCS_CL/K
1TUD_CL
APPD2
MPFD
MPED
MPWD
TCS_Y MTOP1
TCS_M MTOP2
TCS_C
MPLD
TH_M/HUD_M
DHPD_CL PPD1
TCS_K PPD2
DHPD_K
CPFD1
DSW_C

CPFD2

CPED1 CLUD1 CSS1 CSPD1 CSS2 CPED2 CSPD2 CLUD2

Signal name Name Function/Operation Type NOTE

1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL detection Detects the transfer belt separation CL.
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation BK detection Detects the transfer belt separation BK.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass. Transmission type
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass. Transmission type
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP Detects tray 1 upper limit. Transmission type
detection)
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP Detects tray 2 upper limit. Transmission type
detection)
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects tray 1 paper empty. Transmission type
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects tray 2 paper empty. Transmission type
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry Detects tray 1 paper pass. Transmission type
detection)
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry Detects tray 2 paper pass. Transmission type
detection)
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Detects tray 1 paper remaining quantity.
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Detects tray 2 paper remaining quantity.
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection Detects the tray 1.
CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection Detects the tray 2.
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase.
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BK phase.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close. Transmission type
DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close.
detection
HOPS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position. Transmission type
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty. Transmission type

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 7

Signal name Name Function/Operation Type NOTE
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry. Transmission type
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length. Manual paper
feed unit
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width. Volume resistor
detector
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out Transmission type Manual paper
detector 1 position (storing position). feed unit
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out Transmission type Manual paper
detector 1 position (pull-out position). feed unit
OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection trigger. Transmission type
PCS_CL/K Process control sensor Detects the toner patch density. Reflection type
POD1 Fusing after-detection Detects the paper exit from fusing. Transmission type
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper from paper exit. Transmission type
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray.
PPD1 Registration pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller. Transmission type
PPD2 Registration detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller.
REGS_F/R Resist sensor Detects the resist shift. Reflection type
TCS_C Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (C). Magnetic sensor
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). Magnetic sensor
TCS_M Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (M). Magnetic sensor
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (Y). Magnetic sensor
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face down paper exit tray full Transmission type
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full.
TH_M/HUD_M Temperature/humidity detection Detects the temperature/humidity.

H. Switches

PWRSW

DSW-R

DHSW

MSW
DSW-F

1TNFD

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation Note

1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Mechanical switch Detects the waste toner full.
DHSW Dehumidifier heater switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the power lone of the dehumidifier heaters
(Japan only) provided in the scanner (reading) section and the paper
feed section.
DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF
the power line of the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF
the power line of the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
MSW Main SW Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 8

I. Clutches and solenoids

1TURC
LSUSS1
MPGS PCSS

MPFS MPUC

CPUC1
CPFC
CPUC2

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation Note

1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the primary transfer separation
mode.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport
roller in the paper feed tray section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 1 section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 2 section.
LSUSS1 LSU shutter solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
feed) feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls open/close of the manual paper
feed gate solenoid.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper
feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the shutter of the process
control and the registration sensor.

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 9

J. Drive motors

MIM PGM

OSM TNM_Y
POM
TNM_M
FUM
TNM_C
WTNM DVM_CL
TNM_K DM_CL
DVM_K DM_K
RRM
ADUM_L

PFM

CPFM
CLUM1

CLUM2

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation Note

ADUM_L ADU motor lower Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper DC brush-less motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
feed tray 1)
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper DC brush-less motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
feed tray 2)
CPFM Paper feed motor Brush-less motor Drives the paper feed section.
DM_CL Drum motor (CL) Stepping motor Drives the color OPC drum unit.
DM_K Drum motor (K) Stepping motor Drives the black OPC drum unit.
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (CL) Brush-less motor Drives the developing section (CL).
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Brush-less motor Drives the developing section/transfer section (K).
FUM Fusing drive motor Stepping motor Drives the fusing unit.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner (reading) section.
OSM Shifter motor Stepping motor Performs offset of paper.
PFM PS front motor Stepping motor Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed
section, transport between the resist roller and the right door
section.
PGM Polygon motor DC brushless motor Scans the laser beam
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
RRM Registration motor Stepping motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
TNM_C Toner motor C Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_K Toner motor K Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_M Toner motor M Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_Y Toner motor Y Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Synchronous motor Stirs waste toner.

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 10

K. Lamps

CLI

CCFT

DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
DL_K
HL_UM

HL_US

HL_LM

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation Note

CCFT LCD backlight CCFT cool cathode ray tube Backlight for the CCD
CLI Scanner lamp Xenon lamp Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan
document images.
DL_C Discharge lamp C LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp K LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Heats the upper heat roller. (Sub)

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 11

 1 : December 15 2005

L. Fans and filters

POFM_R

POFM_F

HDDFM
CPUFM

PSFM

OZFM

Signal name Name Function/Operation Note

CPUFM Controller cooling fan motor Cools the controller PWB.
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor Cools the HDD.
OZFM Ozone fan motor Exhausts ozone.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit.

No. Name Function/Operation Note

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.
1 3 Paper exit filter

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 12

M. PWB

DV
32

16 31
15

12
17
14
LSU
18
13
9 33
10 37 30
19
21 29
20
38
28

7
control box
1 6
27

23 8
26
22
34
4 25
11 24
2 35
5 36
3

No. Name Function/Operation Note

1 RD I/F PWB Detects the sensors in the right door unit.
2 Tray 1 detection PWB Detects the tray 1.
3 Tray 2 detection PWB Detects the tray 2.
4 DC power PWB Outputs the secondary side voltage.
5 Driver main PWB Drives the transport motor and related sections.
6 MC PWB Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias voltage.
7 Primary transfer PWB Generates the primary transfer voltage.
8 AC power PWB Controls the primary side power source.
9 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner section.
10 CCD PWB Scans the document images.
11 Phase detection PWB Adjusts the BL/CL drum phase.
12 CL inverter PWB Drives the xenon lamp.
13 Document detection light receiving PWB Outputs the document size detection signal.
14 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits the document size detection LED lights.
15 LCD INV PWB Generates the high voltage for the LCD backlight.
16 LVDS PWB Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
17 MFP OPE-P PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
18 Power SW PWB Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
19 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
20 Driver sub PWB Drives the process motor and related sections.
21 Secondary transfer PWB Generates the secondary transfer voltage and the transfer belt cleaning voltage.
22 Temperature/humidity sensor PWB Detects the ambient temperature and humidity.
23 Manual paper feed width detection PWB Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
24 MFPcnt PWB Controls images and the whole machine.
25 Mother PWB Interfaces the MFPcnt PWB and other PWB.
26 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
27 PCU Flash ROM PWB Controls the PCU PWB.
28 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
29 LSU CNT PWB Controls the LSU.
30 LSU thermistor Measures the temperature in the LSU.
31 DL PWB Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
32 DV initial PWB Detects the DV model.
33 LD PWB Controls laser lighting.

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 13

No. Name Function/Operation Note
34 SCAN IN PWB Rectifies the waveform of scanner image data.
DOCC PWB Recognizes the document control pattern. Option
35 BOOT ROM PWB Stores the program to boot the printer controller.
36 PROGRAM ROM PWB Stores the program.
37 SCN Flash ROM PWB Stores the scanner control program.
38 HVR PWB Divides the primary transfer electrode for each color to improve the transfer capability.

N. Fuses/Thermostats

18

2
3

13

14
15
16
17

4 9
5 10
6
7 11
8 12

No. Signal name Name Specifications Section

1 HLTS1 Thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller. Fusing unit
2 HLTS2 Thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller. Fusing unit
3 HLTS3 Thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller. Fusing unit
4 F201 Fuse T6.3AH250V DC power PWB
5 F202 Fuse T6.3AH250V DC power PWB
6 F203 Fuse T6.3AH250V DC power PWB
7 F204 Fuse T6.3AH250V DC power PWB
8 F205 Fuse T6.3AH250V DC power PWB
9 F1 Fuse 20A 125V AC power PWB
10 F2 Fuse 20A 125V AC power PWB
11 F3 Fuse T2AH250V AC power PWB
12 F4 Fuse T2AH250V AC power PWB
13 F1 Fuse 200mA 250V LCD INV PWB
14 F101 Fuse 125V 12A DC power PWB
15 F102 Fuse T1AH250V DC power PWB
16 F103 Fuse T8AH250V DC power PWB
17 F301 Fuse T5AH250V DC power PWB
18 F1 Fuse 1.25A250V CL invertor PWB

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 14

O. Adjustment volumes

VR402

VR205
VR204
VR201
VR203

Signal name Function/ Operation Section Note

VR201 +12V output adjustment DC power PWB
VR203 +24V output adjustment DC power PWB
VR204 +5VN output adjustment DC power PWB
VR205 +3.3V output adjustment DC power PWB
VR402 +5VO, +5VL output adjustment DC power PWB

P. Gate

No. Name Function/ Operation Note

1 ADU reverse gate Switches the paper route: discharged to the inner tray or
discharged to the right tray.
2 ADU gate lower Switches the transport route by switchback when paper is
transported to the duplex (ADU) section.

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 15

Q. Rollers

35 34 32 33

36

37
24
25
27
26

39
38
11
10
28
29
1
3
2

22 20
21
23 31
30
5 19
17
4 18
6
15
16
8 14

7
12
13
9

No. Name Function/ Operation Note

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separate paper to prevent against double feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
5 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
6 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
7 Paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
8 Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
9 Separation roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
10 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport
timing to adjust relative relations between images and paper.
11 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
12 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
13 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to the
transport roller 4.
14 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
15 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
16 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No.
2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
17 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
18 Transport roller 5 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
19 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
20 Transport roller 7 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 16

No. Name Function/ Operation Note
21 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the
transport roller 8.
22 Transport roller 8 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
23 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper to the resist roller.
24 Transport roller 9 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
25 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 13.
26 Transport roller 10 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
27 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
28 Transport roller 11 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
29 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
30 Transport roller 12 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
31 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. /
Transports the paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport
roller 8.
32 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 9 to the transport roller 1. /
Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
33 Transport roller 13 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
34 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
35 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. Transports paper to the right paper exit tray.
Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
36 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
37 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper.
38 Fusing roller (Heating) Heats toner on paper, and fuses it onto paper.
39 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating).

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 17

[6] ADJUSTMENTS
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per-
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
must be observed.
If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
not complete normally or trouble may occur.

2. Adjustment item list

Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation

ADJ 1 Developing doctor gap adjustment
ADJ 2 Developing roller main pole position adjustment
ADJ 3 Toner density reference control level setting
ADJ 4 High voltage adjustments ADJ 4A Main charger grid voltage adjustment 8-2
ADJ 4B Developing bias voltage adjustment 8-1
ADJ 4C Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 5 Image density sensor, image registration sensor ADJ 5A Color image density sensor calibration 44-13
adjustment ADJ 5B Color image density sensor, black image density sensor, image 44-2
registration sensor adjustment
ADJ 6 Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) 64-1/61-4
ADJ 7 OPC drum phase adjustment ADJ 7A OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) 50-22
ADJ 7B OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual adjustment) 44-31
ADJ 8 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment ADJ 8A Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main 50-10
(BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment)
ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10
ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment (Print engine section) ADJ 10A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub 50-22
scanning direction) (Auto adjustment)
ADJ 10B Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual 50-20
adjustment)
ADJ 10C Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual 50-21
adjustment)
ADJ 11 Scan image distortion adjustment ADJ 11A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
ADJ 11B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
ADJ 11C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
ADJ 11D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner)
ADJ 12 Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position adjustment)
ADJ 13 Scan image skew adjustment (RSPF) (Refer to MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment ADJ 14A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning 48-1
(Document table mode) direction) (Document table mode)
ADJ 14B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction) 48-1
(Document table mode)
ADJ 15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (RADF ADJ 15A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning 48-1
mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.) direction) (RADF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 15B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction) 48-1
(RADF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 16 Scan image off-center adjustment ADJ 16A Scan image off-center (Document table mode) 50-12
ADJ 16B Scan image off-center (RSPF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.) 50-12
ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10/50-1
ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment ADJ 18A Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table 50-1 (50-2)
mode)
ADJ 18B Copy image position, image loss adjustment (RSPF mode) (Refer to 50-6 (50-7)
the MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 19 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section) 50-5
ADJ 20 Copy color balance/density adjustment ADJ 20A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Normal document copy 63-3 (63-5)
mode)
ADJ 20B Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 46-24
ADJ 20C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 46-21
ADJ 20D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Whole 46-1
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
ADJ 20E Copy density adjustment (each monochrome copy mode) (Whole 46-2
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
ADJ 20F Copy color balance adjustment (Color balance adjustment at each 46-10
density level in each color copy mode) (Normally not required)
ADJ 20G Monochrome copy density adjustment (Density adjustment at each 46-16
density level in each monochrome copy mode) (Normally not
required)
ADJ 20H Gamma/density adjustment in the text image edge section 46-27
(Normally not required)

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 1

 2 : Jan. 15 2006

Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation

ADJ 20 Copy color balance/density adjustment ADJ 20I Copy color balance adjustment (Single color copy mode) (Normally 46-25
not required)
ADJ 20J Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto 26-53
adjustment enable setting and adjustment)
ADJ 20K Background process condition setting in the color auto copy mode 46-33
ADJ 20L Color document identification level (ACS operation) setting 46-33
ADJ 21 Printer color balance/density adjustment ADJ 21A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 67-24
ADJ 21B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25
ADJ 21C Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto 26-54
adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment)
ADJ 22 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
ADJ 23 Document size sensor adjustment ADJ 23A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-2
ADJ 23B Document size sensor sensitivity adjustment 41-2
ADJ 24 Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
ADJ 25 RSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.) 53-7
ADJ 26 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 27 Image loss, void area, image off-center, image ADJ 27A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio 50-28
magnification ratio auto adjustment with SIM50-28 automatic adjustment
ADJ 27B Image off-center automatic adjustment 50-28
ADJ 27C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off- 50-28
center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic
adjustment
ADJ 27D SPF mode image off-center, image lead edge position, sub 50-28
scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment

3. Details of adjustment

1 Developing doctor gap adjustment 2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.

This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:

* When the developing unit is disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* There is abnormally much toner dispersion.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.

1
2 3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.40mm between 40mm – 70mm
from the edge of the developing doctor.

70mm

70mm 40mm

40mm

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 2

 2 : Jan. 15 2006

4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi-
tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8 r
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel-
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures.

2 5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm – 70mm A

from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.40 r 0.05mm. 37.8 + 0.5mm 37.8 + 0.5mm
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.

70mm

70mm 40mm

40mm 6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing
screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.

2 Developing roller main pole position

adjustment
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the developing unit is disassembled.
Repeat procedures 3) – 6) until the developing roller main pole
* When the print image density is low.
position comes to the specified range.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
* When there is unevenness in the print image density. main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
* There is abnormally much toner dispersion. ment plate with the fixing screw.
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
ing unit on a flat surface.
2) Attach a thread to a needle or a pin. 3 Toner density reference control level
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing setting
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because it will not provide a cor-
rect position.) This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the * When developer is replaced.
needle with the needle at 2 – 3mm from the developing roller NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.) replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.

2㨪3mm

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 3

1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.
Error
Error name Detail of error
display
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level, 1.5V or below; control
AUTOMATIC DEVELOPER ADJUSTMENT voltage, 8.0V or above
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_K : xxx EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level, 3.45V or above;
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_C : xxx
control voltage, 2.0V or below
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_M : xxx EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level, other than 2.5V r 0.2V
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_Y : xxx 5) Use SIM24-5 to clear the developer counter.
K C M Y EXECUTE
1/2
6) Use SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
K NOTE:
EXECUTE
M a) When replacing developer, always replace all the three
EXECUTE or process interrupt colors of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
If only one color is replaced, color balance may be
0 adversely affected. Black developer can be replaced indi-
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE vidually.
AUTOMATIC DEVELOPER ADJUSTMENT
b) After replacement of developer or the photoconductor, be
TCD_K : xx TCV_K : xx
sure to execute SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction
TCD_C : xx TCV_C : xx
data.
TCD_M : xx TCV_M : xx

TCD_Y : xx TCV_Y : xx If the above procedure is neglected, the half-tone correc-

K C M Y EXECUTE
1/1 tion may not be performed correctly.

Adjustment completed
4 High voltage adjustments
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE 4-A Main charger grid voltage adjustment
AUTOMATIC DEVELOPER ADJUSTMENT This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_K : xxx
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_C : xxx

AT DEVE ADJ_L_M : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_M : xxx

* When U2 trouble occurs.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_Y : xxx * When the PCU PWB is replaced.
K C M Y EXECUTE
1/2 * When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
1) Enter SIM8-2 mode.
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE
Abnormal 0
AUTOMATIC DEVELOPER ADJUSTMENT
end TEST SIMULATION NO.08-02 CLOSE
TCD_K : EE-EL TCV_K :

TCD_C : xx TCV_C : MHV/GRID SETTING AND OUTPUT

A : xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
TCD_M : EE-EL TCV_M :

TCD_Y : xx TCV_Y :
A: xxx B: xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_C

C: xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_M

K C M Y EXECUTE
1/1 230 850 D: xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y

2) Close the front cabinet. MIDDLE LOW EXECUTE OK

3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
4) When [EXECUTE] key it pressed, it is highlighted. The devel-
10-key EXECUTE
oping roller rotates, and the toner sensor detects toner density,
and the output value is displayed. EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver-
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value. 0
CLOSE
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation TEST SIMULATION NO.08-02

is completed, [EXECUTE] key display return, to normal from MHV/GRID SETTING AND OUTPUT

highlight. This makes you know whether the adjustment opera- A : xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_K

A: xxx B: xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_C

tion is completed or not. C: xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_M

The above operation is executed each of the lower speed 230 850 D: xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y

mode and the middle speed mode, and the reference toner
density control value is set for each of them. MIDDLE LOW EXECUTE OK

NOTE: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the

adjustment result is not reflected (enabled). 2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
the scroll key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the opera-
tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis- 3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
play. speed mode and press [OK] key.
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the ref-
erence toner density control value is not completed normally.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 4

 Adjustment value Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)
Actual
Item Mode Adjustment Default Monitor voltage Pin
Connector voltage
range value (Specified value) No.
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED GB_K K Main charger grid voltage 230 – 850 615 53.6 r 1.61V CNMON 8 –615V
(Middle speed mode)
B MIDDLE SPEED GB_C C Main charger grid voltage 230 – 850 615 53.6 r 1.61V CNMON 6 –615V
(Middle speed mode)
C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M M Main charger grid voltage 230 – 850 615 53.6 r 1.61V CNMON 4 –615V
(Middle speed mode)
D MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y Y Main charger grid voltage 230 – 850 615 53.6 r 1.61V CNMON 2 –615V
(Middle speed mode)
LOW A LOW SPEED GB_K K Main charger grid voltage 230 – 850 605 52.7 r 1.58V CNMON 8 –605V
(Low speed mode)
B LOW SPEED GB_C C Main charger grid voltage 230 – 850 605 52.7 r 1.58V CNMON 6 –605V
(Low speed mode)
C LOW SPEED GB_M M Main charger grid voltage 230 – 850 605 52.7 r 1.58V CNMON 4 –605V
(Low speed mode)
D LOW SPEED GB_Y Y Main charger grid voltage 230 – 850 605 52.7 r 1.58V CNMON 2 –605V
(Low speed mode)
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is 2) Open the PWB holder.
normally outputted. 3) Enter SIM8-2 mode.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label 4) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value. the scroll key.
5) Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector
CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjust-
ment mode.
6) Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the
MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted
mode.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.
If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum
and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this
procedure as short as possible.
If possible, it is recommendable to use an unnecessary devel-
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX oping unit and an unnecessary OPC drum for this adjustment.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed 8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
tain relationship.
adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
mode, and then adjust the other mode. may be defective.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the MC/DV high voltage PWB
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
PCU PWB
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Developing unit
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt-
age, there is no need to check the output value. OPC drum unit
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an High voltage circuit electrode
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below. 4-B Developing bias voltage adjustment
1) Remove the main unit rear cover. This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
2

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 5

1) Enter SIM8-1 mode. 2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
the scroll key.
0 3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
SIMULATIONġ NO.08-01 CLOSE
TEST
speed mode and press [OK] key.
DV SETTING AND OUTPUT
Aȇxxx Ȉġ MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K

A: xxx Bȇxxx Ȉġ MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C

Cȇxxx Ȉġ MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M

ġ 0 700 Dȇxxx Ȉġ MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y

MIDDLE LOW EXECUTE OK

10-key EXECUTE

EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.

0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.08-01 CLOSE

DV SETTING AND OUTPUT

Aȇxxx Ȉ MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K

A: xxx Bȇxxx Ȉ MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C

Cȇxxx Ȉ MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M

0 700 Dȇxxx Ȉ MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y

MIDDLE LOW EXECUTE OK

Adjustment value Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)

Actual
Item Mode Adjustment Default Monitor voltage Pin
Connector voltage
range value (Specified value) No.
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage 0 – 700 450 12.1 r 0.36V CNMON 7 –450V
(Middle speed mode)
B MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage 0 – 700 450 12.1 r 0.36V CNMON 5 –450V
(Middle speed mode)
C MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M M Developing bias voltage 0 – 700 450 12.1 r 0.36V CNMON 3 –450V
(Middle speed mode)
D MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage 0 – 700 450 12.1 r 0.36V CNMON 1 –450V
(Middle speed mode)
LOW A LOW SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage 0 – 700 430 11.4 r 0.34V CNMON 7 –430V
(Low speed mode)
B LOW SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage 0 – 700 430 11.4 r 0.34V CNMON 5 –430V
(Low speed mode)
C LOW SPEED DVB_M M Developing bias voltage 0 – 700 430 11.4 r 0.34V CNMON 3 –430V
(Low speed mode)
D LOW SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage 0 – 700 430 11.4 r 0.34V CNMON 1 –430V
(Low speed mode)
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt-
normally outputted. age, there is no need to check the output value.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value. adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below.
1) Remove the main unit rear cover.

DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX

When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
tain relationship.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
mode, then adjust the other mode.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
automatically changed. Use care for that.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 6

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

2) Open the PWB frame.

4-C Transfer voltage adjustment
3) Enter SIM8-1 mode.
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
4) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
* When the TC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
the scroll key.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
5) Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector
CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjust- * When the PCU PWB is replaced.
ment mode. * When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
1) Enter SIM8-6 mode.

0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.08-06 CLOSE
CNMON THV SETTING AND OUTPUT
1 Aȇxxx Ȉ TC1 LOW SPEED CL K

A:ġ xxx Bȇxxx Ȉ TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K

Cȇxxx Ȉ TC1 LOW SPEED CLġ CMY

ġ 0 255
Dȇxxx Ȉ TC1 MIDDLE SPEED_CL CMY

EXECUTE OK

EXECUTE
10-key

EXECUTE or after 30 sec.

6) Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the
MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted
mode. 0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.08-06 CLOSE
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The developing bias voltage is outputted for 30sec. THV SETTING AND OUTPUT
Aȇxxx Ȉġ TC1 LOW SPEEDġġCL K
8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter. A:ġ xxx Bȇxxx Ȉġ TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K

If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values Cȇxxx Ȉġ TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY
0 255
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and Dȇxxx Ȉ TC1 MIDDLE SPEED_CL CMY

adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even

though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts EXECUTE OK

may be defective.
MC/DV high voltage PWB 2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
PCU PWB 3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK]
key.
Developing unit
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified
OPC drum unit
voltage is outputted.
High voltage circuit electrode
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is out-
putted.

Default
Setting Default Actual output value
Item Display Content
range value setting range Actual
output value
1 A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer COLOR K Low speed 0 to 255 232 –500V to 5000V 4500V
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K bias reference Middle speed 0 to 255 232 –500V to 5000V 4500V
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY value CMY Low speed 0 to 255 139 –500V to 5000V 2500V
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL CMY Middle speed 0 to 255 139 –500V to 5000V 2500V
E TC1 LOW SPEED BW K BLACK K Low speed 0 to 255 232 –500V to 5000V 4500V
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Middle speed 0 to 255 232 –500V to 5000V 4500V
G TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer COLOR Normal Front surface 51 to 255 100 2PA to 45PA 12.5PA
H TC2 PLAIN CL DPX bias reference paper Back surface 51 to 255 100 2PA to 45PA 12.5PA
I TC2 PLAIN BW SPX value BLACK Front surface 51 to 255 90 2PA to 45PA 10PA
J TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 to 255 90 2PA to 45PA 10PA
K TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX COLOR Heavy paper 51 to 255 69 2PA to 45PA 6PA
L TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX BLACK 51 to 255 69 2PA to 45PA 6PA
M TC2 OHP CL COLOR OHP 51 to 255 60 2PA to 45PA 4PA
N TC2 OHP BW BLACK 51 to 255 60 2PA to 45PA 4PA
O TC2 ENVELOPE CL COLOR Envelope 51 to 255 184 2PA to 45PA 30PA
P TC2 ENVELOPE BW BLACK 51 to 255 184 2PA to 45PA 30PA
Q TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 to 255 79 2PA to 45PA 8PA
R TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary transfer Low speed print 51 to 255 72 –50V to –1500 –200V
S TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD cleaning bias Middle speed print 51 to 255 72 –50V to –1500V –200V
T TC2 CLEAN CLEANING reference value Cleaning 51 to 255 156 –50V to –1500V –800V

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 7

 4) Open the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
5 Image density sensor, image regis- 5) Open the process front cover, and pull out the primary transfer
belt unit.
tration sensor adjustment
There are some assembly variations in the image density sensor
section. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each
machine. To correct this, calibration is executed.
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the image density sensor is replaced.
* When the image resist sensor is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor,
the black image density sensor, and the image registration sensor.
There are following adjustment methods.
* Color image density sensor adjustment (Calibration with the 6) Install the image density sensor calibration jig to the sensor
adjustment jig) SIM44-13 housing section.
* Black image density sensor and the image registration sensor Engage the projection (c) in the sensor housing groove, and
adjustment SIM44-2 slide it to the rear frame side.
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the fol-
lowing items.
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor, the black
image density sensor, and the image registration sensor are
C
clean. C
* Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate
is clean.
* Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
scratches.

5-A Color image density sensor calibration

1) Open the front cabinet of the main unit, and remove the waste
toner box.
2) Remove the primary transfer unit fixing screw.
7) Turn on the power and enter SIM44-13 mode.

0
TEST SIMULATION㩷 NO.44-13 CLOSE

PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT

PCS CL CARB OUT : xxx

PCS CL DARK : xxx

PCS CL LED ADJ : xxx

EXECUTE
1/1

EXECUTE
EXECUTE
3) Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the or when the color sensor
primary transfer belt tension. adjustment is completed

0
TEST SIMULATION㩷 NO.44-13 CLOSE

PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT

PCS CL CARB OUT : xxx

PCS CL DARK : xxx

PCS CL LED ADJ : xxx

UN LOCK EXECUTE
1/1

8) Close the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).

9) Install the waste toner bottle to the main unit.
10) Close the front cabinet.
11) Press [EXECUTE] key.
NOTE: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer Color image sensor calibration is automatically executed.
unit is released manually, turn on the power again after com- When the operation is completed, the adjustment result is dis-
pletion of the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes played and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
the transfer roller to return it to the home position.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 8

 Adjustment Default 5-B Color image density sensor, black image
Display/Item Content
value range value
A PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 – 255 108
density sensor, image registration sensor
CARB OUT LED current adjustment adjustment
target value 1) Enter SIM44-2 mode.
B PCS_CL Color image density sensor 0 – 255 0
DARK dark-voltage level 0
C PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 – 255 21 TEST SIMULATION NO.44-02 CLOSE
LED ADJ LED current adjustment
PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT
target value (PCS CL CARB
PCS_CL LED ADJ : xx PCS_㧷 GRND : xx
OUT) registered LED current
level PCS_㧷 LED ADJ : xx PCS_K BELT MAX : xx

If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. PCS_CL DARK : xx PCS_KBELTMIN : xx

In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any PCS_K DARK : xx PCS_KBELTDIF : xx
EXECUTE
abnormality is found, repair and adjust again. 1/4
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* Color image density sensor
The color image density sensor, the black image density sen-
* PCU PWB sor, and the image registration sensor are automatically
* Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt, adjusted.
scratch, discoloration) After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is
NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low tempera- displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
ture, low humidity and dark place.

Display/Item Content Adjustment value range Default value

PRO CON A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 – 255 21
B PCS _K LED ADJ Black image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 – 255 21
C PCS_CL DARK Color image sensor dark voltage 0 – 255 0
D PCS_K DARK Black image density sensor dark voltage 0 – 255 0
E PCS_K GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item B adjustment 0 – 255 0
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt base detection level (Max.) 0 – 255 0
G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) 0 – 255 0
H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item F – Item G) 0 – 255 0
REGIST I REG_F LED ADJ Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F 1 – 255 56
J REG_R LED ADJ Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R 1 – 255 56
K REG_F DARK Image registration sensor dark voltage F 0 – 255 0
L REG_R DARK Image registration sensor dark voltage R 0 – 255 0
M REG_F GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item I adjustment 0 – 255 0
N REG_R GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item J adjustment 0 – 256 0
O REG_F BELTMAX Belt base detection level (Max.) F 0 – 255 0
P REG_F BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) F 0 – 255 0
Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item O – Item P) 0 – 255 0
R REG_R BELT MAX Belt base detection level (Max.) R 0 – 255 0
S REG_R BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) R 0 – 255 0
T REG_R BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item R – Item S) 0 – 255 0
U REG_F PATCH (K) Patch detection level F (K) 0 – 255 0
V REG_F PATCH (C) Patch detection level F (C) 0 – 255 0
W REG_F PATCH (M) Patch detection level F (M) 0 – 255 0
X REG_F PATCH (Y) Patch detection level F (Y) 0 – 255 0
Y REG_R PATCH (K) Patch detection level R (K) 0 – 255 0
Z REG_R PATCH (C) Patch detection level R (C) 0 – 255 0
AA REG_R PATCH (M) Patch detection level R (M) 0 – 255 0
AB REG_R PATCH (Y) Patch detection level R (Y) 0 – 255 0
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
played.
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality.
If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
* Color image density sensor
* Black image density sensor
* Image registration sensor
* PCU PWB
* Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
* Transfer belt cleaner

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 9

 2 : Jan. 15 2006

2
Method 2: Use the right angle sides of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for
6 Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) judgment of good or no good.
NOTE:
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
IN the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced. may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit. be used in advance.
* When a color image registration mistake occurs. (Method 1)
* When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed. a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the cross
(Required depending on the cases.) point of the outside cross pattern.
* When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color
balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth). R
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced.
* When the color phase is not matched by the color balance
adjustment.
Diagonal line D
1) Enter SIM61-4 mode.

0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.61-04 CLOSE
Diagonal line C
LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF PRINT)
Aȇxxx Ȉ MULTICOUNT

A: xxx Bȇ x Ȉ PAPERȇCS1

1 999

F
EXECUTE OK
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C
10-key and D of the diagonal lines.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in
or end of print the following range.
0 C – D = r 0.8mm
TEST SIMULATION NO.61-04 CLOSE If the difference between C and D is in the above range,
LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF PRINT)
there is no need to adjust.
Aȇxxx Ȉ MULTICOUNT (Method 2)
A: 2 Bȇ x Ȉ PAPERȇCS1
a) Fit the three cross points of the cross patterns in a row with
1 999 the side of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for checking for any skew
(right angle).
EXECUTE OK
A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
changing the value of set item B.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Comparison line R
0.5 mm or less
The check pattern is printed out.

Comparison line R Direction A Direction B

0.5 mm or less

Direction A Direction B

Reference line

The cross patterns in a row

Reference line
b) Measure the shortest distance between the cross pattern
F
on the extended line of the vertical line and the paper side.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
2 4) Check the printed black image for any skew (right angle).
Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns adjust.
printed in black. If not, execute the following procedures.
There are following two methods of checking the black image 5) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
for any skew (right angle).
Method 1: Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the
cross point of the cross pattern. Check the difference in the
length of the diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 10

 2 : Jan. 15 2006

6) Loosen the LSU (writing) unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift 11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
the skew adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the adjust.
LSU (writing) unit skew.
2 (When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the Y M C
adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of X.
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the
adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the
arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction.

When each adjustment screw is turned, it clicks. Turn it by

5 – 6 clicks and the check pattern is changed by 1 step (1
dot size).
When the image skew pattern on the front frame side is
skewed in the arrow direction of A (to the smaller character)
Y X
from the rear frame side, turn the adjustment screw counter-
clockwise. When the image is skewed in the arrow direction of
B (to the larger character), turn the adjustment screw clock-
wise.
12) Print the check pattern.
13) Check the color image skew pattern.
Repeat procedures 11) – 13) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
7) Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet. The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is executed by changing
the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beam for the OPC drum.
8) Execute procedures 3) – 4).
(Repeat procedures 5) – 8) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.)
7 OPC drum phase adjustment
9) If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten
the adjustment screw. This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
(The black image skew adjustment is completed with the * When the OPC drum is replaced.
above.) * When the OPC drum is removed from the main unit.
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color * When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjust- * When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
ment.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
R
* When EEPROM on the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.

*B
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta

*A
Direction A Direction B

*B

*A: Rough adjustment pattern

*B: Fine adjustment pattern
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the front
frame direction and in the rear frame direction, note the same
print color pattern and check to confirm that the difference in
the highest density sections is within r 1 step.
(Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the same-
color print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all
the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare
only the same-color patterns.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures
below.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 11

7-A OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjust- 7-B OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual
ment) adjustment)
1) Enter SIM50-22 mode. 1) Enter SIM44-31 mode.

0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-22 CLOSE TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.44-31 CLOSE

AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATIONɕDLUM POSITION DRUM POSITION SETTING

Aȇ x Ȉġ PRINT MODEȇSETġ VALUE
,MAIN F MAIN R SUB PHASE
A: x Bȇ x Ȉġ COLOR
C xxx (xx) xxx (xx) xxx (xx) xxx (xx)
Cȇ x Ȉ PAPERSELECT
ġ 1 3
M xxx (xx) xxx (xx) xxx (xx)

Y xxx (xx) xxx (xx) xxx (xx)

REGIST DRUM POS ALL EXECUTE EXECUTE OK
1/1

10-key
EXECUTE
Normal end
OK

0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.50-22 CLOSE

AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION & DLUM POSITION

0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.44-31 CLOSE
ġ NOW EXECUTING …

DRUM POSITION SETTING

Aȇ x Ȉġ PRINT MODEȇSETġ VALUE

A:ġ x Bȇ x Ȉġ COLOR

Cȇ x Ȉ PAPERSELECT
1 3ȯ
EXECUTE

EXECUTE OK
Abnormal end

EXECUTE EXECUTE
0
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-22 CLOSE or end of print
TEST
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION & DLUM POSITION
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.44-31 CLOSE
ERRORȇTONNER EMPTY
DRUM POSITION SETTING
Aȇ x Ȉ PRINT MODEȇSETġ VALUE

A: x Bȇ x Ȉ COLOR

EXECUTE Cȇ x Ȉ PAPERSELECT
1 3

2) Press [ALL] key. EXECUTE OK

(The machine enters the OPC drum phase adjustment mode/
image registration adjustment (auto adjustment) mode, and
both adjustments are executed simultaneously in this mode.) 10-key

The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration

OK
adjustment can be individually executed by [REGIST] button
and [DRUM POS] button. Since, however, the image registra-
tion adjustment must be executed when the OPC drum phase
adjustment is completed, both adjustment are executed in this 0
SIMULATIONġ NO.44-31 CLOSE
adjustment simultaneously. TEST

DRUM POSITION SETTING

3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Aȇ x Ȉ PRINT MODEȇ45Ɏ

The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration A:ġ x Bȇ x Ȉ COLOR

adjustment are executed automatically. ġ 1 3

Cȇ x Ȉ PAPERSELECT

* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor stops and

[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and the adjust- EXECUTE OK
ment result is displayed.
MAIN, SUB: Image regist adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value. EXECUTE EXECUTE
Example: This time 105.0, previous time 103.0: 105.0 (+2) or end of print
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the previous adjustment value. 0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.44-31 CLOSE
Example: This time 90q, previous time 45q: 3 (2)
DRUM POSITION SETTING
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details. Aȇ 1 Ȉ PRINT MODEȇ45

A:ġ 1 Bȇ 2 Ȉ COLOR

Cȇ 2 Ȉ
1 3

EXECUTE OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 12

2) Enter "1" with 10-key in the PRINT MODE of set item A, and
press [OK] key. 8 Print engine image magnification
3) Select the paper feed stage with A3 (or 11 x 17) in it with
PAPER SELECT of set item C, and press [OK] key. ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scan-
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. ning direction) (Print engine section)
The adjustment patterns (8 pages) are printed.
8-A Print engine image magnification ratio
adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction)
(Print engine section) (Manual adjustment)
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
1) Enter SIM50-10 mode.

8
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-10 CLOSE

PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP

Aȇxxx Ȉ BK-MAG

A: xxx Bȇ xx Ȉ MTF

Cȇ xx Ȉ CS1
64 140
Dȇ xx Ȉ CS2

Each identification number ("1" – "8") is printed on each printed

EXECUTE OK
page of 8 adjustment patterns.
5) Check the deflection in 94mm pitch cycle of each C/M/Y print
pattern. Select a print pattern of the smallest deflection for EXECUTE
each color of C/M/Y, and use the pattern identification number EXECUTE
as the adjustment value, and enter it to set item B. Press [OK]
end of print
key.

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-10 CLOSE

PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP

Aȇxxx Ȉ BK-MAG

A: xxx Bȇxx Ȉ MTF

Cȇxx Ȉ CS1
64 140ġ
Dȇxx Ȉ CS2

EXECUTE OK

2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray.

3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The check pattern is printed.
5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
94mm 94mm 94mm 94mm r 0.5mm.

NOTE: If there is a peculiar deflection other than the drum cycle

(94mm pitch), check the following conditions.
* OPC drum drive section
* Transfer belt drive section
* Paper feed drive section
* Each motor speed set value (Set value of SIM48-6)

If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures

below.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 13

6) Change the set value of set item A. Set Default
Display/Item Content
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed range value
by 0.1mm. C CS1 Print off-center adjustment 1 – 99 50
value (Paper feed tray 1)
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
D CS2 Print off-center adjustment 1 – 99 50
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
value (Paper feed tray 2)
value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
E CS3 Print off-center adjustment 1 – 99 50
main scanning direction is decreased.
value (Paper feed tray 3)
Repeat procedures 2) – 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained. F CS4 Print off-center adjustment 1 – 99 50
value (Paper feed tray 4)
G LCC Print off-center adjustment 1 – 99 50
9 Image off-center adjustment (Print value (LCC)
H ADU Print off-center adjustment 1 – 99 50
engine section) value (ADU)
Note: Before execution of
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
this adjustment, check to
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. insure that the adjustment
* When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main items A – G have been
scanning direction) is performed. properly adjusted. If not,
this adjustment cannot be
* When a paper tray is replaced.
made properly.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled. I MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 – 999 1
* When the manual feed tray is replaced. J PAPER MFT Paper feed Manual paper 1–6 1 2 (CS 1)
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled. tray select feed tray
CS 1 Paper feed 2
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
tray 1
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced. CS 2 Paper feed 3
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced. tray 2
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled. CS 3 Paper feed 4
tray 3
* When the regist roller section is disassembled.
CS 4 Paper feed 5
* When U2 trouble occurs. tray 4
* When the PCU PWB is replaced. LCC LCC 6
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced. K DUPLEX YES Duplex Selected 0–1 0 1 (NO)
print select
(Caution)
3) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
* Before execution of this adjustment, check the following item.
cedure 2).
* Check to insure that the print engine image magnification ratio
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
adjustment (BK) (main scanning direction) has been properly
The adjustment pattern is printed.
adjusted.
1) Enter SIM50-10 mode. 5) Check the adjustment pattern image position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
0 rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-10 CLOSE all the following conditions are satisfied.
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SET UP
A : xxx ; BK- MAG

A: xxx B : xx ; MTF

C : xx ; CS1
[ 60~140 ]
D : xx ; CS2

EXECUTE OK

EXECUTE
EXECUTE

End of print

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-10 CLOSE

PAPER CENTER OFFSET SET UP

A : xxx ; BK- MAG

A: xxx B : xx ; MTF

C : xx ; CS1
[ 60~140 ]
D : xx ; CS2

EXECUTE OK

2) Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corre-
RV: REAR VOID AREA
sponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted.
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
Set Default RV + FV d 4.0mm
Display/Item Content
range value RV = 2.0 r 2.0mm
A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 – 140 100
magnification ratio BK
FV = 2.0 r 2.0mm
B MFT Print off-center adjustment 1 – 99 50 If the above conditions are not satisfied, execute the proce-
value (Manual feed tray) dures below.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 14

6) Select the paper feed mode adjustment item (B – H) to be * Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main
adjusted with the scroll key. scanning direction) (Print engine section)
7) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key. 10-A Image registration adjustment (Main scan-
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is ning direction, sub scanning direction)
printed. (Auto adjustment)
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat- In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main
tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are exe-
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side. cuted simultaneously and automatically.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is 1) Enter SIM50-22 mode.
changed by about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 3) – 7) until the conditions of procedure 5) 0
CLOSE
are satisfied. TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.50-22

ġġ DLUM POSITION
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION &

the above procedures, perform the following procedure. ,MAIN F MAIN R SUB PHASE

8) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2 C xxx (x) xxx (x) xxx (x) xxx (x)

pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray, M xxx (x) xxx (x) xxx (x)

and change the gear unit position in the front/back frame direc- Y xxx(x) ġġġġ xxx (x) xxx (x)

tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4). REGIST DRUM POS ALL EXECUTE 1/1

EXECUTE
Normal end

0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.50-22 CLOSE

AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION & DLUM POSITION

ġ NOW EXECUTING…

EXECUTE

Abnormal end

0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.50-22 CLOSE

AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION & DLUM POSITION

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START

ERRORȇTONNER EMPTY

EXECUTE

10 Image registration adjustment (Print 2) Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjust-
ment auto adjustment mode.
engine section) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases: [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced. adjustment is started. After completion of the adjustment,
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit. [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjust-
ment result is displayed.
* When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning
direction occurs. It takes about 40 sec to complete the adjustment.
* When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning Adjustment Default
direction occurs. Display/Item Content
value range value
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed. REGIST MAIN C Image registration 1.0 – 199.0 100
* When maintenance is executed. (Replacement of the OPC drum, F adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt, etc.)
(Cyan) (F side)
* When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main M Image registration 1.0 – 199.0 100
scanning direction) is performed. adjustment value (Main
* When U2 trouble occurs. scanning direction)
(Magenta) (F side)
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
Y Image registration 1.0 – 199.0 100
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced. adjustment value (Main
■ Note before adjustment scanning direction)
(Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments (Yellow) (F side)
must have been completed.)
* Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 15

 Adjustment Default
Display/Item Content 10-B Image registration adjustment (Main scan-
value range value
REGIST MAIN C Image registration 1.0 – 199.0 100 ning direction) (Manual adjustment)
R adjustment value (Main 1) Enter SIM50-20 mode.
scanning direction)
(Cyan) (R side)
0
M Image registration 1.0 – 199.0 100 SIMULATIONġ NO.50-20 CLOSE
TEST
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction) REGISTRATIONġ ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR DIRECTION
Aȇxxx Ȉ CYAN(FRONT)
(Magenta) (R side)
A:ġ xxx Bȇxxx Ȉ CYAN(REAR)
Y Image registration 1.0 – 199.0 100 Cȇxxx Ȉ MAGENTA(FRONT)
adjustment value (Main ġ 1 199
Dȇxxx Ȉ MAGENTA(REAR)
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (R side) EXECUTE OK
SUB C Image registration 1.0 – 199.0 100
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction) 10-key EXECUTE
(Cyan)
M Image registration 1.0 – 199.0 100 EXECUTE
adjustment value (Sub End of print
scanning direction)
(Magenta)
Y Image registration 1.0 – 199.0 100 0
adjustment value (Sub TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.50-20 CLOSE

scanning direction) REGISTRATIONġ ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR DIRECTION

(Yellow) Aȇxxx Ȉ CYAN(FRONT)

MAIN, SUB: The entered value after adjustment is displayed. A:ġ xxx Bȇxxx Ȉ CYAN(REAR)

Cȇxxx Ȉ MAGENTA(FRONT)
( ): Difference from the previous value. 1 199ġ
Dȇxxx Ȉ MAGENTA(REAR)

Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)

EXECUTE OK
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
To check the auto adjustment result, use the manual image 2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
registration adjustment mode below. changing the value of set item H.
* Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
adjustment) (SIM50-20)
The image registration adjustment pattern in the main scan-
* Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual ning direction is printed.
adjustment) (SIM50-21)

㪩㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼㩷㫄㪸㫉㫂
㪝㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼㩷㫄㪸㫉㫂

A A

C C

A A

C C

A A

C C

B B

A: Rough adjustment pattern

B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range (0 r 1)

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 16

4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat- When calculating, be careful of the plus polarity and the
tern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear minus polarity.
frame sides. (Example)
Use the visually highest color density section as the center, In the case of the figure, the total shift amount is 27.
and measure the shift amount.
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7)
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are
adjusted independently.  
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front  
frame side and the rear frame side individually.
 
Rough adjustment Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at 20  
print pattern check: the center for the rough adjustment reference  
pattern.
Fine adjustment Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the  
print pattern check: center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.  
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0  
r 1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the  
adjustment is not required.)
 
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
 
adjustment item A – F to be adjusted with the scroll key and
change the adjustment value to adjust.  
 
Adjustment Default
Display/Item Content  
value range value
A CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 – 199 100    
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
 
direction) (Cyan) (F side)
B CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 – 199 100  
(REAR) value (Main scanning  
direction) (Cyan) (R side)
 
C MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 – 199 100
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
Measurement value: –27 (= –20 – 7)
direction) (Magenta) (F side)
D MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 – 199 100
 
(REAR) value (Main scanning
direction) (Magenta) (R side)  
E YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 – 199 100  
(FRONT) value (Main scanning -20
direction) (Yellow) (F side)  
F YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 – 199 100  
(REAR) value (Main scanning
 
direction) (Yellow) (R side)
 
Repeat procedures 3) – 4) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.  

For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the  

adjustment value, refer to the table below.  
(Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of  
the adjustment value)
 
a) Measurement of the shift amount
 
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
 
The visually highest color density section is regarded as
the center, and used as the measurement value.    
 
(Example)
The measurement value of the figure is "7."  

* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern  

Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc-  
tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
The shift amount from the adjustment reference position
that.
is calculated for each of six kinds of adjustment items A
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark
– F.
as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line mark as
b) Adjustment value calculation
60. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
corresponds to 20. Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
from the current adjustment value, and the result value is
(Example)
used as the new adjustment value.
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 – 40 of the
plus polarity, and the measurement is "20." Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift
amount (correction value)
* The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjust-
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
ment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment
shift amount. Adjustment value = Current adjustment value – Shift
amount (correction value)
Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment
shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount (When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 17

Yellow    

E   F  
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
       
   
   
   
   

Magenta    

C   D  
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
       
   
   
   
   

Cyan    

A   B  
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
       
   
   
   
   

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 18

 (Example)
10-C Image registration adjustment (Sub scan-
Previous value before adjustment New adjustment value ning direction) (Manual adjustment)
A: 100 A: 93 (= 100 – 7)
1) Enter SIM50-21 mode.
B: 112 B: 100 (= 112 – 12)
C: 95 C: 96 (= 95 + 1)
0
D: 98 D: 109 (= 98 + 11) SIMULATIONġ NO.50-21 CLOSE
TEST
E: 102 E: 109 (= 102 + 7)
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING DIRECTION
F: 96 F: 118 (= 96 + 22) Aȇxxx Ȉ CYAN

NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the A: xxx Bȇxxx Ȉ MAGENTA

other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be 1 199

Cȇxxx Ȉ YELLOW

careful of that. Dȇxxx Ȉ MULTIOUNT

EXECUTE OK

10-key EXECUTE

EXECUTE
or end of print

0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.50-21 CLOSE

REGISTRATIONġ ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING DIRECTION

Aȇxx Ȉ CYAN

A:ġ xxx Bȇxx Ȉ MAGENTA

Cȇxxx Ȉ YELLOW
1 199
Dȇxxx Ȉ MULTIOUNT

EXECUTE OK

2) Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) or A3 (11 x 17)
paper in it by changing the value of set item H.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The sub scanning direction image registration adjustment pat-
tern is printed.

C B

A: Rough adjustment pattern

B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 19

4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat- Measurement value: –27 (= –20 – 7)
tern positions of each color.
A
The visually highest color density section is regarded as the
center, and used as the measurement value.
-20 
Rough adjustment Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at
print pattern check: the center for the rough adjustment reference
pattern.
B

Fine adjustment Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the
print pattern check: center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.  
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is positioned in the range of  
0 r 1 for the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the
adjustment is not required.)  

If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode  

adjustment item A – C to be adjusted with the scroll key, and  
change the adjustment value to adjust.
 
Adjustment Default 
Display/Item Content 
value range value
A CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 – 199 100  
value (Sub scanning
 
direction) (Cyan)
B MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 – 199 100 C  
value (Sub scanning
 
direction) (Magenta)
C YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 – 199 100  
value (Sub scanning
 
direction) (Yellow)
Repeat procedures 3) – 4) until a satisfactory result is  
obtained.  
For measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the  
adjustment value, refer to the table below.
 
(Measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the
adjustment value)  
a) Measurement of the shift amount  
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
The visually highest color density section is regarded as Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7)
the center, and used as the measurement value of the
A
shift amount.
(Example) 20

The measurement value of the figure is "7."
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc- B

tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.  
The center black line mark is scaled as 0, the first line  
mark as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line
 
mark as 60. The interval between the rough adjustment
marks corresponds to 20.  
(Example)  
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 – 40 of the
 
plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."
A: Rough adjustment pattern  

B: Fine adjustment pattern  

C: Adjustment range  
The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment ref- 
C 
erence position for each of the three adjustment items A
– C.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 20

 b) Adjustment value calculation
Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or from the current adjustment value, and the result value is used as the new
adjustment value.
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value – Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)

A B C
  

  
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     

Previous adjustment value New adjustment value

A: 100 A: 73 (= 100 – 27)
B: 112 B: 119 (= 112 + 7)
C: 95 C: 110 (= 95 + 15)

11 Scan image distortion adjustment

This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.

11-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjust-

ment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass. (For details, refer to Chapter [C]-3.)
1) Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 21

2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner 6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. When the scan- edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
ner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on the front and fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is proper.

If not, perform the following procedures.

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit.

4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
simultaneously.
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-
dures, perform the following procedures.
11-B Scan image (sub scanning direction) dis-
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
tortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart with A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear L
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.

L L

L = 10mm

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 22

2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference 11-C Scan image (main scanning direction) dis-
position as shown below.) With the document cover open, tortion adjustment
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" – 17") paper. (Draw a rectangular
with four right angles.)

L L

L = 10mm

L
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
If La = Lb, there is no distortion. ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
La Lb
If the four angles of the copy image are right angles, there is
no distortion. (Completion of the adjustment)

If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.) If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform
the following procedure.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between the image
distortions on the right and the left.

Lc Lc

Copy A Copy B

Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc = Ld Lc ≠ Ld
If Lc = Ld, there is no difference between the right and the left
5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
image distortions.
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan-
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) If not, perform the following procedures.
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) – 6) until the condition of the procedure
3) is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform "ADJ 11D Scan image distortion
adjustment (whole scanner unit)."

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 23

5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side. 12 Scan image focus adjustment (CCD
unit position adjustment)
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the CCD unit is removed from the machine.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
1) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.48-01 CLOSE

MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
A㧦xx 㧧 CCD(MAIN)
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
A: xx B㧦xx 㧧 CCD(SUB)
right and the left heights of the scanner rail. C㧦xx 㧧 SPF(MAIN)
1 99
Repeat the procedures 2) – 5) until the difference between the D㧦xx 㧧 SPF(SUB)

image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.

OK
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) and make a
copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check that the distortion in the Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
main scanning direction is within the specified range. adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main 3) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
scanning direction is in the specified range. below.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
with the above procedures, perform "ADJ 11D Scan image dis-
tortion adjustment (Whole scanner)."
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

11-D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole

scanner)
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
adjusted with ADJ 11A, ADJ 11B, and ADJ 11C related to the scan
image distortion adjustment.
Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.

4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.

Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the scale length with the scale image length on the
copy paper.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size – Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
Example: Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm
on the copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 – 99) / 100 x 100 = 1

A A A
A

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 24

 11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
100mm scale CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
10 20 90 100 110 than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
(Original)
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
1.0mm * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).

Copy image
(1mm (1%) B
shorter than
10 20 90 100 110
the original)
A

If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the

following procedures.
7) Remove the document table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.

12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 r 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) – 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 r 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.

13 Scan image skew adjustment

(RSPF) (Refer to MX-RPX1 SM.)

14 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment (Document table mode)
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
replaced.
* When the copy image magnification ration in the sub scanning
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.

* Never loosen the screws marked with ✕.

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 25

 2) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
14-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (Document table 0
mode) TEST SIMULATION NO.48-01 CLOSE
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
below. A㧦xx 㧧 CCD(MAIN)

A: xx B㧦xx 㧧 CCD(SUB)

C㧦xx 㧧 SPF(MAIN)
1 99
D㧦xx 㧧 SPF(SUB)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

OK

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.

Copy magnification ratio

(Original dimension – Copy dimension)
= x 100 [%]
Original dimension

(Example 1)
Copy A
2) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode. (Shorter than 10 20 90 100 110
the original)
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.48-01 CLOSE

MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
A㧦xx 㧧 CCD(MAIN)

A: xx B㧦xx 㧧 CCD(SUB)

C㧦xx 㧧 SPF(MAIN) Scale

1 99 (Original) 10 20 90 100 110
D㧦xx 㧧 SPF(SUB)

OK

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the (Example 2)
copy mode and make a copy. Copy B
(Longer than 10 20 90 100 110
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 r 1.0%). the original)
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification 4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following range (100 r 1.0%).
procedure.
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica- ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. procedure.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi- 5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
Repeat the procedures 3) – 5) until the copy magnification tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
ratio is within the specified range (100 r 1.0%). When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
14-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment Repeat the procedures 3) – 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
(Sub scanning direction) (Document table within the specified range (100 r 1.0%).
mode)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below. 15 Scan image magnification ratio
adjustment (RSPF mode) (Refer to
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
the MX-RPX1 SM.)
15-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
(Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)

15-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(Sub scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
(Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 26

 4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
16 Scan image off-center adjustment 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set.
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
* When the RSPF section is disassembled. copy mode and make a copy.
* When the RSPF unit is installed. Repeat the procedures of 2) – 6) until the above condition is
* When the RSPF unit is replaced. satisfied.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. 16-B Scan image off-center (RSPF mode) (Refer
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. to the MX-RPX1 SM.)

16-A Scan image off-center (Document table

mode) 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by your self) in the (Print engine section)
adjustment mode (document table or RSPF).
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When the paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
ł * When the manual paper feed tray is replace.
* When the manual paper feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
łġľġŃ
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replace.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
Ń
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
(Caution)
2) Check the copy image center position. Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 8 Print
image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direc-
If A – B = r 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
tion) (Print engine section) in advance.
1) Enter the simulation 50-10 mode.

0
TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.50-10 CLOSE
łĨ
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP
Aȇxxx Ȉġ BK-MAG

A: xxx Bȇ xx Ȉġ MTF

Cȇ xx Ȉġ CS1
60 140
łĨġĮġŃĨġľġȾIJįıŮŮ Dȇ xx Ȉġ CS2

ĩIJııɓĪ
EXECUTE OK

ŃĨ
EXECUTE
EXECUTE

End of print

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.
0
3) Enter the simulation 50-12 mode. TEST SIMULATIONġ NO.50-10 CLOSE

PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP

0 Aȇ xxx Ȉġ BK-MAG
SIMULATION NO.50-12 CLOSE
TEST A:ġ xxx Bȇ xx Ȉġ MTF

ORGINAL CENTER OFFSET SETUP Cȇ xx Ȉġ CS1

60 140
A㧦 xx 㧧 OC Dȇ xx Ȉġ CS2

A: xx B㧦xx 㧧 SPF(SIDE1)
C㧦xx 㧧 SPF(SIDE2)
EXECUTE OK
㨇 1㨪 99 㨉

OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 27

2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to all the trays, and select the set item 6) Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment value and press [OK] key.
adjustment target paper feed tray.
Standard
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Display/ Adjustment Default
Content adjustment
The adjustment pattern is printed. Item range value
value
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below DENA Void are Lead edge 1 – 99 30 3.0 r
are in the range of the standard values. amount void area 1.0mm
adjustment adjustment
Content Standard adjustment value DENB Rear edge 1 – 99 20 2.0 r
X Lead edge void area 3.0 r 1.0mm void area 1.0mm
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 r 1.0mm adjustment
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 r 2.0mm FRONT/ FRONT/ 1 – 99 20 2.0 r
REAR REAR void 2.0mm
Z1 area
2.0±2.0mm adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased. When the adjustment value is changed by
1, the void area is changed by 0.1mm.
(Note)
X The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as
3.0±1.0mm Y follows:
2.0±1.0mm Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) – 4) to
check that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
change the adjustment value of RRCB-XXX of SIM 50-1.

Display Adjustment Default

Content
item range value
Z2
RRCB- Image lead Resist Standard 1 – 99 50
2.0±2.0mm
CS12 edge motor ON cassette
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. RRCB- position timing Desk 1 – 99 50
CS34 adjustment adjustment
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired
RRCB- value LCC 1 – 99 50
condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
LCC
5) Enter the simulation 50-1 mode.
RRCB- Manual 1 – 99 50
MFT feed
0 RRCB- ADU 1 – 99 50
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-01 CLOSE ADU
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
A㧦 xx 㧧 RRCA
obtained.
A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-CS12

C㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-CS34
0 99

18 Copy image position, image loss

D㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-LCC

OK
adjustment
10-key 18-A Copy image position, image loss adjust-
ment (Document table mode)
OK
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
0 * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
TEST SIMULATION NO.50㧙01 CLOSE
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE
A㧦 xx 㧧 RRCA
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-CS12 * When a U2 trouble occurs.
㨇 0㨪 99 㨉
C㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-CS34
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
D㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-LCC
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
OK * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
the ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine
section) has been completed normally.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 28

1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure 2) Enter the simulation 50-1 mode.
below.
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction 0
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide TEST SIMULATION NO.50-01 CLOSE

plate. LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE

Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead A㧦 xx 㧧 RRCA

A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-CS12
edge can be seen. C㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-CS34
0 99
D㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-LCC

OK
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

10-key

OK

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50㧙01 CLOSE

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE

A㧦 xx 㧧 RRCA

A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-CS12

C㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-CS34
㨇 0㨪 99 㨉
D㧦 xx 㧧 RRCB-LCC

OK

3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.

Item Display item Content Adjustment range Default value

A RRCA Image lead edge position Document lead edge reference position (OC) 0 – 99 50
B RRCB-CS12 adjustment value Resist motor ON timing Standard cassette 1 – 99 50
C RRCB-CS34 adjustment Desk 1 – 99 50
D RRCB-LCC LCC 1 – 99 50
E RRCB-MFT Manual feed 1 – 99 50
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 – 99 50
G LEAD Image loss adjustment Lead edge image loss adjustment 0 – 99 30
H SIDE Side image loss adjustment 0 – 99 20
I DENA Void area amount adjustment Lead edge void area adjustment 1 – 99 30
J DENB Rear edge void area adjustment 1 – 99 20
K FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 – 99 20

4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment. 5) Image loss adjustment
Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200% default value, it is adjusted to the standard state.
mode. If it is not in the above standard state, or when it is set to a
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge desired value, change these adjustment items.
image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
Paper lead edge
copy scale.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
Copy area Maginification ratio: 400%
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
1 2 3 4
Scale image 3.0mm position 5mm 10mm
Paper lead
edge
Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm

Standard
Display/ Adjustment Default
Content adjustment
100% Item range value
value
5mm 10mm
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 – 99 30 3.0 r
adjustment image loss 1.0mm
value adjustment
200% SIDE Side image 0 – 99 20 2.0 r
5mm 10mm loss 1.0mm
adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image loss is
changed by 0.1mm.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 29

 1) Enter the simulation 50-05 mode.
18-B Copy image position, image loss adjust-
ment (RSPF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 0
SM.) TEST SIMULATION NO.50-05 CLOSE

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE (PRINTER)

A㧦xxx 㧧 DEN-C

19 Print lead edge image position A: xxx B㧦xxx 㧧 DEN-B

㧧 FRONT/REAR
adjustment (Printer mode) (Print
C㧦xxx
1 99
D㧦xxx 㧧 MULTI COUNT

engine section) OK
EXECUTE
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
EXECUTE
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
EXECUTE
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
End of print
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
(Caution) 0
This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the lead edge TEST SIMULATION NO.50-05 CLOSE

void area to greater than the standard value (3mm) in the printer LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE (PRINTER)
mode. A㧦xxx 㧧 DEN-C

A: xxx B㧦xxx 㧧 DEN-B

C㧦xxx 㧧 FRONT/REAR
1 99
D㧦xxx 㧧 MULTI COUNT

EXECUTE OK

2) Select the set item E with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
in it.
Display/Item Content Adjustment range Default value Standard adjustment value
A DEN-C Printer print image lead edge adjustment 1 – 99 30 3.0 r 2.0mm
D MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 – 999 1 —
E PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 1–6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
F DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Select 0–1 0 1 (NO)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
The adjustment pattern is printed. ment item DENC with the scroll key.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment 6) Change the adjustment value.
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key.
in the standard adjustment value range. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
Standard adjustment value: 3.0 r 2.0mm printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is
decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
Repeat the procedures 4) – 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
3.0±2.0mm

20 Copy color balance/density adjust-

ment
(1) Note before execution of the copy color balance/density
adjustment
* After completion of this adjustment, the printer color balance/
density adjustment must be executed.
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy color balance/
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
density adjustment
procedures.
Before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment,
check to insure that the adjustments which affect the copy color
balance/density adjustment have been completed.
The importance levels of them are shown below.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 30

(The following items affect the copy color balance/density Default
adjustment, and must be checked and adjusted before execu- Display Content Set range
value
tion of the image quality adjustments.) TN_LIFE Toner density life correction Normal Allow
1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly. YES/NO setting (Inhibit: 1: NO)
Highlighted
Job Simulation TN_COV Toner density print rate (Allow: 0: YES) Allow
Adjustment item
No to be used correction YES/NO setting
ADJ Image density ADJ Color image sensor calibration 44-13
5 sensor, image 5A TN_PROCON Toner density process control Allow
registration ADJColor image density sensor, 44-2 correction YES/NO setting
sensor 5B black image density sensor,
adjustment image registration sensor TN_ENV Toner density environment Allow
adjustment correction YES/NO setting
ADJ Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit) 64-1/61-4
6 TN_DRIP Toner density correction, Allow
ADJ OPC drum ADJ OPC drum phase adjustment 50-22 unconditional supply YES/
7 phase 7A (Auto adjustment) NO setting
adjustment ADJ OPC drum phase adjustment 44-31 TN_SPEND Toner compulsory Allow
7B (Manual adjustment) consumption mode YES/NO
ADJ Image ADJ Image registration adjustment 50-22 setting
10 registration 10A (Main scanning direction, sub PHT 1Pixel half-tone process Inhibit
adjustment scanning direction) (Auto control correction YES/NO
(Print engine adjustment) setting
section) ADJ Image registration adjustment 50-20 AR_AUTO Auto resist adjustment YES/ Allow
10B (Main scanning direction) NO setting
(Manual adjustment)
ADJ Image registration adjustment 50-21 AR_ERROR Error check YES/NO setting Allow
10C (Sub scanning direction) during auto resist adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
DM_PHASE Drum phase alignment YES/ Allow
2) The set values of the following simulations must be set to the
NO setting
default values.
SENSITIVITY Toner density correction Inhibit
SIM No Adjustment/setting item Default value
YES/NO setting
46-1 A–U 50
46-2 A–L 50 PRT_HT Half tone process control Allow
46-10 A–O 500 printer correction feedback
46-16 A–O 500 Enable/Disable setting
3) The following items (correction functions) of SIM 44-1 must be (The following items affect the copy color balance/density
set to ENABLE (default). adjustment, but it is not required to adjust them frequently.
When, however, a trouble occurs, check and adjust them.)
Default
Display Content Set range 1) The following items must be adjusted properly.
value
HV Normal operation high- Normal Allow Simulation
density process control YES/ (Inhibit: 1: NO) Job No Adjustment item
to be used
NO setting Highlighted
ADJ 1 Developing doctor gap adjustment
HT Normal operation half-tone (Allow: 0: YES) Allow
ADJ 2 Developing roller main pole position adjustment
process control YES/NO
ADJ 4 High voltage ADJ Main charger grid voltage 8-2
setting
adjustment 4A adjustment
TC Transfer output correction Allow
ADJ Developing bias voltage 8-1
YES/NO setting
4B adjustment
ADJ Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6
MD VG Membrane decrease grid Allow
4C
voltage correction YES/NO
setting ADJ 12 Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position
adjustment)
MD LD Membrane decrease laser Inhibit
power voltage correction (Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy
YES/NO setting color balance/density adjustment)
MD EV Membrane decrease Allow Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color
environment grid voltage
balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the
correction YES/NO setting
servicing conditions.
MD DL Membrane decrease Allow
discharge light quantity Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment
correction YES/NO setting procedures depending on the actual conditions.
MD DL EV Membrane decrease Inhibit There are following four, major cases.
environment discharge light
1) When installing the machine.
quantity correction YES/NO
setting 2) When the periodic maintenance is performed.
TN_HUM Toner density humidity Allow 3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
correction YES/NO setting (When a consumable part is replaced.)
4) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
TN_AREA Toner density area correction Allow
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
YES/NO setting

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 31

(2) Flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment procedures

START

When in repair, check/maintenance (with replacing consumable parts)

When in
After After After cleaning
After After install/repair/check
JOB No Work item Simulation replacing replacement scanner
replacing replacing (without replacing
developer of the image (reading)
OPC drum transfer belt consumable parts)
drum density sensor section

OPC drum counter clear 24-7 ∗

Developer counter clear 24-5 ∗
ADJ 5A Color image density sensor
calibration
44-13
∗
ADJ 7 OPC drum phase adjustment 50-22 (44-31) ∗
ADJ 6 Image skew adjustment
(LSU (writing) unit)
64-1/61-4
∗
ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment
(Print engine section)
50-22 (50-20/
50-21)
∗

The necessary work items for each condition are marked with " ∗."

Process correction is forcibly

performed. (SIM 44-6)

Execute the half tone image

correction. (SIM 44-26)

Check the copy color balance/density.

(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode
(Test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ/
UKOG-0283FCZZ is used.)

Perform ADJ 20A

Are the copy No Yes CCD gamma adjustment.
color balance and density Is the CCD replaced? SIM 63-3 (Normal document mode)
at satisfactory
levels? Set the ST chart
(UKOG-0280FCZZ) on
the original table.
Yes No

Enter the SIM 63-03

mode and press the
Check the copy color balance/density. EXECUTE key.
(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode
(Test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ/
UKOG-0283FCZZ is used.)

(to Next page) (to Next page) : Standard adjustment flow

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 32

 (from Previous page) (from Previous page)
Perform ADJ 20B copy color balance/
3 density auto adjustment. (SIM 46-24)
Can the Enter the SIM 46-24 mode and select
copy color balance and No A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
No Use SIM 46-21 to
Press the EXECUTE key. (The
Yes Are the
print the color
adjustment pattern 1 is printed.)
color balance
and density at the balance check
4 satisfactory
levels?
sheet, and check Set the adjustment pattern 1
the patch color on the original table, select
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 20C balance of process the FACTORY mode, and
copy color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 46-21) Yes black. press the EXECUTE key.
/Check the copy (Auto adjustment step 1) *1
color balance and
Perform the initial setup of half tone density.
image correction. (SIM 44-21) Check in the Press the OK key. (The initial
(Manual operation) setup of half tone image correction
Text/Printed photo is automatically performed.)
Execute the half tone image correction. mode. (Use the
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26) test chart
UKOG-0283FCZZ.)
1 Cancel SIM 46-24.
Check the copy color balance and the density.
(Check in the (Manual operation)
Text/Printed photo mode.)
*2 (Use the test chart UKOG-0283FCZZ.)
The number of times
is limited to 3 times Were all
the three kinds of
Are the copy color balance/density adjustment 4
No color balance and density
targets changed?
Yes
(SIM 63-11)
at satisfactory
levels? Change the color balance/density
No adjustment factory targets. 3
Yes (SIM 63-11)

Were the
No copy color balance and Yes Make the factory color balance target
density Were (when adjusting the copy color
customized? the three kinds of
balance/density with SIM 46-24) same
color balance/density adjustment
as the service color balance target and
targets changed?
Yes (SIM 63-11) the color balance target when adjusting
the density. (SIM63-8)
Auto color balance adjustment No
service target is set.
Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.

Perform the initial setup of half tone

Press the SETUP key. image correction. (SIM 44-21)

1
Set the color patch image (adjustment Execute the half tone image correction.
pattern) printed in the copy color balance/ (Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
density adjustment on the original table,
and press the EXECUTE key.
Check the copy color balance and density.
Check in the (Manual operation)
Press the REPEAT key. Text/Printed photo mode.
(Use the test chart UKOG-0283FCZZ.)

Press the EXECUTE key.

Are the
No copy color
balance and the density
Press the OK key.
*2 in the specified
The number of level ?
times is limited to
Cancel SIM 63-7.
3 times
Yes

Is the color balance/ Perform ADJ 20F copy color

density adjustment performed
Yes balance/density adjustment
for each copy mode ? for each copy mode separately.
(Does the user request (SIM 46-10)
that ?)

No

The copy color *1: When adjusting to a customized color balance, select the
balance and SERVICE mode.
density adjustment *2: If a satisfactory result in the copy color balance or the density
completed. cannot be obtained by repetition of this loop of procedures
3 times or more, there may be a problem in the machine conditions.
Perform the printer color balance Check the cause, repair the trouble section, and execute all the
adjustment. adjustment from the beginning again.
: Standard adjustment flow

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 33

(3) Copy color balance and density check
20-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
(Note)
(Normal document copy mode)
Before checking the coy color balance and density, be sure to exe-
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
cute the following jobs.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) * When a U2 trouble occurs.
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26) * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
(Method) * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy (1) Note before adjustment
of the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ), and check that 1) Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
they are proper. surface are free from dirt and dust. (If there is some dust and
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.
color copy mode 2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart (UK0G- free from dirt and scratches.
0283FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "3" in the Text/Printed If they are dirty, clean them.
Photo mode (Manual), and make a copy.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust-
ment mode must be set to the default (center). (2) Adjustment procedures
In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color. 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
ment table.
To check the density, use the gray chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ). Set
the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
(Manual). the left side.
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment
mode must be set to the default (center).
• Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
the following conditions.
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
chart (UKOG-0283FCZZ) to check.
(Color copy)
Patch 1 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Patch 2 is copied. If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
(Black-and-white copy) ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
method using the SIT chart.
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART NOTE:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
• Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
table.
• UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
Patch 3 is copied. 2) Enter the SIM 63-03 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
Patch 1 is not copied. The automatic adjustment is started. During the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. After completion of the adjust-
• Check with the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ)
ment, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
check to insure the following conditions. 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.63-03 CLOSE
(Color copy)
SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
OC   #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
#7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,

#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16:15, #17: 10, #18: 8,

#19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2

B G R  OC 1/4

NOTE:
Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ) is easily discolored by
The densities of patches 1 – 6 of
each color are properly balanced.
Patch 7 is slightly
copied or not copied.
sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and tempera-
ture, put it in a bag such as a clear file) and store in a dark
place of low temperature and low humidity.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 34

 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
20-B Copy color balance adjustment (Auto selected.)
adjustment) The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is procedure 2) on the document table.
replaced.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
* When the CCD unit is replaced. so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5
* When a U2 trouble occurs. sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjust-
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. ment pattern) paper.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
a. General
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the copy density of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black with SIM 46-
24 or the user program automatically.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the copy modes are revised.)

There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
is used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to [EXECUTE] key.
reduce the number of service calls.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
If the copy color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance. request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does balance, select the service target.
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the 0
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE

though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT

machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining PLEASE SELECT THE MODE (FACTORY) OR (SERVICE) AND PLACE

the normal color balance. THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].

To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully ,

understood. 㪁LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.

FACTORY SERVICE EXECUTE

b. Note for executing the color balance adjustment (Auto

The copy color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
adjustment)
executed to print the color balance check patch image. Wait
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly. until the operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop- Remark:
erly.
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
3) Be sure to use the specified paper for color. balance auto adjustment menu.)
4) Before execution of the image quality check and the image There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following correc- auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
tions forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
state.
above two.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correc-
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
tion) forcibly. (SIM44-6)
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26) 63-11.)
c. Adjustment procedure (Auto color balance adjustment by Service target color balance: The color balance can be cus-
the serviceman) tomized according to the user's request. (Variable)
1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same. Both are set to the standard
0 color balance when shipping.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-24 CLOSE
For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
can be registered with SIM 63-7.
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11”˜17” SIZE PAPER
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT

EXECUTE

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 35

5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the High density Low density
half tone image correction is performed.
Y

M
0
SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE C
TEST
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT Bk

CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA CMY
mixed
  ,PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE. color

Max O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A

REPEAT OK 1) The max. density

section is not blurred. 3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.

Remark: 4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK

• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. 2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image • The patch density is changed gradually. C, and BK are not copied.

correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-

(Method 3)
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played. This operation takes several minutes. Use the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ) in the
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color bal-
After completion of the operation, "Please quit this mode" is
ance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance
displayed.
and density check.)
Do not cancel the simulation until "Please quit this mode" is
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
displayed.
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
0
CLOSE
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24

ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT

If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
   20C).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
6) Check the color balance and density. 7) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.
(Method 1) (Forcible execution)
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
image is within the following specifications. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.

Fig. 1 PG image 0
High density Low density SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
TEST
Y
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
M TOUGH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.

Bk

EXECUTE
Max O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A

It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-

1) The max. density
section is not blurred. pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.

3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK Patch A of each of Y, M, (Normal end (Auto transition))

• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. C, and BK are not copied.
• The patch density is changed gradually.

The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter 0

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE

not be reversed. HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION

The density level of each color must be almost at the same  [S_VALUE]

level. #1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936

Patch B may not be copied. #6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137

Patch A must not be copied. #11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260

(Method 2) K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1

By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 36

 (Abnormal end (Auto transition)) b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
0 2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26
erly.
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
3) Set the color patch image adjustment patter on the document
 [S_VALUE]
table, and place 5 sheet of white paper on it.
#1: ERR, #2: ERR, #3: ERR, #4: ERR, #5: ERR
4) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
#6: ERR, #7: ERR, #8: ERR, #9: ERR, #10: ERR
5) Before execution of the image quality check and adjustment,
#11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR be sure to execute the following corrections to set the image
K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1
forming section to the optimum state.
* Execute the high density image correction (process correc-
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. tion) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
8) Use the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ) in the * Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/
density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density
check.) c. Adjustment procedure
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per- 1) Enter the SIM 46-21 mode.
form the following procedures.
0
9) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-21 CLOSE
(SIM 44-21)
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
10) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution) A : xxx 㧧 POINT1
(SIM44-26) A: xxx B : xxx 㧧 POINT2

11) Use the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ) in the C : xxx 㧧 POINT3
245 755
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color bal- D : xxx 㧧 POINT4

ance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/den-

K C M Y
sity check.) EXECUTE OK

Repeat the procedures 9) – 11) until a satisfactory result is

obtained. C EXECUTE
However, the number of times of repeat is limited to 3 times. If the
copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the specified 10-key
level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may be another
cause. or self print end
EXECUTE
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments,
and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the
beginning.
0
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-21 CLOSE
copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ M19C) (Man-
ual adjustment). ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A : xxx 㧧 POINT1

A: xxx B : xxx 㧧 POINT2

20-C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual C : xxx 㧧 POINT3

245 755
adjustment) D : xxx 㧧 POINT4

This adjustment is required in the following cases:

K C M Y EXECUTE OK
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
* When the CCD is replaced. selected.)
* When a U2 trouble occurs. The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. balance is satisfactory.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. If not, execute the following procedures.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
High density Low density
a. General Y

The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to M

adjust the copy density (15 pts for each color) of CMYK according C
to a request from the user for changing (customizing) the color bal-
Bk
ance because the automatic adjustment stated above is resulted in
CMY
an unsatisfactory result or a fine adjustment is required. mixed
color
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
Max O
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment. N M L K J I H G F E D C B A

If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal- 1) The max. density
section is not blurred. 3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better and BK is very slightly copied.

efficiency. 4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK

• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. 2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
• The patch density is changed gradually. C, and BK are not copied.

The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 37

 The density level of each color must be almost at the same (Abnormal end (Auto transition))
level.
Patch B may not be copied. 0
CLOSE
Patch A must not be copied. TEST SIMULATION NO.44-21

When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER

request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard RESULT

color balance stated above. ERROR:K,C,M,Y

4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
EXECUTE
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. RESULT

The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 – 755 (1 –

999). When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation.
balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set
to 500. This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To data as the reference data for the half tone correction.
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. Immediately after execution of ADJ 20C (Color balance adjust-
Repeat procedures of 2) – 5) until the condition of 3) is satis- ment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this proce-
fied. dure.
When ADJ 20B (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
adjustment values of A – O to a same level collectively. operation is started.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient 8) Execute SIM 44-26 to perform the half tone image correction.
way of adjustment. (Forcible execution)
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A – O [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UK0G- 0
0283FCZZ) and a user's document according to necessity in TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
the normal copy mode, the text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
to check the adjustment result. (Refer to the item of the copy TOUGH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
color balance/density check.)
7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)
EXECUTE
0
SIMULATION NO.44-21 CLOSE
TEST It takes several minute to complete the operation. After com-
HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
TOUCH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
(Normal end (Auto transition))

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
EXECUTE HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION

RESULT
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. COMPLETE

(Normal end (Auto transition)) RESULT EXECUTE

0 (Abnormal end (Auto transition))

TEST SIMULATION NO.44-21 CLOSE

HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER 0

RESULT SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
TEST
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
COMPLETE
RESULT

ERROR:K,C,M,Y
RESULT EXECUTE

RESULT EXECUTE

After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 38

9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UK0G-
0283FCZZ) and a user's document according to necessity in
the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and check the adjust-
ment result again. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/
density check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not in the specified
level, repeat procedures of 7) – 9) until they are in the speci-
fied range.
The number of repeat is, however, limited to 3 times.
If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
specified level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may
be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
(NOTE)
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the reg-
istered color balance.
(Auto color balance adjustment target gamma setting)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
There are following three kinds of the target.
• Factory color balance (gamma) target
• Service color balance (gamma) target
• User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
ment) is executed with SIM 46-21).
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
• Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
Kind Descriptions
A Factory There are three kinds of the color balance target, and each
color of them is specified according to the machine design. Use
balance SIM 63-11 to select one of them as the factory target. The
(gamma) default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
target which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service This target is used when the user requests to customize
color the color balance to user’s desired level. In advance, the
balance user’s unique color balance must be registered as the
(gamma) service color balance target.
target The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman
with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color balance and with SIM
63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes
the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the user’s color
balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM
63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory
color balance target set with SIM 63-11.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color balance is
same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on
color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color
balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the color balance
to the factory color balance target.
C User Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma)
color target
balance When the service color balance target is changed, this
(gamma) color balance target is also changed accordingly.
target

• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)

Color balance target in the copy color balance

Use SIM 63-11 to select
one of the three kinds of
color balance targets.
Factory color balance
target (DEF1)
Factory color balance
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance
target (DEF3)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Factory color balance Service color balance Factory setting
=
target (DEF1) target
Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the
Factory color balance Service color balance
≠ optional color balance, and
target (one of DEF1 – 3) target (Unique)
use SIM 63-7 to register it.
Factory color balance Service color balance Execute SIM 63-8.
=
target (one of DEF1 – 3) target (The service color balance
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)

Color balance target for

Service color balance
the user color balance =
target
adjustment

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 39

• Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)

SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target (DEF2) Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment

Fig. 6 L*a*b* table color system +b* Direction of Yellow

chromaticity diagram
(hue and chrome)

SIM63-8
Hue
Factory color balance target
Factory color
(DEF1) = Service color balance
balance target
target/Color balance target for the
(DEF1)
user color balance adjustment

+a*
Direction Direction DEF1 Color balance with emphasis on color Default
of Green of Red reproduction (factory setting)
DEF2 Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3 Color balance with emphasis on Cyan

Direction of Blue

Factory color balance target (DEF3) =

Factory color balance target (DEF3) Service color balance target/Color balance
SIM63-8 target for the user color balance adjustment

• Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust-
ment (SIM 45-24).
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
changed accordingly.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
Select the service color balance target with SIM 46-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
improper.

(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
the purpose of registration)
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
customized with SIM 46-21.
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
required.
b. Setting procedure
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
the service color balance target)
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern. 1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
(adjustment pattern).
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
same color balance target to another machine.
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. adjustment.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it
from discoloration and dirt.
The service color balance target data are basically registered
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
46-21.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 40

2) Enter the SIM 63-7 mode. (Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
0 the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.63-07
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
SCANNER TARGET OF COLOR CALIB SETUP:SERVICE
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
get with SIM 63-7.
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
be sure to execute this procedure.
K C M Y SETUP 1/1 1) Enter the SIM 63-8 mode.

3) Press [SETUP] key. 0

4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly TEST SIMULATION NO.63㧙08 CLOSE
adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SETTING:SERVICE
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 20C) on the document
table.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM
64-2 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the
printed pattern is normal. ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
(When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
SIM 64-2, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key to print.)
3) Press [YES] key.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
machine can be used.
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side. ance as the factory color balance target.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
(adjustment pattern). 20-D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally
SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe-
cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
unnecessary to adjust)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
0 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
TEST SIMULATION NO. 63-07 CLOSE * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP㧦SERVICE The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
SET THE CHART ON PLATEN AND TOUCH [EXECUTE]. individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment.
1) Enter the SIM 46-1 mode.

EXECUTE
0
TEST S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 - 0 1 CLOSE
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read. EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT (COLO R)[ COP Y]
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image A㧦 xx 㧧 AUTO

(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again. A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 TEXT

C㧦 xx 㧧 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
1 99
D㧦 xx 㧧 TEXT/PHOTO
0
TEST SIMULATION NO. 63-07 CLOSE
OK
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP㧦SERVICE

NOW CHART PATCH READING...

10-key

OK
EXECUTE

0
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
TEST S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 - 0 1 CLOSE
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys. CLOSE
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT (COLO R)[ COP Y]
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B – O.
A㧦 xx 㧧 AUTO
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 TEXT
abnormal. C㧦 xx 㧧 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
1 99
In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again. D㧦 xx 㧧 TEXT/PHOTO

7) Press [OK] key.

OK
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 41

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.

Adjustment Default 0
Display/Item (Copy mode)
value range value
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-02 CLOSE
E
A AUTO Auto 1 – 99 50
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
B TEXT Text 1 – 99 50
A㧦 xx 㧧 AUTO1
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 – 99 50
A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 AUTO2
PHOTO C㧦 xx 㧧 TEXT
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 – 99 50 1 99
D㧦 xx 㧧 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 – 99 50

F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 – 99 50 OK
G MAP Map 1 – 99 50
H LIGHT Light document 1 – 99 50
10-key
I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy 1 – 99 50
COPY) document)
OK
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 – 99 50
PHOTO (COPY TO (Copy document)
COPY) 0
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 – 99 50 TEST SIMULATION NO.46-02 CLOSE
CLOSE
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone 1 – 99 50
A㧦 xx 㧧 AUTO1
TONE enhancement)
A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 AUTO2
ENHANCEMENT) C㧦 xx 㧧 TEXT
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 – 99 50 㨇 1 㨪 99㨉
D㧦 xx 㧧 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTO (COLOR (Color tone
TONE enhancement)
OK
ENHANCEMENT)
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 – 99 50
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
(COLOR TONE (Color tone
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
Adjustment Default
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 – 99 50 Display/Item (Copy mode)
value range value
(COLOR TONE (Color tone
A AUTO1 Auto 1 1 – 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
B AUTO2 Auto 2 1 – 99 50
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph (Color 1 – 99 50
C TEXT Text 1 – 99 50
(COLOR TONE tone enhancement)
ENHANCEMENT) D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 – 99 50
PHOTO
Q MAP (COLOR TONE Map (Color tone 1 – 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 – 99 50
R SINGLE COLOR Single color 1 – 99 50 F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 – 99 50
S SINGLE COLOR Single color (Copy 1 – 99 50 G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 – 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) document) H MAP Map 1 – 99 50
T TWO COLOR Two-color (Red/ 1 – 99 50 I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy 1 – 99 50
Black) copy COPY) document)
U TWO COLOR Two-color (Red/ 1 – 99 50 J TEXT/PRINTED Test/Printed Photo 1 – 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) Black) copy (Copy PHOTO (COPY TO (Copy document)
document) COPY)
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 – 99 50
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor- L LIGHT Light density 1 – 99 50
mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result. document
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter- 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor-
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter-
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
obtained.
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
20-E Copy density adjustment (each mono- To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
chrome copy mode) (Whole adjustment) decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
This adjustment is required in the following cases. 20-F Copy color balance adjustment (Color bal-
* When a U2 trouble occurs. ance adjustment at each density level in
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. each color copy mode) (Normally not
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. required)
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally This adjustment is required in the following cases.
individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment is exe- * When a U2 trouble occurs.
cuted when there is a request from the user. * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each
color copy mode.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 42

Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
is executed when there is a request from the user. When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
sity is decreased.
0 When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-10 CLOSE
with the color keys are collectively adjusted. That is, all the
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT

TEXT PRINTED PHOTO PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO

density levels (points) from the low density point to the high
TEXT / PRT PHOTO

MAP LIGHT COPY ORG

density point can be adjusted collectively.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed out.
1/1 The color balance at each density level (point) and the density
TEXT can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern.
However, it is more practically to make a cop and check it.

0
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-10 CLOSE
20-G Monochrome copy density adjustment
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [TXST] (Density adjustment at each density level in
A: xxx
A㧦xxx
B㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 1
㧧 POINT 2
each monochrome copy mode) (Normally
245 755
C㧦xxx

D㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 3

㧧 POINT 4
not required)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
C
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
10-key This is to adjust each density level in each monochrome copy
mode.
OK Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment
is executed when there is a request from the user.
0 1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode.
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-10 CLOSE

ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [TXST]

A㧦xxx 㧧 POINT 1
0
A: xxx B㧦xxx 㧧 POINT 2 TEST SIMULATION NO.46-16 CLOSE
C㧦xxx 㧧 POINT 3
245 755 ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
D㧦xxx 㧧 POINT 4
A㧦xxx 㧧 POINT1

K C M Y EXECUTE OK A: xxx B㧦xxx 㧧 POINT2

C㧦xxx 㧧 POINT3
373 627
D㧦xxx 㧧 POINT4
EXECUTE EXECUTE [SYSTEM
SETTINGS]
key EXECUTE OK
or end of print
0
SIMULATION NO. 46-10 CLOSE
10-key EXECUTE
TEST

ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [TXST]

A㧦xxx 㧧 POINT 1
EXECUTE
A: xxx B㧦xxx 㧧 POINT 2
or self print end
C㧦xxx 㧧 POINT 3
㨇245㨪 755 㨉
D㧦xxx 㧧 POINT 4

K C M Y EXECUTE OK
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-16 CLOSE

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key. ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
A㧦xxx 㧧 POINT1
3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color
A: xxx B㧦xxx 㧧 POINT2
key. C㧦xxx 㧧 POINT3
373 627
4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll D㧦xxx 㧧 POINT4

key.
EXECUTE OK
Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default value
(Point) value range 2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
A POINT1 Point 1 245 – 755 500 key.
B POINT2 Point 2 245 – 755 500
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
C POINT3 Point 3 245 – 755 500
D POINT4 Point 4 245 – 755 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
E POINT5 Point 5 245 – 755 500
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
F POINT6 Point 6 245 – 755 500
sity is decreased.
G POINT7 Point 7 245 – 755 500 When the arrow key is pressed, the selected are collectively
H POINT8 Point 8 245 – 755 500 adjusted. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low
I POINT9 Point 9 245 – 755 500 density point to the high density point can be adjusted collec-
J POINT10 Point 10 245 – 755 500 tively.
K POINT11 Point 11 245 – 755 500 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
L POINT12 Point 12 245 – 755 500 printed out.
M POINT13 Point 13 245 – 755 500 The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
N POINT14 Point 14 245 – 755 500 referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
O POINT15 Point 15 245 – 755 500 practically to make a cop and check it.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 43


20-H Gamma/density adjustment in the text
image edge section (Normally not required)
This adjustment is used to change the reproduction level of text
and outline to an optional level by changing the gamma and the
density at the edge section of text image. The thickness of fine text
and fine lines is changed by this adjustment.
The adjustment result must be checked in the Text/Printed Photo
copy mode (Manual).
This adjustment is enabled only in the Text mode, the Text/Printed
Photo mode, and the Text/Photograph copy mode.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
required in the following cases.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-27
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
When the adjustment value of item A, C, or E is changed, the
gamma at the edge area of text and lines is changed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast at
the edge area of text and lines is increased. When the adjust-
ment value is decreased, the contrast is decreased.
When the adjustment value of item B, D, or F is increased, the
image density at the edge area of text and lines is increased.
When the value is decreased, the density is decreased.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation.
6) Make a copy in the TEXT/Printed Photo copy mode (Manual),
and check the copy.
Use a document with fine text and line images for copying and
checking.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27
mode and change the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
0 obtained.
CLOSE

COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP

20-I Copy color balance adjustment (Single
A㧦 xx 㧧 BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)

A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE) color copy mode) (Normally not required)

C㧦 xx 㧧 COLOR TEXT (SLOPE) This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
1 99
D㧦 xx 㧧 COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE) the single color copy mode to the user's request.
The adjustment is made by changing YMC components of each
OK
color.
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
10-key is a request from the user.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
OK required in the following cases.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
0 * When a U2 trouble occurs.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-27 CLOSE * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
A㧦 xx 㧧 BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)

A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE)

a. Adjustment procedures

1 99
C㧦 xx 㧧 COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)
1) Enter the SIM 46-25 mode.
D㧦 xx 㧧 COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE)

0
OK
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-25 CLOSE

2) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key. SINGLE COLOR MODE COLOR BALANCE SETUP
A㧦x x x 㧧 RED

Display/Item Adjustment Default A: xxx B㧦xxx 㧧 GREEN

Content C㧦xxx 㧧 BLUE

(Copy mode) range value 0 255
D㧦xxx 㧧 YELLOW
A BLACK TEXT Black text edge area 1 – 99 50
(SLOPE) engine J curve calculation K C M Y OK
coefficient (slope) setting
B BLACK TEXT Black text edge area 1 – 99 50
(INTERCEPT) engine J curve calculation 10-key
coefficient (density) setting
C COLOR TEXT Color text edge area 1 – 99 50
OK
(SLOPE) engine J curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
D COLOR TEXT Color text edge area 1 – 99 50 0
(INTERCEPT) engine J curve calculation SIMULATION NO.46-25 CLOSE
TEST
coefficient (density) setting
E ED TEXT Error diffusion edge area 1 – 99 50 SINGLE COLOR MODE COLOR BALANCE SETUP

engine J curve calculation

A㧦xxx 㧧 RED
(SLOPE)
coefficient (slope) setting A: xxx B㧦xxx 㧧 GREEN

C㧦xxx 㧧 BLUE
F ED TEXT Error diffusion edge area 1 – 99 50 0 255
D㧦xxx 㧧 YELLOW
(INTERCEPT) engine J curve calculation
coefficient (density) setting
K C M Y OK

2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.

3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 44

4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. 2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO).
Adjustment Default value
Display/Item
value When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
C M Y
A RED 0 – 255 0 255 255 3) Press [OK] key.
B GREEN 0 – 255 255 0 255 When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibra-
C BLUE 0 – 255 255 255 0 tion (automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density)
D YELLOW 0 – 255 0 0 255 is not displayed in the user program mode.
E MAGENTA 0 – 255 0 255 0 (Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust-
F CYAN 0 – 255 255 0 0 ment))
5) Press [OK] key. Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color bal-
6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation. ance set with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above set-
7) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the tings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
copy. properly.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode 1) Enter the system setting mode.
and change the adjustment value. Repeat the above procedures 2) Enter the copy setting mode.
until a satisfactory result is obtained. 3) Press the auto color calibration key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
20-J Auto color balance adjustment by the user
(Copy color balance auto adjustment
enable setting and adjustment)
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
tion with SIM 26-53.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy 5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
color balance and density and the user's operational ability cedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
are judged enough to execute the adjustment. the light density area is on the left side.
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user. patch image (adjustment pattern).
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
Black Yellow
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
Red
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. Blue
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
b. Setting procedure
1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-53 CLOSE

DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION

6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
A㧦 x 㧧 (1:YES 0:NO)
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
A: x
the display returns to the original operation screen.
0 1

20-K Background process condition setting in

OK the color auto copy mode
When the adjustment value is changed from the default adjustment
10-key value, this adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
OK
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
0 * When the user request for the adjustment.
CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-53
This adjustment is used to set the condition for inhibiting copy of
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION the background depending on the document image kind and state.
The setting is applied to the color auto copy mode.
A㧦 x 㧧 (1:YES 0:NO)

A: x
0 1

OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 45

1) Enter the SIM 46-33 mode. Set item A (SW MODE1) – G (SW MODE7):
Used to set Enable/Disable of the background delete function
0 for various kinds of documents.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-43 CLOSE
When the value of the set item corresponding to the document
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : SUPER FINE) kind is set to 1, the background delete function of the docu-
A x AUTO
ment kind is enabled.
A: x B x EXPOSURE1
To reproduce the document colors directly, set this setting to
1 1 C x EXPOSURE2
OFF (0).
D x EXPOSURE3
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the entered
EXECUTE OK value to the memory.
Set item H (TH_MAX_MONO):
2) Select COLOR AE mode with [NEXT] and [BACK] key.
Used to set the density level at which the background delete
3) Select the setting mode with the scroll key. function is enabled for monochrome background documents.
Adjustment Default
Set to the range of 0 – 16.
Display/Item Content
range value To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase
COLOR A SW_ ON Auto mode: Text 0–1 1 the set value.
AE MODE1 OFF document To delete the background of dark-density documents:
background
Decrease the set value.
detection
B SW_ ON Auto mode: Text 0–1 1 After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
MODE2 OFF mesh document value to the memory.
background Set item I (TH_MAX_COLOR):
detection
Used to set the density level at which the background delete
C SW_ ON Auto mode: Text- 0–1 1
function is enabled for color background documents.
MODE3 OFF on-mesh
document Set to the range of 0 – 16.
background To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase
detection the set value.
D SW_ ON Auto mode: Mesh 0–1 0
To delete the background of dark-density documents:
MODE4 OFF document
Decrease the set value.
background
detection After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
E SW_ ON Auto mode: Photo 0–1 0 value to the memory.
MODE5 OFF document Set item J (SW_NEWS):
background
Used to set Enable/Disable of the newspaper (monochrome)
detection
background delete function.
F SW_ ON Auto mode: text 0–1 0
MODE6 OFF document It is not affected by the set item H.
background For newspapers of color background, this setting is invalid.
detection
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
G SW_ ON Auto mode: Other 0–1 0
value to the memory.
MODE7 OFF document
background Set item A (TH_MODE_SCR):
detection Used to set the mesh are level at which the background delete
H TH_MAX_ Monochrome 0 – 32 15 function is enabled for printed documents with mesh images.
MONO background
To delete background of documents with much mesh area:
detection threshold
value Increase the set value.
I TH_MAX_ Color background 0 – 32 15 To delete background of documents with less mesh area:
COLOR detection threshold Decrease the set value.
value Select TH_MODE_SCR, enter the set value, and press [SET]
J SW_NEWS Newspaper 0–1 0 key to save the entered value to the memory.
background
forcible delete (NOTE)
switch Enable/Disable of the background delete operation is determined
K SW_MODE_ Mesh area 1–3 3 by AND condition of A (SW MODE1) – G (SW MODE7), H (TH_
SCR1 background MAX_MONO), I (TH_MAX_COLOR), and A (TH_MODE_SCR).
judgment switch For newspapers documents, however, it is determined by the set
L SW_MODE_ Mesh area 0–1 0 item J (SW_NEWS) only.
SCR2 background delete
Except for the above set items, do not change the setting in the
select switch
market. Set them to the default values.
M SW_MODE_ Auto other 1–2 2
MIX document
background
detection switch
N SW_HOSEI Correction table 0–8 4
correction (–4 – +4)
A TH_MODE_ Mesh ratio 0 – 10000 3000
SCR threshold value
B TH_SITAJI_ Background mesh 0 – 10000 3000
SCR threshold value

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 46

 1) Enter the SIM 46-33 mode.
20-L Color document identification level (ACS
operation) setting 0
When the machine is used with some adjustment values changed TEST SIMULATION NO.46-43 CLOSE

from the default values, this adjustment is required in the following EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : SUPER FINE)

cases. A x AUTO

A: x
* When a U2 trouble occurs. B x EXPOSURE1

* When the MFP PWB is replaced. 1 1 C x EXPOSURE2

D x EXPOSURE3
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
EXECUTE OK
* When the user requests for the adjustment.
This setting is used to set the recognition level of a color image in a
2) Select the ACS mode with [NEXT] key and [BACK] key.
document.
3) Select the setting mode of "P/SIM LEVEL" with the scroll key.
The actual ACS operation is executed according to the combination
of the judgment reference value in the color auto mode set by the When a monochrome document is not recognized as a mono-
device and this setting. chrome document, increase the set value.
When a monochrome document cannot be judged as a mono- When a color document is not recognized as a color docu-
chrome document or when a color document cannot be judged as a ment, decrease the set value.
color document, change this setting. This setting is applied to the After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
color auto copy mode. value to the memory.
The figure in the table indicates the ACS setting level in the
device setting.
The ACS setting level of the device setting (the judgment refer-
ence value in the color auto mode) is changed with the setting
of SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL.
The left and the upper area from the cross point of the device
setting on the table and the ACS/P/SIM LEVEL setting serves
as the ACS operation condition.

Large hue area Small hue area

Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level

(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
ACS color judgment setting

Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1
Can be set About 10mm x About 5mm x About 3mm x About 1mm x
optionally. 5mm 5mm 4mm 3mm
(30000 pixel or (30000 pixel) (15000 pixel) (7000 pixel) (1875 pixel)
more)

Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1
Can be set About About About About
optionally. 10mm × 5mm 5mm × 5mm 3mm × 4mm 1mm × 3mm
(30000 pixel or (30000 pixel) (15000 pixel) (7000 pixel) (1875 pixel)
more)
Hue
C C
Large color level 5
area Hue
Hue level level 4
B B 㪚 㪚
(ACS/P/SIM
LEVEL) Hue 㪙 㪚
A A 㪙
level 3
Small color
area Hue 㪘 㪘
㪙
level 2
Hue 㪘
level 1
Device setting ACS setting level (Judgment reference set
value in the color auto mode) (5 steps)
[Monochrome] 1m2m3o4o5 [Color]
SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL (3 steps)
Weak hue [Monochrome] l [Color] Strong hue
XC XB XA
* Adjustment in 3 steps of device setting
(Example) When the ASC setting level of device setting (judgment
reference set value in the color auto mode) is 2 and SIM 46-33
ACS/P/SIM LEVEL is set to 3, the following area serves as the
ACS operating condition.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 47

 Large hue area Small hue area

Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level

(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1
ACS color judgment setting Can be set About 10mm x About 5mm x About 3mm x About 1mm x
optionally. 5mm 5mm 4mm 3mm
(30000 pixel or (30000 pixel) (15000 pixel) (7000 pixel) (1875 pixel)
more)
Hue
⦡⋡䈏ᒝ䈇
Strong hue
Hue level level 5
(SIM LEVEL) Hue
level 4
Hue
level 3
Hue
level 2
⦡⋡䈏ᒙ
Weak hue Hue
䈇 level 1

(NOTE) Though the judgment reference in the color auto mode of

device setting is set to "5: Monochrome," if a monochrome docu-
ment is not recognized as a monochrome document, increase the
set value of the set item A TH ACS5 ENLARGE (area level 5).
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set value to
the memory.
Except for the above set item, do not change the setting in the mar-
ket. Set it to the default value.

21 Printer color balance/density adjust-

ment
(1) Note before execution of the printer color balance/density
adjustment
(Requisite condition before execution of the printer color balance/
density adjustment)
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been com-
pleted properly.
(This adjustment is required in the following cases.)
* Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjust-
ment is required. Refer to the page of the ADJ 20 print color bal-
ance/density adjustment.
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 48

(2) Flow of printer color balance/density adjustment procedures

Printer color balance/density adjustment

START

Process correction is forcibly

performed. (SIM 44-6)

Execute the half tone image

correction. (SIM 44-26)

No
Is PCL mode
supported?

Yes

Check the printer color balance/

density. (Check the test pattern
of SIM 64-5.)

Use SIM 67-25 to the color balance

check sheet, and check the patch
color balance of process black.

Are the copy No

color balance and density
at satisfactory
levels?

Yes

(to Next page) (to Next page)

: Standard adjustment flow

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 49

 (from Previous page) (from Previous page)
Can the
printer color balance and No
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
Yes
4 Is PCL mode
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 21C
printer color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 67-25)
Perform ADJ 21B printer color balance/
3 density auto adjustment. (SIM 67-24)
Enter the SIM 67-24 mode and select
A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)
Press the EXECUTE key.
No (The adjustment pattern 1 is printed.)
supported?
Set the adjustment pattern 1 on the
original table, select the FACTORY
Yes mode, and press the EXECUTE key.
(Auto adjustment step 1) *1

Yes Use SIM 67-25 to print

the color balance
Is PCL mode Press the OK key. (The initial
check sheet, and
supported? check the patch color setup of half tone image correction
balance of process is automatically performed.)
No black./Check the
printer color balance
and density. Cancel SIM 67-24.
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance (Check the test pattern
check sheet, and check the patch color of SIM 64-5)
balance of process black.

Use SIM 67-25 to print

Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance the color balance
check sheet, and check the patch color check sheet, and
balance of process black./Check the check the patch color
printer color balance and density. balance of process
(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5) black.

Are No Were
Yes the color all the three kinds
of color balance/density
Are the printer
balance and density at adjustment targets 4
No color balance and density
the satisfactory changed? Yes
levels? (SIM 67-26)
at satisfactory
levels? Yes
No
Change the color balance/
Were the density adjustment factory 3
No printer color balance targets. (SIM 67-26)
and density
customized?
Were
Yes
the three kinds of Make the factory printer balance target
color balance/density (when adjusting the printer color
Yes adjustment targets
balance/density with SIM 67-24) same
changed?
Auto color balance adjustment (SIM 67-26) as the service color balance target and
service target is set. the color balance target when adjusting
No the density. (SIM67-28)
Enter the SIM 67-27 mode.

Press the SETUP key.

No Is PCL mode
Set the color patch image (adjustment supported?
pattern) printed in the printer color
balance/density adjustment on the original Yes
table, and press the EXECUTE key.
Execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
Press the REPEAT key.

Press the EXECUTE key. Check the printer color balance/density.

(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5)

Press the OK key.

Are the
Yes printer color No
Cancel SIM 67-27. balance and the density 㧠
in the specified
level ?

No Is the printer Yes

color balance density
adjustment performed
with SIM67-25?

The printer color

balance and density
*1: When adjusting to a customized color balance, select the SERVICE mode.
adjustment completed.
: Standard adjustment flow

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 50

(3) Printer color balance/density check The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
(Note) to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to
execute the following procedures in advance. The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
* Execute the high density image correction (process correction) Patch B may not be copied.
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) Patch A must not be copied.
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
(Procedure) 21-A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto
a. When the PCL mode is supported: adjustment)
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. a. General
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
print test pattern is printed. the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the print modes are revised.)

There are following two modes of the automatic color balance

adjustment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman) (SIM 67-24
I used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
is used.) (The color balance target becomes the service tar-
get.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto adjust-

ment)
1) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
2) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be 3) Before execution of the image quality check and the image
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following correc-
same level. tions forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
state.
b. When the PCL mode is not supported: (In the case of GDI
model) * Execute the high density image correction (Process correc-
tion) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the * Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
black patch to check the color balance. c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Fig. 1 PG image
1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode.
High density Low density

Y
0
M
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE
C PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE

Bk PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE TEST PATCH.

(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11”˜17” SIZE PAPER
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT

Max O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A
EXECUTE
1) The max. density
section is not blurred. 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK Patch A of each of Y, M,
• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. C, and BK are not copied. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
• The patch density is changed gradually.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 51

3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
procedure 2) on the document table.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper 0
so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5 TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE

sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjust- PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE

ment pattern) paper. CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA

   PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.

PRINTER CALIBRATION

REPEAT OK

Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE
4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
[EXECUTE] key. COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.

When the color balance is customized with the manual color  

balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's

PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
6) Check the color balance and density.
0
(Method 1)
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
PLEASE SELECT THE MODE (FACTORY) OR (SERVICE) AND PLACE
image is within the following specifications.
THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].
Fig. 1 PG image
, High density Low density
㪁LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
Y

FACTORY SERVICE EXECUTE

M

C
The print color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
executed to print the color balance check patch image. Wait Bk

until the operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.

Remark:
Max O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
balance auto adjustment menu.) 1) The max. density
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance section is not blurred. 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the 3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
above two. • The patch density is changed gradually.

Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
63-11.) not be reversed.
Service target color balance: The color balance can be cus- The density level of each color must be almost at the same
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable) level.
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory Patch B may not be copied.
target gamma data are the same.
Patch A must not be copied.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.
For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
can be registered with SIM 63-7.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 52

 (Method 2) (Normal end (Auto transition))
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 67-25
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance 0
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE

checked more precisely. HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION

 [S_VALUE]

#1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936

High density Low density
#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
Y
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
M
K C M Y
C EXECUTE 1/1
Bk
(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
CMY
mixed
color
0
Max O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
1) The max. density 3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
section is not blurred. and BK is very slightly copied.  [S_VALUE]

4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK #1: ERR, #2: ERR, #3: ERR, #4: ERR, #5: ERR
• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. 2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
• The patch density is changed gradually. C, and BK are not copied. #6: ERR, #7: ERR, #8: ERR, #9: ERR, #10: ERR

#11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR

(Method 3)
K C M Y
(This method cannot be used when the machine supports only EXECUTE 1/1
the GDI mode.)
9) After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26.
When the PCL mode is supported, use SIM 64-5 to print the
print test pattern. 10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
color balance and the density again.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key,
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
and the print test pattern is printed out.
print test pattern is printed out.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
almost at the same level.
When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
21-B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26 adjustment)
to change the factory color balance target and repeat the pro- This adjustment is required in the following cases.
cedures from 1). * When the copy color balance/density adjustment is required.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- Refer to the page of the ADJ print color balance/density adjust-
dures, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ ment.
20C). * After execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment.
When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the a. General
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
21C). adjust the copy density (15 points for each color) of each color
(CMYK) manually when the automatic adjustment cannot obtain
7) Cancel SIM 67-25.
the specified result or when a fine adjustment is required or when
For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the the user requests to change (customize) the color balance.
adjustment is completed.
In this adjustment, only the patch of each color is adjusted in the
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forc- above case where the automatic adjustment cannot obtain the
ible execution). specified result.
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode, and press [EXECUTE] key. When the color balance is lost, execute the automatic color bal-
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started. ance adjustment in advance and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Manual
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
adjustment)
TOUGH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
1) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
2) When setting the color patch image adjustment pattern on the
EXECUTE
document table, place 5 sheets of white paper on the color
patch image adjustment pattern.
3) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. 4) Before execution of the image quality check and the image
quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following correc-
tions forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
state.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correc-
tion) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 53

c. Adjustment procedure 4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode. select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
0 The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 – 755 (1 –
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-25 CLOSE 999). When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT 㧦PG balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set
A㧦 xx 㧧 POINT1 to 500.
A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 POINT2

C㧦 xx 㧧 POINT3
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
㨇 1㨪 99㨉
D㧦 xx 㧧 POINT4
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) – 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
K C M Y EXECUTE OK fied.

10-key
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
OK and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A – O to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
0
SIMULATION NO.67-25 CLOSE
way of adjustment.
TEST
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT 㧦PG
A㧦 xx 㧧 POINT1 process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A – O
A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 POINT2 approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Cancel SIM 67-25.
C㧦 xx 㧧 POINT3
㨇 1㨪 99㨉
D㧦 xx 㧧 POINT4
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
K C M Y EXECUTE OK adjustment is completed.)
7) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
EXECUTE NOTE: Only for the machine which support the PCL mode.
EXECUTE
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, this pro-
or self print end
cedure cannot be used.)
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
0
SIMULATION NO.67-25 CLOSE
The print test pattern is printed out.
TEST

PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT 㧦PG

The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
A㧦 xx 㧧 POINT1 level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
A: xx B㧦 xx 㧧 POINT2 not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
㨇 1㨪 99㨉
C㧦 xx 㧧 POINT3
almost at the same level.
D㧦 xx 㧧 POINT4
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forc-
K C M Y EXECUTE OK ible execution).
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
selected.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. 0
CLOSE
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the desired TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26

color balance is obtained. HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION

If the above specification is not satisfied, perform the following TOUGH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.

procedures.

High density Low density

EXECUTE
Y

M
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
C
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
Bk
(Normal end (Auto transition))
CMY
mixed
color
0
Max O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE

1) The max. density HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION

3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
section is not blurred. and BK is very slightly copied.  [S_VALUE]
4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. #1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
• The patch density is changed gradually. C, and BK are not copied.
#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter #11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
K C M Y
not be reversed. EXECUTE 1/1
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 54

 (Abnormal end (Auto transition)) This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
0 ment) is executed with SIM 67-25.
CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
 [S_VALUE]
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
#1: ERR, #2: ERR, #3: ERR, #4: ERR, #5: ERR
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
#6: ERR, #7: ERR, #8: ERR, #9: ERR, #10: ERR
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
#11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR
improper.
K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1 • Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment

9) After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26. Kind Descriptions

10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern again.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
almost at the same level.
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register
the color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the reg-
istered color balance.
(Auto color balance adjustment service color balance target
gamma setting)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
There are following three kinds of the target.
• Factory color balance (gamma) target
• Service color balance (gamma) target
• User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
balance (gamma) and each of them is specified according to the
target machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
balance (gamma) customize the color balance to user’s desired
target level. In advance, the user’s unique color
balance must be registered as the service color
balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the
serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color
balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, the color balance target of the user’s
color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color
balance is set to the factory color balance target
set with SIM 67-26.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance
target. (Emphasized on color reproduction
(DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set
the color balance to the factory color balance
target.
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
balance (gamma) (gamma) target
target When the service color balance target is
changed, this color balance target is also
changed accordingly.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 55

• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)

Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select
one of the three kinds of Factory color balance Service color balance Factory setting
color balance targets. =
target (DEF1) target
Factory color balance
target (DEF1) Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the
Factory color balance Service color balance
≠ optional color balance, and
target (one of DEF1 – 3) target (Unique)
Factory color balance use SIM 67-27 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance Service color balance Execute SIM 67-28.
Factory color balance =
target (one of DEF1 – 3) target (The service color balance
target (DEF3)
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment

Color balance target for

Service color balance
the user color balance =
target
adjustment

• Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)

By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)

SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target (DEF2) Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
+b* Direction of Yellow

SIM67-28
Hue
Factory color balance target
Factory color
(DEF1) = Service color balance
balance target
target/Color balance target for the
(DEF1)
Direction of Green

user color balance adjustment

(A)

+a*
Direction
of Red

DEF1 Color balance with emphasis on color Default

reproduction (factory setting)
DEF2 Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3 Color balance with emphasis on Cyan

Direction of Blue

Factory color balance target (DEF3) =

Factory color balance target (DEF3) Service color balance target/Color balance
SIM67-28 target for the user color balance adjustment

• Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust-
ment (SIM 67-28).
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 67-26.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
the purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 67-25.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it
from discoloration and dirt.
The service color balance target data are basically registered
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
67-25.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 56

If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal- 6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the (adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. 0
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment. TEST SIMULATION NO.67-27 CLOSE

The correctness of the service color balance target data can be SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP㧦SERVICE

judges as follows. BASE:8800

#B: 227, #C 624, #D: 908, #E: 1249, #F: 2074

Select the service color balance target with SIM 67-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment #G: 3298, #H: 18951, #I: 76117, #J: 128495, #K: 165225

result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered #L: 184155, #M: 189254, #N: 194377, #:O: 197276

service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be K C M Y REPEAT OK 1/1
improper.
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27. Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B – O.
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
abnormal.
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously. In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again.
b. Setting procedure 7) Press [OK] key.
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
service color balance target) ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.
1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image (Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
(adjustment pattern). color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
adjustment. by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
2) Enter the SIM 67-27 mode. get with SIM 67-27.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 67-
0 26, be sure to execute this procedure.
SIMULATION NO.67-27 CLOSE
TEST 1) Enter the SIM 67-28 mode.
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP㧦SERVICE
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
0
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-28 CLOSE
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB㧦SERVICE

K C M Y SETUP 1/1

3) Press [SETUP] key.

4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE

(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21C) on the document

table. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another 3) Press [YES] key.
machine can be used. The service color balance target and the color balance target for
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side. the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image ance as the factory color balance target.
(adjustment pattern).
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with 21-C Auto color balance adjustment by the user
SIM 67-25 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe- (Copy color balance auto adjustment
cute SIM 67-27 to register the service color balance target ENABLE setting and adjustment)
data.
a. General
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
0 ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-27 CLOSE This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP㧦SERVICE tion with SIM 26-54.
NOW CHART PATCH READING...
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
EXECUTE
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 57

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

* When the MFP PWB is replaced.

* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. 22 Fusing paper guide position adjust-
b. Setting procedure ment
1) Enter the SIM 26-54 mode. This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the fusing section is disassembled.
0
SIMULATION NO.26-54 CLOSE
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
TEST
* When a wrinkle is made on paper in the fusing section.
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION OF PRINTER
A㧦 x 㧧 (1:YES 0:NO) * When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper rear
A: x edge section.
㨇 0㨪 1 㨉 1) Loosen the C fixing screw.
2) Shift the fusing paper guide in the arrow direction A or B (up
OK and down direction).

2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.

When disabling, set to "0" (NO).
When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibra-
tion (automatic adjustment of printer color balance and den-
sity) is not displayed in the user program mode.
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust-
ment)) A A
Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color bal-
ance set with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above set-
tings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
B B
properly.
1) Enter the system setting mode.
The standard fixing position is the center of the marking scale.
2) Enter the printer setting mode.
Change the position depending on the situation.
3) Press the auto color calibration key.
* When a wrinkle is formed on paper, change the position
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. upward (in the arrow direction A).
1 * When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper
rear edge section, shift the position downward (in the arrow
direction B).

23 Document size sensor adjustment

This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the document size sensor section is disassembled.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. * When the document size sensor section is replaced.
5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro- * When a U2 trouble occurs.
cedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
the light density area is on the left side.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
23-A Document size sensor detection point
Black Yellow adjustment
1) Enter the SIM 41-1 mode.
Red
Blue 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.41-01 CLOSE
PD SENSOR CHECK
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3

PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7

1/1
1/1

6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment

is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 58

 Slowly tilt the document detection arm unit in the arrow direc- 2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
tion. Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment With the document cover open, without placing a document on
screw so that the display OCSW is returned to the normal dis- the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
play when the height of the arm unit top from the table glass is
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
32 r 0.5mm. Slide the actuator position and adjust. (If the ON
[EXECUTE] key.
timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the document
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
detection function may malfunction.)
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.

24 Manual paper feed tray paper size

(width) sensor adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the manual paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual paper feed tray unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode.
32+
-0.5mm
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.40-02 CLOSE

BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT

MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENT.

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START

EXECUTE

23-B Document size sensor sensitivity adjust- EXECUTE

ment
1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
0
0 TEST SIMULATION NO.40-02 CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.41-02 CLOSE
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP
MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENTE.
WITH THE ORIGINAL COVEROPENED,TURN ON THE EXECUTE
KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE. EXECUTING…

EXECUTE

EXECUTE
EXECUTE

0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.41-02 CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.40-02 CLOSE
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP

SET AN A3-SIZE(11”˜17”)COPY PAPER ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE, BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT

AND WITH THE OC OPEND,TURN ON THE EXECUTE KEY.
P1(A4)POSITION ADJUSTMENT.

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START

EXECUTE

Adjustment Adjustment completed EXECUTE

EXECUTE
failed
EXECUTE
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.41-02 CLOSE

DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP

DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO- SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED. Repeat the above procedure to adjust
the A4R width MIN POSITION.

EXECUTE

0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.41-02 CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.40-02 CLOSE
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP

PHOTO-SENSOR ERROR POSITION BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT

. COMPLETE

PD1 ,---,---,---,---,---,---,---

EXECUTE

EXECUTE

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 59

2) Set the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion. 25 RSPF tray paper size (width) sensor
adjustment (Refer to the MX-RPX1
SM.)

26 Touch panel coordinate setting

This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the operation panel is replaced.
When a U2 trouble occurs.
When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
1) Enter the SIM65-1 mode.

3) Press [EXECUTE] key.

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized. When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size width.
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
display. again.
The A4R size width position detection level of the manual Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
paper feed guide is recognized. frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
8) Set the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi- pressed.
tion. * When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).

27 Image loss, void area, image off-cen-

9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR"
display is highlighted.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
ter, image magnification ratio auto
adjustment with SIM50-28
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28.
* ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning
direction) (Print engine section)
* ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
* ADJ 16 Scan image off-center adjustment
* ADJ 17 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
(Menu in SIM50-28 mode)
Display/Item Content
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table
mode)
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is
executed

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 60

 7) Press [OK] key.
27-A Print image main scanning direction image
The adjustment result becomes valid.
magnification ratio automatic adjustment
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
0
2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key button. TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE

0 BK MAG : ** |**|

TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE

OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ

SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ
REPRINT RESCAN  RETRY  DATA OK
RESULT DATA

1/1
27-B Image off-center automatic adjustment
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button. 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
(Any paper size will do.) 2) Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button.

0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
TEST
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
MFT  CS1  CS2
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT DATA

EXECUTE 1/1 1/1

4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Select [ALL] with the key button.

The adjustment pattern is printed out.
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc- 0
tion) TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE

Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide. LEAD OFFSET
ALL

1/1

(NOTE)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items
can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE

6) Press [EXECUTE] key. AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE

MFT CS1 CS2 ADU

0 CS3 CS4 LCC

TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT 㧦SERVICE

PLEASE WAIT
EXECUTE 1/1

NOW EXECUTING…

REPRINT EXECUTE

The following item is automatically adjustment.

* Print image main scanning direction image magnification
ratio

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 61

5) Press [EXCUTE] key. 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
The adjustment pattern is printed out. tion)
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc- Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
tion) guide.
Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.

6) Press [EXCUTE] key.

7) Press [EXCUTE] key. 0

TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
The following items are automatically adjusted.
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT SERVICE
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment PLEASE SET THE SIT CHART PAPER ON THE OC
* Print image off-center adjustment THEN PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START

8) Press [OK] key.

The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray. REPRINT EXECUTE

The following items are automatically adjusted.

27-C Copy lead edge image reference position
Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment,
adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnifica-
direction image magnification ratio auto- tion ratio automatic adjustment
matic adjustment 7) Press [OK] key.
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
The adjustment result becomes valid.

0
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT SERVICE
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ OC LEAD   OFFSET SUB
SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT DATA

1/1 REPRINT RESCAN RETRY DATA OK

2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key button.

3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
27-D SPF mode image off-center, image lead
(Any paper size will do.)
edge position, sub scanning direction
0 image magnification ratio automatic adjust-
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE ment
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE Refer to the RSPF (MX-RPX1) SM.
MFT  CS1  CS2

EXECUTE 1/1

4) Press [EXCUTE] key.

The adjustment pattern is printed out.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 62

[7] SIMULATION
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. General
There are the following simulation functions for grasping the
machine operating conditions, troubleshooting, early detection of
trouble causes, speedy setting and adjustments, and improve-
ments in servicing.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transfer
The operating procedures and displays depend on the form of the
operation panel of the machine.

A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON o Program key ON o Asterisk (*) key
ON o CLEAR key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON o Ready for
input of a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key o START key ON
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key o START key ON
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item.
Press START key or EXECUTE key to start the simulation
operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main
code and the sub code, press the user setup key.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
1) Press CA key.

(Note for the simulation mode)

Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the
machine is in the simulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation mode, a
malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn OFF/ON the main
power source.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 1

Basic operation flowchart

START (Copy mode)

Press the Program key.

Press the asterisk (*) key.

Press the clear key.

Press the Program key.

Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key

Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.

The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO

Press the START button.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit message is
simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START button. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE button
Operation check ?
and OK button.

NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?

YES Press the EXECUTE button

Operating conditions
check ? and OK button.

NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.

YES Press the EXECUTE button

Data clear ?
and OK button.

NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.

YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)

The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.

Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE button

adjustment values. and OK button.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 2

2. List of simulation codes
Code
Function (Purpose) Section Purpose
Main Sub
1 1 Used to check the operations of the scanner unit and its control circuit. Optical (Image scanning) Operation test/check
2 Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the scanning (read) Optical (Image scanning) Operation test/check
section and the related circuit.
5 Used to check the operations of the scanner unit. Optical (Image scanning) Operation test/check
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the RSPF Operation test/check
control circuit.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic RSPF Operation test/check
document feeder unit and the related circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder unit RSPF Operation test/check
and the control circuits.
3 2 Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the finisher and the Finisher Operation test/check
related circuit.
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher Operation test/check
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher Adjustment
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large Desk/Large capacity tray Operation test/check
capacity tray and the related circuit. (LCC)
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the large capacity tray and the Desk/Large capacity tray Operation test/check
related circuit. (LCC)
5 Used to check the operations of the clutches and the related circuits. Desk/Large capacity tray Operation test/check
(LCC)
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and Operation panel Operation test/check
control circuit.
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing Operation test/check
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the circuit. Optical (Image scanning) Operation test/check
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the related circuit. Process Operation test/check
6 1 Used to check the operations of the paper transport system, the transfer system, Paper transport section Operation test/check
the fusing system (clutches and solenoids) and the control circuits. (Transport, paper exit)
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Other Operation test/check
3 Used to check the operations of the primary transfer unit and the related circuit. Process (Transfer) Operation test/check
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Other Setting
6 Used to set the intermittent aging cycle. Other Setting
8 Used to display the warm-up time. Fusing Operation display
9 Used to check printing in the color mode. – Operation test/check
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage of each color Process (Photoconductor/ Operation test/Check/
and the control circuit. Developing/Transfer/ Adjustment
Cleaning)
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each Process (Photoconductor/ Operation test/Check/
printer mode and the control circuit. Developing/Transfer/ Adjustment
Cleaning)
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transfer voltage and the control Process (Photoconductor/ Operation test/Check/
circuit. Developing/Transfer/ Adjustment
Cleaning)/Transfer
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex section Duplex Operation test/check
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the duplex section and the control Duplex Operation test/check
circuits.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner motor and the related circuit. Process (Developing) Operation test/check
13 -- Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. FAX Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
14 -- Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/LCC/U2/PF troubles. – Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
15 -- Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large capacity paper feed tray) trouble. LCC Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
16 -- Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble. MFPcnt PWB / PCU PWB Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
/ SCU PWB
17 -- Used to cancel the self-diag PF. Communication unit (RIC/ Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
MODEM)
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle. – Setting
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. – Adjustment/Setup/Operation
(Used to check the maintenance timing.) data check
2 Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of – Adjustment/Setup/Operation
total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for repair.) data check
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position. – Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history. – Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). – Others
6 Used to output the list of the setting and adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft – Adjustment/Setup/Operation
switch, counters). data check
8 Used to check the number of use of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan – Adjustment/Setup/Operation
(reading) unit. data check
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 3

 Code
Function (Purpose) Section Purpose
Main Sub
22 10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware). – Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is FAX Adjustment/Setup/Operation
installed) data check
12 Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each RSPF Adjustment/Setup/Operation
position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as data check
necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, – Adjustment/Setup/Operation
toner cartridge). data check
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan mode and the Scanner Adjustment/Setup/Operation
internet FAX mode. data check
90 Used to output the various set data lists. – Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
23 2 Used to check the trouble history of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of – Adjustment/Setup/Operation
misfeed and troubles is considerably great, it may be judged as necessary to data check
repair.)
80 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and Paper feed, transport Operation test/Check
transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are – Data clear
cleared after completion of maintenance.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed – Data clear
section.
3 Used to clear the number of use of the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) – Data clear
unit.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transfer unit – Data clear
and the fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the – Data clear
counter.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter. – Data clear
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear – Data clear
the counter.)
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter. – Data clear
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed) – Data clear
15 Used to clear the counters related to the image send. – Data clear
30 Used to initialize the administrator password. – Data clear
31 Used to initialize the service mode password. – Clear
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing Operation test/Check
section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner concentration when replacing developer. Process (Photoconductor/ Setting
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
26 1 Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1). Paper exit Setting
2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper Paper feed Setting
size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in
software.)
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor Setting
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. – Setting
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the – Setting
destination.
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner. – Setting
18 Used to set the toner save mode. – Setting
30 Used to set allow/inhibit of HL slow-up control (CE mark support control). – Setting
35 Used to set the trouble memory saving procedure. – Setting
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the developer life is reached. Other Setting
41 Used to set YES/NO of AMS setting in the center binding mode. – Setting
49 Used to set the copy speed mode. – Setting
50 Used to set functions. – Setting
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted – Setting
up or not.
53 Used to set YES/NO of the auto color calibration. – Setting
54 Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO. Printer Setting
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode. – Setting
67 Used to set the summer time (switching timing to the summer time and the – Setting
adjustment time (shift amount)) and the time zone (for switching to the summer
time and the difference between the local time and GMT (UTC) for
synchronization with the internet time server).
69 Used to set whether the toner preparation message and the toner near end Process Setting
message are displayed or not when the toner quantity reaches 25%.
27 1 Used to set whether the detection of communication error with RIC (U7-00) is Communication (RIC/ Operation test/Check
disabled or not. MODEM)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 4

 Code
Function (Purpose) Section Purpose
Main Sub
27 2 Used to set the FSS function (Password, HOST server TEL number). Communication (RIC/ Setting
MODEM)
4 Used to set the FSS functions (initializing, call, toner order auto send). Communication (RIC/ Setting
MODEM)
5 Used to set the tag number. Communication (RIC/ Setting
MODEM)
6 Used to set YES/NO of the manual service call. Communication (RIC/ Setting
MODEM)
7 Used to set the FSS functions (enable, alert callout). Communication (RIC/ Setting
MODEM)
9 Used to set the threshold value for determining whether the paper feed time – Setting
between sensors is recorded or not and the threshold value for determining
whether the gain adjustment retry number is recorded or not.
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. Communication (RIC/ Data clear
MODEM)
11 Used to display the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain Communication (RIC/ Adjustment/Setup/Operation
adjustment retry number history. (for RSPF) MODEM) data output/Check (Display/Print)
12 Used to display the high-density, half-tone process control error history and the Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
automatic register adjustment error history. data output/Check (Display/Print)
13 Used to display the history of paper feed time between sensors. – Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
14 The FSS connection test mode setting is made. – Operation test/Check
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed Paper feed Operation test/Check
section, the paper transport section, and the paper exit section.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors of the paper feed Paper feed Operation test/Check
section and the related circuits.
33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the related circuits. Other Operation test/Check
(The card reader sensor operation can be monitored with the LCD display.)
(Japan only)
40 2 Used to adjust the detection level of the manual feed tray paper width detector. Paper feed Adjustment
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the detection level of the manual paper feed Paper feed Setting
tray paper width detector.
41 1 Used to display the operating state of the document sensor. Other Operation test/Check
2 Used to adjust the detection level of the document size sensor. Other Operation test/Check
3 Used to display the document sensor detection level (A/D) in real time and to Other Operation test/Check
display the threshold value adjusted with SIM 41-2 in [ ] beside the sensor
name.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode. Fusing Setting
4 Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode. (Continued from 43- Fusing Setting
01.)
20 Used to correct the environments of low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for Fusing Setting
the fusing temperature setting 1 for each paper (SIM 43-0).
21 Used to perform correction of high temperature and high humidity (H/H) Fusing Setting
environment for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-01) for each paper.
22 Used to perform L/L (low temperature, low humidity) correction for the fusing Fusing Setting
temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
23 Used to perform H/H (high temperature, high humidity) correction for the fusing Fusing Setting
temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
24 Used to enter the correction values for SIM 43-1 and SIM 43-4 temperature Fusing Setting
corrections.
44 1 Used to set whether the correction functions of the image forming (process) – Setting
section are enabled or not.
2 Used to perform the light quantity adjustment of the process control sensor and Process Adjustment
the registration sensor (two for resist are adjusted simultaneously) and the
surface scan.
4 Used to perform the correction operation of the image forming section and to set Process Setting
the process control sensor adjustment conditions.
6 Used to forcibly execute the correction in the image process section (high- Process Operation test/Check
density process correction) (process correction).
9 Used to check the data related to the result of the image forming section Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
correction (high density process correction). (Corrected main charger grid data output/Check (Display/Print)
voltage in each print mode, developing bias voltage, etc.) (This simulation is
used to check whether the correction is normally executed or not.)
12 Used to check the sampling toner image patch density data in the image forming Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
section correction (high density process correction). (This simulation is used to data output/Check (Display/Print)
check whether the correction is normally executed or not.)
13 Color image density sensor adjustment (Adjustment by the jig) Process Adjustment
14 Used to check the output level of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor. data output/Check (Display/Print)
16 Used to check data related to the toner density correction result. (This Process (Developing) Adjustment/Setup/Operation
simulation allows to check that the correction is normally performed or not.) data output/Check (Display/Print)
21 Used to register the half tone process control reference value (half tone Process Setting
correction).

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 5

 Code
Function (Purpose) Section Purpose
Main Sub
44 22 Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
image forming section correction (process correction). (This simulation is used data output/Check (Display/Print)
to check that the correction is normally executed or not.)
24 (This simulation is not used in the market.) Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
Used to display the process control result. data output/Check (Display/Print)
25 Used to check the initial condition of process control (half tone correction). Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
26 Used to execute the half tone process control forcibly. Process Adjustment
27 Used to clear the half tone process control correction value. Process Data clear
28 Used to set the timing (ON/OFF) of process control execution. Process Setting
29 Enable/disable of the half tone correction during each job is switched. Process Setting
31 Used to perform the phase adjustment for OPC drum deflection. (Used to adjust Process (OPC drum) Adjustment
the phases of four OPC drums deflection.)
43 Used to display each developing unit installing state AD value. Process (Developing) Adjustment/Setup/Operation
This simulation is added to check the sampling data of the detection judgment of data output/Check (Display/Print)
developing unit installation not only as the judgment result (trouble display) but
also as the current state value.
52 (This function is not used. Do not operate.) Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in 1 pixel half data output/Check (Display/Print)
tone correction. (The simulation is used to check whether the correction is
normally executed or not.)
54 (This function is not used. Do not operate.) Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
Used to display the 1 pixel half tone correction result. data output/Check (Display/Print)
56 (This function is not used. Do not operate.) Process Setting
Used to perform the forcible execution of 1 pixel half tone correction.
57 (This function is not used. Do not operate.) Process Data clear
Used to clear the correction value of 1 pixel half tone correction.
46 1 Used to set the default exposure (color copy) for every document mode. Scanner Adjustment
2 Used to adjust the exposure in BLACK copy. Scanner Adjustment
4 Used to adjust the exposure of the color scanner. Scanner Adjustment
5 Used to adjust the exposure of the black scanner. Scanner Adjustment
8 Used to make the scanner color balance RGB adjustment (for color push Scanner Adjustment
scanner mode).
9 Used to adjust the exposure. RSPF Adjustment
10 Used to the copy density adjustment (manual). (color mode) Engine Adjustment
16 Used to the copy density adjustment (manual) [Monochrome, all modes] PG Engine Adjustment
print.
19 Used to set the BLACK auto exposure mode. Scanner Adjustment
21 Used to perform the copy color balance manual correction. [Color, All modes]: Engine Adjustment
PG print
23 Used to set ENABLE/DISABLE of the half tone highest density correction. – Setting
24 Used to the copy color balance auto adjustment. Engine Adjustment
25 Used to execute the fine adjustment of single color mode color balance. Image process (ICU) Adjustment
26 Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default. Image process (ICU) Adjustment
27 Used to set the engine gamma calculating formula coefficient. Image process (ICU) Adjustment
28 (Information on this simulation may be requested in some cases. However, this Image process (ICU) Adjustment
function is basically not used in the market.)
Used to check the auto exposure/Auto document recognition/ Line number
recognition (Color mode). If the local memory size is less than 256MB, the
operation of this simulation may not operate normally.
33 Used to execute the color auto mode adjustment. Image process (ICU) Setting
36 Used to perform the fine adjustment of 2-color (Red, Black) copy. – Adjustment
37 Used to perform the BLACK image forming adjustment. – Adjustment
39 Used to execute the image send sharpness adjustment. (Only when FAX is FAX Adjustment
installed)
40 Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment. (Collective adjustment of all the ICU/FAX Adjustment
modes). (Only when FAX is installed)
41 Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Normal). (Only when FAX is ICU/FAX Adjustment
installed)
42 Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Fine text). (Only when FAX is ICU/FAX Adjustment
installed)
43 Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Super Fine). (Only when FAX is ICU/FAX Adjustment
installed)
44 Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Ultra Fine). (Only when FAX is ICU/FAX Adjustment
installed)
45 Used to execute the FAX exposure level adjustment and the individual setting FAX Adjustment
(600DPI). (Only when FAX is installed)
47 Used to set the JPEG compression rate in Copy/Scanner (PUSH SCAN). – Setting
48 1 Used to execute the magnification adjustment in the scan system (for RSPF). RSPF/Scanner Adjustment

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 6

 Code
Function (Purpose) Section Purpose
Main Sub
48 5 This adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained when a RSPF/Scanner Adjustment
different copy magnification ratio is specified and copying is made after
adjustment of the sub scanning direction image magnification ratio with SIM 48-
1.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in reduction copy, the
adjustment value of high speed mode is adjusted.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in enlargement copy, the
adjustment value of low speed mode is adjusted. This is the magnification ratio
adjustment in the scan system.
6 Used to adjust the rotating speed of each motor. – Adjustment
49 1 Used to execute the firmware update. – Version-up
3 The Operation Manual saved in the hard disk is updated. – Version-up
50 1 Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to – Adjustment
adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed with
SIM50-05 and 50-02 (Simple method). (Document table mode))
2 Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to – Adjustment
adjust the void area (image loss). (Simple adjustment)
(Similar to SIM50-01. This simulation provides the simpler method.)
5 Used to set the lead edge adjustment value which affects only the printer print. Printer Adjustment
6 Used to adjust the copy image position on the print paper in the copy mode and RSPF Adjustment
to adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed
with SIM50-7 (Simple method).) (RSPF mode)
7 Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to RSPF Adjustment
adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed with
SIM50-6 (Simple type).) (RSPF mode)
10 Used to adjust the print off-center for each tray. – Adjustment
Image print center position adjustment (Adjusted for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to execute the scan image off-center position adjustment. (Adjusted for – Adjustment
each scan mode.)
20 Used to execute the manual adjustment of the main scanning direction – Adjustment
registration (color shift). (Backup value input)
21 Used to execute the manual adjustment of the sub scanning registration (color – Adjustment
shift). (Backup value input)
22 Used to execute the auto adjustment of the main/sub scan the main/sub – Adjustment
registration. (Print on the belt/ Scan with the registration sensor (photo sensor)
Image registration adjustment (Auto adjustment) adjustment image quality
image position
24 Used to display the data acquired with the auto registration adjustment – Adjustment
simulation (SIM50-22).
27 Used to adjust the image loss of scanned image in the FAX/Scanner mode. FAX/Scanner Adjustment
28 Used to execute the service adjustment, the OC adjustment, the BK main scan – Adjustment
magnification ration correction, the RSPF adjustment, and the print position
adjustment (Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment)).
28 Used to adjust the OC document lead edge, off-center, and the sub scan – Adjustment
magnification ratio. (Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (1:
OC adjustment))
28 Used to execute the BK main scan magnification ratio adjustment. – Adjustment
(Auto void adjustment (Service instillation) (2: BK-main scan magnification ratio
correction))
28 Used to execute the RSPF (Front/Back) document lead edge, off-center, and RSPF Adjustment
sub scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (3: RSPF adjustment))
28 Used to execute the print lead edge adjustment and the all-cassette print off- – Adjustment
center (individual cassette, ADU) adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (4: Print position
adjustment)
28 Used to display the adjustment result. – Adjustment
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (5: result display)
28 Used to display the data used for the adjustment. – Adjustment
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (6: data display))
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer voltage and the separation Process Adjustment
bias voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper against the registration roller (main Paper transport Adjustment
unit paper feed section, duplex paper feed, SPF paper feed) on each section.
(When there are much variations in print image positions for paper or when the
paper jam occurs, the adjustment is required.) Used to change the deflection
quantity correction value of each specified cassette.
53 6 Used to adjust the RSPF document tray size of the main unit. RSPF Adjustment
7 Used to enter the adjustment value of the main unit RSPF document tray size RSPF Adjustment
adjustment value. SIM53-06 A/D value manual input (for RSPF).
8 Used to adjust the RSPF scan position. RSPF Adjustment
55 1 Used to set the engine soft SW. PCU Setting
2 Used to set the scanner soft SW Scanner Setting
3 Used to set the controller soft SW. MFP Setting

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 7

 Code
Function (Purpose) Section Purpose
Main Sub
56 1 Used to execute data transfer. MFP Data transfer
2 Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) of Memory, HDD Backup
EEPROM, SRAM, or HDD to a USB memory and to restore the data.
60 1 Used to check read/write of the expansion DIMM installed to the ICU PWB. Image process (ICU) Operation test/Check
After completion of execution, the result of each slot is displayed on the panel.
ICU PWB image DRAM read/write operation check, check ICU (memory)
operation.
2 Used to set the data of onboard SDRAM. – Setting
61 1 The polygon motor rotation and the BD signal detection are checked. LSU Operation test/Check
4 Used to execute self-print of the LSU position adjustment. LSU Adjustment
62 1 Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area). MFP (HDD) Data clear
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
2 Used to execute the partial check of the hard disk read/write. MFP (HDD) Operation test/Check
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
3 Used to execute read/write check (all areas) of the hard disk. MFP (HDD) Operation test/Check
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
6 Used to execute the HDD self-diagnostics. MFP (HDD) Operation test/Check
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
7 Used to print the self-diagnostics error log. MFP Operation test/Check
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
8 Used to format the hard disk excluding the system area and operation manual MFP (HDD) Data clear
area.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
10 Used to delete the job completion list. (The job log data are also deleted.) MFP (HDD) Data clear
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
11 Used to delete the document filing data. MFP (HDD) Data clear
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in HDD trouble. MFP (HDD) Data clear
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
13 Used to format the hard disk (operation manual area only). MFP (HDD) Data clear
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
63 1 Used to check the following values related to shading for RGB and OC. (3 x 2 = Scanner (Exposure) Adjustment/Setup/Operation
6 kinds) data output/Check (Display/Print)
2 Used to execute shading forcibly. Scanner Adjustment
3 Used to execute the gamma correction and density conversion for RGB image Scanner (scan) Adjustment
data inputted from the CCD. Gamma correction 1 of the SCAN ASIC and the set
value of color correction are set by calculating from the image data.
5 Used to reset the gamma correction and color correction parameters of the Scanner Adjustment
SCAN ASIC.
6 Used to scan the engine color balance auto adjustment pattern and to display Image process (ICU) Adjustment/Setup/Operation
the sampling result. data output/Check (Display/Print)
7 Used to display and register the engine auto density adjustment scanner target Image process (ICU) Setting
value.
8 Used to execute the standard value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner Image process (ICU) Setting
target value (for servicing).
11 Used to set the factory target color balance in the auto color balance adjustment Scanner (Scanning) Setting
(SIM46-24).
64 1 Used to execute self-print (Color mode). Printer Operation test/Check
2 Used to print the density adjustment pattern. Printer Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
3 Used to execute self-print. (BW mode) Printer Operation test/Check
4 Used to execute self-print. Printer Operation test/Check
5 Used to execute self print (PCL). Printer Operation test/Check
6 Used to execute the printer self print (PS). Printer Operation test/Check
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position. Operation panel Adjustment
2 Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position Operation panel Adjustment/Setup/Operation
adjustment result. data output/Check (Display/Print)
67 24 Use to execute the printer setting of auto color calibration. Printer Adjustment
25 Used to set the manual correction of the printer engine color balance. Printer Adjustment
26 Used to set the reference scanner target value of the printer engine auto density Printer Adjustment
adjustment.
27 Used to display and register the scanner target value (for servicing) of the Printer Adjustment
printer engine auto density adjustment.
28 The scanner target value (for servicing) of the printer engine auto density Scanner Adjustment
adjustment is reset to the standard value.
30 Used to set YES/NO of delivery of the main unit calibration data and the process Printer Setting
control correction data to the client PC by the GDI printer.
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer Data clear
32 Used to set YES/NO of screen color change for each object. – Setting
33 Used to execute the gamma correction between printer screens. (for PCL) Printer Adjustment
33 Used to execute the gamma correction between printer screens. (for GDI) Printer Adjustment

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 8

3. Details of simulation
1-5

1 Purpose : Operation test/check

Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the scan-
ner unit.
1-1
Section : Optical (Image scanning)
Purpose : Operation test/check Item : Operation
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the scan- Operation/Procedure
ner unit and its control circuit.
1) Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
Section : Optical (Image scanning)
2) Select the magnification ratio with [ZOOM] button on the touch
Item : Operation
panel.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
1) Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel. The scanner scans continuously at the speed corresponding to
2) Select the magnification ratio with [ZOOM] button on the touch the operation mode.
panel. When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
3) Press [EXECUTE] button. nated.
The scanner scans at the speed corresponding to the opera-
tion mode. Button Selectable Default
Content
display magnification ratio value
Button Selectable Default 50 Scan magnification ratio: COLOR: 50%, 100%, 100%
Content 50% 200%
display magnification ratios value
50 Scan magnification ratio: COLOR: 50%, 100%, 100% 100 Scan magnification ratio: BLACK (High speed):
50% 200% 100% 100%, 200%
BLACK (High speed): 200 Scan magnification ratio: BLACK (Low speed):
100 Scan magnification ratio:
100%, 200% 200% 50%, 100%, 200%
100%
200 Scan magnification ratio: BLACK (Low speed):
200% 50%, 100%, 200%
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.01-05 CLOSE

0 SCANNER CHECK

TEST SIMULATION NO.01-01 CLOSE 25 100 400

%
SCANNER CHECK
50 ZOOM 300
25 400
100 %
100 150 200
50 ZOOM 300
BLACK(FAST) BLACK(SLOW) COLOR EXECUTE
100 150 200

BLACK(FAST) BLACK(SLOW) COLOR EXECUTE

2
1-2
Purpose : Operation test/check 2-1
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of sensor and Purpose : Operation test/check
detector in the scanning (read) section and Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the auto-
the related circuit. matic document feeder unit and the control
Section : Optical (Image scanning) circuit.
Item : Operation Section : RSPF
Operation/Procedure Item : Operation
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed. Operation/Procedure
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. 1) Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
• The scanner (read) unit is in the home position.: "MHPS" section 2) Select the aging mode with [1SIDE] and [2SIDE] buttons on
is highlighted. the touch panel.
• The scanner (read) unit is not in the home position.: "MHPS" is 3) Select the magnification ratio with [ZOOM] button on the touch
normally displayed. panel.
4) Press [EXECUTE] button.
0 Aging is performed in the mode corresponding to the operation
TEST S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 1㧙 02 CLOSE
mode.
SCANNER SENSO R CHE CK
MHPS * When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during aging, the oper-
ation is terminated and [EXECUTE] button returns to the
original state.

1/1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 9

 Operation/Procedure
Button Selectable Default
Content 1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
display magnification ratio value
panel.
50 Scan magnification ratio: COLOR: 50%, 100%, 100%
50% 200% 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
100 Scan magnification ratio: BLACK (High speed): The selected load operation is performed.
100% 100%, 200%
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
200 Scan magnification ratio: BLACK (Low speed):
nated.
200% 50%, 100%, 200%

SPFM SPF transport motor

SPRM_F SPF paper feed reverse motor normal rotation
0
SIMULATION NO.02-01 CLOSE
SPRM_R SPF paper feed reverse motor reverse rotation
TEST
SPFC SPF paper feed clutch
RSPF AGING
25 400 1-SIDE SRRC SPF resist roller clutch
100 %
2-SIDE
SGS SPF document exit gate solenoid
50 ZOOM 300 STMPS Finish stamp solenoid (*1)

100 150 200 *1: Since the stamp solenoid is an option unit, it can be operated
BLACK(FAST) BLACK(SLOW) COLOR EXECUTE
only when it is installed.
* For the same loads displayed separately depending on normal
rotation and rotation, if they are selected together, normal rota-
tion is performed.
2-2
In addition, if the load is rotating, reverse rotation is not accepted
Purpose : Operation test/check until the operation is stopped.
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and detectors in the automatic docu-
㩷
0
ment feeder unit and the related circuits. TEST
㩷 SIMULATION NO.02̆03 CLOSE

Section : RSPF RSPF 㩷

OUTPUT CHECK

Item : Operation 㩷  SPFM SPRM_F

Operation/Procedure 㩷 SPRM_R SPFC

SRRC SGS
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 㩷  STMPS
played. 㩷 EXECUTE 1/1
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.

SSET SPF installation detection

SOCD SPF open/close detection 3
SCOV SPF cover SW
SPED SPF document empty detection
SPPD1 SPF paper entry detection 1 and random detection 3-2
(common) Purpose : Operation test/check
SPPD2 SPF paper entry detection 2 PS front
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of sensor and
SPPD3 SPF before-scan detection
detector in the finisher and the related cir-
SPPD4 SPF Reverse gate front detection
cuit.
SPPD5 SPF Reverse rear detection
SPLS1 SPF Document length detection short Section : Finisher
SPLS2 SPF Document length detection long Item : Operation
STMPU SPF stamp unit installation detection Operation/Procedure
SWD_LEN SPF guide plate position
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
SWD_AD SPF document detection volume output
played.
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display. The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
<Saddle finisher>
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.02-02 CLOSE FJPID Interface transport unit entry port detection
RSPF SENSOR CHECK SWD_LEN: **** SWD_AD: *** FJPOD Interface transport unit exit port detection
SSET SOCD SCOV SPED FJPDD Interface transport unit cover detection
SPPD1 SPPD2 SPPD3 SPPD4 FED Entry port paper detection
STMPU
FPDHPD Paddle HP detection
SPPD5 SPLS1 SPLS2
FARHPD Bundle roller HP detection
1/1 FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front
1/1 FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear
FAD Alignment tray detection
FOBHPD Discharge belt HP detection
2-3 FBED Tray paper detection
FSLD Paper surface detection
Purpose : Operation test/check
FFPD Binding position detection
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the loads FFHPD Binding HP detection
in the automatic document feeder unit and FFRHPD Binding roller HP detection
the control circuits. FFED Binding paper detection
Section : RSPF FFE Binding lock detection
Item : Operation FULD Lift upper limit detection
FLLD Lift lower limit detection

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 10

 FLE Lift lock detection
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection 0
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection TEST SIMULATION NO.03-02 CLOSE

FSD Staple empty detection FIN SENSOR CHECK

FJPID FJPOD FJPDD FED
FSUC Staple connection detection
FPDHPD FARHPD FFJHPD FRJHPD
FSPD Self prime detection
FMLD Tray intermediate detection FAD FOBHPD FBED FSLD

FFDD Front door detection FFPD FFHPD FFRHPD FFED

FCD Upper cover detection FFE FULD FLLD FLE

FFDSW Front door SW detection 1/2

FJSW Joint SW detection
FSSSW Staple safety SW detection
FFANLK Fan motor lock detection
3-3
Purpose : Operation test/check
<Saddle finisher punch unit>
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of the load in
FPE Punch motor lock detection the finisher and the control circuit.
FPUC Punch unit connection detection Section : Finisher
FPHPD Punch HP detection Item : Operation
FPDD Punch dust detection
Operation/Procedure
FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection
FPTD Punch timing detection 1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
FPSD1 Punch horizontal resist detection 1 panel.
FPSD2 Punch horizontal resist detection 2 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
FPSD3 Punch horizontal resist detection 3 The selected load operation is performed.
FPSD4 Punch horizontal resist detection 4
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
<Inner finisher> nated.
<When the saddle finisher is installed>
FED Entry port paper detection
FBED Tray paper detection FINRPS Entry port reverse solenoid
FULD Tray upper limit detection FJPM Interface transport motor
FMLLD Tray intermediate lower limit detection FJFM Interface transport fan motor
FLLD Tray lower limit detection FFM Transport motor
FSLD1 Paper surface detection 1 FPM Paddle motor
FSLD2 Paper surface detection 2 FAM Bundle paper exit motor
FRLD Roller up/down detection FFJM Alignment motor front
FBRD Belt separation detection FRJM Alignment motor rear
FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front FSM Staple shift motor
FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear FFSM Staple motor
FJPD Alignment guide position detection FLM Lift motor
FSTPD Staple tray paper detection FFC Folding clutch
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
<When the inner finisher is installed>
FSD Staple empty detection
FINRPS Entry port reverse path solenoid
FSTD Staple lead edge position detection
FSLS Paper surface detection solenoid
FDSW Door open detection
FPDS Paddle solenoid
FFANLK Fan motor lock detection
FBRS Belt separation solenoid
<Inner finisher punch unit> FRM Resist motor
FSWM Oscillation motor
FPRPD Punch rear position detection FAM Bundle paper exit motor
FPUC Punch unit connection detection FFJM Alignment motor front
FPHPD Punch HP detection FRJM Alignment motor rear
FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection FSM Staple shift motor
FPDD Punch dust detection FFSM Staple motor
FPPEND Punch paper rear edge detection FTLM Tray lift motor
FPPD1 Punch paper surface detection 1 FFANM Fan motor
FPPD2 Punch paper surface detection 2
FPPD3 Punch paper surface detection 3
<External punch unit>
FPPD4 Punch paper surface detection 4
FPNM Punch motor
FPPD5 Punch paper surface detection 5
FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor
FPPD6 Punch paper surface detection 6
FPDES1 Punch destination detection 1 <Inner punch unit>
FPDES2 Punch destination detection 2
FPNM Punch motor
FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 11

 Set Default
0 Item Display Item
range value
SIMULATION NO.03̆03 CLOSE
TEST F STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 68 to 132 100
FIN LOAD CHECK adjustment (two
FINRPS FJPM FJFM FFM positions in pitch)
FPM FAM FFJM FRJM G PUNCH CENTER Punch center 37 to 63 50
FSM FFSM FLM FFC adjustment
H PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 42 to 58 50
1/1
adjustment
EXECUTE 1/1
[Screen (Saddle finisher installed)]

3-10 0
CLOSE
Purpose : Adjustment TEST SIMULATION NO.03-10

Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the finisher. FINISHER ADJUSTMENT

A㧦200 㧧 SADDLE POSITION
Section : Finisher
A: 200 B㧦200 㧧 FOLDING POSITION
Item : Operation C㧦 10 㧧 FRONT ADJUSUT
㨇 0 㨪400 㨉
Operation/Procedure D㧦 10 㧧 REAR ADJUSUT

1) Select the item according to the adjustment content with [n] [p]
OK
buttons.
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] button. (The set value is saved.)
<Saddle finisher> 4
Set Default
Item Display Item
range value 4-2
A SADDLE POSITOIN Saddle binding 0 to 400 200
Purpose : Operation test/check
position adjustment
B FOLDING POSITION Saddle folding 0 to 400 200 Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sen-
position adjustment sors and detectors in the desk/large capac-
C FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 0 to 20 10 ity tray and the related circuit.
adjustment (front) Section : Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
D REAR ADJUST Alignment position 0 to 20 10 Item : Operation
adjustment (rear)
E STAPLE REAR Staple binding 0 to 200 100
Operation/Procedure
position adjustment The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
(one position at the
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
rear)
F STAPLE FRONT Staple binding 0 to 200 100 <Desk sensor>
position adjustment
(one position in front) DCSI1 Desk 1 installation detection
G STAPLE BOTH Staple binding 0 to 200 100 DPFD1 Desk 1 transport detection
position adjustment DLUD1 Desk 1 upper limit detection
(two positions at the DPED1 Desk 1 paper empty detection
center) DCSPD1 Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detection
H STAPLE PITCH Staple binding 0 to 100 50 DCSS11 Desk 1 rear edge detection 1
position adjustment DCSS12 Desk 1 rear edge detection 2
(two positions in DCSS13 Desk 1 rear edge detection 3
pitch)
DCSS14 Desk 1 rear edge detection 4
I PUNCH CENTER Punch center 47 to 53 50
DCSI2 Desk 2 instillation detection
adjustment
DPFD2 Desk 2 transport detection
J PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 0 to 100 50
DLUD2 Desk 2 upper limit detection
adjustment
DPED2 Desk 2 paper empty detection
<Inner finisher> DCSPD2 Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detection
DCSS21 Desk 2 rear edge detection 1
Set Default DCSS22 Desk 2 rear edge detection 2
Item Display Item
range value DCSS23 Desk 2 rear edge detection 3
A FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 2 to 18 10 DCSS24 Desk 2 rear edge detection 4
adjustment (front) DSW_DSK Desk transport cover open/close detection
B REAR ADJUST Alignment position 2 to 18 10
adjustment (rear) <A4 LCC sensor>
C STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 68 to 132 100
adjustment (one LPFD LCC transport sensor
position at the rear) LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
D STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 68 to 132 100 LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor
adjustment (one LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor
position in front) LCD LCC tray insertion detection
E STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 68 to 132 100 LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW
adjustment (two
LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor
positions at the
L24VM LCC24V power monitor
center)
LLSW LCC upper limit SW
LTOD LCC main unit connection detection

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 12

 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.04-02 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO. 04㧙05 CLOSE
DSK/LCC SENSOR CHECK DESK/LCC SYNCRONIZING SIGNAL CHECK
DCSI1 DPFD1 DLUD1 DPED1
DTRC : DTRC ON
DCSPD1 DCSS11 DCSS12 DCSS13
LTRC : LTRC OFF
DCSS14 DCSI2 DPFD2 DLUD2

DPED2 DCSPD2 DCSS21 DCSS22

DCSS23 DCSS24 DSW_DSK

1/1 1/1

4-3
Purpose : Operation test/check 5
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the loads
in the large capacity tray and the related cir-
5-1
cuit.
Section : Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) Purpose : Operation test/check
Item : Operation Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of the display,
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
Operation/Procedure
cuit.
1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch Section : Operation panel
panel.
Item : Operation
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Operation/Procedure
The selected load operation is performed.
The LCD is changed as shown below. (The contrast changes every
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
2sec from the current level to MAX o MIN o the current level. Dur-
nated.
ing this period, each LED is lighted.
<Desk load item>

DPFM Desk main motor

TEST S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 5㧙 01
DLUM1 Desk 1 lift-up motor
DPUC1 Desk 1 paper feed clutch
DLUM2 Desk 2 lift-up motor
DPUC2 Desk 2 paper feed clutch
DTRC Desk transport clutch

<A4 LCC load item>

LPFM LCC transport motor

LLM LCC lift motor
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch TEST S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 5㧙 01

LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid

LTRC LCC transport clutch

0
TEST 㩷 SIMULATION NO.04̆03 CLOSE

DSK/LCC㩷 LOAD CHECK

DPFM DLUM1 DPUC1 DLUM2

DPUC2 DTRC
5-2
Purpose : Operation test/check
EXECUTE 1/1
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of the heater
lamp and the control circuit.
Section : Fusing
4-5 Item : Operation
Purpose : Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the 1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
clutches and the related circuits. panel.
Section : Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Item : Operation The selected heater lamp is operated.
Operation/Procedure When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch panel. nated.
The selected clutch operation is performed.
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
When the operation is normally completed, the button is high- HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
lighted. HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
HL_ALL All heater lamps ON
DTRC Desk transport clutch
LTRC A4 LCC transport clutch

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 13

 㩷
㩷 SIMULATION NO.05̆02 CLOSE
0 6
TEST
㩷 HEATER LAMP LOAD SETUP

㩷 HL_UM
6-1
HL_LM
㩷 HL_US HL_ALL Purpose : Operation test/check
㩷 Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the paper
㩷 transport system, the transfer system, the
㩷 EXECUTE 1/1 fusing system (clutches and solenoids) and
the control circuits.
Section : Paper transport section (Transport, paper
5-3
exit)
Purpose : Operation test/check Item : Operation
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of the scanner Operation/Procedure
lamp and the circuit.
1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
Section : Optical (Image scanning)
panel.
Item : Operation
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Operation/Procedure
The selected load operation is performed.
1) Press [OC COPY LAMP] button on the touch panel. When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. nated.
The target lamp is lighted for 10 sec.
Transport/ PFM Transport motor
imaging RRM Resist motor
0
SIMULATION NO.05̆03 CLOSE POMF (*) Paper exit motor normal rotation
TEST
POMR (*) Paper exit motor reverse rotation
COPY LAMP CHECK
FUM Fusing motor
OC COPY LAMP
CPFM Cassette paper feed motor
OSM Shifter motor
WTNM Waste toner drive motor
CPFC Cassette vertical transport clutch
EXECUTE 1/1 1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid
LSUSS1 LSU shutter solenoid 1
5-4 LSUSS2 LSU shutter solenoid 2
Paper feed CLUM1 Cassette 1 lift-up motor
Purpose : Operation test/check
CPUC1 Cassette 1 paper feed clutch
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of the dis-
CLUM2 Cassette 2 lift-up motor
charge lamp and the related circuit.
CPUC2 Cassette 2 paper feed clutch
Section : Process MPUC Manual paper feed clutch
Item : Operation MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid
Operation/Procedure MPGS Manual feed gate solenoid

1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch (*): For the same loads displayed separately depending on normal
panel. rotation and rotation, if they are selected together, normal rotation
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. is performed.
The selected discharge lamp is lighted. In addition, if the load is rotating, reverse rotation is not accepted
until the operation is stopped.
DL_K Discharge lamp K 㩷
DL_C Discharge lamp C Same control 0
㩷
DL_M Discharge lamp M CLOSE
㩷 TEST SIMULATION NO.06̆01
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y FEED OUTPUT CHECK
㩷 PFM RRM POMF POMR
㩷 FUM CPFM OSM CPFC
0 㩷 1TURC PCSS WTNM CLUM1
TEST SIMULATION NO.05-04 CLOSE
㩷 CPUC1 CLUM2 CPUC2 MPUC
DISCHARGE LAMP CHECK
DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y
㩷 EXECUTE 1/2
㩷

EXECUTE 1/1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 14

 6-2 7
Purpose : Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of each fan 7-1
motor and its control circuit.
Purpose : Setting
Section : Other
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the operating conditions of
Item : Operation aging.
Operation/Procedure Section : Other
1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch Item : Operation
panel. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
1) Select the target to be set with buttons on the touch panel.
The selected load operation is performed.
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
nated.
The contents set with this simulation are retained until the
POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor (* POFM_U, POFM_F, and power is turned OFF.
POFM_R are driven at the same time.)
OZFM Ozone fan motor AGING Aging operation setup
PSFM Power cooling fan motor INTERVAL Intermittent setup
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup
FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup
㩷
0 WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up disable setup
㩷
TEST SIMULATION NO.06̆02 CLOSE DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup
FAN 㩷LOAD SETUP SHADING DISABLE Shading disable setup
㩷   POFM OZFM CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment free setup
㩷 PSFM

㩷 0
㩷 TEST SIMULATION NO.07̆01 CLOSE
㩷  EXECUTE 1/1
AGING TEST SETTING

  AGING INTERVAL
6-3 MISFEED DISABLE FUSING DISABLE

Purpose : Operation test/check WARMUP DISABLE DV CHECK DISABLE

SHADING DISABLE CCD GAIN FREE

Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the primary
transfer unit and the related circuit. EXECUTE 1/1
Section : Process (Transfer)
Item : Operation
7-6
Operation/Procedure
Purpose : Setting
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
2) The load operation is started. (Separation operation: BLACK
o COLOR o FREE Stops at each position for 5 sec.) During Section : Other
the operation, the current position is displayed. Item : Operation
Operation/Procedure
BLACK Black mode position Black mode position
COLOR COLOR mode position o COLOR mode position 1) Enter the intermittent aging cycle (unit: sec) with 10-key.
FREE Drum separation position o Drum separation position 2) Press [OK] button.
o Shift to the black mode
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
position is repeated.
Item Item Set range Default value
0 A CYCLE TIME(SEC) 1 to 900 3
TEST SIMULATION NO.06̆03 CLOSE

TRANSFER LOAD CHECK

0
POSITION : ̆̆  SIMULATION NO.07-06 CLOSE
TEST
 
INTERVAL AGING CYCLE TIME SETUP
  A㧦 3 㧧 CYCLE TIME(SEC)

A:  3
EXECUTE 
1/1
㨇 1㨪 900 㨉


OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 15

 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] buttons.
7-8 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Purpose : Operation display 4) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the warm-up time. The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
Section : Fusing set value is outputted for 30 sec.
Item : Operation * The adjustment values of [MIDDLE] and [LOW] are related
together.
Operation/Procedure
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated.
Press [EXECUTE] button.
Counting of the warm-up time is started. Setting Default
Button Item Display Content
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] button is inhib- range value
ited. MIDDLE A MIDDLE K developing 0 to 700 450
SPEED DVB_K bias set value
at middle speed
0 B MIDDLE C developing 0 to 700 450
TEST SIMULATION NO.07̆08 CLOSE SPEED DVB_C bias set value
WARM UP TIME DISPLAY SETTING at middle speed
     0  SECONDS C MIDDLE M developing 0 to 700 450
SPEED bias set value
DVB_M at middle speed
D MIDDLE Y developing 0 to 700 450
SPEED DVB_Y bias set value
EXECUTE
at middle speed
LOW A LOW SPEED K developing 0 to 700 430
DVB_K bias set value
at low speed
7-9 B LOW SPEED C developing 0 to 700 430
DVB_C bias set value
Purpose : Operation test/check
at low speed
Function (Purpose) : Used to check printing in the color mode. C LOW SPEED M developing 0 to 700 430
Section : — DVB_M bias set value
Item : Operation at low speed
D LOW SPEED Y developing 0 to 700 430
Operation/Procedure DVB_Y bias set value
1) Select a print color with buttons on the touch panel. at low speed
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Printing is started in the selected color. 0
㩷
* If no color is specified, printing is made in all colors. TEST SIMULATION NO.08㧙01 CLOSE

DV SETTING AND OUTPUT

K Setup/cancel of black A㧦450 㧧 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
C Setup/cancel of cyan A: 450 B㧦450 㧧 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C

M Setup/cancel of magenta C㧦450 㧧 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M

Y Setup/cancel of yellow 㨇  0㨪 700㨉 D㧦450 㧧 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y

MIDDLE LOW EXECUTE OK

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.07̆09 CLOSE

PRINTING COLOR SELECT(COLOR MODE)

 K C
8-2
M Y
Purpose : Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
EXECUTE
1/1 Section : Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Item : Operation

8 Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] buttons on the touch
panel.
8-1
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] buttons.
Purpose : Operation test/Check/Adjustment 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) : Used to check and adjust the operations of 4) Press [EXECUTE] button.
the developing voltage of each color and
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
the control circuit.
set value is outputted for 30 sec.
Section : Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
* The adjustment values of [MIDDLE] and [LOW] are related
Transfer/Cleaning)
together.
Item : Operation
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] buttons on the touch
panel.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 16

 Setting Default 0
Button Item Display Content
range value
TEST SIMULATION NO.08㧙02 CLOSE
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K charging/grid 230 to 850 615
SPEED bias set value at MHV/GRID SETTING AND OUTPUT

GB_K middle speed A㧦615 㧧 MIDDLE SPEED GB_K

B MIDDLE C charging/grid 230 to 850 615 A: 615 B㧦615 㧧 MIDDLE SPEED GB_C

SPEED bias set value at C㧦615 㧧 MIDDLE SPEED GB_M

㨇230㨪 850㨉 D㧦615 㧧 MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
GB_C middle speed
C MIDDLE M charging/grid 230 to 850 615
SPEED bias set value at MIDDLE LOW EXECUTE OK
GB_M middle speed
D MIDDLE Y charging/grid 230 to 850 615
SPEED bias set value at
GB_Y middle speed
8-6
LOW A LOW K charging/grid 230 to 850 605
SPEED bias set value at Purpose : Operation test/Check/Adjustment
GB_K low speed
Function (Purpose) : Used to check and adjust the operation of
B LOW C charging/grid 230 to 850 605
the transfer voltage and the control circuit.
SPEED bias set value at
GB_C low speed Section : Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
C LOW M charging/grid 230 to 850 605 Transfer/Cleaning)/Transfer
SPEED bias set value at Item : Setting
GB_M low speed
Operation/Procedure
D LOW Y charging/grid 230 to 850 605
SPEED bias set value at 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] buttons.
GB_Y low speed 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is outputted for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated.

Default
Setting Default Actual output value
Item Display Content
range value setting range Actual
output value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer COLOR K Low speed 0 to 255 232 –500V to 5000V 4500V
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K bias reference Middle speed 0 to 255 232 –500V to 5000V 4500V
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY value CMY Low speed 0 to 255 139 –500V to 5000V 2500V
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL CMY Middle speed 0 to 255 139 –500V to 5000V 2500V
E TC1 LOW SPEED BW K BLACK K Low speed 0 to 255 232 –500V to 5000V 4500V
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Middle speed 0 to 255 232 –500V to 5000V 4500V
G TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer COLOR Normal Front surface 51 to 255 100 2PA to 45PA 12.5PA
H TC2 PLAIN CL DPX bias reference paper Back surface 51 to 255 100 2PA to 45PA 12.5PA
I TC2 PLAIN BW SPX value BLACK Front surface 51 to 255 90 2PA to 45PA 10PA
J TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 to 255 90 2PA to 45PA 10PA
K TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX COLOR Heavy paper 51 to 255 69 2PA to 45PA 6PA
L TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX BLACK 51 to 255 69 2PA to 45PA 6PA
M TC2 OHP CL COLOR OHP 51 to 255 60 2PA to 45PA 4PA
N TC2 OHP BW BLACK 51 to 255 60 2PA to 45PA 4PA
O TC2 ENVELOPE CL COLOR Envelope 51 to 255 184 2PA to 45PA 30PA
P TC2 ENVELOPE BW BLACK 51 to 255 184 2PA to 45PA 30PA
Q TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 to 255 79 2PA to 45PA 8PA
R TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary transfer Low speed print 51 to 255 72 –50V to –1500 –200V
S TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD cleaning bias Middle speed print 51 to 255 72 –50V to –1500V –200V
T TC2 CLEAN CLEANING reference value Cleaning 51 to 255 156 –50V to –1500V –800V

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.08-06 CLOSE
CLOSE
THV SETTING AND OUTPUT
A : 232  TC1 LOW SPEED CL K

A: 232 B : 232  TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K

C : 139  TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY

[ 0~255]
D : 139  TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL CMY

EXECUTE OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 17

 9 10

9-2 10-1
Purpose : Operation test/check
2WTRQUG : Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the toner
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sen-
motor and the related circuit.
sors and detectors in the duplex section
and its control circuit. Section : Process (Developing)
Section : Duplex Item : Operation
Item : Operation Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure * Before execution of this simulation, remove the toner cartridges.
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed. 1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
panel.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection * The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 * When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 nated.

TNM_K Toner motor K

0 TNM_C Toner motor C
TEST SIMULATION NO.09㧙02 CLOSE
TNM_M Toner motor M
ADU SENSOR CHECK
TNM_Y Toner motor Y
DSW_ADU APPD1 APPD2

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.10-01 CLOSE

TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION

1/1
TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y
1/1

9-3
EXECUTE 1/1
Purpose : Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the loads
in the duplex section and the control cir-
cuits.
Section : Duplex
13
Item : Operation
13--
Operation/Procedure
Purpose : Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
1) Select the item to be operation tested with the buttons on the
touch panel. Function (Purpose) : Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. Section : FAX
The selected load operation is performed. Item : Trouble
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated. Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
ADUM_L ADU motor lower
2) Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.

0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.09-03 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.13 CLOSE

ADU LOAD CHECK U1 TROUBLE CANCELLATION

ADUM_L

ARE YOU SURE? YES NO

EXECUTE 1/1 EXECUTE

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 18

 14 TEST SIMULATION NO.16
0
CLOSE

U2 TROUBLE CANCELLATION

14--
Purpose : Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) : Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/
LCC/U2/PF troubles.
Section : — ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
Item : Trouble
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
2) Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.
17
0 17--
TEST S I MU LA TI O N N O . 1 4 CLOSE Purpose : Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
TRO UBLE CANCELLATIO N(O THER) Function (Purpose) : Used to cancel the self-diag PF.
Section : Communication unit (RIC/MODEM)
Item : Trouble
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
ARE YO U SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
2) Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.

0
15 TEST SIMULATION NO.17

PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION
CLOSE

15--
Purpose : Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) : Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large
capacity paper feed tray) trouble. ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
Section : LCC
Item : Trouble
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
21
2) Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.
21-1
0 Purpose : Setting
TEST SIMULATION NO.15 CLOSE Function (Purpose) : Used to set the maintenance cycle.
LCC TROUBLE CANCELLATION Section : —
Item : Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item corresponding to the set contents with [n] [p]
buttons.
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE 2) Enter the value corresponding to the maintenance timing with
10-key.
3) Press [OK] button to save the entered conditions in step 2).

16 Item Display Content Set range

Default
value
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: DEFAULT, 100K
16-- COUNTER counter 1 – 300: 1K – 300K
Purpose : Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.) (TOTAL) (total) 999: FREE
B MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: DEFAULT, 60K
Function (Purpose) : Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
COUNTER counter 1 – 300: 1K – 300K
Section : MFPcnt PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB (COLOR) (color) 999: FREE
Item : Trouble
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
2) Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 19

 0 0
SIMULATION NO.21-01 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.22-01 CLOSE
TEST
COUNTER DISPLAY
MAINTENANCE CYCLE SETUP
A: 0 ; MAINTENANCE COUNTER (TOTAL) TOTAL OUT(BW) : 00000000 TOTAL(SGL_COL) : 00000000

A 0 B: 0 ; MAINTENANCE COUNTER (COLOR)

TOTAL OUT(COL) : 00000000 COPY(BW) : 00000000

[ 1~300] TOTAL(BW) : 00000000 COPY(COL) : 00000000

TOTAL(COL) : 00000000 COPY(2COL) : 00000000

TOTAL(2COL) : 00000000 COPY(SGL_COL) : 00000000

OK 1/3

22-2
22 Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the total numbers of misfeed
22-1 and troubles. (When the number of total
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check jam is considerably great, it is judged as
necessary for repair.)
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the print count value in each
section and each operation mode. (Used to Section : —
check the maintenance timing.) Item : Counter
Section : — Operation/Procedure
Item : Counter The paper jam/trouble counter value is displayed.
Operation/Procedure Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
Change the display page with [n] [p] buttons.
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print. RSPF/DSPF JAM SPF JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter
TOTAL OUT(BW) Total output quantity of black
TOTAL OUT(COL) Total output quantity of color
TOTAL(BW) Total use quantity of black 0
TOTAL(COL) Total use quantity of color TEST SIMULATION NO.22-02 CLOSE
TOTAL(2COL) Total use quantity of 2-color JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DISPLAY
TOTAL(SGL_COL) Total use quantity of single color
MACHINE JAM : 00000000
COPY(BW) Black copy counter
RSPF/DSPF JAM : 00000000
COPY(COL) Color copy counter
TROUBLE : 00000000
COPY(2COL) 2-color copy counter
COPY(SGL_COL) Single color copy counter
PRINT(BW) Black print counter 1/1
PRINT(COL) Color print counter
DOC FIL(BW) Black document filing print counter
DOC FIL(COL) Color document filing print counter 22-3
DOC FIL(2COL) 2-color document filing print counter
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
DOC FIL(SGL COL) Single-color document filing print counter
OTHER(BW) Black other counter Function (Purpose) : Used to check misfeed positions and the
OTHER(COL) Color other counter misfeed count of each position.
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) Section : —
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color) Item : Trouble
TC1 BELT Primary transfer unit print counter
Operation/Procedure
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm) The history of paper jams and misfeed is displayed.
TC1 BELT DAY Use day of primary transfer (Day) The above histories are displayed from the newest one to the old-
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer unit print counter est in this sequence. The max. 50 items are saved. (The oldest one
TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling is sequentially erased.)
distance (cm)
* List of JAM codes: Refer to "2. Paper JAM code" in the "[12]
TC2 BELT DAY Use day of secondary transfer unit (Day)
OTHERS."
FUSER UNIT Fuser unit print counter
FUSER ACUM DAY Use day of fuser unit (Day)
0
DRUM LIFE(K) Accumulated number of drum rotations (K)
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-03 CLOSE
DRUM LIFE(C) Accumulated number of drum rotations (C)
JAM HISTORY DATA DISPLAY
DRUM LIFE(M) Accumulated number of drum rotations (M) PPD2_N1 CPFD2_S2 MFT TRAY3

DRUM LIFE(Y) Accumulated number of drum rotations (Y) PPD2_N1 CPFD2_S2 APPD3_S DPFD2_S4
DEVE LIFE(K) Accumulated number of developer rotations (K)
LCC PPD2_PRI CPID2_S2 CPID2_S2
DEVE LIFE(C) Accumulated number of developer rotations (C)
CPFD1_N1 PPD2_PRI TRAY3 APPD3_S
DEVE LIFE(M) Accumulated number of developer rotations (M) 1/1
TRAY2 MFT
DEVE LIFE(Y) Accumulated number of developer rotations (Y) 1/1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 20

22-4 0
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check TEST SIMULATION NO.22-05 CLOSE

Function (Purpose) : Used to check the trouble (self diag) his- S/N : **********

tory. ICU(MAIN) : 00.00.00 COLOR PROFILE : 00.00.00

Section : — ICU(BOOT) : 00.00.00 PCU : 00.00.00

LANGUAGE : 00.00.00 SCU : 00.00.00

Item : Trouble
GRAPHIC : 00.00.00 SPF : NONE
Operation/Procedure
IMG DATA ROM : 00.00.00 FAX1(MAIN) : NONE 1/2
The trouble history is displayed.
The trouble history is displayed sequentially from the latest one.
The max. 30 items can be stored. (The oldest one is deleted 22-6
sequentially.) Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print. Function (Purpose) : Used to output the list of the setting and
* Trouble code list: Refer to "2. Trouble code list" in the "[8] SELF adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft
DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE". switch, counters).
Section : —
0 Item : Data (Setting, adjustment data)
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-04 CLOSE
TROUBLE CODE DATA DISPLAY
Operation/Procedure
E7-23 F9-20 F2-39 L4-31
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
F1-50 L4-02 F2-39 F1-50
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
F1-50 L4-02 F1-61 F1-50 (Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
F1-50 F2-39 H5-01 E7-23
1) Select the print mode with 10-key.
U5-12 F2-39 L1-00 E7-23
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
1/2
The list print selected in step 1) is started.
22-5 * When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXE-
CUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is ter-
Purpose : Others minated.
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the ROM version of each
unit (section). Display item & Set Default
Item Description
detail display range value
Section : —
A DATA PATTERN Data pattern selection 1 to 2 1
Item : Software 1: List print
Operation/Procedure 2: List print (Sim50-24)

The ROM version can be checked with [n] [p] buttons.

When there is any problem in the software, use this simulation to 0
check the ROM version of each section and revise the version if TEST SIMULATION NO.22-06 CLOSE

necessary. DATA PRINT MODE

Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print. A: 1 ; DATA PATTERN

A: 1
S/N Serial No. [ 1~ 2 ]
ICU(MAIN) ICU (Main section)
ICU(BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
EXECUTE OK
LANGUAGE Language support data version
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
IMG DATA ROM ImageASIC FlashROM data
COLOR PROFILE Color profile 22-8
PCU PCU Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
SCU SCU Function (Purpose) : Used to check the number of use of the fin-
SPF SPF isher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
FAX1(MAIN) FAX1 line (Main section) unit.
FAX2(MAIN) FAX2 line (Main section)
Section : —
DESK Desk unit
LCC Side LCC Item : Counter
FINISHER Finisher Operation/Procedure
SADDLE Saddle unit The values of the finisher counter, the RSPF counter, and the scan-
PUNCH Punch unit ner (read) related counters are displayed.
NIC NIC
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
POWER-CON Power controller
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage) RSPF/DSPF Document feed quantity
SCAN Number of scan
STAPLER Staple counter
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
OC_OPEN OC open/close counter
RSPF/DSPF_OPEN RSPF/DSPF open/close counter
OC LAMP_TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 21

 Item display Display content Content
0 PUNCHER MX-PNX1A Punch unit
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-08 CLOSE
MX-PNX1B
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DISPLAY
AR-PN1A
RSPF/DSPF : 00000000 SADDLE STAPLER : 00000000 AR-PN1B
SCAN : 00000000 OC OPEN : 00000000 FINISHER MX-FNX1 Finisher
STAPLER : 00000000 RSPF/DSPF_OPEN : 00000000 MX-FNX2
PUNCHER : 00000000 OC LAMP TIME : 00000:00 FAX1 MX-FXX1 FAX kit
STAMP : 00000000 FAX2 MX-FLX1 FAX2 line kit
FAX MEMORY AR-MM9 FAX expansion memory
MX-MMX1
HAND SET MX-HNX1 Handset
22-9
NETWORK MX-NSX1 Network scanner expansion kit
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check SCANNER
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the number of use (print PRINTER MX-PBX1 Printer expansion kit
quantity) of each paper feed section. PS MX-PKX1 PS expansion kit
Section : Paper feed, ADU, LCC SECURITY MX-FRX1 Security kit
AIM MX-AMX1 Application expansion kit
Item : Counter
SDRAM(SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
Operation/Procedure SDRAM(ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
The values of the paper feed related counters are displayed. HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print. NIC STANDARD NIC
BARCODE AR-PF1 Barcode font
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter 0
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter SIMULATION NO.22-10 CLOSE
TEST
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
MACHINE SYSTEM
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) MACHINE : MX-2300G PUNCHER : MX-PNX1A
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
RSPF/DSPF : MX-RPX1/STANDARD FINISHER : MX-FNX1
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
STAMP : AR-SU1 FAX䋱 : MX-FNX1
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4LCC)
DESK : MX-DEX1 FAX2 : MX-FLX1
ADU ADU paper feed counter
LCC : MX-LCX1 FAX MEMORY : AR-MM9
1/ 3

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-09 CLOSE
22-11
PAPER FEED COUNTER DISPLAY

MFT HEAVY : 00000000

Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
TRAY1 : 00000000

TRAY2 : 00000000 MFT OHP : 00000000 Function (Purpose) : Used to check the use frequency (send/
TRAY3 : 00000000 MFT ENV : 00000000 receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is
TRAY4 : 00000000 LCC : 00000000
installed)
MFT TOTAL : 00000000 ADU : 00000000 Section : FAX
1/1
Item : Counter
Operation/Procedure
22-10 The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check are displayed.
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the system configuration Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
(option, internal hardware).
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)
Section : —
FAX OUTPUT_L2 FAX print quantity counter (for line 2)
Item : Specifications (Option) FAX SEND FAX send counter
Operation/Procedure FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
1) The system configuration is displayed. (The model names of SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
the installed devices and options are displayed.) SEND IMAGES_L2 FAX send quantity counter (for line 2)
SEND TIME FAX send time
2) Change the display with [n] [p] buttons.
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print. ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications

Item display Display content Content

MACHINE MX-2300G Machine 0
MX-2300FG TEST SIMULATION NO.22̆11 CLOSE
MX-2700G
FAX COUNTER DISPLAY
MX-2700FG
FAX OUTPUT 㧦 00000000 SEND IMAGES_L2 㧦 00000000
MX-2300N
FAX OUTPUT_L2 㧦 00000000 00000000:00:00
MX-2700N SEND TIME 㧦

RSPF/DSPF MX-RPX1/ Document feed unit FAX SEND 㧦 00000000 RECEIVED TIME 㧦 00000000:00:00
STANDARD FAX RECEIVED㧦 00000000 ACR SEND 㧦 00000000
STAMP AR-SU1 Finisher stamp SEND IMAGES 㧦 00000000
DESK MX-DEX1 Desk unit
1/1
MX-DEX2
LCC MX-LCX1 Large capacity cassette (Side LCC)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 22

 TONER MOTOR M Toner motor print counter (M)
22-12
TONER MOTOR Y Toner motor print counter (Y)
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(K)
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions TONER TURN C Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(C)
and the number of misfeed at each posi- TONER TURN M Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(M)
tion. (When the number of misfeed is con- TONER TURN Y Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(Y)
siderably great, it can be judged as
necessary for repair.)
Section : RSPF SIMULATION NO.22̆13 CLOSE
TEST
Item : Function PROCESS CARTRIDGE DISPLAY
Operation/Procedure DRUM CTRG K : 00000000 DRUM RANGE K : 00000000

The history of paper jam and misfeed is displayed. DRUM CTRG C :  00000000 DRUM RANGE C : 00000000

The misfeed history is displayed sequentially from the latest one. DRUM CTRG M :  00000000 DRUM RANGE M : 00000000

The max. 50 items are recorded. (The oldest one is sequentially DRUM CTRG Y :  00000000 DRUM RANGE Y : 00000000

deleted.) This data can be used to identify the trouble position.  

1/2
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
List of JAM codes: Refer to "2. Paper JAM code" in the "[12] OTH-
22-19
ERS".
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
0 Function (Purpose) : Used to check the values of the counters
TEST SIMULATION NO.22㧙12 CLOSE
CLOSE
related to the scan mode and the internet
FAX mode.
52(,#/*+5614;&#6#&+52.#;
    Section : Scanner
    Item : Counter
   
Operation/Procedure
   
    Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner.
 Change the display with [n] [p] buttons.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.

22-13 NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity

counter (B/W) (B/W scan job)
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operating time of the counter (COLOR) (Color scan job)
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read quantity
cartridge). counter (2-COLOR) (2-Color scan job)
Section : — NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read quantity
Item : Counter counter (SINGLE) (Single-color scan job)
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of times of internet FAX output
Operation/Procedure
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of times of internet FAX send
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are OUTPUT
displayed. INTERNET FAX RECEIVE Number of times of internet FAX receive
Change the display with [n] [p] buttons. INTERNET FAX SEND Number of times of internet FAX send
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
FTP COUNTER Number of times of FTP send
DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K) SMB SEND Number of times of SMB send
DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge print counter (C) USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge print counter (M) TRIAL MODE_B & C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan
DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge print counter (Y) job)
DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
(CM)(K) SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
DRUM RANGE C Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR)
(CM)(C) SCAN TO HDD_SGL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE
DRUM RANGE M Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance color)
(CM)(M)
DRUM RANGE Y Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(Y)
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.22̆19 CLOSE
DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
DEVE CTRG C Developer cartridge print counter (C) NETWORK SCANNER COUNTER DISPLAY
NET SCN ORG_B/W :  00000000
DEVE CTRG M Developer cartridge print counter (M)
NET SCN ORG_CL :  00000000
DEVE CTRG Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
NET SCN ORG_2CL :  00000000
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(K) NET SCN ORG_SGL :  00000000
DEVE RANGE C Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance INTERNET FAX OUTPUT :  00000000
(CM)(C) 1/4
DEVE RANGE M Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(M)
DEVE RANGE Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(Y)
TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K)
TONER MOTOR C Toner motor print counter (C)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 23

22-90
23
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to output the various set data lists.
23-2
Section : —
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Item : Function
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the trouble history of paper
Operation/Procedure
jam and misfeed. (If the number of misfeed
Change the display with [n] [p] buttons. and troubles is considerably great, it may
Select the print target with the buttons on the touch panel. be judged as necessary to repair.)
Press [EXECUTE] button to start self print. Section : —
* When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXE- Item : Trouble
CUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is termi- Operation/Procedure
nated.
Press [EXECUTE] button to execute print of the list.
All custom setting list ALL CUSTOM All custom setting list
SETTING LIST 0
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET PCL symbol set list TEST SIMULATION NO.23-02 CLOSE

LIST JAM/TROUBLE DATA PRINT MODE

PCL INTERNAL FONT PCL internal font list PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE JAM/TROUBLE PRINT
LIST
PCL EXTENDED PCL extended font list
FONT LIST
PS FONT LIST PS extended font list
EXECUTE
PS KANJI FONT LIST PS kanji font list
PS EXTENDED FONT PS extended font list
LIST
NIC PAGE NIC page 23-80
Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST One-touch address list
Purpose : Operation test/check
list GROUP LIST Group list
PROGRAM LIST Program list
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sen-
MEMORY BOX LIST Memory box list
sors and detectors in the paper feed and
ALL SENDING All address registration
transport section.
ADDRESS LIST list Section : Paper feed, transport
Document filing DOCUMENT FILING Folder list Item : Function
folder list FOLDER LIST
Operation/Procedure
System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS Copy
LIST (COPY) Press [EXECUTE] button to execute print of the list.
ADMIN. SETTINGS Printer * When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXE-
LIST (PRINT) CUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is termi-
ADMIN. SETTINGS FAX/Image send nated.
LIST (IMAGE SEND)
ADMIN. SETTINGS Document filing
0
LIST (DOC FILING)
TEST SIMULATION NO.23-80 CLOSE
ADMIN. SETTINGS Security
LIST (SECURITY) DATA PRINT MODE㧔PAPER FEED㧕

ADMIN. SETTINGS Common PAPER FEED TIME LIST

LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR All system setting list
SETTINGS LIST
Receive rejection ANTI JUNK FAX Receive rejection
EXECUTE
number table NUMBER LIST number table 1/1
Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/ Receive rejection/allow
allow address/ DOMAIN NAME LIST address/domain table
domain table
Transfer to Email INBOUND ROUTING Transfer to Email table 24
table list LIST list
Transfer to DOCUMENT ADMIN Transfer to
Administrator list LIST Administrator list 24-1
Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST Web setting list Purpose : Data clear
Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST Meta data set list
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
ble counter. (The counters are cleared after
0 completion of maintenance.)
TES
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-90 CL
CLOSE Section : —
LIST PRINT Item : Counter
ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST PCL SYMBOL SET LIST Operation/Procedure
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST 1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
PS FONT LIST PS KANJI FONT LIST panel.
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST NIC PAGE 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
EXECUTE
EX 1/4 3) Press [YES] button.
The target counter is cleared.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 24

 MACHINE Machine JAM counter RSPF SPF counter
RSPF RSPF JAM counter SCAN Scan counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter STAPLER Staple counter
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter
0 SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
SIMULATION NO.24̆01 CLOSE
TEST OC OPEN OC open/close counter
JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR RSPF OPEN OPEN RSPF open/close counter
MACHINE RSPF TROUBLE OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.24-03 CLOSE
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
1/1 ORG./OUTPUT COUNTER DATA CLEAR
RSPF SCAN  STAPLER PUNCHER

  STAMP SADDLE STAPLER OC OPEN RSPF/DSPF OPEN

24-2
OC LAMP TIME
Purpose : Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the number of use (the num- YES NO
ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE 1/1
ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section : —
Item : Counter 24-4
Operation/Procedure Purpose : Data clear
1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
panel. printer counters of the transfer unit and the
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. fusing unit. (After completion of mainte-
3) Press [YES] button. nance, clear the counters.)
The target counter is cleared. Section : —
Item : Counter
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter Operation/Procedure
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter 1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter panel.
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) 3) Press [YES] button.
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP) The target counter is cleared.
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4LCC) MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
ADU ADU paper feed counter MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color)
TC1 BELT Primary transfer unit print counter
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling
0 distance (cm)
TEST SIMULATION NO.24̆02 CLOSE
TC1 BELT DAY Primary transfer unit use day (Day)
PAPER FEED COUNTER CLEAR TC2 BELT Secondary transfer unit print counter
TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling
MFT TOTAL MFT HEAVY  MFT OHP   MFT ENV distance (cm)
   LCC  ADU TC2 BELT DAY Secondary transfer unit use day (Day)
FUSER UNIT Fusing unit print counter
FUSER ACUM DAY Fusing unit use day (Day)
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE 1/1

0
24-3 TEST SIMULATION NO.24̆04 CLOSE

MAINTENANCE COUNTER CLEAR

Purpose : Data clear
MAINTENANCE ALL MAINTENANCE COL TC1 BELT TC1 BELT RANGE
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the number of use of the fin-
TC1 BELT DAY TC2 BELT TC2 BELT RANGE TC2 BELT DAY
isher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit.
FUSER UNIT FUSER ACUM DAY
Section : —
Item : Counter
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
Operation/Procedure EXECUTE
1/1
1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel.
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
3) Press [YES] button.
The target counter is cleared.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 25

24-5 24-7
Purpose : Data clear Purpose : Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the developer counter. (After Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After
replacement of developer, clear the replacement of the OPC drum, clear the
counter.) counter.)
Section : — Section : —
Item : Counter Item : Counter (OPC drum)
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch 1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel. panel.
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
3) Press [YES] button. 3) Press [YES] button.
The target counter is cleared. The target counter is cleared.

K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
C Developer cartridge print counter (C)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
M Developer cartridge print counter (M)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
K Drum cartridge print counter (K)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
C Drum cartridge print counter (C)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
M Drum cartridge print counter (M)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Y Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)

0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.24̆05 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.24̆07 CLOSE

DEVELOPER COUNTER DATA CLEAR DRUM CTRG COUNTER CLEAR

   K C M Y  K  C  M  Y

YES NO ARE YOU SURE? YES NO

ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE EXECUTE 1/1
1/1

24-6 24-9
Purpose : Data clear Purpose : Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the copy counter. Function (Purpose) : Used clear the printer mode print counter
Section : — and the self print mode print counter.
Item : Counter Section : —
Operation/Procedure Item : Counter
1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch Operation/Procedure
panel. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. panel.
3) Press [YES] button. 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
The target counter is cleared. 3) Press [YES] button.
The target counter is cleared.
COPY BW Copy (B/W) counter
COPY COL Copy (COLOR) counter PRINT BW Printer (B/W) counter
SINGLE COLOR Single color PRINT COL Printer (COLOR) counter
2COLOR 2-color OTHER BW Other (BW) counter
OTHER COL Other (COLOR) counter
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.24̆06 CLOSE 0
COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR TEST SIMULATION NO.24̆09 CLOSE
COPY BW COPY COL SINGLE COLOR  㧞 COLOR
PRINT/OTHER COUNTER CLEAR
PRINT BW PRINT COL OTHER BW OTHER COL

ARE YOU SURE? YES NO

EXECUTE 1/1
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE 1/1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 26

 SCAN TO HDD_B/W Scan to HDD record quantity (B/W)
24-10
SCAN TO HDD_CL Scan to HDD record quantity (COLOR)
Purpose : Data clear SCAN TO HDD_2CL Scan to HDD record quantity (2-color)
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when SCAN TO HDD_SGL Scan to HDD record quantity (Single color)
FAX is installed)
Section : — 0
Item : Counter TEST SIMULATION NO.24̆15 CLOSE
Operation/Procedure NETWORK SCANNER COUTNER DATA CLEAR

1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch NET SCN ORG_B/W NET SCN ORG_CL

panel. NET SCN ORG_2CL NET SCN ORG_SGL

2) Press [EXECUTE] button. INTERNET FAX OUTPUT INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT

3) Press [YES] button. INTERNET FAX RECEIVE INTERNET FAX SEND

The target counter is cleared. ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE

1/3
FAX OUTPUT Print quantity counter (for line 1)
FAX OUTPUT_L2 Print quantity counter (for line 2)
FAX SEND Send counter 24-30
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter Purpose : Data clear
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
Function (Purpose) : Used to initialize the administrator pass-
SEND IMAGES_L2 FAX send quantity counter (for line 2)
word.
SEND TIME FAX send time
Section : —
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix attached communications Item : Clear
Operation/Procedure

0 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.

TEST SIMULATION NO.24̆10 CLOSE 2) Press [YES] button.
FAX COUNTER DATA CLEAR The administrator password is initialized.
FAX OUTPUT FAX OUTPUT_L2 FAX SEND FAX RECEIVED

SEND IMAGES SEND IMAGES_L2 SEND TIME RECEIVED TIME 0

TEST  NO.24-30
SIMULATION CLOSE
ACR SEND
ADMIN PASSWORD INITIALIZE

ARE YOU SURE? YES NO

EXECUTE 1/1

24-15
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
Purpose : Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the counters related to the
image send.
24-31
Section : —
Purpose : Data clear
Item : Counter
Function (Purpose) : Used to initialize the service mode pass-
Operation/Procedure
word.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch Section : —
panel.
Item : Clear
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] button.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
The target counter is cleared.
2) Press [YES] button.
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity The service mode password is initialized.
counter (B/W) (B/W scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity 0
counter (COLOR) (COLOR scan job)
TEST SIMULATION NO.24-31 CLOSE
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (2-color) (2-color scan job) SERVICE PASSWORD INITIALIZE

NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read quantity

counter (Single) (Single scan job)
INTERNET FAX Internet FAX output quantity
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX SEND Internet FAX send quantity
OUTPUT ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
MAIL COUNTER Number of E-Mail send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Numeric SMB send
USB CNT Number of USB save
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 27

 Display Default
Display items Item descriptions
25 AT DEVE VO_L_K Automatic developer
range
1 – 255
value
128
AT DEVE VO_L_C adjustment control voltage 1 – 255 128
25-1 AT DEVE VO_L_M at low speed 1 – 255 128
Purpose : Operation test/Check AT DEVE VO_L_Y 1 – 255 128
AT DEVE VO_M_K Automatic developer 1 – 255 128
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the devel- adjustment control voltage
AT DEVE VO_M_C 1 – 255 128
oping section. at middle speed
AT DEVE VO_M_M 1 – 255 128
Section : Process (Developing section) AT DEVE VO_M_Y 1 – 255 128
Item : Operation
Operation/Procedure TCD_K Toner concentration sensor K
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] buttons. TCD_C Toner concentration sensor C
TCD_M Toner concentration sensor M
2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
TCD_Y Toner concentration sensor Y
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3 TCV_K Toner concentration control K
min and the detection level of the toner density sensor is dis- TCV_C Toner concentration control C
played. TCV_M Toner concentration control M
TCV_Y Toner concentration control Y
TCD_K Toner concentration sensor K
TCD_C Toner concentration sensor C
TCD_M Toner concentration sensor M 0
TCD_Y Toner concentration sensor Y TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE
TCV_K Toner concentration control voltage K AUTOMATIC DEVELOPER ADJUSTMENT
TCV_C Toner concentration control voltage C AT DEVE ADJ_L_K : 128 AT DEVE VO_L_K : 128
TCV_M Toner concentration control voltage M
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C : 128 AT DEVE VO_L_C : 128
TCV_Y Toner concentration control voltage Y
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M : 128 AT DEVE VO_L_M : 128

AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y : 128 AT DEVE VO_L_Y : 128

0 K C M Y EXECUTE
1/2
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-01 CLOSE

TONER SENSOR OUTPUT MONITOR

TCD_㧷 : TCV_㧷 :

TCD_C : TCV_C : 26
TCD_M : TCV_M :

TCD_Y : TCV_㨅 : 26-1

LOW MIDDLE EXECUTE
1/1 Purpose : Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1).
Section : Paper exit
25-2
Item : Setting
Purpose : Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) : Used to make the initial setting of toner
concentration when replacing developer. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section : Process (Photoconductor/Developing/ 2) Press [OK] button to save the entered content in step 1).
Transfer/Cleaning)
Set
Item : Adjustment Item Display Content Default
range
Operation/Procedure A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 Escape tray YES 0 to 1 1 (NO)
1) Select the adjustment target with the buttons on the touch 1 Escape tray NO
panel.
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. 0
The toner concentration sensor makes sampling of toner con- TEST SIMULATION NO.26㧙01 CLOSE
centration to display the detection level. ESCAPE TRAY SETUP

NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the A㧦 0 㧧 (0:YES 1:NO)

reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when A: 0


error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref- 㨇 0㨪 1 㨉

erence toner concentration level is not set normally.

Display Default OK
Display items Item descriptions
range value
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K Automatic developer 1 – 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C adjustment value at low 1 – 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M speed 1 – 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 1 – 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K Automatic developer 1 – 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C adjustment value at middle 1 – 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M speed 1 – 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 – 255 128

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 28

 Button
26-2 Item Content Default
display
Purpose : Setting COUNTUP FUSER_IN The charging timing is when EXIT_OUT
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the paper size of the large TIMING1 passing the sensor paper lead
capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size edge after fusing.
is changed, this simulation must be exe- FUSER_OUT The charging timing is when
passing the sensor paper rear
cuted to change the paper size in software.)
edge after fusing.
Section : Paper feed EXIT_OUT The charging timing is when
Item : Setting passing the (machine, right)
Operation/Procedure tray/after-process unit paper
exit sensor paper rear edge.
Select the paper size with the buttons on the touch panel.
(*): AR-C260 series VENDOR MODE is supported.
LCC 0 8.5 x 11 (Default: U.S.A, Canada, Inch)
1 A4 (Japan, AB_B, Europe, U.K, The Insufficient money during The
Australia, AB_A) specified copy job specified
2 B5 quantity is quantity is
BLACK/ COLOR
Diagnosis completed. completed.
COLOR (No (Remainder
setting Remainder No
remainder of money
of money remainder
0 of money) left)
left. of money.
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-02 CLOSE
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
SIZE SETUP
MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
LCC A4 B5
8.5 11 MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3

Operation 1: Wait for auto clear setting time. Default, 60sec. Can
be changed by the system setting.
1/1 Operation 2: Auto clear is not made.
Operation 3: Setting is immediately cleared. The display returns to
the initial screen.
26-3
Purpose : Setting 0
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the specifications of the auditor. TEST SIMULATION NO.26-03 CLOSE

Section : Auditor AUDITOR SETUP

BUILT-IN AUDITOR 㧦
Item : Specifications P10 EC1

Operation/Procedure OUTSIDE AUDITOR 㧦  NONE P VENDOR1 P OTHER

DOC ADJ 㧦   ON   OFF
Select the set target with the button on the touch panel.
PF ADJ 㧦   ON   OFF
When a button is pressed, the set content is saved.
VENDOR MODE 㧦 MODE1 MODE2 MODE3
1/2
Button
Item Content Default
display
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10 26-5
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation
EC1 The built-in auditor mode is
Purpose : Setting
changed to EC1. Function (Purpose) : Used to set the count mode of the total
OUTSIDE NONE Normal operation NONE counter and the maintenance counter.
AUDITOR P VENDOR1 Vendor mode for old-type coin Section : —
vendor. Control in the copy
Item : Counter
mode only.
P OTHER Vendor mode for the other Operation/Procedure
external auditor connected to 1) Select the set item with [n] [p] buttons.
the coin vendor I/F
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
DOC ADJ ON Document filing function OFF
enabled 3) Press [OK] button.
OFF Document filing function The set content in step 2) is saved. (Count-up number for A3
disabled paper is 1 or 2.)
PF ADJ ON Continuous paper feed is OFF
performed. Setting
Item Display Content Default
OFF Continuous paper feed is not range *
performed. A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (BLACK) 1 to 2 2
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE3 B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (COLOR) 1 to 2 2
MODE (*) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 C MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter 1 to 2 2
MODE3 Vendor mode 3 (B/W) (BLACK)
D MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter 1 to 2 2
(COL) (COLOR)
E DEV (B/W) Developer counter 1 to 2 2
(BLACK)
F DEV (COL) Developer counter 1 to 2 2
(COLOR)

* 1 = Count up by 1
2 = Count up by 2

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 29

 0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.26㧙05 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.26-10 CLOSE

A3(11˜17) COUNTUP NETWORK SCANNER TRIAL MODE SETUP

A㧦 2 㧧 TOTAL(B/W) A:1  TRIAL MODE (0:YES 1:NO)

A: 2 B㧦 2 㧧 TOTAL(COL) A: 1
C㧦 2 㧧 MAINTENANCE(B/W)
㨇 1㨪 2 㨉 [ 0~ 1 ]
D㧦 2 㧧 MAINTENANCE(COL)

OK OK

26-6 26-18
Purpose : Setting Purpose : Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed Function (Purpose) : Used to set the toner save mode.
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. Section : —
Section : — Item : —
Item : Specifications (Destination) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Use [n] and [p] buttons to select an item.
1) Select the set target with the button on the touch panel. The set value is highlighted and the value is displayed in the
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. setting area.
The selected set content is saved. * When there is an item over [n], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
U.S.A. United States of America
When there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
CANADA Canada
operation is disabled.
INCH Inch series, other destinations
JAPAN Japan When there is an item under [p], the display becomes active
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations and shifts to another item.
EUROPE Europe When there is no item under [p], the display grays out and
U.K. United Kingdom the operation is disabled.
AUS. Australia 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations * Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
CHINA China
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
0 * When [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-06 CLOSE the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
DISTINATION SETUP <Setting range and default value of each set value>
U.S.A CANADA INCH JAPAN
Setting Default
AB_B EUROPE U.K. AUS Item Display Content
range value
AB_A CHINA A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode 0 to 1 0
(1:YES 0:NO) is allowed
1 Copy toner save mode
EXECUTE 1/1 is inhibited.
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save 0 to 1 0
(1:YES 0:NO) mode is allowed.
26-10 1 Printer toner save
mode is inhibited.
Purpose : Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the trial mode of the network
scanner. 0
Section : — TEST SIMULATION NO.26㧙18 CLOSE

Item : Operation TONER SAVE MODE SETUP

Operation/Procedure A㧦 0 㧧 COPY(1:YES 0:NO)

A: 0 B㧦 0 㧧 PRINTER(1:YES 0:NO)

1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 

㨇 0㨪 1 㨉
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value. 

2) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is

OK
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
<Setting range and default value of each set value>
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
A TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting 0 to 1 1
(0:YES 1:NO) 1 Trial mode cancel

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 30

 <Setting range and default value of each set value>
26-30
Setting Default
Item Display Content
Purpose : Setting range value
Function (Purpose) : Used to set allow/inhibit of HL slow-up con- A (0:ONCE 0 Only once. If same as the 0 to 1 0
1:ANY) previous one, it is not saved.
trol (CE mark support control).
1 Any time. Though same as
Section : — the previous one, it is saved.
Item : Specifications (Operation mode (common
operation))
Operation/Procedure
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-35 CLOSE
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen
TROUBLE MEMORY MODE SETUP
is displayed. A㧦 0 㧧 (0:ONCE 1:ANY)

2) Enter the set value with 10-key. A: 0


* Press [C] key to clear the entered value. 㨇 0㨪 1 㨉

3) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM. OK
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
<Setting range and default value of each set value> 26-38

Setting Purpose : Setting

Item Display Content Default value
range Function (Purpose) : Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the
A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 CE mark 0 to 1 Refer to <Initial developer life is reached.
control allowed value and set
Section : Other
1 CE mark value linked with
control inhibited the destination>. Item : Specifications (Operation mode)
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Even though the control is allowed, the CE mark support
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
control may not be executed depending on the power fre-
quency, etc. * Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
2) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
<Initial value and set value linked with the destination>
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Destination Setting value * When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
CANADA 1 (CE not supported)
INCH 1 (CE not supported) <Setting range and default value of each set value>
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) Setting Default
Item Display Content
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) range value
EUROPE 0 (CE supported) A MAINTENANCE 0 Continue/Stop setting 0 to 1 0
U.K 0 (CE supported) LIFE OVER of print when the
AUS. 0 (CE supported) (0:CONTINUE maintenance life is
AB_A 0 (CE supported) 1:STOP) over (Print Continue)
CHINA 0 (CE supported) 1 Continue/Stop setting
of print when the
maintenance life is
0 over (Print Stop)

TEST SIMULATION NO.26-30 CLOSE

CE MARK CONTROL SETTING 0

A㧦 1 㧧 (0:YES 1:NO) SIMULATION NO.26-38 CLOSE
TEST
A:  1
ENGINE LIFE OVER SETTING
[ 0~ 1] A㧦 0  MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER (0:CONTINUE 1:STOP)

A: 0
OK [ 0~ 1 ]

OK
26-35
Purpose : Setting
26-41
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the trouble memory saving pro-
cedure. Purpose : Setting

Section : — Function (Purpose) : Used to set YES/NO of AMS setting in the

center binding mode.
Item : —
Section : —
Operation/Procedure
Item : Specifications (Operation mode)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM. * Press [C] key to clear the entered value.

* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set 2) When [OK] button is pressed, and the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 31

 * When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. 26-50

<Setting range and default value of each set value> Purpose : Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set functions.
Setting
Item Display Content Default value Section : —
range
A (0:YES 0 Center binding 0 to 1 Refer to <Initial Item : Specifications (Operation)
1:NO) mode AMS setting value and set Operation/Procedure
1 Center binding value linked with
mode AMS cancel the destination>. 1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] buttons.
The selected value is highlighted and the value is displayed in
<Initial value and set value liked with the destination> the setting area.
Destination Setting value * When there is an item over [n], the display becomes active
U.S.A 0 (Cancel) and shifts to another item.
CANADA 0 (Cancel) When there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
INCH 0 (Cancel) operation is disabled.
JAPAN 0 (Cancel) When there is an item under [p], the display becomes active
AB_B 0 (Cancel) and shifts to another item.
EUROPE 1 (Setting)
When there is no item under [p], the display grays out and
U.K 1 (Setting)
the operation is disabled.
AUS. 0 (Cancel)
AB_A 0 (Cancel) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
CHINA 0 (Cancel) * Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the entered value is set.
* When [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
0
the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-41 CLOSE

PAMPHLET MODE AMS SETTING.

<Setting range and default value of each set value>
A㧦 0 㧧 (0:YES 1:NO)
Content Setting
A: 0 Item Display Default value
description range
㨇 0㨪 1 㨉 A BW YES B/W REVERSE 0–1 <Setting range
REVERSE allowed and default
NO B/W REVERSE 0–1 value of each
OK set value>
inhibited
Refer to
"Setting value
26-49 A."
B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single 0 to 7 <Setting range
Purpose : Setting color inhibit and default
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the copy speed mode. setting value of each
Section : — set value>
Refer to
Item : Setting "Setting value
Operation/Procedure B."
1) When the machine enters Simulation 26-49, the current set C FINISHER YES The number of 0–1 0 (YES)
FUNCTION discharge of
status is displayed.
special paper
* The current set button is highlighted. from the finisher
2) Select an item to be changed, and it is highlighted. The setting is limited.
is saved to EEPROM and RAM. NO The number of 0–1
discharge of
* Only one can be selected for each item.
special paper
<Item description> from the finisher
is not limited.
Set Default
Item Content
value value <Display when 2-color/Single color inhibit>
POSTCARD LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW
Mode inhibit When 2-color/
HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH SIM setting
Single 2-color Single color inhibit
OFF OFF OFF 0
0 OFF ON OFF 1
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-49 CLOSE ON OFF OFF 2
ON ON OFF 3
COPY SPEED MODE SETUP

POSTCARD  㧦 LOW HIGH

OFF OFF ON 4
OFF ON ON 5
ON OFF ON 6
ON ON ON 7

1/1
* OFF: Inhibit cancel state
ON: Inhibit state

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 32

<Setting range and default value of each set value>
26-53
Destination Setting value A Setting value B
U.S.A 1 (Display allowed) 0 Purpose : Setting
CANADA 1 (Display allowed)  0 Function (Purpose) : Used to set YES/NO of the auto color cali-
INCH 1 (Display allowed)  0 bration.
JAPAN 1 (Display allowed)  7
Section : —
AB_B 1 (Display allowed)  0
Item : —
EUROPE 1 (Display allowed)  0
U.K 0 (Display inhibited) 0 Operation/Procedure
AUS. 1 (Display allowed)  0 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
AB_A 1 (Display allowed)  0
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
CHINA 1 (Display allowed)  0
2) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
0 * When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-50 CLOSE value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
FUNCTION SETTING <Setting range and default value of each set value>
A㧦 1 ; BW REVERSE : YES
Setting Default
A: 1 B㧦 0 ; COLOR MODE
Item Display Content
C㧦 0 ; FINISHER FUNCTION : NO
range value
㨇 0㨪 1 㨉 A (1:YES 0:NO) 1 ACC YES 0 to 1 1
0 ACC NO
OK

0
SIMULATION NO.26-53 CLOSE
26-52 TEST

ENABLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION

Purpose : Setting
A㧦 1 㧧 (1:YES 0:NO)
Function (Purpose) : Used to set whether non-printed paper A: 1
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
㨇 0㨪 1 㨉
or not.
Section : —
OK
Item : —
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 26-54
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
Purpose : Setting
2) When [OK] button is pressed, the entered value is set.
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
Section : Printer
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Item : Operation
<Setting range and default value of each set value>
Operation/Procedure
Setting
Item Display Content Default value 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
range
A (0:YES 0 White paper 0 to 1 Refer to <List of default * Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
1:NO) countup (YES) values depending on 2) When [OK] button is pressed, and the current set value is
1 White paper destinations>. saved to EEPROM and RAM.
coutup (NO)
After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
<List of default values depending on destinations> display.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
Destination Setting value
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
U.S.A 0 (countup)
CANADA 0 (countup) <Setting range and default value of each value>
INCH 0 (countup) Setting Default
JAPAN 1 (No countup) Item Display Content
range value
AB_B 0 (countup) A (1:YES 0:NO) 1 ACC YES 0–1 1
EUROPE 0 (countup) 0 ACC NO
U.K 0 (countup)
AUS. 1 (No countup)
AB_A 0 (countup) 0
CHINA 0 (countup) TEST SIMULATION NO.26㧙54 CLOSE

ENABLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION OF PRINTER

A㧦 1 㧧 (1:YES 0:NO)
0 A: 1
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-52 CLOSE
㨇 0㨪 1 㨉
A BLANK PAPER COUNT MODE SETUP
A㧦 1 㧧 (0:YES 1:NO)

A: 1 OK

㨇 0㨪 1 㨉

OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 33

26-65 26-67
Purpose : Setting Purpose : Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the finisher alarm mode. Function (Purpose) : Used to set the summer time (switching
Section : — timing to the summer time and the adjust-
ment time (shift amount)) and the time zone
Item : Specifications
(for switching to the summer time and the
Operation/Procedure difference between the local time and GMT
1) When the machine enters Simulation 26-65, the following (UTC) for synchronization with the internet
screen is displayed. time server).
* The current set value is highlighted. Section : —
2) When the set value button of an item to be changed is Item : Specifications
pressed, it is highlighted and the setting is saved to EEPROM Operation/Procedure
and RAM.
1) Select a mode to be set. ([SUMMER TIME] is selected in this
* Only one can be selected for each item.
example.)
<Item description> * When [TIME ZONE] or [SUMMER TIME] button is pressed,
Set Setting Default it is highlighted and item of the selected button is displayed.
Item Content
value range value * Only one can be selected, and the selected button is high-
LIMIT 30 Staple limit sheets: 30 sheets 30 or 50 30 lighted.
SHEETS 50 Staple limit sheets: 50 sheets In the default display, [TIME ZONE] is selected.
LIMIT ON Staple limit copies ON ON or OFF ON
2) Change the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
COPIES OFF Staple limit copies OFF
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and the
<LIMIT SHEETS> value is displayed in the setting area.
* Valid only when the 1K finisher is installed. * When there is an item over [n], the display becomes active
[Target paper size] and shifts to another item.
Staplable S-size paper described on the product specifications When there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR
When there is an item under [p], the display becomes active
* 25 sheets for L-size paper (A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
and shifts to another item.
8K) regardless of setting
When there is no item under [p], the display grays out and
* 25 sheets for mixed loading of a same width regardless of setting
the operation is disabled.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0
SIMULATION NO.26-65 CLOSE
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
TEST
FINISHER ALARM MODE SETUP (STAPLE LIMIT)
4) When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
LIMIT SHEETS : 30 50
set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
LIMIT COPIES : ON OFF After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
display.
* When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and
1/1 RAM.

<Setting range and default value of each value>

Setting Default
Category Item Display Content Remark
range value
TIME ZONE A GMT +/- + GMT +/– 0 1
– 1
B GMT HOUR GMT HOUR 0 to 13 *
C GMT MINUTE GMT MINUTE 0 to 59 *
D INTERNET YES Internet time YES/ 0 * When YES, time is synchronized with
NO NO 1 the internet time server.
SUMMER Common A AUTO SUMMER ON Auto summertime 0 *
TIME TIME ADJ OFF setting ON/OFF 1
B ADJ TIME HOUR Adjustment time 0 to 23 1
HOUR
C ADJ TIME MINUTE Adjustment time 0 to 59 *
MINUTE

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 34

 Setting Default
Category Item Display Content Remark
range value
SUMMER Start time D START TIME MONTH Start time MONTH 1 to 12 *
TIME setting E START TIME DAY Start time DAY 1 to 31 * When the set value is changed, it is
F START TIME WEEK Start time WEEK 1 to 5 * reflected to the START MODE.
G START TIME A DAY MONDAY Stat time DAY OF 1 *
OF THE WEEK TUESDAY THE WEEK 2
WEDNESDAY 3
THURSDAY 4
FRIDAY 5
SATURDAY 6
SUNDAY 7
H START TIME HOUR Start time HOUR 0 to 23 *
I START TIME MINUTE Start time MINUTE 0 to 59 *
J START MODE DAY Start mode 0 * Specified with date (Related item: E)
WEEK & A DAY 1 Specified with WEEK, DAY OF THE
OF THE WEEK WEEK. (Related item: F, G)
K START UTC YES UTC YES/NO 0 * When set to YES, values of D to I are
NO 1 not used.
End time L END TIME MONTH End time MONTH 1 to 12 *
setting M END TIME DAY End time DAY 1 to 31 * When the set value is changed, it is
N END TIME WEEK End time WEEK 1 to 5 * reflected to END MODE.
O END TIME A DAY MONDAY End time DAY OF 1 *
OF THE WEEK TUESDAY THE WEEK 2
WEDNESDAY 3
THURSDAY 4
FRIDAY 5
SATURDAY 6
SUNDAY 7
P END TIME HOUR End time HOUR 0 to 23 *
Q END TIME MINUTE End time MINUTE 0 to 59 *
R END MODE DAY End mode 0 * Specified with DATE (Related item: M)
WEEK & A DAY 1 Specified with WEEK, DAY OF WEEK
OF THE WEEK (Related item: N, O)
S END UTC YES UTC YES/NO 0 * When set to YES, values of L to Q are
NO 1 not used.

Displays of Item A, D, G, J, K, O, R, S are "Item name: Detail."

Example: PAPER: CS1
*: Refer to <<Initial value and set value linked with the destination>>.
<Initial value/set value liked with the destination>

Setting Destination
value U.S.A CANADA INCH JAPAN AB_B EUROPE U.K. AUS. AB_A CHINA
Time zone –5 (Hour) –5 (Hour) –5 (Hour) 9 (Hour) 8 (Hour) 0 (Hour) 0 (Hour) 10 (Hour) 8 (Hour) 8 (Hour)
correction
value (hour)
Time zone 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute)
correction
value
(minute)
Summer time Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer
enable/ OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
disable flag
Summer time 4 (Month) 4 (Month) 1 (Month) 1 (Month) 1 (Month) 3 (Month) 3 (Month) 10 1 (Month) 1 (Month)
start date (Month)
(Month)
Summer time 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day)
start date
(Day)
Summer time 2 (Hour) 2 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 2 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour)
start date
(Hour)
Summer time 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute)
start date
(Minute)
Summer time 1 (Week) 1 (Week) 1 (Week) 1 (Week) 1 (Week) 5 (Week) 5 (Week) 5 (Week) 1 (Week) 1 (Week)
start date
(Week)
Summer time 0 0 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday) 0 0 0 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday)
start date (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday)
(Day of
week)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 35

 Setting Destination
value U.S.A CANADA INCH JAPAN AB_B EUROPE U.K. AUS. AB_A CHINA
Day of week 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 1 (Day 1 (Day 1 (Day 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 1 (Day 1 (Day
specifying week week specifying) specifying) specifying) week week week specifying) specifying)
flag specifying) specifying) specifying) specifying) specifying)
UTC 0 (UTC 0 (UTC 1 (UTC ON) 1 (UTC ON) 1 (UTC ON) 1 (UTC 1 (UTC 0 (UTC 1 (UTC ON) 1 (UTC ON)
specifying OFF) OFF) ON) ON) OFF)
flag
Summer time 10 10 1 (Month) 1 (Month) 1 (Month) 10 10 3 (Month) 1 (Month) 1 (Month)
end date (Month) (Month) (Month) (Month)
(Month)
Summer time 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day)
end date
(Day)
Summer time 2 (Hour) 2 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 3 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour)
end date
(Hour)
Summer time 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute)
end
Week of 5th (week) 5th (week) 1st (week) 1st (week) 1st (week) 5th (week) 5th (week) 5th (week) 1st (week) 1st (week)
summer time
end
Day of week 0 0 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday) 0 0 0 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday)
of summer (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday)
time end
Flag to 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 1 (Date 1 (Date 1 (Date 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 1 (Date 1 (Date
specify the week is week is specification) specification) specification) week is week is week is specification) specification)
day of week specified) specified) specified) specified) specified)
Flag to UTC OFF UTC OFF UTC ON UTC ON UTC ON UTC ON UTC ON UTC OFF UTC ON UTC ON
specify UTC
Summer time 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 0 (Hour) 0 (Hour) 0 (Hour) 0 (Hour) 0 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 0 (Hour) 0 (Hour)
correction
value (Hour)
Summer time 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute)
correction
value
(minute)
Flag to OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
synchronize
with the
internet clock
server

<Reflection of items J and R after settlement of the value> When there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
When the values of E to G (M to O) are changed and settled and operation is disabled.
[OK] button is pressed, the values are saved to EEPROM and RAM When there is an item under [p], the display becomes active
and set to Item J (R) at the same time. and shifts to another item.
When there is no item under [p], the display grays out and
0 the operation is disabled.
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-67 CLOSE 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
SUMMER TIME&TIME ZONE ADJUSTMENT * Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
A: 1 ; GMT ±:-
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is set.
A: 1 B: 0 ; GMT HOUR

C: 0 ; GMT MINUTE
* When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
[ 0~ 1 ]
D: 0 ; INTERNET: YES pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
TIME ZONE SUMMER TIME OK <Setting range and default value of each value>
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
26-69 A TONER 0 Toner preparation 0 to 1 0
Purpose : Setting PREPARATION message is displayed.
(0:YES 1:NO) 1 Toner preparation
Function (Purpose) : Used to set whether the toner preparation
message is not
message and the toner near end message
displayed.
are displayed or not when the toner quan-
B TONER NEAR 0 Toner near end 0 to 1 0
tity reaches 25%. END (0:YES message is displayed.
Section : Process 1:NO) 1 Toner near end
Item : Specifications message is not
displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and the
value is displayed in the setting area.
* When there is an item over [n], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 36

 Setting Default
Item Display Content 27-2
range value
C TONER END 1 Operation is enabled 1 to 3 2 Purpose : Setting
when TONER END. Function (Purpose) : Used to set the FSS function (Password,
(*1) HOST server TEL number).
2 Operation is stopped
Section : Communication (RIC/MODEM)
when TONER END.
(*2) Item : Data (User data)
3 Operation is stopped Operation/Procedure
when TONER END.
(*3) 1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-02, the screen is dis-
D TONER END Used to set the number of 1 to 5 3 played.
COUNT detection of toner end. 2) Select a desired button.
<Set item C (TONER END) control content> The button is highlighted and the value is displayed.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. The entered value is displayed
TONER END flag detection CRUM ID machine history check
at "NEW."
*1 No detection No detection
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
*2 No detection Detection
*3 Detection Detection 4) When [SET] button is pressed, the entered value is set.
When the entered value is set, it is displayed in "PRESENT:"

0 <Item and content descriptions>

TEST SIMULATION NO.26-69 CLOSE Display Description Number of digits
TONER NEAR END SETTING
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number Max. 16 digits
A㧦 0 㧧 TONER PREPARATION(0:YES 1 :NO) SERVA TEL_NO. HOST server TEL number Max. 16 digits
A: 0 B㧦 0 㧧 TONER NEAR END (0:YES 1: NO)
C㧦 2 㧧 TONER END
0 1 D㧦 3 㧧 TONER END COUNT 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-02 CLOSE
OK FSS FUNCTION SETUP㧔INPUT㧕
PRESENT㧦 00000000000000000000000000000001

NEW 㧦 㧦
SET

27  USER
 FAX_NO.  SERVA TEL_NO

1/1
27-1
Purpose : Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to set whether the detection of com- 27-4
munication error with RIC (U7-00) is dis- Purpose : Setting
abled or not. Function (Purpose) : Used to set the FSS functions (initializing,
Section : Communication (RIC/MODEM) call, toner order auto send).
Item : Specifications (Operation mode) Section : Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Operation/Procedure Item : Data (User data)
1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-01, following the Operation/Procedure
screen is displayed. 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. is displayed.
3) When [OK] button is pressed, and the current set value is 2) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] buttons.
saved to EEPROM and RAM. The highlighted section of the set value is changed and the
After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal value is displayed in the setting area.
display. * When there is an item over [n], the display becomes active
* When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the and shifts to another item.
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. When there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
<Setting range and default value of each value> operation is disabled.
Setting Default
When there is an item under [p], the display becomes active
Item Display Content and shifts to another item.
range value
A DISABLE 0: YES (U7-00) Not YES 0 to 1 0 0: Not When there is no item under [p], the display grays out and
1: NO detected NO 1 detected the operation is disabled.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 * Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-01 CLOSE 4) When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
DISABLING OF U7-00 TROUBLE
㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷㧧DISABLE㧦
A㧦 0
㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 NO After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
A:   0 display.
* When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the
㨇 0㨪 1㨉
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.

OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 37

<Setting range and default value of each value>
Setting
Item Display Content Default value Remark
range
A FSS MODE NEB1 FSS mode setting Only send in NE-B mode 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
B RETRY Retry number setting 0 to 15 2 * 0: No retry
C TIMER (MINUTE) Retry timer setting (minute) 1 to 15 3
D TONER ORDER 100% – 75% Toner order auto send 100% to 75% 5 3 (49% to 25%)
TIMING (K) 74% – 50% timing setting (K) 74% to 50% 4
49% – 25% 49% to 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND Near end 1
EMPTY Empty 0
E TONER ORDER 100% – 75% Toner order auto send 100% to 75% 5 3 (49% to 25%)
TIMING (C) 74% – 50% timing setting (C) 74% to 50% 4
49% – 25% 49% to 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND Near end 1
EMPTY Empty 0
F TONER ORDER 100% – 75% Toner order auto send 100 to 75% 5 3 (49% to 25%)
TIMING(M) 74% – 50% timing setting (M) 74% to 50% 4
49% – 25% 49% to 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND Near end 1
EMPTY Empty 0
G TONER ORDER 100% – 75% Toner order auto send 100% to 75% 5 3 (49% to 25%)
TIMING(Y) 74% – 50% timing setting (Y) 74% to 50% 4
49% – 25% 49% to 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND Near end 1
EMPTY Empty 0

0 27-6
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-04 CLOSE Purpose : Setting
FSS FUNCTION SETUP Function (Purpose) : Used to set YES/NO of the manual service
A: 1 ; FSS MODE: NEB2 call.
A: 1 B: 2 ; RETRY
Section : Communication (RIC/MODEM)
[ 0~ 1] C: 3 ; TIMER (MINUTE)
Item : Specifications
D: 3 ; TONER ORDER TIMING (K): 3 (49% - 25%)
Operation/Procedure
OK
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
27-5 2) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
Purpose : Setting
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the tag number.
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Section : Communication (RIC/MODEM)
<Setting range and default value of each value>
Item : Data (User data)
Operation/Procedure Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-05, the following A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 Manual service call YES 0 to 1 0
screen is displayed. 1 Manual service call NO
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (Max. 8 digits)
The entered value is displayed on "NEW."
0
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value. SIMULATION NO.27-06 CLOSE
TEST
3) When [SET] button is pressed, the entered value is set.
MANUAL SERVICE CALL SETUP
When the entered value is set, it is displayed in "PRESENT:" A㧦 0 㧧 0:YES, 1:NO
and "NEW" disappears. A: 0
㨇 0㨪 1 㨉
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-05 CLOSE
OK
TAG# SETTING

PRESENT : 11111111

NEW : SET

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 38

27-7 27-9

Purpose : Setting Purpose : Setting

Function (Purpose) : Used to set the FSS functions (enable, alert Function (Purpose) : Used to set the threshold value for deter-
callout). mining whether the paper feed time
between sensors is recorded or not and the
Section : Communication (RIC/MODEM)
threshold value for determining whether the
Item : Specifications gain adjustment retry number is recorded
Operation/Procedure or not.
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen Section : —
is displayed. Item : Specifications
2) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] buttons. Operation/Procedure
The highlighted section of the set value is changed and the 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen
value is displayed in the setting area. is displayed.
* When there is an item over [n], the display becomes active 2) Select an item to be set with [n] and [p] buttons.
and shifts to another item.
The highlighted section of the set value is changed and the
When there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the value is displayed in the setting area.
operation is disabled.
* When there is an item over [n], the display becomes active
When there is an item under [p], the display becomes active and shifts to another item.
and shifts to another item.
When there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
When there is no item under [p], the display grays out and operation is disabled.
the operation is disabled.
When there is an item under [p], the display becomes active
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. and shifts to another item.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value. When there is no item under [p], the display grays out and
* In the FSS function setting, change from YES (0) to NO (1) the operation is disabled.
cannot be made. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to * Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
EEPROM and RAM.
4) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set EEPROM and RAM.
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to display.
exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
<Setting range and default value of each value> value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Setting Default <Setting range and default value of each value>
Item Display Content
range value
Setting Default
A FUNCTION 0 FSS function is 0 to 1 1 Item Display Content
range value
(0:YES 1:NO) enabled. (NO)
A FEED TIME1 Threshold value of paper 0 to 100 50 (%)
1 FSS function is
feed time between sensors
disabled. (*)
(Main unit)
B ALERT 0 Alert callout is enabled. 0 to 1 0
B FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 to 100 50 (%)
(0:YES 1:NO) 1 Alert callout is disabled. (YES)
feed time between sensors
(SPF)
(*): In the FSS function setting, change from Disable to Enable can
C GAIN Threshold value of gain 1 to 100 50
be made, but change from Disable to Enable cannot be made. ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number (TIMES)
<Alert item> RETRY
D JAM ALERT Threshold value of 1 to 100 10
Item Send timing continuous JAM alert (TIMES)
No cause of callout Initial/Trouble/Continuous JAM alert judgment
Maintenance Maintenance timing detection
Service call When Service Call key is pressed. * Item A: 0% is the standard passing time between sheets. 100%
Toner send request When toner order auto send setting reaches. is the time for judgment as a JAM between sheets.
Toner collect request Toner installation data revision. However, only
for a new product. 0
Alert resend TEST SIMULATION NO.27-09 CLOSE

FSS FUNCTION ADJUSTMENT

0 A㧦 50 㧧 FEED TIME1

SIMULATION NO.27-07 CLOSE

A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 FEED TIME2
TEST
㨇 0㨪100㨉 C㧦 50 㧧 GAIN ADJUSTMENT RETRY
FSS FUNCTION SETUP (FUNCTION)
A 1 ; FUNCTION(0:YES 1:NO) D㧦 50 㧧 JAM ALERT

A: 1 B 0 㧧 ALERT(0:YES 1:NO)
OK

[ 0~ 1 ]

OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 39

 <Display item>
27-10
Display item
Purpose : Data clear Occurrence date Retry Content
Item
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the trouble prediction history and time (Display) number
information. LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial
Section : Communication (RIC/MODEM) LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication
DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits retry number
Item : Specifications
DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display
Operation/Procedure
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain
become active display. SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
2) Press [YES] button.
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
The history information of the trouble prediction information is
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
cleared. [YES] button is highlighted.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
CUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and 0
[NO] buttons gray out. TEST SIMULATION NO.㪉㪎㪄㪈㪈 CLOSE

* After completion of the trouble prediction information history TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT
           DATE    RETRY
clear, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and LSU1   㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99  99999999
[YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. LSU2 㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99  99999999
DESK1    㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99 99999999
<Clear target history item> DESK2   㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99 99999999
FINISHER1  㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99 99999999
Target history FINISHER2 㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99  99999999
1/2
Serial communication retry number history
High density process control error history
Half tone process control error history 27-12
Automatic register adjustment error history
Gain adjustment retry history Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Paper transport time between sensors Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the high-density, half-tone
process control error history and the auto-
0 matic register adjustment error history.
SIMULATION NO.27-10 CLOSE
TEST
Section : Process
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION HISTORY CLEAR
Item : Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-12, the following
screen is displayed.
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE * Select the display page of process data with [p] and [n] but-
tons.
* When there is an item over [n], the display becomes active
27-11 and shifts to the previous page.
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ When there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
Check (Display/Print) operation is disabled.

Function (Purpose) : Used to display the serial communication When there is an item under [p], the display becomes active
retry number and the scanner gain adjust- and shifts the following page.
ment retry number history. (for RSPF) When there is no item under [p], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
Section : Communication (RIC/MODEM)
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
Item : Specification
basic screen of the simulation.
Operation/Procedure
* Press [COLOR]/[BLACK] key to execute copying.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-11, the following
<Display item and content descriptions>
screen is displayed.
* Select the display page of process data with [p] and [n] but- Occurrence Error
tons. Display item Content date and time code
(Display) (Digits)
* When there is an item over [n], the display becomes active
HV_ERR1 High density error history 1 99/99/99 Max. 4
and shifts to the previous page. 99:99:99 digits
When there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the HV_ERR2 High density error history 2 99/99/99 Max. 4
operation is disabled. 99:99:99 digits
When there is an item under [p], the display becomes active HV_ERR3 High density error history 3 99/99/99 Max. 4
and shifts the following page. 99:99:99 digits
HV_ERR4 High density error history 4 99/99/99 Max. 4
When there is no item under [p], the display grays out and
99:99:99 digits
the operation is disabled.
HV_ERR5 High density error history 5 99/99/99 Max. 4
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy 99:99:99 digits
basic screen of the simulation. H_TONE ERR1 Half tone error history 1 99/99/99 Max. 4
* Press [COLOR]/[BLACK] key to execute copying. 99:99:99 digits
H_TONE ERR2 Half tone error history 2 99/99/99 Max. 4
99:99:99 digits

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 40

 Occurrence Error
27-13
Display item Content date and time code
(Display) (Digits) Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
H_TONE ERR3 Half tone error history 3 99/99/99 Max. 4 Check (Display/Print)
99:99:99 digits
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the history of paper feed
H_TONE ERR4 Half tone error history 4 99/99/99 Max. 4
time between sensors.
99:99:99 digits
H_TONE ERR5 Half tone error history 5 99/99/99 Max. 4 Section : —
99:99:99 digits Item : Specifications
AUTO REG Automatic register 99/99/99 Max. 4
ADJ1 adjustment error history 1 99:99:99 digits
Operation/Procedure
AUTO REG Automatic register 99/99/99 Max. 4
ADJ2 adjustment error history 2 99:99:99 digits 1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-13, the following
AUTO REG Automatic register 99/99/99 Max. 4 screen is displayed.
ADJ3 adjustment error history 3 99:99:99 digits
* Select the display page of process data with [p] and [n] but-
AUTO REG Automatic register 99/99/99 Max. 4
tons.
ADJ4 adjustment error history 4 99:99:99 digits
AUTO REG Automatic register 99/99/99 4 digits * When there is an item over [n], the display becomes active
ADJ5 adjustment error history 5 99:99:99 and shifts to the previous page.
When there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
0
SIMULATION NO.㪉㪎㪄㪈㪉 CLOSE
When there is an item under [p], the display becomes active
TEST
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT(ADJUSTMENT_ERROR)
and shifts the following page.
           DATE    ERROR CODE When there is no item under [p], the display grays out and
HV ERR1 㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99  9999 the operation is disabled.
HV ERR2  㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99  9999
HV ERR3  㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99 9999 * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
HV ERR4   㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99 9999 basic screen of the simulation.
HV ERR5   㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99 9999
H_TONE ERR1 㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99 9999
* Press [COLOR]/[BLACK] key to execute copying.
1/3

<Display item and content descriptions>

Occurrence date Code between Passing
Display item Content Passing time
and time sensors reference time
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper feed time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit FEED TIME2 History of paper feed time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 History of paper feed time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME4 History of paper feed time between sensors 4 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME5 History of paper feed time between sensors 5 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME6 History of paper feed time between sensors 6 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME7 History of paper feed time between sensors 7 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME8 History of paper feed time between sensors 8 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME9 History of paper feed time between sensors 9 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME10 History of paper feed time between sensors 10 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
RSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME2(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME4(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 4 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME5(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 5 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME6(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 6 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME7(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 7 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME8(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 8 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME9(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 9 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME10(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 10 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)

0 27-14
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-13 CLOSE Purpose : Operation test/Check
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT(FEED TIME)
Function (Purpose) : The FSS connection test mode setting is
DATE SENSOR CODE PASS TIME STANDARD TIME
FEED TIME1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
made.
FEED TIME2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 Section : —
FEED TIME3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 Item : Operation
FEED TIME5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 Operation/Procedure
FEED TIME6 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
1/4 1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-14, following the
screen is displayed.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
* The FSS connection test mode setting cannot be changed
from Enable (1:ON) to Disable (0:OFF).

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 41

3) When [OK] button is pressed, and the current set value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM. 0
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set TEST SIMULATION NO.30-01 CLOSE
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. MAIN UNIT SENSOR CHECK
PPD1 PPD2 POD1 POD2
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to
exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted. POD3 TFD2 TFD3 HPOS

DSW_R DSW_C DSW_F DHPD_K

<Setting range and default value of each set value>
DHPD_CL 1TNFD 1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
Setting
Item Display Content Default
range 1/1
A CONNECTION 1 Set the FSS connection 0 to 1 0
TEST MODE test mode to Enable. (OFF)
(1: ON 0: OFF) 0 Set the FSS connection
30-2
test mode to Disable. *
Purpose : Operation test/Check
*: The FSS connection test can be changed only from Disable to Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sen-
Enable, and cannot be changed from Enable to Disable. sors and detectors of the paper feed sec-
tion and the related circuits.
0 Section : Paper feed
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-14 CLOSE
Item : Operation
FSS TEST MODE SETUP
A:0 ; CONNECTION TEST MODE (1:ON 0:OFF)
Operation/Procedure
A: 0 1) When the machine enters Simulation 30-02, the following
[ 0~ 1 ] screen is displayed to show the sensor status change.
* When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor
OK
name is highlighted.
<Sensor name>
Sensor name (Display) Content
CPFD1 Cassette 1 transport detection
30 CLUD1 Cassette 1 upper limit detection
CPED1 Cassette 1 paper empty detection
30-1 CSPD1 Cassette 1 paper remaining quantity detection
CSS1 Cassette 1 presence detection
Purpose : Operation test/Check CPFD2 Cassette 2 transport detection
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sen- CLUD2 Cassette 2 upper limit detection
sors and detectors in the paper feed sec- CPED2 Cassette 2 paper empty detection
tion, the paper transport section, and the CSPD2 Cassette 2 paper remaining quantity detection
paper exit section. CSS2 Cassette 2 presence detection
Section : Paper feed MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection
Item : Operation MPLD Manual feed paper length detection
MTOP1 Manual feed tray reduction detection
Operation/Procedure
MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection
1) When the machine enters Simulation 30-01, the following MPED Manual feed paper empty detection
screen is displayed to show the sensor status change.
* When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor
name is highlighted. 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.30㧙02 CLOSE
<Sensor name>
TRAY SENSOR CHECK(MAIN)
Code of sensor Sensor name CPFD1 CLUD1 CPED 1 CSPD 1

PPD1 Resist front detection CSS1 CPFD2 CLUD 2 CPED 2

PPD2 Resist detection
CSPD 2 CSS2 MPFD MPLD
POD1 Fusing after detection
MTOP1 MTOP2 MPED
POD2 Paper exit detection 1/1
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection
1/1
TFD2 Main unit paper exit full detection
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection
HPOS Shifter home detection
DSW_R Right door open/close detection
DSW_C Cassette 1 transport cover open/close detection
DSW_F Front cover open/close detection
DHPD_K K phase detection
DHPD_CL CL phase detection
1TNFD Waste toner full detection
1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt separation CL detection
1TUD_K Primary belt separation BK detection

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 42

 <List of set items>
33 Display Description of item
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
P1 (A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
33-1 P2 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
Purpose : Operation test/Check MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the card
<List of result displays>
reader sensor and the related circuits. (The
card reader sensor operation can be moni- Item name Item content
tored with the LCD display.) (Japan only) COMPLETE Adjustment completed
Section : Other ERROR Adjustment failed

Item : Operation
Operation/Procedure 0
SIMULATION NO.40-02 CLOSE
1) When the machine enters Simulation 33-01, the following TEST

screen is displayed to show the sensor status change. BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT
MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENT.
* When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor name
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
is highlighted.
<Sensor name>
Code (Display) Sensor name EXECUTE
CARD Card insertion detection
DATA Card number signal detection
CLOCK Standard clock signal detection 40-7
Purpose : Setting
0 Function (Purpose) : Used to set the adjustment value of the
detection level of the manual paper feed
TEST SIMULATION NO.33㧙01 CLOSE
tray paper width detector.
CARD READER SENSOR CHECK
CARD DATA CLOCK Section : Paper feed
Item : Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
1/1
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
1/1 played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted.

40 If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
40-2 item is shifted.
Purpose : Adjustment If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the detection level of the operation is invalid.
manual feed tray paper width detector. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section : Paper feed * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Item : Operation 3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
Operation/Procedure pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
1) Extend the manual feed tray guide to the max. width and press
[EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the <Set range and default value of each setup>
current AD value is temporality saved to RAM as the max.
Set Default
width. Item Item Item content
range value
* During adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed. A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 0 to 255 241
* After completion of the max. width adjustment, the P1 width B P1 POSITION Manual feed P1 position 0 to 255 231
(A4) adjustment value start screen is displayed. (A4)
2) Extend the manual feed tray guide to the P1 (A4) width posi- C P2 POSITION Manual feed P2 position 0 to 255 140
(A4R)
tion and press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is high-
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 0 to 255 19
lighted and the current AD value is temporality saved to RAM
as the P1 width (A4) position. (Hereinafter, the value is saved
for each size setting.) 0
3) Perform the adjustment of P2 position width (A4R) and min. TEST SIMULATION NO.40-07 CLOSE
position according to the above procedures. BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING
4) After completion of the adjustment, "COMPLETE" is displayed A : 241 ; MAX POSITION

and the RAM contents are saved to EEPROM. If the adjust- A: 241 B : 231 ; P1 POSITION

ment is not completed normally for any reason, "ERROR" is [ 0~ 255 ]

C : 140 ; P2 POSITION

D : 19 ; MIN POSITION
displayed and data are not saved to EEPROM. In this case,
the adjustment must be tried again.
OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 43

 <Document sensor names, adjustment ranges and default val-
41 ues>
Sensor name Content Set range Default value
41-1 PD1 Document sensor 1 0 – 255 128
PD2 Document sensor 2
Purpose : Operation test/Check PD3 Document sensor 3
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the operating state of the PD4 Document sensor 4
document sensor. PD5 Document sensor 5
Section : Other PD6 Document sensor 6
Item : Operation PD7 Document sensor 7

Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 41-01, the following 0
screen is displayed to show the sensor status change. TEST SIMULATION NO.41-02 CLOSE

* When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP

name is highlighted. WITH THE ORIGINAL COVEROPENED, TURN ON THE EXECUTE

KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE.
<Sensor name>
Code (Display) Sensor name
OCSW Original cover SW
EXECUTE
PD1 Document detection 1
PD2 Document detection 2
PD3 Document detection 3
41-3
PD4 Document detection 4
PD5 Document detection 5 Purpose : Operation test/Check
PD6 Document detection 6 Function (Purpose) : Used to display the document sensor
PD7 Document detection 7 detection level (A/D) in real time and to dis-
play the threshold value adjusted with SIM
41-2 in [ ] beside the sensor name.
0
Section : Other
TEST SIMULATION NO.41㧙01 CLOSE
Item : Operation
PD SENSOR CHECK
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3 Operation/Procedure
PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 1) When the machine enters Simulation 41-03, the following
screen is displayed.
* ON/OFF detection of the OCSW sensor and the A/D value
1/1 check of each PD sensor are performed in real time.
1/1
<Display content>
Display Content Range
41-2 OCSW Original cover SW 0 – 1 ("1": Close)
PD1 Document detection 1 0 – 255
Purpose : Operation test/Check
PD2 Document detection 2 0 – 255
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the detection level of the PD3 Document detection 3 0 – 255
document size sensor. PD4 Document detection 4 0 – 255
Section : Other PD5 Document detection 5 0 – 255
Item : Operation PD6 Document detection 6 0 – 255
PD7 Document detection 7 0 – 255
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 41-02, the following * In an actual control, the A/D value is sent by polling at a regular
screen is displayed. interval from the SCU or the controller.
Press [EXECUTE] button without a document on OC.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the sensor level setting 0
without document is performed. TEST SIMULATION NO.41̆03 CLOSE

2) The sensor level setting without document is completed. PD SENSOR DISPLAY

Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on OC and press [EXECUTE] button. OCSW : 1   PD5[㪁㪁㪁] : 㪁㪁㪁㩷

The sensor level setting with document detection is performed. PD1[㪁㪁㪁] : 㪁㪁㪁㩷   PD6[㪁㪁㪁] : 㪁㪁㪁㩷
  PD7[㪁㪁㪁]
3) After completion of sensor level setting with document, the PD2[㪁㪁㪁] : 㪁㪁㪁㩷 : 㪁㪁㪁㩷

message is displayed to show the adjustment has been suc- PD3[㪁㪁㪁] : 㪁㪁㪁㩷
cessfully completed. (In case of an error, the error message is PD4[㪁㪁㪁] : 㪁㪁㪁㩷 
1/1
displayed with the failed sensor name.)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 44

 Default value
Set
43 Item Display Content
range
Group Group
A *1 B *2
Q HL_LM OHP OHP-TH_LM set 30 to 145 145
43-1 PAPER value 200
R HL_US OHP OHP-TH_US set 70 to 170 170
Purpose : Setting
PAPER value 230
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the fusing temperature in each S HL_UM ENV Envelope TH_UM 70 to 180 180
operation mode. PAPER set value 230
Section : Fusing T HL_LM ENV Envelope TH_LM 30 to 145 145
Item : Operation PAPER set value 200
U HL_US ENV Envelope TH_US 70 to 180 180
Operation/Procedure PAPER set value 230
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. V HL_UM E- TH_UM set value 30 to 145 142
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- STAR when preheating 200
played in the setting area. W TH_US E- TH_US set value 30 to 130 130
STAR when preheating 200
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and X PRE-JOB TH_UM set value 30 to 160 160
item is shifted. when resetting from 200
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the preheating
operation is invalid.
*1: Japan, China, AB_B
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
*2: U.S.A, Canada, Europe, U.K, Australia, Inch, AB_A
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main
operation is invalid. TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. TH_US Fusing upper thermister sub
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
the current set values is saved in EEPROM and RAM. 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.43㧙01 CLOSE
<Fusing temperature setting range and default values>
FUSER TEMP SETUP FOR PAPER
Default value A㧦180 㧧 HL_UM READY
Set
Item Display Content Group Group A: 180 B㧦105 㧧 HL_LM READY
range
A *1 B *2 C㧦160 㧧 HL_US READY
㨇 70㨪230㨉
A HL_UM READY TH_UM set value in 70 to 175 180 D㧦175 㧧 HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW

READY standby 230

B HL_LM READY TH_LM set value in 30 to 105 105 OK
READY standby 200
C HL_US READY TH_US set value in 70 to 155 160
READY standby 230 43-4
D HL_UM PLAIN BW normal paper 70 to 170 175 Purpose : Setting
PAPER BW TH_UM set value 230
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the fusing temperature in each
E HL_LM PLAIN BW normal paper 30 to 130 130
PAPER BW TH_LM set value 200 operation mode. (Continued from 43-01.)
F HL_US PLAIN BW normal paper 70 to 180 180 Section : Fusing
PAPER BW TH_US set value 230 Item : Operation
G HL_UM PLAIN COLOR normal 70 to 170 175
Operation/Procedure
PAPER CL paper TH_UM set 230
value 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
H HL_LM PLAIN COLOR normal 30 to 130 130 The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
PAPER CL paper TH_LM set 200 played in the setting area.
value
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
I HL_US PLAIN COLOR normal 70 to 180 180
PAPER CL paper TH_US set 230
item is shifted.
value If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
J WARMUP Fusing paper front 30 to 145 145 operation is invalid.
FUMON rotation start 200 If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
HL_UM T TH_UM set value
item is shifted.
K WARMUP Fusing paper front 30 to 75 75
FUMOFF rotation start 200 If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
HL_LM T TH_LM set value operation is invalid.
L WARM UP WARM UP 30 to 76 76 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
END TIME complete time 255 * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
M HL_UM HEAVY Heavy paper 70 to 170 170
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
PAPER TH_UM set value 230
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
N HL_LM HEAVY Heavy paper 30 to 140 140
PAPER TH_LM set value 200 When setting is completed, [OK] button returns to the normal
O HL_US HEAVY Heavy paper 70 to 175 175 display.
PAPER TH_US set value 230 * When [n], [p], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current
P HL_UM OHP OHP-TH_UM set 70 to 170 170 set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
PAPER value 230

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 45

<Fusing temperature setting range and default values> If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Default value
Set If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
Item Display Content Group Group
range
A *1 B *2 operation is invalid.
A HL_UM PLAIN BW plain paper 70 to 230 170 175 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
PAPER BW duplex TH_UM
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
DUP set value
B HL_LM PLAIN BW plain paper 30 to 200 100 100 4) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
PAPER BW duplex TH_LM saved to EEPROM and RAM.
DUP set value * When [n], [p], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the cur-
C HL_US PLAIN BW plain paper 70 to 230 175 180 rent set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
PAPER BW duplex TH_US
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
DUP set value
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
D PLAIN PAPER BW plain paper 0 to 60 1 1
negative setting due to negative correction.
BW DUP APP duplex applicable
CNT number of sheets • Correction value: (–49 to +49) Input value: Actually entered value
E HL_UM PLAIN COLOR plain 70 to 230 170 175 (1 to 99)
PAPER CL paper duplex
DUP TH_UM set value Correction value –49 –25 –5 0 +5 +25 +49
F HL_LM PLAIN COLOR plain 30 to 200 100 100 Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
PAPER CL paper duplex
DUP TH_LM set value <List of setting parameters>
G HL_US PLAIN COLOR plain 70 to 230 175 180 Set Default
PAPER CL paper duplex Item Display item Item content
range value
DUP TH_US set value A HL_UM READY Correction value for 1 to 99 55
H PLAIN PAPER COLOR plain 0 to 60 1 1 LL TH_UM set value in Ready
CL DUP APP paper duplex standby under LL
CNT applicable environment
number of sheets B HL_LM READY Correction value for TH_LM 1 to 99 55
LL set value in Ready standby
*1: Japan, China, AB-B under LL environment
*2: U.S.A, Canada, Europe, U.K, Australia, Inch, AB_A C HL_US READY Correction value for TH_US 1 to 99 55
LL set value in Ready standby
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main under LL environment
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main D HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 55
TH_US Fusing upper thermister sub BW LL plain paper TH_UM set
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main value under LL
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main environment
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub E HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 55
BW LL plain paper TH_LM set
value under LL
0 environment
TEST SIMULATION NO.43-04 CLOSE F HL_US PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 55
BW LL plain paper TH_US set
FUSER TEMP SETUP2 FOR PAPER
value under LL
A : 170 㧧 HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
environment
A: 170 B : 100 㧧 HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
G HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for 1 to 99 55
C : 175 㧧 HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
㨇 70㨪230㨉 CL LL COLOR plain paper
D: 1 㧧 PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT
TH_UM set value under LL
environment
OK H HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for 1 to 99 55
CL LL COLOR plain paper TH_LM
set value under LL
environment
43-20
I HL_US PLAIN Correction value for 1 to 99 55
Purpose : Setting CL LL COLOR plain paper TH_US
Function (Purpose) : Used to correct the environments of low set value under LL
environment
temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the
J WARMUP Correction value for fusing 1 to 99 60
fusing temperature setting 1 for each paper
FUMON motor front rotation start
(SIM 43-01).
HL_UM T LL TH_UM set value under LL
Section : Fusing environment
Item : Operation K WARMUP Correction value for fusing 1 to 99 55
FUMOFF motor front rotation start
Operation/Procedure
HL_LM T LL TH_LM set value under LL
1) When the machine enters Simulation 43-20, the screen on the environment
right is displayed. (The current set value is displayed.) L WARMUP END Correction value for 1 to 99 80
2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. TIME LL WARMUP complete time
under LL environment
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
M HL_UM HEAVY Correction value for heavy 1 to 99 60
played on the set setting area. LL paper TH_UM set value
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and under LL environment
item is shifted. N HL_LM HEAVY Correction value for heavy 1 to 99 60
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the LL paper TH_LM set value
under LL environment
operation is invalid.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 46

 Set Default The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
Item Display item Item content played on the set setting area.
range value
O HL_US HEAVY Correction value for heavy 1 to 99 60 * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
LL paper TH_US set value item is shifted.
under LL environment
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
P HL_UMOHP LL Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 60
operation is invalid.
TH_UM set value under LL
environment If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
Q HL_LM OHP LL Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 60 item is shifted.
TH_LM set value under LL If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
environment operation is invalid.
R HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 60
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
TH_US set value under LL
environment * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
S HL_UM Correction value for 1 to 99 60 4) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
ENVELOPE LL ENVELOPE TH_UM set saved to EEPROM and RAM.
value under LL
* When [n], [p], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current
environment
set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
T HL_LM Correction value for 1 to 99 60
ENVELOPE LL ENVELOPE TH_LM set * Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
value under LL because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
environment negative setting due to negative correction.
U HL_US Correction value for 1 to 99 60 • Set value: Value to be set (–49 to +49), Input value: Actual input
ENVELOPE LL ENVELOPE TH_US set
(1 to 99)
value under LL
environment
Set value –49 –25 –5 0 +5 +25 +49
V HL_UM E-STAR Correction value for 1 to 99 60
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
LL preheating TH_UM set
value under LL <List of setting parameters>
environment
W HL_US E-STAR Correction value for 1 to 99 60 Set Default
Item Item display Content of item
LL preheating TH_US set range value
value under LL A HL_UM READY Correction value for 1 to 99 45
environment HH TH_UM set value in
X PRE-JOB LL Correction value for 1 to 99 60 READY standby under
TH_UM set value when HH environment
resetting from preheating B HL_LM READY Correction value for 1 to 99 45
under LL environment HH TH_LM set value in
READY standby under
<Code descriptions in the above list> HH environment
C HL_US READY Correction value for 1 to 99 45
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main HH TH_US set value in
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main READY standby under
TH_US Fusing upper thermister sub HH environment
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main D HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 45
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main BW HH plain paper TH_UM set
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub value under HH
environment
E HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 45
0 BW HH plain paper TH_LM set
SIMULATION NO.43-20 CLOSE value under HH
TEST
environment
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (LL)
F HL_US PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 45
A : 55 ; HL_UM READY LL
BW HH plain paper TH_US set
A: 55 B : 55 ; HL_LM READY LL
value under HH
㨇  1㨪  99㨉
C : 55 ; HL_US READY LL environment
D : 55 ; HL_UM PLAIN BW LL G HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for 1 to 99 45
CL HH COLOR plain paper
OK TH_UM set value under
HH environment
H HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for 1 to 99 45
CL HH COLOR plain paper
43-21
TH_LM set value under
Purpose : Setting HH environment
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform correction of high temper- I HL_US PLAIN Correction value for 1 to 99 45
ature and high humidity (H/H) environment CL HH COLOR plain paper
TH_US set value under
for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM
HH environment
43-01) for each paper.
J WARMUP Correction value for 1 to 99 50
Section : Fusing FUMON HL_UM fusing motor front rotation
Item : Operation T HH start TH_UM set value
under HH environment
Operation/Procedure
K WARMUP Correction value for 1 to 99 50
1) When the machine enters SIM 43-21, the following screen is FUMOFF HL_LM fusing motor front rotation
displayed. (The current set value is displayed.) T HH end TH_UM set value
2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. under HH environment

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 47

 Set Default
Item Item display Content of item 43-22
range value
L WARMUP END Correction value for 1 to 99 50 Purpose : Setting
TIME HH WARMUP end time under Function (Purpose) : Used to perform L/L (low temperature, low
HH environment humidity) correction for the fusing tempera-
M HL_UM HEAVY Correction value for 1 to 99 50 ture setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
HH heavy paper TH_UM set
value under HH Section : Fusing
environment Item : Operation
N HL_LM HEAVY Correction value for 1 to 99 50 Operation/Procedure
HH heavy paper TH_LM set
value under HH 1) When the machine enters Simulation 43-22, the following
environment screen is displayed. (The current set value is displayed.)
O HL_US HEAVY Correction value for 1 to 99 50 2) Select the set item with [n] and [n] buttons.
HH heavy paper TH_US set
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
value under HH
played in the setting area.
environment
P HL_UM OHP HH Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 50 * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
TH_UM set value under item is shifted.
HH environment If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
Q HL_LM OHP HH Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 50 operation is invalid.
TH_LM set value under
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
HH environment
item is shifted.
R HL_US OHP HH Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 50
TH_US set value under If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
HH environment operation is invalid.
S HL_UM Correction value for 1 to 99 50 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
ENVELOPE HH ENVELOPE TH_UM set
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
value under HH
environment 4) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
T HL_LM Correction value for 1 to 99 50 saved to EEPROM and RAM.
ENVELOPE HH ENVELOPE TH_LM set * When [n], [n], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current
value under HH set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
environment
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
U HL_US Correction value for 1 to 99 50
ENVELOPE HH ENVELOPE TH_US set because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
value under HH negative setting due to negative correction.
environment • Set value: Value to be set (–49 to +49)
V E-STAR HH Correction value for 1 to 99 50 Input value: Actual input value (1 to 99)
preheating TH_UM set
value under HH Set value –49 –25 –5 0 +5 +25 +49
environment
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
W HL_US E-STAR Correction value for 50
HH preheating TH_US set <List of setting parameters>
value under HH
environment Set Default
Item Display item Item content
X PRE-JOB HH Correction value for 1 to 99 50 range value
TH_UM set value when A HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for upper 1 to 99 60
resetting from preheating BW DUP LL TH_UM BW plain paper
under HH environment duplex under LL
environment
* WARMUP END TIME HH o 1s change by 1 count B HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for lower 1 to 99 60
The other correction values o 1qC change by 1 count BW DUP LL TH_LM BW plain paper
duplex under LL
<Code descriptions in the above list>
environment
C HL_US PLAIN Correction value for upper 1 to 99 60
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main
BW DUP LL TH_US BW plain paper
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main
duplex under LL
TH_US Fusing upper thermister sub environment
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main D PLAIN BW DUP Correction value for BW 1 to 99 50
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main APP CNT LL plain paper duplex
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub applicable number of
sheets under LL
environment
0 E HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for upper 1 to 99 60
TEST SIMULATION NO.43-21 CLOSE CL DUP LL TH_UM COLOR plain
paper duplex under LL
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (HH)
A : 45 㧧 HL_UM READY HH
environment
A: 45 B  45 㧧 HL_LM READY HH
F HL_LM PLAIN CL Correction value for upper 1 to 99 60
DUP LL TH_LM COLOR plain
C  45 㧧 HL_US READY HH
[ 1 㨪 99] paper duplex under LL
㧧 HL_UM PLAIN BW HH
D  45
environment
G HL_US PLAIN CL Correction value for upper 1 to 99 60
OK
DUP LL TH_US COLOR plain
paper duplex under LL
environment

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 48

 Set Default <List of setting parameters>
Item Display item Item content
range value Set Default
H PLAIN CL DUP Correction value for 1 to 99 50 Item Display item Item content
range value
APP CNT LL COLOR plain paper A HL_UM PLAIN BW Correction value for 1 to 99 45
duplex applicable number DUP HH TH_UM BW plain paper
of sheets under LL duplex under HH
environment environment
* PLAIN BW DUPCNT LL, PLAIN CL DUPCNT LL, HEAVY BW B HL_LM PLAIN BW Correction value for 1 to 99 50
DUP HH TH_LM BW plain paper
DUP APCNT LL, HEAVY CL DUP APCNT LL o 1s change by 1
duplex under HH
count
environment
The other correction values o 1qC change by 1 count C HL_US PLAIN BW Correction value for 1 to 99 45
<Code descriptions in the above list> DUP HH TH_US BW plain paper
duplex under HH
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main environment
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main D PLAIN BW DUP Correction value for 1 to 99 50
TH_US Fusing upper thermister sub APP CNT HH BW plain paper duplex
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main applicable number of
sheets under HH
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
environment
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
E HL_UM PLAIN CL Correction value for 1 to 99 45
DUP HH TH_UM COLOR plain
paper duplex under HH
0 environment
TEST CLOSE
F HL_LM PLAIN CL Correction value for 1 to 99 50
FUSSIMULATION NO.43-22 DUP HH TH_LM COLOR plain
A : 60 㧧 HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP paper duplex under HH
A: 60 B : 60 㧧 HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP environment
C : 60 㧧 HL_US PLAIN BW DUP G HL_US PLAIN CL Correction value for 1 to 99 45
㨇 1 㨪 99㨉
D : 50 㧧 PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL
DUP HH TH_US COLOR plain
paper duplex under HH
OK environment
H PLAIN CL DUP APP Correction value for 1 to 99 50
CNT HH COLOR plain paper
43-23 duplex applicable
number of sheets under
Purpose : Setting HH environment
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform H/H (high temperature,
high humidity) correction for the fusing tem- * PLAIN BW DUPCNT HH, PLAIN CL DUPCNT HH, HEABY BW
perature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each DUP APCNT HH, HEABY CL DUP APCNT HH o 1s change by
paper. 1 count
Section : Fusing The other correction values o 1qC change by 1 count
Item : Operation <Code descriptions in the above list>
Operation/Procedure TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main
1) When the machine enters Simulation 43-23, the following TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main
screen is displayed. (The current set value is displayed.) TH_US Fusing upper thermister sub
2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted. 0
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the TEST SIMULATION NO.43-23 CLOSE

operation is invalid. FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (HH:DUP)

If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and A : 45  HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH

item is shifted. A: 45 B : 50  HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH

C : 45  HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH

If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the 㨇 1 㨪 99㨉
 PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH
operation is invalid. D : 50

3) Enter the set value with 10-key. OK

* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
4) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
• Set value: Value to be set (–49 to +49)
Input value: Actual input value (1 to 99)

Set value –49 –25 –5 0 +5 +25 +49

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 49

 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
43-24 * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Purpose : Setting 3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
Function (Purpose) : Used to enter the correction values for SIM pressed, the entered value is set.
43-1 and SIM 43-4 temperature correc- * Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
tions. because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
Section : Fusing negative setting due to negative correction.
Item : Operation • Set value: Value to be set (–49 to +49)
Operation/Procedure Input value: Actual input value (1 to 99)

1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. Set value –49 –25 –5 0 +5 +25 +49
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis- Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
played on the set setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.

<Set range and default value of each setup>

Set Default
Item Display items Item descriptions
range value
A NN_120_ WUP_HL_UM & HL_US WARMUP end temperature 120qC or below when turning Common to items 1 to 99 50
correction value on the power under NN HL_UM, HL_US
B NN_120_WUP_HL_LM environment Item HL_LM 1 to 99 50
C LL_120_WUP_HL_UM & HL_US 120qC or below when turning Common to items 1 to 99 50
on the power under LL HL_UM, HL_US
D LL_120_WUP_HL_LM environment Item HL_LM 1 to 99 50
E HH_120_WUP_HL_UM & HL_US 120qC or below when turning Common to items 1 to 99 50
on the power under HH HL_UM, HL_US
F HH_120_WUP_HL_LM environment Item HL_LM 1 to 99 50
G ON_120_WUP_HL_UM Temperature correction value 120qC or below when turning Item HL_UM 1 to 99 40
H ON 120 WUP HL_US immediately after completion of on the power Item HL_US 1 to 99 55
warm-up and during continuation
of temperature correction
I NN_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM & HL_US Fusing temperature correction 120qC or below when turning Common to items 1 to 99 55
value on the power under NN HL_UM, HL_US
J NN_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM environment Item HL_LM 1 to 99 50
K LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM & HL_US 120qC or below when turning Common to items 1 to 99 60
on the power under LL HL_UM, HL_US
L LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM environment Item HL_LM 1 to 99 50
M HH_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM & HL_US 120qC or below when turning Common to items 1 to 99 50
on the power under HH HL_UM, HL_US
N HH_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM environment Item HL_LM 1 to 99 50
O NN_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count Under NN environment 1 to 60 5
P LL_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT Under LL environment 1 to 60 10
Q HH_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT Under HH environment 1 to 60 5
R COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool-down time Heavy paper 1 to 60 15
S COOL_DOWN_OHP OHP 1 to 60 30
T COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP Envelope 1 to 60 40
U WUP DUP TIME Temperature correction - 0 to 255 90
continuation time immediately
after completion of warm-up

* On adjustment values
Each temperature correction value o Temperature 1qC change 0
by 1 count TEST SIMULATION NO.43-24 CLOSE

Each paper exit count o 1 sheet by 1 count FUSER TEMP RESET

Each cool-down time o 1s change by 1 count

A : 50  NN_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US

A: 50 B : 50  NN_120_WUP_HL_LM
<Code descriptions of the above list> C : 50  LL_120_WUP_HL_UM㧒HL_US
㨇 1㨪 99 㨉
D : 50  LL_120_WUP_HL_LM
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister MAIN center
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister MAIN OK
TH_US Fusing upper thermister SUB edge
HL_UM Heater lamp upper MAIN
HL_LM Heater lamp lower MAIN
HL_US Heater lamp upper SUB

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 50

 Default
Display Content Set range
44 AR_AUTO Auto resist adjustment YES/ Normal (Inhibit:
value
Allow
NO setting 1: NO)
44-1 AR_ERROR Error check YES/NO setting Highlighted Allow
during auto resist adjustment (Allow: 0: YES)
Purpose : Setting
DM_PHASE Drum phase alignment YES/ Allow
Function (Purpose) : Used to set whether the correction func- NO setting
tions of the image forming (process) sec- SENSITIVITY Toner density correction Inhibit
tion are enabled or not. YES/NO setting
Section : — PRT_HT Half tone process control Allow
printer correction feedback
Item : —
Enable/Disable setting
Operation/Procedure
*1: The transfer efficiency fluctuation is corrected with temperature
1) When the machine enters Simulation 44-01, the currently set
and humidity (absolute moisture). YES/NO setting. Transfer
button is highlighted.
high output voltage correction.
Set the item to be set to the normal display.
(Two or more items can be selected.) When an item is 0
selected, its button is highlighted. When the highlighted button TEST SIMULATION NO.44-01 CLOSE
is pressed again, it returns to the normal display. MODE SETTING
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the current set value is HV HT TC MD VG
saved to EEPROM and RAM. After completion of setting, MD LD MD EV MD DL MD DL EV
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
TN_HUM TN_AREA TN_LIFE TN_COV
<Set items> TN_PROCON TN_ENV TN_DRIP TN_SPEND

Default EXECUTE 1/2

Display Content Set range
value
HV Normal operation high- Normal Allow
density process control YES/ (Inhibit: 1: NO) 44-2
NO setting Highlighted
Purpose : Adjustment
HT Normal operation half-tone (Allow: 0: YES) Allow
process control YES/NO Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the light quantity adjust-
setting ment of the process control sensor and the
TC Transfer output correction Allow registration sensor (two for resist are
YES/NO setting *1 adjusted simultaneously) and the surface
MD VG Membrane decrease grid Allow scan.
voltage correction YES/NO Section : Process
setting
Item : Operation
MD LD Membrane decrease laser Inhibit
power voltage correction Operation/Procedure
YES/NO setting
1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
MD EV Membrane decrease Allow
the drum motors are driven to start the adjustments of the pro-
environment grid voltage
cess control sensor and the registration sensor.
correction YES/NO setting
MD DL Membrane decrease Allow * After completion of the adjustments of the process control
discharge light quantity sensor and the registration sensor, the drum motors are
correction YES/NO setting stopped and the set contents are displayed. The necessary
MD DL EV Membrane decrease Inhibit data are saved to EEPROM.
environment discharge light [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
quantity correction YES/NO
setting * When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during adjustment of
TN_HUM Toner density humidity Allow the process control sensor and the registration sensor, the
correction YES/NO setting monitor is terminated and the drum motor is stopped. [ECE-
TN_AREA Toner density area correction Allow CUTE] button returns to the original state.
YES/NO setting Data saving is not performed, but the result at that time is
TN_LIFE Toner density life correction Allow displayed.
YES/NO setting
* When an error occurs in the adjustment, "ERROR" is dis-
TN_COV Toner density print rate Allow
played in the value display section at the right of the error
correction YES/NO setting
item, and the drum motor is stopped. Data saving to
TN_PROCO Toner density process control Allow
EEPROM is not performed at all and the operation is termi-
N correction YES/NO setting
nated. [EXECUTE] button returns to the original state.
TN_ENV Toner density environment Allow
correction YES/NO setting * When there is a page over [n], the display becomes active
TN_DRIP Toner density correction, Allow and shifts up to another page. When there is no page over
unconditional supply YES/ [n], the display grays out and the operation is disabled.
NO setting * When there is a page under [p], the display becomes active
TN_SPEND Toner compulsory Allow and shifts down to another page. When there is nor page
consumption mode YES/NO
under [p], the display grays out and the operation is dis-
setting
abled.
PHT 1Pixel half-tone process Inhibit
control correction YES/NO
setting

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 51

<Operation content>
1) Adjust so that the LED light emitting quantity of BK/CL is the
target value r 2.
* Target value
BK: Item B of SIM 44-04
CL: Item A of SIM 44-13
2) After completion of the adjustment, check the belt surface con-
dition with the BK sensor.

<Set range and default value of each fusing temperature setting>

Classification Item Display item Content Set range Default value Save
PROCON A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 to 255 21 YES
B PCS_K LED ADJ Black sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 to 255 21 YES
C PCS_CL DARK Color dark voltage 0 to 255 0 NO
D PCS_K DARK Black dark voltage 0 to 255 0 NO
E PCS_K GRND Belt surface when item B adjustment is completed. 0 to 255 0 NO
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt surface input max. value 0 to 255 0 NO
G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value 0 to 255 0 NO
H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item E – Item F) 0 to 255 0 NO
REGIST I REG_F LED ADJ Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F 1 to 255 56 YES
J REG_R LED ADJ Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R 1 to 255 56 YES
K REG_F DARK Registration sensor dark voltage F 0 to 255 0 NO
L REG_R DARK Registration sensor dark voltage R 0 to 255 0 NO
M REG_F GRND Belt surface when completion of Item I adjustment 0 to 255 0 NO
N REG_R GRND Belt surface when completion of Item J adjustment 0 to 256 0 NO
O REG_F BELT MAX Belt surface input max. value (Front side) 0 to 255 0 NO
P REG_F BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value (Front side) 0 to 255 0 NO
Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item O – Item P) 0 to 255 0 NO
R REG_R BELT MAX Belt surface input max. value (Rear side) 0 to 255 0 NO
S REG_R BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value (Rear side) 0 to 255 0 NO
T REG_R BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item R – Item S) 0 to 255 0 NO
U REG_F PATCH (K) Patch light receiving potential F (K) 0 to 255 0 YES
V REG_F PATCH (C) Patch light receiving potential F (C) 0 to 255 0 YES
REGIST W REG_F PATCH (M) Patch light receiving potential F (M) 0 to 255 0 YES
X REG_F PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving potential F (Y) 0 to 255 0 YES
Y REG_R PATCH (K) Patch light receiving potential R (K) 0 to 255 0 YES
Z REG_R PATCH (C) Patch light receiving potential R (C) 0 to 255 0 YES
AA REG_R PATCH (M) Patch light receiving potential R (M) 0 to 255 0 YES
AB REG_R PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving potential R (Y) 0 to 255 0 YES

<List of errors>
Error name
Black sensor
adjustment error
Color sensor
adjustment error
Surface read error
Registration sensor F
adjustment error
Registration sensor R
adjustment error
Registration surface F
read error
Registration surface R
read error
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-02
PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT
44-4
Error content Purpose : Setting
o PCS_K LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the correction operation of
not reached
the image forming section and to set the
o PCS_CL LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times,
target not reached
process control sensor adjustment condi-
tions.
o PCS_K GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
range of effective difference between upper and Section : Process
lower values Item : Operation
o REG_F LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
Operation/Procedure
not reached
o REG_R LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target NOTE: Unless a special change is required, set the set values to
not reached the default values.
o REG_F GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
range of effective difference between upper and
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
lower values
played in the setting area.
o REG_R GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
range of effective difference between upper and * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
lower values item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
0 operation is invalid.
CLOSE If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.

PCS_CL LED ADJ : 21 : 0

If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
PCS_K GRND
operation is invalid.
PCS_K LED ADJ : 21 PCS_K BELT MAX : 0
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
PCS_CL DARK : 0 PCS_K BELT MIN : 0
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
PCS_K DARK : 0 PCS_K BELT DIF : 0
EXECUTE When setting is completed, [OK] button returns to the normal
1/4
display.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 52

3) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
EEPROM and RAM. displayed and the execution result is saved to EEPROM and
* When [n], [p], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the cur- RAM.
rent set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed and the details of
<Set range and default value of each setup> the error are displayed below.
* When the high-density process control is interrupted by an
Set Default external factor (pressing [EXECUTE] button), the forcible
Item Display content
range value interruption screen is displayed and the drum motors are
A PCS_CL TARGET Color sensor target set 1 to 255 108 stopped. [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
value
* The result of the high-density process control is displayed
B PCS_K TARGET Black sensor target set 1 to 255 155
value with the following simulations:
C LED_CL OUTPUT Color sensor light 1 to 255 21 SIM.44-09 (Process control result display (High density cor-
emitting quantity set rection))
value SIM.44-12 (Process control result display (Half tone correc-
D LED_K OUTPUT Black sensor light 1 to 255 21 tion))
emitting quantity set
value <Result display and content description>
E PCS ADJSTMENT Sensor adjustment 1 to 255 2 Result display Content description
LIMIT target limit value
COMPLETE Normal completion
F BELT GROUND Belt 1 lap, effective 1 to 255 255
ERROR Abnormal completion
DIF difference between
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
upper and lower values
G BIAS_CL Bias (for color) 0 to 255 0
<Detailed error display and content description>
STANDARD DIF reference calculating
difference Detailed error display Content description
H BIAS_BK Bias (for black) 0 to 255 0 CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment error (*)
STANDARD DIF reference calculating BK_ SEN _ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment error (*)
difference K_HV_ERR K high density process control error
I BIAS PATCH Patch bias output 1 to 255 60 C_ HV_ERR C high density process control error
INTERVAL interval M_ HV_ERR M high density process control error
J Y_PAT TARGET Patch density standard 1 to 255 123 Y_ HV _ERR Y high density process control error
ID value (YELLOW)
TIMEOUT_ERR Timeout
K M_PAT TARGET Patch density standard 1 to 255 140
ID value (MAGENTA) * (*) Same as the error in SIM 44-02.
L C_PAT TARGET Patch density standard 1 to 255 132
ID value (CYAN)
0
M K_PAT TARGET Patch density standard 1 to 255 5 SIMULATION NO.44̆06 CLOSE
TEST
ID value (BLACK)
PROCON COMPULSORY EXECUTION
N HV BK_GROUND Patch position surface 1 to 255 29
PRESS[EXECUTE] TO START
LIMIT light receiving effective
range

0 EXECUTE

TEST SIMULATION NO.44-04 CLOSE

PROCON INITIAL DENSITY SETUP

A : 108 㧧 PCS_C TARGET
44-9
A: 108 B : 155 㧧 PCS_K TARGET

C : 21 㧧 LED_C OUTPUT Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/

㨇 1㨪 255 㨉
D : 21 㧧 LED_K OUTPUT
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the data related to the result
OK
of the image forming section correction
(high density process correction). (Cor-
rected main charger grid voltage in each
44-6
print mode, developing bias voltage, etc.)
Purpose : Operation test/Check (This simulation is used to check whether
Function (Purpose) : Used to forcibly execute the correction in the correction is normally executed or not.)
the image process section (high-density Section : Process
process correction) (process correction). Item : Data (Machine condition)
Section : Process Operation/Procedure
Item : Operation
1) Change the page with [n] [p] buttons.
Operation/Procedure
* If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
1) When the machine enters SIM 44-06, the screen shown on the page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
right is displayed. grays out and the operation is invalid.
2) When [EXCECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
the drum motors are driven to rotate. The high-density process the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
control is started. display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
3) While the high-density process control is executed, "NOW 2) Select a mode with the following buttons:
EXECUTING..." is displayed. [CPY/PRN] button: Display of each process control mode in
4) After completion of the high-density process control, the drum the copier/printer.
motors are stopped and [EXECUTE] button returns to the nor-
mal display.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 53

 [OTHER] button: Display of environment area, membrane
decrease correction steps and process control execution
counter, and model type.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.

<Display item and content description>

Default
Mode Page number Display item (*: correction value) Content description Display range
value
CPY/PRN 1/2 P (PROCON) Left BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control GB/DV GB: 230 to 850 GB: 630
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** data (KCMY) DV: 0 to 700 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N (M) Right BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (middle speed GB: 230 to 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** display) GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 to 700 DV: 430
(MIDDLE)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
2/2 N (L) (NORMAL BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (low speed GB: 230 to 850 GB: 600
(LOW)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** display) GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 to 700 DV: 400
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
OTHER 1/10 TN/TC Left TN HUD AREA Toner control display humidity area 1 to 14 9
TN HUD DATA Toner control display humidity AD 0 to 1023 0
value
TC TMP AREA Transfer display temperature area 1 to 9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer display temperature AD value 0 to 1023 0
Right TC HUD AREA Transfer display humidity area 1 to 9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer display humidity AD value 0 to 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease display humidity 1 to 14 9
area
MD HUD DATA membrane decrease display humidity 0 to 1023 0
AD value
2/10 DRUM Left MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction 0 to 4 0
MD C STEP step display (KCMY)
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling 0 to 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNTER distance area
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
3/10 VG MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** H*** Drum membrane decrease grid voltage 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
4/10 LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** H*** Drum membrane decrease laser power 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** voltage correction (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
5/10 HV MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** H*** High density membrane decrease 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** environment GB correction display
MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** (KCMY)
MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
6/10 CP MD K REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** H*** Drum membrane decrease 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** environment grid voltage correction
MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** display (KCMY)
MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
7/10 DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease discharge 0 to 100 50
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** light quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
8/10 DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M*** Drum membrane decrease –100 to 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M*** environment discharge light quantity
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M*** correction (%)
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 54

 Default
Mode Page number Display item (*: correction value) Content description Display range
value
OTHER 9/10 CRUM Left DESTINATION Machine side control CRUM Refer to CRUM
destination <CRUM information
destination
code list>.
MODEL TYPE Machine model type 0 to 1 0
Right CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination Refer to CRUM
CRUM DEST_C <CRUM information
CRUM DEST_M destination
CRUM DEST_Y code list>.
10/10 CNT Left PROCON COUNT HV Number of execution of high density 0 to 99999999 0
process control
PROCON COUNT HT Number of execution of half tone 0 to 99999999 0
process control

<CRUM destination code list> <Display item and content description>

Display code No. Destination Control specification Content Display Default
Item Display item
01 A AR control description range value
02 B EX Japan AR control TARGET CARB DATA Calibration plate 1 to 255 108
03 C AR control (Page 1) sensor value
04 B Japan AR control SEAL ADJ Jig patch seal 1 to 255 108
05 E AR control DATA sensor value
ADK_SL (K) Developing –9.99 to 9.99 0
characteristics
0 gradient coefficient
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-09 CLOSE ADK_INT (K) Developing –999.9 to 0
characteristics 999.9
PROCON DATA DISP (PROCON/NORMAL(M))
intercept
BLACK : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/430 BLACK : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/400
coefficient
CYAN : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/430 CYAN : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/400
ID(K) Sensor target 0.00 to 0.00
MAGENTA : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/430 MAGENTA : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/400 value 255.00
YELLOW : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/430 YELLOW : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/400 ID(CMY) Color sensor 0.00 to 0.00
CPY/PRN OTHER 1/2 target set value 255.00
PATCH N-1 Patch data nth 0 to 255 0
(Page 1 front patch
44-12 to 5) (n = 1 to 10)
N-2 Patch data nth 0 to 255 0
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ center patch
Check (Display/Print) (n = 1 to 10)
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the sampling toner image N-3 Patch data nth rear 0 to 255 0
patch density data in the image forming patch
section correction (high density process (n = 1 to 10)
correction). (This simulation is used to
* PATCH item: If the patch is converged to the target range in less
check whether the correction is normally
than 10 times of patch acquisition, "0" is displayed in the other
executed or not.)
display items.
Section : Process
* When [PATCH] button is pressed, the following page is dis-
Item : Data (Machine condition) played.
Operation/Procedure • n = 1 to 2 Page 1
1) Change the page with [n] [p] buttons. • n = 3 to 4 Page 2
* If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the • n = 5 to 6 Page 3
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display • n = 7 to 8 Page 4
grays out and the operation is invalid.
• n = 9 to 10 Page 5
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
0
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-12 CLOSE
2) Change the display with the following buttons:
PATCH/TARGET DATA DISPLAY
[TARGET] button: Display of each color target
CARB DATA : 108 TARGET(K) : 0.00
[PATCH] button: Display of patch sampling data SEAL ADJ DATA : 108 TARGET(C) : 0.00
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy ADK SL(K) : 0.00 TARGET(M) : 0.00
basic screen of simulation. ADK INT(K) : 0.0 TARGET(Y) : 0.00
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
TARGET PATCH 1/1
key.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 55

 <Display item and description>
44-13
Default
Display item Description Display range
Purpose : Adjustment value
Function (Purpose) : Color image density sensor adjustment TH_UM Fusing upper Temperature: Sensor
thermister main A/D 0 to 255 qC (r1qC) value
(Adjustment by the jig)
value (Temperature AD value: 0 to 1023
Section : Process qC/AD value)
Item : Operation TH_UM_AD1 Fusing upper Temperature: Sensor
Operation/Procedure thermistor main 0.0 to 255.0 qC value
compensation (r0.2qC)
1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted, and the sensor temperature AD value: 0 to 1023
color sensor adjustment is started by using the patch seal. (qC)
* After completion of the color sensor adjustment, [EXECUTE] AD value (AD value)
button returns to the normal display, and the set content is TH_UM_AD2 Fusing upper AD value: 0 to 1023 Sensor
thermistor main value
displayed. At that time, the necessary data are saved to
sensor AD value
EEPROM and RAM.
(AD value)
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the sensor TH_LM Fusing lower Temperature: Sensor
adjustment, the sensor adjustment is interrupted and [EXE- thermister main A/D 0 to 255 qC (r1qC) value
CUTE] button returns to the normal display. value (Temperature AD value: 0 to 1023
* In case of an adjustment error, "ERROR" is displayed in the qC/AD value)
value display section at the right of the error item. No data TH_US Fusing upper Temperature: Sensor
thermister sub A/D 0 to 255 qC (r1qC) value
are saved to EEPROM, and the operation is terminated.
value (Temperature AD value: 0 to 1023
[EXECUTE] button returns to the original state.
qC/AD value)
<Operation contents> TEMPRATURE Temperature Temperature: –40.0 to Sensor
1) The target value of CL is set and the LED emitting level is thermister 60.0qC (r0.1qC) value
adjusted, and the operation is terminated. (Temperature/AD AD value: 0 to 1023
value)
<Display item and content description> HUMIDITY Humidity sensor Humidity: Sensor
Set Default (Humidity/AD value) 5.0 to 90.0% (r0.1%) value
Item Display item Description Writing AD value: 0 to 1023
range value
A PCS_CL Calibration plate 1 to 255 108 YES TH1_LSU Thermister 1 A/D Humidity: Sensor
CARB OUT sensor value value (Temperature 5.0 to 60.0 qC value
B PCS_CL Color dark voltage 0 to 255 0 NO qC/AD value) (r0.1qC)
DARK AD value: 0 to 255
C PCS_CL LED Color sensor light 1 to 255 21 YES
* The above display range is converted into hexadecimal number
ADJ emitting quantity
adjustment value
to display the AD value.
* When the door open, the power of the sensor would be down, so
that the sensor display is treated as outside the range.
0 * "qC" is displayed as "deg" on the panel because of the display
TEST SIMULATION NO.44̆13 CLOSE fonts.
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT

PCS  CL CARB OUT: 108 0

TEST SIMULATION NO.44-14 CLOSE
PCS CL DARK :  0
SENSOR DATA DISPLAY MONITOR
PCS CL LED ADJ :  21 
TH_UM : 255deg / XXX

TH_UM_AD1 : 255.0deg / XXX
EXECUTE
1/1 TH_UM_AD2 : XXX

TH_LM : 255deg / XXX

44-14 TH_US : 255deg / XXX

1/2
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the output level of the fusing 44-16
temperature sensor, the machine tempera- Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
ture sensor, and the humidity sensor. Check (Display/Print)
Section : Process Function (Purpose) : Used to check data related to the toner
Item : Operation density correction result. (This simulation
Operation/Procedure allows to check that the correction is nor-
mally performed or not.)
1) The machine enters this simulation, the current data are dis-
played. Section : Process (Developing)
* If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the Item : Operation
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display Operation/Procedure
grays out and the operation is invalid. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 44-16, the screen on the
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and right is displayed.
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the Specify the color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. (In this example, [K]
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid. is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
* Data are revised every 5sec. * Only one color button can be selected. When a color button
* For the temperature and humidity only, data outside the range is selected, it is highlighted. (Black ([K]) is selected in the ini-
are displayed as "-". tial state.)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 56

 * Change the page with [p] or [n] key. <Display item and content description>
* If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the <Toner density> * Common to KCMY
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid. Set Default
Display item Item content
range value
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
TONER Current toner density sensor 1 to 255 129
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
DEN_LT(M) output value (final value) at
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid. middle speed
2) When [NEXT] button is pressed, data of another category are TONER Current toner density reference 128
displayed. DEN_ST(M) value (including all the correction
* When [NEXT] button is pressed on the last category data values) at middle speed
display, the data of the first category are displayed. TONER Current toner density sensor 129
DEN_LT(L) output value (final value) at low
* When [NEXT] button is pressed, the data of the next cate- speed
gory are displayed regardless of the display page. TONER Current toner density reference 128
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the DEN_ST(L) value (including all the correction
copy basic screen of simulation. values) at low speed
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
[BLACK] key.

<Details of toner density sensor reference value correction>

* Common to KCMY

Set Default
Display item Item content Content description
range value
AUTO DEVE (M) Automatic developer adjustment value (at Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at middle speed) 1 to 255 128
middle speed)
ALL(M) All correction reference value (at middle Correction reference value (at middle speed) used to calculate all the
speed) correction values for auto developer adjustment value
AUTO DEVE (L) Automatic developer adjustment value (at Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at low speed)
low speed)
ALL(L) All correction reference value (at low Correction reference value (at low speed) used to calculate all the
speed) correction values for auto developer adjustment value
AREA Area correction value Correction value for environment area –127 to 0
HUD Humidity correction value Correction value for humidity change 127
PRINT RATE Print rate correction value Correction value for document print rate
PROCON Process control correction value Correction value for high density process control result
LIFE Life correction value Correction value for developer life
SENSITIVITY Sensitivity correction value Correction for toner density sensor sensitivity 1 to 999 500

<Details of toner density sensor control voltage correction>

* Common to KCMY
Set Default
Display item Item content Content description
range value
AUTO DEVE VO(M) Automatic developer adjustment control Sensor control voltage value (at middle speed) after executing SIM 1 to 255 128
voltage (at middle speed) 25-02
ALL VO(M) All correction reference control voltage (at Control voltage reference value (at middle speed) used to calculate all
middle speed) the correction values for auto developer adjustment value
AUTO DEVE VO(L) Automatic developer adjustment control Sensor control voltage value (at low speed) after executing SIM 25-02
voltage (at low speed)
ALL VO(L) All correction reference control voltage (at Control voltage reference value (at low speed) used to calculate all
low speed) the correction values for auto developer adjustment value
AREA VO Area correction control voltage Control voltage correction value for environment area –127 to 0
HUD VO Humidity correction control voltage Control voltage correction value for humidity change 127
PRINT RATE VO Print rate correction control voltage Control voltage correction value for document print rate
PROCON VO Process control correction control voltage Control voltage correction value for high density process control result
LIFE VO Life correction control voltage Control voltage correction value for developer life
SENSITIVITY VO Sensitivity correction control voltage Control voltage correction value for toner density sensor sensitivity 1 to 999 500
ENV VO Environment correction control voltage Control voltage correction value under high temperature environment –127 to 0
127

* When the correction for the developer counter (life) or the humidity correction is inhibited (OFF) in SIM 44-01, the correction level is dis-
played as "0."
<Display of current humidity area and that in auto developer adjustment>
* Common to KCMY

Set Default
Display item Item content Content description
range value
AUTO DEVE AREA Auto developer adjustment area Auto developer adjustment humidity area display 1 to 14 8
AREA Current area Current humidity area display

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 57

 0 44-22
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-16 CLOSE
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
TONER CONTROL DATA DISPLAY
TONER DEN_LT(M) : 128 Check (Display/Print)
TONER DEN_ST(M) : 128  Function (Purpose) : Used to check the toner patch image den-
TONER DEN_LT(L) : 128 sity level of each color in half tone image
TONER DEN_ST(L) : 128  forming section correction (process correc-
K NEXT
tion). (This simulation is used to check that
C M Y
1/1 the correction is normally executed or not.)
Section : Process
44-21 Item : Data (Machine condition)
Operation/Procedure
Purpose : Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to register the half tone process con- 1) Change the page with [n] [p] buttons.
trol reference value (half tone correction). * If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
Section : Process page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
Item : Operation
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
Operation/Procedure
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
1) When the machine enters Simulation 44-21, the screen shown display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
on the right is displayed. 2) Select desired patch sampling data with the following buttons:
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the process control refer- [1ST STEP] button: [1ST STEP] patch sampling data display
ence value is registered. (When [ECXECUTE] button is
[2ND STEP] button: [2ND STEP] patch sampling data display
pressed during execution, the operation is interrupted.)
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
2) The display automatically shifts to the first step completion
basic screen of simulation.
screen or the sensor adjustment error screen.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
When the display shifts to the first step completion screen, the
key.
second step is automatically started.
When the display shifts to the sensor adjustment error screen, <Display item and content description>
press [EXECUTE] button to resume the operation. Button item Display item Content description
* When the process control is executed second time, "2nd" is 1ST STEP ID_n 1ST patch data display (n = 1 to 5)
displayed. 2ND STEP ID_n 2ND patch data display (n = 1 to 16)
3) When the second step is completed, the following message is
displayed. (The message is automatically proceeds.)
0
BLACK: 2ND STEP BLACK END TEST SIMULATION NO.44̆22 CLOSE
CYAN: 2ND STEP CYAN END HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT

MAGENTA: 2ND STEP MAGENTA END PTK/BASE PTC PTM PTY PTK/BASE PTC PTM PTY

ID 1 : 255/255 255 255 255 ID 4 : 255/255 255 255 255

YELLOW: 2ND STEP YELLOW END ID 2 : 255/255 255 255 255 ID 5 : 255/255 255 255 255
4) The display shifts to the normal completion screen or the error ID 3 : 255/255 255 255 255

screen automatically.
1ST STEP 2ND STEP 1/1
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the result screen is dis-
played.
* Data of each color are displayed with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. 44-24
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
is highlighted. (Black ([K]) is selected in the initial state.)
Check (Display/Print)
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the process control
Function (Purpose) : (This simulation is not used in the market.)
reference value setting is performed again.
Used to display the process control result.
0 Section : Process
TEST SIMULATION NO.44̆21 CLOSE Item : Data (Machine condition)
HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER Operation/Procedure
TOUCH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
1) Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. (In this example, [K] is
selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
EXECUTE is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.)
* Change the display page with [p] or [n] .
* If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
2) When [NEXT] button is pressed, data of another category are
displayed.
* When [NEXT] button is pressed on the last category data
display, the data of the first category are displayed.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 58

 * When [NEXT] button is pressed, the data of the next cate-
gory are displayed regardless of the display page. 44-25
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
basic screen of simulation. Check (Display/Print)
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] Function (Purpose) : Used to check the initial condition of pro-
key. cess control (half tone correction).
Section : Process
<Display item and content of each category> Item : Data (Machine condition)
Page Operation/Procedure
Category Display item Content
number 1) Select a color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. (In this example, [K]
Coefficient 1/2 [RIZE] Low density rising point is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
[SATURATE] High density saturation
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
point
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.)
[STEP] (Saturation pint – Rising
point) / 10 2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
[EX-LOW] Coefficient of the The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
approximation formula played in the setting area.
of lowest density
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
[LOW] Coefficient of the
item is shifted.
approximation formula
of low density If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
[CONNECT] Coefficient of the operation is invalid.
approximation formula If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
when connecting low item is shifted.
density and middle
density If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
2/2 [MID] Coefficient of the operation is invalid.
approximation formula 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
of middle density * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
[HIGH] Coefficient of the
4) When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
approximation formula
of high density set data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
[CONNECT POINT] Density sections * Also when [OK], [n], [p], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
connection output ratio pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and
Reference 1/1 [SENSOR_TARGET] Half tone process RAM.
value control reference value <Set range of each set value>
Correction 1/1 [S_VALUE] Half tone process
value control correction Set Default
amount Item Display Content
range value
For printer 1/3 [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer half tone A 1ST PATCH 0 to 255 Half tone process control 40
process control 1ST step 1st patch print
correction value gradation
2/3 [PRINTER_BASE_DI Printer half tone B 2ND PATCH 0 to 255 Half tone process control 60
THER_VALUE] process control 1ST step 2nd patch print
reference dither value gradation
3/3 [PRINTER_AUTO_HT Printer auto density C 3RD PATCH 0 to 255 Half tone process control 80
_VALUE] adjustment correction 1ST step 3rd patch print
value gradation
D 4TH PATCH 0 to 255 Half tone process control 100
* When the display item is not executed yet, “–––” is displayed. In 1ST step 4th patch print
case of an error, "ERR" is displayed. gradation
* An error display is not made for the reference value and the cor- E 5TH PATCH 0 to 255 Half tone process control 255
rection value, and the previous value is displayed. 1ST step 5th patch print
gradation
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.44㧙24 CLOSE
HALF TONE PROCON RESULT DISPLAY
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-25 CLOSE
[RIZE] 16 [SATURATE] 109 [STEP] 9.3

[EX-LOW] A: 0.0 , B: 100.0 HALF TONE PROCON INITIAL VALUE DISPLAY

A 40 1ST PATCH
[LOW] A:- 0.013 , B:- 0.569 , C: 107.444

[CONNECT] A: 0.0 , B: 0.0

A: 40 B 60 2ND PATCH

C 80 3RD PATCH
K C M Y 0 255
NEXT 1/2 D 100 4TH PATCH

K C M Y OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 59

44-26 44-27
Purpose : Adjustment Purpose : Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the half tone process con- Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the half tone process control
trol forcibly. correction value.
Section : Process Section : Process
Item : Operation Item : Clear
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 44-26, the screen on the 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
right is displayed. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the process control is become active display.
forcibly executed. (When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during 2) Press [YES] button.
execution, the operation is interrupted.)
The half tone process control correction value is cleared.
2) The display automatically shifts to the first step completion [YES] button is highlighted.
screen or the sensor adjustment error screen.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
When the display shifts to the first step completion screen, the CUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
second step is automatically started. [NO] buttons gray out.
When the display shifts to the sensor adjustment error screen, * After completion of clearing the half tone process control
press [EXECUTE] button to resume the operation. correction value, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal
3) When the second step is completed, the following message is display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
displayed. (The message is automatically proceeds.) * The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
BLACK : 2ND STEP BLACK END
<Standard value restore item>
CYAN : 2ND STEP CYAN END
Standard value restore item
MAGENTA : 2ND STEP MAGENTA END
1 to 15 Half tone process control correction value
YELLOW : 2ND STEP YELLOW END
4) The display shifts to the normal completion screen or the error
screen automatically. 0
SIMULATION NO.44̆27 CLOSE
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the result screen is dis- TEST

played. HALF TONE PROCON ADJUSTMENT DATA CLEAR

* Data of each color are displayed with [K][C][M][Y] buttons.

Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, [K] is selected.)
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the half tone process
control correction value setting is resumed. ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
<Result display and content>
Display Content
COMPLETE Normal completion 44-28
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption Purpose : Setting
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment error
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the timing (ON/OFF) of process
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment error
control execution.
[YMCK] High density process control [YMCK] error
Section : Process
CONNECTION_ERR Connection error
Item : Operation
Operation/Procedure
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.44̆26 CLOSE 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
TOUCH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START. played in the setting area.
* If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current set data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 60

<Set range and default value of each setup>

Item Display Content Set range Default value

A Process control SW ON YES When supplying the power (when canceling sleep.) Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
execution YES/NO NO Inhibited 1
B setting 24H YES When READY (sleep setting) is kept for 24H or more Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
NO Inhibited 1
C HUM YES The temperature and humidity in the machine are monitored Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
NO every 2 hours (which can be set with Item I), and they are more Inhibited 1
than the specified level (more than the set value of item 10)
compared with the previous process control.
D REV1 YES When the power is supplied, and when the accumulated Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
NO traveling distance of BK or M position drum unit reaches a Inhibited 1
certain level.
E REV2 YES When the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M position Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
NO drum unit reaches a certain level from the previous density Inhibited 1
correction.
F INITIAL YES When warming up after clearing the counter of OPC drum and Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
NO the developing unit. Inhibited 1
G PIX YES When one of the accumulated toner counts for each colors Allowed 0 to 1 0 1
NO reaches over the specified count from the previous high density Inhibited 1
correction.
H HUM_LIMIT YES The set conditions of item C are added to the set conditions of Allowed 0 to 1 0 1
NO items A to G. Inhibited 1
I HUM HOUR Item C temperature/humidity monitor monitoring time interval setting (H: 1 to 24 2
Hour)
J HUM_DIF Specified value of area difference compared with that in the previous process 1 to 9 2
control execution of item C
K BK_RATIO Setting of the zoom ratio (%) of BK position OPC drum traveling distance of 1 to 999 20
item E
L M_RATIO Setting of the zoom ratio (%) of M position OPC drum traveling distance of 1 to 999 20
item E
M PIX_RATIO Pitch count zoom ratio setting (%) 1 to 999 100

* A – H display: "Item name: Detail display." <Set item description: JOB kinds>
Example: SW ON:YES Display Description Default
Item Set range
item of item value
0 A COPY Copier 0 to 4 0: No execution 4
TEST SIMULATION NO.44㧙28 CLOSE B PRINTER Printer 1: HV only 2
C FAX FAX 2: HV o PHT 2
PROCON TIMING ADJUSTMENT
A㧦 0 㧧SW ON 㧦NO
D SELF Self print 3: HV o HT 4
A: 0 B㧦 0 㧧24H 㧦YES PRINT 4: HV o PHT o HT
C㧦 0 㧧HUM 㧦YES
㨇 0㨪  1 㨉
D㧦 0 㧧REV1 㧦YES * The actual display is "Display item: Set range."
Example: COPY:HV o PHT o HT
OK
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-29 CLOSE

44-29 HALF TONE SETTING

A㧦 4 㧧 COPY : HV
Purpose : Setting
A: 4 B㧦 2 㧧 PRINTER : HVψPHTψHT
Function (Purpose) : Enable/disable of the half tone correction C㧦 2 㧧 FAX : HVψPHT
during each job is switched. 㨇 0㨪  4 㨉
D㧦 4 㧧 SELF PRINT : HVψPHTψHT

Section : Process
Item : Operation OK

Operation/Procedure
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, it is highlighted and the current set data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 61

 5) When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
44-31 set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Purpose : Adjustment * When [EXECUTE], [n], [p], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the phase adjustment for
RAM.
OPC drum deflection. (Used to adjust the
phases of four OPC drums deflection.) 6) Check the output pattern to examine deflections of C, M, Y,
and K.
Section : Process (OPC drum)
• The deflection is within 2 lines. o Simulation is completed.
Item : Adjustment
• The deflection is not within 2 lines. o Go to step 9.
Operation/Procedure
7) Shift to the set item A and enter "1" with 10-key.
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
8) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the drum deflection
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- adjustment pattern is printed. (8 sheets are outputted.)
played in the setting area.
* Numbers 1 – 8 are printed sequentially in the output pattern.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
9) Check 8 sheets of print patterns to find the print pattern in
item is shifted.
which the deflection is within2 lines for C, M, and Y. Set the
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the print value of the print pattern to set item B.
operation is invalid.
10) To check the deflection in the set value, enter "3" to set item A
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and with 10-key, and press [EXECUTE] button to print one sheet of
item is shifted. the drum deflection adjustment pattern.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
operation is invalid. pressed during self print, the operation is interrupted.
2) Enter "3" with 10-key in the print mode of set item A to change * After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
the set value. (Default is 3.) original state.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. * For cassette selection, the manual feed cassette is set. (Set item
3) Set A3 paper in the cassette 1 tray. C is 1)
4) Use [p] button to shift to the paper of set item "C" and enter "3"
with 10-key. (The default is 3.)

<Set item, set range, and default values>

Display item: Detail Set Default

Item Description Writing
of display range value
A PRINT 45deg Print mode 45 degree Deflection check pattern every 45 degree (8 sheets of print) 1 to 3 1 3 NO
MODE (1) 0q (2) 45q (3) 90q (4) 135q (5) 180q (6) 225q (7) 270q (8) 315q (SET
* The number in ( ) is printed on the output pattern. VALUE)
90deg 90 degree 2: Deflection check pattern for every 90 degree (4 sheets of print) 2
(1) 0q (3) 90q (5) 180q (7) 270q
* The number in ( ) is printed on the output pattern.
SET VALUE SET VALUE 3: Deflection check print (One sheet of print) at the set value. 3
B COLOR Phase adjustment value Angle step 0q (1) o 45q (2) o 90q (3) o 135q (4) o 180q (5) o 1 to 8 2 YES
BK o CL 225q (6) o 270q (7) o 315q (8)
C PAPER MFT Cassette selection Manual feed 1 to 6 1 3 NO
CS1 Machine 1 stage 2 (CS2)
CS2 Machine 2 stage 3
CS3 Option paper feed desk 1 stage 4
CS4 Option paper feed desk 2 stage 5
LCC LCC 6

* The display of item A/C is "Display item: Detail of display."

44-43
Example: PAPER : CS2
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
0 Check (Display/Print)
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-31 CLOSE Function (Purpose) : Used to display each developing unit
DRUM POSITION SETTING installing state AD value.
A㧦 3 㧧 PRINT MODE㧦SET VALUE This simulation is added to check the sam-
A: 3 B㧦 2 㧧 COLOR
pling data of the detection judgment of
㨇 1㨪 3㨉
C㧦 3 㧧 PAPER:CS2
developing unit installation not only as the
judgment result (trouble display) but also as
EXECUTE OK
the current state value.
Section : Process (Developing)
Item : Data (Machine condition)
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 44-43, the data stored in
EEPROM are displayed.
* Data are revised every 5sec.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 62

<List of display items>

Display
Item Item name Item content Remark
range
A DVCH KIND K K developing unit kind state 1 to 9 (*) Developing unit model identification information saved in EEPROM on the
B DVCH KIND C C developing unit kind state 1 to 9 (*) machine side.
C DVCH KIND M M developing unit kind state 1 to 9 (*) A judgment is made by verifying this information and the model information in
D DVCH KIND Y Y developing unit kind state 1 to 9 (*) CRUM. Since the result (OK or NG) is known when warming up, the error
display is not required in SIM. The display is made by the division code of 1
to 9 instead of the model name.
E DVCH_AD_K K developing unit installation AD value 0 to 255 Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
F DVCH_AD_C C developing unit installation AD value 0 to 255 Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
G DVCH_AD_M M developing unit installation AD value 0 to 255 Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
H DVCH_AD_Y Y developing unit installation AD value 0 to 255 Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value

(*): The kind of a developing unit is identified with the ID number.

For ID and the contents of developing unit models, refer to <List of developing unit ID>‚ below.
<List of developing unit ID> <Display item and content description>
ID number Developing unit model name Display item Content description Display range
1 OEM4, etc. ID_n Patch data display 0 to 255
2 PASTEL MFP (n = 1 to 16)
3 PASTEL PRT
4 C-JUPITER MFP
5 C-JUPITER PRT 0
6 OEM1, etc. TEST SIMULATION NO.44̆52 CLOSE

7 OEM2, etc. 1 PIXEL HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT

8 OEM3, etc. PTK PTC PTM PTY PTK PTC PTM PTY

9 No developing unit ID 1 : 255 255 255 255 ID 4 : 255 255 255 255
ID 2 : 255 255 255 255 ID 5 : 255 255 255 255
ID 3 : 255 255 255 255 ID 6 : 255 255 255 255

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-43 CLOSE 1/3
DEVELOPER UNIT AD MONITOR

DVCH KIND K : 㪁㩷 DVCH AD K : 㪁㪁㪁㩷 44-54

DVCH KIND C : 㪁㩷 DVCH AD C : 㪁㪁㪁㩷 Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
DVCH KIND M : 㪁㩷 DVCH AD M : 㪁㪁㪁㩷 Check (Display/Print)
DVCH KIND Y : 㪁㩷 DVCH AD Y : 㪁㪁㪁㩷 Function (Purpose) : (This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to display the 1 pixel half tone correc-
1/1
tion result.
Section : Process
44-52 Item : Data (Machine condition)
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ Operation/Procedure
Check (Display/Print) 1) Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. (In this example, [K] is
Function (Purpose) : (This function is not used. Do not operate.) selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
Used to check the toner patch image den- * Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
sity level of each color in 1 pixel half tone is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.)
correction. (The simulation is used to check
* Change the display page with [n] [p] buttons.
whether the correction is normally executed
or not.) * If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
Section : Process
grays out and the operation is invalid.
Item : Data (Machine condition)
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
Operation/Procedure the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
1) Change the page with [n] [p] buttons. display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
* If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the 2) When [NEXT] button is pressed, data of another category are
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display displayed.
grays out and the operation is invalid. * When [NEXT] button is pressed on the last category data
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and display, the data of the first category are displayed.
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the * When [NEXT] button is pressed, the data of the next cate-
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid. gory are displayed regardless of the display page.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of simulation. basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key. key.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 63

<Display item and content of each item>
Category Page number Display item Content Display range
Approximation 1/2 [EX-LOW] EXTRA lowest density area approximation formula A: –10.000 to +10.000
result coefficient B: –255.000 to +255.000
[LOW] Low density approximation formula coefficient A: –10.000 to +10.000
B, C:-255.000 to +255.000
[CONNECT] Approximation formula coefficient when connecting low A: –10.000 to +10.000
density and middle density B: –255.000 to +255.000
[MID] Middle density approximation formula coefficient A: –10.000 to +10.000
B, C: –255.000 to +255.000
2/2 [HIGH] High density approximation formula coefficient A: –10.000 to +10.000
B: –255.000 to +255.000
[CONNECT SENSOR] Sensor output at connecting point of each density area #1 to #4: 0 to 255
Reference 1/1 [SENSOR_TARGET] Reference value registration value of each color and each #1 to #15
register value point of 1 pixel half tone correction
Correction value 1/1 [S_VALUE] Correction value of each color and each point of 1 pixel #1 to #15
half tone correction

* When the display item is not executed yet, “–––” is displayed. In case of an error, “ERR” is displayed.
* An error display is not made for the reference value and the correction value, and the previous value is displayed.

0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.44㧙54 CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.44̆56 CLOSE
1 PIXEL HALF TONE RESULT DISPLAY
1PIXEL HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
[EX-LOW] A: 01.000 , B: 100.000
TOUGH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
[LOW] A: -10.000 , B: -200.000 , C: 200.000

[CONNECT] A: 10.000 , B: -150.000

[MID] A: 05.000 , B: 200.000 , C: 150.000

K C M Y NEXT 1/2 EXECUTE

44-56
44-57
Purpose : Setting
Purpose : Data clear
Function (Purpose) : (This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to perform the forcible execution of 1 Function (Purpose) : (This function is not used. Do not operate.)
pixel half tone correction. Used to clear the correction value of 1 pixel
half tone correction.
Section : Process
Section : Process
Item : Operation
Item : Data clear
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 44-56, the following
screen is displayed. 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the forcible execution of [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
1 pixel process control is started. (When [EXECUTE] button is becomes active display.
pressed during execution, the operation is interrupted.) 2) Press [YES] button.
* In case of a sensor adjustment error, press [EXECUTE] but- * The half tone correction value is cleared. [YES] button is
ton to resume the operation. highlighted.
2) The display shifts to the normal completion screen or the error * When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
screen automatically. CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the result screen is dis- [NO] buttons gray out.
played. * After completion of clearing the half tone correction value,
* Select a color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. The data of the [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES]
selected color are displayed. and [NO] buttons gray out.
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button * The cleared data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.) <Half tone correction value clear item>
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the 1 pixel process
Half tone correction value clear item
control correction value setting is performed again.
1 to 15 Process control half tone correction value
<Result display and content description>
Display Content 0
COMPLETE Normal completion SIMULATION NO.44̆57 CLOSE
TEST
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
1 PIXEL HALF TONE ADJUSTMENT DATA CLEAR
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment error
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment error
[YMCK] High density process control [YMCK] error
CONNECTION_ERR Connection error

ARE YOU SURE? YES NO

EXECUTE

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 64

 Set Default
46 Item Display Description
range value
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph(Color 1 to 99 50
(COLOR TONE tone enhancement)
46-1 ENHANCEMENT)
Purpose : Adjustment Q MAP (COLOR TONE Map (Color tone 1 to 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the default exposure (color
R SINGLE COLOR Single color 1 to 99 50
copy) for every document mode.
S SINGLE COLOR Single color (Copy 1 to 99 50
Section : Scanner (COPY TO COPY) document)
Item : Adjustment T TWO COLOR 2-color (red/black) 1 to 99 50
Operation/Procedure copy
U TWO COLOR (COPY 2-color (red/black) 1 to 99 50
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. TO COPY) copy (Copy
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- document)
played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and 0
item is shifted. S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6㧙 01 CLOSE
TEST CLOSE
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT (COLO R)[ COP Y]
operation is invalid. A㧦 50 㧧 AUTO
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 TEXT

item is shifted. C㧦 50 㧧 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

㨇 1 㨪 99㨉
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the D㧦 50 㧧 TEXT/PHOTO

operation is invalid.
OK
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
46-2
[U] buttons.
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit Purpose : Adjustment
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1. Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the exposure in BLACK
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are copy.
saved to EEPROM and RAM. Section : Scanner
* When [n], [p], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is Item : Adjustment
pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM. Operation/Procedure
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
copy basic screen of simulation.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] played in the setting area.
key.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
<Set range and default value of each setup> item is shifted.
Set Default If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
Item Display Description
range value operation is invalid.
A AUTO Auto 1 to 99 50 If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
B TEXT Text 1 to 99 50 item is shifted.
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 to 99 50
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
PHOTO
operation is invalid.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 1 to 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 to 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 to 99 50 * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
G MAP Map 1 to 99 50 * The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
H LIGHT Light density 1 to 99 50 [U] buttons.
document When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy 1 to 99 50
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
COPY) document)
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Print (Copy 1 to 99 50
3) When [OK], [n], [p], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
PHOTO (COPY TO document) is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
COPY) RAM.
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo (Coy 1 to 99 50 * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
(COPY TO COPY) document) copy basic screen of simulation.
L TEXT (COLOR TONE Text (Color tone 1 to 99 50
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
key.
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Print (Color tone 1 to 99 50
PHOTO (COLOR enhancement) <Set range and default value of each setup>
TONE
Set Default
ENHANCEMENT) Item Display Content
range value
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 to 99 50
A AUTO1 Auto1 1 to 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) B AUTO2 Auto2 1 to 99 50
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo (Color 1 to 99 50 C TEXT Text 1 to 99 50
(COLOR TONE enhancement) D TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo 1 to 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 1 to 99 50
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 to 99 50

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 65

 Set Default
Item Display Content 0
range value
SIMULATION NO.46㧙04 CLOSE
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 to 99 50 TEST CLOSE
H MAP Map 1 to 99 50 EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(COLOR)[ SCANNER]

I TEXT (COPY TO COPY) Text (Copy 1 to 99 50 A㧦 50 㧧 TEXT

document) A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO

C㧦 50 㧧 TEXT/PHOTO
J TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo 1 to 99 50 㨇 1 㨪 99㨉
D㧦 50 㧧 PTINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 to 99 50
OK
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
L LIGHT Light density 1 to 99 50
document
46-5
Purpose : Adjustment
0
SIMULATION NO.46㧙02 CLOSE Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the exposure of the black
TEST CLOSE
scanner.
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
A㧦 50 㧧 AUTO1
Section : Scanner
A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 AUTO2 Item : Adjustment
㨇 1 㨪 99㨉
C㧦 50 㧧 TEXT
Operation/Procedure
D㧦 50 㧧 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
OK The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
46-4 item is shifted.
Purpose : Adjustment If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the exposure of the color operation is invalid.
scanner. If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
Section : Scanner item is shifted.
Item : Adjustment If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
played in the setting area.
[U] buttons.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
item is shifted.
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
3) When [OK], [n], [p], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
operation is invalid.
is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and RAM.
item is shifted.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the copy basic screen of simulation.
operation is invalid.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
<Set range and default value of each setup>
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
[U] buttons. Set Default
Item Display Content
range value
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
A AUTO TEXT Auto text 1 to 99 50
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
B AUTO TEXT/PRINT Auto text/Print Photo 1 to 99 50
3) When [OK], [n], [p], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key PHOTO
is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and C AUTO TEXT/PHOTO Auto text/Photo 1 to 99 50
RAM. D TEXT TExt 1 to 99 50
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the E TEXT/PRINT PHOTO Text/Print Photo 1 to 99 50
copy basic screen of simulation. F TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 1 to 99 50
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] G PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 to 99 50
key. H PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 to 99 50
I MAP Map 1 to 99 50
<Set range and default value of each setup>
Set Default
Item Display Content 0
range value
TEST SIMULATION NO.46㧙05 CLOSE
A TEXT Text 1 to 99 50 CLOSE

B TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed 1 to 99 50 EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[SCANNER]

Photo A㧦 50 㧧 AUTO TEXT

C TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 1 to 99 50 A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 AUTO TEXT/PRINT PHOTO

C㧦 50 㧧 AUTO TEXT/PHOTO
D PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 to 99 50 㨇 1 㨪 99㨉
D㧦 50 㧧 TEXT
E PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 to 99 50
F MAP Map 1 to 99 50
OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 66

 If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
46-8 item is shifted.
Purpose : Adjustment If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
Function (Purpose) : Used to make the scanner color balance operation is invalid.
RGB adjustment (for color push scanner 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
mode). * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Section : Scanner * The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
Item : Adjustment [U] buttons.
Operation/Procedure When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
1) Select a desired color with [B] [G] [R] buttons. (In this example, value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
[B] is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed. 3) When [OK], [n], [p], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
is highlighted. (Blue is selected in the initial screen.) RAM.
2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to
the copy basic screen of simulation.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area. * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
[BLACK] key.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted. <Set range and default value of each setup>
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the Set Default
Item Display Content
operation is invalid. range value
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and A COPY: LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 to 99 42
item is shifted. adjustment (low density side)
B SCAN: LOW RSPF scanner mode 1 to 99 42
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
exposure adjustment (low
operation is invalid.
density side)
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. C FAX: LOW RSPFFAX mode exposure 1 to 99 42
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. adjustment (low density side)
4) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is D COPY: HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 to 99 53
adjustment (high density side)
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
E SCAN: HIGH RSPF scanner mode 1 to 99 53
RAM.
exposure adjustment (high
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the density side)
copy basic screen of simulation. F FAX: HIGH RSPFFAX mode exposure 1 to 99 53
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] adjustment (high density side)
key.
<Set range and default value of each setup> 0
Set Default TEST SIMULATION NO.46㧙09 CLOSE
Item Display Content
range value EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(SPF)
A LOW DENSITY Low density side 1 to 99 50 A㧦 42 㧧 COPY 㧦LOW

POINT correction set value A: 42 B㧦 42 㧧 SCAN㧦LOW

B HIGH DENSITY High density side 1 to 99 50 C㧦 42 㧧 FAX㧦LOW

㨇 1 㨪 99㨉
POINT correction set value D㧦 53 㧧 COPY㧦HIGH

OK
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.46㧙08 CLOSE

SCANNER COLOR BALANCE ADJUSTMENT 㧔COLOR SCANNER MODE㧕 46-10

A㧦 50 㧧 LOW DENSITY POINT

A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 HIGH DENSITY POINT Purpose : Adjustment

Function (Purpose) : Used to the copy density adjustment (man-
㨇 1 㨪 99 㨉
ual). (color mode)
B G
Section : Engine
R OK
Item : Operation
Operation/Procedure
46-9 1) Select an item to be set.
Purpose : Adjustment When a button is pressed, the display is shifted to each setting
screen.
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the exposure.
2) Select a color.
Section : RSPF
* Select [K](BLACK), [C](CYAN), [M](MAGENTA), or [Y](YEL-
Item : Adjustment
LOW) button. The selected button is displayed and the
Operation/Procedure adjustment value of the selected color is displayed.
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. * Only one color can be selected. The selected button is high-
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- lighted.
played in the setting area. On the initial screen, [K] is selected.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and 3) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
item is shifted. The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the played in the setting area.
operation is invalid.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 67

 * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted. 46-16
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the Purpose : Adjustment
operation is invalid. Function (Purpose) : Used to the copy density adjustment (man-
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and ual) [Monochrome, all modes] PG print.
item is shifted. Section : Engine
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the Item : Operation
operation is invalid. Operation/Procedure
4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
* When [C] key is pressed, the input value is cleared.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V] played in the setting area.
[U] buttons.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit item is shifted.
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
5) When [OK], [EXECUTE], [n], [p], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or operation is invalid.
[BLACK] key is pressed, the current entered value is saved to
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
EEPROM and RAM.
item is shifted.
6) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and self
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
print is executed.
operation is invalid.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
ton is pressed during self print, the operation is terminated.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to
the original state. * The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [U]
[V] buttons.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed once during setting,
the display returns to the menu selecting screen. When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed twice during setting,
the display returns to the sub number entry screen. 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and self
print is started.
<Setting item>
* When [OK], [EXECUTE], [n], [p], [U], [V] button, [COLOR],
Item Item content or [BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM
TEXT Text and RAM.
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo * After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo the normal display.
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO Photo+Text/Photo
<Set range and default value of each setup>
MAP Map
LIGHT Light density document Item Display Item Set range Default value
COPY ORG Copy document A POINT1 Point 1 373 to 627 500
B POINT2 Point 2 373 to 627 500
<Set range and default value of each setup> C POINT3 Point 3 373 to 627 500
Item Display Item Set range Default value D POINT4 Point 4 373 to 627 500
A POINT1 Point 1 245 to 755 500 E POINT5 Point 5 373 to 627 500
B POINT2 Point 2 245 to 755 500 F POINT6 Point 6 373 to 627 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 to 755 500 G POINT7 Point 7 373 to 627 500
D POINT4 Point 4 245 to 755 500 H POINT8 Point 8 373 to 627 500
E POINT5 Point 5 245 to 755 500 I POINT9 Point 9 373 to 627 500
F POINT6 Point 6 245 to 755 500 J POINT10 Point 10 373 to 627 500
G POINT7 Point 7 245 to 755 500 K POINT11 Point 11 373 to 627 500
H POINT8 Point 8 245 to 755 500 L POINT12 Point 12 373 to 627 500
I POINT9 Point 9 245 to 755 500 M POINT13 Point 13 373 to 627 500
J POINT10 Point 10 245 to 755 500 N POINT14 Point 14 373 to 627 500
K POINT11 Point 11 245 to 755 500 O POINT15 Point 15 373 to 627 500
L POINT12 Point 12 245 to 755 500
M POINT13 Point 13 245 to 755 500
0
N POINT14 Point 14 245 to 755 500
TEST SIMULATION NO.46㧙16 CLOSE
O POINT15 Point 15 245 to 755 500
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
A㧦500 㧧 POINT1

0 A: 500 B㧦500 㧧 POINT2

TEST SIMULATION NO.46̆10 CLOSE C㧦500 㧧 POINT3

㨇373㨪627㨉
D㧦500 㧧 POINT4
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT

TEXT TEXT / PRT PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO

EXECUTE OK
MAP LIGHT COPY ORG

1/1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 68

 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
46-19
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Purpose : Setting * The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the BLACK auto exposure [U] buttons.
mode. When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
Section : Scanner value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
Item : Operation 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted, and self
Operation/Procedure print is started.
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the current set status * When [OK], [EXECUTE], [n], [p], [U], [V] button, [COLOR],
is highlighted. or [BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM
and RAM.
2) Press a set value button to be changed, and the button is high-
lighted and the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. (In * After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to
this example, [MODE2] button is pressed.) the normal display.
* Only one item can be selected. * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key
is pressed during self-printing, the operation is stopped.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation. <Set range and default value of each setup>
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] Item Display Item Set range Default value
key. A POINT1 Point 1 245 to 755 500
<Set range and default value of each set value> B POINT2 Point 2 245 to 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 to 755 500
Default
Item Content Set value D POINT4 Point 4 245 to 755 500
value
E POINT5 Point 5 245 to 755 500
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE1
F POINT6 Point 6 245 to 755 500
MODE2
G POINT7 Point 7 245 to 755 500
AE_STOP_COPY Auto BLACK exposure STOP ON/OFF ON
(for copy) H POINT8 Point 8 245 to 755 500
AE_STOP_FAX Auto BLACK exposure STOP ON/OFF ON I POINT9 Point 9 245 to 755 500
(for FAX) J POINT10 Point 10 245 to 755 500
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto BLACK exposure STOP ON/OFF ON K POINT11 Point 11 245 to 755 500
(for scanner) L POINT12 Point 12 245 to 755 500
M POINT13 Point 13 245 to 755 500
N POINT14 Point 14 245 to 755 500
0 O POINT15 Point 15 245 to 755 500
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-19 CLOSE

EXPOSURE MODE SETUP (B/W-AE)

AE MODE : MODE1 MODE2
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.46㧙21 CLOSE
AE STOP COPY : OFF ON

AE STOP FAX : OFF ON ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]

A㧦500 㧧 POINT1
AE STOP SCAN : OFF ON
A: 500 B㧦500 㧧 POINT2

C㧦500 㧧 POINT3
1/1 㨇245~755㨉
D :500 㧧 POINT4

46-21 K C M Y EXECUTE OK

Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the copy color balance
manual correction. 46-23
[Color, All modes]: PG print Purpose : Setting
Section : Engine Function (Purpose) : Used to set ENABLE/DISABLE of the half
Item : Adjustment tone highest density correction.
Operation/Procedure Section :
1) Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. The adjustment value Item : Specifications
of the selected color is displayed. (In this example, [C] is Operation/Procedure
selected.)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
is highlighted. (On the default display, [K] is selected.)
2) When [OK] button, [COLOR] or [BLACK] key is pressed, the
* Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
current entered value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area. <Set range and default value of each setup>
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and Set Default
Item Display Content
item is shifted. range value
A (0: ENABLE 0 Engine highest density 0 to 1 0
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
1: DISABLE) correction mode ENABLE
operation is invalid.
1 Engine highest density
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and correction mode DISABLE
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 69

 0 0
SIMULATION NO.46㧙23 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.46-24 CLOSE
TEST
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
ENGINE MAXIMUM DENSITY ADJUSTMENT MODE
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
A㧦 0 㧧 (0:ENABLE 1:DISABLE)
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11"x17” SIZE PAPER
A: 0 FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT)

㨇 0㨪 1 㨉


EXECUTE

OK

(48-patch print)

46-24 0
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE
Purpose : Adjustment
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
Function (Purpose) : Used to the copy color balance auto adjust- TEST PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS...
ment.
Section : Engine
Item : Adjustment
Operation/Procedure EXECUTE

1) When the machine enters Simulation 46-24, the initial screen

is displayed. (Output patch read (FACTORY))
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the high density process
0
control is executed and self print of 48 patches is started.
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE
Check to confirm that there is A3 paper on the paper feed tray. ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
If there is no A3 paper, supply it. PLEASE SELECT THE MODE (FACTORY) OR (SERVICE) AND PLACE
2) While the high density process control is executed, [EXE- THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].
CUTE] button is highlighted. ,
3) During the self print of 48 patches, [EXECUTE] button is high- 㪁LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.

lighted. FACTORY SERVICE EXECUTE

4) After completion of the self print, the display is shifted to the

output patch read standby screen.
(16-patch self print)
Place the printed 48 patches on the glass table, and press
[FACTORY] or [SERVICE] button to select the process mode. 0
5) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE
48 patches set on the table glass are scanned. ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT

Check to confirm that there is A3 paper on the paper feed tray. ADJUSTED PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS.

If there is no A3 paper, supply it.

6) After reading the patches, self print of 16patches is automati-
cally started.
EXECUTE
7) After completion of the self print, the display is shifted to the
registration standby screen. When [REPEAT] button is
pressed, the display returns to the initial screen without exe- (Standby for registration process)
cuting registration.
[When [OK] button is pressed, the correction value is saved to 0
EEPROM and RAM, and the half tone process control refer- TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE

ence value correction is started. ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT

CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA
8) The display is shifted to the reference value registration pro-
,PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
cess 1 end screen automatically, and the reference value reg-
istration process 2 (BLACK) is executed automatically.
9) After completion of the reference value registration process 2, REPEAT OK
the following message is displayed. (Each message is auto-
matically shifted.)
(Registration of half tone process control reference value)
BLACK: 2ND STEP BLACK END
CYAN: 2ND STEP CYAN END
0
MAGENTA: 2ND STEP MAGENTA END TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE

YELLOW: 2ND STEP YELLOW END ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT

* When the process control is executed second time, "2nd" is PLEASE WAIT.

displayed.
10) All the registration processes are completed normally.
NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON.
* When [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
OK
pressed during self print, the operation is interrupted.
[Cancel during execution of the operation]
• To cancel and resume the operation, press [EXECUTE].
(Initial screen)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 70

(Completion of all the processes)
46-26
0 Purpose : Adjustment
CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24
Function (Purpose) : Used to reset the single color mode color
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT balance set value to the default.
COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
Section : Image process (ICU)
 
Item : Adjustment
PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active display.
46-25
2) Press [YES] button.
Purpose : Adjustment The single color mode color balance set value is reset to the
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the fine adjustment of sin- default value. [YES] button is highlighted.
gle color mode color balance. * When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
Section : Image process (ICU) CUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
Item : Adjustment [NO] buttons gray out.
Operation/Procedure * After completion of default reset of the single color mode
color balance set value, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
1) Select a color to be set. (In this example, [C] (Cyan) is
normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
selected.)
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When a color button ([C](Cyan), [M](Magenta), [Y](Yellow))
is selected, the selected button is highlighted and the adjust- <Standard value reset item>
ment value of the selected button is displayed. Standard value reset item
* Only one color can be selected. The selected button is high- 1 RED set ratio
lighted. 2 GREEN set ratio
In the initial state, [C] is selected. 3 BLUE set ratio
2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. 4 YELLOW set ratio
5 MAGENTA set ratio
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
6 CYAN set ratio
played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted. 0
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the TEST SIMULATION NO.46̆26 CLOSE
operation is invalid. SINGLE COLOR MODE STANDARD RATE SETUP
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. YES NO
ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
4) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
46-27
RAM.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the Purpose : Adjustment
copy basic screen of simulation. Function (Purpose) : Used to set the engine gamma calculating
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] formula coefficient.
key. Section : Image process (ICU)
<Set range and default value of each setup> Item : Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Default value
Item Description Range
C M Y 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
A RED 0 to 255 0 255 255 The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
B GREEN 0 to 255 255 0 255 played in the setting area.
C BLUE 0 to 255 255 255 0 * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
D YELLOW 0 to 255 0 0 255 item is shifted.
E MAGENTA 0 to 255 0 255 0
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
F CYAN 0 to 255 255 0 0
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
0 item is shifted.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46㧙25 CLOSE If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
SINGLE COLOR MODE COLOR BALANCE SETUP operation is invalid.
A㧦255 㧧 RED
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A: 255 B㧦255 㧧 GREEN

C㧦 0 㧧 BLUE
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
㨇 0 㨪 255㨉
D㧦255 㧧 YELLOW 3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
K C M Y OK RAM.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 71

* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key. 46-28
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the Purpose : Adjustment
copy basic screen of simulation. Function (Purpose) : (Information on this simulation may be
<Set range and default value of each setup> requested in some cases. However, this
function is basically not used in the market.)
Set Default Used to check the auto exposure/Auto doc-
Item Display Set range
range value ument recognition/ Line number recognition
A BLACK TEXT Black text edge area 1 to 99 50 (Color mode). If the local memory size is
(SLOPE) engine J curve
less than 256MB, the operation of this sim-
calculating coefficient
ulation may not operate normally.
(slope) setting
B BLACK TEXT Black text edge area 1 to 99 50 Section : Image process (ICU)
(INTERCEPT) engine J curve Item : Adjustment
calculating coefficient
Operation/Procedure
(intercept) setting
C COLOR TEXT Color text edge area 1 to 99 50 1) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning. After completion of
(SLOPE) engine J curve scanning, the result is displayed.
calculating coefficient 2) Press [NEXT] button to switch to the process data of another
(slope) setting
category.
D COLOR TEXT Color text edge area 1 to 99 50
(INTERCEPT) engine J curve Use [p] and [n] keys to change the display page of the process
calculating coefficient data.
(intercept) setting * If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
E ED TEXT Error diffusion edge 1 to 99 50 page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
(SLOPE) area engine J curve grays out and the operation is invalid.
calculating coefficient
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
(slope) setting
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
F ED TEXT Error diffusion edge 1 to 99 50
(INTERCEPT) area engine J curve display grays out and the operation is invalid.
calculating coefficient 3) Press [SETUP] button to return to the initial screen.
(intercept) setting * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
0 * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
SIMULATION NO.46-27 CLOSE copy basic screen of simulation.
TEST
* When [NEXT] button is pressed under the final category data dis-
COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP
A㧦 50 㧧 BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)
play state, the head category data are displayed.
A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE) * Pressing [NEXT] button displays the next category data regard-
C㧦 50 㧧 COLOR TEXT (SLOPE) less of the display page.
1 99
D㧦 50 㧧 COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE)

OK

<Content of process data>

Set range/
Category Detail of category Display Content Number of Remark
digits
ACS (Auto RESULT COL/MONO COLOR 2 kinds COLOR 1 to 2
recognition of (Judgment result) MONO (COLOR BLACK
Color document/ document,
Monochrome Monochrome
document) document)
STATISTICS ACSCONT ACS judgment counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
(Image process
statistic amount)
COLOR AE RESULT SITAJI_JUDGE Base division detection result 0 to 32
(Color auto (Judgment result)
exposure) STATISTICS RATE_SCR Mesh ratio 0 to 10000
(Image process SHITAJI Base number judgment result 0 to 3
statistic amount) BEAT_JUDGE Background judgment result 0 to 8
SUM_SITAJI_SCR Base area mesh number Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 72

 Set range/
Category Detail of category Display Content Number of Remark
digits
ORG RECOG RESULT ORIGINAL TXT Document Auto text 1
(Document type (Judgment result) TXT/HT Auto text mesh 2
auto recognition) HT Auto mesh 3
TXT/PIC Auto text/photo 4
PIC Auto photo 5
TXT ON HT Auto text on dot 6
OHT Other auto 7
BACKGROUND – Base None 1
GR Gray 2
WH White 3
NE Newspaper 4
WH_GR White gray 5
WH_NE White newspaper 6
WH_CO White color 7
CO Color 8
IM Image 9
MESH – Mesh No mesh 0
IMAGE Image mesh 1
BASE Base mesh (Non-image 2
mesh)
HTFE HIGH Line High number of lines 1
LOW Low number of lines 0
STATISTICS HTCNT Mesh counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
(Image process PHOTOCNT Photographic paper counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
statistic amount) STRCNT Text counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
FLATCNT Background counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
PREHTCNT Document type judgment mesh counter Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
value
HTXTCNT Text on mesh counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
SUMF Flat mesh counter value Max. 10 digits
SUMM_L Total of Max. reverse numbers (lower Max. 10 digits
32bit)
SUMM_H Total of Max. reverse numbers (Upper Max. 3 digits
4bit)
SUMFM_L Total of flat section max. reverse Max. 10 digits
number (lower 32bit)
SUMFM_H Total of flat section max. reverse Max. 3 digits
number (Upper 4bit)
FHSTDR Background pixel histogram value Max. 10 digits #1 to #32 display A3
(RED) pixel number
FHSTDG Background pixel histogram value Max. 10 digits
(GREEN)
FHSTDB Background pixel histogram value Max. 10 digits
(BLUE)
HTHSTDR Mesh pixel histogram value (RED) Max. 10 digits

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 73

 Set range/
Category Detail of category Display Content Number of Remark
digits
ORG RECOG STATISTICS HTHSTDG Mesh pixel histogram value (GREEN) Max. 10 digits
(Document type (Image process HTHSTDB Mesh pixel histogram value (BLUE) Max. 10 digits
auto recognition) statistic amount) LHSTD L component histogram value other Max. 10 digits
than mesh
MDHSTD Max. difference histogram value other Max. 10 digits
than mesh
OHSTDR Pixel histogram value other than mesh Max. 10 digits
(RED)
OHSTDG Pixel histogram value other than mesh Max. 10 digits
(GREEN)
OHSTDB Pixel histogram value other than mesh Max. 10 digits
(BLUE)
SUM_BETA_RGB Total of high-level division number in 0 to 32
background pixel histogram
EREA_BETA RGB Number of high-level division areas in 0 to 16
background pixel histogram (for base)
SUM_BETA_PHOTORGB Number of high-level division areas in 0 to 16
background pixel histogram (for
photographic paper)
RATE_BETA Background ratio 0 to 10000
SHITAJI Base number judgment result 0 to 3
BETA_JUDGE Background judgment result 0 to 8
RATE_SCR Mesh ratio 0 to 10000
RATE_SCR2 Mesh judgment ratio 0 to 10000
RATE_TSCR Text-on-mesh ratio 0 to 10000
HTFE_JUDGE Line number judgment result Max. 3 digits
SCR_HIST_JUDGE Mesh histogram judgment result 0 to 2
SCR_CNT_JUDGE Mesh counter value judgment result 0 to 1
TSCR_JUDGE Text-on-mesh counter value judgment 0 to 2
result
SCR_JUDGE Mesh judgment result 0 to 5
RATE_OTHER Other ratio 0 to 10000
TEXT_JUDGE Text judgment result 0 to 1
PHOTO_CNT_JUDGE Photographic paper pixel counter value 0 to 1
judgment result
OTHER_JUDGE Other pixel counter value judgment 0 to 1
result
PHOTO_JUDGE Photographic paper judgment result 0 to 1
TH_BETA2 Threshold value to detect high-level A3 pixel
division in background pixel histogram number
TH_BETA_PHT2 Threshold value to detect high-level Max. 2 digits
division in background pixel histogram
(photographic paper)
TH_SCR2 Mesh high-level threshold value Max. 5 digits A3 pixel number
TH_SCR_CNT2 Threshold value for the mesh counter Max. 5 digits
value
TH_TSCR_CNT2 Threshold value for the text-on-mesh Max. 5 digits A3 pixel number
counter value
TH_TEXT2 Text judgment threshold value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
TH_PHOTO2 Photographic paper judgment threshold Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
value
ALLCNT Total pixel number of judgment area Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
HTFE RESULT HIGH2 Number of High number of lines 2 2
mesh lines (htfe_out = 3)
HIGH1 High number of lines 1 1
(htfe_out = 2)
LOW1 Low number of lines 1 3
(htfe_out = 1)
LOW2 Low number or lines 2 4
(htfe_out = 0)
REVERSE AVE Max. reverse average 0 to 100.00 ********: ave_m (When
100 is exceeded, "-" is
displayed.)
REVERSE AVE(FLAT) Flat section max. reverse average 0 to 100.00 ******** : ave_fm
(When 100 is
exceeded, "-" is
displayed.)
FLAT SELECT YES Flat section When flatr > THflatr 0
NO mesh pixel When other than flatr > 1
comparison THflatr

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 74

(Initial screen) * The display in the frame of [NEW] is deleted, and the value
entered in the procedure 6 is displayed in the column of
0 [PRESENT].
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-28 CLOSE * If a new value if less than 9 digits, revision is not made.
AUTO EXPOSURE/ORG AUTO RECOG/MESH LINE RECOG OF CONFIRM
* Switch the category sequentially with [NEXT] and [BACK]

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO SCAN START
buttons.

EXECUTE

(Completion of scan = ACS judgment result screen)

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-28 CLOSE

AUTO EXPOSURE/ORG AUTO RECOG/MESH LINE RECOG OF CONFIRM

NOW READING THE ORIGINAL.

PLEASE WAIT…

* Press [p] to display the image process statistic amount, and

press [NEXT] to display the judgment result of "COLOR
AE","ORG RECOG", and"SCR RECOG".

46-33
Purpose : Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the color auto mode
adjustment.
Section : Image process (ICU)
Item : Image quality
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Unless a special change is required, keep the default val-
ues except for the following items. For the following items,
change the set values according to the necessity.
COLOR AE(SW MODE 1 - 7 / TH MAX MONO / TH MAX
COLOR / SW NEWS / TH MODE SCR)
ACS(SIM LEVEL)
1) Select a category to be set with [NEXT] and [BAC] buttons. (In
this example, "ACS4 digits or less" is set.)
2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
4) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
5) Select a desired button.
The selected button is highlighted and the value is displayed.
(In the default state, [TH_ACS5 ENLARGE] is highlighted.)
6) Enter a new value (000000002 in this example) with 10-key.
* The number of digits is max. 9. The 10th digit cannot be
entered. Entry is made after clearing.
* 10-key: [0] to [9]
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
7) When [SET] button is pressed, setting is revised.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 75

<Set range and default value of each setup>
Default Screen
Category Item Display Content Set range/Number of digits
value type
ACS 4 digits or A THCLMK_1 Pixel judgment threshold value A
0–9 7
less setting (1)
B THCLBK_1 Final pixel judgment threshold
0–3 2
value (1)
C ACSMSK_1 ACS mask size select (1) 0–1 0
D THCLMK_2 Pixel judgment threshold value
0–9 7
(2)
E THCLBK_2 Final pixel judgment threshold
0–3 2
value (2)
F ACSMSK_2 ACS mask size select (2) 0–1 0
G THCLMK_3 Pixel judgment threshold value
0–9 7
(3)
H THCLBK_3 Final pixel judgment threshold
0–3 2
value (3)
I ACSMSK_3 ACS mask size select (3) 0–1 0
J THCLMK_4 Pixel judgment threshold value
0–9 7
(4)
K THCLBK_4 Final pixel judgment threshold
0–3 2
value (4)
L ACSMSK_4 ACS mask size select (4) 0–1 0
M THCLMK_5 Pixel judgment threshold value
0–9 7
(5)
N THCLBK_5 Final pixel judgment threshold
0–3 2
value (5)
O ACSMSK_5 ACS mask size select (5) 0–1 0
P SIM_LEVEL ACS judgment select switch
1–3 2
(density difference)
Q TH_ACS5_RT TH_ACS5: Calculation ratio of
the threshold value for 0 – 100 50
reduction
5 digits or A TH_ACS5 ENLARGE ACS judgment threshold value 0 – 134217727 000030000 B
less setting 5 (for enlargement) (A3 pixel number)
COLOR AE 4 digits or A SW_MODE1 ON Base detection of auto text 0– 1 1 A
less setting OFF document 1 0
B SW_MODE2 ON Base detection of auto text 0– 1 1
OFF mesh document 1 0
C SW_MODE3 ON Base detection of auto text-on- 0– 1 1
OFF mesh document 1 0
D SW_MODE4 ON Base detection of auto mesh 0– 1 0
OFF document 1 0
E SW_MODE5 ON Base detection of auto photo 0– 1 0
OFF document 1 0
F SW_MODE6 ON Base detection of auto text/ 0– 1 0
OFF photo document 1 0
G SW_MODE7 ON Base detection of auto other 0– 1 0
OFF document 1 0
H TH_MAX_MONO Monochrome base detection 0 – 32
17
threshold value
I TH_MAX_COLOR Color base detection threshold 0 – 32
17
value
J SW_NEWS Newspaper base forcible 0–1
0
removal switch
K SW_MODE_SCR1 Mesh area base judgment 1–3
3
switch
L SW_MODE_SCR2 Mesh area base removal select 0–1
0
switch
M SW_MODE_MIX Auto other document base 1–2
2
detection switch
N SW_HOSEI Correction table correction 0 – 8 (-4 – +4) 4
5 digits or A TH_MODE_SCR Mesh ratio threshold value 0 – 10000 03000 B
less setting B TH_SITAJI_SCR Base mesh threshold value 0 – 10000 03000

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 76

 Default Screen
Category Item Display Content Set range/Number of digits
value type
ORG RECOG 4 digits or A MVSTRSEL REDUCE Text pixel judgment result 0–2 0 A
less setting select register (for reduction)
B MVSTRSEL ENLARGE Text pixel judgment result 0–2 0
select register (for
enlargement)
C PSEL1 REDUCE Photographic paper judgment 0–1 0
table select register for each
signal (for reduction)
D PSEL1 ENLARGE Photographic paper judgment 0–1 0
table select register for each
signal (for enlargement)
E PSEL2 REDUCE Photographic paper pixel final 0–2 0
judgment table select register
(for reduction)
F PSEL2 ENLARGE Photographic paper pixel final 0–2 0
judgment table select register
(for enlargement)
G BUSYSEL REDUCE Frequency comparison value 0–1 1
select register (for reduction)
H BUSYSEL ENLARGE Frequency comparison value 0–1 1
select register (for
enlargement)
I HTSEL REDUCE AREA Mesh Area 0– 0 1
judgment separation 1
result select mesh
(for reduction) judgment
result
ORG Document 1
discrimination
mesh
judgment
result
J HTSEL ENLARGE AREA Mesh Area 0– 0 1
judgment separation 1
result select mesh
(for judgment
enlargement) result
ORG Document 1
discrimination
mesh
judgment
result
K ASEL REDUCE Integrated judgment priority 0 – 23 16
select register (for reduction)
L ASEL ENLARGE Integrated judgment priority 0 – 23 16
select register (for
enlargement)
M HSTSEL REDUCE Histogram division fluctuation 0–3 0
register (for reduction)
N HSTSEL ENLARGE Histogram division fluctuation 0–3 0
register (for enlargement)
O HSTSEL2 REDUCE Max. density difference 0–3 3
histogram division fluctuation
register (for reduction)
P HSTSEL2 ENLARGE Max. density difference 0–3 3
histogram division fluctuation
register (for enlargement)
Q TH_SUM_BETARGB Threshold value of all divisions 0 – 32 6
of background high level
number (for base)
R TH_BETA_SUB Monochrome base judgment 0 – 32 5
threshold value
S TH_WHITE_BETA White base judgment threshold 0 – 32 25
value
T TH_GRAY_BETA1 Gray base judgment threshold 0 – 32
18
value 1
U TH_GRAY_BETA2 Gray base judgment threshold 0 – 32 25
value 2
V TH_NOISE REDUCE Mesh noise threshold value (for 0 – 32 10
reduction)
W TH_NOISE ENLARGE Mesh noise threshold value (for 0 – 32 10
enlargement)
X SW_SCR1 Mesh ratio judgment switch 0–1 0
Y SW_SCR2 Mesh judgment switch 0–1 0

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 77

 Default Screen
Category Item Display Content Set range/Number of digits
value type
ORG RECOG 4 digits or Z TH_HTFE Threshold value of high 0–3 A
0
less setting number of lines
AA SW_TSCR Text-on-mesh judgment switch 0–1 1
AB TH_SUM_PHOTO_RGB Threshold value of all divisions 0 – 32 15
of background high level
number (photographic paper)
AC TH_BETA_RT TH_BETA: Calculation ratio of 0 – 100 50
the threshold value for
reduction
AD TH_SCR_RT TH_SCR: Calculation ratio of 0 – 100 50
the threshold value for
reduction
AE TH_SCR_CNT_RT TH_SCR_CNT: Calculation 0 – 100 50
ratio of the threshold value for
reduction
AF TH_TSCR_ CNT_RT TH_TSCR_ CNT: Calculation 0 – 100 50
ratio of the threshold value for
reduction
AG TH_TEXT_RT TH_TEXT: Calculation ratio of 0 – 100 50
the threshold value for
reduction
AH TH_PHOTO_RT TH_PHOTO: Calculation ratio 0 – 100 50
of the threshold value for
reduction
AI TH_BETA_PHT_RT TH_BETA_PHT: Calculation 0 – 100 50
ratio of the threshold value for
reduction
5 digits or A TH_BETA ENLARGE Threshold value to detect high 0 – 134217727 1000000 B
less setting level number division in (A3 pixel number)
background pixel histogram
(base) (for enlargement)
B TH_SCR ENLARGE Mesh high level number 0 – 134217727 20000
threshold value (for (A3 pixel number)
enlargement)
C TH_SCR_RATE Threshold value for mesh ratio 0 – 10000 04500
D TH_SCR_CNT EL Threshold value (for 0 – 134217727 000800000
enlargement) for the mesh dot (A3 pixel number)
counter value
E TH_MANSEN_RATE Ten-thousand line/print area 0 – 10000 1500
judgment threshold value
F TH_TSCR_RATE Threshold value for ratio of text 0 – 10000 00300
on mesh dots
G TH_TSCR_CNT EL Threshold value for counter 0 – 134217727 000010000
value of text on mesh (for (A3 pixel number)
enlargement)
H TH_TEXT ENLARGE Threshold value of text 0 – 134217727 000050000
judgment (for enlargement) (A3 pixel number)
I TH_PHOTO ENLARGE Threshold value of 0 – 134217727 000050000
photography judgment (for (A3 pixel number)
enlargement)
J TH_BETA_RATE Background ratio threshold 0 – 10000 03000
value
K TH_BETA_PHT_EL Threshold value to detect high 0 – 134217727 100000
density section in background
pixel histogram (photograph)
(for enlargement)
L TH_OTHER Text judgment threshold value 0 – 10000 07000
(for reduction)
SCR RECOG 4 digits or A THBAVEM1 REDUCE Threshold value 1 for 13 x 7 0 – 255 170 A
less setting mask average value (for
reduction)
B THBAVEM1 ENLARGE Threshold value 1 for 13 x 7 0 – 255 170
mask average value (for
enlargement)
C THBAVEM2 REDUCE Threshold value 2 for 13 x 7 0 – 255 105
mask average value (for
reduction)
D THBAVEM2 ENLARGE Threshold value 2 for 13 x 7 0 – 255 105
mask average value (for
enlargement)
E THBAVEM3 REDUCE Threshold value 3 for 13 x 7 0 – 255 50
mask average value (for
reduction)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 78

 Default Screen
Category Item Display Content Set range/Number of digits
value type
SCR RECOG 4 digits or F THBAVEM3 ENLARGE Threshold value 3 for 13 x 7 0 – 255 50 A
less setting mask average value (for
enlargement)
G CMSUB1 REDUCE Adjustment value 1 for 13 x 7 0 – 255 55
mask average value (for
reduction)
H CMSUB1 ENLARGE Adjustment value 1 for 13 x 7 0 – 255 55
mask average value (for
enlargement)
I CMSUB2 REDUCE Adjustment value 2 for 13 x 7 0 – 255 0
mask average value (for
reduction)
J CMSUB2 ENLARGE Adjustment value 2 for 13 x 7 0 – 255 0
mask average value (for
enlargement)
K MREVSEL REDUCE High line number judgment 0–3 0
method select (for reduction)
L MREVSEL ENLARGE High line number judgment 0–3 0
method select (for
enlargement)
M MSDSEL REDUCE Output select when 0–1 0
MREVSEL=3 (for reduction)
N MSDSEL ENLARGE Output select when 0–1 0
MREVSEL=3 (for enlargement)
O THAVEFM1 REDUCE THAVEFM1 for reduction 0 – 720 65
P THAVEFM1 ENLARGE THAVEFM1 for enlargement 0 – 720 96
Q THAVEFM2 REDUCE THAVEFM2 for reduction 0 – 720 54
R THAVEFM2 ENLARGE THAVEFM2 for enlargement 0 – 720 80
S THAVEFM3 REDUCE THAVEFM3 for reduction 0 – 720 48
T THAVEFM3 ENLARGE THAVEFM3 for enlargement 0 – 720 70
U THAVEM1 REDUCE THAVEM1 for reduction 0 – 720 65
V THAVEM1 ENLARGE THAVEM1 for enlargement 0 – 720 96
W THAVEM2 REDUCE THAVEM2 for reduction 0 – 720 54
X THAVEM2 ENLARGE THAVEM2 for enlargement 0 – 720 80
Y THAVEM3 REDUCE THAVEM3 for reduction 0 – 720 48
Z THAVEM3 ENLARGE THAVEM3 for enlargement 0 – 720 70
SEGMENT 4 digits Text-on- A MESH_TXT ON HT (Auto) text on mesh 0– 0 0 A
or less mesh ON/ 3 (THROUGH) (THROUGH)
setting OFF (auto/ B MESH_TXT/HT1 (Auto) text mesh (Under 1, Line 1 (OFF)
manual 1)
mode) C MESH_TXT/HT2 (Auto) text mesh (Under 2, Line 2 (ON1)
1)
D MESH_TXT/PR (Manual) test print 3 (ON2)
Print E PR_TXT ON HT (Auto) Text on mesh 0– 0
document 2 (THROUGH)
text F PR_TXT/HT1 (Auto) text mesh (Under 1, Line 1(ON1)
detection 1, 2)
level G PR_TXT/HT2 (Auto) text mesh (Under 1, Line 2 (ON2)
1, 2)
H PR_TXT/PR (Manual) Text print 3 (ON3)
I PR_CHECK1(*2) ON Check button for investigation 0– 0 0
OFF [(Auto) text on mesh] 1 1
J PR_CHECK2(*2) ON Check button for investigation 0– 0 0
OFF [(Auto) Text mesh (Under 2, 1 1
Line 1, 2)]
K PR_CHECK3(*2) ON Check button for investigation 0– 0 0
OFF [(Auto) Text mesh (Under 2, 1 1
Line 1, 2)]
L PR_CHECK4(*2) ON Check button for investigation 0– 0 0
OFF [(Manual) text print] 1 1
M THWMAX(*2) THWMAX (Print document text 0 – 255 220
detection level)
N THWMIN(*2) THWMIN (Print document text 0 – 255 153
detection level)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 79

 Default Screen
Category Item Display Content Set range/Number of digits
value type
SEGMENT 4 digits Chroma O COLOR_PRINT MODE Print mode 0– 0 0 A
or less saturation/ 3 (THROUGH) (THROUGH)
setting No Chroma 1(OFF)
saturation P COLOR_PHOTO MODE Photographic paper mode 2(ON1)
judgment 3(ON2)
level
Q COLOR_CHECK1 ON Check button for investigation 0– 0 0
(*3) OFF (Print mode) 1 1
R COLOR_CHECK2 ON Check button for investigation 0– 0 0
(*3) OFF (Photographic paper mode) 1 1
S THILVC(*3) THILVC (Chromatic/Achromatic 0 – 255 166
judgment level print system
mode)
T THACOLL(*3) THACOLL (Chromatic/ 0 – 255 21
Achromatic judgment level print
system mode)
U THACOLH(*3) THACOLH (Chromatic/ 0 – 255 18
Achromatic judgment level print
system mode)
V THILVG(*3) THILVG (Chromatic/ 0 – 255 118
Achromatic judgment level print
system mode)
W THAGRYL(*3) THAGRYL (Chromatic/ 0 – 255 14
Achromatic judgment level print
system mode)
X THAGRYH(*3) THAGRYH (Chromatic/ 0 – 255 20
Achromatic judgment level print
system mode)
Color auto Y SCREEN FILTER H Filter Heavy 1–3 3 (Auto)
document LEVEL emphasis emphasis
recognition L setting Light
filter emphasis
emphasis AUTO Auto
setting
Specification Z SEG_ACT_A_OTR ON (Auto) Other mode 0– 1 1
mode area OFF 1 0
separate AA SEG_ACT_M_PRT1 ON (Manual) Print document mode 0– 1 1
(ON/OFF OFF (Text) 1 0
setting)
AB SEG_ACT_M_PRT2 ON (Manual) Print document mode 0– 1 1
OFF (Text/Print) 1 0
INDEX AC SEG_DS_A_TOH (Auto) Text on mesh 0 – 512 0
direct (Manual) Text print 0 – 512
AD SEG_DS_M_TPP
appointment
Quantity of AE SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK1 Text print system, Black text 1 0 – 20 10
detection AF SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK2 Text print system, Black text 2 0 – 20 10
adjustment AG SEG_ADJ_TPP_CL Text print system, Color text 0 – 20 10
AH SEG_ADJ_TPP_PR Text print system, Chromatic/ 0 – 20
10
Achromatic
AI SEG_ADJ_TPP_MESH Text print system, Mesh 0 – 20 10
AJ SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK1 Text system, Black text 1 0 – 20 10
AK SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK2 Text system, Black text 2 0 – 20 10
AL SEG_ADJ_TXT_CL Text system, Color text 0 – 20 10
AM SEG_ADJ_TXT_PR Text system, Chromatic/ 0 – 20
10
Achromatic
AN SEG_ADJ_TXT_MESH Text system, Mesh 0 – 20 10
AO SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK1 Other, Black text 1 0 – 20 10
AP SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK2 Other, Black text 2 0 – 20 10
AQ SEG_ADJ_OTR_CL Other, Color text 0 – 20 10
AR SEG_ADJ_OTR_PR Other, Chromatic/Achromatic 0 – 20 10
AS SEG_ADJ_OTR_MESH Other, Mesh 0 – 20 10
AT BKUCR_ACTM (– THROUGH – 99% 0– 0 0
99%) OFF 2 1
ON 2
AU BKUCR_ACTM THROUGH 100% – 199% 0– 0 0
(100% – 199%) OFF 2 1
ON 2
AV BKUCR_ACTM THROUGH 200% – 0– 0 0
(200% –) OFF 2 1
ON 2

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 80

 Default Screen
Category Item Display Content Set range/Number of digits
value type
SEGMENT 4 digits Quantity of AW BKUCR_ACTA (– THROUGH – 99% 0– 0 0 A
or less detection 99%) OFF 2 1
setting adjustment ON 2
AX BKUCR_ACTA THROUGH 100% – 199% 0– 0 0
(100% – 199%) OFF 2 1
ON 2
AY BKUCR_ACTA THROUGH 200% – 0– 0 0
(200% –) OFF 2 1
ON 2
5 digits Text on A MESH_CHECK1 ON Check button for investigation 0– 0 0 B
or more mesh ON/ OFF [(Auto) text on mesh] 1 1
setting OFF (Auto/ B MESH_CHECK2 ON Check button for investigation 0– 0 0
Manual OFF [(Auto) Text mesh (Under 1, 1 1
mode) Line 1)
C MESH_CHECK3 ON Check button for investigation 0– 0 0
OFF [(Auto) Text mesh (Under 2, 1 1
Line 1)
D MESH_CHECK4 ON Check button for investigation 0– 0 0
OFF [(Auto) text print] 1 1
E THED3A(*1) THED3A (Text on mesh ON/ 0 – 65535 1000
OFF)
F THED3B(*1) THED3B (Text on mesh ON/ 0 – 65535 1000
OFF)

(Initial screen)
46-36
0 Purpose : Adjustment
TEST SIMULATION NO.46㧙33 CLOSE
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the fine adjustment of 2-
COLOR AUTO MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS࡮4DIGIT UNDER)
color (Red, Black) copy.
A㧦 0 㧧 THCLMK_1

A: 0 B㧦 0 㧧 THCLBK_1 Section : –
C㧦 0 㧧 ACSMSK_1 Item : Image quality
㨇 0㨪 9 㨉
D㧦 0 㧧 THCLMK_2
Operation/Procedure
   BACK NEXT OK 1) Select a category to be set.
* When [RANGE] (red judgment range), [COEFFICIENT] (out-
(On the screen, [NEXT] is pressed.) put color coefficient) button is pressed to select each cate-
gory, the selected button is highlighted and the set items of
the selected category are displayed.
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-33 CLOSE * Only one button can be selected. The selected button is
highlighted.
COLOR AUTO MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS 5DIGIT OVER)
PRESENT㧦 000010000 In the initial state, [RANGE] is selected.
NEW㧦 SET
2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
TH_ACS5ENLARGE
played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
 BACK NEXT
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
4) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 81

<Set range and default value of each setup>
Color Set Default value
Category Item Display Content
button range C M Y
RANGE (Red judgment range) A PARAMETER O Red adjustment coefficient O — 0 to 6 3
B PARAMETER M Red adjustment coefficient M — 0 to 6 3
C PARAMETER INTENSITY Chroma saturation emphasis coefficient — 0 to 6 3
COEFFICIENT (Output color coefficient) A RED R output color CMY 0 to 255 0 255 255
B GREEN G output color CMY 0 to 255 255 0 255
C BLUE B output color CMY 0 to 255 255 255 0
D CYAN C output color CMY 0 to 255 255 0 0
E MAGENTA M output color CMY 0 to 255 0 255 0
F YELLOW Y output color CMY 0 to 255 0 0 255

0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-36 CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.46㧙37 CLOSE
RED/BLACK COLOR COPY ADJUSTMENT
B&W IMAGE CREATE ADJUSTMENT
A㧦 3 㧧 PARAMETER O
A㧦 35 㧧R/G
A: 3 B㧦 3 㧧 PARAMETER M
A: 35 B㧦 0 㧧B/G
C㧦 3 㧧 PARAMETER INTENSITY

0 6 㨇 0 㨪 99 㨉


RANGE COEFFICIENT OK DEFAULT ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE

46-37 46-39
Purpose : Adjustment Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the BLACK image forming Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the image send sharpness
adjustment. adjustment. (Only when FAX is installed)
Section : Section : FAX
Item : Image quality Item : Image quality
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area. played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted. item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid. operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted. item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid. operation is invalid.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [YES] and [NO] buttons 3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
become active. pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
4) When [YES] button is pressed, [YES] button is highlighted. RAM.
The set value is saved to EEPROM.
<Set range and default value of each setup>
* When [NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the set
value changing screen. Set Default
Item Display Content
range value
5) When [DEFAULT] button is pressed, each set value (ratio) is
A 200 x 100[DPI] 200 x 100[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
reset to the default value and the set value is saved to OFF OFF
EEPROM and RAM. B 200 x 200[DPI] 200 x 200[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
<Set range and default value of each setup> OFF OFF
C 200 x 200[DPI] ON 200 x 200[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
Set Default ON
Item Display Content
range value
D 200 x 400[DPI] 200 x 400[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
A R/G Gray forming setting (R/G) 0 to 99 35 OFF OFF
B B/G Gray forming setting (B/G) 0 to 99 0 E 200 x 400[DPI] ON 200 x 400[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
ON
F 400 x 400[DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
OFF OFF
G 400 x 400[DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
ON
H 600 x 600[DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
OFF OFF
I 600 x 600[DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
ON

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 82

 If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
0 item is shifted.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-39 CLOSE If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
IMAGE SEND SHARPNESS ADJUSTMENT operation is invalid.
A㧦 1 㧧 200 100 DPI OFF
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A: 1 B㧦 1 㧧 200 200 DPI OFF
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
C: 1 㧧 200 200 DPI ON
㨇 0 㨪 2 㨉
D: 1 㧧 200 400 DPI OFF 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for
OK the adjustment is started.
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
46-40 * When [n], [p], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Purpose : Adjustment
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjust-
pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
ment. (Collective adjustment of all the
modes). (Only when FAX is installed) <Set range and default value of each setup>
Section : MFP/FAX Display item & Set Default
Item Content
Item : Image quality Detail of display range value
A AUTO Auto 1 to 99 50
Operation/Procedure
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 to 99 50
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 to 99 50
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared. D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 to 99 50
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 to 99 50
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 to 99 50
the adjustment is started. G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1 1 (AUTO)
MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
EXP2 Exposure 2 3
normal display.
EXP3 Exposure 3 4
* When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted. * Items G are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
<Set range and default value of each setup> Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO
<Reflection to item G after settlement of values>
Display item & Set Default
Item Content When [EXECUTE] key is pressed after changing and settlement of
Detail of display range value
A EXPOSURELEVEL Exposure data value 1 to 99 50 exposure adjustment values A to F, the data are saved to EEPROM
(ALL) (Collective) and RAM and set to item G at the same time.

0
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-41 CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-40 CLOSE
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX㧦NORMAL)
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX㧦ALL)
A㧦 50 㧧 AUTO
A㧦 50 㧧 EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)

A: 50 A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 EXPOSURE1

㨇 1㨪 99㨉 㨇 1㨪 99㨉 C㧦 50 㧧 EXPOSURE2

D㧦 50 㧧 EXPOSURE3

EXECUTE OK EXECUTE OK

46-41 46-42

Purpose : Adjustment Purpose : Adjustment

Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjust- Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjust-
ment (Normal). (Only when FAX is ment (Fine text). (Only when FAX is
installed) installed)
Section : MFP/FAX Section : MFP/FAX
Item : Image quality Item : Image quality
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure

1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area. played in the setting area.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the opera- * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
tion is invalid. item is shifted.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
item is shifted. operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
operation is invalid. item is shifted.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 83

 If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
operation is invalid. normal display.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. * When [n], [p], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared. pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for ton is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
the adjustment is started.
<Set range and default value of each setup>
Item Display item & Detail of display Content Set range Default value
A AUTO Fine/Auto 1 to 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 to 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 to 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 to 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 to 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 to 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Auto/Half tone 1 to 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 1 to 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone 1 to 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone 1 to 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone 1 to 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone 1 to 99 50
M EXECUTE MODE AUTO Print mode Fine/Auto 1 to 12 1 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 Fine/Exposure 1 2
EXP2 Fine/Exposure 2 3
EXP3 Fine/Exposure 3 4
EXP4 Fine/Exposure 4 5
EXP5 Fine/Exposure 5 6
AUTO H_TONE Fine/Auto/Half tone 7
EXP1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 8
EXP2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone 9
EXP3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone 10
EXP4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone 11
EXP5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone 12

* Items M are displayed as "Display item : Detail of display." If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO item is shifted.
<Reflection to item M after settlement of the values> If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed after changing and settlement operation is invalid.
of the exposure adjustment values A to L, the data are saved to 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
EEPROM and RAM and reflected to item M at the same time. * When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
0 current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-42 CLOSE the adjustment is started.
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : FFINE) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
A : 50  AUTO normal display.
A: 50 B : 50  EXPOSURE1 * When [n], [p], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
[ 1~ 99]
C : 50  EXPOSURE2 pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
D : 50  EXPOSURE3
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
EXECUTE OK ton is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.

46-43
Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjust-
ment (Super Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Section : MFP/FAX
Item : Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 84

<Set range and default value of each setup>
Item Display item & Detail of display Content Set range Default value
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 to 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 to 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 to 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 to 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 to 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 to 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/Auto/Half tone 1 to 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 1 to 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone 1 to 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone 1 to 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone 1 to 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone 1 to 99 50
M EXE-CUTE MODE AUTO Print mode Super Fine/Auto 1 to 12 1 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 2
EXP2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 3
EXP3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 4
EXP4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 5
EXP5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 6
AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/Auto/Half tone 7
EXP1 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 8
EXP2 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone 9
EXP3 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone 10
EXP4 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone 11
EXP5 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone 12

* Items M are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display." Operation/Procedure

Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
<Reflection to item M after settlement of the values> The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed after changing and settlement played in the setting area.
of the exposure adjustment values A to L, the data are saved to * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
EEPROM and RAM and reflected to item M at the same time. item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
0
operation is invalid.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-43 CLOSE

EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : SUPER FINE)

If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
A : 50 ; AUTO item is shifted.
A: 50 B : 50 ; EXPOSURE1 If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
[ 1~ 99] C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2
operation is invalid.
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
EXECUTE OK
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
46-44 current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for
the adjustment is started.
Purpose : Adjustment
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjust- normal display.
ment (Ultra Fine). (Only when FAX is
* When [n], [p], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
installed)
pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Section : MFP/FAX
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
Item : Image quality ton is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.

<Set range and default value of each setup>

Item Display item & Detail of display Content Default value Default value
A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 to 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 to 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 to 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 to 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 to 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 to 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/Half tone 1 to 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 1 to 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone 1 to 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone 1 to 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone 1 to 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone 1 to 99 50

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 85

 Item Display item & Detail of display Content Default value Default value
M EXECUTE MODE AUTO Print mode Ultra Fine/Auto 1 to 12 1 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 2
EXP2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 3
EXP3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 4
EXP4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 5
EXP5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 6
AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/Half tone 7
EXP1 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 8
EXP2 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone 9
EXP3 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone 10
EXP4 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone 11
EXP5 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone 12

* Items M are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display." Operation/Procedure

Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
<Reflection to item M after settlement of values> The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed after changing and settlement of played in the setting area.
exposure adjustment values A to L, the data are saved to EEPROM * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
and RAM and set to item M at the same time. item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
0
operation is invalid.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-44 CLOSE

EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : ULTRA FINE)

If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
A : 50 ; AUTO item is shifted.
A: 50 B : 50 ; EXPOSURE1 If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
[ 1~ 99] C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2
operation is invalid.
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
EXECUTE OK
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
46-45 current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for
the adjustment is started.
Purpose : Adjustment
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure level normal display.
adjustment and the individual setting
* When [n], [p], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
(600DPI). (Only when FAX is installed)
the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Section : FAX
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button
Item : Image quality is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.

<Set range and default value of each setup>

Item Display item & Detail of display Content Set range Default value
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 to 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 to 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 to 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 to 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 to 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 to 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/Half tone 1 to 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone 1 to 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/Half tone 1 to 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/Half tone 1 to 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/Half tone 1 to 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/Half tone 1 to 99 50
M EXECUTE MODE AUTO Print mode 600dpi/Auto 1 to 12 1 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 600dpi/Exposure 1 2
EXP2 600dpi/Exposure 2 3
EXP3 600dpi/Exposure 3 4
EXP4 600dpi/Exposure 4 5
EXP5 600dpi/Exposure 5 6
AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/Half tone 7
EXP1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone 8
EXP2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/Half tone 9
EXP3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/Half tone 10
EXP4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/Half tone 11
EXP5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/Half tone 12

* Items M are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."

Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 86

 Operation/Procedure
0 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-45 CLOSE
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX㧦600DPI)
played in the setting area.
A㧦 50 㧧 AUTO

A: 50 * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
B㧦 50 㧧 EXPOSURE1
item is shifted.
㨇 1㨪 99㨉 C㧦 50 㧧 EXPOSURE2
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
D㧦 50 㧧 EXPOSURE3
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE OK
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
46-47 operation is invalid.
Purpose : Setting 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the JPEG compression rate in * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Copy/Scanner (PUSH SCAN). 3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
Section : — pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
Item : Setting

<Set range and default value of each setup>

Category Item Display Content Set range Default value

COPY (COLOR) A COPY (C) LOW Low compression (Color) 0 0 (LOW)
MIDDLE Middle compression (Color) 1
HIGH High compression (Color) 2
COPY (GRAY) B COPY (G) LOW Low compression (Gray) 0 0 (LOW)
MIDDLE Middle compression (Gray) 1
HIGH High compression (Gray) 2
PUSH SCAN (COLOR) C SCAN (C) MIDDLE1 Middle compression mode 1, for compression, Q table (for 0 0 (MIDDLE1)
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 1, for decompression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
MIDDLE2 Middle compression mode 2, for compression, Q table (for 1
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 2, for decompression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
MIDDLE3 Middle compression mode 3, for compression, Q table 2
Middle compression mode 3, for decompression, Q table
PUSH SCAN (GRAY) D SCAN (G) MIDDLE1 Middle compression mode 1, for compression, Q table 0 0 (MIDDLE1)
Middle compression mode 1, for decompression, Q table
MIDDLE2 Middle compression mode 2, for compression, Q table 1
Middle compression mode 2, for decompression, Q table
MIDDLE3 Middle compression mode 3, for compression, Q table 2
Middle compression mode 3, for decompression, Q table

The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-

0 played in the setting area.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46̆47 CLOSE * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
COPY࡮SCAN COMPRESS RATE ADJUSTMENT item is shifted.
A㧦 0 㧧 COPY(C)  㧦 LOW
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
A: 0 B㧦 0 㧧 COPY(G)  㧦 LOW
operation is invalid.
C㧦 0 㧧 SCAN(C)  㧦 MIDDLE㧝
㨇 0㨪 2 㨉
C㧦 0 㧧 SCAN(G)  㧦 MIDDLE㧝
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
OK If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
48 3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
48-1
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
Purpose : Adjustment [BLACK] key.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the magnification adjust- * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to
ment in the scan system (for RSPF). the copy basic screen of simulation.
Section : RSPF/Scanner
Item : Image quality (Size/magnification ratio)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 87

<Set range and default value of each setup> 3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
Set Default
Item Display Content RAM.
range value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN, main scan 1 to 99 50 <Set range and default value of each setup>
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD) Set Default
Item Display Content
range value
B CCD (SUB) SCAN, sub scan 1 to 99 50
magnification ratio A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 to 99 50
adjustment (CCD) B MR (MID) Scanner motor (Reference 1 to 99 50
C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front 1 to 99 50 speed)
surface magnification ratio C MR (LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 to 99 50
adjustment (Main scan) D RSPF (HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 to 99 50
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front 1 to 99 50 (High speed)
surface magnification ratio E RSPF (MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 to 99 50
adjustment (Sub scan) (Reference speed)
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back 1 to 99 50 F RSPF(LO) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 to 99 50
surface magnification ratio (Low speed)
adjustment (Main scan)
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 to 99 50 <Reference speed>
surface magnification ratio HI=248mm/sec
adjustment (Sub scan)
MID=157mm/sec
* When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is LO=78.5mm/sec
increased by 0.02%.
* This adjustment affects PC scanning and other scanning other 0
SIMULATION NO.48㧙05 CLOSE
than copy. TEST

MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT

A㧦 50
0 㧧 MR(HI)

SIMULATION NO.48㧙01 CLOSE

A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 MR(MID)
TEST C㧦 50 㧧 MR(LO)
㨇 1㨪99 㨉
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT D㧦 50 㧧 RSPF(HI))
A㧦 50 㧧 CCD(MAIN)

A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 CCD(SUB)
OK
C㧦 50 㧧 SPF(MAIN)
㨇 1 㨪99 㨉
D㧦 50 㧧 SPF(SUB)

OK 48-6
㩷㩷
Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the rotating speed of each
48-5 motor.
Purpose : Adjustment Section :
Function (Purpose) : This adjustment is executed when a satis- Item : Adjustment
factory result is not obtained when a differ- Operation/Procedure
ent copy magnification ratio is specified and 1) Select a mode to be set.
copying is made after adjustment of the sub
* When [COLOR], [MONO], or [HEAVY] button is selected,
scanning direction image magnification
the selected button is highlighted and the set item of the
ratio with SIM 48-1.
selected mode is displayed.
When there is an error in the copy magnifi-
Only one button can be selected.
cation ratio in reduction copy, the adjust-
ment value of high speed mode is adjusted. In the initial state, [COLOR] is selected.
When there is an error in the copy magnifi- 2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
cation ratio in enlargement copy, the adjust- The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
ment value of low speed mode is adjusted. played in the setting area.
This is the magnification ratio adjustment in * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
the scan system. item is shifted.
Section : RSPF/Scanner If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
Item : Adjustment operation is invalid.
Operation/Procedure If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
operation is invalid.
played in the setting area.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted. * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the 4) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
operation is invalid. pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted. The correction value of the specified motor is changed. The
smaller the correction value is, the slower the speed is, and
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
vice versa. When the value is changed by 1, the speed is
operation is invalid.
changed by 0.1%.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 88

 * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/ * When USB is not connected, "INSERT A STORAGE FIRM-
[BLACK] key. WARE STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to pressed, the display is shifted to the folder or file selection
the copy basic screen of simulation. screen.

<Set range and default value of each setup> 2) When a firmware update folder or file button is pressed, the
display is shifted to the firmware update screen.
Set Default
Item Display Content Mode select * The number of buttons depends on the number of files in the
range value
inserted USB memory.
A RRM Resist motor Color COLOR 1 to 99 50
correction value Monochrome MONO
A folder name or file name is displayed on the button.
Heavy paper HEAVY 54 If the folder name or file name is of more than 34 characters,
B DVM_K/ Developing K Color COLOR 1 to 99 45 only 34 characters are displayed.
BTM motor correction Monochrome MONO For a folder name, "<DIR>" is displayed at the head.
value Heavy paper HEAVY * When [ .. ] button is pressed on the file selection screen, the
C FSM Fusing motor Color COLOR 1 to 99 37 display is shifted to the folder or file selection screen. On the
correction value Monochrome MONO folder or file selection screen, the keys are disabled.
Heavy paper HEAVY 43
* The path of the folder or file is displayed on the title section.
D DM_K Drum K motor Color COLOR 1 to 69 43
correction value Monochrome MONO
If the path is of more than 50 characters, only 50 characters
Heavy paper HEAVY
are displayed.
E DM_CL Drum CL motor Color COLOR 1 to 69 43 3) The current version and the update version are displayed for
correction value Heavy paper HEAVY each firmware.
F PFM Transport motor correction value COLOR 1 to 99 50 4) When a button of the firmware to be updated is selected, it is
*1 highlighted.
G POM Paper exit motor correction value COLOR 1 to 99 50
* When the selected button is pressed again, its selection is
*1
canceled (normal display).
H FUSER Fusing speed switch timing HEAVY 1 to 99 50
SETTING * When [ALL] button is pressed, all the buttons are selected
and highlighted.
*1: Common to COLOR, MONO, and HEAVY paper. The item is * If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
displayed only when COLOR button is highlighted. page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
* Since the belt is driven in cooperation with the developing K grays out and the operation is invalid.
motor (DVM-K) in this machine, the DVM-K also serves as the When there is a page under [p], the display becomes active
belt motor (BTM). and the page is shifted down.When there is no page under
* Adjustment value [p], the display grays out and the operation is invalid.
The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and 5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
vice versa. When the value is changed by 1, the speed is [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
changed by about 0.1%. are changed from gray-out display to active display.
* Paper size detection method for fusing motor (FSM) normal * If no firmware button is selected, [EXECUTE] button is dis-
paper abled.
A3W, A3, WLT, EXTRA, USER EXTRA (420mm or above) are 6) Press [YES] button.
large sizes.
[YES] button is highlighted, and update of the selected firm-
ware is executed.
0 * When [NO] and [EXECUTE] button are pressed, the display
SIMULATION NO.48 06 CLOSE
TEST returns to the firmware select screen. At that time, the
VELOCITY ADJUSTMENT selected firmware remains highlighted, and [EXECUTE] but-
A㧦 50 RRM ton returns to the normal display.
A: 50 B㧦 45 DVM_K/BTM
7) After completion of update, the result is displayed.
C㧦 40 FSM
㨇 1㨪99 㨉
D㧦 43 DM _K When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLET" is dis-
played. In case of an error, "ERROR" and the firmware where
COLOR MONO HEAVY OK the error occurred are displayed.
* The operation cannot be interrupted midway.
* When [OK] button is pressed, the machine is rebooted.
* When [CA] key is pressed on the folder or file selection screen or
49 the file selection screen, the simulation is terminated.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed on the folder or file
49-1 selection screen or the file selection screen, the display returns
to the sub code entry screen.
Purpose : Version-up
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to exit
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the firmware update. the simulation on the file version display screen and the following
Section : — screens before execution, the machine is rebooted.
Item : Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: To update the firmware, set DIP SW 2 on the MFP control
PWB to ON.
1) Insert the USB memory into the machine.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 89

<Update target data firmware>
Display item Item description Number of 0
digits TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE

CONFIG Configuration data 8 digits FIRMWARE UPDATE/usbbd00

ICU (MAIN) ICU main section former half 8 digits <DIR> FOLDER1 FILE1
ICU (BOOTM) ICU boot section main 8 digits FILE2 <DIR> FOLDER2
ICU (BOOTS) ICU boot section sub 8 digits
LANGUAGE Language support data program 8 digits
(Generic name)
.. 1/1
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD 8 digits
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD 8 digits
PCU (BOOT) PCU boot section 8 digits
49-3
PCU (MAIN) PCU main section 8 digits
DESK (BOOT) Desk unit boot section 8 digits Purpose : Version-up
DESK (MAIN) Desk unit main section 8 digits Function (Purpose) : The Operation Manual saved in the hard
A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) boot section 8 digits disk is updated.
A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) main section 8 digits Section : —
FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher boot section 8 digits
Item : Adjustment
FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher main section 8 digits
INSERTER (BOOT) Inserter boot section *1 Operation/Procedure
INSERTER (MAIN) Inserter main section *1 1) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
1KFIN (BOOT) 1K Finisher boot section 8 digits * When USB is not connected, "INSERT A STORAGE E-
1KFIN (MAIN) 1K Finisher main section 8 digits MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
4KFIN (BOOT) 4K Finisher boot section *1 pressed, the display is shifted to the folder selection screen
4KFIN (MAIN) 4K Finisher main section *1 1.
A3LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A3) boot section *1
2) When a operation manual update folder button is pressed, the
A3LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A3) main section *1
display is shifted to the operation manual update screen.
SCU (BOOT) SCU 8 digits
SCU (MAIN) Main section 8 digits * A folder name is displayed on the button.
DSPF (BOOT) DSPF boot section *1 * "<DIR>" is displayed at the head.
DSPF (MAIN) DSPF main section *1 If the folder name is of more than 34 characters, only 34
FAX1 (BOOT) FAX1 line (Boot section) 8 digits characters are displayed.
FAX1 (MAIN) FAX1 line (Main section) 8 digits * When [ .. ] button is pressed on the folder selection screen 2,
FAX OPTION (BOOT) FAX2 line (Boot section) 8 digits the display is shifted to the folder selection screen 1. On the
FAX OPTION (MAIN) FAX2 line (Main section) 8 digits folder or file selection screen, the keys are disabled.
ESCP_FONT ESC/P fonts 8 digits
* The path of the folder or file is displayed on the title section.
PDL_FONT PDL fonts 8 digits
ANIMATION Animation data 8 digits If the path is of more than 50 characters, only 50 characters
IMAGE_DATA Image ASIC data 8 digits
are displayed.
COLOR PROFILE Color profile 8 digits 3) The current version and the update version are displayed.
4) Press [EXECUTE] button.
*1: Not supported for the MX-2300/2700 series.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
<List of error display in case of error end> are changed from gray-out display to active display.
Display item Item description 5) Press [YES] button.
CONF Configuration data [YES] button is highlighted, and update of the selected opera-
ICUM ICU main section former half tion manual is executed.
ICUBM ICU boot section main * When [NO] and [EXECUTE] button are pressed, the display
ICUBS ICU boot section sub returns to the version display screen.
LANG Language support data program (Generic name)
6) After completion of update, the result is displayed.
GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLET" is dis-
PCUB PCU Boot section played. In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed.
PCUM PCU main section * When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTING] key is pressed during
DESKB Desk unit Boot section execution, the operation is interrupted and the machine is reboo-
DESKM Desk unit main section ted.
LCC4B Side LCC(A4) Boot section * When [OK] button is pressed, the machine is rebooted.
LCC4M Side LCC(A4) main section * When [CA] key is pressed on the folder selection screen 1 and 2,
FINB Inner Finisher Boot section the simulation is terminated.
FINM Inner Finisher main section
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed on the folder selec-
FIN1B 1K Finisher Boot section
tion screen 1 and 2, the display returns to the sub code entry
FIN1M 1K Finisher main section
screen.
SCUB SCU
SCUM Main section
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to exit
FAXB FAX1 Boot section the simulation on the version display screen and the following
FAXM FAX1 main section screens before execution, the machine is rebooted.
FAXOPB FAX2 Boot section
FAXOPM FAX2 main section
ESCP ESC/P fonts
PDL PDL fonts
ANIME Animation data
IMGDT Image ASIC data

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 90

<Folder selection screen 1>

0
50
TEST SIMULATION NO.49-03 CLOSE

E-MANUAL UPDATE/usbbd00
50-1

<DIR> FOLDER1 <DIR> FOLDER2 Purpose : Adjustment

<DIR> FOLDER3 <DIR> MANUAL1 Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the copy image position on
print paper in the copy mode and to adjust
the void area (image loss). (The similar
adjustment can be executed with SIM50-05
.. 1/1
and 50-02 (Simple method). (Document
<Folder selection screen 2> table mode))
Section : —
0 Item : Image quality (Image position)
CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.49-03
Operation/Procedure
E-MANUAL UPDATE/usbbd00
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
<DIR> MANUAL2 <DIR> MANUAL3
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
.. 1/1 If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to
the copy basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
[BLACK] key.
<Set range and default value of each setup>
Item Display item Description Set range Default value
A Lead edge adjustment RRCA Document lead edge reference position (OC) 0 to 99 50
value The timing from start of document scan to recognition of the image lead
edge is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* The smaller the set value is, the faster the timing is. The greater the set
value is, the slower the timing is.
B RRCB-CS12 Resist motor ON timing adjustment Standard cassette 1 to 99 50
C RRCB-CS34 The timing to turn ON the resist roller from reception Desk 1 to 99 50
D RRCB-LCC of the resist signal is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) LCC 1 to 99 50
E RRCB-MFT * The smaller the set value is, the faster the timing Manual feed 1 to 99 50
is. The greater the set value is, the slower the
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 to 99 50
timing is.
G Image loss quantity set LEAD Lead edge image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 30
value The lead edge image loss quantity is specified. The difference between the
document lead edge scan start position and the document lead edge
(0.1mm/step))
* The greater the value is, the grater the image loss is.
H SIDE Side image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 20
The side image loss quantity is specified. (Document width – Document
edge scan range) / 2 (0.1mm/step)
(The rear edge image loss quantity is fixed to 0. (Without adjustment))
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
I Void amount setting DENA Print lead edge adjustment 1 to 99 30
The void quantity formed at the paper lead edge is specified. (0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
J DENB Sub scan direction print range adjustment 1 to 99 20
The void quantity formed at the paper rear edge is specified. (0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
K FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void amount adjustment 1 to 99 20
The void quantities formed at the right and left edges are adjusted.
(0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 91

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

4) Measure the distances L1 and L2 on the copied image in the

1
0 unit of 0.1mm, and multiple the distance values with 10, and
TEST SIMULATION NO.50㧙01 CLOSE enter the obtained values. (Be sure to enter L1 and L2
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE
together.)
A㧦 50 㧧 RRCA • L1: Distance between the copy image lead edge position
A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 RRCB-CS12
and the scale of 10mm.
C㧦 50 㧧 RRCB-CS34
0 99 • L2: Distance between the paper lead edge and the copy
D㧦 50 㧧 RRCB-LCC
image lead edge position.
OK
L1

50-2
Paper lead
Purpose : Adjustment edge
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the copy image position on
print paper in the copy mode and to adjust
the void area (image loss). (Simple adjust-
ment)
(Similar to SIM50-01. This simulation pro-
vides the simpler method.)
Section : –
Item : Image quality (Image position)
L2
Operation/Procedure 400% enlargement copy

1) In advance to this adjustment, execute the magnification ratio

adjustment in the sub scanning direction (SIM48-01).
2) Select "TRAY"and set 0 to L1 and L2. Fig. 1
* L1 and L2 are changed to 0, the following adjustment values
are automatically set.
5) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the current entered value
RRCA adjustment value: 50 is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
RRCB adjustment value: 90 6) Make a black copy in 100%, and adjust the rear edge void.
1 (Reference value 50 + paper lead 49 (4.9mm)) * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
3) Place a ruler along the left edge of the document table, and copy basic screen of simulation.
make a black copy in 400%. * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.

<Set range and default value of each setup>

Item Display item Description Set range Default value
A Actual measured L1 Distance between the image lead edge and the scale of 10mm (Platen 400%, 0 to 999 –
value unit of 0.1mm)
B L2 Distance between the paper lead edge and the image lead edge (unit of 0.1mm) 0 to 999 –
C Image loss LEAD Lead edge image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 30
quantity set value The lead edge image loss quantity is specified. Difference between the
document lead edge scan start position and the document lead edge
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
D SIDE Side image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 20
The side image loss (SIDE) is specified. (Document width – Document edge
scan range / 2
(The rear edge image loss quantity is fixed to 0. (Without adjustment))
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
E Void quantity DENA Print lead edge adjustment 1 to 99 30
setting The void quantity at the paper lead edge is specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
F DENB Sub scanning direction print range adjustment 1 to 99 20
The void quantity at the paper rear edge is specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
G FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void quantity adjustment 1 to 99 20
The void quantities at the left and right edges of paper are specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.

A to G:1step = 0.1mm
A. Document lead edge reference position: (L1), B. Paper lead 0
edge positions TEST SIMULATION NO.50-02 CLOSE

Except for A and B, same as the item adjusted with SIM50-01. LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(CALC)
A㧦 60
The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document 㧧 L1

lead edge reference position (RRC-A) and all the paper lead edge A: 60 B㧦 0 㧧 L2

C㧦 30 㧧 LEAD
positions (RRCB-**). 0 999
D㧦 15 㧧 SIDE

EXECUTE

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 92

 * When [n], [p], [OK], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
50-5 [BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM
Purpose : Adjustment and RAM.
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the lead edge adjustment value * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
which affects only the printer print. ton is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Section : Printer * When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
Item : Image quality rence of an interruption, self print is resumed.
Operation/Procedure 4) Check the adjustment pattern image position.
Measure the dimensions of void area in the right and the left
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
frame direction of the adjustment pattern to check that the
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- dimensions are as follows:
played in the setting area.
If DEN-C = 3.0 r 2.0mm and DEN-B = 3.0 r 2.0mm, there is no
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and need to adjust.
item is shifted.
If the values are as shown above, there is no need to adjust.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
If not, go to step 5.
operation is invalid.
5) Change the adjustment values of A (DEN-C) and B (DEN-B).
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted. When the adjustment value of A (DEN-A) is decreased by 1,
the sub scanning direction print start position is shifted toward
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
the paper lead edge by 0.1mm.
operation is invalid.
When the adjustment value of B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1,
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
the paper transport direction print range is extended toward
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared. the rear edge by 0.1mm.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and print- 6) Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the conditions of step 4 are satisfied.
ing for adjustment is started with the current set value.
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.

<Description of item>
Display item & Default
Item Description of item Set range Remark
Detail of display value
A DEN-C Printer print lead edge 1 to 99 30 Adjustment value to fit with the print lead edge for the printer.
adjustment When the adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the
printer print start position is shifted toward the lead edge in the
paper transport direction by 0.1mm.
B DEN-B Sub scanning direction print 1 to 99 20 Void quantity formed at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment
range adjustment value of Item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the sub scanning
direction print range adjustment value in the paper transport
direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void quantity 1 to 99 20 Adjustment of void quantity formed at the right and left edges of
adjustment paper. The greater the value is, the greater the void quantity is.
D MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 to 99 1
E PAPER MFT Cassette Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 select Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
F DUPLEX YES Duplex print Selected 0 to 1 0 1 (NO)
NO select Not selected 1

* Items E and F are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."

50-6
Example: PAPER:CS1
Purpose : Adjustment
0 Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the copy image position on
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-05 CLOSE the print paper in the copy mode and to
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE (PRINTER)
adjust the void area (image loss). (The sim-
A : 30 ; DEN-C ilar adjustment can be executed with
A: 30 B : 20 ; DEN-B SIM50-7 (Simple method).) (RSPF mode)
[ 1~99 ]
C : 20 ; FRONT/REAR Section : RSPF
D: 1 ; MULTI COUNT
Item : Image quality
EXECUTE OK Operation/Procedure
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 93

 If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted. 50-7
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the Purpose : Adjustment
operation is invalid. Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the copy image position on
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. print paper in the copy mode and to adjust
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. the void area (image loss). (The similar
adjustment can be executed with SIM50-6
3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
(Simple type).) (RSPF mode)
pressed, it is highlighted and the currently entered data are
saved to EEPROM and RAM. Section : RSPF
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the Item : Image quality
copy basic screen of simulation. Operation/Procedure
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] 1) In advance, execute the SPF sub scanning direction magnifi-
key. cation ratio (SIM48-01).
<Set range and default value of each setup> 2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
The highlighted section is and the value is displayed in the set-
Set Default
Item Display item Description ting area.
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 to 99 50 * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
document item is shifted.
scan start If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
position
operation is invalid.
adjustment
(CCD) If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 to 99 50 item is shifted.
document If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
scan start operation is invalid.
position
3) Set L4 and L5 to 0.
adjustment
(CCD) When the values of L4 and L5 are changed to 0, the following
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 to 99 20 adjustment values are automatically set.
loss (SIDE1) image loss Adjustment values of SIDE1, 2: 50
quantity quantity
After completion of calculation, the value of L4/L5 returns to 0.
setting setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 to 99 20 4) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and press [COLOR] or
(SIDE1) side image [BLAC] key to make a copy.
loss quantity 5) Measure the copied image, and enter the measure value of
setting distance A (RSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of 0.1mm.
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface 0 to 99 30
L4 : Distance A (SPF front surface: 200%) (Unit: 0.1mm)
(SIDE1) rear edge
image loss L5 : Distance A (SPF back surface: 200%) (Unit: 0.1mm)
quantity
adjustment
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface 0 to 99 20
loss (SIDE2) image loss
quantity quantity
setting setting
G SIDE2 FRONT_REAR Back surface 0 to 99 20
(SIDE2) side image
loss quantity
setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface 0 to 99 30
(SIDE2) rear edge
image loss
quantity
adjustment

A,B: The greater the value is, the slower the scan timing is.
Distance A
The greater the adjustment values of C to H are, the greater the
image loss is.
A to H: 1 step = 0.1 m
The RSPF rear edge image loss is provided against shade. * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
0 * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-06 CLOSE key.
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(SPF)
A : 50 ; SIDE1

A: 50 B : 50 ; SIDE2

C : 20 ; LEAD EDGE
[ 1~ 99 ]
D : 20 ; FRONT_REAR

OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 94

 1 : Dec. 15 2005
<Description of item>
Set Default 0
Item Display item Description of item
range value TEST SIMULATION NO.50-07 CLOSE
A L4 Distance from the front 0 to 999 — LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT (SPF CALC.).
surface image lead edge to A 0 L4
the scale of 10mm (SPF C: 20 B 0 L5

200%, unit 0.1mm) C 20 LEAD_EDGE(SIDE1)

0 999
B L5 Distance from the back 0 to 999 — D 20 FRONT_REAR(SIDE1)

surface image lead edge to

the scale of 10mm (SPF EXECUTE
200%, unit 0.1mm)
C LEAD_EDGE Image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 20
(SIDE1) SIDE1
50-10
D FRONT_REAR 0 to 99 20
(SIDE1) Purpose : Adjustment
E TRAIL_EDGE 0 to 99 30 Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the print off-center for each
(SIDE1) tray.
F LEAD_EDGE Image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 20
Image print center position adjustment
(SIDE2) SIDE2
(Adjusted for each paper feed section.)
G FRONT_REAR 0 to 99 20
(SIDE2) Section : –
H TRAIL_EDGE 0 to 99 30 Item : Image quality (Image position)
(SIDE2) Operation/Procedure
A to H: 1step=0.1mm 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
C to H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
increased. played on the set setting area.
* It is linked with items C to H of SIM50-6. * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
<Calculation formula> item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
( L4 - Correction value *1
SIDE1 adjustment value: Old set value -
2* 2 ) operation is invalid.
1
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
SIDE2 adjustment value: Old set value + (L5 - Correction
2* 2
value *
) item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
*1: Correction value = (Measurement reference 10mm –
operation is invalid.
Lead edge image loss set value) x 10 x (Magnification ratio/
100) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Example of calculation: 140 = (100 – 30) x 10 x (200%/100) * When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
1
*2: 2 = (Magnification ratio 200%/100) 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and print-
ing for adjustment is started with the current set value.
1 If L4 = 0, do not make calculation of SIDE1, but adjust the value of
L5. After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
If L5 = 0, do not make calculation of SIDE2, but adjust the value of
L4. * When [n], [p], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
If L4 = L5 = 0, the adjustment values of SIDE1 and SIDE2 are the
default values. * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of
an interruption, self printing is resumed.

<Description of item>
Item Display item & Detail of display Item content Set range Default value Writing
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 to 140 100 YES
B MFT Print off-center adjustment value (manual feed) 1 to 99 50 YES
C CS1 Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 1) 1 to 99 50 YES
D CS2 Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 2) 1 to 99 50 YES
E CS3 Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 3) 1 to 99 50 YES
F CS4 Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 4) 1 to 99 50 YES
G LCC Print off-center adjustment value (LCC) 1 to 99 50 YES
H ADU Print off-center adjustment value (ADU) 1 to 99 50 YES
I MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1 NO
J PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1) NO
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
K DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Selected 0 to 1 0 1 (NO) NO
NO Not selected 1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 95

* Item A adjustment position Shift the pixel center position. The default value of the center is
The main scanning direction paper size is greater than 216mm: 3750 pixels.
o Reference: Main scanning direction print front image center A to C: When the adjustment value is increased, the center position
position (160mm from the BD sensor in the LSU unit) r120mm in is shifted to the rear side. 1step=0.1mm
the main scanning direction
The main scanning direction paper size is 257mm or less: 0
SIMULATION NO.50㧙12 CLOSE
Reference: Main scanning direction print front image center posi- TEST

tion (160mm from the BD sensor in the LSU unit) r60mm in the ORIGINAL CENTER OFFSET SETUP
main scanning direction A㧦 50 㧧 OC

* Adjustment direction A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 SPF(SIDE1)

C㧦 50 㧧 SPF(SIDE2)
+ direction: Enlargement of magnification ratio 㨇 1㨪 99 㨉

- direction: Reduction of magnification ratio

* When the adjustment value of item B to H is decreased by 1, the OK
main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
* When the adjustment value of item B to H is increased by 1, the
main scanning print position is shifted to the rear side by 0.1mm. 50-20
* Items J and K are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display." Purpose : Adjustment
Example: PAPER:CS1 Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the manual adjustment of
the main scanning direction registration
0 (color shift). (Backup value input)
TEST SIMULATION NO.50㧙10 CLOSE Section :
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP Item : Image quality
A㧦100 㧧 BK-MAG
Operation/Procedure
A: 100 B㧦50 㧧 MFT

㨇 60㨪140 㨉
C㧦50 㧧 CS1
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
D㧦50 㧧 CS2

EXECUTE OK played on the set setting area.

* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
50-12
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
Purpose : Adjustment operation is invalid.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the scan image off-center If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
position adjustment. (Adjusted for each item is shifted.
scan mode.)
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
Section : operation is invalid.
Item : Image quality (Image position) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure * When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis- currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and RAM. Then
played on the set setting area. the main scanning direction registration adjustment pattern is
printed.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted. After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid. 4) When [n], [p], [OK], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK]
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
item is shifted. * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
ton is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid. * When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
rence of an interruption, self printing is resumed.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
<Set range and default value of each setup>
Set Default
Item Display item Set range
value value
A OC OC document off-center 1 to 99 50
adjustment
B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface off-center 1 to 99 50
adjustment
C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface off-center 1 to 99 50
adjustment

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 96

<Description of item>
Item Display item & Detail of display Description of item Set range Default value Writing
A CYAN (FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Cyan laser writing position F side)
B CYAN (REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Cyan laser writing position R side)
C MAGENTA (FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Magenta laser writing position F side)
D MAGENTA (REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Magenta laser writing position R side)
E YELLOW (FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Yellow laser writing position F side)
F YELLOW (REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Yellow laser writing position R side)
G MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1 NO
H PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 3 (CS2) NO
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
I DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Selected 0 to 1 0 1 (NO) NO
NO Not selected 1

* Items H and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display." * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
Example: PAPER:CS1 item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
0 operation is invalid.
TEST SIMULATION NO.50㧙20 CLOSE If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR DIRECTION
A㧦100 㧧 CYAN(FRONT) If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
A: 100 B㧦100 㧧 CYAN(REAR) operation is invalid.
㨇 1㨪199 㨉
C㧦100 㧧 MAGENTA(FRONT)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
D㧦100 㧧 MAGENTA(REAR)
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
EXECUTE OK
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and RAM. Then
the main scanning direction registration adjustment pattern is
printed.
50-21
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
Purpose : Adjustment normal display.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the manual adjustment of * When [n], [p], [OK], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
the sub scanning registration (color shift). [BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM
(Backup value input) and RAM.
Section : — * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
Item : Image quality pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Operation/Procedure * When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of
an interruption, self printing is resumed.
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
played on the set setting area.

<Description of item>
Item Display item & Detail of display Description Set value Default value Writing
A CYAN Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Cyan drum o Black drum)
B MAGENTA Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Magenta drum o Black drum)
C YELLOW Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Yellow drum o Black drum)
D MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1 NO
E PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1) NO
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
F DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Selected 0 to 1 0 1 (NO) NO
NO Not selected 1

* Items E and F are displayed as "Display item : Detail of display."

Example: PAPER:CS1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 97

 Operation/Procedure
0 1) Select the mode. (In this example, [REGIST] is selected.)
TEST SIMULATION NO.50㧙21 CLOSE
* Press the button to select a category. The selected button is
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING DIRECTION highlighted. The set item of the selected button is displayed.
A㧦100 㧧 CYAN
* Only one button can be selected. The selected button is
A: 100 B㧦100 㧧 MAGENTA

C㧦100 㧧 YELLOW
highlighted. In the initial state, [ALL] button is selected.
㨇 1㨪199 㨉
D㧦 1 㧧 MULTICOUNT
* If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
EXECUTE OK grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
50-22 display grays out and the operation is invalid.
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
Purpose : Adjustment
the drum motors are driven to start the adjustment.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the auto adjustment of the
* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor is
main/sub scan the main/sub registration.
stopped and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal dis-
(Print on the belt/ Scan with the registration
play. The adjustment result is displayed.
sensor (photo sensor)
MAIN, SUB:
Image registration adjustment (Auto adjust-
ment) adjustment image quality image posi- After the adjustment, the adjustment value is displayed.
tion ( ) Difference from the previous value.
Section : – Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)
Item : Image quality PHASE:
The number assigned to the phase is displayed.
( ) Difference from the previous value.

<Display items and contents in normal end>

Default
Button Display Content Display Remark
value
ALL (All REGIST (Auto MAIN F C Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 – 100.0 Same item with SIM50-20
execution (Both registration direction (Cyan laser writing position F side) 199.0 *
of the auto adjustment is M Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 – 100.0 However, the adjustment
registration executed.) direction (Magenta laser writing position F 199.0 accuracy is in the unit of
adjustment and side) r0.1 dot. (The adjustment
the auto phase Y Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 – 100.0 accuracy of 50-20, -21 is
adjustment are direction (Yellow laser writing position F side) 199.0 in the unit of r1.0dot.)
executed.) MAIN R C Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 – 100.0
direction (Cyan laser writing position R side) 199.0
M Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 – 100.0
direction (Magenta laser writing position R 199.0
side)
Y Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 – 100.0
direction (Yellow laser writing position R side) 199.0
SUB C Registration adjustment value sub scan 1.0 – 100.0
direction (Cyan drum o Black drum) 199.0
M Registration adjustment value sub scan 1.0 – 100.0
direction (Magenta drum o Cyan drum) 199.0
Y Registration adjustment value sub scan 1.0 – 100.0
direction (Yellow drum o Magenta drum) 199.0
DLUM POS PHASE Phase adjustment Angle step 1–8 2 Same item with SIM 44-31
(Auto phase value BK o CL 0q (1) o 45q (2) o 90q (3) o 135q
adjustment is (4) o 180q (5) o 225q (6) o 270q
executed.) (7) o 315q(8)

<Error displays and contents in error end>

Error
Error display Error content Detail of content
code
Compulsory - SUSPENDED Door open end Door open during operation
end error - SUSPENDED CA end Pressing [CA] button during operation
- - OFF end Unconfirmed operation (power OFF) during operation
Basic error 1 TONER EMPTY Toner empty BK or all colors toner empty detection
2 TONER BEFORE Other conditions Other conditions
BEHAVIOR
4 SENSOR CALIBRATION Calibration error With 3 times of retry of F or R, the target is not reached.
5 TIME OVER Time error Data is not acquired for 90sec from data acquisition
7 PROCESS CONTROL Process control error Process control error detection

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 98

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

Error
Error display Error content Detail of content
code
Sub scan 10 MAIN BLACK FRONT Number error sub scan BLACK F The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
adjustment 11 MAIN BLACK FRONT Pitch error sub scan BLACK F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
error 15 SUB BLACK REAR Number error sub scan BLACK R The number of pitch data is not in the specified range.
16 SUB BLACK REAR Pitch error sub scan BLACK R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
20 SUB CYAN FRONT Number error sub scan CYAN F The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
21 SUB CYAN FRONT Pitch error sub scan CYAN F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
22 SUB CYAN FRONT Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
CYAN F range.
23 SUB CYAN FRONT Result value error sub scan CYAN F The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
25 SUB CYAN REAR Number error sub scan CYAN R The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
26 SUB CYAN REAR Pitch error sub scan CYAN R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
27 SUB CYAN REAR Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
CYAN R range.
28 SUB CYAN REAR Result value error sub scan CYAN The variation of the calculation result value is over the
R specified allowable range.
30 SUB MAGENTA FRONT Number error sub scan MAGENTA The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
F
31 SUB MAGENTA FRONT Pitch error sub scan MAGENTA F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
32 SUB MAGENTA FRONT Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
MAGENTA F range.
33 SUB MAGENTA FRONT Result value error sub scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
MAGENTA F specified allowable range.
35 SUB MAGENTA REAR Number error sub scan MAGENTA The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
R
36 SUB MAGENTA REAR Pitch error sub scan MAGENTA R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
37 SUB MAGENTA REAR Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
MAGENTA R range.
38 SUB MAGENTA REAR Result value error sub scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
MAGENTA R specified allowable range.
40 SUB YELLOW FRONT Number error sub scan YELLOW F The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
41 SUB YELLOW FRONT Pitch error sub scan YELLOW F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
42 SUB YELLOW FRONT Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
YELLOW F range.
43 SUB YELLOW FRONT Result value error sub scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
YELLOW F specified allowable range.
45 SUB YELLOW REAR Number error sub scan YELLOW R The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
46 SUB YELLOW REAR Pitch error sub scan YELLOW R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
47 SUB YELLOW REAR Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
YELLOW R range.
48 SUB YELLOW REAR Result value error sub scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
YELLOW R specified allowable range.
Main scan 50 MAIN BLACK FRONT Number error main scan BLACK F The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
adjustment 51 MAIN BLACK FRONT Pitch error main scan BLACK F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
error 55 MAIN BLACK REAR Number error main scan BLACK R The number of pitch data is not in the specified range.
56 MAIN BLACK REAR Pitch error main scan BLACK R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
60 MAIN CYAN FRONT Number error main scan CYAN The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
1
61 MAIN CYAN FRONT Pitch error main scan CYAN The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
62 MAIN CYAN FRONT Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
CYAN F range.
63 MAIN CYAN FRONT Result value error main scan CYAN The variation of the calculation result value is over the
F specified allowable range.
65 MAIN CYAN REAR Number error main scan CYAN R The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
66 MAIN CYAN REAR Pitch error main scan CYAN R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
67 MAIN CYAN REAR Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
CYAN R range.
68 MAIN CYAN REAR Result value error main scan CYAN The variation of the calculation result value is over the
R specified allowable range.
70 MAIN MAGENTA FRONT Number error main scan MAGENTA The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
F
71 MAIN MAGENTA FRONT Pitch error main scan MAGENTA F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
72 MAIN MAGENTA FRONT Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
MAGENTA F range.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 99

 Error
Error display Error content Detail of content
code
Main scan 73 MAIN MAGENTA FRONT Result value error main scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
adjustment MAGENTA F specified allowable range.
error 75 MAIN MAGENTA REAR Number error main scan MAGENTA The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
R
76 MAIN MAGENTA REAR Pitch error main scan MAGENTA R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
77 MAIN MAGENTA REAR Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
MAGENTA R range.
78 MAIN MAGENTA REAR Result value error main scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
MAGENTA R specified allowable range.
80 MAIN YELLOW FRONT Number error main scan YELLOW The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
F
81 MAIN YELLOW FRONT Pitch error main scan YELLOW F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
82 MAIN YELLOW FRONT Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
YELLOW F range.
83 MAIN YELLOW FRONT Result value error main scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
YELLOW F specified allowable range.
85 MAIN YELLOW REAR Number error main scan YELLOW The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
R
86 MAIN YELLOW REAR Pitch error main scan YELLOW R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
87 MAIN YELLOW REAR Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
YELLOW R range.
88 MAIN YELLOW REAR Result value error main scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
YELLOW R specified allowable range.
Other error 99 OTHER Other error Other error

(Initial screen or when in normal end) * Select the kind of display with [NEXT] and [BACK] buttons.
* Specify the color with [K], [C], [M], and [Y] buttons. (Depend-
0 ing on the selected kind of data, selection of a color button
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-22 CLOSE cannot be made. In that case, the key entry is disabled.)
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION
* If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
MAIN F MAIN R SUB PHASE page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
C 105.0 (+0.2) 110.0 (-0.1) 103.0 (+0.4) 4 (3) grays out and the operation is invalid.
M 100.0 (+0.0) 99.0 (-0.2) 99.0 (+0.2) If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
Y 98.0 (+0.3) 98.0 (+0.1) 105.0 (+0.0) the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
REGIST DRUM POS ALL EXECUTE 1/1 display grays out and the operation is invalid.
(Adjustment screen) * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
0 * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-22 CLOSE key.
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION
<Display content>
NOW EXECUTING…
1) Registration adjustment confirmation screen
Use [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (No color
specified/C/M/Y).
EXECUTE Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
Press [BLACK] button to display the previous category.
(Error end screen)
2) Phase adjustment status check screen
0 Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-22 CLOSE Y).
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
ERROR : TONNER EMPTY 01
3) Sensor calibration status check (No color specification)
Press [K] button to display the initial screen of K.
Press [NEXT] button to display the category.
EXECUTE
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
4) Sampling status check (1) (KCMY/No color specification)
50-24 Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Y).
Purpose : Adjustment
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the data acquired with the
auto registration adjustment simulation Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
(SIM50-22). 5) Sampling status check (2) (KCMY)
Section : — Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Item : Image quality Y).
Operation/Procedure Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 50-24, the following
screen is displayed.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 100

6) Sampling status check (3) (KCMY)
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/ 0
Y). TEST SIMULATION NO. 50-24 CLOSE

Press [NEXT] button to display the next category. AUTO REGISTRATION DATA DISPLAY
REG_EXE_CNT  00000000
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
REG_SUC_CNT  00000000
7) Sampling status check (4) (KCMY)
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/ REG_CNT    00000000

Y).
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category. K C M Y BACK NEXT 1/1
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
8) Sampling status check (5) (KCMY) Initial screen (Registration adjustment status check screen (No
color specification))
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Y).
50-27
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category. Purpose : Adjustment
9) Sampling status check (6) (KCMY) Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the image loss of scanned
image in the FAX/Scanner mode.
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Y). Section : FAX/Scanner
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category. Item : Image quality
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category. Operation/Procedure
10) Sampling status check (7) (KCMY) 1) Use [FAX] button and [SCANNER] button to select the mode.
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/ 2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
Y). The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category. played on the set setting area.
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category. * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
11) Temperature correction value check screen (CMY) item is shifted.
Press [C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (C/M/Y). If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
item is shifted.
12) Temperature correction value check screen (No color specifi-
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
cation)
operation is invalid.
Press [K] button to display the initial screen (K).
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
4) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
13) Error code status check (No color specification) saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Press [K] button to display the initial screen (K). * When [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category. the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category. * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
<Set range and default value of each setup>
Item Display item Description Set range Default value
FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 30 (3mm)
B setting OC FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss setting 0 to 100 20 (2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 20 (2mm)
E setting SPF FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss setting 0 to 100 20 (2mm)
F SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 20 (2mm)
H setting SPF FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss setting 0 to 100 20 (2mm)
I SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 30 (3mm)
SCANNER A Image loss LEAD_EDGE(OC) OC lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
mode (FAX, B setting OC FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
other than C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
COPY) D Image loss LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
E setting SPF FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
F SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
H setting FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
I SPFSIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)

* A to I: The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the image loss is. 1step=0.1mm

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 101

 Adjustment
0 Adjustment item
menu
TEST SIMULATION NO.50㧙27 CLOSE Engine – BK main scan BK-MAG ADJ
SCANNER/FAX-SEND ALL EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE magnification ratio
A㧦 30 㧧 LEAD_EDGE(OC) MFT Print off-center SETUP/PRINT
A: 30 B㧦 20 㧧 FRONT_REAR(OC) Print lead edge ADJ
㨇 0㨪 100 㨉
C㧦 20 㧧 TRAIL_EDGE(OC) CS1 Print off-center
D㧦 30 㧧 LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Print lead edge
CS2 Print off-center
FAX SCANNER OK
Print lead edge
ADU Print off-center
Print lead edge
50-28 CS3 Print off-center
Purpose : Adjustment Print lead edge
CS4 Print off-center
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the service adjustment,
Print lead edge
the OC adjustment, the BK main scan mag-
LCC Print off-center
nification ration correction, the RSPF
Print lead edge
adjustment, and the print position adjust-
ment (Auto void adjustment (Service instal-
lation adjustment)). 0
Section : — TEST SIMULATION NO.50̆28 CLOSE

Item : Image quality AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE

Operation/Procedure OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ

1) When the machine enters Simulation 50-28, the following SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ
screen is displayed. RESULT DATA
2) Press the button of an item to be adjusted, and the display is
shifted to the adjustment screen. 1/1
* The operating procedures and the display shift for each adjust-
ment and the display, refer to the next page.
50-28
<List of adjustment items>
Purpose : Adjustment
Menu
NO. Content Description Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the OC document lead
display item
edge, off-center, and the sub scan magnifi-
1 OC ADJ OC adjustment OC document lead edge,
off-center, and sub scan
cation ratio. (Auto void adjustment (Service
magnification ratio installation adjustment) (1: OC adjustment))
adjustment Section : —
2 BK-MAG BK main scan BK main scan Item : Image quality
ADJ magnification ratio magnification ratio
correction adjustment Operation/Procedure
3 SPF ADJ SPF adjustment RSPF (front/back) 1) When [OC ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu screen, the
document lead edge, off- screen shown on the right side is displayed.
center, sub scan
2) Select a cassette of self print of the OC adjustment pattern.
magnification ratio
adjustment (Only one cassette can be selected.)
4 SETUP/ Print position Print lead edge adjustment, 3) Press [EXECUTE] button to start self print of the OC adjust-
PRINT ADJ adjustment all-cassette print off-center ment pattern.
(individual cassette, ADU) * During self printing of the OC adjustment
adjustment
After completion of self print, the display is shifted to the OC
5 RESULT Result display Display of the adjustment
result adjustment start screen.
6 DATA Data display Display of data used for the 4) Set the OC adjustment pattern on the OC with the corner refer-
adjustment ence, and cover the black background chart over the OC
adjustment pattern.
<List of adjustment items and adjustment menus> * Set the adjustment pattern in traversal position (A4). Check
Adjustment to confirm that there is no clearance with the document
Adjustment item
menu guide.
Scanner OC Document lead edge OC ADJ * Kind and size of black background charts made with a cut-
Document off-center ting sheet equivalent to 310 x 470 cutting sheet No. 791
Sub scan (Black).
magnification ratio
5) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning of the OC adjust-
J adjustment –
ment pattern.
RSPF SIDE1 Document lead edge SPF ADJ
(front) Document off-center (RSPF) * When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
Sub scan the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the OC
magnification ratio adjustment pattern again.
SIDE2 Document lead edge * During scanning of the OC adjustment pattern and calculat-
(back) Document off-center ing of the adjustment value
Sub scan After completion of scanning, the adjustment value is calcu-
magnification ratio
lated.
After completion of calculation of the adjustment value, the
display is shifted to the result display screen.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 102

 <Adjustment item> After completion of calculation, the display is shifted to the
• OC document lead edge adjustment result display screen.

• OC document off-center adjustment <Adjustment item>

• OC sub scan magnification ratio adjustment • BK magnification ratio adjustment

6) The adjustment result is displayed.
The value of this time is displayed together with the difference
from the previous value in ( ).
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the OC
adjustment pattern again.
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the OC
adjustment pattern is started again.
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to
the top menu screen.
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjust-
ment are displayed.
7) When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the top menu
screen.
* When [BACK] button is pressed, the display returns to the
result display screen.
6) The adjustment result screen is displayed.
The value of this time is displayed together with the difference
from the previous value in ( ).
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the BK
magnification ratio adjustment pattern again.
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the BK
magnification ratio adjustment pattern is started again.
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to
the top menu screen.
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjust-
ment are displayed.
7) When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the top menu
screen.
* When [BACK] button is pressed, the display returns to the result
display screen.

0 0
SIMULATION NO.50̆28 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.50̆28 CLOSE
TEST
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
MFT  CS1  CS2
MFT  CS1  CS2

EXECUTE 1/1
EXECUTE 1/1

50-28
50-28
Purpose : Adjustment
Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the RSPF (Front/Back)
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the BK main scan magnifi- document lead edge, off-center, and sub
cation ratio adjustment. scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service instillation) (Auto void adjustment (Service installation
(2: BK-main scan magnification ratio cor- adjustment) (3: RSPF adjustment))
rection))
Section : RSPF
Section : —
Item : Image quality
Item : Image quality
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) When [SPF ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu screen,
1) When [BK-MAG ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu the screen on the right is displayed.
screen, the following screen is displayed.
2) Select an item to be adjusted. The display is shifted to the cas-
2) Select a cassette for self print of the BK magnification ratio sette select screen for printing the SPF adjustment pattern.
adjustment pattern. (Only one cassette can be selected.)
3) Select a cassette for printing the SPF adjustment pattern.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, self print of the BK mag- (Only one cassette can be selected.)
nification ratio adjustment pattern (print position adjustment
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, self print of the SPF
pattern) is started.
adjustment pattern is started.
* During self print of the BK magnification ratio adjustment
* During self print of the SPF adjustment pattern
pattern
After completion of self print, the display is shifted to the
After completion of self print, the display is shifted to the OC
SPF adjustment screen.
adjustment screen.
5) Load the SPF adjustment pattern to the SPF.
4) Load the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern to the OC.
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the SPF
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the BK
adjustment pattern again.
magnification ratio adjustment pattern again.
6) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning the SPF adjust-
5) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning of the BK magnifi-
ment pattern (front surface).
cation ratio adjustment pattern.
* During scanning of the SPF adjustment pattern (front sur-
* During scanning of the main scan magnification ratio correc-
face) and calculating
tion pattern and calculating the magnification ratio adjust-
ment value After completion of scanning the front surface, calculation of
the adjustment value (front surface) is started.
After completion of scanning, calculation of the adjustment
value is started.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 103

 After completion of calculation of the front surface adjust-
ment value, the display is shifted to the SPF adjustment pat-
tern (back surface) scan start screen.
<Adjustment item>
• SPF document lead edge adjustment front surface
• SPF document off-center adjustment front surface
• SPF sub scan magnification ratio adjustment front surface
7) Load the SPF adjustment pattern to the SPF.
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the SPF
adjustment pattern again.
8) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning the SPF adjust-
ment pattern (back surface).
* During scanning of the SPF adjustment pattern (back sur-
face)
After completion of scanning the back surface, calculation of
the adjustment value (back surface) is started.
After completion of calculation, the display is shifted to the
result display screen.
<Adjustment item>
• SPF Document lead edge adjustment back surface
• SPF Document off-center adjustment back surface
• SPF sub scan magnification ratio adjustment back surface
(RSPF)
9) The adjustment result screen is displayed.
The value of this time is displayed together with the difference
from the previous value in ( ).
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the SPF
adjustment pattern (front/back) again.
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the SPF
adjustment pattern (front/back) is started again.
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to
the top menu screen.
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjust-
ment are displayed.
10) When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the completed
screen.
* When [BACK] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
result display screen.
<List of adjustment items>
Menu display item Content
SIDE1 SPF adjustment front surface
SIDE2 SPF adjustment back surface
ALL SPF adjustment front/back surface
0 * "**"is displayed for an item which is not adjusted yet.
SIMULATION NO.50̆28 CLOSE
TEST
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
    SIDE1  SIDE2
   ALL
1/1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 104
50-28
Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the print lead edge adjust-
ment and the all-cassette print off-center
(individual cassette, ADU) adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation
adjustment) (4: Print position adjustment)
Section : —
Item : Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1) When [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu
screen, the screen on the right is displayed.
2) When an item to be adjusted is selected, the display is shifted
to the cassette select screen for printing the print position
adjustment pattern.
3) Select a cassette for use in print. (Two or more cassettes can
be selected.) The selected cassette is highlighted.
When the selected cassette is pressed again, it returns to the
normal display.
4) Press [EXECUTE] button to start self-printing of the print posi-
tion adjustment pattern.
* During self-printing of the print position adjustment pattern
(CS3)
* When two or more cassettes are selected, continuous self
print (max. 7 sheets) is executed.
After completion of self-printing, the display is shifted to the
print position adjustment.
5) Load the print position adjustment pattern (CS3) to the OC.
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the print
position adjustment pattern again.
6) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning of the print position
adjustment (CS3).
* During scanning of the print position adjustment pattern
(CS3) and calculation
After completion of scanning, calculation of the adjustment
value (CS3) is started.
After completion of calculation, the display is shifted to the
result display screen.
<Adjustment item>
• Print lead edge (CS3/CS4)
• Print off-center (CS3)
* When two or more cassettes are selected, scanning and cal-
culation are repeated for the number of output sheets (3 to
max.7).
7) The adjustment result screen is displayed.
The value of this time is displayed together with the difference
from the previous value in ( ).
* An item which is not installed is not displayed depending on
the option status.
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the print
position adjustment pattern again.
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the print
position adjustment pattern is started again.
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to
the top menu screen.
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for adjust-
ment are displayed.
8) When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the top menu
screen.
* When [BACK] button is pressed, the display returns to the result
display screen. 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50̆28 CLOSE
<List of adjustment items>
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
Menu display item Content OC   㧦 LEAD㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕  OFFSET 㧖㧖㧦㧔㧖㧖㧕 SUB㧖㧖㧦㧔㧖㧖㧕
LEAD Print lead edge adjustment SPF㧔SIDE1㧕   㧦LEAD㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 OFFSET㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 SUB㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖
OFFSET Print off-center adjustment
SPF㧔SIDE2㧕   㧦LEAD㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 OFFSET㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 SUB㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕
ALL Print lead edge, print of-center adjustment
BK-MAG   㧦BK:㧖㧖
㧖㧖

BACK 1/2
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50̆28 CLOSE

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE

    LEAD OFFSET
50-28
   ALL Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the data used for the
adjustment.
1/1 (Auto void adjustment (Service installation
adjustment) (6: data display))
Section : —
50-28 Item : Image quality
Purpose : Adjustment Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the adjustment result. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 50-28, the following
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation screen is displayed.
adjustment) (5: result display)
When [OC˜SPF] button is pressed, the data used for the OC
Section : — adjustment and the SPF adjustment are displayed.
Item : Image quality When [BK-MAG] button is pressed, the data used for BK main
Operation/Procedure scan magnification ratio adjustment are displayed.
1) When [RESULT] button is pressed on the top menu screen, When [PRINT] button is pressed, the data used for the print
the screen on the right is displayed. position adjustment are displayed.
2) When [BACK] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the * If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
top menu screen. page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
* When [OK] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the top
menu screen.

<Data display item and description>

Adjustment item Display range (difference from the
Item display Display content Unit
(page) previous value)
OC˜SPF OC (1) ADJ_OC OC adjustment value, correction 1 to 99 (–99 to +99) STEP
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST) value
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R) OC magnification ratio, lead SCAN: –4.99 to +4.99 SCAN: %
edge data LEAD: –4.9 to +4.9 LEAD: mm
DATA_OFFSET OC off-center data –4.9 to +4.9 mm
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN OC Main scan magnification ratio –4.99 to +4.99 %
correction value
SPF1 (2) ADJ_SPF1 SPF1 adjustment value, 1 to 99 ( r 99) STEP
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST) correction value
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R) SPF1 magnification ratio, lead SCAN: –4.99 to +4.99 SCAN: %
edge data LEAD: –4.9 to +4.9 LEAD: mm
DATA_OFFSET SPF1 off-center data –4.9 to +4.9 mm
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN SPF1 main scan magnification –4.99 to +4.99 %
ratio correction value
SPF2 (3) ADJ_SPF2 SPF2 adjustment value, 1 to 99 (r 99) STEP
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST) correction value
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R) SPF2 magnification ratio, lead SCAN: –4.99 to +4.99 SCAN: %
edge data LEAD: –4.9 to +4.9 LEAD: mm
DATA_OFFSET SPF2 off-center data –4.9 to +4.9 mm
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN SPF2 main scan magnification –4.99 to +4.99 %
ratio correction value
Status (4) PAPER (OC/SPF1/SPF2) Paper information A4, A4R, A3, LT, LTR, WL –
COUNT (OC/SPF1/SPF2) Counter 0 to 255 Times
ERROR Error history – Error code

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 105

 Adjustment item Display range (difference from the
Item display Display content Unit
(page) previous value)
BK-MAG ADJ (BK-MAG)/PAPER/ BK-MAG adjustment value, ADJ: 1 to 199 (–199 to +199) ADJ STEP
COUNT correction value PAPER_SCAN DEVICE: OC, SPF1, SPF2 PAPER: -
PAPER_PAPER_SIZE: A4, A4R, A3, LT, COUNT: Times
LTR, WL PAPER_CS: MFT,CS1,CS2, CS3,
CS4,LCC PAPER_PRINT_DIR: F, R, U, L
COUNT: 0 to 255
BK-MAG BK-MAG data -9.99 to +9.99 mm
SCAN_MAG (SUB, MAIN) BK-MAG scan magnification ratio SUB:-99 to +99 SUB:MAIN:-4.99
correction value MAIN:-4.99 to +4.99 to +4.99
ERROR Error history – Error code
PRINT ADJ_MFT (LEAD/OFST) PRINT adjustment value, LEAD,OFST:-4.9 to +4.9 PAPER_SCAN LEAD, OFST: 㫄㫄
correction value DEVICE: LEAD, OFST: OC, SPF1, SPF2 㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㪑 –
PAPER_PAPER_SIZE: A4, A4R, A3, LT, 㪚㪦㪬㪥㪫㪑 Times
LTR, WL
PAPER_PRINT_DIR: F, R, U, L COUNT: 0
to 255
LEAD (F/C/R) PRINT lead edge data -4.9 to +4.9 mm
OFFSET R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L) Off-center data -4.9 to +4.9 mm
ERROR Error history – Error code

When the value of transfer ON/OFF timing is decreased, the trans-

0 fer ON/Off timing for paper is advanced.
TEST SIMULATION NO.50̆28 CLOSE When the value of transfer ON/OFF timing is increased, the trans-
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE fer ON/Off timing for paper is delayed.
ADJ_OC (SCAN / LEAD / OFST) 㧦50(r99) / 50(r99) / 50(r99) (r1: about 10ms change)(Set range: –490 to +490ms)
SCAN(F /C /R) / LEAD(F /C /R)   㧦r4.99 /r4.99 /r4.99 , r4.9 /r4.9 /r4.9

DATA_OFFSET R(U /M /L) / F(U /M /L) 㧦r

 4.9 /r4.9 /r4.9 , r4.9 /r4.9 /r4.9 0
SCAN_MAIN           㧦r4.99 SIMULATION NO.51㧙01 CLOSE
TEST

OC࡮SPF BK-MAG PRINT OK TRANSCRIPTION TIMING SETUP

A㧦 40 㧧 TC2 ON TIMING

A: 40 B㧦 60 㧧 TC2 OFF TIMING

㨇 1㨪 99 㨉
51
OK
51-1
Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the 51-2
transfer voltage and the separation bias Purpose : Adjustment
voltage. Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the contact pressure of
Section : Process paper against the registration roller (main
Item : Operation (Transfer) unit paper feed section, duplex paper feed,
Operation/Procedure SPF paper feed) on each section. (When
there are much variations in print image
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. positions for paper or when the paper jam
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis- occurs, the adjustment is required.) Used to
played on the set setting area. change the deflection quantity correction
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and value of each specified cassette.
item is shifted. Section : Paper transport
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the Item : Operation
operation is invalid. Operation/Procedure
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
1) Select a category to be set. (In this example, [SIDE1] is
item is shifted.
selected.)
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
* Select a category, and the selected button is highlighted.
operation is invalid.
The set item of the selected category button is displayed.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Only one button can be selected. The selected button is
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. highlighted.
3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is On the initial display, [SIDE1] is selected.
pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
<Set range and default value of each set value> The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
Description of Set Default played on the set setting area.
Item Display item
content range value * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer 1 to 99 40 item is shifted.
voltage ON timing
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
setting
operation is invalid.
B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer 1 to 99 60
voltage OFF timing If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
setting item is shifted.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 106

 If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the 3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
operation is invalid. pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the
copy basic screen of simulation.

<Set range and default value of each set value>

Description of item (Mode, document, paper feed Set Default
Item Button Display item Transport direction
speed) range value
A SIDE1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity – 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (normal, plain paper, HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity – 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (normal, plain paper, LOW)
C NORMAL_ THIN _HIGH RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity – 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (normal, thin paper, HIGH)
D NORMAL__THIN LOW RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity – 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (normal, thin paper, LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity – 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (random, plain paper, LOW)
F RANDOM_ THIN _LOW RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity – 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (random, thin paper, LOW)
A SIDE2 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1 RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity – 1 to 99 50
adjustment value 1(normal, plain paper, HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1 RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity – 1 to 99 50
adjustment value 1(normal, plain paper, LOW)
C NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_2 RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity – 1 to 99 50
adjustment value 2(normal, plain paper, HIGH)
D NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_2 RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity – 1 to 99 50
adjustment value 2(normal, plain paper, LOW)
A ENGIN TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection LT size or less 1 to 99 40
adjustment value (small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection Longer size than the above 1 to 99 40
adjustment value (large size)
C TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection LT size or less 1 to 99 40
adjustment value (small size)
D TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection Longer size than the above 1 to 99 40
adjustment value (large size)
E MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual tray, deflection adjustment value (plain paper, LT size or less 1 to 99 40
small size)
F MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual tray, deflection adjustment value (plain paper, Longer size than the above 1 to 99 40
large size)
G MANUAL HEAVY PAPER1 (S) Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (Heavy LT size or less 1 to 99 25
paper, small size)
H MANUAL HEAVY PAPER1 (L) Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (Heavy Longer size than the above 1 to 99 25
paper, large size)
I MANUAL OHP1 Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (OHP) – 1 to 99 40
J MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value – 1 to 99 40
(Envelope)
K ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, small LT size or less 1 to 99 40
size)
L ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, large Longer size than the above 1 to 99 40
size)
M ADU HEAVY PAPER1 (S) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper, small LT size or less 1 to 99 25
size)
N ENGIN ADU HEAVY PAPER1 (L) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper, large Longer size than the above 1 to 99 25
size)
O DESK(S) DESK, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, small LT size or less 1 to 99 40
size)
P DESK(L) DESK, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, large Longer size than the above 1 to 99 40
size)
Q A4LCC A4LCC, Deflection adjustment value 1 to 99 40

<Expression of (Large size) and (Small size)>

(Small size): The paper length in the transport direction is LT 0
(216mm) or less. TEST SIMULATION NO.51㧙02 CLOSE

(Large size): The paper length in the transport direction is longer REGIST ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
than LT (216mm). A㧦 50 㧧 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH

<Adjustment value> A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW

C㧦 50 㧧 NORMAL_THIN_HIGH
When the adjustment value is increased, the deflection quantity is 㨇 1㨪 99 㨉
D㧦 50 㧧 NORMAL_THIN_LOW
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the deflection
quantity is decreased. (When the adjustment value is changed by OK
 SIDE1  SIDE2 ENGIN
1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 107

 53-7
53 Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to enter the adjustment value of the
53-6 main unit RSPF document tray size adjust-
Purpose : Adjustment ment value. SIM53-06 A/D value manual
input (for RSPF).
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the RSPF document tray
size of the main unit. Section : RSPF
Section : RSPF Item : Operation
Item : Operation Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
1) Set the tray document guide to the max. width position, and The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
press [EXECUTE] key. The button is highlighted and the tray played on the set setting area.
size volume maximum value adjustment is started. * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
* During the adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed. item is shifted.
* After completion of the tray size volume maximum value If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
adjustment, the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM operation is invalid.
and the display is shifted to the tray volume A4R size adjust- If there is any item under [n], an active display is made and
ment value start screen. (Each set value is saved to item is shifted.
EEPROM and RAM at each setting.) If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
2) Set the tray document guide to A4R (11 x 8.5R) width position operation is invalid.
and press [EXECUTE] button. The pressed button is high- 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
lighted and the tray A4R size adjustment is started. * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3) Adjust the tray volume A5R size and the tray size volume min- 3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
imum value according to the above procedures. pressed, the currently entered value is set.
4) After completion of the adjustment, "COMPLETE"is displayed.
<Display item, set range, and default values>
If the adjustment is not completed normally for any rea-
son,"ERROR"is displayed. In that case, the adjustment must Display Default
Item Guide plate position Set range
be executed again. item value
A AD_MAX Maximum position 0 to 1023 791
<Adjustment item and content>
B AD_P1 Middle position (L) 0 to 1023 713
No. Display Content C AD_P2 Middle position (S) 0 to 1023 456
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value D AD_MIN Minimum position 0 to 1023 66
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment * A/D is 10 bit.
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
0
When one of 1-4 in the above table is selected, the guide plate is SIMULATION NO.53-07 CLOSE
TEST
shifted to each position of the four widths of the guide plate shown
in the table below. The value of the document width sensor SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT(MANUAL).
A㧦 791 ; AD_MAX
(RSPF_WIDTH) A/D value is saved to EEPROM.
A: 791 B㧦 456 ; AD_P1

<Guide plate positions and widths on the mechanism and A/D C㧦 713 ; AD_P2
[ 0~ 1023 ]
values to be saved> D㧦 791 ; AD_MIN

Widths on the mechanism A/D value,

OK
Guide plate AB INCHI Code in the code in
No. Remark
position series series figure below the figure
below
1 Maximum 303.3 303.3 WIDTH_MAX AD_MAX
53-8
position Purpose : Adjustment
2 Middle 210 215,9 WITH_P1 AD_P1 A4R OR Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the RSPF scan position.
position (L) LTR
3 Middle 148.5 139.7 WITH_P2 AD_P2 A5R OR
Section : RSPF
position INVR Item : Adjustment
(S) Operation/Procedure
4 Minimum 118 118 WITH_MIN AD_MIN
position 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
2) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered value is
0 set.
TEST SIMULATION NO.53̆06 CLOSE
<Display item, set range and default value>
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT
TRAYVOLMAX TRAY ADJUSTMENT. Set Default
Item Display item Description
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START range value
A ADJUST VALUE SPF scan position 1 to 99 50
adjustment

EXECUTE
• When the set value is increased by 1, the distance between the
home position and the RSPF scan position is increased by
0.1mm.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 108

• When the set value is changed by 1, the position is shifted by 2) With [SW NO.] button highlighted, enter the SW number with
0.1mm. 10-key.
• Since the distance of RRCA-S and RSPF scan position is * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
changed, RRCA and RRCA-S are not changed by this adjust- 3) Press [DATA] button.
ment value.
[DATA] button is highlighted and the current set value is dis-
played.
0 4) With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
TEST SIMULATION NO.53-08 CLOSE
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT
display is switched as shown below.
A㧦 50  ADJUST VALUE

A: 50 [1] o [0]
[0] o [1]
[ 1~ 99 ]
* Entry of 1 to 8 only is effective.
OK
5) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently entered
data are set.
After completion of setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
55
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.55-02 CLOSE
55-1
SCANNER SOFT SW. SETTING.

Purpose : Setting SW NO. 㧦 AAA (SW No.1-16)

Function (Purpose) : Used to set the engine soft SW. DATA 㧦 12345678
12345678
Section : PCU
Item : Operation (Specifications)
Operation/Procedure EXECUTE

1) When the machine enters Simulation 55-01, the screen on the

right is displayed. 55-3
* On the initial screen, [SW-NO.] button is highlighted. Purpose : Setting
2) With [SW NO.] button highlighted, enter the SW number with Function (Purpose) : Used to set the controller soft SW.
10-key. Section : MFP
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. Item : Operation (Specifications)
3) Press [DATA] button. Operation/Procedure
[DATA] button is highlighted and the current set value is dis-
1) When the machine enters Simulation 55-03, the screen on the
played.
right is displayed.
4) With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
* On the initial screen, [SW-NO.] button is highlighted.
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
2) With [SW NO.] button highlighted, enter the SW number with
display is switched as shown below.
10-key.
[1] o [0]
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
[0] o [1]
3) Press [DATA] button.
* Entry of 1 to 8 only is effective.
[DATA] button is highlighted and the current set value is dis-
5) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently entered played.
data are set.
4) With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
After completion of setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
normal display.
display is switched as shown below.
[1] o [0]
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.55-01 CLOSE [0] o [1]
ENGINE SOFT SW. SETTING * Entry of 1 to 8 only is effective.
SW NO. : AAA (SW No.1-16) 5) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently entered
DATA : 12345678 data are set.
12345678
After completion of setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
EXECUTE
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.55-03 CLOSE

MFP SOFT SW. SETTING.

55-2 SW NO. AAA (SW No.1-16)
㧦
Purpose : Setting DATA 㧦 12345678
12345678
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the scanner soft SW
Section : Scanner
Item : Operation (Specifications) EXECUTE

Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 55-02, the screen on the
right is displayed.
* On the initial screen, [SW-NO.] button is highlighted.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 109

 56 56-2
Purpose : Backup
Function (Purpose) : Used to backup the data (user authentica-
56-1
tion data, address book, etc.) of EEPROM,
Purpose : Data transfer SRAM, or HDD to a USB memory and to
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute data transfer. restore the data.
Section : MFP Section : Memory, HDD
Item : Data transfer Item : Data
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item of data transfer. 1) Insert a USB memory into the machine.
* The selected button is highlighted and "ENABLE" is dis- * If a USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STORAGE TO
played in the corresponding display section. THE USB PORT" is displayed. When [OK] button is pressed,
* When another button is selected, the newly selected button the display is shifted to the menu selection screen.
is highlighted and "ENABLE" is displayed in the correspond- 2) Select a desired menu to be executed, and the display is
ing display section. The previously selected button returns to shifted to the execution screen.
the normal display and "DISABLE" is displayed in the corre- * When [HDD EXPORT] or [EEPROM & SRAM EXPORT] is
sponding display section. selected, the display is shifted to the execution screen.
* On the initial screen, [ALL o HDD] is highlighted. Only one 3) Select a file button to be imported, and the display is shifted to
button can be selected. the execution screen.
* If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the * A file name is displayed on the button. If the file name is of
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display more than 70 characters, only 70 characters are displayed.
grays out and the operation is invalid. * The maximum number of buttons is 30 items.
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and 4) Press [EXECUTE] button, and it is highlighted and [YES] and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the [NO] buttons becomes active from the gray-out display.
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
* Display during importing
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
"HDD IMPORT"
[YES] and [NO] buttons become active.
* Display during exporting
3) When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the data of
the highlighted button are transferred. "HDD EXPORT"
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the dis- 5) Press [YES] button, and it is highlighted and importing is exe-
play is shifted to the set item select screen. cuted.
* During execution, "RUNNNING"is displayed in the corre- * When [NO] or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the display is
sponding display section. shifted to the execution screen.
* After completion of execution,"COMPLETE"is displayed in [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
the corresponding display section, and reset is executed * Message during importing
automatically. “IMPORTING THE DATA. PLEASE WAIT...”
If the execution is not completed for any reason,"ERROR"is * Message during exporting
displayed in the corresponding display section. (Rest is not "EXPORTING THE DATA. PLEASE WAIT....."
executed.)
6) When updating is completed, the result is displayed.
<Data transfer item> After normal completion, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
Target data Content In case of an error completion, "EEROR" is displayed.
ALL o HDD All memory contents are transferred to HDD. * When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to
HDD o ALL The contents of HDD are transferred to all the exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted.
memories.
EEPROM o HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
HDD o EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM 0
SRAM o HDD Transfer from SRAM to HDD. TEST SIMULATION NO.56̆02 CLOSE

If, however, a FAX memory or an option memory EXPORT/IMPORT FILING DATA

(memory for FAX) is installed, the data are
HDD EXPORT HDD IMPORT
transferred to HDD together with the contents of the
memory for FAX. EEPROM&SRAM EXPORT EEPROM&SRAM IMPORT
HDD o SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM.
If, however, a FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX)* is installed, the data are
transferred to HDD together with the contents of the 1/1
memory for FAX.

* If FLASHROM and OP.FLASHROM are not installed, transfer is

not executed.

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.56-01 CLOSE

COPY DATA

ALL HDD : ENABLE

HDD ALL : DISABLE

EEPROM HDD : DISABLE

HDD EEPROM : DISABLE

ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE

1/2

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 110

 <SLOT descriptions>
60 SLOT Descriptions
SLOT1 Memory connected to the MFP controller.
Since it is of only the system area, it is excluded from the targets
60-1 of Red/Write check.
Purpose : Operation test/Check SLOT2 Memory connected to the MFP controller.
Read/Write check is executed for some memory area.
Function (Purpose) : Used to check read/write of the expansion
SLOT3 • Option memory connected to the ICU-ASIC.
DIMM installed to the ICU PWB. • Since SLOT4 (standard) memory is not installed, Read/Write
After completion of execution, the result of check cannot be executed.
each slot is displayed on the panel. SLOT4 Standard memory connected to the ICU-ASIC
ICU PWB image DRAM read/write opera-
tion check, check ICU (memory) operation.
0
Section : Image process (ICU) CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.60̆01
Item : Operation
SDRAM READ/WRITE TEST
Operation/Procedure PRESS[EXECUTE] TO START

1) When the machine enters Simulation 60-01, the screen on the

right is displayed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
test is started. EXECUTE
2) During testing, "SLOT-2:NOW EXECUTING..." is displayed.
3) SLOT-2 test completed
4) SLOT-3 test completed 60-2
5) SLOT-4 test completed Purpose : Setting
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display. Function (Purpose) : Used to set the data of onboard SDRAM.
When the test is normally completed,"OK"is displayed. Section :
<Result display> Item :
Result display Detail Operation/Procedure
OK Success 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
NG Fail
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
NG Fail: SLOT4 (standard) is unconnected
played on the set setting area.
(SDRAM IS NOT IN SLOT4) and SLOT3 (option) is connected.
NONE Not installed (including DIMM trouble) * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently set data are set.

<Set range and default value of each set value>

Set Default
Item Display Content
range value
A SETTING ENABLE DISABLE SDRAM setting DDR setting of onboard SPD 0 0
ENABLE change flag DDR setting after the following 1
B.
B NUMBER OF ROW 11BIT ROW address width 0 2
12BIT 1
13BIT 2

C NUMBER OF COLUMN 8BIT COLUMN address width 0 2

9BIT 1
10BIT 2
11BIT 3
12BIT 4
D TWR SETTING VALUE 2CLOCK TWR setting value 0 1
3CLOCK 1
4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 111

 Set Default
Item Display Content
range value
E TRAS SETTING VALUE 4CLOCK TRAS setting value 0 2
5CLOCK 1
6CLOCK 2
7CLOCK 3
F TRC SETTING VALUE 6CLOCK TRC setting value 0 3
7CLOCK 1
8CLOCK 2
9CLOCK 3
10CLOCK 4
G TRCD SETTING VALUE 2CLOCK TRCD setting value 0 1
3CLOCK 1
4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
H TRP SETTING VALUE 2CLOCK TRP setting value 0 1
3CLOCK 1
4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
I TFRC SETTING VALUE 7CLOCK TFRC setting value 0 3
8CLOCK 1
: :
20CLOCK 13
J CAS LATENCY CL=2 CAS latency 0 1
CL=2.5 1
CL=3 2
K TOTAL NUMBER OF MBYTES ONBOARD DDR NONE Total capacity of onboard DDR 0 1
128MBYTE 1
256MBYTE 2
L NUMBER OF ONBOARD-DDR CS-BANK NON Total capacity of onboard DDR 0 1
J CAPACITY 1CHIP SELECT 1
K BUFFER TYPE 2CHIP SELECT 2

<Error list>
0 Display Content Operation
TEST SIMULATION NO.60㧙02 CLOSE LSU TESTRESULT LSU check polygon mirror is Operation
SDRAM SETTING
NG: PG abnormal interruption and
A㧦 0 㧧 SETTING ENABLE㧦DISABLE
end
A: 0 B㧦 2 㧧 NUMBER OF ROW㧦13BIT LSU TESTRESULT LSU check K-colored LD Operation
C㧦 2 㧧 NUMBER OF COLUMN㧦10BIT NG: K emission of light is abnormal interruption and
㨇 0 㨪 1 㨉 end
D㧦 1 㧧 TWR SETTING VALUE㧦3CLOCK

LSU TESTRESULT LSU check CL-colored LD Operation

OK NG: CL emission of light is abnormal interruption and
end

0
61 TEST SIMULATION NO.61̆01 CLOSE

LSU TEST
PRESS[EXECUTE] TO START
61-01
Purpose : Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : The polygon motor rotation and the BD sig-
nal detection are checked. EXECUTE 1/1
Section : LSU
Item : Operation
Operation/Procedure
1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the LSU check is started.
2) When checking is normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
When an error occurs in checking, [NG] is displayed and the
detail is displayed.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 112

61-4 62
Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute self-print of the LSU posi- 62-1
tion adjustment.
Purpose : Data clear
Section : LSU
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the hard disk format
Item : Adjustment (except operation manual area).
Operation/Procedure * Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. Section : MFP (HDD)
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis- Item : Clear
played on the set setting area. Operation/Procedure
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
item is shifted.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
become active.
operation is invalid.
2) Press [YES] button.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted. Execute formatting of the hard disk. [YES] button is high-
lighted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid. * When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
[NO] buttons gray out.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
* When the hard disk formatting is not completed normally,
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and print- "HDD FORMAT NG" is displayed.
ing is started.
* After completion of the hard disk formatting, [EXECUTE]
* After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO]
the normal display. buttons gray out.
* When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is * When [CA] key is pressed during formatting, the operation is
pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When [SYS-
saved to EEPROM and RAM.) TEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, formatting is interrupted
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key and the display returns to the sub number entry screen.
is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted. * When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to exit
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occur- the simulation, the machine is rebooted.
rence of an interruption, printing is resumed.
<Set range and default value of each set item> 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.62㧙01 CLOSE
Display item &
Default HDD FORMAT
Item Detail of Description of item Set range
value
display
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1
B PAPER MFT Cassette Manual 1 to 6 1 3 (CS2)
select feed
CS1 Cassette 1 2
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
CS2 Cassette 2 3 EXECUTE
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6 62-2
Purpose : Operation test/Check
* Item B is displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the partial check of the
Example: PAPER:CS1
hard disk read/write (except operation man-
ual area).
0
SIMULATION NO.61㧙04 CLOSE
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
TEST
Section : MFP (HDD)
LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF PRINT)
A㧦 1 㧧 MULTICOUNT Item : Operation
A: 1 B㧦 3 㧧 PAPER㧦CS2
Operation/Procedure
㨇 1㨪 999㨉 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
EXECUTE OK become active.
2) Press [YES] button.
The procedures (Write o Retrieve o Check for any abnormal-
ity.) are executed.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* When the procedures (Write o Retrieve o Abnormality
check) are not completed normally, "HDD R/W TEST NG" is
displayed.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 113

 * When the procedures (Write o Retrieve o Abnormality
check) are completed normally, [EXECUTE] button returns 62-6
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
Purpose : Operation test/Check
* When [CA] key is pressed during the procedures (Write o
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the HDD self-diagnostics.
Retrieve o Check for any abnormality.), the operation is
interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When [SYS- * Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
TEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is interrupted Section : MFP (HDD)
and the display returns to the sub number entry screen. Item : Operation
Operation/Procedure
0
1) Select an item to execute the self-diagnostics.
TEST SIMULATION NO.62-02 CLOSE
* The selected button is highlighted and "ENABLE" is dis-
HDD R/W TEST(PART)
played in the corresponding display section.
* When another button is selected, the newly selected button
is highlighted and "ENABLE" is displayed in the correspond-
ing display section. The previously selected button returns to
the normal display and "DISABLE" is displayed in the corre-
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE sponding display section.
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
self-diagnostics is started.
62-3
* During self diagnostics, "EXECUTING..." is displayed in the
Purpose : Operation test/Check corresponding display section.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute read/write check (all * After completion of self-diagnostics, [EXECUTE] button
areas) of the hard disk. returns to the normal display and the result of diagnostics is
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32. displayed in the corresponding display section. (In the case
Section : MFP (HDD) of OK, "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed. In the case of NG,
"NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
Item : Operation
* If the operation is not executed or completed for any reason,
Operation/Procedure
"ERROR" is displayed in the corresponding display section.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
<Self diagnostics method>
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and YES] and [NO] buttons
become active. Target data Content
SHORT S.T Partial check
2) Press [YES] button.
EXTENDED S.T All areas check
The procedures (Write o Retrieve o Check for any abnormal-
ity.) are executed.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE- 0
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and TEST SIMULATION NO.62̆06 CLOSE

[NO] buttons gray out. SMART OFFLINE TEST

* When the procedures (Write o Retrieve o Abnormality

  SHORT S.T 㧦 ENABLE

check) are not completed normally, "HDD R/W TEST NG" is  EXTENDED S.T 㧦 DISABLE

displayed.
* When the procedures (Write o Retrieve o Abnormality
check) are completed normally, [EXECUTE] button returns EXECUTE
1/1
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
* When [CA] key is pressed during Write o Retrieve, the
operation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated. 62-7
When [SYSTEM SETTGINGS] key is pressed instead, the
Purpose : Operation test/Check
operation is interrupted and the display is shifted to the sub
Function (Purpose) : Used to print the self-diagnostics error log.
number entry screen.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
0 Section : MFP
TEST SIMULATION NO.62㧙03 CLOSE Item : Data
HDD R/W TEST(ALL) Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 62-07, the following
screen is displayed.
Check that there is A4 paper in the paper feed tray. If not, sup-
ply paper.
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE 2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
error log is printed.
After completion of self-printing, the display returns to the initial
screen.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key
is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
rence of an interruption, printing is resumed.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 114

 * When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
0 CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
TEST SIMULATION NO.62-07 CLOSE [NO] buttons gray out.
SMART ERROR LOG PRINT OUT * During delete operation of the job log data [EXECUTE] but-
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE SMART ERROR PRINT ton is highlighted and "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* If delete of the jog log data is not completed normally, "NG"
is displayed.
* After completion of delete of the job log data, [EXECUTE]
EXECUTE button returns to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] but-
tons gray out.
* When [CA] key is pressed during delete operation, the oper-
ation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When
62-8 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is inter-
Purpose : Data clear rupted and the display returns to the sub number entry
Function (Purpose) : Used to format the hard disk excluding the screen.
system area and operation manual area.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32. 0
Section : MFP (HDD) TEST SIMULATION NO.62㧙10 CLOSE

Item : Clear JOB COMPLETE DATA CLEAR(WITH JOB LOG DATA)

Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
2) Press [YES] button. EXECUTE

3) The hard disk (excluding the system area) is formatted. [YES]

button is highlighted.
62-11
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and Purpose : Data clear
[NO] buttons gray out. Function (Purpose) : Used to delete the document filing data.
* During formatting the hard disk (excluding the system area), * Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and "HDD FORMAT Section : MFP (HDD)
(EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) EXECUTING..." is displayed.
Item : Clear
* If formatting of the hard disk (excluding the system area) is
Operation/Procedure
not completed normally, " HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYS-
TEM AREA) NG" is displayed. 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
* When formatting of the hard disk (excluding the system [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
area) is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal become active.
display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. 2) Press [YES] button.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to The document filing data are deleted.
exit from the simulation are restart. [YES] button is highlighted.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
0 CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
TEST SIMULATION NO.62-08 CLOSE [NO] buttons gray out.
HDD FORMAT(EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) * During delete of the document filing data, [EXECUTE] but-
ton is highlighted and "DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR
EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* If delete of the document filing data is not completed nor-
mally, "NG" is displayed.
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO * After completion of delete of the document filing data, [EXE-
EXECUTE
CUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
62-10 * When [CA] key is pressed during delete operation, the oper-
ation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When
Purpose : Data clear [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is inter-
Function (Purpose) : Used to delete the job completion list. (The rupted and the display returns to the sub number entry
job log data are also deleted.) screen.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Section : MFP (HDD) 0
SIMULATION NO.62㧙11 CLOSE
Item : Clear TEST
DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
2) Press [YES] button. ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
The job log data are deleted. [YES] button is highlighted.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 115

62-12
0
Purpose : Data clear TEST SIMULATION NO.62-13 CLOSE
Function (Purpose) : Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format HDD FORMAT (MANUAL AREA ONLY)
in HDD trouble.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Section : MFP (HDD)
Item : Clear
Operation/Procedure ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the screen on the
right is displayed.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. 63
3) When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, it is
highlighted and the current entered value is saved to EEPROM 63-1
and RAM.
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
<Descriptions of buttons, set range, and default values> Check (Display/Print)
Set Default Function (Purpose) : Used to check the following values related
Item Content to shading for RGB and OC. (3 x 2 = 6
range value
A (0: YES, 0 Auto format Enable 0 to 1 1 (Disable) kinds)
1: NO) 1 Auto format Disable Section : Scanner (Exposure)
Item : Operation
0 Operation/Procedure
TEST SIMULATION NO.62㧙12 CLOSE
CLOSE 1) Select a color button to be displayed.
AUTO FORMAT SETTING㧔HDD TROUBLE㧕 The shading set value of the selected button is displayed.
A㧦 1 㧧 (0:YES 1:NO)

A:  1 * When [B](Blue), [G](Green), or [R](Red) button is selected,

the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value
㨇 0㨪 1㨉
of the selected color is displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected, and the selected but-
OK
ton is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
* If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
62-13 page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
Purpose : Data clear
If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
Function (Purpose) : Used to format the hard disk (operation
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
manual area only).
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
Section : MFP (HDD) basic screen of simulation.
Item : Clear * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
Operation/Procedure key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. <Display item and description>
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons Display item Description Remark
become active. GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value
2) Press [YES] button. (ODD)
3) The hard disk (operation manual area only) is formatted. [YES] GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value
button is highlighted. (EVEN)
OFFSET ODD Offset value (ODD)
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
OFFSET EVEN Offset value (EVEN)
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
SMP AVE ODD Reference plat sampling
[NO] buttons gray out.
average value (ODD)
* During formatting the hard disk (operation manual area SMP AVE EVEN Reference plat sampling
only), [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and "HDD FORMAT average value (EVEN)
(MANUAL AREA ONLY) EXECUTING..." is displayed. TARGET VALUE Target value
* If formatting of the hard disk (operation manual area only) is BLACK LEVEL Black output level
not completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (MANUAL AREA ERROR CODE Error code (0, 1 to 4) 0: No error
ONLY) NG" is displayed. 1: STAGE1. Over the
loop number
* When formatting of the hard disk (operation manual area
2: STAGE2. The target
only) is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal value is less than the
display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. specified level.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to 3: STAGE3. The gain
exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted. set value is negative.
4: END is not
asserted.
RSPF WHITE First scan, RSPF white
LEVEL 1ST reference level

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 116

 Display item Description Remark * If there is a page over [n], an active display is shown and the
RSPF WHITE Second and later scan, page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
LEVEL 2ND RSPF white reference grays out and the operation is invalid.
level If there is a page under [p], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
0
SIMULATION NO.63̆01 CLOSE
2) Press a button to be executed. (In this example, [OC] button is
TEST
pressed and the color auto adjustment execution screen is dis-
SHADING DATA DISPLAY
played.)
GAIN  ODD :  147
GAIN  EVEN : 143
3) Press [EXECUTE] button and it is highlighted and the color
auto adjustment is executed.
OFFSET ODD : 0
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the automatic
OFFSET EVEN :  0
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.

B G R 1/3 * Process contents during execution
a) Sampling setting
* On the screen, [G] is pressed.
b) Scan request

63-2 c) Waiting for reaching the document lead edge

d) Sampling end
Purpose : Adjustment
e) Sampling result acquisition
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute shading forcibly.
f) Calculation for sampling result
Section : Scanner
g) Calculation result save
Item : Operation
When a scanner motor error occurs (during execution):
Operation/Procedure
1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and 0
shading is started. TEST SIMULATION NO.63㧙03 CLOSE

* During execution, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is displayed. SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
SCANNER MOTOR IS NOT READY
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during execution, the
operation is interrupted.
* When shading is completed normally, [EXECUTE] button
returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is dis-
played. EXECUTE 1/1
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during other
than printing, the display returns to the sub number entry When auto adjustment error occurs:
screen. * When an error occurs, all the error patch numbers are displayed.
If there is no error after selection of a color, the screen is similar
0 to the initial screen. Only the color of an error is displayed as the
TEST SIMULATION NO.63̆02 CLOSE above error display.
SHADING EXECUTION * When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
PRESS  [EXECUTE] TO SHADING START played. When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
displayed.)

EXECUTE
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.63㧙03 CLOSE

SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT

SAMPRING DATA UNFIT

63-3 #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11, #12, #13, #14, #15,

Purpose : Adjustment #16, #17, #18, #19, #20, #22, #24

Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the gamma correction and PLEASE CHECK THE CHART AND PLATEN GLASS

density conversion for RGB image data B G R RESULT 1/1

inputted from the CCD. Gamma correction
1 of the SCAN ASIC and the set value of
color correction are set by calculating from 0
the image data. TEST SIMULATION NO.63㧙03 CLOSE
SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
Section : Scanner (scan) OC   #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
Item : Image quality (Color balance) #7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
Operation/Procedure #13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16:15, #17: 10, #18: 8,

1) When a color button is selected, the adjustment value of the #19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2

selected color is displayed. B G R  OC 1/2

* When [B] (Blue), [G] (Green), or [R] (Red) button is selected,
the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value
of the selected color is displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected, and the selected but-
ton is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 117

 * The sampling value of each patch from the high density side
63-5 is displayed as the result.
Purpose : Adjustment When [K][C][M][Y] button is pressed on the sampling result
Function (Purpose) : Used to reset the gamma correction and display screen, the data of each color are displayed.
color correction parameters of the SCAN Only one color button can be selected. (In the initial screen,
ASIC. [K] is selected.)
Section : Scanner * After completion of sampling, [EXECUTE] button returns
Item : Clear to the normal display.
Operation/Procedure
0
1) When a touch panel button to execute the standard reset is SIMULATION NO.63̆06 CLOSE
TEST
pressed ([SIDE A(OC)] in this example), the selected button is
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE CHART READING
highlighted and [EXECUTE] button becomes active from the
SET THE CHART ON PLATEN AND TOUCH [EXECUTE]
gray-out display.
* When the selected button is pressed again, selection is can-
celed and the button returns to the normal display.
* If no button is selected for standard reset, [EXECUTE] but-
EXECUTE
ton grays out.
* Two or more items can be selected for standard reset.
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. 63-7
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
Purpose : Setting
become active.
Function (Purpose) : Used to display and register the engine
3) Press [YES] button.
auto density adjustment scanner target
The scanner color balance standard value reset is executed. value.
[YES] button is highlighted. Section : Image process (ICU)
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] Item : Image quality (Color balance)
button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
Operation/Procedure
gray out.
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 63-07, the following
screen is displayed.
* During the scanner color balance standard value reset, [EXE-
CUTE] and [YES] buttons are highlighted. * Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the data of each color.
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
* After completion of the scanner color balance standard value
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, [K] is selected.)
reset delete, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display
and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. 2) When [SETUP] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
sampling start screen.
<Standard value reset item> Put the chart self-printed with SIM46-21 on the glass table,
Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction and press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is high-
1
coefficient lighted and the sampling screen is displayed.
2 SIDE A TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction 3) After completion of sampling, the sampling result is displayed.
(OC) coefficient When [REPEAT] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
3 Auto adjustment gamma correction 1 and color sampling start screen.
correction coefficient
4) When [OK] button is pressed, the displayed result of sampling
is saved to EEPROM and RAM as the target value.
0 <Display data content>
TEST SIMULATION NO.63̆05 CLOSE

STANDARD SCANNER GAMMA SETUP Display data Display content

SIDE A㧔OC㧕 B Point B target value
C Point C target value
D Point D target value
E Point E target value
F Point F target value
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE 1/1 G Point G target value
H Point H target value
I Point I target value
63-6 J Point J target value
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ K Point K target value
Check (Display/Print) L Point L target value
M Point M target value
Function (Purpose) : Used to scan the engine color balance auto
N Point N target value
adjustment pattern and to display the sam-
O Point O target value
pling result.
BASE Base sampling value
Section : Image process (ICU)
Item : Image quality (Color balance) * BASE is displayed only on the sampling result display screen.
Operation/Procedure
1) Put the chart self-printed with SIM46-21 on the glass table,
and press [EXECUTE] button. Sampling is started. (When
[EXECUTE] button is pressed during execution, the operation
is interrupted.)
* During sampling, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 118

 <Display data item description>
0
Set Default
TEST SIMULATION NO.63㧙07 CLOSE Item Content
value value
SCANNER TARGET OF COLOR CALIB SETUP:SERVICE
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
Target value table select DEF1 DEF1 mode setting DEF1
DEF2 DEF2 mode setting
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
DEF3 DEF3 mode setting
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112

K C M Y SETUP 1/1 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.63㧙11 CLOSE

STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT

63-8 TARGET TBL 㧦 DEF1 DEF2 DEF3

Purpose : Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the standard value reset of
the engine auto adjustment scanner target
value (for servicing).
1/1
Section : Image process (ICU)
Item : Image quality (Color balance)
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. 64
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active. 64-1
2) Press [YES] button. Purpose : Operation test/Check
The standard value reset of the engine auto adjustment scan- Function (Purpose) : Used to execute self-print (Color mode).
ner target value is executed. [YES] button is highlighted.
Section : Printer
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
Item : Operation
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out. Operation/Procedure
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM. 1) Press [K][C][M][Y] button to select a color.
* During execution of the standard value reset of the engine The selected button is highlighted. When the highlighted but-
auto adjustment scanner target value, [EXECUTE] and ton is pressed, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more
[YES] buttons are highlighted. buttons can be selected.)
* After completion of the standard value reset of the engine 2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
auto adjustment scanner target value, [EXECUTE] button The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
returns to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons played in the setting area.
gray out. * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
<Standard value reset item> item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
1 Auto density adjustment target value (KCMY)
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
0 item is shifted.
TEST SIMULATION NO.63㧙08 CLOSE
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SETTING:SERVICE operation is invalid.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set self-
YES NO
print is started.
ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE
[EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing,
and returns to the normal display after completion of self-print-
ing.
63-11
* When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
Purpose : Setting pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the factory target color balance saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
in the auto color balance adjustment * When [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed
(SIM46-24). during self-printing, the operation is interrupted.
Section : Scanner (Scanning) * When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
Item : Image quality rence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
Operation/Procedure is resumed.

1) When the machine enters Simulation 63-11, the button of the * When paper is selected which does not satisfy the paper
current set value of the target value table is highlighted. feed and paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.

2) When the button of the target value to be changed ([DEF2]

button in this example) is pressed, it is highlighted and the set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Only one item can be selected.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 119

<Set item description>
Item Display item Description of item Set range Default value Writing
A PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 ~ 11, 14 ~ 19) Print pattern specification 1 to 20 1 Yes
(* For details, refer to the following.) (Only 1, 2, 9 to 11,
and 14 to 19 can
be printed.)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A : 2, 11) Print dot number setting (Self print patter: m by n) Pattern 2, 11: 2 to 1 Yes
255
Other than above:
1 to 255
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A : 2, 11) Empty dot number setting (Self print patter: m by n) Pattern 2, 11: 2 to 254 Yes
255
Other than above:
0 to 255
D DENSITY (FIXED”255” IF A : 9) Print gradation specifications Pattern 9: 255 255 Yes
(fixed)
Other than above:
1 to 255
E MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1 No
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (Through) Pattern 14 to 1 8 (STANDARD Yes
(2 ~ 8 IF A : 14 ~ CHAR/PIC specifications Text/Printed Photo 19: 2 to 8 2 DITCH)
19) CHAR/PRPIC Text/Photograph Other than 3
CHAR Text above: 1 to 8 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITCH Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1) No
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Select 0 to 1 0 1 (NO) No
NO Not select 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Plain paper 1 to 4 1 1 (PLAIN) No
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4

* Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual feed. For the other, manual feed only.
* Items F, G, H, I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 120

<Detailed descriptions of print pattern at item A>
Pattern Color select M parameter N parameter
Pattern Gradation Exposure
NO. Content forming When Enable/ Default Enable/ Default Remark
size Condition select select
section NO Disable value Disable value
1 Grid pattern All LSU-ASIC { K only { ✕ { 1 { 254 • All colors are
surface selected in the print
width of 100 or more
(Print in 3 colors
(CMY), print is
started at 4mm from
the paper lead edge.
2 Mesh print { K only { ✕ { 2 { 2 –
3 16 gradations: Sub { (up to K only No ✕ ✕ ✕ • When all colors are
sub scan fixed 3 colors) selected, print is
4 16 gradations: Main { (Up to K only No ✕ ✕ ✕ made in CMY.
main scan fixed 3 colors) • 16-gradattion print
• Gradation change
for every 256dot.
5 Even pitch All { K only { ✕ { 1 { 4 –
pattern (MBYN): surface
sub scan
6 Even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
main scan
7 4-color overlap ✕ (4- – { ✕ { 1 { 4 –
even pitch color
pattern (MBYN): fixed)
sub scan
8 4-color overlap
even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
main scan
9 Each color 10% Fixed ✕ (4- – { ✕ { 10 ✕ • Each interval is
area (A4/4R) range color 41.86MM(989dot)
density print fixed) • When M is outside 1
to 13%, it is
rounded.
• [K] print is started at
17mm from the
paper lead edge.
10 8-color band ✕ (4- – { ✕ ✕ ✕ –
print color
fixed)
11 4-color mesh All ✕ (4- – { ✕ { 2 { 2 • Each color print is
print surface color made for every 1/4
(Each fixed) of sub scan paper
color size.
1/4) • When N=0, 4-color
all surface print.
12 – – Input – K only – – – – – – –
13 – process – (For – – – – – – –
14 256 gradations: Sub (IMG-ASIC { (up to through/ No 䂾 ✕ ✕ • When all colors are
sub scan fixed preprocess) 3 colors) default, selected, print is
C only.) made in CMY.
• Print is made from
255 gradations in
the range of 0 to 254
gradations.
• Print in 256
gradations.
• Print is started at
5mm from the paper
lead edge.
15 16 gradations Sub IMG-ASIC { (up to K only No { { 2 { 2 • When all colors are
+MBYN (Center fixed 3 colors) selected, print is
gradation made in CMY.
section only): • Print in 16
sub scan gradations.
16 16 gradations Main { (up to K only No { { 2 { 2 • Gradation is
+MBYN (Center fixed 3 colors) changed for every
gradation 256dot.
section only):
main scan

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 121

 Pattern Color select M parameter N parameter
Pattern Gradation Exposure
NO. Content forming When Enable/ Default Enable/ Default Remark
size Condition select select
section NO Disable value Disable value
17 All background All Half tone { (up to K only { { ✕ ✕ • When all colors are
(Half tone) surface (IMG-ASIC 3 colors) selected, print is
after- made in CMY.
18 256-gradation Fixed process) { (up to K only No { ✕ ✕ • When all colors are
pattern (Other range 3 colors) selected, print is
dither) made in CMY.
19 256-gradation Fixed ✕ (up to K only No { ✕ ✕ • Print is made for 16
pattern (Dither range 3 colors) gradations in the
for text) main scan direction,
and for the next 16
gradations, in return.
(16 x 16 patch print)
• Print is started at
5mm from the paper
lead edge.
• Print is started from
255 gradation in the
range of 0 to 254
gradations.
20 4-color grid All Controller ✕ (4- – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 117 –
pattern (Cross): surface (memory) color
main/sub scan fixed)

<Description of item>
0
Display item & Detail Set Default
TEST SIMULATION NO.64-01 CLOSE Item Content
of display range value
SELF PRINT(COLOR) : SERVICE A COPIES Print quantity 1 to 999 1
A㧦 1 㧧 PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9~11, 14~19)
B PROC ADJ YES 0 The half tone 0 to 1 1
A: 1 B㧦 1 㧧 DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A : 2,11)
process control
C㧦254 㧧 DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A : 2,11)
㨇 1 㨪 20 㨉 correction value is
D㧦255 㧧 DENSITY (FIXED”255” IF A : 9)
added.
K C
NO 1 The half tone
M Y EXECUTE OK
process control
correction value is
not added.
64-2
* When PROC ADJ is set to YES, the pattern with the half tone
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ process control correction value added is printed after execution
Check (Display/Print) of high density process control.
Function (Purpose) : Used to print the density adjustment pat- * Item B is displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
tern.
Example:PROC ADJ:NO
Section : Printer
Item : Operation 0
Operation/Procedure TEST SIMULATION NO.64㧙02 CLOSE

1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. ENGINE COLOR BALANCE PATCH PRINT MODE

The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- A㧦 1 㧧 COPIES

played in the setting area. A: 1 B㧦 1 㧧 PROC ADJ:NO

* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and 㨇 1㨪999 㨉
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the EXECUTE OK
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
64-3
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid. Purpose : Operation test/Check
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Function (Purpose) : Used to execute self-print. (BW mode)
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared. Section : Printer
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the Item : Operation
main scan direction registration adjustment pattern is printed. Operation/Procedure
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
normal display.
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
* When [OK], [n], [p], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or item is shifted.
[BLACK] key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
RAM.
operation is invalid.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
item is shifted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
rence of an interruption, self-printing is resumed.
operation is invalid.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 122

2) Enter the set value with 10-key. * When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared. pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not
saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and print-
ing is started. * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key
* After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
the normal display. * When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
rence of an interruption, printing is resumed.
<Description of item>
Item Display item & Detail of display Description of item Set range Default value Writing
A PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9 ~ 11, 14 ~ 19) Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to below.) 1 to 20 1 Yes
(Only 1, 2, 9 to
11, and 14 to
19 can be
printed.)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A : 2, 11) Print dot number setting (Self print pattern: for M BY N) Pattern 2, 11: 1 Yes
2 to 255
Other than
above: 1 to
255
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A : 2, 11) Space dot number setting (Self print pattern: for M BY N) Pattern 2, 11: 254 Yes
2 to 255
Other than
above: 0 to
255
D DENSITY (FIXED”255” IF A : 9) Print gradation specification Pattern 9: 255 255 Yes
(fixed)
Other than
above: 1 to
255
E MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1 No
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure No process (Through) Pattern 1 8 (STANDARD Yes
(2 ~ 8 IF A : 14 ~ mode specification 14 to 19: DITCH)
19) CHAR/PIC Text/Printed Photo 2 to 8 2
CHAR/PRPIC Text/Photograph Other 3
CHAR Text than 4
above: 1
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
to 8
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITCH Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Paper feed tray select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1) No
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Selected 0 to 1 0 1 (NO) No
NO Not selected 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper kind select Plain paper 1 to 4 1 1 (PLAIN) No
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4

• When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed and paper exit conditions is selected, printing cannot be executed.
• Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual. For the other, manual feed only.
• Items F, G, H and I are as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 123

<Detailed description on each print pattern of item A>
Pattern M parameter N parameter
Pattern Gradation Exposure
NO. Content forming Enable/ Default Enable/ Default Remark
size select select
section Disable value Disable value
1 Grid pattern All surface LSU-ASIC { ✕ { 1 { 254 • When all colors are
selected in the print width
of 100 or more, print is
made in CMY (3 colors).
• Print is started at 4mm
from the paper lead edge.
2 Mesh print All surface { ✕ { 2 { 2 –
3 16 gradations: sub Sub fixed No ✕ ✕ ✕ • When all colors are
scan selected, print is made in
4 16 gradations: main Main fixed No ✕ ✕ ✕ CMY.
scan • Print for 16 gradations.
• Gradation is changed for
every 256 dots.
5 Even pitch pattern All surface { ✕ { 1 { 4 –
(MBYN): sub scan
6 Even pitch pattern
(MBYN): main scan
7 4-color overlap Even All surface { ✕ { 1 { 4 –
pitch pattern (MBYN):
sub scan
8 4-color overlap Even
pitch pattern (MBYN):
main scan
9 Each color 10% area Fixing { ✕ { 10 ✕ • Each interval is
(A4/4R) density print range 41.86mm(989dot)
• When M is other than 1 to
13%, it is rounded.
• K print is started at 17mm
from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color band print Fixing { ✕ ✕ ✕ –
range
11 4-color Mesh print All surface { ✕ { 2 { 2 • Each color print is made
(Each color for every 1/4 of sub scan
1/4) paper size.
• When N=0, 4-color all
surface print.
12 – – Input – – – – – – –
13 – – process – – – – – – –
14 256 gradations: sub Sub fixed (IMG-ASIC No { ✕ ✕ • When all colors are
scan preprocess) selected, print is made in
CMY.
• Print is started at 255
gradation in the range of
0 to 254 gradations.
• Print in 256 gradations.
• Print is started at 5mm
fromthepaperleadedge.
15 16 gradations+M byN Sub fixed IMG-ASIC No ✕ { 2 { 2 • When all colors are
(Center gradation selected, print is made in
section only): sub scan CMY.
16 16 gradations+M byN Main fixed No ✕ { 2 { 2 • Print in 256 gradations.
(Center gradation • Gradation is changed for
section only): main every 256 dot.
scan
17 All background (Half All surface Half tone { { ✕ ✕ • When all colors are
tone) (IMG-ASIC selected, print is made in
after- CMY.
18 256 gradation pattern Fixing process) No { ✕ ✕ • When all colors are
(Other dither) range selected, print is made in
19 256 gradation pattern Fixing No { ✕ ✕ CMY.
(Dither for text) range • Print is made for 16
gradations in the main
scan direction, and for the
next 16 gradations, in
return. (16 x 16 patch
print).
• Print is started at 5mm
from the paper lead edge.
• Print is started at 255
gradation in the range of
0to254gradations.
20 Frame cross pattern All surface Controller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ –
(Memory)

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 124

 2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
0 The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
TEST SIMULATION NO.64-03 CLOSE played in the setting area.
SELF PRINT(BW) * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
A㧦 1 㧧 PRINT PATTERN item is shifted.
A: 1 B㧦 1 㧧 DOT1
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
㨇 1㨪 2 0 㨉
C㧦254 㧧 DOT2
operation is invalid.
㧧 DENSITY
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
D㧦255

EXECUTE OK item is shifted.

If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
64-4 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose : Operation test/Check * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute self-print. 4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set self-
print is started.
Section : Printer
[EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing.
Item : Operation
After completion of self-printing, it returns to the normal dis-
Operation/Procedure
play.
1) Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. * When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
The selected button is highlighted. When the selected button is pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not
pressed again, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
buttons can be selected.) * When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SET-
TINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is inter-
rupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
rence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed condi-
tions and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
<Set item description>
Item Display item & Detail of display Description of item Set range Default value
A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to below.) 1 to 5 3
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 to 255 128
C MULTI CONUT Print quantity 1 to 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE PHOTO Half tone Photo 0 to 2 0 0 (PHOTO)
TEXT/GRAPHICS Text/Graphic 1
CAD Design 2
F BIT DEPTH 1BIT Bit number 1 bit 0 to 1 0 1 (4BIT)
4BIT 4 bit 1
G DITHER STRAIGHT Dither correction Straight 1 to 2 1 2 (CALIB)
CALIB specification Calibration 2

* When print pattern 2 or 5 is selected, items E to G cannot be selected. (Though entry of the value is possible, it is not reflected to setting.)
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions, printing cannot be made.
* Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual feed. For the
other, manual feed only.
* Items D, E, F, G are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
<Detailed description for each print in item A>

Color select Gradation

NO. Content select/ Dither Remark
Condition When NOT
select
1 256 gradation pattern (COLOR) { K only 1: Straight C only/ M only/ Y only/ K only/ C & M/ C & Y/ M & Y are
2: Calibration executable. For the other, rounded to K only.
2 256 gradation pattern (B/W) ✕ K only 1: Straight Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.
2: Calibration
3 256 gradation pattern (COLOR) ✕ ✕ 1: Straight 4 pages are continuously printed in the sequence of Y only, M
(Y-M-C-K continuous) 2: Calibration only, C only, and K only.
4 Half tone pattern (COLOR) { K only 1 to 255 C only/ M only/ Y only/ K only/ C & M/ C & Y/ M & Y/ C & M & Y are
executable. For the other, rounded to K only.
5 Half tone pattern (B/W) ✕ K only 1 to 255 Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 125

 2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
0 The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
TEST SIMULATION NO.64㧙04 CLOSE played in the setting area.
PRINTER SELF PRINT * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
A㧦 3 㧧 PRINT PATTERN item is shifted.
A: 3 B㧦128 㧧 DENSITY
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
C㧦 1 㧧 MULTI COUNT
㨇 1 㨪 5㨉 operation is invalid.
D㧦 2 㧧 PAPER
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
64-5 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Purpose : Operation test/Check
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set self-
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute self print (PCL).
print is started.
Section : Printer
[EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing.
Item : Operation
After completion of self-printing, it returns to the normal dis-
Operation/Procedure play.
1) Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. * When [OK], [n], [p], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
The selected button is highlighted. When the selected button is [BLACK] key is pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The
pressed again, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more value is not saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
buttons can be selected.) * When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SET-
TINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is inter-
rupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
rence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions
and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
<Set item description>
Item Display item & Detail of display Description of item Set range Default value
A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification (*For details, refer to below.) 1 to 3 3
B DITHER STRAIGHT Dither correction Straight 1 to 2 1 2
CALIB specification Calibration 2
C MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE PHOTO Half tone Photo 0 to 2 0 0 (PHOTO)
TEXT/GRAPHICS Text/Picture 1
CAD Design 2
F BIT DEPTH 1BIT Bit number 1 bit 0 to 1 0 1 (4BIT)
4BIT 4 bit 1
G INTENT SHARP COLOR Rendering indent Sharp color 0 to 4 0 0 (SHARP COLOR)
PERCEPTUAL Perceptual 1
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 2
SATURATION Saturation 3
CAD CAD 4
H GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray compensation K only 0 to 1 0 0 (K)
KCMY KCMY 1
I TONER SAVE MODE ON Toner save mode Setting 0 to 1 0 1 (OFF)
OFF No setting 1

* When B/W print is made, the bit number is fixed to 1 bit and selection of half tone/rendering intent/gray compensation is disabled. (Though
entry of a value can be made, it is not reflected to the setting.)
* Items B, D, E, F, G, H, and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
<Detailed description for each print pattern in item A>

Gradation
Color select
NO. Content select Remark
Condition No Dither select
1 PCL process inspection pattern ✕ ✕ 1:Straight
(COLOR) 2:Calibration
2 PCL process inspection pattern ✕ K only 1:Straight Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT state. Print is made at
(B/W) 2:Calibration the B/W mode process speed.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 126

 Gradation
Color select
NO. Content select Remark
Condition No Dither select
3 PCL process inspection pattern ✕ ✕ 2:Calibration Continuous printing is made at the default setting in the sequence of
(COLOR/B/W continuous) COLOR and B/W. B/W printing is made at the B/W mode process speed.

2) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.

0 * The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
TEST SIMULATION NO.64㧙05 CLOSE played in the setting area.
PRINTER SELF PRINT㧔PCL㧕 * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
A㧦 3 㧧 PRINT PATTERN item is shifted.
A: 3 B㧦 2 㧧 DITHER 㧦 CALIB
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
C㧦 1 㧧 MULTI COUNT
㨇 1 㨪 3 㨉 operation is invalid.
D㧦 2 㧧 PAPER㧦CS1
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
64-6 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Purpose : Operation test/Check
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set self-
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the printer self print (PS).
print is started.
Section : Printer
[EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing.
Item : Operation
* When [OK], [n], [p], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
Operation/Procedure [BLACK] key is pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The
1) Select a color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. value is not saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
The selected button is highlighted. When the selected button is * When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SET-
pressed again, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more TINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is inter-
buttons can be selected.) rupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
rence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions
and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
<Set item description>
Item Display item & Detail of display Description of item Set range Default value
A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to 1 to 2 1
below.)
B DITHER STRAIGHT Dither correction Straight 1 to 2 1 2
CALIB specification Calibration 2
C MULTI CONUT Print quantity 1 to 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE PHOTO Half tone Photo 0 to 2 0 0 (PHOTO)
TEXT/GRAPHICS Text/Graphic 1
CAD Design 2
F BIT DEPTH 1BIT Bit number 1 bit 0 to 1 0 1 (4BIT)
4BIT 4 bit 1
G INTENT SHARP COLOR Rendering intent Sharp color 0 to 4 0 0 (SHARP COLOR)
PERCEPTUAL Perceptual 1
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 2
SATURATION Saturation 3
CAD CAD 4
H GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray compensation K only 0 to 1 0 0 (K)
KCMY KCMY 1
I INK SIMULATION OFF Ink simulation OFF 0 to 3 0 0 (OFF)
SWOP SWOP 1
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3

* When B/W print is made, the bit number is fixed to 1 bit and selection of half tone/rendering intent/gray compensation/ ink simulation is dis-
abled. (Though entry of a value can be made, it is not reflected to the setting.)
* Items B, D, E, F, G, H, and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 127

<Detailed description for each print pattern in item A>
Color select Gradation select
NO. Content Remark
Condition When NO dither select
1 PS inspection pattern (COLOR) ✕ ✕ 1:Straight
2:Calibration
2 PS inspection pattern (B/W) ✕ K only 1:Straight Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.
2:Calibration Print is made at the B/B mode process speed.

0 65-2
TEST SIMULATION NO.64㧙06 CLOSE
Purpose : Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
PRINTER SELF PRINT㧔PS㧕 Check (Display/Print)
A㧦 1 㧧 PRINT PATTERN
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the touch panel (LCD dis-
A: 1 B㧦 2 㧧 DITHER 㧦 CALIB
play section) detection position adjustment
C㧦 1 㧧 MULTI COUNT
㨇 1 㨪 2 㨉 result.
D㧦 2 㧧 PAPER㧦CS1
Section : Operation panel
K C M Y EXECUTE OK Item : Operation
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the simulation.
When the touch panel is not touched at all, the coordinates of
65 X and Y are "0."
2) Touch the touch panel.
65-1 The coordinates of the currently touched position are dis-
Purpose : Adjustment played in real time.
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis- * X-coordinates (horizontal direction) and Y-coordinates (verti-
play section) detection position. cal direction) are displayed in decimal numbers.
Section : Operation panel * When you take your finger off the touch panel, the last dis-
play value is displayed. (It does not return to "0.")
Item : Adjustment
* As far as the touch panel is properly adjusted, the range of coor-
Operation/Procedure
dinates in the LCD display range is:
1) Touch the four cross marks on the screen. The coordinates of X-axis: "0" to "639"
the pressed points are set.
Y-axis: "0" to "239"
* The four cross marks may be touched in any sequence.
* A touched cross mark grays out. 40 20
600
* When all the four marks are touched and in the case of OK, 40
X㧦 0 Y㧦 0 40

the sampled correction value is saved and the display 70

returns to the sub number entry screen. 20 120 220 420 520 620
320
In the case of NG, the display returns to the initial screen. 120

* The correction value sampled by this simulation and the

coordinates of sampled positions are used to obtain the 170
40 600
coordinates from the correction values of the touched posi- 200 200
tion. 220

67
67-24
Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Use to execute the printer setting of auto
color calibration.
Section : Printer
Item : Setting
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 67-24, the following
screen is displayed.
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the high density pro-
cess control is started and the 48-patch self-printing is
started.
Check to confirm that there is A3 paper in the paper feed
tray. If paper is insufficient, supply it.
2) During the 48-patch self-printing, [EXECUTE] button is high-
lighted.
3) After completion of self-printing, the display is shifted to the
output patch scan start standby screen.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 128

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

Place the printed 48-patch pattern on the glass table, and (During the 16-patch self-printing)
press [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] button to select the process
mode. 0
4) Press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE

and the set 48-patch pattern is scanned. PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE

Check to insure that there is A3 paper in the paper feed tray. If ADJUSTED PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS.

paper is insufficient, supply it.

5) After completion of patch scan, the 16-patch self-printing is
automatically started.
EXECUTE
6) After completion of self-printing, the display is shifted to the
registration process standby screen.
When [REPEAT] button is pressed, the correction value is not (The half-tone process control reference value registration screen)
saved and the display returns to the initial screen.
When [OK] button is pressed, the correction value is saved to 0
CLOSE
EEPROM and RAM and the half-tone process control refer- TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24

ence value registration process is started. PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE

PLEASE WAIT.
7) The display is shifted to the reference value registration pro-
cess 1 completion screen. The reference value registration NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON.
process 2 (Black) is automatically started.
8) When the reference value registration process 2 (Black) is EXECUTE
completed, the following message is displayed. (Each mes-
sage is automatically shifted.)
BLACK: 2ND STEP BLACK END (All processes complete screen)
CYAN: 2ND STEP CYAN END
0
MAGENTA: 2ND STEP MAGENTA END SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE
TEST
YELLOW: 2ND STEP YELLOW END PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE

* When the process control is executed second time, "2nd" is COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.

displayed.
9) All the registration processes are completed. PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
* When [CA], [SYSTEM STTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during self-printing, the operation is interrupted.
[Cancel of execution during operation]
• To cancel or resume, press [EXECUTE] button.
[Initial Screen] 67-25
Purpose : Adjustment
0 Function (Purpose) : Used to set the manual correction of the
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE printer engine color balance.
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
Section : Printer
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11”˜17” SIZE PAPER Item : Adjustment
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT) Operation/Procedure
1) Use [K][C][M][Y] button to select a color. (The selected button
EXECUTE is highlighted.)
Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
(During the 48-patch printing) The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
played on the set setting area.
0 * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE
item is shifted.
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
TEST PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS...
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
EXECUTE
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
(The output patch scan screen) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When [OK] button is pressed, the set value is saved to
0 EEPROM and RAM.
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
* Use [U] [V] buttons to change the set values collectively.
PLEASE WAIT.
When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
NOW READING THE PRINTED TEST PATCH
each item value is increased (decreased) by one. If the set
value is the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.

EXECUTE 1 To change the color balance, change each color set value as
below.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 129

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

<Set range and default value of each setup>

1 User request Black Cyan Magenta Yellow
Cyan-rich – (increase) decrease decrease Item content Set value Target setting
Magenta-rich – decrease (increase) decrease 1 Target value DEF1 Standard adjustment setting (Default)
Yellowish – decrease decrease (increase) table setting DEF2 5% reduced red setting (Color balance with
Reddish – decrease decrease (increase) slightly strong Cyan)
Greenish – (increase) decrease (increase) DEF3 10% reduced red setting (Color balance with
Blueish – (increase) decrease decrease emphasis on Cyan)

1 Usually change the value 5 steps as standard.

3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and self- 0
SIMULATION NO.67-26 CLOSE
printing is started. TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF PRT ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJ
* Also when [OK], [n], [p], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
TARGET TBL : DEF1 DEF2 DEF3
[BLACK] key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed and the self-printing is
completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but- 1/1
ton is pressed, self-printing is interrupted.
<Set range and default value of each value> 67-27
Item Item name Set range Default value
Purpose : Adjustment
A POINT1 1 to 99 50
Function (Purpose) : Used to display and register the scanner
B POINT2 1 to 99 50
target value (for servicing) of the printer
C POINT3 1 to 99 50
engine auto density adjustment.
D POINT4 1 to 99 50
E POINT5 1 to 99 50 Section : Printer
F POINT6 1 to 99 50 Item : Registration
G POINT7 1 to 99 50 Operation/Procedure
H POINT8 1 to 99 50
1) When the machine enters Simulation 67-27, the following
I POINT9 1 to 99 50
screen is displayed.
J POINT10 1 to 99 50
K POINT11 1 to 99 50 * Use [K][C][M][Y] buttons to display the data of each color.
L POINT12 1 to 99 50 Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
M POINT13 1 to 99 50 is highlighted. (In the initial screen, [K](BLACK) is selected.)
N POINT14 1 to 99 50 2) Press [SETUP] button, and the display is shifted to the sam-
O POINT15 1 to 99 50 pling start screen.
Place the 16-patch pattern printed with SIM67-25 on the glass
table and press [EXECUTE] button.
0
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the display is shifted to
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-25 CLOSE
the sampling screen.
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT 㧦PG
3) After completion of sampling, the display is shifted to the sam-
A㧦 50 㧧 POINT1
pling result display screen. Press [REPEAT] button to return to
A: 50 B㧦 50 㧧 POINT2

C㧦 50 㧧 POINT3
the sampling start screen.
㨇 1㨪 99㨉
D㧦 50 㧧 POINT4 4) When [OK] button is pressed, the displayed sampling result is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
K C M Y EXECUTE OK 5) The display returns to the initial screen, and the registered tar-
get value is displayed.
<Display data content>
67-26
Display data Display content
Purpose : Adjustment B Point B target value
1 Function (Purpose) : Used to set the reference scanner target C Point C target value
value of the printer engine auto density D Point D target value
adjustment of Simulation 67-24. E Point E target value
Compaired to DEF1, DEF2 and DEF3 are F Point F target value
decreased-red color balance target value. G Point G target value
H Point H target value
Section : Printer
I Point I target value
Item : Image quality J Point J target value
Operation/Procedure K Point K target value
1) When the machine enters Simulation 67-26, the current set L Point L target value
button of the target value table is highlighted. M Point M target value
N Point N target value
2) When the target value button to be changed is pressed, it is
O Point O target value
highlighted and the setting is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
BASE Base sampling value
* Only one item can be selected.
1 3) Excute Simulation 67-24. * BASE is displayed only on the sampling result display screen.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 130

 0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-27 CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION 67̆30 CLOSE
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP㧦SERVICE
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600 CALIBRATION DATA RELEASE ADJUSTMENT
A㧦 1 㧧 (0:YES 1:NO)
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
A: 1
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
㨇 0㨪 1 㨉

K C M Y SETUP 1/1
OK

67-28
67-31
Purpose : Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : The scanner target value (for servicing) of Purpose : Data clear
the printer engine auto density adjustment Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the printer calibration value.
is reset to the standard value. Section : Printer
Section : Scanner Item : Clear
Item : Image quality Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
and [YES] and [NO] buttons become active. become active.
2) If it is ready for execution, press [YES]. The standard value 2) Press [YES] button.
reset process is executed. [YES] button is highlighted. The printer calibration value is cleared.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE- [YES] button is highlighted.
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
* The cleared data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
[NO] buttons gray out.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
* After completion of the reset process, [EXECUTE] button [NO] buttons gray out.
returns to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons
* After completion of calibration value clear, [EXECUTE] but-
gray out.
ton returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO] but-
tons gray out.
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.67̆28 CLOSE <Clear item>
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB㧦SERVICE
Clear item
1 Printer calibration value

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-31 CLOSE
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
PRINTER CALIBRATION DATA CLEAR

67-30
Purpose : Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set YES/NO of delivery of the main ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
unit calibration data and the process control
correction data to the client PC by the GDI
printer.
67-32
Section : Printer
Item : Setting Purpose : Setting
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) : Used to set YES/NO of screen color
change for each object.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section :
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Item : Setting
2) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
Operation/Procedure
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the value is 1) Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
saved to EEPROM and RAM. The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area.
<Set range and default value of each setup>
* If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
Set Default item is shifted.
Item Display Content
range value
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 Delivery of 0 to 1 1
operation is invalid.
calibration data is
inhibited. If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
1 Delivery of item is shifted.
calibration data is If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
allowed. operation is invalid.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 131

 * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3) When [OK], [n], [p] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is 67-33
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and Purpose : Adjustment
RAM.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the gamma correction
<Set range and default value of each setup> between printer screens. (for PCL)
Set Default Section : Printer
Item Display Content
range value Item : Adjustment
A SCREEN 0 Change of screen for 0 to 1 0 Operation/Procedure
(0:YES 1:NO) each object is allowed. (YES)
1 Change of screen for 1) Use [K][C][M][Y] buttons to select a color. (The selected color
each object is inhibited. button is highlighted.)
B COLOR 0 Change of color for 0 to 1 0 Use [SCREEN] button to select a screen. (In this example,
(0:YES 1:NO) each object is allowed. (YES) SCREEN2 is selected.)
1 Change of color for Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons.
each object is inhibited.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
played in the setting area.
0 * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-32 CLOSE item is shifted.
MODE
If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
A :0  SCREEN(0:YES 1:NO) operation is invalid.
A: 0 B:0  COLOR(0:YES 1:NO)
If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
㨇 0㨪 1 㨉
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
OK
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* Use [U] [V] buttons to change the set values collectively.
When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
the value is increased (decreased) by 1. If the set value is
the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Also when [n], [n], [U], [V] button, or [COLOR], [BLACK]
key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
<Set range and default value of each setup>
Default value
Item Display Description Set range SCREEN1 – 9 SCREEN10, 11 SCREEN4
(KCMY) (K) K C M Y
A POINT1 Point 1 0 to 255 128 127 128 128 128 128
B POINT2 Point 2 0 to 255 128 125 128 128 128 127
C POINT3 Point 3 0 to 255 128 124 127 127 128 127
D POINT4 Point 4 0 to 255 128 124 127 128 128 127
E POINT5 Point 5 0 to 255 128 122 127 127 126 126
F POINT6 Point 6 0 to 255 128 120 127 126 127 126
G POINT7 Point 7 0 to 255 128 114 123 124 124 123
H POINT8 Point 8 0 to 255 128 105 119 122 122 123
I POINT9 Point 9 0 to 255 128 95 111 116 117 121
J POINT10 Point 10 0 to 255 128 82 112 113 112 117
K POINT11 Point 11 0 to 255 128 70 106 108 115 116
L POINT12 Point 12 0 to 255 128 64 110 113 110 115
M POINT13 Point 13 0 to 255 128 57 120 112 117 118
N POINT14 Point 14 0 to 255 128 62 110 119 120 118
O POINT15 Point 15 0 to 255 128 75 110 119 121 116

<Selectable items on the screen> (*): When SCREEN6/SCREEN7/SCREEN10/SCREEN11 is dis-

played, [K] data only. When [C] [M] [Y] button is pressed, the gray-
Display Content
out keys are disabled.
SCREEN1 4bit_LOW (Photo)
SCREEN2 4bit_HIGH (Graphic)
SCREEN3 1bit_LOW (Photo) 0
SCREEN4 1bit_HIGH (Graphic) TEST SIMULATION NO.67-33 CLOSE

SCREEN5 4bit_CAD PRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT(SCREEN 1)

SCREEN6 Mono (600 x 600) (*) A㧦128 ; POINT1

SCREEN7 Mono (1200 x 600) (*) A: 128 B㧦128 ; POINT2

SCREEN8 Toner save 1bit_LOW (Photo) C㧦128 ; POINT3

㨇 0 㨪 255㨉
SCREEN9 Toner save 1bit_HIGH (Graphic) D㧦128 ; POINT4

SCREEN10 Toner save Mono (600 x 600) (*)

K C M Y
SCREEN11 Toner save Mono (1200 x 600) (*) SCREEN OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 132

 * If there is any item over [n], an active display is made and
67-33 item is shifted.
Purpose : Adjustment If there is no item over [n], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the gamma correction
between printer screens. (for GDI) If there is any item under [p], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Section : Printer
If there is no item over [p], the display grays out and the
Item : Adjustment
operation is invalid.
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Use [K][C][M][Y] buttons to select a color. (The selected color * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
button is highlighted.)
* Use [U] [V] buttons to change the set values collectively.
Use [SCREEN] button to select a screen. (In this example,
When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
SCREEN2 is selected.)
the value is increased (decreased) by 1. If the set value is
Select the set item with [n] and [p] buttons. the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- 3) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set data are saved to
played in the setting area. EEPROM and RAM.
* Also when [n], [n], [U], [V] button, or [COLOR], [BLACK]
key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
<Set range and default value of each setup>
Default value
Item Display Description Set range SCREEN1x3 SCREEN2
K C M Y
A POINT1 Point 1 0 to 255 128 128 128 128 128
B POINT2 Point 2 0 to 255 128 128 128 128 127
C POINT3 Point 3 0 to 255 128 127 127 128 127
D POINT4 Point 4 0 to 255 128 127 128 128 127
E POINT5 Point 5 0 to 255 128 127 127 126 126
F POINT6 Point 6 0 to 255 128 127 126 127 126
G POINT7 Point 7 0 to 255 128 123 124 124 123
H POINT8 Point 8 0 to 255 128 119 122 122 123
I POINT9 Point 9 0 to 255 128 111 116 117 121
J POINT10 Point 10 0 to 255 128 112 113 112 117
K POINT11 Point 11 0 to 255 128 106 108 115 116
L POINT12 Point 12 0 to 255 128 110 113 110 115
M POINT13 Point 13 0 to 255 128 120 112 117 118
N POINT14 Point 14 0 to 255 128 110 119 120 118
O POINT15 Point 15 0 to 255 128 110 119 121 116

<Selectable items on the screen>

Display Content
SCREEN1 1bit Photo
SCREEN2 1bit Graphic
SCREEN3 1bit Mono (*)

(*): When SCREEN3 is displayed, [K] data only. When [C] [M] [Y]
button is pressed, the gray-out keys are disabled.

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-33 CLOSE

PRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT(SCREEN 1)

A㧦128 ; POINT1

A: 128 B㧦128 ; POINT2

C㧦128 ; POINT3
㨇 0 㨪 255㨉 D㧦128 ; POINT4

K C M Y SCREEN OK

MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 133

[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
MX2700N


1. Self diag C. Self diag operation and related work flow

The machine always monitors its own state.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum-
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
displays the trouble message.
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the nearly expired or is expired.
machine to minimize the damage. When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
may not be stopped.
A. Function and purpose
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a the LCD.
trouble.)
Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
stopped on detection of a trouble.) tion.
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
improving the repair efficiency.) sages must be cleared by a simulation.
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This Monitors the machine
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- conditions.
sumable part.)
Detects/analyzes
B. Self diag message kinds the content.
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.

Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by

the user. (Paper jam, consumable part life Warning
Trouble/Warning
expiration, etc.)
Serviceman Warning of troubles which can be recovered only
by a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, Trouble
etc.)
Other — The machine is stopped.
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
The content is displayed.
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Other —
Warning A consumable NO
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime.

Trouble YES

Troubleshoot the cause. Replace or supply

the consumable part.

Repair

Cancel the self-

diagnostic message with
the diagnostics
(test commands).

Reset

Standby state

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 1

D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode list
There are following cases of the breakdown mode.

Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan Scan Notification
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan FAX FAX List
block (including Scan pull To Print to FAST
push send print print
interruption) HDD host
FAX board trouble (1 line) ICU F6 { { { { U1 U1 { { U1
FAX board trouble (2 F7 { { { { U1 U1 { { U1
lines)
HDD trouble E7 (03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
SCU communication E7 (80), A0-02 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ { { { {
trouble
PCU communication E7 (90), A0-01 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
trouble L8-20
Backup battery voltage fall U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
Controller fan motor L4-30 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble
Connection trouble (ICU E7 (60 – 65), ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
detection) A0 (10 – 12, 20)
Serial number U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
discrepancy
Memory error (included U2 (00, 05, 10, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
not installed the expansion 11, 22, 23, 24,
RAM) 25)
HDD registration data sum U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
error
Image memory trouble, E7 (00, 01, 05, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
decode error 06, 08, 09)
Network error CE { { { { { { { { ✕
Operatable Operatable
but send but send
NG NG
Process control trouble F2 (80 – 87) { { { { { { { { {
(Only history is left.) (ICU
detection)
Laser trouble PCU E7 (20, 28, 29), ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
L6 (10) *7
Connection trouble (PCU E7 (50, 55), ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
detection) A0 (21)
PCU section troubles H2, H3, H4, H5, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
(motor, fusing, etc.) L4 (excluding L4- *7
30), U2 (90, 91),
F2 (40, 64, 70,
74), L8 (01, 02)
PCU color system E7 (21), F2 (41 – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
troubles 43, 65 – 67, 71 – *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6
73, 75 – 77) *7
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3-12 U2 { { { { U2 U2 U2 {
*7
Paper feed tray 2 trouble F3-22 U2 { { { { U2 U2 U2 {
*7
Paper feed tray 3 trouble U6-01 U2 { { { { U2 U2 U2 {
*7
Paper feed tray 4 trouble U6-02 U2 { { { { U2 U2 U2 {
*7
Paper feed tray 5 trouble U6 (09, 20 – 22, U2 { { { { U2 U2 U2 {
51) *7
Paper feed tray other U6 (00, 10, 50) U8 { { { { U8 U8 U8 {
troubles *7
Staple trouble F1 (10) U3 U3 U3 U3 U3 U3 U3 U3 {
*7
After-process trouble F1 (excluding 10) U3 U3 U3 U3 U3 U3 U3 U3 {
*7
Other troubles PCU EE (EL, EU, EC) { { { { { { { { {
Process control trouble F2 (39, 44, 45, { { { { { { { { {
(PCU detection) 49, 51, 58, 78) *9

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 2

 Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan Scan Notification
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan FAX FAX List
block (including Scan pull To Print to FAST
push send print print
interruption) HDD host
Connection trouble (SCU SCU E7 (70, 75), ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
detection) A0 (22)
SCU color system UC (02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ { { { {
troubles
Document control trouble UC (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ { { { {
EEPROM system U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ { { { {
Scanner section troubles L1, L3 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ { { { {
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles (shading, E7 (10, 11, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ { { { {
etc.)
Process control trouble MFP F2 (80 – 87, 90) { { { { { { { { {
(Only history is left.) (ICU
detection)
Process control trouble PCU F2 (91 – 94) { { { { { { { { {
(Only history is left.) (PCU
detection)
{: Operation enabled, ✕: Operation disabled
U 1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
U 2: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
U 3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * When, however,
the right tray is set.
U 4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode.
* 5: Cannot be shifted to the nighttime mode/power saving function. The power cannot be turned OFF with the power SW on the operation
panel.
* 6: When the color mode is set to Disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the Black
mode.
* 7: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
U 8: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK.
* 9: Trouble display message is displayed in 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
* Trouble mode process
• Machine operation enabled under some conditions.
The operations excluding the trouble mode are enabled (READY). For the mode where operations are disabled, only setting is enabled and
the operation disable message is made.
(NOT READY)
(Display) A dialog is displayed when a trouble occurs. For the mode where operations are enabled, [OK] button is added to the message.
When operations are disabled, [OK] button is not displayed, and the message is displayed until the trouble is cancelled.
* For U 2, 3, 4, 8, perform the following procedures. (In order to avoid patent interference.)
• When a trouble is detected during a job, the machine operation is terminated. (Trouble display/without [OK] key)
• When a trouble is detected during other than a JOB, the trouble display is not made and the trouble position cannot be selected. (The dis-
play is not turned off. Machine/Button)
• Troubles which disable the machine operations
The trouble display is always made, and all the modes cannot be set.
• Writing to the trouble memory
Writing of a same trouble to the trouble memory can be selected with SIM 26-35. When this simulation is set, any trouble is written to the
trouble memory unconditionally.
(Sim.26-35)
0: Only once. If same as the previous one, it is not saved. (Default)
1: Any time. Though same as the previous one, it is saved.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 3

(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.
• When the power is turned ON and each trouble of H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, PF, U6 (09) is stored, it is judged as a trouble immediately.

MFP event
Each block
manager

(Power ON sequence)
· H3, H4, U1, U2, PF, U6 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is made in each block when initializing check is made in each block.
and data are sent to the MFPcnt. Communication of trouble status
H3, H4, H5: Saved in the MFPcnt. [Trouble code] [Trouble status]
U1: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U2: Saved in each block.
PF: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U6-09: Saved in the PCU.

sim task

(Trouble cancel sequence)

· When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
(To the corresponding
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel block) Trouble cancel
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode Trouble cancel command (The trouble memory is
cancel) initialized.)
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel
SIM 17: PF trouble cancel Trouble cancel status is communicated.

2. Trouble code list

Trouble code
Trouble
Main Sub Trouble code content Remarks Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection
code code
A0 01 PCU ROM abnormality PCU ●
02 SCU ROM abnormality Scanner ●
10 Controller ROM error MFP ●
11 IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU) MFP ●
12 IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU) MFP ●
20 Machine level error (CTL detection) MFP ●
21 Machine level error (PCU detection) PCU ●
22 Machine level error (SCU detection) Scanner ●
CE 00 Communication error other than CE-01 – 08 MFP ●
01 Network controller trouble MFP ●
02 Not-specified mail/FTP server error MFP ●
03 Communication error in image send MFP ●
04 FTP server account name or authentication password MFP ●
input error
05 FTP server directory input error MFP ●
06 POP3 server access error MFP ●
07 POP3 server authentication check error MFP ●
08 POP3 server timeout error MFP ●
E7 00 System memory access error MFP ●
01 System data trouble MFP ●
03 HDD trouble MFP ●
05 Local memory access error MFP ●
06 Decode error trouble: Compression decode error (A MFP ●
compression file cannot decompressed.)
08 Local memory specifications error MFP ●
09 Local memory combination error MFP ●
10 Shading trouble (Black correction) Scanner ●
11 Shading trouble (White correction) Scanner ●
14 SCAN-ASIC trouble Scanner ●
20 LSU BD detection trouble PCU ●
21 LSU LD deterioration trouble PCU ●

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 4

Trouble code
Trouble
Main Sub Trouble code content Remarks Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection
code code
E7 28 LSU control ASIC connection abnormality PCU ●
29 LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality PCU ●
50 Engine connection trouble PCU ●
55 PWB information sum error (Engine detection) PCU ●
60 Controller connection trouble (Engine detection) MFP ●
61 Controller connection trouble (Engine) MFP ●
62 Controller connection trouble (Scanner) MFP ●
65 PWB information sum error (Controller detection) MFP ●
70 Scanner connection trouble SCU ●
75 PWB information sum error (Scanner detection) SCU ●
80 Communication trouble between the controller and the MFP ●
scanner
90 Communication trouble between the controller and the MFP ●
engine
EE EC Auto developer adjustment trouble (The sample level PCU ●
for every rotation is other than 128 r 10.)
EL Auto developer adjustment trouble (overtoner error) PCU ●
EU Auto development adjustment trouble (Under-toner PCU ●
abnormality)
F1 00 Finisher communication trouble (Machine side PCU ●
detection)
02 Saddle finisher transport motor trouble PCU ●
03 Finisher paddle motor trouble (MX-FNX2), finisher PCU ●
swing motor trouble (MX-FNX1)
08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble PCU ●
10 Finisher staple motor abnormality PCU ●
11 Finisher bundle process motor abnormality PCU ●
15 Finisher tray lift motor abnormality PCU ●
19 Finisher pre-alignment motor abnormality PCU ●
20 Finisher after-alignment motor abnormality PCU ●
21 Finisher fan motor abnormality (MX-FNX1), Finisher PCU ●
interface fan motor abnormality (MX-FNX2)
31 Finisher folding sensor trouble (MX-FNX2) PCU ●
32 Communication trouble between the finisher and the PCU ●
punch unit (MX-FN2)
33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble PCU ●
34 Finisher punch motor trouble PCU ●
35 Finisher punch side registration sensor trouble (MX- PCU ●
FNX2)
36 Finisher punch registration sensor trouble (MX-FNX2) PCU ●
37 Finisher backup RAM trouble PCU ●
38 Finisher punch backup RAM trouble (MX-FNX2) PCU ●
39 Finisher punch dust sensor trouble (MX-FNX2) PCU ●
40 Saddle finisher punch power interruption trouble (MX- PCU ●
FNX2)
50 Finisher incompatibility trouble PCU ●
F2 39 Process thermistor trouble PCU ●
40 Toner empty sensor abnormality (BLACK) PCU ●
41 Toner empty sensor abnormality (CYAN) PCU ●
42 Toner empty sensor abnormality (MAGENTA) PCU ●
43 Toner empty sensor abnormality (YELLOW) PCU ●
44 Black exclusive image density sensor trouble (Transfer PCU ●
belt surface reflection ratio abnormality)
45 Color exclusive image density sensor trouble PCU ●
(Calibration plate surface reflection ratio abnormality)
49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU ●
50 K phase sensor sensing trouble PCU ●
51 CL phase sensor sensing trouble PCU ●
58 Process humidity sensor trouble PCU ●
64 Toner supply abnormality error (BLACK) PCU ●
65 Toner supply abnormality error (CYAN) PCU ●
66 Toner supply abnormality error (MAGENTA) PCU ●
67 Toner supply abnormality error (YELLOW) PCU ●
70 Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection (BLACK) PCU ●
71 Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection (CYAN) PCU ●
72 Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection PCU ●
(MAGENTA)
73 Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection PCU ●
(YELLOW)
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK) PCU ●

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 5

Trouble code
Trouble
Main Sub Trouble code content Remarks Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection
code code
F2 75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN) PCU ●
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (MAGENTA) PCU ●
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (YELLOW) PCU ●
78 Registration exclusive image density sensor trouble PCU ●
(Transfer belt surface reflection ratio abnormality)
80 Half tone process control 1st patch reference value PCU ●
trouble (BLACK)
81 Half tone process control 1st patch reference value PCU ●
trouble (CYAN)
82 Half tone process control 1st patch reference value PCU ●
trouble (MAGENTA)
83 Half tone process control 1st patch reference value PCU ●
trouble (YELLOW)
84 Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value PCU ●
trouble (BLACK)
85 Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value PCU ●
trouble (CYAN)
86 Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value PCU ●
trouble (MAGENTA)
87 Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value PCU ●
trouble (YELLOW)
92 High-density process control density correction error PCU ●
(CYAN)
93 High-density process control density correction error PCU ●
(MAGENTA)
94 High-density process control density correction error PCU ●
(YELLOW)
F3 12 Main unit tray 1 lift-up trouble PCU ●
22 Main unit tray 2 lift-up trouble PCU ●
F6 00 Communication trouble between the ICU and the FAX Refer to FAX manual for details
01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
21 Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
FAX soft switch
30 Access error to power controller on the FAX board
(FAX detection)
97 FAX PWB incompatibility trouble
98 Combination error between the FAX-BOX PWB
destination information and the machine destination
information.
F7 00 Communication trouble between the ICU and the FAX
(Second line)
01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error (Second line)
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble (Second line)
21 Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
FAX soft switch (Second line)
30 Access error to power controller on the FAX board
(Second line)
97 FAX PWB incompatibility trouble (Second line)
98 Combination error between the FAX-BOX PWB
destination information and the machine destination
information (Second line)
H2 00 Non-contact thermistor detection thermistor open PCU ●
(TH_UM_AD2)
01 Lower thermistor open (TH_LM) PCU ●
02 Sub thermistor open (TH_US) PCU ●
03 Non-contact thermistor compensation thermistor open PCU ●
(TH_UM_AD1)
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU ●
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU ●
02 Sub thermistor fusing section high temperature trouble PCU ●
(TH_US)
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU ●
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU ●
02 Sub thermistor fusing section low temperature trouble PCU ●
(TH_US)
30 Thermistor differential input trouble (TH_UM) PCU ●
H5 01 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam PCU ●
L1 00 Mirror feed trouble Scanner ●
L3 00 Mirror return trouble Scanner ●

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 6

Trouble code
Trouble
Main Sub Trouble code content Remarks Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection
code code
L4 02 Paper feed motor lock trouble PCU ●
04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) PCU ●
05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR) PCU ●
06 Transfer belt separation position sensor trouble PCU ●
11 Shift motor trouble PCU ●
30 Controller fan/HDD fan motor trouble MFP ●
31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble PCU ●
32 Power cooling fan/ozone exhaust fan trouble PCU ●
L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection LSUcnt ●
L8 01 No full wave signal PCU ●
02 Full wave signal width abnormality PCU ●
20 Power controller communication trouble MFP ●
PC -- Personal counter not installed MFP ●
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP ●
U2 00 EEPROM read/write error (MFP detection) MFP ●
05 HDD/Flash/EEPROM data discrepancy MFP ●
10 SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP ●
11 EEPROM check sum error (MFP detection) MFP ●
22 SRAM memory check sum error MFP ●
23 MFPC section SRAM memory individual data check MFP ●
sum error
24 SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum MFP ●
error
25 Flash memory user authentication counter check sum MFP ●
error
30 Serial number data discrepancy (MFP l PCU) MFP ●
50 HDD section individual data check sum error MFP ●
80 EEPROM read/write error (SCU detection) Scanner ●
81 Adjustment value check sum error (SCU detection) Scanner ●
90 EEPROM read/write error (PCU detection) PCU ●
91 EEPROM (PCU) check sum error PCU ●
U6 00 Desk communication trouble PCU ●
01 Tray 1 lift-up trouble PCU ●
02 Tray 2 lift-up trouble PCU ●
09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU ●
10 Desk transport motor trouble PCU ●
20 LCC communication trouble PCU ●
21 LCC transport motor trouble PCU ●
22 LCC 24V power abnormality PCU ●
50 Desk incompatibility trouble PCU ●
51 LCC incompatibility trouble PCU ●
UC 02 CPT-ASIC abnormality Scanner ●
20 Document control module trouble Scanner ●

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 7

3. Details of trouble code
A0-22 Machine level error (SCU detection)
A0-01 PCU ROM abnormality Trouble content Combination error between the machine production/
remodeling and the firmware
Trouble content PCU ROM content trouble Section Scanner
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Combination error between the machine production/
Case 1 Cause Firmware upgrade is not made properly due to power remodeling and the firmware
OFF, etc. Check Check the combination between the machine
Check Use SIM49-1 to upgrade the firmware. and production/remodeling and the firmware.
and remedy
remedy

CE-00 Communication error other than CE-

A0-02 SCU ROM abnormality 01 – 08
Trouble content SCU ROM content trouble
Trouble content Another communication error occurs.
Section Scanner
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Some part of SFU is not upgraded during upgrading of
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
the firmware.
Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely
Check Use SIM49-1 to execute the firmware.
and connected.
and
remedy
remedy

A0-10 Controller ROM error CE-01 Network controller trouble

Trouble content Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble
Trouble content SFU combination error in the controller
Section MFP
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble
Case 1 Cause SFU upgrade was not properly made when upgrading
the firmware. Check 1) Check the network controller and its peripheral
and circuit.
Check Controller firmware upgrade
remedy 2) Output the NIC Config Page and check the NIC
and
version.
remedy
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.

A0-11 IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU) CE-02 Not-specified mail/FTP server error

Trouble content Combination error between CTL and PCU
Trouble content The specified mail server, FTP server, and SMB
Section MFP
server are not found
Case 1 Cause Combination error between CTL and PCU
Section MFP
Check Check the firmware combination between CTL and
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
and PCU.
Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely
remedy
and connected.
remedy
Case 2 Cause Network setup trouble
A0-12 IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU)
Check 1) Check that the connected network supports TCP/
Trouble content Combination error between CTL and SCU and IP protocol.
Section MFP remedy 2) Check from Web page that the Primary/
Secondary E-mail Server Address or the FTP
Case 1 Cause Combination error between CTL and SCU
server/Desktop PC/SMB server address as the
Check Check the firmware combination between CTL and
destination is properly set.
and SCU.
3) When the above address is described with the
remedy
Hostname, check that the DNS server is properly
set or not.
Case 3 Cause SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
A0-20 Machine level error (CTL detection) Check Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server
and for any trouble.
Trouble content Combination error between the machine production/
remedy
remodeling and the firmware
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Combination error between the machine production/
remodeling and the firmware
CE-03 Communication error in image send
Check Check the combination between the machine Trouble content The specified server does not respond during image
and production/remodeling and the firmware. send.
remedy
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely
A0-21 Machine level error (PCU detection) and connected.
remedy
Trouble content Combination error between the machine production/
remodeling and the firmware Case 2 Cause SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
Section PCU Check Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server
and for any trouble.
Case 1 Cause Combination error between the machine production/
remedy
remodeling and the firmware
Check Check the combination between the machine
and production/remodeling and the firmware.
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 8

CE-04 FTP server account name or authenti- CE-07 POP3 server authentication check
cation password input error error
Trouble content The entered FTP server account name or the Trouble content The entered POP3 server account name or the
authentication password is invalid. authentication password is invalid. (POP3 server
The entered SMB server log-in name or the password authentication check error)
is invalid. Section MFP
Section MFP Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely
Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely and connected.
and connected. remedy
remedy Case 2 Cause The POP3 server account name or the password
Case 2 Cause The FTP server account name registered as the registered for the account is incorrect.
destination or the password for the account is Check Check to insure that the POP3 server account name
incorrect. and or the password for the account is correct.
Check Check to insure that the FTP server account name remedy
and registered as the destination or the password for the
remedy account is correct.
Case 3 Cause The SMB server account name registered as the CE-08 POP3 server timeout error
destination or the password for the account is
incorrect. Trouble content The specified mail server (POP3) does not respond.
Check Check to insure that the SMB server account name (POP3 server timeout error)
and registered as the destination or the password for the Section MFP
remedy account is correct. Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely
and connected.
CE-05 FTP server directory input error remedy
Case 2 Cause POP3 server trouble
Trouble content The entered FTP server directory is invalid. Check Check the POP3 server for any trouble.
The entered SMB server folder is invalid. and
Section MFP remedy
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely
and connected. E7-00 System memory access error
remedy
Case 2 Cause The FTP server account name registered as the Trouble content System memory trouble (Tandem memory cannot be
destination or the password for the account is guaranteed.)
incorrect. Access to system memory cannot be made.
Check Check to insure that there exits the FTP server Section MFP
and directory registered as the destination. Case 1 Cause Expansion memory instillation error
remedy Check Check installation of the system expansion memory.
Case 3 Cause The SMB server account name registered as the and
destination or the password for it is incorrect. remedy
Check Check to insure that there exists the SMB server Case 2 Cause Garbled data
and folder registered as the destination. Check 1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write
remedy and 2) Replace the expansion memory (if installed.)
remedy 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 3 Cause Dirt on the memory pin
CE-06 POP3 server access error Check Clean the memory pin with alcohol.
and
Trouble content The specified mail server (POP3) is not found. (POP3 remedy
server access error)
Section MFP * When E7-00 is in the following combination where system mem-
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble ory Slot 2 (inside) and Slot 1 (outside) operate normally but a
Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely hard error occurs. (Combination of system memory (slot 1, slot 2)
and connected.
remedy System memory Operation guarantee
When turning
Case 2 Cause Network setup error No. Slot2 Slot1
Hard Soft on the power
(Inside) (Outside)
Check 1) Check that the connected network supports
and TCP/IP protocol. 1 – – ✕ ✕ Since the
remedy 2) Check the Web page to insure that the POP3 machine is not
server address is correctly set. booted, the
3) If the above address is described in Hostname, trouble display is
check to insure that the DNS server is correctly not made.
set. 2 256MB – { { Normal operation
Case 3 Cause PO3 server trouble 3 512MB – { { Normal operation
Check Check the POP3 server for any trouble. 4 256MB 256MB { { Normal operation
and 5 512MB 256MB { { Normal operation
remedy 6 256MB 512MB { { Normal operation
7 512MB 512MB { { Normal operation
8 – 256MB { { Normal operation
9 – 512MB { { Normal operation

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 9

 E7-01 System data trouble E7-06 Decode error trouble: Compression
Trouble content ICU data trouble occurs. decode error (A compression file can-
Section MFP not decompressed.)
Case 1 Cause ICU image transfer trouble
Check 1) Check the connection state of the MFPcnt PWB Trouble content A decode error occurs when forming an image.
and connector. Section MFP
remedy 2) Replace the MFPcnt PWB. Case 1 Cause Compression data abnormality
Check 1) Check the installing state of the PWB. (PCI bus)
and 2) When an error occurs during a FAX job, check
E7-03 HDD trouble remedy the installation of the FAX PWB. In the other
cases, check the installation of the MFPcnt PWB
Trouble content HDD connection trouble and HDD.
File control area data trouble (when FAT is broken) 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Section MFP Case 2 Cause HDD connection abnormality
Case 1 Cause The HDD is not properly installed to the MFPcnt PWB Check Check the HDD connection.
Check 1) Check installation of the HDD of the MFPcnt and
and PWB. remedy
remedy 2) Check connection of the harness of the MFPcnt Case 3 Cause Data are garbled in image compression/send.
PWB. Check 1) Check the installation of the PWB. (PCI bus)
3) Use SIM62-2 and -3 to check read/write from/to and 2) When an error occurs during a FAX job, check
the HDD. remedy the installation of the FAX PWB. In the other
Case 2 Cause The HDD does not work properly. cases, check the installation of the MFPcnt PWB
Check Replace the HDD. and HDD.
and 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
remedy Case 4 Cause MFPcnt PWB abnormality
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB trouble Check Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Check Replace the MFPcnt PWB. and
and remedy
remedy Case 5 Cause Local memory access trouble
Check Check and execute remedy similarly to E7-05.
and
E7-05 Local memory access error remedy

Trouble content Local memory cannot be accessed.

Section MFP E7-08 Local memory specifications error
Case 1 Cause Local memory installation abnormality
Check Check the installing state of the local memory. Trouble content DIMM of different specification is detected in the local
and memory slot.
remedy Section MFP
Case 2 Cause Dirt on local memory pin Case 1 Cause DIMM of different specification is installed to the local
Check Clean the local memory pin with alcohol. memory slot.
and Check Check the installed DIMM.
remedy and
Case 3 Cause Garbled data remedy
Check 1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write. * The error occurs when a DIMM which is not recommended by
and 2) Replace the memory. Sharp.
remedy 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
* Combination where local memory Slot 4 (inside) and Slot 3 (out-
side) operate normally (Refer to E7-09) but a hard error occurs. E7-09 Local memory combination error
Trouble content Local memory slot combination error
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause DIMM of other than 256MB is installed to the default
slot.
Check Check the combination of installed DIMM.
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause DIMM of other than 256MB is installed to the
expansion slot.
Check Check the combination of installed DIMM.
and
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 10

* When the following combination (E7-09) where operation is not
performed properly is used. Local memory (slot 3, slot 4) combi- E7-20 LSU BD detection trouble
nation
Trouble content LSU BD signal is not detected.
Section PCU
Local memory Operation guarantee
When turning Case 1 Cause Disconnection or improper connection of harness and
No. Slot 4 Slot 3
Hard Soft on the power connector between LD/BD PWB and LSUcnt PWB
(Inside) (Outside)
1 – – ✕ ✕ E7-09 Check Check connection of the harness of each PWB inside
and the LSU.
2 256MB – { { Normal operation
remedy
3 512MB – { ✕ E7-09
Case 2 Cause 1) Optical axis shift
4 256MB 256MB { ✕ E7-09
2) BK laser deterioration, power reduction
5 512MB 256MB { ✕ E7-09 3) BD PWB trouble
6 256MB 512MB { { Normal operation Check 1) Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation.
7 512MB 512MB { ✕ E7-09 and 2) Replace the LSUcnt/BD PWB.
8 – 256MB ✕ ✕ E7-09 remedy 3) If the trouble cannot be removed by the above 1)
9 – 512MB ✕ ✕ E7-09 to 2), replace the LSU.

E7-10 Shading trouble (Black correction) E7-21 LSU LD deterioration trouble

Trouble content CCD black scan level abnormality when the copy lamp Trouble content The color laser does not light up normally.
is turned off. Section PCU
Section Scanner Case 1 Cause Disconnection or improper connection of harness and
Case 1 Cause Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable connector between LD PWB and LSUcnt PWB
Check Check the installing state of the flat cable to the CCD Check Check connection of the harness of each PWB inside
and unit. and the LSU.
remedy remedy
Case 2 Cause CCD unit abnormality Case 2 Cause Y/M/C laser deterioration
Check Check the CCD unit. Check 1) Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation.
and and 2) Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
remedy remedy 3) If the trouble cannot be removed by the above 1)
Case 3 Cause SCU PWB abnormality to 2), replace the LSU.
Check Check the SCU PWB.
and
remedy E7-28 LSU control ASIC connection abnor-
mality
E7-11 Shading trouble (White correction) Trouble content Access error between the CPU of the PCU PWB and
the LSU control ASIC
Trouble content CCD white scan level abnormality when the copy lamp Section PCU
is on. Case 1 Cause <When this trouble occurs in the initial process on turn
Section Scanner on the power>
Case 1 Cause Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable Communication connector trouble between the PCU
Check Check the installing state of the flat cable to the CCD PWB and the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB). Harness
and unit. trouble.
remedy Check Check the connector connection between the PCU
Case 2 Cause Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white and PWB and the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB).
plate. remedy Check the harness. If the trouble cannot be removed,
Check Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white plate. replace the LSUcnt PWB or the PCU PWB.
and Case 2 Cause <When this trouble occurs on starting printing/during
remedy printing, and SIM61-1 is used to check the LSU unit
Case 3 Cause Copy lamp lighting trouble operation for each of B/W and COLOR and the
Check Check the installing state of the flat cable to the copy judgment is NG.>
and lamp unit. Connected the connector between the PCU PWB and
remedy the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB) / Harness trouble
Case 4 Cause CCD unit abnormality Check Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the
Check Check the CCD unit. and LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB). If the trouble cannot be
and remedy removed, replace the LSUcnt PWB or the PCU PWB.
remedy Case 3 Cause PCU PWB or LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB) trouble
Case 5 Cause SCU PWB abnormality Check Replace the PCU PWB or the LSUcnt PWB (interface
Check Check the SCU PWB. and PWB).
and remedy
remedy

E7-29 LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality

E7-14 SCAN-ASIC trouble
Trouble content Oscillation trouble of the external oscillator used in
Trouble content Written register value cannot be read correctly LSU-ASIC and the internal oscillation circuit
Section Scanner Section PCU
Case 1 Cause SCU PWB abnormality Case 1 Cause Trouble of the oscillator on the LSU-ASIC PWB, the
resistor and capacitor for the oscillation circuit, and the
Check Check the SCU PWB.
LSU-ASIC itself.
and
remedy Check Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
and
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 11

E7-50 Engine connection trouble E7-65 PWB information sum error (Control-
Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is detected in
ler detection)
the PCU PWB.
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information sum error
Section PCU
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause A PWB which is incompatible with the machine
Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device trouble
specifications is connected.
2) EEPROM device contact failure
Check 1) Replace the PCU PWB. 3) Device access error due to noises
and 2) Replace the LSU PWB.
Check Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
remedy
and
Case 2 Cause A firmware which is incompatible with the machine remedy
specifications is used.
Check Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
and E7-70 Scanner connection trouble
remedy
Trouble content Unknown identification information is detected in the
SCU PWB.
E7-55 PWB information sum error (Engine Section SCU
detection) Case 1 Cause SCU PWB trouble
Check Replace the SCU PWB.
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information sum error and
Section PCU remedy
Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device error Case 2 Cause A firmware which is incompatible with the machine
2) EEPROM device contact failure specifications is connected.
3) Device access error due to noises Check Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check Replace the PCU PWB. and
and remedy
remedy

E7-75 PWB information sum error (Scanner

E7-60 Controller connection trouble (Engine detection)
detection)
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information sum error
Trouble content Unknown PWB kind information is detected in the Section SCU
MFPcnt PWB. Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device trouble
A PWB/firmware which is not compatible with the 2) EEPROM device contact failure
machine specifications is connected. 3) Device access error due to noises
Section MFP Check Replace the scanner control PWB.
Case 1 Cause Controller PWB trouble and
Check Replace the controller PWB. remedy
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause A firmware which is not compatible with the machine E7-80 Communication trouble between the
specifications is applied.
controller and the scanner
Check Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
and Trouble content Communication trouble between the MFP and the
remedy scanner MFP detection
Communication establishment error/Framing/Parity/
Protocol error
E7-61 Controller connection trouble Section MFP
(Engine) Case 1 Cause SCU PWB connector connection trouble
Check Check the connector connection between the SCU
Trouble content MFPcnt PWB connection trouble and PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
Compatibility trouble between the controller and the remedy
engine Case 2 Cause Harness trouble between the SCU PWB and the
Section MFP MFPcnt PWB
Case 1 Cause Combination trouble of the controller PWB and the Check Check the harness between the SCU PWB and the
engine and MFPcnt PWB.
Check Check the controller PWB. remedy
and Check the combination between the controller PWB Case 3 Cause Broken connector pin of the SCU PWB mother board
remedy and the engine. Check Check grounding of the machine.
and
remedy
E7-62 Controller connection trouble
(Scanner)
Trouble content Controller connection trouble
Compatibility trouble between the controller and the
scanners
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Combination trouble between the controller PWB and
the engine
Check Replace the controller PWB.
and Check the combination between the controller PWB
remedy and the engine.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 12

E7-90 Communication trouble between the F1-00 Finisher communication trouble
controller and the engine (Machine side detection)
Trouble content Communication trouble between the MFP and the Trouble content Communication line test error when turning on the
PCU (MFP detection) power or after canceling an exclusion simulation.
Communication establishment error/Framing/Parity/ Communication error with the finisher
Protocol error Section PCU
Section MFP Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to noises
Case 1 Cause PCU PWB connector connection trouble Check Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
Check Check the connector connection between the PCU and
and PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. remedy
remedy Case 2 Cause PCU finisher connector or harness connection error or
Case 2 Cause Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the disconnection
MFPcnt PWB Check Check the connector and harness in the
Check Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the and communication line.
and MFPcnt PWB. remedy
remedy Case 3 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
Case 3 Cause Broken connector pin of the PCU PWB mother board Check Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check Check grounding of the machine. and
and remedy
remedy Case 4 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Check Replace the PCU PWB.
and
EE-EC Auto developer adjustment trouble remedy
(The sample level for every rotation is
other than 128 r 10). F1-02 Saddle finisher transport motor trou-
Trouble content Auto developer adjustment trouble (The sample level ble
for every rotation is other than 128 r 10.) <Detection
only with SIM25-2, no trouble memory, only display> Trouble content Transport drive motor trouble
Section PCU Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/ Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble, overvoltage, saddle finisher control PWB trouble
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the transport
Check Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto development and motor (FFM).
and adjustment. remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
remedy

F1-03 Finisher paddle motor trouble (MX-

EE-EL Auto developer adjustment trouble FNX2), finisher swing motor trouble
(overtoner error) (MX-FNX1)
Trouble content The sample level is 76 or below, or the control voltage Trouble content Paddle motor operation trouble (MX-FNX2)
is 208V or above. <Detection only with SIM25-2, no Swing motor operation trouble (MX-FNX1)
trouble memory, only display> Section PCU
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/ overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble, Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the motor (FPM/
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble and FSWM).
Check Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto development remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
and adjustment.
remedy
F1-08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble
EE-EU Auto development adjustment trouble Trouble content Stapler shift motor operation trouble
(Under-toner abnormality) Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
Trouble content The sample level is 178 or above, or the control overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
voltage is 51V or below. <Detection only with SIM25- Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple motor
2, no trouble memory, only display> and (FSM).
Section PCU remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble F1-10 Finisher staple motor abnormality
Check Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto development
and adjustment. Trouble content Staple operation trouble
remedy Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, saddle finisher control PWB trouble
Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple motor
and (FFSM).
remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 13

F1-11 Finisher bundle process motor F1-32 Communication trouble between the
abnormality finisher and the punch unit (MX-FN2)
Trouble content Bundle process motor trouble Trouble content Finisher and punch unit communication trouble (MX-
Section PCU FNX2)
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor Section PCU
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2) Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to noises
Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the bundle Check Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
and process motor (FAM). and
remedy Replace the finisher control PWB. remedy
Case 2 Cause Connector/harness connection error or disconnection
between the finisher and the punch unit
F1-15 Finisher tray lift motor abnormality Check Check the connector and the harness in the
and communication line.
Trouble content Lift motor trouble remedy
Section PCU Case 3 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor Check Replace the finisher control PWB.
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble and
Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the tray lift remedy
and motor (FLM/FTLM). Case 4 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble
remedy Replace the finisher control PWB. Check Replace the control PWB (PCU) trouble
and
remedy
F1-19 Finisher pre-alignment motor abnor-
mality
F1-33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble
Trouble content Pre-alignment motor trouble
Section PCU Trouble content Punch shift motor operation abnormality
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor Section PCU
overvoltage, saddle finisher control PWB trouble Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the pre- overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch
and alignment motor (FFJM). control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
remedy Replace the finisher control PWB. Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch shift
and motor (FPSM).
remedy Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the punch
F1-20 Finisher after-alignment motor abnor- control PWB.).

mality
Trouble content After-alignment motor trouble
F1-34 Finisher punch motor trouble
Section PCU Trouble content Punch motor operation abnormality
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor Section PCU
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the after- overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch
and alignment motor (FRJM). control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch motor
and (FPNW).
remedy Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the punch
F1-21 Finisher fan motor abnormality (MX- control PWB.).
FNX1), Finisher interface fan motor
abnormality (MX-FNX2)
F1-35 Finisher punch side registration sen-
Trouble content Cooling fan motor trouble (MX-FNX1) sor trouble (MX-FNX2)
Interface transport fan motor trouble (MX-FNX2)
Section PCU Trouble content Sensor input value abnormality
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor Section PCU
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, saddle
Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor finisher control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2), punch
and (FFAM/FJFM). control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
remedy Replace the finisher control PWB. Check Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the punch
and section sensor (FPSHPD/FPSD1-4).
remedy Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the punch
F1-31 Finisher folding sensor trouble (MX- control PWB.).
FNX2)
Trouble content Sensor input value abnormality
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, finisher
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Check Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor
and (FFPD).
remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 14

F1-36 Finisher punch registration sensor F2-39 Process thermistor trouble
trouble (MX-FNX2) Trouble content Process thermistor open
Section PCU
Trouble content Sensor input value abnormality Case 1 Cause Process thermistor harness connection trouble
Section PCU Check Check the connection of the harness, connector of the
Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, saddle and process thermistor.
finisher control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2), punch remedy
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Case 2 Cause Process thermistor trouble
Check Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the punch
Check Check the connection of the process thermistor.
and timing sensor (FPTD).
and
remedy Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the punch
remedy
control PWB.).
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble
Check Check the PCU PWB.
and
F1-37 Finisher backup RAM trouble remedy
Trouble content Backup RAM data garbled
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble, malfunction due to
F2-40 Toner empty sensor abnormality
electrical noises (BLACK)
Check Replace the finisher control PWB.
and Trouble content Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample level
remedy 25 or less or 231 or above.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed.
F1-38 Finisher punch backup RAM trouble Check Check the connection of the connector harness to the
and PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner empty
(MX-FNX2) remedy sensor.
Trouble content Punch unit backup RAM data garbled Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble
Section PCU Check Check the harness disconnection.
and
Case 1 Cause Punch control PWB trouble, malfunction due to
remedy
electrical noises
Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble
Check Replace the punch control PWB.
and Check Check the cartridge connection.
remedy and
remedy

F1-39 Finisher punch dust sensor trouble

F2-41 Toner empty sensor abnormality
(MX-FNX2)
(CYAN)
Trouble content Punch dust sensor detection trouble
Trouble content Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample level
Section PCU
25 or less or 231 or above.
Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, finisher
Section PCU
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2), punch control PWB
trouble (MX-FNX2) Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed.
Check Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor Check Check the connection of the connector harness to the
and punch dust sensor (FPDD). and PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner empty
remedy Replace the finisher control PWB or the punch control remedy sensor.
PWB. Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble
Check Check the harness disconnection.
and
F1-40 Saddle finisher punch power remedy
Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble
interruption trouble (MX-FNX2) Check Check the cartridge connection.
Trouble content When the punch unit power interruption is detected. and
remedy
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Harness disconnection, punch control PWB trouble
Check Use SIM3-3 to check the operation punch motor
and (FPNW).
remedy Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the punch
control PWB.).

F1-50 Finisher incompatibility trouble

Trouble content Detection of finisher incompatible with MX-2700**/
2300**
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connection of the AR-F13, etc. which is incompatible
with MX-2700**/2300** is detected.
Check Connect the MX-FNX1/MX-FNX2.
and
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 15

F2-42 Toner empty sensor abnormality F2-45 Color exclusive image density sensor
(MAGENTA) trouble (Calibration plate surface
Trouble content Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample level
reflection ratio abnormality)
25 or less or 231 or above.
Trouble content The calibration plate surface is scanned by the image
Section PCU density sensor before starting the process control, and
Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed. adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at a
Check Check the connection of the connector harness to the certain level. However, the output is not within the
and PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner empty certain level though the senor gain is adjusted.
remedy sensor. Section PCU
Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
Check Check the harness disconnection. trouble between PCU PWB and the image density
and sensor, image density sensor dirt, calibration plate
remedy dirt, calibration plate solenoid operation trouble
Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
Check Check the cartridge connection. and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
and remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
remedy completed, check the calibration plate solenoid
operation.

F2-43 Toner empty sensor abnormality

(YELLOW) F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble
Trouble content The detection temperature is out of the range of 5qC
Trouble content Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample level
to 55qC.
25 or less or 231 or above.
Section PCU
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause LSU thermistor harness connection trouble
Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed.
Check Check the connection of the LSU thermistor harness
Check Check the connection of the connector harness to the
and and connector.
and PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner empty
remedy If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the LSU
remedy sensor.
thermistor or the PCU PWB.
Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble
Case 2 Cause LSU thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Check Check the harness disconnection.
Check Check the PCU PWB.
and
and If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the LSU
remedy
remedy thermistor or the PCU PWB.
Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble
Check Check the cartridge connection.
and
remedy
F2-50 K phase sensor sensing trouble
Trouble content Detection is made by interruption of light in the sensor
section of the projection rib on the drum drive gear to
F2-44 Black exclusive image density sensor control the BK drum phase. The detection signal
trouble (Transfer belt surface cannot be acquired and phase control cannot be
made.
reflection ratio abnormality) Section PCU
Trouble content The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image Case 1 Cause Sensor connector connection trouble
density sensor before starting the process control, and Check Check the sensor connector connection.
adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at a and
certain level. However, the output is not within the remedy
specified range though the senor gain is adjusted. Case 2 Cause Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or installation
Section PCU trouble
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection Check Check for dirt on the sensor or check the installation
trouble between PCU PWB and the image density and state.
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt remedy
cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid operation Case 3 Cause Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor trouble
trouble Check If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor.
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control sensor and (Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_K" to check interruption or
and gain adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the remedy transmission of light.)
remedy sensor, the harness, the calibration plate solenoid
operation for any trouble. If the adjustment is
completed, check the transfer belt surface state.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 16

F2-51 CL phase sensor sensing trouble F2-65 Toner supply abnormality (CYAN)
Trouble content Detection is made by interruption of light in the sensor Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more.
section of the projection rib on the drum drive gear to The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
control the phases of all the color drums. The the specified time.
detection signal cannot be acquired and phase control Section PCU
cannot be made. Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Section PCU Check Check the connector connection of the toner motor
Case 1 Cause Sensor connector connection trouble and section.
Check Check the sensor connector connection. remedy Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the
and main PWB.
remedy Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
Case 2 Cause Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or installation Check Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1)
trouble and Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged
Check Check for dirt on the sensor or check the installation remedy between the toner cartridge and the developing unit.
and state. Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary.
remedy If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not
Case 3 Cause Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor trouble clear the trouble, check the developing unit.
Check If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor.
and (Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_CL" to check interruption or
remedy transmission of light.) F2-66 Toner supply abnormality (MAGENTA)
Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more.
F2-58 Process humidity sensor trouble The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
the specified time.
Trouble content Process humidity sensor open Section PCU
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Case 1 Cause Process humidity sensor harness connection trouble Check Check the connector connection of the toner motor
Check Check the harness and connector connection of the and section.
and process humidity sensor. remedy Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the
remedy main PWB.
Case 2 Cause Process humidity sensor trouble Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
Check Check the process humidity sensor. Check Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1)
and and Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged
remedy remedy between the toner cartridge and the developing unit.
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary.
If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not
Check Check the PCU PWB.
clear the trouble, check the developing unit.
and
remedy

F2-67 Toner supply abnormality (YELLOW)

F2-64 Toner supply abnormality (BLACK) Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more.
The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more.
the specified time.
The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
the specified time. Section PCU
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble Check Check the connector connection of the toner motor
and section.
Check Check the connector connection of the toner motor
remedy Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the
and section.
main PWB.
remedy Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the
main PWB. Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble Check Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1)
and Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged
Check Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1)
remedy between the toner cartridge and the developing unit.
and Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged
Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary.
remedy between the toner cartridge and the developing unit.
If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not
Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary.
clear the trouble, check the developing unit.
If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not
clear the trouble, check the developing unit.

F2-70 Toner cartridge improper cartridge

detection (BLACK)
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge
trouble
Check Replace the toner cartridge.
and
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 17

F2-71 Toner cartridge improper cartridge F2-75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN)
detection (CYAN) Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written.
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents Section PCU
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected. Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
Section PCU and the harness between the PCU and the toner
cartridge.
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge
trouble Check Check the connector and the harness between the
and PCU and the toner cartridge.
Check Replace the toner cartridge.
remedy
and
remedy Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble
Check Replace the toner cartridge.
and
F2-72 Toner cartridge improper cartridge remedy
Case 3 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble
detection (MAGENTA) Check Replace the PCU PWB.
and
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents
remedy
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge
trouble
F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error
Check Replace the toner cartridge. (MAGENTA)
and
remedy Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
F2-73 Toner cartridge improper cartridge and the harness between the PCU and the toner
cartridge.
detection (YELLOW) Check Check the connector and the harness between the
and PCU and the toner cartridge.
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents
remedy
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected.
Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble
Section PCU
Check Replace the toner cartridge.
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge
and
trouble
remedy
Check Replace the toner cartridge.
Case 3 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble
and
remedy Check Replace the PCU PWB.
and
remedy
F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK)
Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written. F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error
Section PCU (YELLOW)
Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
and the harness between the PCU and the toner Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written.
cartridge. Section PCU
Check Check the connector and the harness between the Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
and PCU and the toner cartridge. and the harness between the PCU and the toner
remedy cartridge.
Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble Check Check the connector and the harness between the
Check Replace the toner cartridge. and PCU and the toner cartridge.
and remedy
remedy Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble
Case 3 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble Check Replace the toner cartridge.
Check Replace the PCU PWB. and
and remedy
remedy Case 3 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Check Replace the PCU PWB.
and
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 18

F2-78 Registration exclusive image density
sensor trouble (Transfer belt surface
reflection ratio abnormality)
Trouble content The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image
density sensor before starting the registration, and
adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at a
certain level. However, the output is not within the
specified range though the senor gain is adjusted.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid operation
trouble
Check Check the sensor and the harness. Check the
and calibration plate solenoid operation and the transfer
remedy belt surface state.
If the trouble is not cleared, replace the image sensor
exclusively used for registration, replace the transfer
belt, replace the calibration plate, replace the
solenoid, or replace the PCU PWB according to the
check result.
F2-80 Half tone process control 1st patch
reference value trouble (BLACK)
Trouble content The low-density rising point or the high-density
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
calculation error in the primary approximation formula
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value
obtained from the first step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in BLACK.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
F2-81 Half tone process control 1st patch
reference value trouble (CYAN)
Trouble content The low-density rising point or the high-density
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
calculation error in the primary approximation formula
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value
obtained from the first step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in CYAN.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 19
F2-82 Half tone process control 1st patch
reference value trouble (MAGENTA)
Trouble content The low-density rising point or the high-density
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
calculation error in the primary approximation formula
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value
obtained from the first step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in MAGENTA.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
F2-83 Half tone process control 1st patch
reference value trouble (YELLOW)
Trouble content The low-density rising point or the high-density
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
calculation error in the primary approximation formula
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value
obtained from the first step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in YELLOW.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
F2-84 Half tone process control 2nd patch
reference value trouble (BLACK)
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the
middle-density section output when connecting the
low-density section approximation formula and the
middle-density section approximation formula
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM
value) from the second step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in BLACK.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble, transfer belt cleaning trouble
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
F2-85 Half tone process control 2nd patch F2-92 High-density process control density
reference value trouble (CYAN) correction error (CYAN)
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the Trouble content The patch density value is not in the range of the
middle-density section output when connecting the density correction reference density value (STD
low-density section approximation formula and the value) r30% at the upper limit or the lower limit bias
middle-density section approximation formula voltage when executing the high density process
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM control.
value) from the second step patch print result when Section PCU
executing the half tone process control in CYAN. Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
Section PCU trouble between PCU PWB-image density sensor, dirt
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection on image density sensor, transfer belt cleaning trouble
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density Check 1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt and sensor gain adjustment.
cleaning trouble remedy 2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain harnesses.
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the 3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check the
remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is drum surface state, the belt surface state, etc.
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
F2-93 High-density process control density
correction error (MAGENTA)
F2-86 Half tone process control 2nd patch
reference value trouble (MAGENTA) Trouble content The patch density value is not in the range of the
density correction reference density value (STD
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the value) r30% at the upper limit or the lower limit bias
middle-density section output when connecting the voltage when executing the high density process
low-density section approximation formula and the control.
middle-density section approximation formula Section PCU
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
value) from the second step patch print result when trouble between PCU PWB-image density sensor, dirt
executing the half tone process control in MAGENTA. on image density sensor, transfer belt cleaning trouble
Section PCU Check 1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection and sensor gain adjustment.
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density remedy 2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt harnesses.
cleaning trouble 3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check the
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain drum surface state, the belt surface state, etc.
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt F2-94 High-density process control density
surface state.
correction error (YELLOW)
Trouble content The patch density value is not in the range of the
F2-87 Half tone process control 2nd patch density correction reference density value (STD
reference value trouble (YELLOW) value) r30% at the upper limit or the lower limit bias
voltage when executing the high density process
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the control.
middle-density section output when connecting the Section PCU
low-density section approximation formula and the Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
middle-density section approximation formula (formula trouble between PCU PWB-image density sensor, dirt
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value) on image density sensor, transfer belt cleaning trouble
from the second step patch print result when Check 1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
executing the half tone process control in YELLOW. and sensor gain adjustment.
Section PCU remedy 2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection harnesses.
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density 3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check the
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt drum surface state, the belt surface state, etc.
cleaning trouble
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the F3-12 Main unit tray 1 lift-up trouble
remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt Trouble content LUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time.
surface state. Section PCU
Case 1 Cause LUD1 sensor trouble, harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper
feed unit.
Check Check the harness and the connector of LUD1.
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause Tray 1 lift-up motor trouble
Check Check the lift-up unit.
and
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 20

F3-22 Main unit tray 2 lift-up trouble H3-00 Fusing section high temperature
Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time. trouble (TH_UM)
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause LUD2 sensor trouble, harness connection trouble Trouble content The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds the
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper specified level.
feed unit. Section PCU
Check Check the harness and the connector of LUD2. Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
and section connector connection error, AC power source
remedy trouble
Case 2 Cause Tray 2 lift-up motor trouble Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
Check Check the lift-up unit. and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
and remedy harness.
remedy Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC
PWB and the control PWB lamp control circuit.
H2-00 Non-contact thermistor detection 4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
thermistor open (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content Thermistor open H3-01 Fusing section high temperature trou-
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
ble (TH_LM)
section connector connection trouble, AC power
Trouble content The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds the
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
specified level.
Check Check the harness and the connector from the
Section PCU
and thermistor to the control PWB.
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
remedy
section connector connection error, AC power source
trouble
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
H2-01 Lower thermistor open (TH_LM) and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
remedy harness.
Trouble content Thermistor open
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
Section PCU
section.
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing 3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC
section connector connection trouble, AC power PWB and the control PWB lamp control circuit.
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed 4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check Check the harness and the connector from the
and thermistor to the control PWB.
remedy H3-02 Sub thermistor fusing section high
temperature trouble (TH_US)
H2-02 Sub thermistor open (TH_US) Trouble content The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds the
specified level.
Trouble content Thermistor open
Section PCU Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power section connector connection error, AC power source
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed trouble
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
Check Check the harness and the connector from the
and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
and thermistor to the control PWB.
remedy harness.
remedy
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC
H2-03 Non-contact thermistor PWB and the control PWB lamp control circuit.
compensation thermistor open 4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
(TH_UM_AD1)
Trouble content Thermistor open
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble
Check Check the harness and the connector from the
and thermistor to the control PWB.
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 21

H4-00 Fusing section low temperature trou- H4-30 Thermistor differential input trouble
ble (TH_UM_AD2) (TH_UM)
Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level
Trouble content TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not exceed the
within the specified time after turning on the power
specified level (50 count with the AD value) within
relay.
1minute after HL_UM is turned on.
Section PCU
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
Case 1 Cause HL_UM does not turn on. Thermistor trouble, harness
trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source trouble,
trouble, PCU PWB trouble
interlock switch trouble
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
remedy harness.
remedy harness.
Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
section.
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
disconnection and the thermostat breakage.
disconnection and the thermostat breakage.
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC PWB
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC PWB
and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.
and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

H4-01 Fusing section low temperature trou- H5-01 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-
ble (TH_LM) reached jam
Trouble content 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam
Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level
Section PCU
within the specified time after turning on the power
relay. Case 1 Cause The fusing jam is not removed completely. (Jam paper
remains.)
Section PCU
Check Check the fusing section for jam paper. (winding, etc.)
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
and
trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source trouble,
remedy
interlock switch trouble
Case 2 Cause POD1 sensor trouble or harness connection trouble
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the Check Check the POD1 sensor harness. Use SIM14 to
remedy harness. and cancel the trouble.
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit remedy
section. Case 3 Cause Fusing unit installation trouble
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp Check Check the fusing unit installation.
disconnection and the thermostat breakage. and
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC PWB remedy
and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
L1-00 Mirror feed trouble
H4-02 Sub thermistor fusing section low Trouble content Mirror feed is not completed within the specified time.
Section Scanner
temperature trouble (TH_US)
Case 1 Cause Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level Check Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
within the specified time after turning on the power and
relay. remedy
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source trouble, L3-00 Mirror return trouble
interlock switch trouble
Trouble content Mirror return is not completed within the specified
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp..
time.
and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
remedy harness. Section Scanner
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit Case 1 Cause Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
section. Check Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp and
disconnection and the thermostat breakage. remedy
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC PWB
and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. L4-02 Paper feed motor lock trouble
Trouble content When the paper feed motor is rotated in warming up
or in canceling a jam and the lock signal is not
detected within 1sec.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Paper feed motor trouble, harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB and paper feed motor, control
circuit trouble
Check Use SIM6-1 to check the paper feed motor operation.
and Check the harness and the connector between the
remedy PCU PWB and the paper feed motor.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 22

L4-04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) L4-11 Shift motor trouble
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
Trouble content When the shift motor is initialized, no characteristics
developing motor.
change of the shifter home position sensor is not
Section PCU detected within the specified time.
Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB Section PCU
and the developing motor.
Case 1 Cause Shift motor trouble
Check Check the harness and the connector between the
Check Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the shift motor.
and PCU PWB and the developing motor.
and
remedy
remedy
Case 2 Cause Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Case 2 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
Check Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the developing and the shift motor, control circuit trouble
and motor.
Check Use SIM30-1 to check the shifter home position
remedy
and sensor. Check the harness and the connector
remedy between the PCU PWB and the shift motor.
Case 3 Cause When the finisher is installed with the finisher
L4-05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR) connector disconnected and when the finisher
communication trouble occurs.
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
Check Connect the finisher connector.
developing motor.
and When the communication trouble occurs between the
Section PCU
remedy PCU and the finisher, refer to the content of F1-00.
Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
and the developing motor.
Check Check the harness and the connector between the
and PCU PWB and the developing motor.
L4-30 Controller fan/HDD fan motor trouble
remedy Trouble content 1) The motor lock signal is detected during rotation
Case 2 Cause Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble of the controller fan motor.
Check Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the developing 2) The motor lock signal is detected during rotation
and motor. of the HDD fan motor.
remedy Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Fan motor trouble
Check Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
L4-06 Transfer belt separation position sen- and
sor trouble remedy
Case 2 Cause Harness connection trouble between the mother PWB
Trouble content When separating the primary transfer belt unit, and the fan motor.
change in the separation position sensor Check Check the harness and the connector between the
characteristics is not detected within the specified and mother PWB and the fan motor.
time. remedy
Section PCU Case 3 Cause Control circuit trouble
Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB Check Replace the controller PWB.
and the separation position sensor and
Check Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the remedy
and separation position sensor. Case 4 Cause Mother PWB trouble.
remedy Check Replace the mother PWB.
Case 2 Cause The belt position sensor is not interrupted or it is and
always interrupted. Belt separation clutch operation remedy
trouble
Check Use SIM6-3 to check the belt separation operation.
and L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble
remedy
Case 3 Cause The primary transfer belt unit is not installed. Trouble content When the paper exit cooling fan is operated, the fan
Check Install the primary transfer belt. operation signal is not detected within the specified
and time.
remedy Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection
Check Check the harness and the connector between the
and PCU PWB and the fan.
remedy
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
Check Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is rotation actually.
and
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 23

L4-32 Power cooling fan/ozone exhaust fan L8-20 Power controller communication trou-
trouble ble
Trouble content Communication establishment error/Framing/Parity/
Trouble content When the power cooling fan/ozone exhaust fan is
Protocol error
operated, the fan operation signal is not detected
within the specified time. Section MFP
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Connector connection trouble between the mother
board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 1 Cause Power cooling fan or ozone exhaust fan connector
MFPcnt PWB mother board connector pin breakage
disconnection
Check Check the connector connection between the mother
Check Check the harness and the connector between the
and board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. Check grounding
and PCU PWB and the fan.
remedy of the machine.
remedy
Case 2 Cause Mother PWB trouble
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble
Check Replace the mother PWB.
Check Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
and
and
remedy
remedy
Case 3 Cause Mother PWB jumper error
Check Set the mother PWB jumper to the Default side.
L6-10 Polygon motor lock detection and
remedy
Trouble content It is judged that the LSU polygon motor lock signal is
not outputted, and the lock signal is checked after 7
sec from starting rotation of the polygon motor and it is PC--- Personal counter not installed
judged that the polygon motor does not rotate
properly. Trouble content The personal counter is not installed.
Section LSU Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Disconnection of the LSU connector or the LSU inside Case 1 Cause The personal counter is not installed.
harness, or breakage Check Install the personal counter.
Check Check connection of the harness and the connector. and
and If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the LSUcnt remedy
remedy PWB or the LSU.
Case 2 Cause Polygon motor trouble, LSU PWB trouble
Check Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon U1-01 Battery trouble
and motor.
remedy If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the LSUcnt Trouble content Backup SRAM battery voltage fall
PWB or the LSU. Section MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
2) Battery circuit abnormality
L8-01 No full wave signal Check Check that the battery voltage is about 2.5V or above.
and
Trouble content No full wave signal is detected. remedy
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Harness trouble
Check Check connection of the harness and the connector. U2-00 EEPROM read/write error
and (MFP detection)
remedy
Case 2 Cause Power unit trouble Trouble content EEPROM device read/write error
Check Replace the power unit. Section MFP
and Case 1 Cause EEPROM device trouble
remedy Check Replace the EEPROM device.
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble and
Check Replace the PCU PWB. remedy
and Case 2 Cause EEPROM device contact failure
remedy Check Check that EEPROM device is properly inserted.
and
remedy
L8-02 Full wave signal width abnormality Case 3 Cause Device access error due to electrical noises
Check Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Trouble content The full wave signal is judged as frequency and
abnormality. (The detection frequency is judged as remedy
65Hz or above or 45Hz or less.)
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Harness trouble U2-05 HDD/Flash/EEPROM data discrepancy
Check Check the harness and the connector connection.
and Trouble content A HDD or Flash memory for user authentication
remedy different from that used before turn off the power is
Case 2 Cause Power unit trouble installed.
Check Replace the power unit. Section MFP
and Case 1 Cause HDD replacement or Flash memory replacement
remedy Check Initialize the authentication information with SIM16,
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble and and import the backup data (exported data) if any.
Check Replace the PCU PWB. remedy
and
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 24

U2-10 SRAM user authentication index U2-24 SRAM memory user authentication
check sum error counter check sum error
Trouble content User index information (basic data of user
Trouble content Check sum error of the user counter on SRAM
authentication) check sum error on the SRAM
Section MFP
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) SRAM trouble
Case 1 Cause 1) SRAM trouble
2) Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
2) Hang-up of the control circuit due to electrical
3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
noises
Check Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
and
Check Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
remedy
and
remedy

U2-25 Flash memory user authentication

U2-11 EEPROM check sum error counter check sum error
(MFP detection) Trouble content Check sum error of the user authentication counter on
FLASH
Trouble content Counter information check sum error on the EEPROM
Section MFP
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Flash trouble. Control circuit hang-up due to electrical
Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device trouble
noises
2) EEPROM device contact failure
MFPcnt PWB FLASH access circuit trouble.
3) Device access error due to electrical noises
Check Use SIM16 to recalculate the check sum of the user
Check Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
and counter and save the normal sum value.
and
remedy
remedy

U2-22 SRAM memory check sum error U2-30 Serial number data discrepancy
(MFP l PCU)
Trouble content MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory check sum error
Section MFP Trouble content The serial number stored in the PCU differs from that
Case 1 Cause SRAM trouble stored in the MFP.
Check 1) Initialize the communication management table Section MFP
and registered in SRAM and the FAX soft switch. Case 1 Cause EEPROM is not changed when the PCU/MFPcnt
remedy 2) Since the registered contents have been deleted, PWB is replaced.
register them again. Check 1) Check that EEPROM is properly set.
Case 2 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises and 2) Check that EEPROM on the previous PWB is
Check Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. remedy inserted to the newly installed PWB.
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble U2-50 HDD section individual data check
Check Replace the MFPcnt PWB. sum error
and
remedy Trouble content MFPcnt HDD individual data check sum error (One-
touch, group, program, etc.)
Section MFP
U2-23 MFPC section SRAM memory Case 1 Cause Write/read error to/from HDD
individual data check sum error Check 1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data
and related to the check sum error contents.
Trouble content MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory individual data check remedy 2) Since the registered contents have been deleted,
sum error (Communication management table, sender register them again.
registration data, etc.) 3) If the trouble is not canceled, replace the HDD.
Section MFP Case 2 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Case 1 Cause SRAM trouble Check Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
Check 1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data and
and related to the check sum error automatically. remedy
remedy 2) Since the registered contents have been deleted, Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB HDD access circuit trouble
register them again. Check Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 2 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises and
remedy
Check Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Check Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
and
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 25

U2-80 EEPROM read/write error U2-91 EEPROM (PCU) check sum error
(SCU detection) Trouble content Check sum error of adjustment value (PCU)
Trouble content 1) EEPROM version error Section PCU
2) Write error to EEPROM Case 1 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Section Scanner Check Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which is and
not initialized remedy
Check Check that EEPROM is properly set. Case 2 Cause EEPROM trouble.
and Check Check that EEPROM is properly set.
remedy and
Case 2 Cause SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble remedy
Check To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment data, Case 3 Cause PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
and use the simulation to save the counter/adjustment Check To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment data,
remedy values. (If there is a printer option, execute SIM22-1 to and use the simulation to save the counter/adjustment
save the counter data and the adjustment values.) remedy values. (If there is a printer option, execute SIM22-1 to
Replace the SCU PWB. Use SIM16 to cancel the save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.

U2-81 Adjustment value check sum error U6-00 Desk communication trouble
(SCU detection) Trouble content Desk communication error, communication line test
error after turning on the power or canceling the
Trouble content EEPROM (SCU) check sum error
exclusive simulation
Section Scanner
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble or
Check Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. disconnection, desk control PWB trouble, control
and PWB (PCU) trouble, malfunction due to electrical
remedy noises
Case 2 Cause EEPROM trouble Check Cancel the trouble by turning OFF/ON. Check the
Check To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment data, and connector and the harness of the communication line.
and use the simulation to save the counter/adjustment remedy
remedy values. (If there is a printer option, execute SIM22-1 to
save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
Replace the SCU PWB. Use SIM16 to cancel the U6-01 Tray 1 lift-up trouble
trouble.
Case 3 Cause SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble Trouble content DLUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Check Check that EEPROM is properly set. Section PCU
and Case 1 Cause DLUD1 sensor trouble, tray 1 lift-up motor trouble,
remedy desk PWB, lift-up unit, paper feed unit harness
connection trouble
Check Check DLUD1 and its harness and connector. Check
U2-90 EEPROM read/write error and the lift-up unit.
(PCU detection) remedy

Trouble content EEPROM version error, write error to EEPROM

Section PCU U6-02 Tray 2 lift-up trouble
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which is
not initialized Trouble content DLUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Check Check that EEPROM is properly set. Section PCU
and Case 1 Cause DLUD2 sensor trouble, tray 2 lift-up motor trouble,
remedy desk PWB, lift-up unit, paper feed unit harness
Case 2 Cause PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble connection trouble
Check To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment data, Check Check DLUD2 and its harness and connector. Check
and use the simulation to save the counter/adjustment and the lift-up unit.
remedy values. (If there is a printer option, execute SIM22-1 to remedy
save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
Replace the PCU PWB. Use SIM16 to cancel the
trouble. U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble
Trouble content • The encoder input value is not changed in 0.13sec
(1st time)/0.5sec (2nd time and later) after rotation
of the motor.
• The motor is rotated for 18sec or more.
• The encoder is changed after passing a certain
time from stopping the motor. (2sec, 10 count or
more)
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Sensor trouble, LCC control PWB trouble, gear
breakage, lift motor trouble
Check Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the
and sensor and the lift motor. Use SIM15 to cancel the
remedy trouble.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 26

U6-10 Desk transport motor trouble UC-02 CPT-ASIC abnormality
Trouble content Desk transport motor operation trouble Trouble content CPT-ASIC access error (When the ASIC does not
Section PCU operate normally.)
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, overcurent to the Section Scanner
motor, console finisher control PWB trouble Case 1 Cause CPT-ASIC abnormality, SCU PWB abnormality
Check Use SIM 4-3 to check the operation of the desk Check Turn OFF/ON the power several times. If the trouble
and transport motor. and still occurs, replace the SCU PWB or the CPT-ASIC.
remedy remedy

U6-20 LCC communication trouble UC-20 Document control module trouble

Trouble content LCC communication error. Communication line test Trouble content Communication error between SCU and DOCC
error after turning ON the power or canceling the Communication line test error when turning on the
exclusive simulation. LCC and machine model codes power or after canceling an exclusion simulation.
discrepancy error Section Scanner
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Connector or harness connection error or
Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble or disconnection
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, control PWB Check Check the connector and harness in the
(PCU) trouble, malfunction due to electrical noises and communication line.
Check Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel the trouble. Check remedy
and the connector and the harness of the communication Case 2 Cause Control PWB (SCU) trouble, DOCC PWB trouble.
remedy line. Check Replace the SCU PWB or the DOCC PWB.
and
remedy
U6-21 LCC transport motor trouble Case 3 Cause Malfunction due to electrical noises.
Check Turn OFF/ON the power to electrical cancel the
Trouble content • The encoder input value is not changed in 0.06sec and trouble.
after turning on the motor. remedy
• The encoder input value is changed after a certain
time from turning OFF the motor. (After 5sec, count
is made for 0.1sec to get 100 or more count.)
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, an overcurrent to
the motor, LCC control PWB trouble
Check Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the transport
and motor.
remedy

U6-22 LCC 24V power abnormality

Trouble content DC24V power is not supplied to LCC.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble or
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, power unit
trouble
Check Check the connector and the harness of the power
and line. Check that the power unit and the LCC control
remedy PWB is of 24V.

U6-50 Desk incompatibility trouble

Trouble content Detection of desk connection incompatible with the
MX-2300/2700 **
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connection of a desk which is incompatible with the
MX-2300/2700 ** is detected.
Check Connect the MX-DEX1/DEX2.
and
remedy

U6-51 LCC incompatibility trouble

Trouble content Detection of LCC connection which is incompatible
with the MX-2300/2700 **.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connection of the LCC, which is incompatible with the
MX-2300/2700 ** is detected.
Check Connect the MX-LCX1.
and
remedy

MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 27

[9] MAINTENANCE
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Maintenance system table

✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shift the position.

Monochrome
Remark/Refer to the
supply/ 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
Parts Guide.
Mechanical When K K K K K K K K K K K K
Unit name Part name Block/Item No.
parts calling
(Only the replacement
Color supply 60 120 180 240 300 360
parts are described.)
K K K K K K
Drum Drum (BK) Monochrome ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
peripheral Cleaner blade (BK) supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-14)
Charging unit (BK) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-2)
Drum (C) Color supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Cleaner blade (C) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-14)
Charging unit (C) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-2)
Side seal F/R (BK) Mechanical ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner reception seal parts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(BK)
Side seal F/R(C) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner reception seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(C)
Waste toner box ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Developing Developer (BK) Monochrome ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
section DV seal (BK) supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-42)
DV side seal F (BK) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-26)
DV side seal R (BK) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-15)
Toner filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [22]-37)
Developer (C) Color supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Developer (M) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Developer (Y) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
DV seal (C) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-42)
DV side seal F/R (C) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-26,
[23]-15)
Toner filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [22]-37)
Toner cartridge (BK/ Monochrome/ User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
C/M/Y) Color supply
Bias pin/Connector Mechanical ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
parts

Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply/ When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
Unit name Part name Block/Item No.
Mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
(Only the replacement
parts
parts are described.)
LSU Dust proof glass Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { {
Cleaning base parts ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [2]-35)
Transfer Intermediate Mechanical ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [26]-3)
section transfer belt parts
Primary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [27]-9)
roller (P/G No.: [28]-27)
Intermediate ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [25]-19)
transfer blade
Belt drive gear ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [27]-13)
Primary transfer ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [27]-8)
conduction collar (P/G No.: [28]-25)
Transfer drive roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
Transfer follower { { { { { { { { { { { {
roller
Tension roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
Belt CL brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Y auxiliary roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
Resist backup roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Secondary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [30]-21)
belt
Secondary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [30]-6)
roller
Secondary belt drive ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ {
roller
Secondary belt ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ {
tension roller

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 1

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply/ When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
Unit name Part name Block/Item No.
Mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
(Only the replacement
parts
parts are described.)
Transfer Secondary belt Mechanical ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ {
section follower roller parts
Secondary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [29]-6)
idle gear
Sensors (Process ✕ { { { { { { { { { { { {
control resist
sensors)
Primary CL roller ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [26]-56)
Cleaner seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Cleaner seal R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transfer toner ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
reception seal
Fusing Upper heat roller Mechanical ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-32)
section Lower heat roller parts ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [33]-15)
Upper heat roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-30)
gear
Upper roller bearing ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-31)
Lower roller bearing ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [33]-14)
Upper separation ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-11)
pawl
Upper thermistor ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-18)
Lower thermistor ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [33]-20)
Non-contact ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲
thermistor
Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Specified position
Paper guides { { { { { { { { { { { { {
Fusing unit ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [31]-901)
(P/G No.: [32]-901)
(P/G No.: [33]-901)
Filters Ozone filter PA Mechanical ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [47]-40)
parts
Paper feed Pickup roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [11]-40,
section parts [16]-33)
Paper feed roller { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [11]-41,
[16]-29)
Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [10]-4,
[15]-37)
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport PS follower roller Mechanical ✕ { { { { { { { { { { { {
section/ Transport rollers parts { { { { { { { { { { { { {
Paper exit Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
reverse Paper exit filter
1
section
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions (specified
positions).
Drive Gears (Grease) Mechanical ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ HANARL FL955R/
section parts FLOIL G313S
When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions (specified
positions).
Shaft earth sections ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply
(Conduction grease) to the necessary
positions (specified
positions).
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Others Sensors Mechanical ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
parts
Image quality Mechanical ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
parts
Optical Mirror/Lens/ Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { {
section Reflector/CCD parts
Table glass/ { { { { { { { { { { { { {
SPF glass
Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { { { {
Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Specified positions
Drive belt/ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drive wire

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 2

2. Details of maintenance
A. Drum peripheral
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shift the position.

Monochrome
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.
supply/
When K K K K K K K K K K K K Block/Item No.
No. Part name Mechanical parts
calling (Only the replacement parts are
Color supply 60 120 180 240 300 360
described.)
K K K K K K
1 Drum (BK) Monochrome ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Cleaner blade supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-14)
(BK)
3 Charging unit ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-2)
(BK)
4 Drum (C) Color supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Cleaner blade (C) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-14)
6 Charging unit (C) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-2)
7 Side seal F/R Mechanical ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(BK) parts
8 Toner reception ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
seal (BK)
9 Side seal F/R(C) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
10 Toner reception ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
seal (C)
11 Waste toner box ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕

7,9

8,10
1,4 2,5

7,9
3,6

11

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 3

The PM cycle means the replacement timing of periodic replace-
ment consumable parts which are required for maintaining the per-
formance.
The PM cycle is specified only for B/W output. For color output, it is
used as a reference value.
[Reason] Since the ratio of B/W to color differs depending on the
user's operation scene which varies every day, the PM cycle can-
not be specified in a certain cycle for color output.
Replacement of a PM item at the recommended life is performed
by the dealer's judgment or at PM call or at EM call.
Life end definition of a drum
When the drum counter exceeds the specified level of 100% black
output or 100% full color output, it is judged as life end.
However in practice, the number of rotations specifies quality
assurance policy of the tandem engine, where its wear cannot be
solely defined by the number of sheets but other operating condi-
tions including increased slip rotations depending on the ratio of B/
W to color and/or B/W printing in the color mode using the ACS.
The guaranteed number of rotations for the MX-2300/2700 series
drum is 715K.
The drum life is affected by the number of sheets of one print job.
This is because the actual life is determined by rotations of the
drum. If the number of sheets of one print job is less than 3 sheets,
the number of rotations for page is increased. As shown in the fig-
ure below, therefore, the number of sheets of drum life varies
depending on the number of sheets of one print job.
As a reference of the drum life, "Life meter" can be checked with
SIM22-1 from the accumulated number of rotations of each drum.
"Life meter" indicates the remained life (%) of the drum with the
entire drum life as 100%.
(Example) If the used number of rotations is 550K:
100(%) - 550 (K rotations) / 715 (K rotations) x 100 = 030 (%)
Drum counter Number of rotations of drum
B/W Full color B/W Full color
Drum 100K 60K 715K rotations 715K rotations
* For 100% full color output by the user, the life of the black drum
is 60K similarly to the life of the color drums.

Drum Life

200

Black Drum
150
Color Drum
Drum Life ( - K pages)

100

50

0
0 1 2 3 4 5

Number of sheets of one print job

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 4

B. LSU
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shift the position.

Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.

Monochrome
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Block/Item No.
No. Part name supply/
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K (Only the replacement parts are
Mechanical parts
described.)
1 Dust proof glass Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Cleaning base parts ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [2]-35)

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 5

C. Developing section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shift the position.

Monochrome
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.
supply/
When K K K K K K K K K K K K Block/Item No.
No. Part name Mechanical parts
calling (Only the replacement parts are
Color supply 60 120 180 240 300 360
described.)
K K K K K K
1 Developer (BK) Monochrome ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 DV seal (BK) supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-42)
3 DV side seal F ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-26)
(BK)
4 DV side seal R ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-15)
(BK)
5 Toner filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [22]-37)
6 Developer (C) Color supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
7 Developer (M) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
8 Developer (Y) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
9 DV seal (C) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-42)
10 DV side seal F/R ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
(C)
11 Toner filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [22]-37)
12 Toner cartridge Monochrome/ User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
(BK/C/M/Y) Color supply
13 Bias pin/ Mechanical ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Connector parts

13
4,10
13
1,6,7,8
2,9

5,11

3,10 13

12

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 6

D. Transfer section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shift the position.

Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.

Monochrome
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Block/Item No.
No. Part name supply/
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K (Only the replacement parts are
Mechanical parts
described.)
1 Intermediate Mechanical ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [26]-3)
transfer belt parts
2 Primary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [27]-9)
roller (P/G No.: [28]-27)
3 Intermediate ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [25]-19)
transfer blade
4 Belt drive gear ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [27]-13)
5 Primary transfer ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [27]-8)
conduction collar (P/G No.: [28]-25)
6 Transfer drive roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
7 Transfer follower { { { { { { { { { { { {
roller
8 Tension roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
9 Belt CL brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
10 Y auxiliary roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
11 Resist backup roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
12 Secondary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [30]-21)
belt
13 Secondary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [30]-6)
roller
14 Secondary belt ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ {
drive roller
15 Secondary belt ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ {
tension roller
16 Secondary belt ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ {
follower roller
17 Secondary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [29]-6)
idle gear
18 Sensors (Process ✕ { { { { { { { { { { { {
control resist
sensors)
19 Primary CL roller ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [26]-56)
20 Cleaner seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
21 Cleaner seal R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
22 Transfer toner ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
reception seal

19 20
3
8
7 4
10
21
17
5

19
11 12

2 9
14
6
13
15
16

18 8 9 11 3
14

15
13,17
16
4,6
7 10 2,5

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 7

E. Fusing section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shift the position.

Remark/Refer to the Parts

Monochrome Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
No. Part name supply/ Block/Item No.
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
Mechanical parts (Only the replacement parts are
described.)
1 Upper heat roller Mechanical ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-32)
2 Lower heat roller parts ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [33]-15)
3 Upper heat roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-30)
gear
4 Upper roller bearing ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-31)
5 Lower roller bearing ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [33]-14)
6 Upper separation ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-11)
pawl
7 Upper thermistor ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-18)
8 Lower thermistor ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [33]-20)
9 Non-contact ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲
thermistor
10 Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Specified position
11 Paper guides { { { { { { { { { { { { {
12 Fusing unit ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [31]-901)
(P/G No.: [32]-901)
(P/G No.: [33]-901)

12 1

1
9 2

7
6 2
8

9 4

11
4

11
8

11

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 8

F. Optical section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shift the position.

Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.

Monochrome
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Block/Item No.
No. Part name supply/
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K (Only the replacement parts are
Mechanical parts
described.)
1 Mirror/Lens/ Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { {
Reflector/CCD parts
2 Table glass/ { { { { { { { { { { { { {
SPF glass
3 Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Specified positions
5 Drive belt/ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drive wire

2 4

1
4

5
1

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 9

G. Filters
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shift the position.

Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.

Monochrome
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Block/Item No.
No. Part name supply/
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K (Only the replacement parts are
Mechanical parts
described.)
1 Ozone filter PA Mechanical ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [47]-40)
parts

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 10

H. Paper feed section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shift the position.

Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.

Monochrome
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Block/Item No.
No. Part name supply/
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K (Only the replacement parts are
Mechanical parts
described.)
1 Pickup roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [11]-40, [16]-33)
2 Paper feed roller parts { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [11]-41, [16]-29)
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [10]-4, [15]-37)
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕

4
2 1
3

4
1
2
3

4
1
2
3

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 11

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

I. Transport section/Paper exit reverse section

✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shift the position.

Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.

Monochrome
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Block/Item No.
No. Part name supply/
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K (Only the replacement parts are
Mechanical parts
described.)
1 PS follower roller Mechanical ✕ { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Transport rollers parts { { { { { { { { { { { { {
3 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
1 4 Paper exit filter
5 Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to the
necessary positions (specified
positions).

1 4

4 2

3
3
2

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 12

J. Drive section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shift the position.

Remark/Refer to the Parts

Monochrome Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
No. Part name supply/ Block/Item No.
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
Mechanical parts (Only the replacement
parts are described.)
1 Gears (Grease) Mechanical ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ HANARL FL955R/FLOIL
parts G313S
When checking, apply to
the necessary positions
(specified positions).
2 Shaft earth sections ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
(Conduction grease) the necessary positions
(specified positions).
3 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕

1
(FLOIL G313S)

1
(HANARL FL955R)

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 13

3. Other related items e. Developer cartridge system counters

A. Maintenance timing display Print job

Code Content
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when Enable/Disable
each counter reaches the set value. The relationship between the VK The developer print counter (K) reaches Enable
100,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
messages and the counters is shown blow.
rotations of the developer (K) reaches 715K.
(1) (Maintenance timing) (Frameless) VC The developer print counter (C) reaches Enable
60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
a. Maintenance counters rotations of the developer (C) reaches 715K.
VM The developer print counter (M) reaches Enable
Print job 60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
Code Content
Enable/Disable rotations of the developer (M) reaches 715K.
TA The maintenance counters (total) reaches 90% Enable VY The developer print counter (Y) reaches Enable
of the set value of SIM21-1, or they reaches 60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM26-38 is set to rotations of the developer (Y) reaches 715K.
Print Enable.
CA The maintenance counters (color) reaches Enable • After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Devel-
90% of the set value of SIM21-1, or they oper counters (number of the developer print counter, accumu-
reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM26- lated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
38 is set to Print Enable.
AA The maintenance counters (both of total and Enable
(2) [Maintenance timing] (Framed)
color) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM21-
1, or they reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but
a. Maintenance counters
SIM26-38 is set to Print Enable.
Print job
Code Content
• After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte- Enable/Disable
nance counters (total, color) clear). TA The maintenance counters (total) reaches the Disable
set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
b. Transfer unit system counters Print Disable.
CA The maintenance counters (color) reaches the Disable
Print job set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
Code Content Print Disable.
Enable/Disable
TK1 The primary transfer unit print counter reaches Enable AA The maintenance counters (both of total and Disable
100,000 sheets. color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and
TK2 The secondary transfer unit print counter Enable SIM26-38 is set to Print Disable.
reaches 300,000 sheets.
• After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte-
• After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Primary nance counters (total, color) clear).
and secondary transfer unit counters (number of the transfer unit (3) [Check the waste toner box.] (Framed)
print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the transfer unit,
days of use of the transfer unit) clear). Print job
Code Content
Enable/Disable
c. Fusing unit counter — Waste toner full Disable

Print job • After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by
Code Content
Enable/Disable opening/close of the front door.
FK1 The funsing unit print counter reaches 200,000 Enable
sheets.

• After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Fusing

unit counters (number of the fusing unit print counter, days of use
of the fusing unit) clear).

d. Drum cartridge system counters

Print job
Code Content
Enable/Disable
DK The drum cartridge print counter (K) reaches Enable
100,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the drum (K) reaches 715K.
DC The drum cartridge print counter (C) reaches Enable
60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the drum (C) reaches 715K.
DM The drum cartridge print counter (M) reaches Enable
60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the drum (M) reaches 715K.
DY The drum cartridge print counter (Y) reaches Enable
60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the drum (Y) reaches 715K.

• After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-7 (Drum

counters (number of the drum print counter, accumulated travel-
ing distance of the drum) clear).

MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 14

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

[10] ROM VERSION-UP

MX2700N


C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware

5GTXKEG/CPWCN
There are following methods of downloading of the firmware.

1. General 1 1) Firmware download using USB

2) Firmware download using media
A. Cases where version-up is required 3) Firmware download using FTP
ROM version-up is required in the following cases: 4) Firmware download using Web page
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. • Firmware types
2) When installing a new spare ROM to the machine for repair.
Flash ROM Contents
3) When installing a new spare PWB unit with ROM installed to it.
Machine ALL Includes all contents shown below.
4) When there is a trouble in the programs in ROM and it must be ICU(BOOT) ANIME
repaired. BOOTSUB
B. Notes for version-up CONFIG
ESCP FONT
(1) Relationship between each ROM and version-up GRPH
Before execution of ROM version-up, check combinations with LANG
ROMís installed in the other PWBís including options. SPDL
Some combinations of versions may cause malfunctions of the XIO FONT
machine. PROFILE
ICU(MAIN) MAIN
IMG-ASIC IMG DATA ROM
SCU SCU(MAIN)
PCU PCU(MAIN)
FAX1 FAX1(MAIN)
FAX2 FAX2(MAIN)
Option 1K FINISHER FINISHER_1K(MAIN)
INNER FINISHER FINISHER_INNER(MAIN)
LCC A4 LCC_A4(MAIN)
DESK DESK(MAIN)
NOTE: If the MFPcnt PWB DIP SW No. 2 is not set to ON, an error
occurs.

2. Version-up procedure
A. Firmware download using USB

Firmware.sfu

Controller
USB Cable USB Slave

First you must install a USB print driver from the setup.exe
1
program in the MX-2300/2700 CD-ROM Disc 1
Create a folder on the root drive (usually C:\) of the PC. Name
the folder Pastel. Download the firmware (xxxx.sfu) and the
file2PRN program (File2PRN.exe) and place these files into the
pastel folder.
• Click on the firmware icon and drag it onto the File2PRN icon
• The Imager will automatically enter simulation 49-99.
• If you open the print queue on the PC, you can see the firmware
loading for a few minutes.
• When the firmware finishes loading from the print queue, the
Imager display in simulation 49-99 shows the following:
"S *** E"
CAUTION DO NOT POWER OFF THE MFP! FIRMWARE
UPDATE IN PROGESS!"
• At the completion of the upgrade, the Imager will reboot auto-
matically.
• Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
upgraded successfully.
Note: If the Imager locks up or loses power during the
upgrade, it could corrupt the firmware, preventing the imager
from booting up normally.
If this occurs, you can "rescue" the firmware using the follow-
ing procedure:
• Rename the firmware file in the pastel folder to emup-
date.sfu
• Click on the emupdate.sfu icon and drag it onto the
File2PRN icon.
• The Imager will automatically enter simulation 49-99.
• If you open the print queue on the PC, you can see the firm-
ware loading for a few minutes.
• When the firmware finishes loading from the print queue,
the Imager display in simulation 49-99 shows the following:
"S *** E"
CAUTION DO NOT POWER OFF THE MFP! FIRMWARE
UPDATE IN PROGESS!"
• At the completion of the upgrade, the Imager will reboot
automatically.
• Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
upgraded successfully.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ROM VERSION-UP 10 – 1

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

1 B. Firmware download using USB device

Media

Firmware. Adapter

Firmware. + USB Host

The machine recognizes the

Firmware. USB Memory
media and automatically executes
processing.

Firmware.sfu

(1) Firmware update from USB memory device 4) Select the button of the firmware to be updated. The button will
be highlighted. (In this screen, [ICU(MAIN)] and [LANGUAGE]
1 First you must install the firmware file (xxx.sfu) to the root of a
USB jump drive. are selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] button appears.
• If the firmware is in a folder, Simulation 49-01 cannot open * Press the selected button again to release the selection.
the folder. * Press [ALL] button to select all items.
• Secure Jumpdrive will not work.
• Must have a minimum of 32MB of storage capacity to load 1 0
the firmware onto it. TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE

1) Insert the USB memory device into the main unit. FIRMWARE UPDATE S E

2) Enter the 49-01 screen. Press the button of the file to be ICU(MAIN) : CURRENT
NOW 01.00.00
01.00.00 NEXT TO
UPDATED 01.01.00
01.01.00

updated. The screen transfers to the update screen. ICU(BOOT) : CURRENT

NOW 01.00.00
01.00.00 NEXT TO
UPDATED 01.01.00
01.01.00

(In this screen, [FILE 1] is selected) LANGUAGE : CURRENT 01.00.00

NOW 09.00.00 UPDATED
NEXT TO 01.01.00
01.00.00

* The number of button changes depending on the number of GRAPHIC : CURRENT 01.00.00
NOW 01.01.00 UPDATED
NEXT TO 01.01.00
09.00.00

the file in the USB memory device inserted. ALL ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
1/5

0 5) Press [EXECUTE] button. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”

TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE becomes clear. If no button is selected, [EXECUTE] button is
FIRMWARE UPDATE gray out and cannot be pressed. Press [YES] to start the
update.
FILE1 FILE2
FILE3 FILE4
1 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE

FIRMWARE UPDATE S∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ E

1/1
ICU(MAIN) NOW 01.00.00 NEXT 01.01.00

ICU(BOOT) NOW 01.00.00 NEXT 01.01.00

3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
will be shown for each firmware respectively. LANGUAGE NOW 09.00.00 NEXT 01.00.00

Following key-codes will be changed; GRAPHIC NOW 01.01.00 NEXT 09.00.00

NOW o CURRENT ALL ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE

1/5
NEXT o UPDATED TO
1 6) At the completion of the upgrade, the display will change to:
0 "COMPLETE: PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH" Press OK.
SIMLATION NO. 49-01 CLOSE
The Imager will reboot at this time.
TEST
FIRMWARE UPDATE

ICU(MAIN) : CURRENT 01.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00 0

CURRENT 01.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00 TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE
ICU(BOOT) :
E
CURRENT 01.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00 FIRMWARE UPDATE
LANGUAGE :
0
CURRENT 01.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00 PLEASE TURN
COMPLETE : PLEASE POWERMAIN POWER OFF THEN ON
OFF/ON
GRAPHIC :
ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE
ALL 1/1

MX-2300/2700 N/G ROM VERSION-UP 10 – 2

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

7) Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has

1
upgraded successfully. 0
Note: If the Imager locks up or loses power during the TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE

upgrade, it could corrupt the firmware, preventing the FIRMWARE UPDATE

imager from booting up normally. If this occurs, you can PLEASE POWER
ERROR : PLEASE TURN MAIN POWER OFF THEN ON
OFF/ON
ICUM,PCU,SCU
"rescue" the firmware using the following procedure:
• Rename the firmware file on the USB device to emup-
date.sfu
• Power off the imager (both switches) and insert the USB
device (Jumpdrive) into the USB port of the imager.
• Power on the imager
• The Imager will boot up into emergency update mode.
When finished, the display will read "update completed"
• Power off the imager, and remove the USB device
• Reboot the imager, and go simulation 22-05 to confirm
firmware has upgraded successfully.

C. Firmware download using FTP

Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84

Firmware.sfu

Machine 2 Machine 4

FTP/HTTP
Server
10.36.101.52 10.36.112.83
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension “.sfu”) from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.

D. Firmware download using the Web page

A Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update the firmware.
Update procedure
1
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the “Update of Firmware” button in the Web page. Click the “Browse” button and select the firmware for the update.

MX-2700N

MX-2300/2700 N/G ROM VERSION-UP 10 – 3

3) After selecting the file, click the “Submit” button to send the firmware to the Renaissance machine.
Update processing begins. While processing takes place, “Firmware Update, now processing...” appears.

4) When the firmware update is finished, “Firmware Update completed. Please reboot the MFP.” appears. Pressing the [Reboot] key, the
machine will restart to complete the update. The browser will shift to the following screen.

“Close the browser and open again to display latest information.” will be displayed.
5) Update is completed with the above procedures.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ROM VERSION-UP 10 – 4

 

RSPF UNIT
[11]

OPTION
MX2700N

OPTION SPPD1 SOCD

SGS STMPS SPLS1
DSW_F WTNM 1TNFD PNC
DELIVERY UNIT SPPD2 SCOV
SPFM SPPD4 SPLS2
POD1
SPPD3 SPED
TONER_K UNIT TONER_C UNIT TONER_M UNIT TONER_Y UNIT SPRM SPPD5 SPWS
POD2 POFM_F 1TUD_K 1TUD_CL
DVCRUM_K DVCRUM_C DVCRUM_M DVCRUM_Y SPFC SRRC

RSPF
There is a standards
TFD2 POFM_R setting model PWB
PROCESS DRIVE UNIT Only Japan
1. Block diagram

2TC
OPTION
HPOS OSM
FAX 1 SCANNER UNIT
A. System block diagram

1TURC TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y

OPTION
OPTION
OPTION AUDITOR
POM FUM ADUM_L RRM DM_K DM_CL
CARD OPERATION UNIT
READER
PNC
DRIVER SUB TOUCH
PWB PANEL
DOCC CL LVDS
PWB PWB
DHPD_K DVM_K DHPD_CL DVM_CL If DOCC PWB is
FUSER UNIT used,replace it with
SCN IN PWB.
INVERTER
LCD
PWB
CL INVERTER
ORS_LED
PWB
TH1_FU HL1_U SCNC
ELECTRICAL SECTION

PWB
CCD OPE
DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y MIM ORS_PD
REGIST SENSOR UNIT PWB PWB
TH2_FU HL2_L

DV_K UNIT DV_C UNIT DV_M UNIT DV_Y UNIT SCN IN POWER SW
PCS OCSW
PWB PWB
TH3_FU HL3_U
TCS_K TCS_C TCS_M TCS_Y
REGS_F MHPS OPTION
MOTHER
PS UNIT DVTYP_K DVTYP_C DVTYP_M DVTYP_Y PWB DHS1
REGS_R
PPD1

PCSS
LSU UNIT
PPD2 DSW_R MC 1TC OZFM
TH1_LSU
PCU
PWB
HDD HDDFM CPUFM
RIGHT DOOR UNIT CSS1 CSS2 PSFM
LD_K BD_K
PWB PWB

MFPC
PWB OPTION
APPD1 POD3
PAPER FEED DRIVE UNIT LD_C
PWB
FAX 2

LSU CNT
PAPER FEED 1 PAPER FEED 2 PWB LD_M
APPD2 TFD3
PWB
CLUM1 CLUM2
UNIT UNIT LSUSS
RD I/F
PWB OPTION
LD_Y
PWB
HL
DSW_ADU CPUC1 CPUC2 CPFD1 CPFD2 COINVENDER

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 1

PWB
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT FIN 1K

CPFC CPFM CLUD1 CLUD2
DESK LCC FIN INNER PGM
MPWD MPLD1
CPED1 CPED2 DH_DESK DH_LCC
PFM DCPS
MPED MPUC
CSPD1 CSPD2

MPFD MTOP1 MPFS DHSW

DSW_C AC
DRIVER MAIN PWB
PWB
TH/HUD_M MTOP2 MPGS MSW
WH
PWB

AC IN DH1

OPTION Standards : Only Japan

B. MFP controller PWB

I2C(Ch.0)

ATA
CPU
connector
RM7065C
UART

SDRAMx2
IDE bus
RM7965

SO-DIMM

SO-DIMM
for Debug

DIMM3

DIMM4
DDR
DDR bus 2 IDE
SYSAD bus
32bits width
ASIC
DDR bus 3

LVDS
64bits width
PCI bus 2
SO-DIMM

SO-DIMM
DIMM2

DIMM1

DDR bus 1

385/386/047/048
LSU IF
64bits width SYSTEM VIDEOIF ICU
ASIC SCAN OUT IF ASIC SCAN IN IF

LVDSIC

ENGINE IF
connector
I2C(Ch.0) Patch
IMG-C Bus IMG-B Bus
574 (Image process) (Image process)

X5 EFI connector ICU-IMG IF

I2C (Ch.1)
EEPROM IMG-A Bus
256Kbits 244/ IMG (Auto Color) PCU
SCN
PCI bus 1

245 ASIC FAX 1st

UART
Piano FLASH IF
LOCAL bus
SW (LSI bus) FLASH
Expansion
PCI connector
USB Control
DEV USB-D IO signals
EXPAND
USB USB-H IF
HOST ASIC
OPE IF
VBUS FAX
UART
SW I2C SDR
2nd
EEPROM SDR
2Kbits SDRAM
Ether SRAM
LAN
JACK LAN MAC
LOCAL bus RTC
MicroWire (ROM bus)

EEPROM 72pinDIMM Socket

2Kbits
72pinDIMM Socket Battery
FLASH
RIC RS232C Mem.x2
(RS232C) Transceiver
UART 72pinDIMM Socket
100pinDIMM Socket

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 2

 DC Motor Control
DV Motor BK (DVM_K)/
DV Motor CL (DVM_CL)
Stepping Motor Control Paper Feed Motor (CPFM)
Fuser unit HV Pout Motor (POM) / ADU Motor (ADML) /
IC6 HL control MC / TC un
Shifter Motor (OSM)/
I2C Bus EEPROM HL_UM/LM/US
Resist Motor (RRM) / PSF Motor (PFM)
(64kbit) Drum Motor BK(DM_K)/
Drum Motor CL(DM_CL) FAN Motor Control
C. PCU PWB

IC4 Fuser Motor(FUM) PS FAN (PSFM) /

RESETIC Ozone FAN (OZFM) /
AddressBus[20:0] Pout FAN
FLASH ROM (POFM_F/POFM_R)
(16Mbit)
DATABus[15:0] Flash Write Protect

X1 IC2 Drum Lamp

Xtal Spread
19.6608MHz Spectrum (DL_K/C/M/Y)

3-wired serial
IC5
SRAM
(1Mbit)

IC9
PWM
PMC ASIC

CLOCK
Sensor Input
DC Power CSS11-14 / CSS21-24 Sensor Input
FW
Supply POD1 COIN VENDOR
APPD1 / APPD2 (Optional)
CV_CLCOPY /
CV_COPY

IC8
I/O ASIC
To IC1 Load control Output
MFPC Load output
UART CPU
Via MPGS /CPUC1 / CPUC2 / Mechanical
H8S/2373 PCSS / CPFC / LSUSS1 Counter
Mother
(Optional)
CRUM /LSUSS2 (Optional) /
IC7 I2C Bus
CRUM_K/C/M/Y MPUC / MPFS / 1TURC PNC_K /
DFF
LCX574 PNC_CL

To Load Control Output Sensor Input

LSU Coin vendor Sensor Input
UART CPFD1 / CPFD2/ HPOS / PPD1 /
(Optional) IC71 CSS1 / CPED2 / CSS2 / CPED1
Via DHPD_CL/DHPD_K /
D/A Conv MPFD /MPED /CPWD11-12
Mother POD3 / POD2
(TCS/REGS cont) TFD2/ 1TNFD / WENDD / WINID

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 3

Motor Lock Detect DSW_F /DSW_R /DSW_C/
IC27/IC30/IC31/IC37 FAN_LD1-2 / DVMC_LD / DVMB_LD / CLUD1 /CLUD2 /
Optional MUX PFM_LD / FUM_LD CSPD1 / CSPD2/
HC151x5 Fuser Thermistor open detect 1TUD_K /1TUD_CL
THOPEN_UM/LM/US

MUX
LCC UART HC151
Sensor Input
DSW_ADU/ TFD3 / MUX Sensor Input
RD I/F PWB MPLD/ MTOP1/MTOP2/ MPED HC151 DVSET (K/C/M/Y)
DRDET (K/C/M/Y)
Sensor Input
PPD2

FINISHER UART
Syncronous Motor
Toner Motor
(TNM_K/C/M/Y)
Waste Toner Motor(WTNM)

Analog Input AnalogInput

DESK UART IC73 Temp/Hum sensor (TH_M/HUD_M) Fuser Thermistor (TH_UM/LM/US)
Analog LSU Thermistor (TH1_LSU) Toner Detector (TCS_K/C/M/Y)
DC Motor
MUX Lift Up Motor
DV detector (DVTYP_C/M/Y/K) Process Cont. sensor (PCS_K/CL)
(CLUM1/CLUM2)
Multi-bypass tray width sensor (MPWD) Resist sensor (REGS_F/R)
 CCD PCB

With AFE&LVDS SCNcntPWB

LVDS Receiver LVDS
4bit *2
LVDS Driver
4bit *2
SDRAM
LVDS Driver
128Mbit
30bit

LVDS Receiver
D. Scanner control PWB

LVDS
30bit SDRAM BUS XTAL
28.795MHz
or 22.7425MHz

SCN IN PCB
SCAN ASIC
RGB10bit*3 RGB8bit*3 (Option)
/CS3
(DOCC PCB)
LCD RGB8bit*3
LVDS Driver
LVDS
28bit Mother PCB
SRAM FlashROM <Socket>
1Mbit 8Mbit (MFP PCB)
/CS2 /CS0
(/CS0 RESERVE)
INVERTER PCB
CPT ASIC <Engine/Controller>
/CS4
ADDRESS/DATA BUS
LVDS

PANEL PCB

IO ASIC
/CS5 CARD READER
XTAL
19.6608MHz
SCANNER EEPROM
MOTOR CPU 32Kbit
H8S/2373 I2C

AUDITOR

LAMP UN

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 4

MHPS OCSW

Original detection
RSPF FEED STMP UN
MOTOR (Light receiving)

RSPF RVS
MOTOR
CLUTCH
PHOTO Original detection
SENSOR (Light emitting)
RSPF Unit
 RxD
DOCC
Schmit Inv.
CPU
(Optional) H8S/2320
TxD

O.C. P.U.
TxD0 RxD[1]
nPCU_RxD
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
RxD0 TxD[1]
nPCU_TxD
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U.
I/O port CTS[1]
PCU_DSR
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
I/O port RTS[1]
PCU_DTR
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.

SCN Cnt
E. Serial communication

O.C Schmit Inv.

P.U.
TxD1 RxD
TRANS_DAT
P.U.
RxD TxD[2]

TxD
RxD
P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nTxD_SCN
P.U.
RxD1 TxD P.D.
RSV_DAT Schmit Inv. O.C.
LSU ASIC P.U.
P.D. TxD RxD[2]
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nRxD_SCN
P.U.
SCK1 SCK CPU P.D.
SCK_LSU O.C Schmit Inv.
H8S/2373 P.U.
P.D. Schmit Inv. RTS[2]
Schmit Inv. RTS_SCN
LSU A[4:0] Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
I/O ASIC
P.U.
μPD65892GC CTS[2]
D[15:8] CTS_SCN
P.U. P.U.
TxD2 RxD

TxD
P.D.

RxD
TxD_FIN O.C Schmit Inv.

CPU DTR_SCAN
O.C. Schmit Inv. DSR_SCAN
H8S/2373 P.U. P.U.
RxD2 TxD
RxD_FIN

RxD_SCAN

TxD_SCAN
P.D.
O.C. O.C.

P.D.
CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O M30843FWGP O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. TxD[PIC]
DTR_FIN nTxD_PIC

P.U
P.U
O.C. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O FINISHER RxD[PIC]
DSR_FIN nRxD_PIC
(Optional) PIC
O.C. O.C. O.C Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
TxD3 RxD CLR[PIC]

P.U.
P.U.
TxD_DSK CLR_PIC
O.C. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD3 TxD REQ[PIC]
P.D.
P.D.

RxD_DSK REQ_PIC
O.C. O.C. CPU O.C Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3684
I/O
DTR_DSK MFPC
I/O

I/O

RxD
TxD

O.C. O.C. I/F ASIC

P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O DESK
DSR_DSK CPU
O.C. O.C. (Optional) H8S/2373

P.U. P.U. P.U.

TxD4 RxD

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 5

TxD_LCC
Mother MFPC
O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD4 TxD
RxD_LCC DSPF Cnt (for C-Jupiter)
O.C. O.C. CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3687
I/O TxD[3]
DTR_LCC TxD_FAX(D)
O.C. O.C. TxD_FAX(D)+
P.U. P.U. P.U. TxD_FAX(D)- RxD[3]
I/O LCC RxD_FAX(D)
DSR_LCC RxD_FAX(D)+
O.C. O.C. (Optional) RxD_FAX(D)- LVDS TxD[4]
TxD_FAX(CS)
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)- RxD[4]
RxD_FAX(CS)
RxD_FAX(CS)+
New RxD_FAX(CS)-
I/O ASIC ASIC
A[4:0] P.U.
RTS[3]
μPD65892GC- DTR_FAX(D)
D[15:8] TxD
103 Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
PCU CPU CTS[3]
PIC DSR_FAX(D)
SH7706
P.D. O.C P.U. Schmit Inv.
RxD RTS[4]
DTR_FAX(CS)
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
CTS[4]
DSR_FAX(CS)
FAX P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
(Option)
 DC POWER SUPPLY

F301
Voltage
Generation
AC PWB T5AH/250V + 5Vo
no-mounting + 5VL
D101

+
A1 F101

~
~
-
VR1 12A/125V
N/F

no-mounting
A1 MAIN POWER SW

AC IN F1
L

15A 250V
A2 VR3 F102
T1AH/250V

N
FW Voltage
T2.0AH/250V Z101
Generating F103 Generation
F3 +24V1
Circuit
no- +24V2
+24V3
mounting T8AH/250V +24V4
+24V5
F. AC power line diagram (100V series)

WH-L VR2 WH-N +12V

+5Vn
+3.3V

L1

WARM HEATER SET OPTION option RY1

HL PWB L2 INT24V1

/HL_PR
WH-SW

WH PWB

SCN unit
WH-N 5W OPTION
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC
GND NO TD1 TD2 TD3
G
T1 G T1 T1 G
24V2
4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 4 SSR3
T2 1 1 T2 1

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 6

HLOUT_UM HLOUT_LM HLOUT_US
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND

6 6 6

MAIN UNIT
10W
MAIN
UNIT
drawer

DESK
10W HL SUB THERMOSTAT
OPTION
DESK
150°C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
HL LOW THERMOSTAT

LCC 150°C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A

10W HL MAIN THERMOSTAT
OPTION
LCC
150°C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
FUSING UNIT
 DC POWER SUPPLY
F301
Voltage
Generation
T3.15AH/250V + 5Vo
AC PWB
+ 5VL
no-mounting D101

+
F101
A1

~
~
T6.3AH/250V

-
VR1 N/F

no-mounting
A1 MAIN POWER SW

AC IN F1
L

T10AH/250V F102
A2 VR3 T1AH/250V

F2

N
T10AH/250V FW Voltage
Z101
Generating F103 Generation
F4 Circuit +24V1
F3 +24V2
T2.0AH/250V no- T2.0AH/250V +24V3
T5AH/250V +24V4
mounting +24V5
+12V
WH-L VR2 WH-N +5Vn
G. AC power line diagram (200V series)

+3.3V

L1
RY1
WARM HEATER SET OPTION
L2 INT24V1
HL PWB

/HL_PR
WH-SW

WH PWB

SCN unit
WH-N 5W OPTION
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC
GND NO TD1 TD2 TD3
T1 T1 G T1 G
24V2 G
4 SSR1 4 SSR2 4 SSR3
T2 T2 T2

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 7

1 1 1
HLOUT_UM HLOUT_LM HLOUT_US
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND

6 6 6

MAIN UNIT
10W
MAIN
UNIT
drawer

10W
DESK THERMOSTAT
HL SUB
OPTION
DESK
150°C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
HL LOW THERMOSTAT

150°C AC120V-15A.AC240V-10A
10W
LCC THERMOSTAT
HL MAIN
OPTION
LCC
150°C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
FUSING UNIT
 P-GND

INT24V1 INT24V1 INT24V1 INT24V1

L
5VN 5 VN

5VNPD P-GND DM_BK DM_CL

DRIVER SUB PWB

3.3V 3.3V 24V2
D-GND D-GND OSM
5VN 5VN
D-GND D-GND INT24V1 INT24V1
F201 12V 12V
24V1 24V1 24V1 5VN
F203 FUSE
24V3 24V3 RDSW P-GND PSFM PSM FUM POM ADULM HL_PR
FUSE P-GND P-GND PCU PWB HL(MAIN) HL(LOW) HL(SUB)
P-GND P-GND 5VNPD
FW FW DRIVER MAIN PWB HL PWB
H. DC power line diagram

D-GND FDSW 5VN N_HL(MAIN)

5V_LD 5VNPD
5VN D-GND D-GND RD I/F PWB
FET N_HL(LOW)

24V2 P-GND N_HL(SUB)

INT24V2 INT24V2 INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V1 INT24V1
P-GND P-GND INT24V2

P-GND
P-GND DVM_CL DVM_BK
INT24V1 INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V2 P-GND
24V2
F202 INT24V2 2ndTC PWB
24V2 24V2 P-GND

FUSE INT24V2
AC PWB
MC PWB 1stTC PWB

INT24V2

P-GND
12V 12V PFM
P-GND FAX 3.3V
5VN MAIN 5VS TEL
3.3V PWB 5V LIU
D-GND D-GND PWB
A-GND
12V INT24V1
5VN HDD 5VN
D-GND LSUSS_B 5VO KEY OP 5VN ORS PD
D-GND 3.3V PWB D-GND PWB
D-GND
5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD INT24V1

24V3 24V3 LSUSS_C 24V_EXT

3.3V 3.3V P-GND P-GND LD_BK LD_C LD_M LD_Y option P-GND LVDS 3.3V
D-GND D-GND 5VN 5VN LSU 3.3V_EXT PWB D-GND LCD PWB
5VN 5VN 3.3V 3.3V PWB D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND 24V3
5VO 5VO MOTHER PWB P-GND PM
D-GND D-GND A12V 24V INVERTOR
12V 12V A5V P-GND PWB
24V3 24V3 5VN 5VN A3.3V CCD PWB
P-GND P-GND 3.3V 3.3V SCAN IN PWB or D-GND D-GND D-GND

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 8

D-GND D-GND DOCUMENT CONTROL PWB

24V CL
INVERTOR
12V 24V3 24V3 P-GND CL
PWB
5VL P-GND P-GND
5VO 12V 12V
MFPC PWB 3.3V 5VN 5VN
D-GND 3.3V 3.3V 24V1 ORS LED
D-GND D-GND PWB

5VO 5VO
24V_EXT 24V_EXT
F205 P-GND P-GND
24V5 24V5 5V_EXT 5V_EXT
P-GND P-GND AVCC AVCC
FUSE 5VN 5VN FINISHER SCAN CNT 5VPD 5VPD
D-GND D-GND PWB D-GND D-GND RSPF UN
F204
24V4 24V4 option
P-GND P-GND 5V
FUSE 5VN 5VN D-GND CARD READER
LCC
D-GND D-GND
D-GND D-GND option
PSU
24V4
P-GND
5VN
DESK
D-GND
D-GND

option
 (AC CORD) CN1(B03P-VL) AC PWB CN2(B03P-VL-K) (MSW harness) CN6(B03B-PASK-1) (DC main harness) CN20(B4P-PH-K-S)
1 L_IN MSW-Lout 1 MSW-Lout 1 DCCNT1 1 3 n DCCNT1
2 NC NC 2 DCCNT2 3 4 n DCCNT2
3 N_IN MSW-Nout 3 MSW-Nout 1
CN6(B2P3-VH-R) CN3(B03P-VL-R) CN3(B03P-VH-B) (DC main harness) CN19(B10P-VH)
1 N_WH MSW-Lin 3 MSW-Lin 1 3.3V 1 6 3.3V
3 L_WH NC 2 MSW 3.3V 2 2 D-GND
MSW-Nin 1 MSW-Nin 1 D-GND 3 1 D-GND
CN5(B03P-VL-E) CN4(B3P4-VH-R) CN1(B2P3-VH-B) 7 5VN
1 L_HL L_DC 1 3 L_DC 8 12V
3 N_HL N_DC 4 1 N_DC 10 P-GND
(AC-DC harness) 9 24V3
3 5VL
(AC-HL harness) CN10(B4P-PH-K-S) 4 5VL
24V2 1 5 5VO
2. Actual wiring chart

D-GND 4
A. Power supply section (P1)

CN1 MOTHER PWB

L_HL 1 CN4(B6P-VH-B)
N_HL 3 D-GND 5
B03P-VL 5VN 1
5VN 2 CN3
PCU PWB
HL PWB 5VN 4 TO INSERTOR (P16) 11 3.3V
5VN 3 TO LCC (P15) 10 5VNPD
D-GND 6 TO LCC (P15) 8 D-GND
(AC-WH harness ) 6 D-GND
CN5(B04P-VH-B) 9 5VN
PS-187 12V 2 7 12V
L_WH 1 12V 1 12 FW
4 P-GND
L_WH 1 2 P-GND
PS-187 1 24V1
PSU To P2 3 24V2
5 24V3
B12B-XL

CN26
CN5 CN7(B8P-VH-B) 28 PSFM_V
D-GND 1 FW 1 30 PSCF_LD
24V2 3 P-GND 4 26 P-GND
B03B-PH-K-R (AC-WH harness ) P-GND 3 B32B-PHDSS-B
P-GND 2
CN1 P-GND 5 NAME
1 WH-L P-GND 7 TO LCC (P15) 5VL MFP
3 WH-N P-GND 8 5VO FAX
B2P3-VH-R SCANNER UNIT P-GND 6 TO INSERTOR (P16) 5VN OTHER
CN8(B7P-VH-B) 24V1 ENGINE
24V1 2 24V2 ENGINE
WH PWB 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 24V2 3 To P2 24V3 ENGINE

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 9

1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 WH 24V1 1 24V4 LCC,DESK
CN2 24V3 4 24V5 FINISHER
WH-N(SCAN) 1 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 JPN:OPTION 24V4 6 TO LCC(P15)
WH-L(SCAN) 3 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 EX100V:OPTION 24V3 5
B2P3VH-BL EX120V:OPTION 24V5 7 TO INSERTOR (P16)

EX200V:OPTION CN2(B5P-VH-B)
5VL 4
CN3 5VL 5
WH-N(DESK1) 1 5VO 3
WH-L(DESK1) 3 WH 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 D-GND 1 (DC main harness)
B2P3-VH 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 WH D-GND 2
JPN:STANDARD
EX100V:OPTION JPN:OPTION
CN4 EX120V:OPTION EX100V:OPTION
WH-N(DESK2) 2 EX200V:OPTION EX120V:OPTION
WH-L(DESK2) 4 EX200V:OPTION PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
WH-N(LCC) 1 To P15 1 PSFM_V 3
WH-L(LCC) 5 PSU FAN 2 PSCF_LD 2
B4P(5-3)-VH 3 P-GND 1
(Paper feed main harness)
 CN1 (PRT OP FFC) CN8
/LED3 1 24 /LED3
/LED2 2 23 /LED2
/LED1 3 22 /LED1
KEY6 4 21 KEY6
KEY5 5 20 KEY5
KEY4 6 19 KEY4
KEY3 7 18 KEY3
KEY2 8 17 KEY2
KEY1 9 16 KEY1
OP_SET 10 15 OP_SET
D-GND 11 14 D-GND
5VN 12 13 5VN
B. Front section (P2)

5VN 13 12 5VN
LCDD7 14 11 LCDD7
LCDD6 15 10 LCDD6
LCDD5 16 9 LCDD5
LCDD4 17 8 LCDD4
LCDD3 18 7 LCDD3
LCDD2 19 6 LCDD2
LCDD1 20 5 LCDD1
LCDD0 21 4 LCDD0
LCD_E 22 3 LCD_E
/OP_RW 23 2 /OP_RW
LCD_CS 24 1 LCD_CS
PRINTER OP PWB T24FAZ-SMT

(PRINTER MODEL ONLY)

DSW-R (Upper main harness PA) CN4

24V1 1 1 24V1
DSW_R(24V) 2 2 DSW_R(24V)

DSW-F P EL2P R
DSW_R(24V) 1 1 DSW_R(24V) 1 3 DSW_R(24V)
DSW_F(24V) 2 2 DSW_F(24V) 2 4 DSW_F(24V)
B7P-VH-B
1TNFD
(Waste toner full detection) R SM18PIN P CN9
1TNFD 1 3 1TNFD 3 1 1TNFD
D-GND 2 4 D-GND 4 2 D-GND

P SL2PIN R
TNM 1 WTNM_1 1 5 WTNM_1 5 17 WTNM_1
(Waste toner motor) 2 WTNM_2 2 6 WTNM_2 6 18 WTNM_2

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 10

PNC(BLACK)
24V3 1 7 24V3 7 16 24V3
/PNC 2 8 /PNC 8 15 /PNC
(HL I/F harness PA) (Upper main harness PA) B30B-PHDSS-B
OPTION
CN13
FRONT 1 NC(24V3) 1 31 NC(24V3)
2 NC(/PNC_C) 2 32 NC(/PNC_C)
B32B-PHDSS-B

CN3
3 24V2
CN8 CN8 B12B-XL
24V2 3 24V2 6
B7P-VH-B 24V2 7 CN2
INT24V2 1 5 INT24V2
PSU P-GND 2 6 P-GND
INT24V1in 3 4 INT24V1in
/INT_CNT 5 7 /INT_CNT
B7P-VH-B (DC main harness) B7P-VH-B
AC PWB PCU PWB
 THERMOSTAT 4 L-HL(COM) 4 (HL I/F harness)
HL MAIN 1 N-HL(MAIN) 1
(Harness between TS-HL MAIN) (Fusing harness)
C. Fusing unit section (P3)

CN2
HL SUB THERMOSTAT 5 L-HL(COM) 5 1 N-HL(MAIN) CN4
2 N-HL(SUB) 2 2 L-HL(COM) HL PWB INT24V1 6
(Harness between TS-HL SUB) (Fusing harness) 3 L-HL(COM) D-GND 5
B03P-VL-K HLOUT_LM 3
HLOUT_US 4
CN3 HLOUT_UM 2
1 L-HL(COM) /HL_PR 1
HL LOW THERMOSTAT 6 L-HL(COM) 6 3 N-HL(SUB) B6P-PH-K-S
3 N-HL(LOW) 3 2 N-HL(LOW)
(Harness between TS-HL LOW) (Fusing harness)
B03P-VL-R

PHNR-3-H +
BU03P-TR-P-H
(Upper main harness)
2 TH_UMCS_IN 2
3 TH_UM_IN 1 9 TH_UMCS_IN 1
1 D-GND 3 1 TH_UM_IN 9
RTH(MAIN) 2 D-GND 8
4 TH_US_IN 1 3 TH_US_IN 7
3 D-GND 2 4 D-GND 6
PHNR-4-H + (Fusing harness)
BU04P-TR-P-H

RTH(SUB) (HL I/F harness)

R SM18PIN P CN9
12 TH_UM_IN 12 25 TH_UM_IN CN34
30 TH_UMCS_IN /HL_PR 5
PHNR-2-H + 13 TH_US_IN 13 27 TH_US_IN HLOUT_UM 7
BU02P-TR-P-H HLOUT_US 9
2 TH_LM_IN 1 5 TH_LM_IN 5 14 TH_LM_IN 14 29 TH_LM_IN HLOUT_LM 11
RTH(LOW) 1 D-GND 2 6 D-GND 4 D-GND 3
(Fusing harness) Drawer RWZ 15 D-GND 15 26 D-GND INT24V1 1

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 11

B30B-PHDSS-B B40B-PADSS-B
16 TH_UMCS_IN 16
(Upper main harness)
PCU PWB
1
2
3
4

D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND

DF11-4DP-SP1(PASTEL)
 1TUD_K
(Transfer separation sensor BK) (Transfer belt separation harness) (Upper main harness PA) CN9
1TUD_K 1 2 1TUD_K 2 12 1TUD_K
D-GND 2 3 D-GND 1 14 D-GND
5VLED 3 1 5VLED 3 10 5VLED
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H B30B-PHDSS-B

(Secondary transfer separation harness) CN1 (Upper main harness PA) CN34
2-TC 2-TC INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2
P-GND 2 4 P-GND
CLR /TC_CLK# 4 6 /TC_CLK#
/TC_DATA# 3 8 /TC_DATA#
2nd TC /TC_LD# 5 10 /TC_LD#
PWB /HV_REM# 6 12 /HV_REM#
B6P-PH-K-S B40B-PADSS-B
D. High voltage section (P4)

CN9
1 INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
PCU PWB
AC PWB

(MC-BK harness) CN1

MC-K MC-K INT24V2 6
P-GND 5
GB-K (SPRING) GB-K /HV_DATA# 4
/HV_CLK# 3
BS-K (SPRING) BS-K /HV_LD1# 2
HV_REM# 1
GB-C (SPRING) GB-C B6P-PH-K-S (Paper feed main harness) CN26
20 P-GND
BS-C (SPRING) BS-C CN2 21 /HV_DATA#
1TC_CL 3 22 /HV_CLK#
GB-M (SPRING) GB-M HV_REM 7 23 /HV_LD1#
MC_YMC 6 24 HV_REM#
BS-M (SPRING) BS-M 1TC_K 5 B32B-PHDSS-B
(MC interface harness) MC PWB 1TC_YMC 4
MC-C GB-Y (SPRING) GB-Y P-GND 2
INT24V2 1
MC-M BS-Y (SPRING) BS-Y B7P-PH-K-S
(MC interface harness)
MC-M
(High voltage interface harness)

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 12

MC-Y
(MC harness)
MC-Y MC-CMY

CN1
(Primary transfer harness PA) INT24V2 7
1TC-K 1TC-K P-GND 6
1st TC PWB 1TC_YMC 4
1TC-CMY 1TC-CMY 1TC_K 3
MC_YMC 2
HV_REM 1
1TC_CL 5
B7P-PH-K-S

1TUD_CL
(Transfer separation sensor CL) (Transfer belt separation harness) (Upper main harness PA) CN9
1TUD_CL 1 2 1TUD_CL 2 11 1TUD_CL
D-GND 2 3 D-GND 1 13 GND
5VLED 3 1 5VLED 3 9 5VLED
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H B30B-PHDSS-B
 DVM_K (DV motor BK) (Process drive harness PA) CN12 CN5 (Upper main harness PA) (CRUM harness) CRUM(BLACK)
INT24V2 1 6 INT24V2 5V_CRUM 1 1 5V_CRUM 1 2 5V_CRUM
P-GND 2 4 P-GND CRM_K_DT# 3 2 CRM_K_DT# 2 4 CRM_K_DT#
/DVM_K_CK 4 10 /DVM_K_CK CRM_K_CK# 5 3 CRM_K_CK# 3 3 CRM_K_CK#
/DVM_K_D 5 12 /DVM_K_D D-GND 7 4 D-GND 4 1 D-GND
DVM_K_LD 6 2 DVM_K_LD
5V 7
B7P-PH-K-S R SM2P P
TNM_K 1 TNM_K_1 1 15 TNM_K_1 CRUM(CYAN)
(Toner motor BK) 2 TNM_K_2 2 17 TNM_K_2 2 5V_CRUM
R SM2P P 19 TNM_C_1 CRM_C_DT# 2 5 CRM_C_DT# 5 4 CRM_C_DT#
TNM_C 1 TNM_C_1 1 21 TNM_C_2 CRM_C_CK# 4 6 CRM_C_CK# 6 3 CRM_C_CK#
(Toner motor CYAN) 2 TNM_C_2 2 22 TNM_M_1 1 D-GND
R SM2P P 24 TNM_M_2
E. Main drive unit section 1/2 (P5)

TNM_M 1 TNM_M_1 1 18 TNM_Y_1

(Toner motor MAGENTA) 2 TNM_M_2 2 20 TNM_Y_2
R SM2P P CRUM(MAGENTA)
TNM_Y 1 TNM_Y_1 1 2 5V_CRUM
(Toner motor YELLOW) 2 TNM_Y_2 2 CRM_M_DT# 9 7 CRM_M_DT# 7 4 CRM_M_DT#
DVM_CL (DV motor CL) CRM_M_CK# 10 8 CRM_M_CK# 8 3 CRM_M_CK#
INT24V2 1 5 INT24V2 1 D-GND
P-GND 2 3 P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK 4 9 /DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D 5 11 /DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD 6 1 DVM_CL_LD CRUM(YELLOW)
5V 7 PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H 2 5V_CRUM
B7P-PH-K-S 1TURC 1 24V3 2 16 24V3 CRM_Y_DT# 6 9 CRM_Y_DT# 9 4 CRM_Y_DT#
(Transfer separation clutch) 2 /1TURC 1 14 /1TURC CRM_Y_CK# 8 10 CRM_Y_CK# 10 3 CRM_Y_CK#
DHPD_K 32 DHPD_K B10B-PHDSS-B P SM10P R 1 D-GND
(Phase detection BK) 30 5VLED
D-GND 1
DHPD_K 2
DHPD_CL 5VLED 3 31 DHPD_CL
(Phase detection CL) 29 5VLED
5
4
3
1
2
6
5
4
3
1
2
6

D-GND 1 23 D-GND
DHPD_CL 2 B32B-PHDSS-B
5VLED 3 PCU PWB
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND

5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU

DF11-6DP-SP1 DF11-6DP-SP1

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 13

2
3
4
1

D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-4DP-SP1
 R SM6 P (Process drive harness PA) CN1
6 INT24V1 6 12 INT24V1
F. Main drive unit section 2/2 (P6)

5 INT24V1 5 11 INT24V1
DMBK 4 DMBKB// 4 9 DMBKB//
(Drum motor BK) 3 DMBKB/ 3 10 DMBKB/
2 DMBKA/ 2 7 DMBKA/
1 DMBKA// 1 8 DMBKA//
DMCL (Drum motor CL)

DMCLB// 1 3 DMCLB//
INT24V1 2 6 INT24V1
DMCLB/ 3 4 DMCLB/
DMCLA/ 4 1 DMCLA/
INT24V1 5 5 INT24V1
DMCLA// 6 2 DMCLA//
B12B-PH-K-S DRIVER
SUB PWB

(Paper feed main harness) CN5

INT24V1 1 5 INT24V1
PSMA/ 2 1 PSMA/
PSM PSMB/ 3 4 PSMB/
(PS motor)
PSMA// 4 2 PSMA// DRIVER MAIN PWB

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 14

PSMB// 5 3 PSMB//
INT24V1 6 6 INT24V1
B6P-PH-K-R B12B-PH-K-S
 DL_BK (Discharge lamp BK) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness) CN15
D-GND 1 9 D-GND 2 3 D-GND

DL_BK# 3 10 DL_BK# 1 1 DL_BK#

BLACK 53254-0310
TCS_K (Toner concentration sensor BK) (DV harness)
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 5 24V3
TCS_K 3 6 TCS_K 6 7 TCS_K 4 7 TCS_K
DV un D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 11 D-GND
TSG_BK 1 8 TSG_BK 8 6 TSG_BK 5 9 TSG_BK
DV INITIAL PWB (BLACK) 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 13 D-GND
D-GND 4 2 DVTYP_K 2 3 DVTYP_K 8 15 DVTYP_K
DVTYP_K 3 3 DVSET_K 3 2 DVSET_K 9 17 DVSET_K
DVSET_K 2 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 19 5VN
5VN 1 C QR/P8-8P P
G. DL & DV section (P7)

S4P-PH-K-S BS-K (SPRING) To P4

(BIAS harness B) (BIAS harness A)
DL_C(Discharge lamp CYAN) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness)
D-GND 1 9 D-GND 2 23 D-GND

CYAN DL_C# 3 10 DL_C# 1 21 DL_C#

53254-0310
TCS_C (Toner concentration sensor CYAN) (DV harness)
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 25 24V3
TCS_C 3 6 TCS_C 6 7 TCS_C 4 27 TCS_C
D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 31 D-GND
TSG_C 1 8 TSG_C 8 6 TSG_C 5 29 TSG_C
DV INITIAL PWB (CYAN) 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 33 D-GND
D-GND 4 2 DVTYP_C 2 3 DVTYP_C 8 35 DVTYP_C
DVTYP_C 3 3 DVSET_C 3 2 DVSET_C 9 37 DVSET_C
DVSET_C 2 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 39 5VN
5VN 1 C QR/P8-8P P PCU PWB
S4P-PH-K-S BS-C (SPRING) To P4
(BIAS harness B) (BIAS harness A)
DL_M (Discharge lamp MAGENTA) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness)
D-GND 1 9 D-GND 2 4 D-GND

MAGENTA DL_M# 3 10 DL_M# 1 2 DL_M#

53254-0310
TCS_M (Toner concentration sensor MAGENTA) (DV harness)
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 6 24V3
TCS_M 3 6 TCS_M 6 7 TCS_M 4 8 TCS_M
D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 12 D-GND
TSG_M 1 8 TSG_M 8 6 TSG_M 5 10 TSG_M
DV INITIAL PWB (MAGENTA) 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 14 D-GND
D-GND 4 2 DVTYP_M 2 3 DVTYP_M 8 16 DVTYP_M
DVTYP_M 3 3 DVSET_M 3 2 DVSET_M 9 18 DVSET_M

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 15

DVSET_M 2 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 20 5VN
5VN 1 C QR/P8-8P P
S4P-PH-K-S BS-M (SPRING) To P4
(BIAS harness B) (BIAS harness A)

DL_Y (Discharge lamp YELLOW) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness)
D-GND 1 9 D-GND 2 24 D-GND
YELLOW DL_Y# 3 10 DL_Y# 1 22 DL_Y#
53254-0310
TCS_Y (Toner concentration sensor YELLOW) (DV harness)
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 26 24V2
TCS_Y 3 6 TCS_Y 6 7 TCS_Y 4 28 TCS_Y
D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 32 D-GND
TSG_Y 1 8 TSG_Y 8 6 TSG_Y 5 30 TSG_Y
DV INITIAL PWB (YELLOW) 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 34 D-GND
D-GND 4 2 DVTYP_Y 2 3 DVTYP_Y 8 36 DVTYP_Y
DVTYP_Y 3 3 DVSET_Y 3 2 DVSET_Y 9 38 DVSET_Y
DVSET_Y 2 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 40 5VN
5VN 1 C QR/P8-8P P B40B-PADSS-B
S4P-PH-K-S BS-Y (SPRING) To P4
(BIAS harness B) (BIAS harness A)
 BD PWB (LSU-BD harness) CN11 B7P-PH-K-S
5VN 1 4 5VN CN8 (Harness between MOTHER-LSU) CN21
D-GND 2 3 D-GND D-GND 1 1 D-GND
n BD 3 2 n BD 3.3V 2 2 3.3V
D-GND 4 1 D-GND D-GND 3 3 D-GND
B4P-PH-K-R LSU TH1 6 LSUTH1 5VN 4 4 5VN
LSUTH1 3 5 D-GND 24V1 5 5 24V1
D-GND 4 P-GND 6 6 P-GND
S6B-XA B6B-XA
LD PWB(BLACK) (LSU-LD harness) CN2 B12B-PHDSS-B
D-GND 10 3 D-GND CN7 (Harness between MOTHER-LSU) CN13
INT5V 9 1 INT5V INT5V 1 1 INT5V
H. LSU section (P8)

/SH_K 8 5 /SH_K D-GND 2 2 D-GND

/ENB_K 7 7 /ENB_K D-GND 3 3 D-GND
DT_K- 6 6 DT_K- n SCK_LSU 4 4 n SCK_LSU
DT_K+ 5 4 DT_K+ n TRANS_DATA 5 5 n TRANS_DATA
D-GND 4 2 D-GND D-GND 6 6 D-GND
Vref_K 3 8 Vref_K LSUASIC_RST 7 7 LSUASIC_RST
SK_K 2 10 SK_K n RSV_DAT 8 8 n RSV_DAT
n LDERR_K 1 9 n LDERR_K n TRANS_RST 9 9 n TRANS_RST
11 LSUTH2 JOBEND_INT 10 10 JOBEND_INT
12 D-GND LSUTH1 11 11 LSUTH1
LSUTH2 12 12 LSUTH2
VSYNC_K_N 13 13 VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P 14 14 VSYNC_K_P
LD PWB(CYAN) (LSU-LD harness) CN1 B34B-PHDSS-B VSYNC_C_P 15 15 VSYNC_C_P
D-GND 10 3 D-GND VSYNC_C_N 16 16 VSYNC_C_N
INT5V 9 1 INT5V VSYNC_M_N 17 17 VSYNC_M_N
/SH_C 8 5 /SH_C VSYNC_M_P 18 18 VSYNC_M_P
/ENB_C 7 7 /ENB_C VSYNC_Y_P 19 19 VSYNC_Y_P
DT_C- 6 6 DT_C- LSU VSYNC_Y_N 20 20 VSYNC_Y_N
DT_C+ 5 4 DT_C+ S20B-PHDSS-B B20B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
PWB
4 2 D-GND CN9 (Harness between MOTHER-LSU) CN14
Vref_C 3 8 Vref_C CH0_N 1 1 CH0_N
LDCHK_C 2 10 LDCHK_C CH0_P 2 2 CH0_P
n LDERR_C 1 9 n LDERR_C D-GND 3 3 D-GND
LD PWB(MAGENTA) D-GND 4 4 D-GND
D-GND 10 15 D-GND CH1_N 5 5 CH1_N
INT5V 9 13 INT5V CH1_P 6 6 CH1_P
/SH_M 8 17 /SH_M CH2_N 7 7 CH2_N
/ENB_M 7 19 /ENB_M CH2_P 8 8 CH2_P
DT_M- 6 18 DT_M- D-GND 9 9 D-GND
DT_M+ 5 16 DT_M+ D-GND 10 10 D-GND
D-GND 4 14 D-GND CLCLK_N 11 11 CLCLK_N
Vref_M 3 20 Vref_M CLCLK_P 12 12 CLCLK_P
LDCHK_M 2 22 LDCHK_M CH3_N 13 13 CH3_N
n LDERR_M 1 21 n LDERR_M CH3_P 14 14 CH3_P
LD PWB(YELLOW) D-GND 15 15 D-GND

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 16

D-GND 10 27 D-GND D-GND 16 16 D-GND
INT5V 9 25 INT5V HSYNC_LSU_N 17 17 HSYNC_LSU_N MOTHER PWB
/SH_Y 8 29 /SH_Y HSYNC_LSU_P 18 18 HSYNC_LSU_P
/ENB_Y 7 31 /ENB_Y D-GND 19 19 D-GND
DT_Y- 6 30 DT_Y- D-GND 20 20 D-GND
DT_Y+ 5 28 DT_Y+ ECLK_LSU_P 21 21 ECLK_LSU_P
D-GND 4 26 D-GND ECLK_LSU_N 22 22 ECLK_LSU_N
Vref_Y 3 32 Vref_Y S22B-PHDSS-B B22B-PHDSS-B
LDCHK_Y 2 34 LDCHK_Y (Harness between MOTHER-LSU)
n LDERR_Y 1 33 n LDERR_Y LSUSS_B 1 INT24V1 1
2 /LSUSS_B 2
(LSU shutter solenoid BK)
POLYGON MOTOR (Polygon motor harness) CN4 B6P-PH-K-S P SM2P R
/BREAK 1 6 /BREAK
POLYCLK 2 5 POLYCLK CN10
/LOCK 3 3 /LOCK 1 INT24V1
/START 4 4 /START 4 /LSUSS_B
P-GND 5 2 P-GND B5P-PH-K-S PCU PWB
24V1 6 1 24V1 (Harness between MOTHER-LSU) (DC main harness) CN21
LSUSS_C 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1 1 26 INT24V1
3 /LSUSS_C 3 2 /LSUSS_C 2 24 /LSUSS_C
(LSU shutter solenoid CL)
P SM3P R R SM2P P B26B-PHDSS-B
OPTION
 CPFD1(CS1 paper entry PHNR-12-H 㧗 (Cassette SW harness PA) P DF1B-24p S (Paper feed main harness) CN6
detection) (Paper feed unit harness cs1) BU12P-TR-P-H 1 CPFD1 1 1 CPFD1
D-GND 1 6 D-GND 7 3 CLUD1 3 3 CLUD1
CPFD1 2 5 CPFD1 8 5 CPED1 5 5 CPED1
5VN 3 4 5VN 9 7 DSW_C 7 7 DSW_C
CLUD1 (CS1 lift-up detection) 12 D-GND 1 9 CSPD1 9 9 CSPD1
D-GND 1 11 CLUD1 2 11 CPWD11 11 21 CPWD11
CS1 CLUD1 2 10 5VNPD 3 13 CPWD12 13 23 CPWD12
PAPER CPED1 (CS1 paper empty 5VNPD 3 9 D-GND 4 15 CSS1 15 11 CSS1
FEED detection) 8 CPED1 5 16 CSS2 16 10 CSS2
UN D-GND 1 7 5VNPD 6 17 CSS11 17 13 CSS11
CPED1 2 3 D-GND 10 19 CSS12 19 15 CSS12
5VNPD 3 2 DSW_C 11 21 CSS13 21 17 CSS13
DSW_C (Right lower door open/close detection) 1 5VN 12 23 CSS14 23 19 CSS14
PCU
D-GND 1 18 CSS21 18 12 CSS21 PWB
CSPD1(CS1 paper remaining
DSW_C 2 quantity detection) 20 CSS22 20 14 CSS22
I. Paper feed unit section (P9)

5VN 3 D-GND 1 22 CSS23 22 16 CSS23

CSPD1 2 24 CSS24 24 18 CSS24
5VNPD 3 2 CPFD2 2 2 CPFD2
4 CLUD2 4 4 CLUD2
6 CPED2 6 6 CPED2
10 CSPD2 10 8 CSPD2
12 CPWD21 12 22 CPWD21
14 CPWD22 14 24 CPWD22
B24B-PHDSS-B

CSS1 (CS1 cassette

installation detection)
CSS1 1
D-GND 2 (Cassette SW harness PA) CN4
S4P-PH-K-S CSS2 (CS2 cassette installation detection) 3 D-GND
CSS2 1 20 5VN
D-GND 2 1 D-GND
S4P-PH-K-S 18 5VNPD
2 D-GND
19 5VNPD
4 D-GND
21 5VN
9 D-GND
26 5VNPD
10 D-GND
11 D-GND
27 5VNPD
28 5VNPD
29 5VNPD
30 5VNPD

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 17

12 D-GND
13 D-GND
PHNR-9-H 㧗 14 D-GND
CPFD2 (CS2 paper entry
detection) (Paper feed unit harness cs2) BU09P-TR-P-H (Cassette SW harness PA) 15 D-GND
D-GND 1 3 D-GND 7 16 D-GND
CPFD2 2 2 CPFD2 8 17 D-GND
5VN 3 1 5VN 9 7 D-GND
9 D-GND 1 24 5VN
CS2 CLUD2 (CS2 lift-up detection) 8 CLUD2 2 5 D-GND
PAPER D-GND 1 7 5VNPD 3 22 5VNPD
FEED CLUD2 2 6 D-GND 4 6 D-GND
UN 5VNPD 3 5 CPED2 5 23 5VNPD
CPED2 (CS2 paper empty DRIVER
detection) 4 5VNPD 6 8 D-GND
D-GND 1 25 5VNPD MAIN PWB
CSPD2 (CS2 paper remaining
CPED2 2 quantity detection) B30B-PHDSS-B
5VNPD 3 D-GND 1
CSPD2 2
5VNPD 3
 CPFM (Paper feed motor) (Paper feed drive harness) (Paper feed main harness)
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 1 CN17
P-GND 2 2 P-GND 2 5 P-GND
/CPFM_CK 4 3 /CPFM_CK 3 4 /CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D 5 4 /CPFM_D 4 1 /CPFM_D
CPFM_LD 6 5 CPFM_LD 5 2 CPFM_LD
5V 7
FG-OUT 3
B7P-PH-K-S
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
CPFC 1 /CPFC 2 7 /CPFC 7 11 /CPFC
(Vertical transport clutch) 2 24V3 1 8 24V3 8 10 24V3
9 /CPUC1 9 13 /CPUC1
J. Paper feed drive unit section (P10)

PHNR-2-H 10 24V3 10 12 24V3

BU02P-TR-P-H 11 /CPUC2 11 15 /CPUC2
CPFC1 1 /CPUC1 2 12 24V3 12 14 24V3
(CS1 paper feed clutch) 2 24V3 1 13 P-GND 13 7 P-GND
14 /CLUM1 14 6 /CLUM1
PHNR-2-H 15 P-GND 15 9 P-GND
BU02P-TR-P-H 16 /CLUM2 16 8 /CLUM2
CPFC2 1 /CPUC2 2 R SM18P P B32B-PHDSS-B
(CS2 paper feed clutch) 2 24V3 1
PCU PWB
CLUM1 (CS1 lift-up motor)
P-GND 1
/CLUM1 2 CN9
B2P-PH-K-S 3 INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
CLUM2 (CS2 lift-up motor)
P-GND 1 AC PWB
/CLUM2 2
B2P-PH-K-S

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 18

PSFM (PS front motor) (Paper feed main harness) CN1
PSFMA// 1 2 PSFMA//
INT24V1 2 5 INT24V1
PSFMB// 3 3 PSFMB//
PSFMA/ 4 1 PSFMA/
DRIVER
INT24V1 5 6 INT24V1 MAIN PWB
PSFMB/ 6 4 PSFMB/
B6B-PH-K-S
 PHNR-6-H
PPD1 (PS front sensor) (PS unit harness) BU06P-TR-P-H (Paper feed main harness) CN17
D-GND 1 6 D-GND 1 29 D-GND
PPD1 2 5 PPD1 2 31 PPD1
5VNPD 3 4 5VNPD 3

PS UN

PPD2 (PS sensor)

5VNPD 1 3 5VNPD 4
PPD2 2 2 PPD2 5 32 PPD2
D-GND 3 1 D-GND 6 30 D-GND

PS UN
PROCON SENSOR UN

RESI SENSOR F (Process control unit harness)

5VNPD 4 1 5VNPD 1
D-GND 3 2 D-GND 2 25 D-GND
REGS_F 2 3 REGS_F 3 20 REGS_F
REGS_F_LED# 1 4 REGS_F_LED# 4 22 REGS_F_LED#

PROCON SENSOR
K. PS unit & process control unit section (P11)

5VNPD 5 5 5VNPD 5
D-GND 4 6 D-GND 6 28 D-GND
PCS_K 3 7 PCS_K 7 21 PCS_K
PCS_CL 2 8 PCS_CL 8 19 PCS_CL
PCS_LED# 1 9 PCS_LED# 9 18 PCS_LED#
PROCON SENSOR UN

RESI SENSOR R
5VNPD 4 10 5VNPD 10 23 5VNPD
D-GND 3 11 D-GND 11 27 D-GND
REGS_R 2 12 REGS_R 12 26 REGS_R
REGS_R_LED# 1 13 REGS_R_LED# 13 24 REGS_R_LED#

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 19

PCSS 2 /PCSS 2 14 /PCSS 14 17 /PCSS
(Process control 1 24V3 1 15 24V3 15 16 24V3 PCU
shutter solenoid)
R SM2P P R SM18P P B32B-PHDSS-B
PWB
4
3
2
6
5
1

PROCON SENSOR UN
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD

DF11-6DP-SP1
ADULM (ADU lower motor) (Paper feed main harness) CN5
ADMLA// 1 8 ADMLA//
INT24V1 2 11 INT24V1 DRIVER
ADMLB// 3 9 ADMLB//
ADMLA/ 4 7 ADMLA/
MAIN
INT24V1 5 12 INT24V1 PWB
ADMLB/ 6 10 ADMLB/
B12B-PH-K-S
 (Paper feed main harness)
CN26
7 /ADUGS
(Right paper exit unit harness) (Right paper exit/reverse
TFD3 (Right full detection) CN2 CN1 (Right door harness) FG 32 F-GND 32 FG
PG interface harness)
TFD3 1 6 TFD3 1 1 TFD3 5VN 1 1 5VN 1 9 5VN
D-GND 2 5 D-GND 2 2 D-GND D-GND 2 17 D-GND 17 8 D-GND
POD3 5VLED1 3 4 5VLED1 3 3 5VLED1 SIN3 3 2 SIN3 2 10 SIN3
(Right paper exit detection) 3 POD3 4 4 POD3 SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 13 SELIN1
POD3 1 2 D-GND 5 5 D-GND SELIN2 5 3 SELIN2 3 12 SELIN2
D-GND 2 1 5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 SELIN3 6 19 SELIN3 19 15 SELIN3
5VLED4 3 PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H APPD1 7 4 APPD1 4 1 APPD1
(Right paper exit/reverse
APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 2 APPD2
PG interface harness)
7 DSW_ADU APPD3 9
8 D-GND POD3 10 21 POD3 21 14 POD3
9 5VLED2 MPFD 11 6 MPFD 6 11 MPFD
DSW_ADU
(ADU open/close detection) 5VNPD 16 10 5VNPD 10 32 5VNPD
DSW_ADU 1 2 DSW_ADU 3 MPWD 13 7 MPWD 7 16 MPWD
L. Right door unit section (P12)

D-GND 2 3 D-GND 2 TH_M 14 23 TH_M 23 17 TH_M

5VLED2 3 1 5VLED2 4 HUD_M 15 8 HUD_M 8 19 HUD_M
(ADU open/close detection interface harness) PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H S16B-PHDSS-B 18 P-GND
15 24V3 15
APPD1
(ADU transport detection 1) 31 /MPGS 31 5 /MPGS
APPD1 1 3 APPD1 1 10 APPD1 30 /MPFS 30 4 /MPFS
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2 11 D-GND 14 24V3 14
5VLED5 3 1 5VLED5 3 12 5VLED5 28 /MPUC 28 6 /MPUC
(ADU transport 1 interface harness) PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H S16B-PHDSS-B 13 24V3 13
APPD2 (ADU transport detection 2) (Right door harness) CN3(1/2) P QR/P4 32PINS 3 24V3
APPD2 1 4 APPD2 B32B-PHDSS-B
6
5
3
4
2
1

D-GND 2 5 D-GND
5VLED10 3 6 5VLED10
RIGHT DOOR
I/F PWB 1 24V3 2 PCU PWB
2 /MPUC 1
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3

(Manual feed tray harness (2)) PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H

MPLD
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H (Manual feed tray harness (1))
(Manual feed paper length detection 1) PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H(Right door harness)
MPLD 1 4 MPLD 6 3 MPLD 12 16 MPLD MPUC
D-GND 2 5 D-GND 5 1 MPLD2 14 13 MPLD2 DF11-6DP-SP1
(Manual paper feed clutch)
5VLED12 3 6 5VLED12 4 4 5VLED12 11 18 5VLED12
MPFS
7 5VN 3 5 5VN 10 19 5VN P SM2P R (Manual paper take-up clutch)
MPWD
(Manual feed paper width detection) 8 MPWD 2 6 MPWD 9 20 MPWD 1 24V3 1
5VN 3 9 D-GND 1 PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-H(Multi upper unit harness) 2 /MPFS 2
MPWD 2 8 24V3 1
D-GND 1 CN3(2/2) (Right door harness) 7 /MPFS 2 HPDET (Manual feed paper empty detection)
HPDET 7 6 HPDET 3 1 HPDET
MTOP2 (Manual feed tray extension detection) 2 D-GND
MTOP2 1 7 MTOP2 8 22 MTOP2 D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VLED7
D-GND 2 5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 20

5VLED13 3 8 5VLED13 7 24 5VLED13 PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
MTOP1
(Manual feed tray reduction detection) 2 /MPGS 7 4 /MPGS 2
MTOP1 1 9 MTOP1 6 25 MTOP1 3 24V3 6 5 24V3 1
D-GND 2 1 5VLED7 5
5VLED9 3 10 5VLED9 5 27 5VLED9 2 D-GND 4
TH&HUD (Temperature/humidity sensor) MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
5VN 1 11 5VN 4 28 5VN
1
3
5
2
4
6

HUD_M 2 12 HUD_M 3 29 HUD_M MPFD (Manual feed paper entry detection)

D-GND 3 13 D-GND 2 14 D-GND MPFD 1
TH_M 4 14 TH_M 1 31 TH_M D-GND 2
S32B-PHDSS-B 5VLED7 3
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7

1
3
5
4
2
7
6
8
DF11-6DP-SP2
P SM2P R
MPGS 1 24V3 1
(Manual feed gate solenoid) 2 /MPGS 2

D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
(Multi lower unit harness)
DF11-8DP-SP1
 PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H (Paper exit unit harness PA) P DF1B-26p S (Upper main harness PA) CN13
1 POFM_V 4 6 POFM_V 6 15 POFM_V
2 /POFM_CNT 3 7 /POFM_CNT 7 17 /POFM_CNT
POFM 1 3 P-GND 2 11 P-GND 11 19 P-GND
4 POFM_LD1 1 8 POFM_LD1 8 21 POFM_LD1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H 9 POFM_LD2 9 22 POFM_LD2
1 POFM_V 4
2 /POFM_CNT 3
POFM 2 3 P-GND 2 R SM6P P
M. Paper out unit section (P13)

4 POFM_LD2 1 5 24V2 5 1 24V2 1 24 24V2

1 /OSM_XB 1 2 /OSM_XB 2 7 /OSM_XB
OSM 2 /OSM_XA 2 3 /OSM_XA 3 9 /OSM_XA
(SHIFTER MOTOR)
3 /OSM_B 3 4 /OSM_B 4 11 /OSM_B
4 /OSM_A 4 5 /OSM_A 5 13 /OSM_A

TFD2 (Paper exit full detection) 13 TFD2 13 10 TFD2

5VNPD 3
TFD2 2
D-GND 1 14 POD2 14 12 POD2
POD2 (Paper exit detection)
5VNPD 1
POD2 2 15 HPOS 15 16 HPOS
D-GND 3
HPOS (SHIFTER HP)
5VNPD 1 16 POD1 16 14 POD1
HPOS 2 17 D-GND 17 2 D-GND
PCU
D-GND 3 12 5VNPD 12 18 5VNPD PWB

4
1
2
3
4
2
8
6
1
3
7
5
POD1 (Fusing after detection) B32B-PHDSS-B

1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6

5VNPD 1
POD1 2
D-GND 3

P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND

POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND

5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
FUM (Fusing motor) DF11-4DP-SP1 DF11-8DP-SP2
FUMB// 1 DF11-6DP-SP1 DF11-6DP-SP1 R SM-12p P (Paper feed main harness) CN6
FUMA// 2 1 FUMB// 1 9 FUMB//
INT24V1 3 2 FUMA// 2 8 FUMA//
INT24V1 4 3 INT24V1 3 11 INT24V1

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 21

FUMB/ 5 4 INT24V1 4 12 INT24V1 DRIVER
FUMA/ 6 5 FUMB/ 5 10 FUMB/ MAIN
POM (Paper exit motor) 6 FUMA/ 6 7 FUMA/ PWB
POMA// 1 7 POMA// 7 2 POMA//
INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1 8 5 INT24V1
POMB// 3 9 POMB// 9 3 POMB//
POMA/ 4 10 POMA/ 10 1 POMA/
INT24V1 5 11 INT24V1 11 6 INT24V1
POMB/ 6 12 POMB/ 12 4 POMB/
B12B-PH-K-S
FG FG
 (Board to Board)
CN5 CN18 CN26 (FFC between PCU-MOTHER) CN7
SCANDATA0- 1 1 SCANDATA0- D-GND 1 28 D-GND CN34 (Upper main harnessPA) CN3
SCANDATA0+ 2 2 SCANDATA0+ FWP_PCU 2 27 FWP_PCU DRMCL_A 17 1 DRMCL_A
D-GND 3 3 D-GND PCU_RES 3 26 PCU_RES DRMCL_B 18 2 DRMCL_B
SCANDATA1- 4 4 SCANDATA1- /MPFC_RES 4 25 /MPFC_RES /DRMCL_A 19 3 /DRMCL_A
SCANDATA1+ 5 5 SCANDATA1+ /Reserve_out3 5 24 /Reserve_out3 /DRMCL_B 20 4 /DRMCL_B
D-GND 6 6 D-GND PCU_TXD 6 23 PCU_TXD /DRMCL_CNT 21 5 /DRMCL_CNT
SCANDATA2- 7 7 SCANDATA2- PCU_DTR 7 22 PCU_DTR /DRMBK_CNT 22 6 /DRMBK_CNT
DRIVER SUB
SCANDATA2+ 8 8 SCANDATA2+ D-GND 8 21 D-GND DRMBK_A 23 7 DRMBK_A PWB
D-GND 9 9 D-GND PCU_RXD 9 20 PCU_RXD DRMBK_B 24 8 DRMBK_B
OUT_SCANCLKOUT- 10 10 OUT_SCANCLKOUT- PCU_DSR 10 19 PCU_DSR /DRMBK_A 25 9 /DRMBK_A
OUT_SCANCLKOUT+ 11 11 OUT_SCANCLKOUT+ /FAX_LED 11 18 /FAX_LED /DRMBK_B 26 10 /DRMBK_B
D-GND 12 12 D-GND /POF 12 17 /POF B40B-PADSS-B B12B-PHDSS-B
SCANDATA3- 13 13 SCANDATA3- D-GND 13 16 D-GND CN4 (Upper main harnessPA) CN2
SCANDATA3+ 14 14 SCANDATA3+ LSU_RST 14 15 LSU_RST INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1
SCAN IN D-GND 15 15 D-GND TRANS_RST 15 14 TRANS_RST P-GND 6 2 P-GND
PWB D-GND 16 16 D-GND D-GND 16 13 D-GND 5VN 7 3 5VN
FLVPP_MFP 17 17 FLVPP_MFP SCK 17 12 SCK B7P-VH B3P-VH
N. PCU PWB-other PWB (P14)

or 3.3V 18 18 3.3V TRANS_DAT 18 11 TRANS_DAT

RES_SCN 19 19 RES_SCN D-GND 19 10 D-GND
DOCC 3.3V 20 20 3.3V RSV_DAT 20 9 RSV_DAT
PWB D-GND 21 21 D-GND JOBEND_INT 21 8 JOBEND_INT
3.3V 22 22 3.3V TH1_LSU 22 7 TH1_LSU
D-GND 23 23 D-GND TH2_LSU 23 6 TH2_LSU
3.3V 24 24 3.3V D-GND 24 5 D-GND
D-GND 25 25 D-GND D-GND 25 4 D-GND
3.3V 26 26 3.3V
MOTHER INT5V 26 3 INT5V
5VN 27 27 5VN PWB INT5V 27 2 INT5V
D-GND 28 28 D-GND D-GND 28 1 D-GND
D-GND 29 29 D-GND 28FMZ-BT 28FMZ-BT PCU PWB
D-GND 30 30 D-GND
TX24-30R-12ST-H1 TX25-30P-12ST-H1E

CN2 (DC main harness) CN23

POMA 1 1 POMA
POMB 2 2 POMB
CN14 /POMA 3 3 /POMA
1 12V /POMB 4 4 /POMB
2 PWM_CPUFAN /POMCNT 5 5 /POMCNT
CPU FAN 3 D-GND /FUM_CNT 6 6 /FUM_CNT
4 LOCK_CPUFAN FUMA 7 7 FUMA
B4P-PH-K-S FUMB 8 8 FUMB
/FUMA 9 9 /FUMA
/FUMB 10 10 /FUMB
RRM_A 11 17 RRM_A
RRM_B 12 18 RRM_B
/RRM_A 13 19 /RRM_A

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 22

DRIVER MAIN /RRM_B 14 20 /RRM_B
PWB /RRM_CNT 15 15 /RRM_CNT
/PFM_CNT 16 16 /PFM_CNT
PFM_A 17 11 PFM_A
PFM_B 18 12 PFM_B
/PFM_A 19 13 /PFM_A
/PFM_B 20 14 /PFM_B
ADUM_L_A 21 21 ADUM_L_A
ADUM_L_B 22 22 ADUM_L_B
ADUM_L_XA 23 23 ADUM_L_XA
ADUM_L_XB 24 24 ADUM_L_XB
/ADUM_L_C 25 25 /ADUM_L_C
D-GND 26 26 D-GND
5VN 27 27 5VN
D-GND 28 28 D-GND
B28B-PHDSS-B B28B-PHDSS-B CN26 (Paper feed main harness)
CN3 (DC main harness) CN2 P-GND 25 3 P-GND 3
INT24V1 1 3 INT24V1 0ZFM_V 27 1 0ZFM_V 1
P-GND 2 2 P-GND /0ZFM_CNT 29 2 /0ZFM_CNT 2
OZFM
(Ozone FAN)
5VNPD 3 1 5VNPD OZFM_LD 31 4 OZFM_LD 4
B3P-VH B7P-VH B32B-PHDSS-B P SM4P R
 CN-F
24V4 1 1 24V4 1
P-GND 2 2 P-GND 2
5VN 3 3 5VN 3
D-GND 4 4 D-GND 4 (DC main harness) CN21
D-GND 5 5 D-GND 5 1 D-GND
TXD_DSK 6 6 TXD_DSK 6 9 TXD_DSK
RXD_DSK 7 7 RXD_DSK 7 3 RXD_DSK
O. DESK & LCC (P15)

/DTR_DSK 8 8 /DTR_DSK 8 11 /DTR_DSK

DSR_DSK 9 9 DSR_DSK 9 5 DSR_DSK
RES_DSK 10 10 RES_DSK 10 13 RES_DSK
/TRC_DSK 11 11 /TRC_DSK 11 7 /TRC_DSK
DESK CONTROL PWB NC 12 R SM 11PIN P
B12B-PHDSS-B

1 WH_L(DESK) 1 1 WH_L(DESK) 1
WH 2 WH_N(DESK) 2 3 WH_N(DESK) 3
2 F-GND 2
F.G. P EL 3PIN R
(DESK OPTION)
F.G.

CN-A 1 NC 1
NC 4 2 NC 2
TXD_LCC 7 3 TXD_LCC 3 10 TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC 8 4 RXD_LCC 4 4 RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC 9 5 /DTR_LCC 5 12 /DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC 10 6 /DSR_LCC 6 6 /DSR_LCC
RES_LCC 11 7 RES_LCC 7 14 RES_LCC
NC 3 8 F-GND 8
5VN 5 9 5VN 9
D-GND 6 10 D-GND 10 2 D-GND
24V4 1 11 24V4 11 8 /TRC_LCC
P-GND 2 12 P-GND 12 B26B-PHDSS-B
/TRC_LCC 12 13 /TRC_LCC 13 PCU PWB
B12B-PHDSS-B P EL 15PIN R
LCC CONTROL PWB

F.G. (DC main harness) CN8

F.G. 6 24V4
B7P-VH
1 WH_L(LCC) 1 4 WH_L(LCC) 4
2 WH_N(LCC) 2 12 WH_N(LCC) 12 CN7

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 23

WH 5 F-GND 5 7 P-GND
F.G. P EL 12PIN R B8P-VH
(LCC OPTION)
F.G. CN4
3 5VN
6 D-GND
B6P-VH
PSU

CN4(B4P(5-3)-VH)
4 WH_L(DESK)
2 WH_N(DESK)

5 WH_L(LCC)
1 WH_N(LCC)
(WH-DESK_LCC harness)
WH PWB
 CN29
1 24V3
2 P-GND
3 /CV_COPY
4 /CV_COUNT
5 /CV_START
6 /CV_CA
7 /CV_CLCOPY
8 /CV_COLOR1
TO COIN VENDOR 9 /CV_STAPLE
(OPTION) 10 /CV_COLOR0
11 /CV_DUPLEX
12 5VN
P. Finisher & coin vendor (P16)

13 /CV_SIZE0
14 /CV_SIZE1
15 /CV_SIZE2
16 /CV_SIZE3
B16B-PNDZS

CN CN (DC main harness) CN21

1 TXD_FIN TXD_FIN 1 TXD_INS 1 16 TXD_INS
2 RXD_FIN RXD_FIN 2 RXD_INS 2 17 RXD_INS
3 /DTR_FIN /DTR_FIN 3 /DTR_INS 3 18 /DTR_INS
4 /DSR_FIN /DSR_FIN 4 /DSR_INS 4 19 /DSR_INS
5 RES_FIN RES_FIN 5 RES_INS 5 20 RES_INS
6 24V3 24V3 6 NC 6
FINISHER 7 5VN 5VN 7 5VN 7
8 D-GND D-GND 8 D-GND 8 15 D-GND
9 P-GND P-GND 9 NC 9 B20B-PHDSS-B
10 F-GND F-GND 10 F-GND 10 PCU PWB
11 24V5 24V5 11 24V5 11
12 P-GND P-GND 12 P-GND 12
P EL 12PIN R
INSERTOR

FINISHER & INSERTOR (OPTION)

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 24

F.G.

CN8
7 24V5
B7P-VH-B

CN7
6 P-GND
B8P-VH-B
CN4
4 5VN
B6P-VH-B
PSU
 MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 25
(SCN-Mother DATA harness)
P-GND 1 3 P-GND
24V3 2 1 24V3
CN18
OCSW

12V 3 2 12V
OCSW
5VEXT
D-GND

5VN 4 4 5VN
3.3V 5 5 3.3V
ORS LED PWB

D-GND 6 6 D-GND
CN138 B6P-VH-R

B6P-VH
3
2
1

F-GND
24VEXT

/SIZE_LED2
/SIZE_LED1

n INFO_LED 1 1 n INFO_LED
5VO 2 2 5VO
CN25
CN144

CN_CHK_IN 3 3 CN_CHK_IN
WU_LED 4 4 WU_LED
D-GND 5 5 D-GND
POW_LED 6 6 POW_LED
FG

LCD_CLK+ 7 7 LCD_CLK+
n WU_KEY 8 8 n WU_KEY (CCD-F harness 1)
6
5
4
3
2
1

LCD_CLK- 9 9 LCD_CLK- AGND 1 1 AGND

CN3

n PWRSW 10 10 n PWRSW AGND 2 2 AGND

CN136
CN148

D-GND 11 11 D-GND AGND 3 3 AGND

NC 12 12 NC A12V 4 4 A12V
B6P-PH-K-S

LCD_DAT2+ 13 13 LCD_DAT2+ CCD_CP- 5 5 CCD_CP-

OCSW
5VEXT
D-GND

n POF_SCN 14 14 AGND 6 6 AGND

24VEXT

n POF_SCN
/SIZE_LED2
/SIZE_LED1

LCD_DAT2- 15 15 LCD_DAT2- CCD_CP+ 7 7 CCD_CP+

n RES_MPFC_SCN 16 16 n RES_MPFC_SCN A5V 8 8 A5V
D-GND 17 17 D-GND AGND 9 9 AGND
RES_SCN 18 18 RES_SCN AGND 10 10 AGND
B30B-PHDSS-B

LCD_DAT1+ 19 19 LCD_DAT1+ CCD_RS+ 11 11 CCD_RS+

n RTS_SCN 20 20 n RTS_SCN A3.3V 12 12 A3.3V
LCD_DAT1- 21 21 LCD_DAT1- CCD_RS- 13 13 CCD_RS-
TXD_SCN 22 22 TXD_SCN /LVDS_STBY 14 14 /LVDS_STBY
MOTHER PWB

D-GND 23 23 D-GND AGND 15 15 AGND

n CTS_SCN 24 24 n CTS_SCN /RES_CCDAD 16 16 /RES_CCDAD
LCD_DAT0+ 25 25 LCD_DAT0+ CCD_CLK2- 17 17 CCD_CLK2-
RXD_SCN 26 26 AD_SCLK 18 18 AD_SCLK
CCD PWB

RXD_SCN
LCD_DAT0- 27 27 LCD_DAT0- CCD_CLK2+ 19 19 CCD_CLK2+
n FWP_SCN 28 28 n FWP_SCN AD_WRSO 20 20 AD_WRSO
CN_CHK_OUT 29 29 CN_CHK_OUT AGND 21 21 AGND
B30B-PHDSS-B

D-GND 30 30 D-GND AD_SEN 22 22 AD_SEN

CCD_CLK1+ 23 23 CCD_CLK1+
/DETECT 1 1 /DETECT AD_RDSI 24 24 AD_RDSI
D-GND 2 2 D-GND CCD_CLK1- 25 25 CCD_CLK1-
CN19
CN146

/DET_ANC 3 3 /DET_ANC AGND 26 26 AGND

NC 4 4 NC AGND 27 27 AGND
TXD_ANC 5 5 TXD_ANC AD_CLPIN 28 28 AD_CLPIN
NC 6 6 NC AD_MCLK- 29 29 AD_MCLK-
RXD_ANC 7 7 RXD_ANC AD_BLKCLP 30 30 AD_BLKCLP
NC 8 8 AD_MCLK+ 31 31 AD_MCLK+
SCN-CNT PWB

NC
D-GND 9 9 D-GND CCD_SH 32 32 CCD_SH
D-GND 10 10 D-GND AGND 33 33 AGND
AGND 34 34 AGND
SCANDATA0- 1 1 SCANDATA0- CLKP1_OUT+ 35 35 CLKP1_OUT+

B12B-PHDSS-BCN5
SCANDATA0+ 2 2 SCANDATA0+ SH_OUT+ 36 36 SH_OUT+
B10B-PHDSS-BCN143

D-GND 3 3 D-GND CLKP1_OUT- 37 37 CLKP1_OUT-

SCANDATA1- 4 4 SCANDATA1- SH_OUT- 38 38 SH_OUT-
SCANDATA1+ 5 5 SCANDATA1+ AGND 39 39 AGND
D-GND 6 6 D-GND AGND 40 40 AGND
501190-4017
501190-4017

SCANDATA2- 7 7 SCANDATA2-
SCANDATA2+ 8 8 SCANDATA2+ (CCD-F harness 1)
D-GND 9 9 D-GND AGND 1 1 AGND
CN1

SCANCLKOUT- 10 10 SCANCLKOUT- AGND 2 2 AGND

CN147

SCANCLKOUT+ 11 11 SCANCLKOUT+ TC+ 3 3 TC+

D-GND 12 12 D-GND TE+ 4 4 TE+
SCANDATA3- 13 13 SCANDATA3- TC- 5 5 TC-
SCANDATA3+ 14 14 SCANDATA3+ TE- 6 6 TE-

B15P-PH-K-S
B15P-PH-K-S

D-GND 15 15 D-GND AGND 7 7 AGND

AGND 8 8 AGND
/DETECT 1 1 /DETECT TB+ 9 9 TB+
D-GND 2 2 D-GND TD+ 10 10 TD+
/DET_ANC 3 3 /DET_ANC TB- 11 11 TB-
TXD_ANC 5 5 TXD_ANC TD- 12 12 TD-
RXD_ANC 7 7 RXD_ANC AGND 13 13 AGND
D-GND 9 9 D-GND AGND 14 14 AGND
D-GND 10 10 D-GND TA+ 15 15 TA+
TCLK+ 16 16 TCLK+
SCANDATA0- 1 1 SCANDATA0- TA- 17 17 TA-

CN4 B12B-PHDSS-BCN3
SCANDATA0+ 2 2 SCANDATA0+ TCLK- 18 18 TCLK-

CN146 B10B-PHDSS-B CN143

D-GND 3 3 D-GND AGND 19 19 AGND
SCANDATA1- 4 4 SCANDATA1- AGND 20 20 AGND
501190-2017

SCANDATA1+ 5 5 SCANDATA1+
501190-2017

D-GND 6 6 D-GND (SCN-LAMP

SCANDATA2- 7 7 SCANDATA2- FFC)
SCANDATA2+ 8 8 SCANDATA2+ P-GND 5 1 P-GND
D-GND 9 9 D-GND P-GND 4 2 P-GND
PWB

CN130

SCANCLKOUT- 10 10 SCANCLKOUT- CL 3 3 CL
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 11 SCANCLKOUT+ 24VPD 2 4 24VPD

SCAN IN PWB
D-GND 12 12 D-GND 24VPD 1 5 24VPD
CL INVERTOR

SCANDATA3- 13 13 SCANDATA3-
2
1

SCANDATA3+ 14 14 SCANDATA3+

B15P-PH-K-S
B15P-PH-K-S
D-GND 15 15 D-GND
/DETECT 1
D-GND 2
/DET_ANC 3
CL

TXD_SCN 5
RXD_SNC 7
D-GND 9
D-GND 10
NC 11

CN4 B12B-PHDSS-B
MiM_A 1
NC 12
MiM_B 2

CN137
SCANDATA0- 1 MiM_/A 3
MOTOR
MIRROR

MiM_/B

CN3
SCANDATA0+ 2 4
D-GND 3
SCANDATA1- 4
SCANDATA1+ 5 MHPS 1 3 MHPS
D-GND 6 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
MHPS

CN134
SCANDATA2- 7 5V 3 1 5V
SCANDATA2+ 8 (MHPS harness)

DOCC PWB
D-GND 9
SCANCLKIN- 10
SCANCLKIN+ 11
D-GND 12
SCANDATA3- 13
SCANDATA3+ 14

B15P-PH-K-S
D-GND 15

OPTION
Q. Scanner section 1/2 (P17)
 CN142 CN135 CN1 CN2
1 P-GND 1 1 P-GND D-GND 26 1 D-GND PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0
2 P-GND 2 2 P-GND 3.3V 25 2 3.3V PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1
3 SPPD1 3 3 SPPD1 5VN 24 3 5VN PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2
4 SPPD2 4 4 SPPD2 D-GND 23 4 D-GND 5VN 4 4 5VN
5 24VPD 5 5 24VPD PD 22 5 PD PD 5 5 PD
6 24VPD 6 6 24VPD PDSEL0 21 6 PDSEL0 D-GND 6 6 D-GND
7 5V_EXT 7 7 5V_EXT PDSEL1 20 7 PDSEL1 B6B-PH-SM3-TB ORS PD PWB
8 AVCC 8 8 AVCC PDSEL2 19 8 PDSEL2
9 SPFMCK 9 9 SPFMCK /KEYIN 18 9 /KEYIN CN3 CN1
10 SPFMM1 10 10 SPFMM1 SEG0 17 10 SEG0 n PWRSW 1 3 n PWRSW
11 SPFMM2 11 11 SPFMM2 SEG1 16 11 SEG1 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
12 SPFMO1 12 12 SPFMO1 SEG2 15 12 SEG2 D-GND 3 1 D-GND
13 SPFMO2 13 13 SPFMO2 /F0 14 13 /F0 S3B-PH-K-S (PSW POWER SW PWB
14 SPRMA 14 14 SPRMA /F1 13 14 /F1 harness)
15 SPRMA/ 15 15 SPRMA/ /F2 12 15 /F2
MFP OPE-P
R. Scanner section 2/2 (P18)

16 SPRMB 16 16 SPRMB /F3 11 16 /F3

17 SPRMB/ 17 17 SPRMB/ /BZR 10 17 /BZR PWB
TO R-SPF 18 SPRMO1 18 18 SPRMO1 D-GND 9 18 D-GND
19 SGS 19 19 SGS n PWRSW 8 19 n PWRSW
20 STMPS 20 20 STMPS n WU_KEY 7 20 n WU_KEY
21 SRRC 21 21 SRRC n INFO_LED 6 21 n INFO_LED
22 SPFC 22 22 SPFC POW_LED 5 22 POW_LED
23 SPWS 23 23 SPWS WU_LED 4 23 WU_LED
24 SELA_ 24 24 SELA_ D-GND 3 24 D-GND
25 SELB_ 25 25 SELB_ 5VO 2 25 5VO
26 SELC_ 26 26 SELC_ D-GND 1 26 D-GND
27 SSELO 27 27 SSELO 52030-2629 (MFP OP 52610-2671
28 SPPD4 28 28 SPPD4 I/F FFC)
29 SPFFAN 29 29 SPFFAN SCN-CNT PWB
30 SPPD3 30 30 SPPD3 CN125 CN1 CN3
31 SPPD5 31 31 SPPD5 D-GND 30 30 D-GND VO 1 15 VO
32 5VPD 32 32 5VPD CN_CHK_OUT 29 29 CN_CHK_OUT LP 2 14 LP
33 D-GND 33 33 D-GND LCD_CLK+ 28 28 LCD_CLK+ D-GND 3 13 D-GND
34 D-GND 34 34 D-GND LCD_CLK- 27 27 LCD_CLK- CP 4 12 CP
B34B-PHDSS-B D-GND 26 26 D-GND D-GND 5 11 D-GND
LCD_DAT2+ 25 25 LCD_DAT2+ M 6 10 M
LCD_DAT2- 24 24 LCD_DAT2- 3.3V_EXT 7 9 3.3V_EXT
R SM6P P PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H CN145 D-GND 23 23 D-GND D0 8 8 D0
1 /C_CARD 1 6 /C_CARD 1 1 /C_CARD LCD_DAT1+ 22 22 LCD_DAT1+ D1 9 7 D1
CARD 2 /C_SEL 2 5 /C_SEL 2 2 /C_SEL LCD_DAT1- 21 21 LCD_DAT1- D-GND 10 6 D-GND
3 /C_CLOCK 3 4 /C_CLOCK 3 3 /C_CLOCK D-GND 20 20 D-GND D2 11 5 D2
READER 4 /C_DATA 4 3 /C_DATA 4 4 /C_DATA LCD_DAT0+ 19 19 LCD_DAT0+ D3 12 4 D3
5 5V 5 2 5V 5 5 5V LCD_DAT0- 18 18 LCD_DAT0- D-GND 13 3 D-GND
(OPTION) 6 D-GND 6 1 D-GND 6 6 D-GND D-GND 17 17 D-GND DISP 14 2 DISP
(HL interface harness PA) (SCN-MOTHER DATA harness) B6P-PH-K-R DISP 16 16 DISP VEE 15 1 VEE
3.3V_EXT 15 15 3.3V_EXT 52746-1570 (LCD LCD UN

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 26

CN131 VEEON 14 14 VEEON LVDS-P PWB FFC)
1 n A_PNC VCONT 13 13 VCONT CN4
2 n A_COPY AVCC 12 12 AVCC /YL(Y1) 1
3 n A_CA SC_TEMP 11 11 SC_TEMP XH(X1) 2 TOUCH
4 n A_READY P-GND 10 10 P-GND YH(Y2) 3 PANEL
5 n A_AUD 24V_EXT 9 9 24V_EXT /XL(X2) 4
6 5V NC 8 8 NC 04FM-1.0SP-1.9-GW-TF
TO AUDITER 7 D-GND /CCFT1 7 7 /CCFT1
8 24V CN_CHK_IN(LCD) 6 6 CN_CHK_IN(LCD) CN2 CN1
9 NC X2CN 5 5 X2CN /CCFT 1 3/CCFT
10 n A_TC Y2CN 4 4 Y2CN D-GND 2 2D-GND
11 24V X1CN 3 3 X1CN 24V_EXT 3 1
24V_EXT
12 PNC-a Y1CN 2 2 Y1CN S3B-PH-SM4-TB (LCD S3B-PH-K-S
13 D-GND D-GND 1 1 D-GND inverter LCD INVERTOR PWB
B13P-PH-K-S 52030-3029 (LVDS I/F 52271-3090 harness)
FFC) CN2
BACK 1 CCFT+
LIGHT 2 /CCFT
S02(8.0)B-BHS
 CN2 CN3 CN8
1 SP- D-GND 1 1 D-GND
S. FAX section (P19)

SPEAKER 2 SP+ D-GND 2 2 D-GND

3 NC 3.3V 3 3 3.3V
B3P-PH-K-S 3.3V 4 4 3.3V
(BOARD TO FAX_RXD(D)- 5 5 FAX_TXD(D)_N
MJ1 CN2 BOARD) CN7 CNCT_FAX- 6 6 n CNCT_FAX
1 NC 12V 1 1 12V FAX_RXD(D)+ 7 7 FAX_TXD(D)_P
2 TEL1 AG 2 2 P-GND MSW_MON- 8 8 n MSW_MON
3 L1 12V 3 3 12V FAX_RXD(CS)+ 9 9 FAX_TXD(CS)_P
TO LINE
4 L2 AG 4 4 P-GND RES_FAX- 10 10 n RES_FAX
5 TEL2 150VON 5 5 150VON FAX_RXD(CS)- 11 11 FAX_TXD(CS)_N
6 NC CION 6 6 CION D-GND 12 12 D-GND
MJ-64J-RD315 48VON 7 7 48VON FAX_TXD(D)- 13 13 FAX_RXD(D)_N
HS1- 8 8 HS1- RES_MPF- 14 14 n RES_MPFC_FAX
HS2- 9 9 HS2- FAX_TXD(D)+ 15 15 FAX_RXD(D)_P
MOTHER
CI- 10 10 CI- FAX_WUP- 16 16 n WU_FAX PWB
MJ2 EXHS- 11 11 EXHS- FAX_TXD(CS)+ 17 17 FAX_RXD(CS)_P
1 NC SON1 12 12 SON1 PLED- 18 18 n PLED
2 NC SON2 13 13 SON2 FAX_TXD(CS)- 19 19 FAX_RXD(CS)_N
3 TEL1 ECON 14 14 ECON D-GND 20 20 D-GND
TO EX TEL
4 TEL2 MRON 15 15 MRON FAX_CTS(D)- 21 21 n FAX_RTS(D)
5 NC TELID 16 16 TELID D-GND 22 22 D-GND
6 NC NC 17 17 NC FAX_RTS(D)- 23 23 n FAX_CTS(D)
MJ-66J-RD315 NC 18 18 NC FLVPP 24 24 FLVPP
NC 19 19 NC FAX_CTS(CS)- 25 25 n FAX_RTS(CS)
NC 20 20 NC 5VO 26 26 5VO
DG 21 21 GND FAX_RTS(CS)- 27 27 n FAX_CTS(CS)
3.3V 22 22 3.3V 12V 28 28 12V
DG 23 23 GND 3.3V 29 29 3.3V
5VS 24 24 5VS 3.3V 30 30 3.3V
DG 25 25 GND D-GND 31 31 D-GND
SI3_RES- 26 26 SI3_RES- P-GND 32 32 P-GND
SPK 27 27 SPK S32B-PHDSS-B B32B-PHDSS-B
MDM_ATXD 28 28 ATXD
MDM_ARXD 29 29 ARXD
MDM_ABITCLK 30 30 ABITCLK

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 27

MDM_ASPCLK 31 31 ASPCLK FAX MAIN PWB
RGDT- 32 32 RGDT-
TEL LIU PWB MDM_CLK 33 33 MDM_CLK
AFERES- 34 34 AFE_RES-
BBITCLK 35 35 BBITCLK
BSPCLK 36 36 BSPCLK
BRXD 37 37 BTXD
BTXD 38 38 BRXD
HDMUTE- 39 39 HDMUTE-
RHS- 40 40 RHS-
TX24-40R-10ST-H1 TX25-40P-8ST-H1
 MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 28
BOARD TO BOARD
SCANDATA3+ 1 1 SCANDATA3+
CN4

SCANDATA3- 2 2 SCANDATA3-
CN21

SCANCLKOUT+ 3 3 SCANCLKOUT+
SCANCLKOUT- 4 4 SCANCLKOUT-
SCANDATA2+ 5 5 SCANDATA2+
SCANDATA2- 6 6 SCANDATA2-
SCANDATA1+ 7 7 SCANDATA1+
SCANDATA1- 8 8 SCANDATA1-
SCANDATA0+ 9 9 SCANDATA0+ IDE_RST_N 1 1 IDE_RST_N
CN5

SCANDATA0- 10 10 SCANDATA0- D-GND 2 2 D-GND

LCD_DATA0- 11 11 LCD_DATA0- IED_DD7 3 3 IED_DD7
LCD_DATA0+ 12 12 LCD_DATA0+ IED_DD8 4 4 IED_DD8
LCD_DATA1- 13 13 LCD_DATA1- IED_DD6 5 5 IED_DD6
LCD_DATA1+ 14 14 LCD_DATA1+ IED_DD9 6 6 IED_DD9
LCD_DATA2- 15 15 LCD_DATA2- IED_DD5 7 7 IED_DD5
LCD_DATA2+ 16 16 LCD_DATA2+ IED_DD10 8 8 IED_DD10
LCD_CLK- 17 17 LCD_CLK- IED_DD4 9 9 IED_DD4
LCD_CLK+ 18 18 LCD_CLK+ IED_DD11 10 10 IED_DD11
CH0_N 19 19 CH0_N IED_DD3 11 11 IED_DD3
CH0_P 20 20 CH0_P IED_DD12 12 12 IED_DD12
CH1_N 21 21 CH1_N IED_DD2 13 13 IED_DD2
CH1_P 22 22 CH1_P IED_DD13 14 14 IED_DD13
CH2_N 23 23 CH2_N IED_DD1 15 15 IED_DD1
CH2_P 24 24 CH2_P IED_DD14 16 16 IED_DD14
CLK_N 25 25 CLK_N IED_DD0 17 17 IED_DD0
CLK_P 26 26 CLK_P IED_DD15 18 18 IED_DD15
CH3_N 27 27 CH3_N D-GND 19 19 D-GND
CH3_P 28 28 CH3_P KEY 20 20 KEY
ECLK_LSU_N 29 29 ECLK_LSU_N IDE_DMARQ 21 21 IDE_DMARQ
HDD

ECLK_LSU_P 30 30 ECLK_LSU_P D-GND 22 22 D-GND

HSYNC_LSU_P 31 31 HSYNC_LSU_P IDE_DIOW_N 23 23 IDE_DIOW_N
HSYNC_LSU_N 32 32 HSYNC_LSU_N D-GND 24 24 D-GND
VSYNC_K_N 33 33 VSYNC_K_N IDE_DIOR_N 25 25 IDE_DIOR_N
MOTHER PWB

VSYNC_K_P 34 34 VSYNC_K_P D-GND 26 26 D-GND

MFPC PWB

VSYNC_C_P 35 35 VSYNC_C_P IDE_IORDY_N 27 27 IDE_IORDY_N

VSYNC_C_N 36 36 VSYNC_C_N D-GND 28 28 D-GND
VSYNC_M_N 37 37 VSYNC_M_N IDE_DMACK_N 29 29 IDE_DMACK_N
VSYNC_M_P 38 38 VSYNC_M_P D-GND 30 30 D-GND
VSYNC_Y_P 39 39 VSYNC_Y_P IDE_INTRQ 31 31 IDE_INTRQ
VSYNC_Y_N 40 40 VSYNC_Y_N ICCS10 32 32 ICCS10
5VL 41 41 5VL IDE_DA1 33 33 IDE_DA1
5VL 42 42 5VL IDE_CBLID_N 34 34 IDE_CBLID_N
5VL 43 43 5VL IDE_DA0 35 35 IDE_DA0
5VL 44 44 5VL IDE_DA2 36 36 IDE_DA2
5VL 45 45 5VL IDE_CS0 37 37 IDE_CS0
5VL 46 46 5VL IDE_CS1 38 38 IDE_CS1
5VL 47 47 5VL IDE_DASP_N 39 39 IDE_DASP_N
5VL 48 48 5VL D-GND 40 40 D-GND
5VL 49 49 5VL
HU5-400PNA-S53T-FA

5VL 50 50 5VL
RXD_SCN 51 51 RXD_SCN
n CTS_SCN 52 52 n CTS_SCN 1 12V
TXD_SCN 53 53 TXD_SCN 2 D-GND
n RTS_SCN 54 54 n RTS_SCN 3 D-GND
n RES_SCN 55 55 n RES_SCN 4 5VN
n RES_PCU 56 56 n RES_PCU
RXD_PCU 57 57 RXD_PCU 5V 1
n CTS_PCU 58 58 n CTS_PCU D- 2
TXD_PCU 59 59 TXD_PCU D+ 3
n RTS_PCU 60 60 n RTS_PCU GND 4
(HOST)

CN8 USB-B
USB2.0

TXD_FAX(D) 61 61 TXD_FAX(D)
TXD_FAX(CS) 62 62 TXD_FAX(CS)
RXD_FAX(D) 63 63 RXD_FAX(D)
FAN

RXD_FAX(CS) 64 64 RXD_FAX(CS)
HDD

n RTS_FAX(D) 65 65 n RTS_FAX(D) 5V 1
n CTS_FAX(D) 66 66 D- 2
(HDD POWER harness)

n CTS_FAX(D)
n RTS_FAX(CS) 67 67 n RTS_FAX(CS) D+ 3
n CTS_FAX(CS) 68 68 n CTS_FAX(CS) GND 4
CN9 USB-A
USB1.1

n RES_FAX 69 69 n RES_FAX
(DEVICE)
P

1
5
8
4
1
2
3
4

n CNCT_FAX 70 70 n CNCT_FAX
n WU_FAX2 71 71 n WU_FAX2
n MSW_MON2 72 72 n MSW_MON2
n POF_MFPC 73 73 n POF_MFPC TX+ 1
n REQ_PIC 74 74 n REQ_PIC TX- 2

CN26
12V
12V

5VN

D-GND
D-GND
D-GND

n CLR_PIC 75 75 n CLR_PIC CT 3
HDDFM_PWM
HDDFM_LD

QR/P4 8P

TXD_PIC 76 76 TXD_PIC NC 4
RXD_PIC 77 77 RXD_PIC NC 5
S

1
5
8
4
4
3
2
1

LAN
PWM 78 78 PWM CT 6

LAN
n CNCT_FAN 79 79 n CNCT_FAN RX+ 7
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H

n RES_PIC 80 80 n RES_PIC RX- 8

RES_MFP 81 81 RES_MFP
PWM2 82 82 PWM2
FLVPP 83 83 FLVPP
n REQ_PIC_INT 84 84 n REQ_PIC_INT
n WU_FAX1 85 85 n WU_FAX1 CD 1
3.3V 86 86 3.3V RXD 2

CN18
3.3V 87 87 3.3V TXD 3
3.3V 88 88 3.3V DTR 4
5VO 89 89 5VO GND 5
12V 90 90 12V DSR 6
D-GND 91 91 D-GND RTS 7

RS232C
D-GND 92 92 D-GND CTS 8
D-GND 93 93 D-GND RI 9

RS232C
D-GND 94 94 D-GND
D-GND 95 95 D-GND
D-GND 96 96 D-GND
D-GND 97 97 D-GND
D-GND 98 98 D-GND
D-GND 99 99 D-GND
D-GND 100 100 D-GND

TX25-100P-LT-H1E
12V 1
D-GND 3

CN15
D-GND 4

(HDD POWER interface harness)

(HDD POWER interface harness)

B4P-VH
5VN 2
12V 2
HDDFM_PWM 4

CN17
D-GND 6
HDDFM_LD 8

B10B-PHDSS-B
T. MFP board section 1/2 (P20)
 MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 29
1 5V_IN
2 5V_IN
CN22

3 5V_IN
4 D-GND
5 D-GND
6 D-GND
7 D-GND
8 PCI1_EXT
9 n PCI1_RST
10 PCI1_INTA_PU
11 EXT_REQ
12 EXT_GNT
13 PCI1MAC_AD30
14 PCI1MAC_AD31
15 PCI1MAC_AD28
16 PCI1MAC_AD29
17 PCI1MAC_AD26
18 PCI1MAC_AD27
19 PCI1MAC_AD24
20 PCI1MAC_AD25
21 PCI1MAC_AD23
22 PCI1MAC_CBE3
23 PCI1MAC_AD21
24 PCI1MAC_AD22
25 PCI1MAC_AD19
26 PCI1MAC_AD20
27 PCI1MAC_AD17
28 PCI1MAC_AD18
29 PCI1MAC_CBE2
30 PCI1MAC_AD16
31 PCI1MAC_AD14
MFPC PWB

32 PCI1MAC_AD15
33 PCI1MAC_AD12

EXTEND PCI
34 PCI1MAC_AD13
35 PCI1MAC_AD10
36 PCI1MAC_AD11
37 PCI1MAC_AD8
38 PCI1MAC_AD9
39 PCI1MAC_AD7
40 PCI1MAC_CBE1
41 PCI1MAC_AD5
42 PCI1MAC_AD6
43 PCI1MAC_AD3
44 PCI1MAC_AD4
45 PCI1MAC_AD1
46 PCI1MAC_AD2
47 PCI1MAC_CBE0
48 PCI1MAC_AD0
49 D-GND
50 PCI1MAC_IDSEL
51 PCI1MAC_PAR
52 PCI1MAC_FRAME
53 PCI1MAC_IRDY
54 PCI1MAC_TRDY
55 PCI1MAC_DVSEL
56 PCI_STOP
57 PCI1_SERR
58 PCI1_PERR

FX8C-60S-SV5
59 D-GND
60 D-GND

12V
5VO

3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V

FLVPP

D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND

n PLED
n RES_FAX

n RES_MFP

n FAX_WUP

n FAXD_CTS
n FAXD_RTS
n CNCT_FAX

n MSW_MON
FAXD_TXD_P
FAXD_TXD_N

FAXD_RXD_P
FAXD_RXD_N

n FAXCS_CTS
n FAXCS_RTS
FAXCS_TXD_P

FAXCS_TXD_N

FAXCS_RXD_P

FAXCS_RXD_N
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10

B32B-PHDSS-B
CN19

(OPTION)
2nd FAX UN
U. MFP board section 2/2 (P21)
3. Signal list
Signal Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Name Function/Operation Note
name “L” “H” No. No. name
1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Detects the waste toner full.
[Mechanical switch]
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL Detects the transfer belt separation
detection CL.
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation BK Detects the transfer belt separation
detection BK.
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Controls the primary transfer
[Electromagnetic clutch] separation mode.
ADUM_L ADU motor lower [Stepping motor] Drives the right door section.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream
[Transmission type] paper pass.
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream
[Transmission type] paper pass.
CCFT LCD backlight Backlight for the CCD
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
CLI Scanner lamp [Xenon lamp] Radiates lights onto a document for
the CCD to scan document images.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift Detects tray 1 upper limit .
HP detection) [Transmission type]
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift Detects tray 2 upper limit.
HP detection) [Transmission type]
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the lift plate of the paper feed
feed tray 1) [DC brush-less motor] tray.
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the lift plate of the paper feed
feed tray 2) [DC brush-less motor] tray.
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects tray 1 paper empty.
[Transmission type]
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects tray 2 paper empty.
[Transmission type]
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper feed tray
section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper Detects tray 1 paper pass.
entry detection)
[Transmission type]
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper Detects tray 2 paper pass.
entry detection)
[Transmission type]
CPFM Paper feed motor [Brush-less Drives the paper feed section.
motor]
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
1) [Electromagnetic clutch] paper feed tray 1 section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
2) [Electromagnetic clutch] paper feed tray 2 section.
CPUFM Controller cooling fan motor Cools the controller PWB.
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity Detects tray 1 paper remaining
detection quantity.
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity Detects tray 2 paper remaining
detection quantity.
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection Detects the tray 1.
CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection Detects the tray 2.
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase.
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BK phase.
DHSW Dehumidifier heater switch Turns ON/OFF the power lone of the
(Japan [Seesaw switch] dehumidifier heaters provided in the
only) scanner (reading) section and the
paper feed section.
DL_C Discharge lamp C [LED] Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp K [LED] Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M [LED] Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y [LED] Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp K [LED] Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
DM_CL Drum motor (CL) [Stepping motor] Drives the color OPC drum unit.
DM_K Drum motor (K) [Stepping motor] Drives the black OPC drum unit.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/
detection [Transmission type] close.

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 30

 Signal Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Name Function/Operation Note
name “L” “H” No. No. name
DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport
open/close detection cover open/close.
DSW-F Front door open/close switch Detects open/close of the front door,
[Micro switch] and turns ON/OFF the power line of
the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Detects open/close of the right door,
[Micro switch] and turns ON/OFF the power line of
the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (CL) Drives the developing section (CL).
[Brush-less motor]
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Drives the developing section/transfer
[Brush-less motor] section (K).
F1 Fuse (20A 125V) AC power
PWB
F1 Fuse (200mA 250V) LCD INV
PWB
F1 Fuse (1.25A250V) CL invertor
PWB
F2 Fuse (20A 125V) AC power
PWB
F3 Fuse (T2AH250V) AC power
PWB
F4 Fuse (T2AH250V) AC power
PWB
F101 Fuse (125V 12A) DC power
PWB
F102 Fuse (T1AH250V) DC power
PWB
F103 Fuse (T8AH250V) DC power
PWB
F201 Fuse (T6.3AH250V) DC power
PWB
F202 Fuse (T6.3AH250V) DC power
PWB
F203 Fuse (T6.3AH250V) DC power
PWB
F204 Fuse (T6.3AH250V) DC power
PWB
F205 Fuse (T6.3AH250V) DC power
PWB
F301 Fuse (T5AH250V) DC power
PWB
FUM Fusing drive motor Drives the fusing unit.
[Stepping motor]
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor Cools the HDD.
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Heats the upper heat roller. (Sub)
HLTS1 Thermostat (Fusing unit) Prevents against overheating of the
fusing roller.
HLTS2 Thermostat (Fusing unit) Prevents against overheating of the
fusing roller.
HLTS3 Thermostat (Fusing unit) Prevents against overheating of the
fusing roller.
HOPS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
LSUSS1 LSU shutter solenoid Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position. Home
[Transmission type] position
MIM Scanner motor [Stepping motor] Drives the scanner (reading) section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty Detects the manual feed paper empty.
detection [Transmission type]
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry.
[Transmission type]
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
paper feed) [Electromagnetic feed)
solenoid]
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the manual
[Electromagnetic solenoid] paper feed gate solenoid.
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray Manual
paper length. paper
feed unit

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 31

 Signal Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Name Function/Operation Note
name “L” “H” No. No. name
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper
[Electromagnetic clutch] feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper Detects the manual paper feed tray
width detector [Volume resistor] paper width.
MSW Main SW [Seesaw switch] Turns ON/OFF the main DC power
source.
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Detects the manual paper feed tray Manual
position detector 1 paper pull-out position (storing paper
[Transmission type] position). feed unit
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Detects the manual paper feed tray Manual
position detector 1 paper pull-out position (pull-out paper
[Transmission type] position). feed unit
OCSW Original cover SW [Transmission Document size detection trigger. Close Open
type]
OSM Shifter motor [Stepping motor] Performs offset of paper.
OZFM Ozone fan motor Exhausts ozone.
PCS_CL/K Process control sensor Detects the toner patch density.
[Reflection type]
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Opens/closes the shutter of the
[Electromagnetic solenoid] process control and the registration
sensor.
PFM PS front motor [Stepping motor] Drives transport between the resist
roller and the paper feed section,
transport between the resist roller and
the right door section.
PGM Polygon motor Scans the laser beam.
[DC brushless motor]
POD1 Fusing after-detection Detects the paper exit from fusing.
[Transmission type]
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper from paper exit.
[Transmission type]
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit.
(F side)
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit.
(R side)
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
[Stepping motor]
PPD1 Registration pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist
[Transmission type] roller.
PPD2 Registration detection Detects the paper in rear of resist
roller.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of
[Push switch] the DC power source.
REGS_F/R Resist sensor [Reflection type] Detects the resist shift.
RRM Registration motor Drives the resist roller and controls
[Stepping motor] ON/OFF.
TCS_C Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (C).
[Magnetic sensor]
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K).
[Magnetic sensor]
TCS_M Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (M).
[Magnetic sensor]
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (Y).
[Magnetic sensor]
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face down paper exit tray
[Transmission type] full
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full.
TH_M/ Temperature/humidity detection Detects the temperature/humidity.
HUD_M
TNM_C Toner motor C Transports toner from the toner
[Synchronous motor] cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_K Toner motor K Transports toner from the toner
[Synchronous motor] cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_M Toner motor M Transports toner from the toner
[Synchronous motor] cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_Y Toner motor Y Transports toner from the toner
[Synchronous motor] cartridge to the developing unit.
VR201 Volume +12V output adjustment DC power
PWB
VR203 Volume +24V output adjustment DC power
PWB

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 32

 Signal Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Name Function/Operation Note
name “L” “H” No. No. name
VR204 Volume +5VN output adjustment DC power
PWB
VR205 Volume +3.3V output adjustment DC power
PWB
VR402 Volume +5VO, +5VL output adjustment DC power
PWB
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Stirs waste toner.
[Synchronous motor]

MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 33

[12] OTHERS
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


Factory default setting

Item
Page
X User Type 6 -
1. System settings X User Type 7 -
● Auto Tray Switching Enable
A. System settings (General) ■ Address Control
(1) When User Authentication is not Enabled ● Direct Address / Program
X Individual
1) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
◆ E-mail*4
2) Configure the desired system settings.
• Search Number -
• User authentication is initially disabled (factory default set- • Name -
ting). • Initial -
(2) When User Authentication is Enabled • Index -
• Address -
a. Login by login name and password • Key Name -
1) Touch the [Login Name] key. • File Format -
◆ Internet Fax*5
2) Select the user.
• Search Number -
3) Enter a password. • Name -
(1) Touch the [Password] key. • Initial -
(2) Enter a password on the text entry screen that will appear. • Index -
4) Touch the [OK] key. • Address -
• Key Name -
b. Login by user number • Compression -
1) Enter your user number with the numeric keys. • Internet Fax Report -
X Group
2) Touch the [OK] key.
◆ Search Number -
(3) System Settings (General) List ◆ Group Name -
◆ Initial -
Factory default setting ◆ Index -
Item
Page ◆ Address -
■ Total Count ◆ Key Name -
● Job Count - X Program
● Device Count - ◆ Program Name -
■ Default Settings ◆ Settings
● Display Contrast (Set to the centre value) • Address -
● Clock • Resolution -
X Date Format Varies depending on • Exposure -
country and region
• Special Modes -
X Daylight Saving Time Setting
X Amend/Delete -
● Keyboard Select Varies depending on
● Custom Index
country and region
X User 1 -
■ List Print (User)
X User 2 -
● All Custom Setting List -
X User 3 -
● Printer Test Page
X User 4 -
X PCL Symbol Set List*1 -
X User 5 -
X PCL Internal Font List*1 -
X User 6 -
X PCL Extended Font List*1 -
■ Fax Data Receive/Forward
X PS Font List*2 -
● Internet Fax Manual Reception*5 -
X PS Extended Font List*2 -
X Reception Start -
X NIC Page -
X Manual Reception Key in Initial
● Sending Address List*3 Enable
Screen
X Individual List -
● Internet Fax Data Forward*5 -
X Group List -
■ Printer Condition Settings*1
X Program List -
● Printer Default Settings
X Memory Box List -
X Copies 1
X All Sending Address List -
X Orientation Portrait
● Document Filing Folder List -
X Default Paper Size A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
■ Paper Tray Settings
X Default Output Tray*6 Varies depending on the
● Tray Settings machine configuration
X Tray 1 Plain, A4 (8-1/2" x 11") X Default Paper Type Plain Paper
X Tray 2 Plain, A3 (11" x 17") X Line Thickness 5
X Tray 3 Varies depending on the X 2-Sided Print 1-Sided
machine configuration
X Colour Mode B/W
X Tray 4
X N-Up Print 1-Up
X Tray 5
● PCL Settings*1
X Bypass Tray Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)
X PCL Symbol Set Setting 3. PC-8
● Paper Type Registration
X PCL Font Setting Internal Font, 0. Courier
X User Type 1 -
X PCL Line Feed Code 0. CR=CR:LF=LF:FF=FF
X User Type 2 -
X Wide A4 Disable
X User Type 3 -
● Postscript Settings*2
X User Type 4 -
X Print PS Errors Disable
X User Type 5 -

MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 1

 Factory default setting (4) System Settings (Administrator) List
Item
Page
■ Document Filing Control Item Factory default setting
● Custom Folder Registration ■ User Control
X Folder Name - ● User Authentication Setting
X Initial - X User Authentication Disable
X Password - X Authentication Method Setting Authenticate a User by
X User Name - Login Name and
Password
● Amend/Delete Custom Folder -
X Device Account Mode Setting
■ USB-Device Check -
◆ Device Account Mode Disable
■ User Control*7
◆ User Selection -
● Amend User Information -
● User Registration
*1: In some countries and regions, the printer expansion kit must be X Store -
installed. X Amend/Delete -
*2: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed. X Delete All Users -
● Pages Limit Group Registration -
*3: In some countries and regions, the facsimile expansion kit or
● Actions when the Limit of Pages for Job is Stopped when the
the Internet fax expansion kit or the network scanner expansion kit
Output Jobs Limit of Pages is Reached
must be installed.
● Authority Group Registration -
*4: In some countries and regions, the network scanner expansion ● Favourite Operation Group -
kit must be installed. Registration
*5: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed. ● User Count Display -
*6: When a right tray is installed. ● User Count Reset -
● User Information Print
*7: When user authentication is enabled and a user without the
X All User Information Print -
authority to configure the system settings (administrator) has
X User List -
logged in. (Excluding factory stored users.)
X List of Number of Pages Used -
*8: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
X Page Limit Group List -
*9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed. X Authority Group List -
X Favourite Operation Group List -
B. System settings (Administrator)
● The Number of User Name Displayed 8
(1) When User Authentication is not Enabled Setting
1) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. ● A Warning when Login Fails Disable
● Disable Printing by Invalid User Disable
2) Touch the [Admin Password] key.
● Default Network Authentication Server -
3) Log in. Setting
(1) Touch the [Password] key and enter the administrator pass- ■ Energy Save
word. ● Toner Save in Printer Mode*1 Disable
(2) Touch the[OK] key. ● Toner Save in Copy Mode*2 Disable
● Auto Power Shut-Off Enable
4) Configure the desired system settings.
● Auto Power Shut-Off Timer 60 min.
(2) Login by login name and password (and e-mail ● Preheat Mode Setting 15 min.
address*) ■ Operation Settings
1) Touch the [Login Name] key. ● Keys Touch Sound
X Keys Touch Sound Middle
* If login name / password / e-mail address is selected for the
X Keys Touch Sound at Initial Point Disable
login method, [E-mail Address] will appear under the [Login
● Auto Clear Setting 60 sec.
Name] key.
X Cancel Timer Disable
2) Touch the [Admin Login] key.
● Message Time Setting 6 sec.
3) Touch the [Password] key and enter the administrator pass- ● Display Language Setting English
word. ● Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disable
4) Touch the [OK] key. ● Disabling of Bypass Printing Disable
5) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. ● Key Operation Setting 0.0 sec.
X Disable Auto Key Repeat Disable
* This step is not necessary if you are logging in after you
● Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disable
pressed the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
● Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode*3 Disable
6) Configure the desired system settings.
Customize Key Setting
(3) Login by user number X Copy
1) Touch the [Admin Login] key. ◆ Customize 1 Special Modes
◆ Customize 2 File
2) Touch the [Password] key and enter the administrator pass-
◆ Customize 3 Quick File
word.
X Scanner*4
3) Touch the [OK] key. ◆ Customize 1 Special Modes
4) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. ◆ Customize 2 File
* This step is not necessary if you are logging in after you ◆ Customize 3 Quick File
pressed the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. X Internet Fax*5
5) Configure the desired system settings. ◆ Customize 1 Special Modes
◆ Customize 2 File
Touch the items that you wish to configure and select the
◆ Customize 3 Quick File
desired settings.
X Fax*6
◆ Customize 1 Special Modes
◆ Customize 2 File

MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 2

 Item Factory default setting Item Factory default setting
◆ Customize 3 Quick File ● Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disable
X USB Memory Scan ● Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Disable
◆ Customize 1 Special Modes Copy
◆ Customize 2 Erase ● Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disable
◆ Customize 3 Suppress BG ● Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Disable
X Data Entry Supplied the Paper
◆ Customize 1 Special Modes ● Initial Colour Balance Setting Factory Default State
◆ Customize 2 File ● Auto Colour Calibration -
◆ Customize 3 Quick File ● B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode Disable
■ Device Control for Document Feeder*3
● Original Size Detector Setting ● B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass Enable
X Original Detection Size Varies depending on ■ Network Settings
Combination country and region ● IP Address Setting DHCP
X Cancel Detection at Document Disable ● Enable TCP/IP Enable
Glass ● Enable NetWare Enable
● Disabling of Document Feeder*3 Disable ● Enable EtherTalk Enable
● Original Feeding Mode*3 All Disabled ● Enable NetBEUI Enable
● Disabling of Duplex Disable ● Reset the NIC -
● Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*7 Disable ● Ping Command -
● Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8 Disable ■ Printer Settings
● Disabling of Tray Setting Disable ● Default Settings
● Disabling of Finisher*9 Disable X Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enable
● Disabling of Offset Disable X Prohibit Test Page Printing Disable
● Disabling of Stapler*9 Disable X A4/Letter Size Auto Change Varies depending on
● Saddle Stitch Position Adjust*10 0.0 mm country and region.
● Disabling of Punch*11 Disable X Print Density Level
● Disabling of Colour Mode*12 Disable ◆ Colour 3
● Auto Paper Selection Setting Plain Paper ◆ B/W 3
● Registration Adjustment X Bypass Tray Settings
X Auto Adjustment - ◆ Enable Detected Paper Size in Disable
● Optimization of the Hard Disk - Bypass Tray
● Tandem Connection Setting ◆ Enable Selected Paper Type in Enable
Bypass Tray
X IP Address of Slave Machine 0.0.0.0
◆ Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Disable
X Port Number 50001
Paper Select
X Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disable
X Job Spool Queuing Enable
X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disable
● Interface Settings
● Clear All Job Log Data -
X Hexadecimal Dump Mode*1 Disable
● Detect Standard in Auto Colour Mode 3
X I/O Timeout 20 sec.
■ Copy Settings
X Enable USB Port Enable
● Initial Status Settings
X USB Port Emulation Switching*1 PCL (Auto*13)
X Colour Mode Full Colour
X Enable Network Port Enable
X Paper Tray Varies depending on the
X Network Port Emulation PCL (Auto*13)
machine configuration
Switching*1
X Exposure Type Auto
X Port Switching Method Switch at End of Job
X Copy Ratio 1
● Colour Adjustments
X 2-Sided Copy 1-Side to 1-Side
X Auto Colour Calibration -
X Output -
■ Image Send Settings*14
● Exposure Adjustment
● Operation Settings
X Colour
X Default Display Setting
◆ Document Glass 5
◆ Mode Scanner*4 (Fax*6)
◆ Document Feeder 5
◆ Hold settings for a while after Disable
X B/W
scanning has been completed
◆ Document Glass 5
◆ Switch Automatically to Copy Disable
◆ Document Feeder 5 Mode Screen
● Rotation Copy Setting Enable X Initial Resolution Setting
● Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios ◆ Apply the Resolution Set when Disable
X Reduction - Stored
X Enlargement - ◆ Scanner*4 200x200dpi
● Setting a Maximum Number of Copies 999 ◆ Internet Fax*5 200x100dpi
● Initial Margin Shift Setting ◆ Fax*6 Standard
X Side-1 10 mm (1/2") X Default Exposure Settings
X Side-2 ◆ Exposure Auto
● Erase Width Adjustment ◆ Original Image Type Text
X Edge 10 mm (1/2") ◆ Moiré Reduction Disable
X Centre X Must Input Next Address Key at Disable
● Card Shot Settings Broadcast Setting
X Original Size X: 86 mm (3-3/8") Y: 54 X Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle
mm (2-1/8") X The Number of File Name/Subject/ 6
X Fit to Page Disable Body Keys Displayed Setting
● Automatic Saddle Stitch*10 Enable X The Number of Direct Address 6
● Initial Tab Copy Setting 10 mm (1/2") Keys Displayed Setting

MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 3

 Item Factory default setting Item Factory default setting
X Disable Switching of Display Order Disable ◆ Internet Fax Own Name and -
X Hold Setting for Received Data Print Address Set
◆ Received Data Hold Disable ◆ Auto Wake Up Print Enable
◆ Password Setting - ◆ Internet Fax Speaker Volume -
X Settings to Disable the Registration of Destination Settings
◆ Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel • Receive Signal Middle
• Group Disable • Communication Error Signal Middle
• E-mail Disable ◆ Original Print on Transaction Print Out Error Report
• Internet Fax Disable Report Only
• Fax Disable ◆ Transaction Report Print Select Setting
◆ Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*15 • Single Sending Print Out Error Report
Only
• Group Disable
• Broadcasting Print Out All Report
• E-mail Disable
• Receiving No Printed Report
• FTP Disable
◆ Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disable
• Desktop Disable
X Internet Fax Send Settings
• Network Folder Disable
◆ Internet Fax Reception Report Disable
• Internet Fax Disable
On/Off Setting
• Fax Disable
◆ Internet Fax Reception Report 1 Hour
◆ Disable Registration Using Disable
Request Timeout Setting
Network Scan Tools*15
◆ Number of Resend Times at 2
X Settings to Disable Transmission
Reception Error
◆ Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Disable
◆ Maximum Size of E-mail Unlimited
Send Mode
Attachments
◆ Disable Selection from the Address Book
◆ Rotation Sending Setting All Enable
• E-mail Disable
◆ Printing Page Number at Enable
• FTP Disable Receiver
• Desktop Disable X Internet Fax Receive Settings
• Network Folder Disable ◆ Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enable
• Internet Fax Disable ◆ Duplex Reception Setting Disable
• Fax Disable ◆ Set Address for Data -
◆ Disable Direct Entry Forwarding
• E-mail Disable ◆ Letter Size RX Reduce Print Disable
• Internet Fax Disable ◆ POP3 Communication Timeout 60 sec.
• Fax Disable Setting
◆ Disable PC-Internet Fax Disable ◆ Reception Check Interval 5 min.
Transmission*5 Setting
◆ Disable PC-Fax Transmission*6 Disable ◆ Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name All Invalid
● Scan Settings*4 Setting
X Default Sender Set - ◆ Internet Fax Output Setting*16 Varies depending on the
X Default Colour Mode Settings machine configuration
◆ Colour Mode Auto, Greyscale ■ Document Filing Settings
◆ B/W Mode Mono 2 ● Default Mode Settings Sharing Mode
◆ Disable Change of B/W Setting Disable ● Sort Method Setting Date
in Auto Mode ● Document Output Options
X Initial File Format Setting X Print
◆ B/W ◆ Copy Enable
• File Type PDF ◆ Printer Enable
• Compression Mode MMR (G4) ◆ Scan Send Disable
• Specified Pages per File Disable ◆ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC- Disable
◆ Colour/Grey Internet Fax)
• File Type PDF ◆ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disable
• Compression Ratio Medium ◆ Scan to HDD Enable
• Specified Pages per File Disable X Scan Send*4
X Compression Mode at Broadcasting ◆ Copy Disable
◆ Black & White MMR (G4) ◆ Scan Send Enable
◆ Colour/Greyscale Medium ◆ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC- Disable
X Maximum Size of E-mail Unlimited Internet Fax)
Attachments ◆ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disable
X Maximum Size of E-mail Disable ◆ Scan to HDD Enable
Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network X Internet Fax Send*5
Folder) ◆ Copy Disable
X Default Address Setting Disable ◆ Scan Send Disable
X Bcc Setting ◆ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC- Enable
◆ Enable Bcc Disable Internet Fax)
◆ Display Bcc Address on the Job Disable ◆ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disable
Status Screen ◆ Scan to HDD Disable
X Disable Scan Function X Fax Send*6
PC Scan Disable ◆ Copy Disable
USB Memory Scan Disable ◆ Scan Send Disable
X Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disable ◆ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC- Disable
● Internet Fax Settings*5 Internet Fax)
X Internet Fax Default Settings ◆ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Enable

MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 4

 Item Factory default setting Item Factory default setting
◆ Scan to HDD Disable X Disabling of Offset Disable
● Administrator Authority Setting X Disabling of Stapler*9 Disable
X Delete File Disable X Disabling of Punch*11 Disable
X Delete Folder Disable X Disabling of Colour Mode*12 Disable
● Default Colour Mode Settings X Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disable
X Colour Auto X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disable
X B/W Mono 2 ● Copy Settings
● Default Exposure Settings X Disable Copy in Different Size/ Disable
X Exposure Auto Direction
X Original Image Type Text X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disable
X Moiré Reduction Disable X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Disable
● Initial Resolution Setting 600x600dpi Copy
● Colour Data Compression Ratio Medium X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disable
Setting ● Printer settings
● Default Output Tray*16 Varies depending on the X Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enable
machine configuration X Prohibit Test Page Printing Disable
● Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle X Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Disable
● Delete All Quick Files Paper Select
X Delete - ● Image Send Settings
X Delete quick files at power up. Enable X Disable Switching of Display Order Disable
(Protected file excluded) X Disable Scan Function
● Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disable ◆ PC Scan Disable
● Batch Print Settings ◆ USB Memory Scan Disable
X Selection of [All Users] is not Enable X Settings to Disable the Registration of Destination
allowed. ◆ Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel
X Selection of [User Unknown] is not Enable • Group Disable
allowed. • E-mail Disable
■ List Print (Administrator) • Internet Fax Disable
● Administrator Settings List • Fax Disable
X Copy - ◆ Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*15
X Print - • Group Disable
X Image Send*14 - • E-mail Disable
X Document Filing - • FTP Disable
X Security - • Desktop Disable
X Common - • Network Folder Disable
X All Administrator Settings List - • Internet Fax Disable
● Image Sending Activity Report*14 • Fax Disable
X Image Sending Activity Report - ◆ Disable Registration Using Disable
(Scanner) Network Scan Tools*15
X Image Sending Activity Report - X Settings to Disable Transmission
(Internet Fax) ◆ Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Disable
X Image Sending Activity Report - Send Mode
(Fax) ◆ Disable selection from the
● Anti Junk Fax Number List*6 - Address Book
● Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name List*5 - • E-mail Disable
● Inbound Routing List*14 - • FTP Disable
● Document Admin List*14 - • Desktop Disable
● Web Setting List*15 - • Network Folder Disable
● Metadata Set List*17 • Internet Fax Disable
■ Security Settings • Fax Disable
● SSL Settings ◆ Disable Direct Entry
X HTTPS Disable • E-mail Disable
X IPP-SSL Disable • Internet Fax Disable
■ Enable/Disable Settings • Fax Disable
● User Control ◆ Disable PC-Internet Fax Disable
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disable Transmission*5
● Operation Settings ◆ Disable PC-Fax Transmission*6 Disable
X Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disable ● Document Filing Settings
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disable X Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disable
X Disabling of Bypass Printing Disable X Batch Print Settings
X Disable Auto Key Repeat Disable ◆ Selection of [All Users] is not Enable
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disable allowed.
X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disable ◆ Selection of [User Unknown] is Enable
● Device Control not allowed.
X Disabling of Document Feeder*3 Disable ■ Change Administrator Password See "TO THE
X Disabling of Duplex Disable ADMINISTRATOR OF
X Disabling of Large Capacity Disable THE MACHINE" in the
Cassette*7 Safety Guide.
X Disabling of Optional Paper Disable ■ Product Key*18
Drawer*8 ● Network Scanner Expansion Kit -
X Disabling of Tray Setting Disable ● Printer Expansion Kit -
X Disabling of Finisher*9 Disable ● PS3 Expansion Kit -

MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 5

 Item Factory default setting Code Code content
● Internet Fax Expansion Kit - PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
● E-mail Alert and Status - PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
● Application Integration Module - PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual 2 feed paper)
● Serial Number - PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
■ Storing/calling of System Settings PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
● Restore Factory Defaults - PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
● Store Current Configuration - PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
● Restore Configuration - PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
*1: In some countries and regions, the printer expansion kit must be
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
installed. paper)
*2: This function is not available in some countries and regions. PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
*3: When an automatic document feeder is installed. PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
*4: In some countries and regions, the network scanner expansion PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
kit must be installed. PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
*5: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
*6: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed. PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
*7: When a large capacity tray is installed. PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
*8: When a paper drawer is installed. PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
*9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed. PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
*10: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
*11: When a punch module is installed. POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM
*12: When a colour-related problem has occurred. POD2_S POD2 remaining JAM
*13: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed. POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM
*14: In some countries and regions, the facsimile expansion kit or POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM
the Internet fax expansion kit or the network scanner expansion kit APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM
must be installed. APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM
*15: When network connection is enabled.
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM
*16: When a right tray is installed. TRAY3 Cassette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed JAM
*17: When the application integration module is installed. DPFD1_N4 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
*18: Depending on the peripheral devices installed, it may not be DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
possible to use some settings. DPFD1_S4 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
TRAY4 Cassette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed JAM
2. Paper JAM code DPFD2_S4 DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD not-
A. JAM cause code list reached)
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
(1) PCU JAM cause LCC Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
Code Code content
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM
NO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
FJPID_N Interface transport inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
FJPID_S Interface transport inlet port sensor remaining JAM
TRAY1 Cassette 1 paper feed JAM (CPFD1 not-reached
FJPOD_N Interface transport outlet sensor not-reached JAM
JAM)
FJPOD_S Interface transport outlet sensor remaining JAM
CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
FED_N Finisher inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
FED_S Finisher inlet port sensor remaining JAM
CPFD1_N3 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
FFPD_N Finisher saddle not-reached JAM
CPFD1_N4 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
FFPD_S Finisher saddle remaining JAM
CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
FEXIT_S Finisher bundle exit remaining JAM
CPFD1_S3 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
FSTPL Staple JAM
CPFD1_S4 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
FPNCH Punch JAM
TRAY2 Cassette 2 paper feed JAM (CPFD2 not-reached
FDOP Finisher door open
JAM)
FIN_TIME Finisher paper clearance abnormality JAM
CPFD2_N3 CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD2_N4 CPFD2 Not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
CPFD2_S2 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
CPFD2_S3 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD2_S4 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)

MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 6

(2) SCU JAM cause

Code Code content

NO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM
SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM
SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM
SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM
SPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached JAM
SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAM
SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM
SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM
SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM
SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM
SPRDMD_S SPRDMD remaining JAM
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification wait timeout
SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM

MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 7

[A]
MX2700N
EXTERNAL OUTFIT (1) Front cabinet
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1) Remove the front cabinet band and the front cabinet hinge, and
remove the front cabinet.
1. Disassembly and assembly
A. Cabinet

(5)
(17)
(11)
(9)
(12)
(1)

(13)

(18) (10)

(2) Rear cabinet

(15) 1) Remove the screws, and remove the rear cabinet.
(8)
(7) (6)

(14)
(2)
(16) (4) 2

(3)

Parts
(1) Front cabinet
(2) Rear cabinet
(3) Left cabinet rear lower
(4) Left cabinet
(3) Left cabinet rear lower
(5) Upper cabinet right
(6) Upper cabinet left. (4) Left cabinet
(7) Upper cabinet rear cover 1) Remove the paper feed tray 1 and 2.
(8) Upper cabinet rear
(9) Front cabinet upper 2
(10) Right cabinet front
(11) Right connection cabinet
(12) Right cabinet rear cover
(13) Right cabinet rear
(14) Paper exit cover
(15) Paper exit tray cabinet
(16) Left cabinet rear
(17) Operation panel base plate
(18) Frame cover
1

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL OUTFIT A – 1

2) Remove the desk connection cover (A). Remove the screws,
then remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet
(C).
(8) Upper cabinet rear
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws, and remove the
grounding wire. Remove the screws, and remove the upper
cabinet rear.

A 4

1 3

(5) Upper cabinet right

(6) Upper cabinet left. (9) Front cabinet upper
1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
front cabinet upper.
the table glass (C).

2 3
C B
1

2) Remove the screws, and remove the upper cabinet right (A) (10) Right cabinet front
and the upper cabinet left (B).
(11) Right connection cabinet
B (12) Right cabinet rear cover
A
(13) Right cabinet rear
1) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to Front Cabinet
Upper.)
2) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.

(7) Upper cabinet rear cover

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the
screws, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B).

A
1
1
2

B 3
2

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL OUTFIT A – 2

3) Remove the screws, and remove the right cabinet front (A). (17) Operation panel base plate
Remove the screws, and remove the right connection cabinet 1) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to Front Cabinet
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screws, Upper.)
and remove the right cabinet rear cover (D). Remove the desk
2) Remove the screws, and remove the operation panel base
connection cover (E). Remove the screws, and remove the
plate.
right cabinet rear (F).

B 2

1
6 D

A 4

C
F

5
E
(18) Frame cover
1) Remove the waste toner box, and open the drum positioning
(14) Paper exit cover
unit. (Refer to Process Drum Unit in Image Process Section.)
(15) Paper exit tray cabinet 2) Remove the front cabinet. (Refer to Front Cabinet)
(16) Left cabinet rear 3) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to Front Cabinet
1) Remove the paper exit cover (A). Open the front cabinet and Upper.)
remove the screws. 4) Remove the screws, and remove the frame cover.
Remove the screws, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet
(B).
Remove the screws, and remove the left cabinet rear (C).

C 4 2 2

MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL OUTFIT A – 3

 

CN125 CN1 CN4

D-GND 30 30 D-GND /YL(Y1) 1
CN_CHK_OUT 29 29 CN_CHK_OUT XH(X1) 2
LCD_CLK+ 28 28 LCD_CLK+
MX2700N

YH(Y2) 3
LCD_CLK- 27 27 LCD_CLK- /XL(X2) 4
D-GND 26 26 D-GND 04FM-1.0SP-1.9-GW-TF
LCD_DAT2+ 25 25 LCD_DAT2+
LCD_DAT2- 24 24 LCD_DAT2- CN3
D-GND 23 23 D-GND VO 1 15 VO
LCD_DAT1+ 22 22 LCD_DAT1+ LP 2 14 LP
LCD_DAT1- 21 21 LCD_DAT1- D-GND 3 13 D-GND
D-GND 20 20 D-GND CP 4 12 CP
LCD_DAT0+ 19 19 LCD_DAT0+ D-GND 5 11 D-GND
LCD_DAT0- 18 18 LCD_DAT0- M 6 10 M

LCD
D-GND 17 17 D-GND 3.3V_EXT 7 9 3.3V_EXT
DISP 16 16 DISP D0 8 8 D0
3.3V_EXT 15 15 3.3V_EXT D1 9 7 D1

TOUCH PANEL
VEEON 14 14 VEEON D-GND 10 6 D-GND
VCONT 13 13 VCONT D2 11 5 D2
AVCC 12 12 AVCC D3 12 4 D3

LVDS-P PWB
SC_TEMP 11 11 SC_TEMP D-GND 13 3 D-GND
P-GND 10 10 P-GND DISP 14 2 DISP
24V_EXT 9 9 24V_EXT
[B] OPERATION PANEL

VEE 15 1 VEE
NC 8 8 NC 52746-1570
/CCFT1 7 7 /CCFT1
CN_CHK_IN(LCD) 6 6 CN_CHK_IN(LCD) CN2 CN1
X2CN 5 5 X2CN /CCFT 1 3 /CCFT
Y2CN 4 4 Y2CN D-GND 2 2 D-GND
X1CN 3 3 X1CN 24V_EXT 3 1 24V_EXT
Y1CN 2 2 Y1CN S3B-PH-SM4-TB S3B-PH-K-S
D-GND 1 1 D-GND
52030-3029 52271-3090
CN2

BACK LIGHT
CCFT+ 1
/CCFT 2

PWB
S02(8.0)B-BHS

LCD INVERTOR
CN135 CN1

SCN-CNT PWB
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

D-GND 26 1 D-GND
3.3V 25 2 3.3V
5VN 24 3 5VN
D-GND 23 4 D-GND

PWRSW
PD 22 5 PD
PDSEL0 21 6 PDSEL0

PWB
PDSEL1 20 7 PDSEL1
PDSEL2 19 8 PDSEL2

MFP OPE-P
/KEYIN 18 9 /KEYIN
SEG0 17 10 SEG0
SEG1 16 11 SEG1
SEG2 15 12 SEG2 CN2

MX-2300/2700 N/G OPERATION PANEL B – 1

/F0 14 13 /F0 PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0
OCSW

/F1 13 14 /F1 PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1

5GTXKEG/CPWCN

/F2 12 15 /F2 PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2

/F3 11 16 /F3 5VN 4 4 5VN
/BZR 10 17 /BZR PD 5 5 PD
D-GND 9 18 D-GND D-GND 6 6 D-GND
n PWRSW 8 19 n PWRSW B6B-PH-SM3-TB
n WU_KEY 7 20 n WU_KEY
n INFO_LED 6 21 n INFO_LED CN3 CN1
POW_LED 5 22 POW_LED n PWRSW 1 3 n PWRSW
WU_LED 4 23 WU_LED D-GND 2 2 D-GND
D-GND 3 24 D-GND D-GND 3 1 D-GND
5VO 2 25 5VO S3B-PH-K-S
D-GND 1 26 D-GND
52030-2629 52610-2671

CN136
5VEXT 1 1 5VEXT
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
OCSW 3 3 OCSW
24VEXT 4
/SIZE_LED1 5 24VEXT
/SIZE_LED2 6 /SIZE_LED1
B6P-PH-K-S /SIZE_LED2
F-GND
FG
 Signal Name Function/Operation
OCSW Original cover SW Timing switch for document size detection
PWRSW Operaton panel power supply switch Outputs the DC power supply ON/OFF control signal.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 MFP OPE-P PWB
2 LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB
3 Document detection light receiving PWB
4 Document detection light emitting PWB
Detects the key pressed on the operation panel.
Drives LCD and the backlight, and controls the touch-panel.
Receives the light from the document detection light emitting PWB, and detects the
document size.
Emits light for document size detection.

2. Operational descriptions (1) Operation panel unit

1) Remove the paper exit cover and the upper cabinet left.
A. Outline 2) Remove the front cabinet upper and the operation panel base
The operation panel unit is composed of the MFP OPE-P PWB, the plate.
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB, the LCD unit, and the operation keys,
3) Remove each cables and the grounding sheet.
and is used to operate the machine and to set and display the
machine status.
The MFP OPE-P PWB is connected to the document detection light
receiving PWB for detecting the document size. It receives light
from the document detection light emitting PWB attached to the
rear frame, detecting the document size.
The power switch of the operation panel supplies the ON/OFF con-
trol signal of the DC power source.

3. Disassembly and assembly

A. Operation panel section
Unit Parts
(1) Operation panel unit a LCD INV PWB 4) Remove the operation panel unit.
b LVDS PWB
c LCD module
d Touch panel
e POWER SW PWB
f MFP OPE-P PWB

(1)

(1)-b

(1)-d
(1)-a (1)-f
(1)-c

(1)-e
a. LCD INV PWB

b. LVDS PWB
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LCD INV PWB (A). Remove the LVDS PWB (B).

B
A

MX-2300/2700 N/G OPERATION PANEL B – 2

c. LCD module 3) Remove the touch panel.
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LCD holder.

e. POWER SW PWB
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the POWER SW PWB.

3) Remove the LCD module.

f. MFP OPE-P PWB

1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the POWER SW PWB.

d. Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LCD unit. Remove the flat cable.

3) Remove the grounding sheet, and remove the MFP OPE-P

PWB.

MX-2300/2700 N/G OPERATION PANEL B – 3

[C] SCANNER SECTION
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

MHPS

6 9
3
7
MIM

CLI
3
1
2
8

CL CCD PWB
D-GND
MHPS

1
2

CN3 501190-4017 CN1 501190-2017

5V

INVERTOR
CLKP1_OUT+
CCD_CLK1+
CCD_CLK2+

AD_BLKCLP
/RES_CCDAD

AD_MCLK-

AD_MCLK+
/LVDS_STBY

AD_WRSO
CCD_CLK2-

AD_CLPIN
CCD_CLK1-

CLKP1_OUT-
CCD_CP+

CCD_RS+

SH_OUT+
AD_SCLK
CCD_CP-

CCD_RS-

SH_OUT-
AD_RDSI

CCD_SH
AD_SEN

PWB

TCLK+
AGND
AGND
AGND

AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND
AGND

TCLK-
AGND
AGND
A3.3V
A12V

TC+

TD+
A5V

TE+

TB+

TA+
TC-

TD-
TE-

TB-

TA-
3
2
1

P-GND
P-GND

24VPD
24VPD
CL

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5
4
3
2
1

CCD_CLK2+
/RES_CCDAD

CCD_CLK1+
/LVDS_STBY

AD_MCLK-
AD_BLKCLP

CLKP1_OUT+
AD_MCLK+
AD_WRSO
CCD_CLK2-

AD_CLPIN
CCD_CLK1-
CCD_CP+

CCD_RS+

SH_OUT+
AD_SCLK

CLKP1_OUT-
CCD_CP-

CCD_RS-

SH_OUT-
AD_RDSI

CCD_SH
AD_SEN
D-GND

TCLK+
P-GND
P-GND

24VPD
24VPD

MiM_/A
MiM_/B
AGND
AGND
AGND

AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND
AGND

AGND
AGND

TCLK-
AGND
AGND

MiM_A
MiM_B
MHPS

A3.3V
A12V

TC+

TD+
A5V

TE+

TB+

TA+
TC-

TD-
TE-

TB-

TA-
CL
5V

CN134 CN130 CN148 501190-4017 CN147 501190-2017 CN137

SCN-CNT PWB

Signal Name Function/Operation

CLI Scanner lamp Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire.
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
4 Reflector Condenses the copy lamp light.
5 No. 2 mirror Inducts the document image into the No.3 mirror.
6 No. 3 mirror Inducts the document image into the lens.
7 Lens Reduces the document image (light), and project it on CCD.
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor power to the belt.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 1

2. Operational descriptions
A. Outline
This section functions and operates as follows: B
G
1) The copy lamp radiates light onto the document, and the
R
reflected light is scanned by the three line (RGB) CCD element
and then converted into image signals (analog).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).

B. Detail description
(1) Optical section drive R
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner G
motor (MIM) through the belt, the drive pulley, and the wire to drive B
the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by the
drive wires. (Image data per 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(2) Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
R G B
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal Red component of Green component of Blue component of
image data image data image data
sent from the scanner control PWB.
(3) Image scan/color separation (4) Image signal A/D conversion
Light is radiated to a document by the scanner lamp, and the 1) Each image signal (analog) of RGB is converted into 10bit dig-
brightness of the reflected light is received by the three line (RGB) ital signal by the A/D converter.
CCD element and converted into (analog) image signals. Each color pixel has 10bit information (256 gradations).
Each color component of RGB is separately extracted from the 2) Each 10bit digital image signal of RGB is sent to the image
document image by the three lines (RGB) of the CCD elements. process section.
The red CCD extracts the red components from the document
image, the green CCD the green components, and the blue CCD
the blue components. This operation is called Color Separation. CCD PWB
The CCD element, appeared as one unit, but has three separate
rows of CCD elements drive each for (RGB).
R IC R ADC
Scanning of a document in the main scanning direction is per-
formed by the CCD elements. Scanning of a document in the sub
scanning direction is performed by shifting the scanner unit position 3 G IC G ADC
with the scanner motor. CCD
Document images are optically reduced by the lens and projected
to the CCD elements. B IC B ADC
Scanning resolution is 600 dpi.

R
Transfer IC G
B
R G B

(5) Zooming operation

Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically
but by the image process technology (software).

MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 2

 3. Disassembly and assembly (1) Scanner unit
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
A. Optical system rear.
2) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
(1)-o
3) Remove the upper cabinet right and the upper cabinet left.
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the snap band.
(1)-n
(1)-b

(1)-o

(1)-m (1)
(1)-a
(1)-k
(1)-f
(1)-e
(1)-h (1)-l 5) Remove the screws, and remove the scanner unit.
(1)-p

(1)-j
(1)-q
(1)-g
(1)-f
(1)-p
(1)-c (1)-d
(1)-i

Unit Parts Maintenance

(1) Scanner unit a Table glass {
b SPF glass {
c Lens {
d CCD {
e Reflector {
f Mirrors {
g Lamp {
h CL inverter PWB
i CCD unit
j Scanner motor
k Scanner home position
sensor
l Original cover SW
m Document detection light
receiving PWB
a. Table glass
n Document detection light
emitting PWB
b. SPF glass
o Rails ✩
p Drive wire ✕
1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
q Drive belt ✕
the table glass (C).

2 3
C B
1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 3

c. Lens 4) Shift the lamp unit to the right end. Loosen the screws and
remove the wire.
d. CCD
1) Remove the glass holder and the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box cover (A) and the lens cover (B). 2
3

B
5) While rotating the lamp unit, lift the lamp unit. Remove the har-
ness holder and the flat cable. Remove the lamp unit.

3) Clean the lens (A) and CCD (B).

3
A

e. Reflector
6) Clean the mirrors.
f. Mirrors
1) Remove the glass holder and the table glass.
2) Shift the lamp unit and the mirror unit.
3) Clean the reflector and No. 2 and 3 mirrors.

g. Lamp

h. CL inverter PWB
1) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
2) Remove the lamp unit.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the lamp.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 4

4) Remove the CL inverter PWB. k. Scanner home position sensor
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the scanner home posi-
tion sensor.

i. CCD unit
1) Remove the dark box. Disconnect the connector and remove
the CCD unit.
l. Original cover SW
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the document cover
SW.

j. Scanner motor
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the scanner motor.

m. Document detection light receiving PWB

1) Remove the operation panel base plate.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the document detection
light receiving PWB.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 5

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

n. Document detection light emitting PWB p. Drive wire

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear.
q. Drive belt
2) Remove the screws, and remove the light emitting unit.
1 * Install the drive wire in the sequence shown in the figure below.
Wind the drive wire 10 turns around the winding pulley.
The 9th turn must be fixed with a screw.

7
6
2
4 5
1
3

3) Remove the document detection light emitting PWB 10 9 8 1

4 6
5 1 8 9 10

2
1
3

When moving the copy lamp unit manually for cleaning or adjusting
the scanner section and the mirror section, be sure to turn OFF the
main power source (the power switch inside the front cover) and
confirm that the power LED on the operation panel is OFF.
If the copy lamp unit is manually moved with the main power ON, the
trouble code "F6-30" may occur.
If the trouble code "F6-30" is not canceled by turning OFF/ON the
main power, refer to the Service Manual (FAX self diagnostics and
the trouble codes).

o. Rails

MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 6

4. Maintenance
A. Optical Section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Block/Item No.
No. Parts name supply,
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K (Only the
mechanical parts
replacement parts
are described.)
1 Mirror/lens/ Mechanism parts { { { { { { { { { { { { {
reflector/CCD
2 Table glass/SPF { { { { { { { { { { { { {
glass
3 Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Specified position
5 Drive belt/drive ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
wire

2 4

1
4

5
1

MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 7

[D] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

CN1
PSFMA// 2 1 PSFMA//
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
DRIVER PSFMB// 3 3 PSFMB//
MAIN PWB PSFMA/
INT24V1
1
6
4
5
PSFMA/
INT24V1
PSFMB/ 4 6 PSFMB/
B6B-PH-K-S

CN9
INT24V2 3
AC PWB B3P-PH-K-S

CN17 P SM18P R
/CLUM2 8 16 /CLUM2 16
P-GND 9 15 P-GND 15
/CLUM1 6 14 /CLUM1 14
P-GND 7 13 P-GND 13
24V3 14 12 24V3 12
PCU PWB /CPUC2 15 11 /CPUC2 11
24V3 12 10 24V3 10
/CPUC1 13 9 /CPUC1 9
24V3 10 8 24V3 8
15 24V3 15 CN26 /CPFC 11 7 /CPFC 7
31 /MPGS 31 5 /MPGS
30 /MPFS 30 4 /MPFS
3 FG-OUT
14 24V3 14 7
CPFM_LD 2 5 CPFM_LD 5 5V
28 /MPUC 28 6 /MPUC 4 6
/CPFM_D 1 4 /CPFM_D CPFM_LD
13 24V3 13 5
/CPFM_CK 4 3 /CPFM_CK 3 /CPFM_D
P QR/P4 32PIN S 3 24V3 2 4 /CPFM_CK
P-GND 5 2 P-GND
B32B-PHDSS-B B32B-PHDSS-B 1 INT24V2 1 2 P-GND
6
5
3
4
2
1

1 INT24V2
B7P-PH-K-S
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3

PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
DF11-6DP-SP1 1 24V3 2
2 /MPUC 1
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-Ha P SM2P R
8 24V3 1 1 24V3 1
CN3(2/2) 7 /MPFS 2 2 /MPFS 2
HPDET 7 6 HPDET 3 1
2
HPDET
D-GND
PFM
D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VLED7
5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5
PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
2 /MPGS 7 4 /MPGS 2
3 24V3 6 5 24V3 1
1 5VLED7 5
2 D-GND 4
MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
R
2
1

MPUC
SM2P
3
2
1
/MPGS
24V3
1
3
5
2
4
6
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7

5VLED7
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND

D-GND
MPFD
P
2
1

DF11-6DP-SP2

1 4 CPFM

5 MPFS
RIGHT MPFD
DOOR I/F 3
PWB 2 TH_D/HUD_M
MPED

MTOP1
MPGS MPWD MTOP2
MPLD

CN3(1/2) PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H

MPLD 16 12 MPLD 3 6 MPLD 4 1 MPLD
MPLD2 13 14 MPLD2 1 5 D-GND 5 2 D-GND
5VLED12 18 11 5VLED12 4 4 5VLED12 6 3 5VLED12

5VN 19 10 5VN 5 3 5VN 7 3 5VN

MPWD 20 9 MPWD 6 2 MPWD 8 2 MPWD
1 D-GND 9 1 D-GND

MTOP2 22 8 MTOP2 7 1 MTOP2

2 D-GND
5VLED13 24 7 5VLED13 8 3 5VLED13

MTOP1 25 6 MTOP1 9 1 MTOP1

2 D-GND
5VLED9 27 5 5VLED9 10 3 5VLED9

5VN 28 4 5VN 11 1 5VN

HUD_M 29 3 HUD_M 12 2 HUD_M
D-GND 14 2 D-GND 13 3 D-GND
TH_M 31 1 TH_M 14 4 TH_M
S32B-PHDSS-B
8
6
7
2
4
5
3
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND

DF11-8DP-SP1

MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 1

 Signal name Name Function/Operation
CPFM Paper feed motor Paper feed section drive
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
MPDS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate solenoid Open/Close.
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Manual paper feed tray paper length detection
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Manual paper feed tray paper width detection
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (storage position)
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (pulling-out position)
PFM Transport motor Transport drive between the resist roller and the paper feed section. Transport drive
between the resist roller and the right door section.
TH_M/HUD_M Temperature/humidity detection Detects temperature/humidity.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray)
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray)
4 Torque limiter
5 Transport roller 12 (Drive)
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
Transports paper transported from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8.
Transports paper fed from the manual feed tray to the transport roller 8.

2. Operational descriptions 3. Disassembly and assembly

The paper pickup roller moves up and down to press paper and A. Manual paper feed section
separates the top paper, which is fed to the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section,
and the separation roller prevents double feed.. ON/OFF control of (2)
the pickup roller and the paper feed roller is made by the manual (2)-i
paper feed clutch. Paper is transported to the resist roller by the (2)-e
(2)-g
manual paper transport roller. (2)-b
(2)-a
(2)-h (2)-c
(2)-d (2)-f

(1)-a

(1)-b
(1)-d
(1)-c

(1)-e

(1)

Unit Parts Maintenance

(1) Manual a Temperature/humidity sensors
paper feed b Manual paper feed tray pull-out
tray unit position detector 1
c Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 2
d Manual paper feed tray paper
width detector
e Manual feed paper length
detector
(2) Manual a Paper pickup roller ✕{
paper feed b Paper feed roller ✕{
unit c Separation roller ✕{
d Manual paper feed gate
solenoid
e Transport roller 12 (Drive)
f Manual feed paper entry
detection
g Torque limiter ✕
h Manual feed paper empty
detection
i Paper pickup solenoid

MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 2

(1) Manual paper feed tray unit 5) Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual
1) Open the right door unit. paper feed tray unit.

2) Remove the screws, and remove the connector cover. a. Temperature/humidity sensors
Remove the screws, then remove the ADU inner cover.
b. Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1

c. Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2

d. Manual paper feed tray paper width detector

1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
2) Remove the MF tray upper inside cover.

3) Remove the ADU cabinet F and the ADU cabinet R.

3) Disengage the pawl. Lift the MF tray upper and the MF tray 2,
and disconnect the connector.

4) Temperature/humidity sensor (A), manual paper feed tray pull-

out position detector 1 (B), manual paper feed tray pull-out
4) Remove the MF harness cover and disconnect the connector. position detector 2 (C)

1 A

MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 3

5) Manual paper feed tray paper width detector a. Paper pickup roller

b. Paper feed roller

1) Remove the MF pickup cover.

e. Manual feed paper length detector

1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
2) Remove the MF tray 2.
3) Remove the MF tray 2 lower.
2) Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(B).

4) Manual feed paper length detector

c. Separation roller
1) Remove the MF pickup cover.
2) Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
3) Open the MF lower maintenance cover, remove the separation
roller.

(2) Manual paper feed unit 2

1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed
unit.

MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 4

d. Manual paper feed gate solenoid
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
f. Manual feed paper entry detection
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
3) Remove the transport roller 12 (Drive).
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the MF front plate.
Remove the transport roller 7 (Idle) unit.

3) Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl. Remove

the manual paper feed gate solenoid. 1

5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the sensor mounting

plate.

e. Transport roller 12 (Drive)

1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
3) Remove the parts, and remove the transport roller 12 (Drive).
g. Torque limiter
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
3) Remove the transport roller 12 (Drive).
1
4) Remove the parts, and remove the MF drive plate.
2

2
1

MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 5

5) Remove the E-ring. Remove the shaft and remove the torque i. Paper pickup solenoid
limiter. 1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
1 3) Remove the transport roller 12 (Drive).
3 4) Remove the MF drive plate.
2
5) Remove the MF front plate.
6) Remove the MF upper base paper guide unit.

h. Manual feed paper empty detection

1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF pickup cover and the MFADU paper guide.

7) Remove the MF upper guide supporting plate.

1 1

3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the sensor mounting

plate. 8) Remove the paper pickup solenoid.

MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 6

4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark: Refer to the

Monochrome
Parts Guide. Block/
supply, When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
No. Parts name Item No. (Only the
mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
replacement parts are
parts
described.)
1 Pickup roller Mechanism { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [16]-33)
2 Paper feed roller parts { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [16]-29)
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [15]-37)
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { { { {

4
2 1
3

MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 7

 
MX2700N

CN6 S DF1B-24p P PHNR-12-H+

CPFD1 1 1 CPFD1 1 BU12P-TR-P-H
CLUD1 3 3 CLUD1 3 7 D-GND 6 1 D-GND
CPED1 5 5 CPED1 5 8 CPFD1 5 2 CPFD1
DSW_R 7 7 DSW_R 7 9 5VN 4 3 5VN
CSPD1 9 9 CSPD1 9 1 D-GND 12
1 D-GND
CPWD11 21 11 CPWD11 11 2 CLUD1 11
2 CLUD1
CPWD12 23 13 CPWD12 13 3 5VNPD 10
3 5VNPD
CSS1 11 15 CSS1 15 4 D-GND 9
CSS2 10 16 CSS2 16 5 CPED1 8 1 D-GND
CSS11 13 17 CSS11 17 6 5VNPD 7 2 CPED1
CSS12 15 19 CSS12 19 10 D-GND 3 3 5VNPD
CSS13 17 21 CSS13 21 11 DSW_R 2
1 D-GND

PCU
CSS14 19 23 CSS14 23 12 5VN 1
2 DSW_R
CSS21 12 18 CSS21 18
3 5VN
CSS22 14 20 CSS22 20
CSS23 16 22 CSS23 22 1 D-GND
CSS24 18 24 CSS24 24 2 CSPD1
CPFD2 2 2 CPFD2 2 3 5VNPD
CLUD2 4 4 CLUD2 4
CPED2 6 6 CPED2 6
CSPD2 8 10 CSPD2 10
CPWD21 22 12 CPWD21 12
1 CSS1
CPWD22 24 14 CPWD22 14
2 D-GND
B24B-PHDSS-B
S4P-PH-K-S
CN4
D-GND 3
5VN 20
D-GND 1
5VNPD 18
D-GND 2
5VNPD 19
AC PWB

PCU PWB
D-GND 4
5VN 21
CN9

D-GND 9
CN17
5VNPD 26

24V3
24V3
24V3

/CPFC

P-GND
P-GND
P-GND

/CPUC1
/CPUC2
/CLUM1
/CLUM2
INT24V2

D-GND 10

/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
B3P-PH-K-S

/CPFM_CK
D-GND 11

B32B-PHDSS-B
5
4
1
2
7
6
9
8
3

11
10
13
12
15
14
[E] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION

1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

24V3
24V3
24V3

/CPFC
SM18P

P-GND
P-GND
P-GND

/CPUC1
/CPUC2
/CLUM1
/CLUM2

INT24V2
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD

/CPFM_CK
R

1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

6
2

CPED2

11
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

CPED1

11

5
7
1
3

9
10

CLUD2
CLUD1
2
1
2
1

2
1

8
1
2
1
2

24V3

24V3
24V3

/CPFC
/CPUC2

/CPUC1

1
2
1
2

1
2
P-GND

P-GND
/CLUM1
/CLUM2

BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H

BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H

4
B2P-PH-K-S

B2P-PH-K-S

CPFD1
1
2
4
5
6
7
3

DRIVER MAIN PWB

CPFD2
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 1

5V

DSW_R
P-GND
FG-OUT

INT24V2
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD

/CPFM_CK

B7P-PH-K-S

CSS1

CSS2
CSPD1
CPUC2

CSPD2
1 CSS2
2 D-GND
S4P-PH-K-S
PHNR-9-H+
CPFM CPUC1

BU09P-TR-P-H 1 D-GND
7 D-GND 3 2 CPFD2
8 CPFD2 2 3 5VN
D-GND 7 9 5VN 1
5VN 24 1 D-GND 9 1 D-GND
D-GND 5 2 CLUD2 8 2 CLUD2
CPFC

5VNPD 22 3 5VNPD 7 3 5VNPD

D-GND 6 4 D-GND 6
5VNPD 23 5 CPED2 5 1 D-GND
D-GND 8 6 5VNPD 4 2 CPED2
5VNPD 25 3 5VNPD
B30B-PHDSS-B
1 D-GND
2 CSPD2
3 5VNPD
CLUM2
CLUM1
 Signal name Name Function/Operation
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 1 upper limit detection
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 2 upper limit detection
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Drives the paper tray lift plate.
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2) Drives the paper tray lift plate.
CPED 1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Tray 1 paper empty detection
CPED 2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Tray 2 paper empty detection
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Tray 1 paper pass detection
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Tray2 paper pass detection
CPFM Paper feed motor Paper feed section drive
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls the paper feed tray section roller ON/OFF.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Controls the paper feed tray section roller ON/OFF.
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
CSS1 Tray 1 presence detection Detects the presence of the tray 1
CSS2 Tray 2 presence detection Detects the presence of the tray 2
DSW_C Tray 1, 2 transfer cover open/close detection Detects opening of the tray 1, 2 transport cover.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Paper feed roller (No.1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
3 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation
roller to prevent double feed.
5 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
6 Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
7 Separation roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller
(No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
9 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports the paper fed from the paper tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
10 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports the paper fed from the paper feed tray 1, 2 or 3, 4 to the transport
roller 8.
11 Rotation plate Lifts up the paper to keep the paper feed position.

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 2

2. Operational descriptions
A. Preliminary operation before paper feed
• When the paper is set and the paper feed tray is inserted, the
pickup roller moves down and the paper feed tray sensor turns
ON.
• The lift-up motor operates to lift the rotating plate.
• The paper upper limit sensor turns on to stop the rotating plate at
the specified position.

B. Paper feed operation

• When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON and the pickup roller is rotated in the paper pickup
timing to feed paper.
• At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to
prevent against double feed of paper.

C. Remaining paper detection

• Remaining paper detection is performed according to four
stages, i.e. three stages with paper and one stage with no paper,
and the result is displayed.

D. Remaining paper detection method

• The number of remaining sheets is determined according to the
number of times the remaining paper sensor changes from the
time the paper feed tray starts lifting up to the time when the
upper detection sensor comes ON.

(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)

The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection
Detection Actuator

CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low

Remaining paper 1/3 position

2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi

Remaining paper 2/3 position

3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

Remaining paper 1/3 position

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 3

 3. Disassembly and assembly (1) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1 and 2.
1) Remove the right cabinet front.
A. Tray paper feed section
2) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
(1)-e (1)-k
2

(1)-i
(1)-h

(1)-a
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-d
(1)-c (1)-j 1
(1)-f

3) Remove the right lower door unit.

(1)-i
(1)-h
(1)-a

(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-c (1)-j
(1)
(2)-b

(2)-a

4) Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.

Unit Parts Maintenance

(1) Tray paper a Paper pickup roller ✕{
feed unit 1, 2 b Paper feed roller ✕{
c Separation roller ✕{
d Tray 1 transport cover
detection
e Transport roller 7 (Drive) ✕{
f Transport roller 4 (Drive) ✕{
g Torque limiter ✕ 5) Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2.
h Tray 1, 2 paper presence
detection
i Tray 1, 2 upper limit detection
j Tray 1, 2 transport detection
k Transport roller 5 (Drive) ✕{
(2) Others a Tray 1, 2 paper remaining
quantity detection
b Tray 1, 2 presence detection

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 4

a. Paper pickup roller d. Tray 1 transport cover opening detection
1) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
b. Paper feed roller
1) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
2) Remove the paper guide.

e. Transport roller 7 (Drive)

1) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
3) Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
2) Remove the screws.
(b).

3) Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit, and remove the belt.

1
c. Separation roller
1) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
2) Remove the paper guide.
3) Remove the separation roller.

4) Remove the grounding plate. Remove the parts. Remove the

transport roller 7 (drive).

3
2

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 5

f. Transport roller 4 (Drive) 4) Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring and the sep-
1) Remove the tray paper feed unit 2. aration shift. Remove the torque limiter.
2) Remove the grounding plate. Remove the parts. Remove the
transport roller 4 (drive). 3 2

1 4

3 1
2

h. Tray 1, 2 paper presence detection

i. Tray 1, 2 upper limit detection sensor

g. Torque limiter 1) Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2.
1) Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2. 2) Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit. (Tray paper feed unit
2) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper 1 only)
feed lower PG unit. 3) Remove the paper feed vertical transport PG unit, then remove
the belt. (Tray paper feed unit 2 only)

2
2

1
4) Remove the paper feed upper PG supporting plate.
3) Remove the pressure release spring, and remove the paper
feed lower PG supporting plate. Remove the separation pres-
sure spring, and the separation pressure release plate.

1
2

5) Remove the tray 1, 2 paper presence detector (a) and the tray
1, 2 upper limit detector (b).

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 6

j. Tray 1, 2 transport detection 2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the tray
1) Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2. 1, 2 paper remaining quantity detector.
2) Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit. (Tray paper feed unit
1 only)
3) Remove the paper feed vertical transport PG unit. (Tray paper
feed unit 2 only)
4) Remove the paper feed upper PG supporting plate.
5) Remove the tray 1, 2 transport detector.

b. Tray 1, 2 presence detection

1) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the tray
k. Transport roller 5 (Drive) 1, 2 presence detector.
1) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
2) Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit.
3) Remove the paper feed upper PG supporting plate.
4) Remove the parts, and remove the transport roller 5 (Drive).
Remove the E-ring and the bearing holder from the transport
roller 5 (Drive).

4
3

1 3) Release the pawl, and remove the tray 1, 2 detection unit.

2
Remove the spring from the tray 1, 2 presence detector.

(2) Others

a. Tray 1, 2 paper remaining quantity detection

1) Remove the tray 1 and 2.

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 7

4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply, When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
No. Parts name Block/Item No. (Only
mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
the replacement parts
parts
are described.)
1 Pickup roller Mechanism { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [11]-40)
2 Paper feed roller parts { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [11]-41)
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [10]-4)
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { { { {

4
1
2
3

4
1
2
3

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 8

[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

RRM

CN1
PSFMA// 1 2 PSFMA//
INT24V1 2 5 INT24V1
PFM PSFMB// 3 3 PSFMB// DRIVER
PSFMA/ 4 1 PSFMA/
1 INT24V1 5 6 INT24V1
MAIN PWB
PSFMB/ 6 4 PSFMB/
2 B6B-PH-K-S

PPD2

3
PHNR-6-H
BU06P-TR-P-H CN17
PPD1 D-GND
PPD1
1
2
6
5
D-GND
PPD1
1
2
29
31
D-GND
PPD1
5VNPD 3 4 5VNPD 3

5VNPD 1 3 5VNPD 4
PPD2 2 2 PPD2 5 32 PPD2
D-GND 3 1 D-GND 6 30 D-GND
23 5VNPD
27 D-GND
4
3
2
6
5
1
26 REGS_R
24 REGS_R_LED#
PCU
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
17 /PCSS
16 24V3 PWB
B32B-PHDSS-B

DF11-6DP-SP1

Signal name Name Function/Operation

PFM Transport motor Transport drive between the resist roller and the paper feed section. Transport drive between the resist
roller and the right door section.
PPD1 Resist front detection Detects paper before the resist roller.
PPD2 Resist detection Detects paper after the resist roller.
RRM Resist motor Controls the drive and ON/OFF of the resist roller.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Resist roller (Drive) Transport paper to the transfer section./ Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts relationship
between images and paper.
2 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to supply transport power of the transport roller to paper.
3 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transport the paper to the resist roller.

MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 1

2. Operational descriptions 7) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the resist
roller unit.
A. Paper transport section
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the
resist roller by the transport rollers. ON/OFF control of each trans-
port roller is made by the paper transport clutch. The resist roller
controls the relative positions of transported paper and the transfer
image. The resist roller is driven by the transport motor. The rela-
tive positions of paper and the transfer image are determined by
the ON timing of the transport motor.

3. Disassembly and assembly

A. Paper transport section

(1)-e (1)-c

(1) a. Resist front detection

(1)-d 1) Remove the resist roller unit.
2) Remove the sensor holder.

(1)-b

(1)-a

Unit Parts Maintenance

(1) Resist roller a Resist front detection b. Transport roller 8 (Drive)
unit b Transport roller 8 (Drive) ✕{ 1) Remove the resist roller unit.
c Resist roller (Drive) ✕{ 2) Remove the grounding plate. Remove the parts, and remove
d Resist detection the transport roller 8 (Drive).
e Resist roller (Idle) ✕{

(1) Resist roller unit

1) Remove the developing unit (K). 2
2) Remove the drum unit (K).
3) Remove the primary transfer unit.
4) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1. 1 3
5) Remove the rear cabinet.
6) Remove the ADU connection drive.

3
4

MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 2

c. Resist roller (Drive) e. Resist roller (Idle)
1) Remove the resist roller unit. 1) Remove the resist roller unit.
2) Remove the spring and the E-ring. Remove the JAM release 2) Remove the PS stay.
handle. 3) Clean the resist roller (idle).

3) Remove the parts. Slide the resist roller (Drive) to the front
side. Remove the parallel pin, the PS gear, and the E-ring from
the resist roller (Drive).

5
2

d. Resist detection
1) Remove the resist roller unit.
2) Remove the PS stay, then remove the resist detector.

1
2

MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 3

4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark: Refer to
Monochrome the Parts Guide.
supply, When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Block/Item No.
No. Parts name
mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K (Only the
parts replacement parts
are described.)
1 PS follower roller Mechanism parts ✕ { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { { { {

MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 4

[G] DUPLEX SECTION
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

CN2
TFD3 1 1 TFD3 6 1 TFD3
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 5 2 D-GND
5VLED1 3 3 5VLED1 4 3 5VLED1
POD3 4 4 POD3 3
D-GND 5 5 D-GND 2 1 POD3 3
5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 1 2 D-GND
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H 3 5VLED4
POD3
TFD3
RIGHT ADUM_L
DOOR I/F DSW_ADU 7 3 DSW_ADU 2 1 DSW_ADU
D-GND 8 2 D-GND 3 2 D-GND
PWB 5VLED2 9 4 5VLED2 1 3 5VLED2
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H
1 APPD1
APPD1 10 1 APPD1 3 DSW_ADU
D-GND 11 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND APPD1
5VLED5 12 3 5VLED5 1 3 5VLED5
S16B-PHDSS-B PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
CN3(1/2)
1
APPD2 4 1 APPD2
D-GND 5 2 D-GND
5VLED10 6 3 5VLED10
S32B-PHDSS-B

APPD2

CN5
ADMLA// 8 1 ADMLA//
INT24V1 11 2 INT24V1
DRIVER ADMLB// 9 3 ADMLB//
ADMLA/ 7 4 ADMLA/
MAIN PWB INT24V1 12 5 INT24V1
ADMLB/ 10 6 ADMLB/
B12B-PH-K-S

Signal name Name Function/Operation

ADUM_L ADU motor lower Drives the right door section.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
TFD3 Detects the right tray paper exit full. Detects the right tray paper exit full.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
2 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
3 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Used to discharge paper.

MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 1

2. Operational descriptions (1) Right door unit
1) Open the right door unit.
A. Duplex section
• Paper is transported from the fusing section and sent to the
transport roller 13 driven by the paper exit drive motor and to the
paper exit roller 1.
At that time, paper passes under the ADU reverse gate guide.
• After the specified time from detection of paper lead edge by
POD1, the paper exit drive motor is rotated forward, and after the 2
specified time, it is rotated reversely.
1
• At that time, paper passes the right side of the ADU gate guide
by its own weight.
• The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor
lower, and paper is transported to the duplex paper feed position.
• Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and trans-
ported to the inside of the machine again.
2) Remove the right door unit.

3. Disassembly and assembly

A. Duplex section

(1)-e
(1)-d

(1)-c (1)-h

(1)-f (1)-a
(1)-j
(1)-i
(1)-g
(1)-k (2)-a

(1)-b a. RD I/F PWB

(1) 1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the connector cover, and remove the ADU inner
(1)-l cover.
(1)-m

Unit Parts Maintenance

(1) Right door a RD I/F PWB
unit b Manual paper feed clutch
c Discharge brush ✕
d Detects the right tray paper exit
full.
e Right tray paper exit detection
f ADU reverse gate
g ADU gate lower
h ADU transport open/close
detection
i ADU transport path detection 1
j Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) ✕{
k Transport roller 10 (Drive) ✕{ 3) Remove the connector, and remove the RD I/F PWB.
l Transport roller 11 (Drive) ✕{
m ADU transport path detection 2
(2) Others a ADU motor lower

MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 2

b. Manual paper feed clutch 4) Remove the right paper exit PG upper.
1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the connector cover ADU inner cover.
3) Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the con-
nector, then remove the manual paper feed clutch unit.

5) Check the discharge brush.

4) Remove the manual paper feed clutch.

6) Remove each sensor mounting plate. Right tray paper exit full
detection (A), right tray paper exit detection (B)

c. Discharge brush B

d. Detects the right tray paper exit full.

e. Right tray paper exit detection

1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the connector cover.

f. ADU reverse gate

1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the parts and remove the ADU reverse gate.

3) Remove the right paper exit upper cabinet unit, and disconnect 1
the connector.

MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 3

g. ADU gate lower 6) Remove the ADU transport path detector 1.
1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the parts, and remove the ADU gate lower.

3
j. Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the connector cover ADU inner cover.
3) Remove the ADU cabinet F and the ADU cabinet R.
h. ADU transport open/close detection

i. ADU transport path detection 1

1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the ADU inner cover.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the reverse PG unit.

4) Remove the reverse PG unit.

5) Remove each parts, then remove the transport roller 2 (drive).
4) Remove the ADU transport open/close detector.

5) Remove the ADU stay upper unit.

MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 4

k. Transport roller 10 (Drive) 3) Remove the ADU trasnsport path detector 2.

l. Transport roller 11 (Drive)

1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the connector cover ADU inner cover.
3) Remove the ADU cabinet F and the ADU cabinet R.
4) Remove the reverse PG unit.
5) Remove the upper transport fulcrum holder, and remove the
ADU open/close door.

6) Remove each parts, and remove the trasnport roller 10 (drive)

(A) and the trasnport roller 11 (drive) (B).

A 2

m. ADU transport path detection 2

1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the right door transport PG, the follower pressure
plate, and the ADU waste toner cover.

MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 5

4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark/Refer to
Monochrome the Parts Guide.
supply, When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Block/Item No.
No. Parts name
mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K (Only the
parts replacement parts
are described.)
1 Transport rollers Mechanism parts { { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions.
(Specified positions)

MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 6

 CN10
1 24V3 1 1 24V3
2 /LSUSS_B 2 4 /LSUSS_B PCU PWB
P SM2P R B5P-PH-K-S
10

11 9
12
10

CN8 CN21
10

CN11 B7P-PH-K-S D-GND 1 1 D-GND

5VN 1 4 5VN 3.3V 2 2 3.3V
D-GND 2 3 D-GND D-GND 3 3 D-GND
n BD 3
9

2 n BD

13
5VN 4 4 5VN
D-GND 4 1 D-GND 24V1 5 5 24V1
B4P-PH-K-R 6 LSUTH1 P-GND 6 6 P-GND
5 D-GND S6B-XA B6B-XA
LSUTH1 3
10

CN7 CN13
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

D-GND 4
INT5V 1 1 INT5V
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
LSUSS

D-GND 3 3 D-GND
n SCK_LSU 4 4 n SCK_LSU
n TRANS_DATA 5 5 n TRANS_DATA

MX-2300/2700 N/G LSU SECTION H – 1

D-GND 6 6 D-GND
LSUASIC_RST 7 7 LSUASIC_RST
n RSV_DAT 8 8 n RSV_DAT

MOTHER PWB
n TRANS_RST 9 9 n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT 10 10 JOBEND_INT
CN1 B34B-PHDSS-B LSUTH1 11 11 LSUTH1
D-GND 10 27 D-GND LSUTH2 12 12 LSUTH2

8
INT5V 9 25 INT5V VSYNC_K_N 13 13 VSYNC_K_N
/SH_Y 8 29 /SH_Y VSYNC_K_P 14 14 VSYNC_K_P
/ENB_Y 7 31 /ENB_Y VSYNC_C_P 15 15 VSYNC_C_P
DT_Y- 6 30 DT_Y- VSYNC_C_N 16 16 VSYNC_C_N

6 7
DT_Y+ 5 28 DT_Y+ VSYNC_M_N 17 17 VSYNC_M_N

14
D-GND 4 26 D-GND VSYNC_M_P 18 18 VSYNC_M_P
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

Vref_Y 3 32 Vref_Y VSYNC_Y_P 19 19 VSYNC_Y_P

LDCHK_Y 2 34 LDCHK_Y VSYNC_Y_N 20 20 VSYNC_Y_N
n LDERR_Y 1 33 n LDERR_Y S20B-PHDSS-B B20B-PHDSS-B

PGM
CN9 CN14
15 D-GND CH0_N 1 1 CH0_N

4
D-GND 10
INT5V 9 13 INT5V CH0_P 2 2 CH0_P
/SH_M 8 17 /SH_M D-GND 3 3 D-GND

5
/ENB_M 7 19 /ENB_M D-GND 4 4 D-GND
DT_M- 6 18 DT_M- CH1_N 5 5 CH1_N
DT_M+ 5 16 DT_M+ CH1_P 6 6 CH1_P

LSU PWB
D-GND 4 14 D-GND CH2_N 7 7 CH2_N

3
Vref_M 3 20 Vref_M CH2_P 8 8 CH2_P
LDCHK_M 2 22 LDCHK_M D-GND 9 9 D-GND
n LDERR_M 1 21 n LDERR_M D-GND 10 10 D-GND
CLCLK_N 11 11 CLCLK_N
D-GND 10 3 D-GND CLCLK_P 12 12 CLCLK_P

2
INT5V 9 1 INT5V CH3_N 13 13 CH3_N
/SH_C 8 5 /SH_C CH3_P 14 14 CH3_P
/ENB_C 7 7 /ENB_C D-GND 15 15 D-GND
DT_C- 6 6 DT_C- D-GND 16 16 D-GND
DT_C+ 5 4 DT_C+ HSYNC_LSU_N 17 17 HSYNC_LSU_N
D-GND 4 2 D-GND HSYNC_LSU_P 18 18 HSYNC_LSU_P
Vref_C 3 8 Vref_C D-GND 19 19 D-GND

1
LDCHK_C 2 10 LDCHK_C D-GND 20 20 D-GND
n LDERR_C 1 9 n LDERR_C ECLK_LSU_P 21 21 ECLK_LSU_P
ECLK_LSU_N 22 22 ECLK_LSU_N
CN2 B12B-PHDSS-B S22B-PHDSS-B B22B-PHDSS-B
D-GND 10 3 D-GND
INT5V 9 1 INT5V
/SH_K 8 5 /SH_K
/ENB_K 7 7 /ENB_K
LSU SECTION

DT_K- 6 6 DT_K-
DT_K+ 5 4 DT_K+
D-GND 4 2 D-GND
Vref_K 3 8 Vref_K
SK_K 2 10 SK_K
n LDERR_K 1 9 n LDERR_K
11 LSUTH2
12 D-GND
CN4 B6P-PH-K-S
/BREAK 1 6 /BREAK
POLYCLK 2 5 POLYCLK
/LOCK 3 3 /LOCK
/START 4 4 /START
P-GND 5 2 P-GND
24V1 6 1 24V1
MX2700N
[H]

 Signal name Name Function/Operation
PGM Polygon motor Laser beam is reflected at the constant speed rotation.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 LD PWB (K) Controls laser beam flashing and the output value.
2 LD PWB (C)
3 LD PWB (M)
4 LD PWB (Y)
5 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams and focus.
6 fT lens 1 Laser beams are refracted so that the laser scan speed on the OPC drum is even in both ends and at the center.
7 fT lens 2
8 Reflection mirror Secures the path for laser beams.
9 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams, and focus on the OPC drum.
10 OPC drum Forms electrostatic latent images according to laser beams.
11 Convergence lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
12 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
13 LSU CNT PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB control
signal and image data.
14 LSU therminstor Measures the temperature in LSU.

2. Operational descriptions (Scan system)

A. LSU section
(1) Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit through the mother
are converted into laser beams to be radiated onto the OPC drum
surface. The LSU unit is composed of the primary system including
optical elements such as lasers and the polygon mirror and the mir-
ror which assures the optical path and the scan system which
includes the optical elements including the polygon mirror and the
mirror which assures the optical path.
(2) Composition
(Primary system)

(On the polygon mirror)

Number of
Rotating
Model mirror Bearing Remark
speed
surfaces
MX-2700N/G 7 surfaces 25106rpm OIL

(3) Outline of LSU specifications

Effective scan width: 307mm

Resolution: 600dpi
Beam diameter: Main scan = 50 to 65μm, Sub scan = 60 to 75μm
Laser power: Max. 0.65mW
LD wavelength: 770 to 795nm

MX-2300/2700 N/G LSU SECTION H – 2

3. Disassembly and assembly 4) Remove the LSU slant adjustment plate screw (A), and loosen
the screw (B).
A. LSU section Remove the LSU shaft fixing plate. Remove the screws.

(2)-a
(1)

(1)-b

(1)-a
B

A
(2)-b

5) Shift the front side of the LSU shaft from (A) to (B), and remove
the LSU shaft.

2
Unit Parts Maintenance
(1) LSU a Dust-proof glass {
b Polygon motor
(2) Others a LSU shutter solenoid
b Cleaning base {▲

(1) LSU
3 A
1) Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. (Refer
to Left Cabinet Rear Lower and Left Cabinet in External Outfit
1
Section.) B
2) Remove the waste toner box.

6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LSU.

3) Remove the LSU left plate PA.

1 a. Dust-proof glass
1) Remove the waste toner box.
2) Remove the LSU cleaning stick from the front cover.
2

MX-2300/2700 N/G LSU SECTION H – 3

3) Insert the LSU cleaning rod and slide it back and forth a few 4) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the poly-
times to clean the dust-proof glass. gon motor.
* When installing, do not touch the moving section of the poly-
gon mirror and the mirror surface.

b. Polygon motor
1) Remove the LSU. (2) Others
2) Remove the screws, and remove the LSU CNT PWB cover R.
a. LSU shutter solenoid 1
1) Remove the LSU.
2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the LSU
shutter solenoid unit.
* When installing, the shutter U-groove is engaged with the
shutter lever arm shaft section (A).

3) Remove the screws, then lift up the LSU CNT PWB cover F
(A).
Remove the screws, and lift up the polygon motor unit (B).

1
A

3) Remove the screws, and remove the LSU shutter solenoid 1.

* When installing, engage the solenoid pin with the shutter
lever arm.
B

MX-2300/2700 N/G LSU SECTION H – 4

b. Cleaning base
1) Remove the waste toner box.
2) Remove the LSU cleaning stick from the front cover.
3) Remove the cleaning base from the LSU cleaning rod.

4. Maintenance
A. LSU section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide. Block/
supply, When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
No. Parts name Item No. (Only the
mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
replacement parts are
parts
described.)
1 Dust-proof glass Mechanism { { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Cleaning base parts ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [2]-35)

MX-2300/2700 N/G LSU SECTION H – 5

 

[i]

MC
MX2700N

CN1
INT24V2 7
P-GND 6
1TC_YMC 4

GB
1TC_K 3
MC_YMC 2

1
HV_REM 1

MC
1TC_CL 5

1st TC PWB
MC-CMY B7P-PH-K-S

GB
CN2
1TC_CL 3

PCU PWB

1
HV_REM 7

MC
MC_YMC 6
1TC_K 5
1TC_YMC 4
P-GND 2

GB
INT24V2 1
GB-Y

2
B7P-PH-K-S

1
GB-M CN1 CN26

MC PWB
INT24V2 6 20 P-GND

MC
GB-C P-GND 5 21 /HV_DATA#
/HV_DATA# 4 22 /HV_CLK#
GB-K /HV_CLK# 3 23 /HV_LD1#
/HV_LD1# 2 24 HV_REM#

GB
MC-K HV_REM# 1 B32B-PHDSS-B
B6P-PH-K-S

B3P-PH-K-S
1 INT24V2

AC
PWB
CN9

DL_Y PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H CN15

D-GND 1 9 D-GND 2 24 D-GND
DL_Y# 3 10 DL_Y# 1 22 DL_Y#
53254-0310

2
DL_M PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
D-GND 1 9 D-GND 2 4 D-GND
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION

DL_M# 3 10 DL_M# 1 2 DL_M#

53254-0310

DL_Y
DL_C PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
D-GND 1 9 D-GND 2 23 D-GND
DL_C# 3 10 DL_C# 1 21 DL_C#
53254-0310
DL_BK PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

D-GND 1 9 D-GND 2 3 D-GND

DL_BK# 3 10 DL_BK# 1 1 DL_BK#
53254-0310 B40B-PADSS-B

DL_M

DL_C
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 1

DL_BK
CN1
DMCL

DMCLB// 1 3 DMCLB//
INT24V1 2 6 INT24V1
DMCLB/ 3 4 DMCLB/
DMCLA/ 4 1 DMCLA/
INT24V1 5 5 INT24V1
DMCLA// 6 2 DMCLA//
Ą
R SM6 P
DMBK

6 INT24V1 6 8 DMBKA//
5 INT24V1 5 7 DMBKA/
DRIVER
SUB PWB

4 DMBKB// 4 10 DMBKB/
3 DMBKB/ 3 9 DMBKB//
2 DMBKA/ 2 11 INT24V1
1 DMBKA// 1 12 INT24V1
B12B-PH-K-S
 Signal name Name Function/Operation
DMCL Drum motor (Color) Color photoconductor drive
DMBK Drum motor (Black) Black photoconductor drive
DL Discharge lamp (Y, M, C, BK) Light is passed to the discharge lens to drive the OPC drum surface.
MC Main charge (Y, M, C, K) The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
GB Grid (Y, M, C, K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 OPC drum (Y, M, C, K) Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Residual toner is cleaned and removed from the OPC drum surface.

2. Operational descriptions
A. OPC drum section
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
cleaning blade.
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.

Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL

OPC drum

Screen grid High voltage unit

Main corona unit

The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt-
age applied to the screen grid.
2) LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.

Aluminum
OPC drum layer
CGL
CTL

OPC drum

LED lights

When LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the alumi-
num layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where LED lights are not
radiated.

MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 2

4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged. 3. Disassembly and assembly
Aluminum Aluminum A. Process drum unit
layer layer
CGL CGL
CTL CTL (1)-c

(1)-d
(1)-a (1)-e
Lens

(1)-c (1)
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,
light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface. (1)-b
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the alumi-
num layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.

(2)-b

(2)-a

Unit Parts Maintenance

(1) Drum unit a Drum ▲
b Charging unit ▲
c Side seal F, R ✕
d Toner reception seal ✕
e Cleaner blade ▲
(2) Others a Waste toner drive motor
b Waste toner full detection switch

(1) Each color drum unit

1) Open the front cover.

MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 3

2) Remove the waste toner bottle unit. 6) Hold the lock lever, and pull out each color drum unit slowly,
and support the lower section of the unit with both hands to
remove.

a. OPC drum
3) Loosen the blue screw. Check to confirm that lock is released,
1) Remove each drum unit from the machine.
and open the drum positioning unit.
2) Remove the screws and remove the DR fixing shaft AS.

NOTE: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer

unit is released manually, turn on the power again after com-
3) Slide the OPC drum to the front side, and lift the drum rear
pletion of the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes
side, and remove the OPC drum from the hole in the front sec-
the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
tion.
4) Loosen the fixing screw of the developing unit on the left side
of each color drum unit.

b. MC charger unit
1) Remove each drum unit from the machine.
5) Remove the developing unit with both hands. 2) Remove the OPC drum.
3) Remove the screws, and remove the MC cover.

MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 4

4) Disengage the lock pawl with a screwdriver, and remove the e. Cleaner blade
MC cleaner shaft. 1) Remove each drum unit from the machine.
2) Remove the OPC drum.
3) Remove the MC charger unit.
4) Remove the side seal F/R and the toner reception seal.
5) Remove the screws, and remove the cleaner blade.
1 2
3 6) Remove the toner mixing sheet from the cleaner blade.

5) Release the pawl, and remove the process cover. Remove the
MC charger unit.

* Tighten the screws according to the marks 1, 2, and 3.

3
c. Side seal F, R

d. Toner reception seal 1

1) Remove each drum unit from the machine.
2) Remove the OPC drum.
3) Remove the MC charger unit.
4) Remove the side seal F/R and the toner reception seal.
* When attaching the side seal F/R and the toner reception
seal, arrange so that they are in the ranges specified in the
figure below.

(2) Others
Reference line Reference line
0 - 0.5mm 0 - 0.5mm a. Waste toner drive motor
0 - 0.5mm 0 - 0.3mm 1) Remove the frame cover. (Refer to Frame Cover in External
Reference Outfit Section.)
line
2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the waste
toner drive unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive motor
from the waste toner drive unit.

0 - 0.3mm 0 - 0.3mm

Reference line Reference line

MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 5

b. Waste toner full detection switch 3) Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the waste toner
1) Remove the frame cover. (Refer to Frame Cover in External box empty lever.
Outfit Section.) Disengage the connector and the pawl, and remove the waste
2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the waste toner full detection switch.
toner drive unit.

4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Monochrome Remark: Refer to

supply, 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 the Parts Guide.
mechanical When K K K K K K K K K K K K Block/Item No.
No. Parts name
parts calling (Only the
60 120 180 240 300 360 replacement parts
Color supply
K K K K K K are described.)
1 Drum (BK) Monochrome ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Cleaner blade supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-14)
(BK)
3 Charging unit (BK) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-2)
4 Drum (C) Color supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Cleaner, blade (C) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-14)
6 Charging unit (C) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [24]-2)
7 Side seal F/R (BK) Mechanism ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
8 Toner reception parts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
seal (BK)
9 Side seal F/R (C) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
10 Toner reception ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
seal (C)
11 Waste toner box ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕

MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 6

 7,9

8,10
1,4 2,5

7,9
3,6

11

MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 7

[J] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

A. Toner supply section

TNM_Y
CRUM(Y)

TNM_M

CRUM(M) TNM_C

CRUM(C)

CRUM(K)
1
TNM_K

CN12 CN5 CRUM(BLACK)

6 INT24V2 5V_CRUM 1 1 5V_CRUM 1 2 5V_CRUM
4 P-GND CRM_K_DT# 3 2 CRM_K_DT# 2 4 CRM_K_DT#
10 /DVM_K_CK CRM_K_CK# 5 3 CRM_K_CK# 3 3 CRM_K_CK#
12 /DVM_K_D D-GND 7 4 D-GND 4 1 D-GND
R SM2P P 2 DVM_K_LD
CRUM(CYAN)
1 TNM_K_1 1 15 TNM_K_1 2 5V_CRUM
2 TNM_K_2 2 17 TNM_K_2 CRM_C_DT# 2 5 CRM_C_DT# 5 4 CRM_C_DT#
R SM2P P 19 TNM_C_1 CRM_C_CK# 4 6 CRM_C_CK# 6 3 CRM_C_CK#
1 TNM_C_1 1 21 TNM_C_2 1 D-GND
2 TNM_C_2 2 22 TNM_M_1
TNM_M_2 CRUM(MAGENTA)
R SM2P P 24
2 5V_CRUM
1 TNM_M_1 1 18 TNM_Y_1
CRM_M_DT# 9 7 CRM_M_DT# 7 4 CRM_M_DT#
2 TNM_M_2 2 20 TNM_Y_2
CRM_M_CK# 10 8 CRM_M_CK# 8 3 CRM_M_CK#
R SM2P P 5 INT24V2
1 D-GND
1 TNM_Y_1 1 3 P-GND
2 TNM_Y_2 2 9 /DVM_CL_CK CRUM(YELLOW)
11 /DVM_CL_D 2 5V_CRUM
1 DVM_CL_LD CRM_Y_DT# 6 9 CRM_Y_DT# 9 4 CRM_Y_DT#
16 24V3 CRM_Y_CK# 8 10 CRM_Y_CK# 10 3 CRM_Y_CK#
14 /1TURC B10B-PHDSS-B P SM10P R 1 D-GND
32 DHPD_K
30 5VLED
5
4
3
1
2
6

5
4
3
1
2
6

31 DHPD_CL
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM

29 5VLED
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND

23 D-GND
B32B-PHDSS-B PCU PWB
DF11-6DP-SP1 DF11-6DP-SP1

MX-2300/2700 N/G TONER SUPPLY SECTION J – 1

 Signal name Name Function/Operation
TNM Toner motor (Y, M, C, K) Toner supply motor to the develping unit
CRUM CRUM (Y,M,C,K) Data memory for the toner cartridge

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Toner transport pipe Toner supply pipe from the toner cartridge to the developing unit

2. Operational descriptions
When the toner cartridge is inserted to the machine, the lock pawl
is disengaged and the supply shutter is opened.
The transport pipe shutter is opened and closed by the shaft which
is linked with the developing lever.

The toner supply section of the developing unit is opened and

closed when the open/close lever on the unit hits the block on the
machine.

MX-2300/2700 N/G TONER SUPPLY SECTION J – 2

3. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Monochrome
Remark: Refer to the
supply, 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
Parts Guide. Block/
mechanical When K K K K K K K K K K K K
No. Parts name Item No. (Only the
parts calling
replacement parts are
60 120 180 240 300 360
Color supply described.)
K K K K K K
1 Toner cartridge Monochrome, User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance). Replace after 2 years
(BK/C/M/Y) color supply of use.

MX-2300/2700 N/G TONER SUPPLY SECTION J – 3

 CN12
INT24V2 1 6 INT24V2
P-GND 2 4 P-GND
/DVM_K_CK 4 10 /DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D 5 12 /DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD 6 2 DVM_K_LD
5V 7
B7P-PH-K-S
INT24V2 1 5 INT24V2
P-GND 2 3 P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK 4 9 /DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D 5 11 /DVM_CL_D
DVM_K

DVM_CL_LD 6 1 DVM_CL_LD
5V 7
B7P-PH-K-S
CN1 CN9
INT24V2 6 1 INT24V2 CN26
BS-K (SPRING) BS-K
P-GND 5 B3P-PH-K-S AC PWB 20 P-GND
BS-C (SPRING) BS-C /HV_DATA# 4 21 /HV_DATA#
DVM_CL
5GTXKEG/CPWCN

/HV_CLK# 3 22 /HV_CLK#
MC PWB

MX-2300/2700 N/G DEVELOPING SECTION K – 1

BS-M (SPRING) BS-M /HV_LD1# 2 23 /HV_LD1#
BS-Y (SPRING) BS-Y HV_REM# 1 24 HV_REM#
B6P-PH-K-S B32B-PHDSS-B

BS_K
DVTYP_K
BS_C

PCU PWB
DVTYP_C
BS_M
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

2
TCS_K
DVTYP_M
BS_Y

2
TCS_C
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H CN15
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 5 24V3

DVTYP_Y
BLACK TCS_K 3 6 TCS_K 6 7 TCS_K 4 7 TCS_K

1
D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 11 D-GND

2
TSG_BK 1 8 TSG_BK 8 6 TSG_BK 5 9 TSG_BK
[K] DEVELOPING SECTION

D-GND 4 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 13 D-GND

DVTYP_K 3 2 DVTYP_K 2 3 DVTYP_K 8 15 DVTYP_K

TCS_M
DVSET_K 2 3 DVSET_K 3 2 DVSET_K 9 17 DVSET_K
5VN 1 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 19 5VN
S4P-PH-K-S C QR/P8-8P P

1
2
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 25 24V3
CYAN TCS_C 3 6 TCS_C 6 7 TCS_C 4 27 TCS_C
D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 31 D-GND

TCS_Y
TSG_C 1 8 TSG_C 8 6 TSG_C 5 29 TSG_C
D-GND 4 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 33 D-GND
DVTYP_C 3 2 DVTYP_C 2 3 DVTYP_C 8 35 DVTYP_C

1
DVSET_C 2 3 DVSET_C 3 2 DVSET_C 9 37 DVSET_C
5VN 1 44 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 39 5VN
S4P-PH-K-S C QR/P8-8P P
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 6 24V3
MAGENTA TCS_M 3 6 TCS_M 6 7 TCS_M 4 8 TCS_M
D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 12 D-GND

1
TSG_M 1 8 TSG_M 8 6 TSG_M 5 10 TSG_M
D-GND 4 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 14 D-GND
DVTYP_M 3 2 DVTYP_M 2 3 DVTYP_M 8 16 DVTYP_M
DVSET_M 2 3 DVSET_M 3 2 DVSET_M 9 18 DVSET_M
5VN 1 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 20 5VN
S4P-PH-K-S C QR/P8-8P P
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 26 24V2
YELLOW TCS_Y 3 6 TCS_Y 6 7 TCS_Y 4 28 TCS_Y
D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 32 D-GND
TSG_Y 1 8 TSG_Y 8 6 TSG_Y 5 30 TSG_Y
MX2700N

D-GND 4 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 34 D-GND

DVTYP_Y 3 2 DVTYP_Y 2 3 DVTYP_Y 8 36 DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y 2 3 DVSET_Y 3 2 DVSET_Y 9 38 DVSET_Y
5VN 1 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 40 5VN
S4P-PH-K-S C QR/P8-8P P B40B-PADSS-B

 Signal name Name Function/Operation
DVM_CL Developer motor (color) Color developing unit drive
DVM_K Developer motor (black) Black developing unit drive
BS Developer bias (Y, M, C, K) Developer bias
TCS Toner density sensor (Y, M, C, K) Controls the toner density in the developing unit.
DVTYP DV initial detection PWB (Y, M, C, K) Detection of a new developing unit (machine exclusive for CRU)

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Developer roller Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
2 Stirring roller Stirring developer
3 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.

2. Operational descriptions 3. Disassembly and assembly

Electrostatic latent images generated on the OPC drum by the A. Developing section
laser (writing) units (laser image ray) are converted into visible
images by toner.
(1) (1)-d

(1)-b
(1)-e

(1)-g (1)-f

(1)-c

(1)-a

Unit Parts Maintenance

(1) Developing a Developer ▲
unit b DV seal ▲
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are agitated and trans-
c DV side seal F ▲
ported by the mixing roller.
d DV side seal R ▲
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively e DV initial PWB
charged due to mechanical friction. f Density sensor
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC g Toner filter ▲
component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the (1) Developing unit
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing 1) Open the front cabinet.
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.

2) Remove the waste toner bottle unit.

MX-2300/2700 N/G DEVELOPING SECTION K – 2

3) Check that the lock is released as shown in (A). a. Developer
Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit. 1) Remove the developing unit.
* When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the 2) Remove two fixing screws of the DV cover.
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).

A
B

4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw. (1 posi-
tion for each color)

1 3) Hold the sections A, and remove the DV cover in the arrow

direction (B).

B A

5) Pinch the knob and remove the development unit.

A

MX-2300/2700 N/G DEVELOPING SECTION K – 3

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

4) Take out the old developer, and insert the new developer. * When supplying developer, do not tilt the developing unit.

b. DV seal

c. DV side seal F

d. DV side seal R
1) Remove the old DV seal (A), DV side seal F (B), R (C).

1 2) Attach the new DV seal (A), DV side seal F (B), DV side seal R
(C) to the reference position.
* When replacing developer, use an extreme care not to drop 0 㨪 0.3mm
developer on the drive section (marked with {). 0 㨪 0.3mm

(Note for cleaning the developing unit)

A
If the developing unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower
with much developer in the developing unit, static electricity
may be accumulated in the unit. In order to prevent against
this, note the following items.
0 㨪 0.3mm
* If metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller surface 0 㨪 0.5mm
when transporting developer or removing foreign material from
the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the magnet roller sur-
face. Be careful to avoid this when handling the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the developer unit as well as developer B 0 㨪 0.3mm C 0 㨪 0.3mm
attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
(When cleaning the developing unit with an air blower [duct])
* Before cleaning with an air duct, remove developer from the unit * When attaching, arrange so that the DV side seal F (C) and the
as far as possible, and ground the magnet roller rear side cored DV side seal R (D) are placed between the DV cover R (A) and
bar as shown in the figure below and clean the unit with an air the DV blade (B).
blower. (Do not pinch the grounding wire with a crocodile clip
connector in order to prevent against damage on the cored bar.)
D

Magnet roller
B
rear side cored bar C

MX-2300/2700 N/G DEVELOPING SECTION K – 4

e. DV initial PWB g. Toner filter
1) Remove the developing unit.
f. Density sensor
2) Remove the toner filter cover and the toner filter.
1) Remove the developing unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV guide. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the DV initial PWB (A).
Remove the screw, and diisconnect the connector, and
remove the density sensor (B).

4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Monochrome
Remark: Refer to the
supply, 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
Parts Guide. Block/
mechanical When K K K K K K K K K K K K
No. Parts name Item No. (Only the
parts calling
replacement parts are
60 120 180 240 300 360
Color supply described.)
K K K K K K
1 Developer (BK) Monochrome ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 DV seal (BK) supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-42)
3 DV side seal F ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-26)
(BK)
4 DV side seal R ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-15)
(BK)
5 Toner filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [22]-37)
6 Developer (C) Color supply ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
7 Developer (M) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
8 Developer (Y) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
9 DV seal (C) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-42)
10 DV side sheal F, ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [23]-26,
R (C) [23]-15)
11 Toner filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [22]-37)
12 Bias pin/ Mechanism ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Connector parts

12
4,10
12
1,6,7,8
2,9

5,11

3,10 12

MX-2300/2700 N/G DEVELOPING SECTION K – 5

[L] TRANSFER SECTION
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

CN1
INT24V2 7
1st TC PWB P-GND 6
1TC_YMC 4
1TC-CMY 1TC_K 3
MC_YMC 2
1TC-K HV_REM 1
1TC_CL 5
B7P-PH-K-S

CN2
1TC_CL 3
HV_REM 7
MC_YMC 6
1TC_K 5
1TC_YMC 4
P-GND 2
INT24V2 1

MC PWB B7P-PH-K-S
CN1
INT24V2 6 CN26
P-GND 5 20 P-GND
/HV_DATA# 4 21 /HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK# 3 22 /HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1# 2 23 /HV_LD1#
HV_REM# 1 24 HV_REM#
B6P-PH-K-S B32B-PHDSS-B
CN9
1TUD_CL 1 2 1TUD_CL 2 11 1TUD_CL
D-GND 2 3 D-GND 1 13 GND
5VLED 3 1 5VLED 3 9 5VLED
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H B30B-PHDSS-B
CN9
1TUD_K 1 2 1TUD_K 2 12 1TUD_K
D-GND 2 3 D-GND 1 14 D-GND
5VLED 3 1 5VLED 3 10 5VLED
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H B30B-PHDSS-B
CN12

5 6 1TURC
1
2
24V3
/1TURC
2
1
16
14
24V3
/1TURC
8 PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H B32B-PHDSS-B

14

DVMK

1TC_CMY 1TUD_CL
1TC_K
3 1TUD_K

2 1 PCU PWB
9
7
3 10
2TC
4

12

CN1 CN34
2-TC INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2
P-GND 2 4 P-GND

1TNFD 11 CLR /TC_CLK# 4 6 /TC_CLK#

/TC_DATA# 3 8 /TC_DATA#
13 2nd TC PWB
/TC_LD#
/HV_REM#
5
6
10
12
/TC_LD#
/HV_REM#
B6P-PH-K-S B40B-PADSS-B

1TNFD 1 R SM18PIN P CN9

D-GND 2 3 1TNFD 3 1 1TNFD
WTNM P SL2PIN R 4 D-GND 4 2 D-GND
1 WTNM_1 1 5 WTNM_1 5 17 WTNM_1
2 WTNM_2 2 6 WTNM_2 6 18 WTNM_2
B30B-PHDSS-B

Signal name Name Functions and operations

1TC_CMY Color trasnfer high voltage signal
1TC_K B/W transfer high voltage signal
1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Waste toner full detection
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL detection Color transfer roller position detection signal
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation BK detection B/W transfer roller position detection signal
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Transfer roller separation control clutch
2TC Secondary transfer high voltage signal
DVMK Developer drive motor (K) Transfer unit drive motor (Used together with the B/W developing drive roller)
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Stirs waste toner.

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 1

 No. Name
1 Intermediate transfer blade
2 Intermediate transfer belt
3 Primary transfer roller
4 Transfer drive roller
5 Transfer follower roller
6 Tension roller
7 Roller cleaning brush
8 Y auxiliary roller
9 Registration backup roller
10 Secondary transfer belt
11 Secondary transfer roller
12 Secondary belt transfer roller
13 Secondary belt tension roller
14 Primary transfer CL roller
Functions and operations
Cleans residual toner on the intermediate transfer belt.
Transfers toner on the OPC drum to form toner images on the belt.
Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the intermediate transfer belt.
Drives the transfer belt.
Transfer belt follower drive
Applies a tension to the transfer belt.
Cleans the back surface of the transfer belt.
Retaining the belt position by separation of the Y transfer roller
Retaining the belt position in the process control and the registration section.
Transfers toner images on the intermediate transfer belt to paper.
Transfers toner images on the intermediate transfer belt to paper.
Drives the transfer belt.
Applies a proper tension to the transfer belt.
Cleans the primary transfer belt.

2. Operational descriptions B. Primary (intermediate) transfer roller

A. Outline
In this section, a high voltage is applied to transfer images to the
intermediate transfer belt and toner images on the intermediate
transfer belt are transferred to paper by the secondary transfer belt.
separation mechanism and content
The primary transfer roller performs all pressure contact, all sepa-
ration, and only black contact depending on the operation mode.
When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) is turned ON, the trans-
fer cam rotates and the primary transfer link and the primary trans-
fer arm which is linked with the cam are shifted in the arrow
direction, performing separation of the roller.

All pressure contact

All separation

Only black pressure contact

The arm performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only
black contact.

1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
All pressure contact ON OFF
All separation OFF ON
Only black contact OFF OFF

The primary transfer and the secondary transfer are driven together
with the black developing motor.

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 2

 3. Disassembly and assembly 2) Open the right door unit.

A. Primary transfer

(2)-a

(1)-a (2)-b
(1)-n

(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-c
(1) (1)-o
(1)-m 3) Loosen the blue screw.

(1)-j
(1)-i

(1)-k
(1)-f (1)-e
(1)-l

(1)-d

(1)-h
4) Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that
the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum posi-
Unit Parts Maintenance tioning unit.
(1) Primary a Intermediate transfer belt ✕▲ * Failure to complete this step may damage the intermediate
transfer unit b Primary transfer CL roller ▲ transfer belt.
c Intermediate transfer blade ✕▲
d Primary transfer roller ✕▲
e Primary transfer conduction ✕▲ B
collar
A
f Y auxiliary roller {
g Belt drive gear ✕▲
h Transfer drive roller {
i Transfer follower roller {
j Tension roller {
k Roller cleaning brush ✕
l Registration backup roller ✕
m Cleaner seal ✕
n Cleaner seal R ✕
o Transfer toner reception seal ✕
(2) Others a Transfer belt separation CL
detection
b Transfer belt separation BK
detection
5) Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer
(1) Primary transfer unit unit.
1) Open the front cover.

(NOTE)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of
the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes the trans-
fer roller to return it to the home position.

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 3

a. Intermediate transfer belt 5) Turn the belt twice (in the direction described in step 3).
* Do not replace the belt, blade, and primary transfer CL roller sep- * There may be some traces of strontium titanate left on the
arately. When any of the three parts needs to be replaced, surface of the belt.
replace the other two parts as well. 6) Turn the primary transfer unit over.
* When replacing the belt, be sure to apply stearic acid (UKOG- * Turn the unit over by lifting the cleaner unit side.
0312FCZZ) and strontium titanate according to the instructions. * Keep the primary transfer unit in a horizontal position (not to
1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit. lower the cleaner unit side) until it is installed on the
2) Remove the cleaner unit. machine.
3) Remove the transfer guide plate left unit. * Be sure not to allow strontium titanate to spread inside the
4) Remove the parts. cleaner unit.

[Bottom surface]

Cleaner unit
CL roller side side

[Figure 1]

5) Fold the CL section of the transfer frame and remove the inter- [Figure 3]
mediate transfer belt.

Apply strontium titanate all the way

beyond the boss.
[Figure 2]

12
34
5A
B-
67 [Number of times of application]
Apply uniformly.

* When installing, set the lot number inside the belt to the front
side.
[Precautions for installation] Turn the unit over by lifting the
When replacing the belt, make sure not to scratch or fold it. cleaner unit side.
Do not touch the surface of the belt with bare hands.
(Applying the start powder)
1) Install the primary transfer unit, laying it on the top surface.
* Make sure that the pressure on the CL roller has been
released.
2) Apply the side seal powder (stearic acid) uniformly on the sur- Cleaner
CL roller side
unit side
face of the belt (Figure 1).
* Apply the side seal powder uniformly on half of the surfaces
[Never lower the cleaner unit side.]
on both sides of the belt.
* Rub the belt with a cloth bag containing the side seal powder
so that the powder will be applied onto the belt.
3) Turn the belt a 1/4 turn. (For the direction of the turn, see Fig-
ure 3.)
4) Apply strontium titanate uniformly on the surface of the belt.
* Apply strontium titanate evenly on the surface of the belt.
* Apply 20 times (5 times transversally x 4 times longitudinally,
see Figure 2).

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 4

b. Primary transfer CL roller 3) Remove the transfer guide plate, and remove the intermediate
1) Remove the primary transfer unit. transfer blade.
2) Remove the transfer guide plate left unit. * When installing, apply stearic acid onto the intermediate
transfer blade (A).
* Check the cleaner seal (B) and cleaner seal R (C). If any of
them is laid on the blade, replace it. (See step m for the
cleaner seal and step n for the cleaner seal R respectively.)

3) Remove the screw, and remove the primary transfer CL roller C

installation plate unit.
Remove the waste toner drive motor from the waste toner
drive unit.

d. Primary transfer roller

e. Primary transfer conduction collar

f. Y auxiliary roller
1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2) Remove the cleaner unit.
3) Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
4) Disengage the engagement on the front side, and remove the
primary transfer roller (A) and the primary transfer conduction
* After assembling, check to confirm that it is not set at the collar (B). Remove the Y auxiliary roller (C).
pressure release position.
A
1
A
A
A
3
C
2
B
B
B
B

g. Belt drive gear

c. Intermediate transfer blade
1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
1) Remove the primary transfer unit, and put it upside down.
2) Remove the cleaner unit.
2) Remove the cleaner unit.
3) Remove the screws, and remove the belt drive gear.

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 5

h. Transfer drive roller l. Registration backup roller
1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit. 1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2) Remove the cleaner unit. 2) Remove the cleaner unit.
3) Remove the intermediate transfer belt. 3) Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
4) Clean the transfer drive roller. 4) Check the registration backup roller.

i. Transfer follower roller

m. Cleaner seal
j. Tension roller
n. Cleaner seal R
1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2) Remove the cleaner unit.
2) Remove the cleaner unit.
3) Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
3) Remove the cleaner seal (A) and the cleaner seal R (B).
4) Clean the trasnfer follower roller (A) and the tension roller (B).
B

B A

* When attaching the seals, position the seals within the spec-
A ified ranges, referring to the reference lines as indicated
below.

k. Roller cleaning brush 0 - 0.3mm

1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.

2) Remove the cleaner unit.
Reference line
3) Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
4) Check the roller CL brush.

0 - 0.3mm 0 - 0.3mm

Reference line Reference line

o. Transfer toner reception seal

1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2) Remove the cleaner unit.
3) Remove the transfer toner reception seal.

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 6

 * When attaching the transfer toner reception seal, position (1) Secondary transfer unit
the seal within the specified ranges, referring to the refer- 1) Open the right door unit.
ence lines as indicated below.

Reference line

0 - 0.3mm

Reference line
2
0 - 0.3mm
1

(2) Others
2) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
a. Transfer belt separation CL detection

b. Transfer belt separation BK detection 3

1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2) Remove the developing unit.
3) Remove the drum unit.
4) Check the transfer belt separation CL detection (A) and the
transfer belt separation BK detection (B). 1

3
B
A

a. Secondary trasnfer idle gear

b. Secondary belt follower roller

c. Secondary transfer belt

B. Secondary transfer 1) Remove the secondary trasnfer unit.
2) Remove each parts, and remove the secondary drive plate.
(1)-f
Remove each parts, and remove the idle gear (A).
(1)-c

(1)-a
(1)-e 3

(1)-g

(1)-d (1)
1
(1)-b
A
Unit Parts Maintenance
(1) Secondary a Secondary transfer idle gear ✕▲
transfer unit b Secondary belt follower roller ✕{
c Secondary transfer belt ✕▲
d Secondary transfer roller ✕▲
e Secondary trasnfer belt drive ✕{
roller
f Roller cleaning brush ✕
g Secondary belt tension roller ✕{

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 7

3) Remove the secondary belt transfer frame. e. Secondary belt drive roller
1) Remove the secondary trasnfer unit.
2) Remove the secondary transfer belt.
3) Remove each parts, then remove the secondary belt drive
roller.

4) Remove each parts, and remove the secondary follower roller.

1
f. Roller cleaning brush
1) Remove the secondary trasnfer unit.
2) Remove the secondary transfer belt.
3) Remove the secondary belt drive roller.
2 4) Remove the roller CL brush.

5) Remove the secondary transfer belt.

g. Secondary belt tension roller

1) Remove the secondary transfer belt.
2) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary belt tension
roller.

d. Secondary transfer roller

1) Remove the secondary trasnfer unit. 1
2) Remove the secondary transfer belt. 2
3) Remove the bearing on the front side, and remove the second-
ary transfer roller.

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 8

4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply, When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
No. Parts name Block/Item No. (Only
mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
the replacement parts
parts
are described.)
1 Intermediate Mechanism ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [26]-3)
transfer belt parts
2 Primary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [27]-9)
roller (P/G No.: [28]-27)
3 Intermediate ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [25]-19)
transfer blade
4 Belt drive gear ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [27]-13)
5 Primary transfer ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [27]-8)
conduction collar (P/G No.: [28]-25)
6 Transfer drive roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
7 Transfer follower { { { { { { { { { { { {
roller
8 Tension roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
9 Belt CL brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
10 Y auxiliary roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
11 Registration ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
backup roller
12 Secondary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [30]-21)
belt
13 Secondary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [30]-6)
roller
14 Secondary belt ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ {
drive roller
15 Secondary belt ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ {
tension roller
16 Secondary belt ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ { ✕ ✕ {
follower roller
17 Secondary transfer ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [29]-6)
idle gear
18 Primary CL roller ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [26]-56)
19 Cleaner seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
20 Cleaner seal R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
21 Transfer toner ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
reception seal

19 20
3
8
7 4
10
21
17
5

19
11 12

2 9
14
6
13
15
16

18 8 9 11 3
14

15
13,17
16
4,6
7 10 2,5

MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 9

[M] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCNSENSOR SECTION


1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

DF11-6DP-SP1
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
1
5
6
2
3
4

CN17
24V3 16 15 24V3 15 2 /PCSS 2
/PCSS 17 14 /PCSS 14 1 24V3 1
R SM2P P

REGS_R_LED# 24 13 REGS_R_LED# 13 4 5VNPD

REGS_R 26 12 REGS_R 12 3 D-GND
REGS_R
D-GND 27 11 D-GND 11 2 REGS_R
PCU PWB

5VNPD 23 10 5VNPD 10 1 REGS_R_LED#

RESI SENSOR R PCSS
PCS_LED# 18 9 PCS_LED# 9 5 5VNPD
PCS_CL 19 8 PCS_CL 8 4 D-GND PCS_CL/K
PCS_K 21 7 PCS_K 7 3 PCS_K
D-GND 28 6 D-GND 6 2 PCS_CL
5 5VNPD 5 1 PCS_LED#
PROCON SENSOR

REGS_F_LED# 22 4 REGS_F_LED# 4 4 5VNPD REGS_F

REGS_F 20 3 REGS_F 3 3 D-GND
D-GND 25 2 D-GND 2 2 REGS_F
B32B-PHDSS-B 1 5VNPD 1 1 REGS_F_LED#
R SM18P P RESI SENSOR F

Signal name Name Function/Operation

PCS_CL/K Process control sensor Detects the toner patch density.
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration sensor.
REGS_F/R Resist sensor Detects the resist shift.

2. Operational descriptions
A. Process control sensor control
The shutter is provided on the monochrome (PCS_K) and color
(PCS_CL) process control sensor. When the shutter is opened (the
image density is corrected), the toner patch formed on the transfer
belt is scanned by the process control sensor and the information is
passed to the PCU.
When the shutter is closed, the gray resin section on the back of
the shutter is scanned to perform calibration of the sensor itself.
The shutter operation is controlled by the process control shutter
solenoid (PCSS).

B. Registration sensor control

The registration sensor is attached to the F side (REGS_F) and the
R side (REGS_R). When the shutter is opened, the registration
image formed on the transfer belt is scanned by the sensor and the
information is passed to the PCU.

MX-2300/2700 N/G PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR SECTION M – 1

3. Disassembly and assembly a. Resist sensor

A. Process control sensor, registration sensor b. Process control sensor

section 1) Remove the process control sensor unit.
2) Push up the shutter operation plate, and clean the registration
sensor (A) and the process control sensor (B).
(1)-c
(1)-a A
B
(1)-b A

(1)
(1)-a

Unit Parts Maintenance

(1) Process a Resist sensor ✕{ c. Process control shutter solenoid
control b Process control sensor ✕{
sensor unit
1) Remove the process control sensor unit.
c Process control shutter
solenoid 2) Remove the screw, slide the sensor mounting stay, and
remove the sensor mounting stay.
(1) Process control sensor unit
1) Remove the developing unit (K).
2) Remove the drum unit (K).
3) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
4) Remove the paper feed tray 1.
5) Remove the rear cabinet.
6) Remove the ADU connection drive.
7) Remove the resist roller unit.
8) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws. Release the
pawl, then remove the process control sensor.

3) Remove the screws. Disconnect the connector, and remove

the process control shutter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the process control shutter solenoid
with the groove in the shutter mounting plate (A).

MX-2300/2700 N/G PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR SECTION M – 2

4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide. Block/
supply, When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
No. Parts name Item No. (Only the
mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
replacement parts are
parts
described.)
18 Sensors Mechanism ✕ { { { { { { { { { { { {
(Process parts
control resist
sensors)

18

MX-2300/2700 N/G PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR SECTION M – 3

[N] FUSING SECTION
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

DF11-4DP-SP1(PASTEL)
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
1
2
3
4

R SM18PIN P
16 TH_UMCS_IN 16
CN9 CN34
15 D-GND 15 26 D-GND INT24V1 1
D-GND 3
14 TH_LM_IN 14 29 TH_LM_IN HLOUT_LM 11
HLOUT_US 9
13 TH_US_IN 13 27 TH_US_IN HLOUT_UM 7
30 TH_UMCS_IN /HLPR 5
12 TH_UM_IN 12 25 TH_UM_IN B40B-PADSS-B
B30B-PHDSS-B
PCU PWB
CN3
2 N-HL(LOW)
3 N-HL(SUB) CN4
1 L-HL(COM) /HLPR 1
B03P-VL-R HLOUT_UM 2
HL PWB HLOUT_US 3
CN2 HLOUT_LM 4
3 L-HL(COM) D-GND 5
2 L-HL(COM) INT24V1 6
1 N-HL(MAIN) B6P-PH-K-S
B03P-VL-K
4
5

6
7
8
9
1

3
6

2
5

1
4
TH_UMCS_IN
DRAWER RWZ

N-HL(LOW)

N-HL(MAIN)
L-HL(COM)

L-HL(COM)
N-HL(SUB)

L-HL(COM)
TH_LM_IN

TH_US_IN

TH_UM_IN
D-GND

D-GND
6 D-GND
5

4
3
2
1
9

3
6

2
5

1
4

PHNR-4-H + PHNR-3-H +
BU04P-TR-P-H BU03P-TR-P-H

FUM
2
1

2
1

3
1
2

1
TH_UMCS_IN
TH_LM_IN

TH_US_IN

TH_UM_IN
D-GND

D-GND

D-GND

PHNR-2-H +
1
2

3
4

1
3
2

BU02P-TR-P-H

HLTS1
RTH1

HLTS2
RTH2 2

HLTS3
HL_UM
2
HL_US RTH3 3
HL_LM

Signal name Name Function/Operation

RTH1 Fusing temperature sensor (1) Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Center section)
RTH2 Fusing temperature sensor (2) Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Edge section)
HLTS1 Thermostat (1) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
HLTS2 Thermostat (2) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
HL_UM Heater lamp (1) Heats the fusing roller (heating).

MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 1

 Signal name Name Function/Operation
HL_US Heater lamp (2) Heats the fusing roller (heating).
RTH3 Fusing temperature sensor (3) Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating).
HLTS3 Thermostat (3) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
HL_LM Heater lamp (3) Heats the fusing roller (heating).
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing unit.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Fusing roller (Heating) Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2 Pawl Paper which was not separated naturally from the fusing roller (heating) is mechanically separated.
3 Fusing roller (pressing) Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper.

2. Operational descriptions The upper and the lower heat rollers are provided to heat from
above and below.
A. Fusing unit drive This is because it is necessary to heat four layers of toner from
To drive the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the above and below and right and left to fuse it on paper.
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat The upper and lower heat rollers are of silicon rubber.
roller gear. This is because of the following reasons:
The drive motor (stepping motor) is driven according to the control 1) To provide a greater nip quantity and a higher heating capacity
signal sent from the PCU. for paper.
2) The soft, flexible rollers press multi-layer toner without defor-
mation to fuse on paper.
PCU FUM 3) An even pressure is applied to an uneven surface of multi-
layer toner.

D. Fusing temperature control

B. Heater lamp drive
The temperature sensors are provided at the center and the edges
The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther- of the upper heat roller, and at the center of the lower heat roller.
mistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the
The heat roller temperature is detected by the temperature sensors
specified level, the heater lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU
to control the heater lamp so that the temperature is maintained at
to the heater lamp drive circuit in the sub power PWB.
the specified level.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
The fusing temperature is switched according to the machine con-
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
dition and paper type selected.
heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller, Fusing Fusing
Fusing
the thermostat is provided for safety. roller center roller
Mode Paper roller
When the thermostat is opened, power supply (AC line) to the (heating) (heating)
(pressing)
heater lamp is cut off. main sub
Ready state B/W normal 170 180 130
C. Fusing operation Print mode paper
Color toner of YMCK on paper is heated and pressed by the heat Color normal 170 180 130
paper
rollers to be fused on paper.
Heavy paper 170 175 140
At that time, color toner of YMCK is mixed to reproduce nearly OHP 170 170 145
actual colors of document images. Envelope 180 180 145

MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 2

3. Disassembly and assembly 2) Release the lock lever, and remove the fusing unit.

A. Fusing section

(1)-j
(1)-k
(1)-m 1

(1)-n (1)-l
(1)-i 1

(1)-k
(1)-m
(1)-c
(1)-a 2

(1)-a
a. Upper thermostat
(1)-b 1) Remove the fusing unit.
(1) 2) Remove the screws and the fusing upper cover.
(1)-g (1)-d
(1)-f

(1)-e

(1)-h

Unit Parts Maintenance

(1) Fusing unit a Upper thermostat
b Upper thermistor ✕▲
c Non-contact thermistor ✕
d Lower thermostat
e Lower thermistor ✕▲
f Upper heater lamp main 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the upper thermostat.
g Upper heater lamp sub
h Lower heater lamp
i Upper heat roller ✕▲
j Upper heat roller gear ✕▲
k Upper heat roller bearing ✕▲
l Lower heat roller gear ✕▲
m Lower heat roller bearing ✕▲
n Upper separation pawl ✕▲

(1) Fusing unit

1) Open the right door unit.

2 b. Upper thermistor
1) Remove the fusing unit.
1 2) Remove the screws and the fusing upper cover.

MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 3

3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the upper thermistor. e. Lower thermistor
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the fusing lower cover.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lower thermistor.

c. Non-contact thermistor
1) Remove the fusing upper cover.
2) Remove the screws, and remove the cover. Remove the con-
nector and the screws, then remove the non-contact ther-
mistor.
f. Upper heater lamp main

g. Upper heater lamp sub

1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Release the pressure release lever, and remove the fusing
upper cover F.

d. Lower thermostat
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the fusing lower cover. 2

3) Tilt the lock lever, and remove the fusing upper cover R.

3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lower thermostat.

4) Disconnect the connector.

MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 4

5) Remove the lamp holder, and remove the lamp. 4) Release the pressure.
* Since the connector shape on the front side differ from that 5) Open the fusing unit.
on the rear side, be careful when installing.
Install so that the red harness is on the rear side.

h. Lower heater lamp

1) Remove the fusing unit.
6) Remove the upper heat roller unit, and remove the parts.
2) Remove the fusing upper cover F.
3) Remove the fusing upper cover R.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lamp holder.

5) Remove the lower heater lamp.

* Since the connector shape on the front side differ from that
on the rear side, be careful when installing.
Install so that the red harness is on the rear side.

l. Lower heat roller gear

m. Lower heat roller bearing

1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the lower heater lamp.
3) Release the pressure, and open the fusing unit.
4) Remove the lower heat roller unit, and remove the parts

i. Upper heat roller

j. Upper heat roller gear

k. Upper heat roller bearing

1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the upper heater lamp.
3) Remove the fusing rear upper PG.

MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 5

n. Upper separation pawl
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the fusing rear upper PG.

3) Remove the spring, and remove the upper separation pawl.

MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 6

4. Maintenance
A. Fusing section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply, When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
No. Parts name Block/Item No. (Only
mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
the replacement parts
parts
are described.)
1 Upper heat roller Mechanism ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-32)
2 Lower heat roller parts ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [33]-15)
3 Upper heat roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-30)
gear
4 Upper roller bearing ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-31)
5 Lower heat roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [33]-14)
bearing
6 Upper separation ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-11)
pawl
7 Upper thermistor ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [32]-18)
8 Lower thermistor ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [33]-20)
9 Non-contact ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲
thermistor
10 Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Specified position
11 Paper guide { { { { { { { { { { { { {
12 Fusing unit ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [31]-901)
(P/G No.: [32]-901)
(P/G No.: [33]-901)

12 1

1
9 2

7
6 2
8

9 4

11
4

11
8

11

MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 7

[O] PAPER EXIT SECTION
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

DF11-4DP-SP1 DF11-8DP-SP2

4
1
2
3

4
2
8
6
1
3
7
5
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V

P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H P DF1B-26p S CN13
1 POFM_V 4 6 POFM_V 6 15 POFM_V
2 /POFM_CNT 3 7 /POFM_CNT 7 17 /POFM_CNT
3 P-GND 2 11 P-GND 11 19 P-GND
4 POFM_LD1 1 8 POFM_LD1 8 21 POFM_LD1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H 9 POFM_LD2 9 22 POFM_LD2
1 POFM_V 4
2 /POFM_CNT 3
3 P-GND 2
4 POFM_LD2 1

R SM6P P
5 24V2 5 1 24V2 1 24 24V2
1 /OSM_XB 1 2 /OSM_XB 2 7 /OSM_XB
2 /OSM_XA 2 3 /OSM_XA 3 9 /OSM_XA
3 /OSM_B 3 4 /OSM_B 4 11 /OSM_B
4 /OSM_A 4 5 /OSM_A 5 13 /OSM_A

5VNPD 3
TFD2 2 13 TFD2 13 10 TFD2
D-GND 1

5VNPD 1
POD2 2 14 POD2 14 12 POD2

TFD2 HOPS D-GND 3

5VNPD 1
HOPS 2 15 HOPS 15 16 HOPS
D-GND 3

5VNPD 1
POD1 2 16 POD1 16 14 POD1
D-GND 3 17 D-GND 17 2 D-GND
12 5VNPD 12 18 5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS-B

OSM
1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6
PCU PWB
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD

DF11-6DP-SP1 DF11-6DP-SP1

R SM-12p P CN6

POFM_R POM POMB/

INT24V1
6
5
12
11
POMB/
INT24V1
12
11
4
6
POMB/
INT24V1
3 POMA/ 4 10 POMA/ 10 1 POMA/
POMB// 3 9 POMB// 9 3 POMB//
POD2 INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1 8 5 INT24V1 DRIVER
POMA// 1 7 POMA// 7 2 POMA// MAIN
6 FUMA/ 6 7 FUMA/ PWB
FUMA/ 6 5 FUMB/ 5 10 FUMB/
FUMB/ 5 4 INT24V1 4 12 INT24V1
POD1 INT24V1 4 3 INT24V1 3 11 INT24V1
INT24V1 3 2 FUMA// 2 8 FUMA//
POFM_F FUM FUMA// 2 1 FUMB// 1 9 FUMB//
FUMB// 1 B12B-PH-K-S

Signal name Name Function/Operation

FUM Fusing drive motor Drives the fusing unit.
HOPS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
OSM Shifter motor Offsets the paper.
POD1 Fusing after detection After fusing, paper exit from fusing section is detected.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the exit paper.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects face-down paper exit tray full.

MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER EXIT SECTION O – 1

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Transport roller 9 (Drive)
2 Transport roller 13 (Drive)
3 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
Transports the paper from the fixing roller to the transport roller 13.
Paper transported from the transport roller 9 is transported to the paper exit roller 1. / Paper is
transported to the duplex (ADU) section.
Paper is discharged. / Paper is transported to the right paper exit tray. / Paper is transported to the
duplex (ADU) section.

2. Operational descriptions a. Exit paper full detection sensor

A. Paper exit section b. Shifter home position detection sensor

• Paper transported from the fusing section is passed to the trans- 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
port roller 13 which is driven by the paper exit drive motor and to
the paper exit roller 1, then discharged to the inner tray.
• When paper is discharged to the right tray, it is passed to the
paper exit roller 1 and the paper exit drive motor is reversely
rotated, and paper is passed over the ADU reverse gate and dis-
charged to the right tray.

3. Disassembly and assembly

A. Paper exit section

1 (1)-a (1)-b
(1)-c
(1)-e
(1)
(1)-f (1)-g c. Paper exit detection sensor
(1)-j
(1)-e
(1)-n d. After-fusing sensor
(1)-h 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
(1)-i 2) Paper exit sensor (A), after-fusing sensor (B)

(1)-n (1)-d
(1)-k
(1)-l

(1)-m
A

Unit Parts Maintenance

(1) Paper exit a Exit paper full detection sensor
unit b Shifter home position detection
sensor
c Paper exit detection sensor B
d After-fusing sensor
e Paper exit cooling fan motor
f Discharge brush ✕
e. Paper exit cooling fan motor
g Shifter motor
h Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) ✕{
1) Remove the paper exit unit.
i Fusing drive motor 2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
j Paper exit drive motor
k Transport roller 13 (Drive) ✕{
l Transport roller 9 (Drive) ✕{
m Discharge brush ✕
n Paper exit filter

(1) Paper exit unit

1) Remove the paper exit unit, and disconnect the connector.

MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER EXIT SECTION O – 2

3) Remove the paper exit cooling fan motor. 3) Remove the shifter motor.

h. Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)

1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
3) Remove the slide motor unit.
f. Discharge brush 4) Remove the parts. Slide the bearing, and remove the shifter
1) Remove the paper exit unit. unit.
2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
3) Remove the discharge grounding plate, and remove the dis-
charge brush. 4

3
1
1

2
2

5) Remove the parts, and remove the paper exit roller 1 (drive).

* Discharge brush attachment reference

When attaching the discharge brush, attach it along the
shifter PG.

g. Shifter motor
i. Fusing drive motor
1) Remove the paper exit unit.
1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Disconnect the connector and the grounding terminal, and
2) Remove the fusing drive motor.
remove the snap band. Remove the slide motor unit.

MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER EXIT SECTION O – 3

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

j. Paper exit drive motor m. Discharge brush

1
1) Remove the paper exit unit. 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Remove the paper exit drive motor. 2) Remove the discharge brush.

0㨪0.5mm
k. Transport roller 13 (Drive)
1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Remove the slide motor unit.
3) Remove the paper exit drive unit.
4) Remove the E-ring, the reverse drive belt, and the pulley. 0㨪0.5mm

* When attaching the discharge brush, attach it to the attachment

reference.

n. Paper exit filter

1) Open the right door.

5) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the transport 2
roller 13 (Drive).
1

2) Open the filter holding sheet, and remove the paper exit filter.

l. Transport roller 9 (Drive)

1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Remove the slide motor unit.
3) Remove the paper exit drive unit.
4) Remove the parts, and remove the transport roller 9 (Drive).

MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER EXIT SECTION O – 4

 1 : Dec. 15 2005

4. Maintenance
A. Paper exit section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark/Refer to
Monochrome the Parts Guide.
supply, When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Block/Item No.
No. Parts name
mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K (Only the
parts replacement parts
are described.)
1 Transport rollers Mechanism ✕ { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Discharge brush parts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
1 3 Paper exit filter

1 3

MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER EXIT SECTION O – 5

[P] DRIVE SECTION
MX2700N 3) Remove the flywheel.
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


* Installing sequence: (1) C o (2) KM o (3) KM (Each color is

marked.)
1. Disassembly and assembly * After installation, check to confirm that it is not in contact
A. Main drive section with the harness, etc.

(1)
(1)-a
(1)-a
(1)-a
(1)-h

(1)-a (1)-c

(1)-b (1)-e C

(1)-g
(1)-d
(1)-f
(1)-g KM
KM

Unit Parts 4) Remove the connectors.

(1) Main drive unit a Toner motor
b Developer drive motor (K)
c Developing drive motor (CL)
d Drum motor (K)
e Drum motor (CL)
f Resist motor
g Phase detection PWB
h Separation clutch

(1) Main drive unit

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Remove the screws, and open the control box.

5) Remove the screws, and remove the main drive unit.

* Hold section A and remove.

MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 1

a. Toner motor d. Drum motor (K)
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.) e. Drum motor (CL)

2) Open the control box. 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the toner
motor. 2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the drum
motor (K) and the drum motor (CL).

b. Developer drive motor (K)

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
B
Outfit Section.)
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
f. Resist motor
4) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the devel-
oper drive motor (K). 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the connctor and the screws, then remove the resist
motor.

c. Developing drive motor (CL)

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the devel- g. Phase detection PWB
oper drive motor (CL). 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
* When installing, tighten the screws in section (A). Outfit Section.)
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the screws, and remove the phase detection PWB.
Disconnect the connector.
A

MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 2

h. Separation clutch 4) Remove the connector and the screws. Release the pawl, then
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External remove the filter box unit.
Outfit Section.)
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the gear, and remove the separation clutch. Then dis-
connect the connector.
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation-stop
projection is engaged with the sub frame projection.

5) Remove the connector and remove the paper feed drive unit.

B. Paper feed drive section

(1)

(1)-a
(1)-d

(1)-f (1)-b

(1)-c a. Transport motor

(1)-e
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
(1)-c 2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the trans-
port motor.

Unit Parts
(1) Paper feed drive unit a Transport motor
b Paper feed motor
c Paper tray lift-up motor
d Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
e Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
f Tray vertical transport clutch

(1) Paper feed drive unit

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the connector, the screws and the grounding terminal,
then remove the driver main PWB unit.

MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 3

b. Paper feed motor d. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External 1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
Outfit Section.) 2) Remove the paper feed motor.
2) Open the control box. 3) Remove the paper feed drive unit.
3) Remove the driver main PWB unit. 4) Remove the connection gear 21T. Remove the screws to
4) Remove the filter box unit. detach the drive frame upper unit.
5) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the paper
feed motor.

5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch

unit.

c. Paper tray lift-up motor

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4) Remove the filter box unit.
5) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the paper
tray lift-up motor unit.

6) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.

6) Disengage the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling.

MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 4

e. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) f. Tray vertical transport clutch
1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit. 1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
2) Remove the paper feed motor. 2) Remove the paper feed motor.
3) Remove the paper feed drive unit. 3) Remove the paper feed drive unit.
4) Remove the connection gear 21T. Remove the screws to 4) Remove the connection gear 21T. Remove the screws to
detach the drive frame upper unit. detach the drive frame upper unit.

5) Remove the belt.

5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch

unit.

6) Remove the connector, then remove the tray vertical transfer

clutch unit.

6) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.

7) Remove the E-ring, then remove the tray vertical transfer

clutch.

MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 5

2. Maintenance
A. Drive Section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide. Block/
supply, When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
No. Parts name Item No. (Only the
mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
replacement parts
parts
are described.)
1 Gears (Gease) Mechanism ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking
parts HANARL FL955R/
FLOIL G313S, apply
to the necessary
positions. (Specified
positions)
2 Shaft Grounding ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply
Section to the necessary
(Conduction positions. (Specified
Grease) positions)
3 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕

1
(FLOIL G313S)

1
(HANARL FL955R)

MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 6

[Q] PWB SECTION
MX2700N (1) Control Box
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


a. BOOT ROM PWB

1. Disassembly and assembly
b. PROGRAM ROM PWB
A. PWB 1) Remove the right rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screws and pull out the MFP cnt PWB unit.

(3)-a
(3)-b (3)-c

(3)-e
(3)-d

(3)-i

(3)-g

(3)-h

(2)-a
(2)-b

* When placing the unit with the HDD upside, remove the
(3)-f DIMM memory or insert a spacer in order to protect the
DIMM memory from pressure.
(1)-g * Insertion position and insertion procedure when removing
(1)-e the DIMM memory.
(1)-f

(1)-d (1)-h
(1)-c DIMM3
(1)-a
(1)-b DIMM2
DIMM4

DIMM1

Unit Parts
(1) Control Box a BOOT ROM PWB
b PROGRAM ROM PWB
c MFP cht PWB
d HDD
e PCU Flash ROM PWB
f PCU PWB
g SCAN IN PWB MX-2300/2700 G MX-2300/2700 N
h Mother PWB DIMM1 Option (256MB) —
(2) Power supply unit a AC Power PWB DIMM2 256MB 512MB
b DC Power PWB DIMM3 512MB 512MB
(3) Others a SCN Flash ROM PWB DIMM4 256MB 256MB
b Scanner Control PWB
c HL PWB
d Driver Sub PWB
e Secondary transfer PWB
f Driver Main PWB
g Primary transfer PWB
h High Voltage MC PWB
i HVR PWB

MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 1

<1> Press the section (B) of the memory PWB with both 3) Release the lock, and remove the BOOT ROM PWB (A) and
hands. the PROGRAM ROM PWB (B).
* When handling the memory PWB, do not touch the
pins.
* Insert temporally and straightly until it is in contact with
the contact.
2 A 1

c. MFP cnt PWB

1) Remove the right rear cabinet.
2) Remove the BOOT ROM PWB and the PROGRAM ROM
* When inserting, be careful not to insert the memory PWB.
PWB obliquely to the connector. Do not press the 3) Remove the screws and then remove the MFP cnt PWB.
memory PWB pins with one hand.

<2> Press the section (B) of the memory PWB with both
d. HDD
hands simultaneously until the right and the left buttons
are locked. 1) Remove the right rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screws and pull out the MFP cnt PWB unit.
3) Remove the connector and screws then remove the HDD unit.

MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 2

4) Remove the screws, and remove the angle from HDD. f. PCU PWB
* Since the HDD is weak in shock, avoid hitting the corner, 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
dropping, or other shocks. 2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the PCU
PWB.

e. PCU Flash ROM PWB

1) Remove the screws, and remove the rear cabinet cover.
g. SCAN IN PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
1 2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the
SCAN IN PWB.

2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.

h. Mother PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
1 2) Remove the SCAN IN PWB.
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the
mother PWB.

1
2

MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 3

(2) Power supply unit 4) Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the AC
power PWB unit.
a. AC Power PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the AC
power PWB.

5) Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the DC

power PWB.
b. DC Power PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Open the control box.

(3) Others

a. SCN Flash ROM PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB.

3) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the filter
box unit.

2
1

MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 4

b. Scanner Control PWB d. Driver Sub PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screws, and pull out the scanner control PWB 2) Remove the screws, and remove the driver sub PWB.
unit. Then remove the connector.

3) Remove the screws, and remove the scanner control PWB. e. Secondary transfer PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the sec-
ondary transfer PWB.

c. HL PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the HL
PWB. f. Driver Main PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the driver
main PWB.

MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 5

g. Primary transfer PWB 4) Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the pri-
1) Remove the rear cabinet. mary transfer PWB unit.
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the pri-
mary transfer PWB.

5) Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the MC

PWB.

h. MC PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the screws, then remove the fly wheel.
* Installing sequence: (1) C o (2) KM o (3) KM (Each color is
marked.)
* After installation, check to confirm that it is not in contact
with the harness, etc.

i. HVR PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the HVR
PWB.

KM
KM

MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 6

[R] FAN AND FILTER SECTION
MX2700N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Disassembly and assembly B. Fans

A. Filters

(2)
(1)

(4)
(3)

(1)

Parts Maintenance
(1) Controler cooling fan motor
Parts Maintenance (2) HDD cooling fan motor
(1) Ozone Filter ✕▲ (3) Ozone fan motor
(4) Power supply cooling fan motor
(1) Ozone Filter
1) Remove the ozone filter cover, then remove the ozone filter. (1) CPU cooling fan motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Remove the connector. Remove the screws, and remove the
MFP PWB shield upper. Remove the screws, and remove the
CPU cooling fan motor.
* When installing, fit the arrow mark on the MFP PWB shield
and the arrow mark of the CPU cooling fan motor.

3
1

MX-2300/2700 N/G FAN AND FILTER SECTION R – 1

(2) HDD cooling fan motor 4) Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the ozone
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External fan motor from the filter box unit.
Outfit Section.)
2) Open the control box.

(4) Power supply cooling fan

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the HDD
2) Open the control box.
cooling fan motor.
3) Remove the filter box unit.
4) Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the power
supply cooling fan.

(3) Ozone fan motor

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the filter box unit.

MX-2300/2700 N/G FAN AND FILTER SECTION R – 2

2. Maintenance
A. Filters
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate †: Shif the position.

Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome Parts Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
No. Parts name supply, Block/Item No. (Only
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
mechanical parts the replacement parts
are described.)
1 Ozone filter PA ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [47]-40)

MX-2300/2700 N/G FAN AND FILTER SECTION R – 3

[S] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
MX2700N 3) Remove the screws, then remove the main switch unit.
5GTXKEG/CPWCN


1. Disassembly and assembly

A. Sensors, Switches

4) Remove the connector and the pawl, then remove the main
switch.
(4)
* Take care of connecting the connectors when installing.
(2)

(1)
3
(3)
3

2
R

Parts
(1) Main Switch F
(2) Dehumidifier Heater Switch
(3) Front Door Open/Close Switch
(4) Right Door Open/Close Switch

(1) Main Switch

1) Remove the front cabinet. (Refer to Front Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Remove the screws, and remove the frame cover.

MX-2300/2700 N/G SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION S – 1

(2) Dehumidifier Heater Switch (4) Right Door Open/Close Switch
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
Outfit Section.) 2) Open the control box.
2) Disconnect the connector. Release the pawl, and remove the 3) Open the right door unit.
dehumidifier heater switch.
4) Remove the resist roller unit.
5) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the right
2 door open/close switch cover unit.
3

6) Remove the right door open/close switch.

(3) Front Door Open/Close Switch

1) Remove the frame cover. (Refer to Frame Cover in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Remove the screws and then remove the front door open/
close switch unit.
Remove the connector and the screws and then remove the
front door open/close switch.

2
3

MX-2300/2700 N/G SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION S – 2

Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.

Example:

<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>

Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
i
n
s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag

(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable.

(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about 40°C higherCORPORATION
than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black stored in a retrieval
during soldering work,system, orfile
clean and transmitted
the tip within
steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
 CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.

“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
 COPYRIGHT © 2006 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft® Windows® operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• Windows® 95, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000,
Windows® XP, Windows® 2000 Server, Windows® Server 2003 and
Internet Explorer® are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
• IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2006 January Printed in Japan